OPERATOR'S MANUAL

CHART RADAR
FAR-3210
FAR-3220
FAR-3220-NXT
FAR-3230S
FAR-3230S-SSD
FAR-3310
FAR-3320
FAR-3320-NXT
FAR-3330S
FAR-3330S-SSD
FAR-3320W
FAR-3330SW
FAR-3210-BB
FAR-3220-BB
FAR-3220-NXT-BB
FAR-3230S-BB
FAR-3230S-SSD-BB
FAR-3220W-BB
Model FAR-3230SW-BB
(Product Name: MARINE RADAR)

www.furuno.com
 ・FURUNO Authorized Distributor/Dealer

9-52 Ashihara-cho,
Nishinomiya, 662-8580, JAPAN

All rights reserved. Printed in Japan A : NOV . 2021

B9 : FEB . 29, 2024
Pub. No. OME-36162-B9
(REFU ) FAR-3000series

0 0 0 1 9 9 3 5 6 1 1
IMPORTANT NOTICES
General
• This manual has been authored with simplified grammar, to meet the needs of international users.
• The operator of this equipment must read and follow the instructions in this manual.
Wrong operation or maintenance can void the warranty or cause injury.
• Do not copy any part of this manual without written permission from FURUNO.
• If this manual is lost or worn, contact your dealer about replacement.
• The contents of this manual and the equipment specifications can change without notice.
• The example screens (or illustrations) shown in this manual can be different from the screens you
see on your display. The screens you see depend on your system configuration and equipment
settings.
• Save this manual for future reference.
• Any modification of the equipment (including software) by persons not authorized by FURUNO will
void the warranty.
• The following concern acts as our importer in Europe, as defined in DECISION No 768/2008/EC.
- Name: FURUNO EUROPE B.V.
- Address: Siriusstraat 86, 5015 BT, Tilburg, The Netherlands
• The following concern acts as our importer in UK, as defined in SI 2016/1025 as amended SI 2019/
470.
- Name: FURUNO (UK) LTD.
- Address: West Building Penner Road Havant Hampshire PO9 1QY, U.K.
• All brand, product names, trademarks, registered trademarks, and service marks belong to their
respective holders.
• Windows is a registered trademark of the Microsoft Corporation of the USA and other countries.
• InstantAccess bar is a trademark of FURUNO Electric Co., Ltd.
How to discard this product
Discard this product according to local regulations for the disposal of industrial waste. For disposal in
the USA, see the homepage of the Electronics Industries Alliance (http://www.eiae.org/) for the
correct method of disposal.
How to discard a used battery
Some FURUNO products have a battery(ies). To see if your product has a battery, see the chapter
on Maintenance. If a battery is used, tape the + and - terminals of the battery before disposal to pre-
vent fire, heat generation caused by short circuit.
In the European Union
The crossed-out trash can symbol indicates that all types of batteries
must not be discarded in standard trash, or at a trash site. Take the
used batteries to a battery collection site according to your national
legislation and the Batteries Directive 2006/66/EU. Cd
In the USA
The Mobius loop symbol (three chasing arrows) indicates that
Ni-Cd and lead-acid rechargeable batteries must be recycled.
Take the used batteries to a battery collection site according to
local laws. Ni-Cd Pb
In the other countries
There are no international standards for the battery recycle symbol. The number of symbols can in-
crease when the other countries make their own recycle symbols in the future.

i
 SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS
The operator must read the safety instructions before attempting to operate the equipment.

WARNING Indicates a potentially hazardous situation which, if not avoided,

could result in death or serious injury.

Indicates a potentially hazardous situation which, if not avoided,

CAUTION could result in minor or moderate injury.

Warning, Caution Prohibitive Action Mandatory Action

WARNING
Radio Frequency Radiation Hazard
The radar antenna emits electromagnetic radio frequency (RF) energy that can be harmful,
particularly to your eyes. Never look directly into the antenna aperture from a close distance
while the radar is in operation or expose yourself to the transmitting antenna at a close
distance. Distances at which RF radiation level of 100, 50 and 10 W/m2 are given in the table
below.

Magnetron radar
Radar model Transceiver Magnetron Antenna 100W/m2 50W/m2 10W/m2
FAR-3210/ RTR-105 FNE1201 XN12CF 0.6 m 1.4 m 4.4 m
FAR-3310/ XN20CF 0.4 m 0.9 m 3.0 m
FAR-3210-BB
XN24CF 0.3 m 0.6 m 2.5 m
FAR-3220/ RTR-106 MG5436 XN12CF 1.3 m 2.7 m 9.5 m
FAR-3320/ XN20CF 1.0 m 1.7 m 6.8 m
FAR-3220-BB
XN24CF 0.7 m 1.3 m 5.5 m
FAR-3320W/ RTR-108 MG5436 XN20CF 0.5 m 1.2 m 5.5 m
FAR-3220W-BB XN24CF 0.3 m 0.9 m 4.0 m
FAR-3230S/ RTR-107 MG5223F XN24CF 1.7 m 2.4 m 3.8 m
FAR-3330S/ XN30CF 1.4 m 2.1 m 3.4 m
FAR-3230S-BB SN36CF N/A 0.5 m 4.6 m
FAR-3330SW/ RTR-109 MG5223F SN36CF N/A 0.26 m 2.3 m
FAR-3230SW-BB

Solid state radar

Radar model Transceiver Antenna 100W/m2 50W/m2 10W/m2
FAR-3230S-SSD/ RTR-111 SN24CF N/A N/A N/A
FAR-3330S-SSD/ SN30CF N/A N/A N/A
FAR-3230S-SSD-BB
SN36CF N/A N/A 1.0 m

FAR-3220-NXT/ RTR-123 XN12CF 0.3 m 0.7 m 3.3 m

FAR-3320-NXT/ XN20CF 0.24 m 0.32 m 1.9 m
FAR-3220-NXT-BB XN24CF 0.19 m 0.29 m 1.6 m

ii
 SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS

WARNING WARNING
Do not open the equipment. Do not operate the equipment with
wet hands.
The equipment uses high voltage that
can cause electrical shock. Refer any Electrical shock can result.
repair work to a qualified technician.
Keep objects away from the open-
Before turning on the radar, be sure type antenna unit, so as not to
no one is near the antenna. impede rotation of the antenna.

Prevent the potential risk of being Fire, electrical shock or serious injury
struck by the rotating antenna, which can result.
can result in serious injury or death.
Use the proper fuse.
If water leaks into the equipment or
something is dropped into the Use of the wrong fuse can cause fire or
equipment, immediately turn off the damage the equipment.
WARNING
power at the switchboard.
The TT function is a valuable aid to
Fire or electrical shock can result. navigation. However, the navigator
must check all aids available to
If the equipment is giving off smoke avoid collision.
or fire, immediately turn off the
power at the switchboard. - The TT automatically tracks an
automatically or manually acquired
Fire or electrical shock can result. radar target and calculates its course
and speed, indicating them with a
If you feel the equipment is acting vector. Since the data generated by
abnormally or giving off strange the TT depends on the selected radar
noises, immediately turn off the targets, the radar must be optimally
power at the switchboard and tuned for use with the TT, to ensure
contact a FURUNO service techni- required targets will not be lost or
cian. unnecessary targets, like sea returns
and noise, will not be acquired and
Do not disassemble or modify the tracked.
equipment.
- A target is not always a landmass,
Fire, electrical shock or serious injury reef, ship, but can also be returns
can result. from the sea surface and from clutter.
As the level of clutter changes with
Make sure no rain or water splash the environment, the operator must
leaks into the equipment. correctly adjust the sea and rain
clutter controls and the gain control so
Fire or electrical shock can result if that the target echoes do not dis-
water leaks into the equipment. appear from the radar screen.

Do not place liquid-filled containers

on or near the equipment.

Fire or electrical shock can result if a

liquid spills into the equipment.

iii
SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS

Warning Label(s)
CAUTION
CAUTIO Warning label(s) is(are) attached to the
equipment. Do not remove the label(s). If a
The plotting accuracy and response of this label is missing or damaged, contact a
TT meets IMO standards. Tracking accuracy FURUNO agent or dealer about replacement.
is affected by the following:
•
Tracking accuracy is affected by course WARNING Name: Warning Label 1
change. One to two minutes is required to To avoid electrical shock, do not Type: 86-003-1011-3
restore vectors to full accuracy after an
remove cover. No user-serviceable Code No.: 100-236-233-10
parts inside.
abrupt course change. (The actual amount
depends on gyrocompass specifications.)
•
The amount of tracking delay is inversely
proportional to the relative speed of the
target. Delay is approx. 15-30 seconds for WARNING Name: Warning Sticker
the higher relative speed; approx. 30-60 Radiation hazard. Only qualified
personnel should work inside scanner.
Type: 03-142-3201-0
seconds for the lower relative speed. The Confirm that TX has stopped before
opening scanner.
Code No.: 100-266-890
following factors can affect accuracy:
- Echo intensity
- Radar transmission pulse length
- Radar bearing error
- Gyrocompass error
- Course change (own ship and targets)

Handle the LCD carefully.

The LCD is made of glass, which can

cause injury if broken.

The data presented by this equipment

is intended as a source of navigation
information.

The prudent navigator never relies

exclusively on any one source of
navigation information, for safety of
vessel and crew.

iv
TABLE OF CONTENTS
FOREWORD ............................................................................................................... xviii
SYSTEM CONFIGURATIONS..................................................................................... xxii

1. OPERATIONAL OVERVIEW .................................................................................1-1

1.1 Radar Control Unit RCU-025......................................................................................1-1
1.1.1 Radar Control Unit RCU-025 description .......................................................1-1
1.1.2 Operator fitness ..............................................................................................1-3
1.2 Trackball Control Unit RCU-026 .................................................................................1-4
1.2.1 Trackball Control Unit RCU-026 description ..................................................1-4
1.2.2 Operator fitness ..............................................................................................1-4
1.3 Processor Unit EC-3000.............................................................................................1-5
1.4 How to Turn the System On/Off .................................................................................1-6
1.5 How to Select a Color Palette.....................................................................................1-7
1.6 How to Adjust the Display Brilliance, Control Unit Backlighting..................................1-8
1.6.1 Manual brilliance adjustment..........................................................................1-8
1.6.2 Control unit backlighting .................................................................................1-9
1.7 Display Modes ..........................................................................................................1-10
1.7.1 How to select a display mode.......................................................................1-10
1.7.2 Limitations when using the chart radar mode...............................................1-10
1.7.3 Limitations when using Back-up ECDIS mode.............................................1-10
1.8 Display Screens........................................................................................................1-11
1.8.1 Radar display ...............................................................................................1-11
1.8.2 Chart radar display .......................................................................................1-13
1.8.3 Chart display ................................................................................................1-14
1.9 Status Bar.................................................................................................................1-15
1.9.1 Status bar for radar, chart radar mode .........................................................1-15
1.9.2 How to operate the buttons, slider bars on the Status bar ...........................1-16
1.10 InstantAccess Bar™ ..................................................................................................1-17
1.10.1 How to operate the buttons, slider bars on the InstantAccess bar™ ............1-19
1.11 Sensor Information, Datum Box ...............................................................................1-20
1.12 Menu Overview.........................................................................................................1-21
1.12.1 Basic menu operation...................................................................................1-21
1.12.2 Menu history feature.....................................................................................1-22
1.12.3 How to enter numeric data ...........................................................................1-23
1.12.4 How to enter alphanumeric character data ..................................................1-23
1.13 Context-Sensitive Menus in the Radar Mode ...........................................................1-24
1.13.1 Context-sensitive menus available with buttons and boxes .........................1-24
1.13.2 Context-sensitive menus in the display area in the radar and chart radar
modes...........................................................................................................1-26
1.14 Cursor Position .........................................................................................................1-27
1.15 How to Select Sensor Settings .................................................................................1-27
1.16 How to Enter Ship Speed .........................................................................................1-28
1.17 How to Enter Heading ..............................................................................................1-30
1.18 How to Mark MOB Position ......................................................................................1-31
1.19 How to Offset Position ..............................................................................................1-32
1.20 How to Select Time Format, Set Local Time ............................................................1-32
1.21 How to Take a Screenshot of the Display ................................................................1-33
1.22 The Settings Menu ...................................................................................................1-33
1.23 User Profiles for Radar, Chart Radar .......................................................................1-33
1.23.1 How to create a profile .................................................................................1-33
1.23.2 How to disable a profile ................................................................................1-33
1.23.3 How to activate a profile ...............................................................................1-34

v
TABLE OF CONTENTS

1.23.4 How to restore a profile to the default settings............................................. 1-34

1.23.5 How to change the settings on the current display to the recommended
settings......................................................................................................... 1-34
1.24 How to View Chart Software Version No., Chart System Information, and
Operator's Manual.................................................................................................... 1-37
1.25 Tips (operational guidance) ..................................................................................... 1-38
1.26 Printer Information.................................................................................................... 1-38

2. RADAR, CHART RADAR OPERATION................................................................2-1

2.1 How to Transmit ......................................................................................................... 2-1
2.2 How to Tune the Radar Receiver............................................................................... 2-1
2.2.1 Tuning for magnetron radar ........................................................................... 2-1
2.3 Pulse Length .............................................................................................................. 2-2
2.3.1 How to select a pulse length .......................................................................... 2-2
2.3.2 How to change the pulse length..................................................................... 2-3
2.4 How to Adjust the Sensitivity...................................................................................... 2-3
2.5 How to Suppress Sea Clutter..................................................................................... 2-3
2.5.1 How to reduce sea clutter automatically ........................................................ 2-4
2.5.2 How to reduce sea clutter manually ............................................................... 2-4
2.5.3 How to use the BERTHING STC function...................................................... 2-5
2.6 How to Suppress Rain Clutter.................................................................................... 2-5
2.6.1 How to reduce rain clutter automatically ........................................................ 2-5
2.6.2 How to reduce rain clutter manually............................................................... 2-6
2.7 Interference Rejector.................................................................................................. 2-7
2.8 Echo Stretch............................................................................................................... 2-8
2.9 Echo Averaging.......................................................................................................... 2-8
2.10 Automatic Clutter Elimination (ACE) Function ........................................................... 2-9
2.10.1 How to turn the Automatic Clutter Elimination (ACE) function on/off ............. 2-9
2.10.2 How to adjust the gain in the Automatic Clutter Elimination (ACE) mode...... 2-9
2.10.3 Automatic Clutter Elimination (ACE) menu .................................................... 2-9
2.10.4 How to get the high sensitivity...................................................................... 2-10
2.10.5 How to suppress the false echoes ............................................................... 2-10
2.11 Noise Rejector.......................................................................................................... 2-11
2.12 Wiper........................................................................................................................ 2-11
2.13 How to Preset Controls for Specific Navigation Purpose ......................................... 2-12
2.13.1 How to select a customized echo................................................................. 2-14
2.13.2 How to edit a customized echo .................................................................... 2-15
2.13.3 How to restore a user customized echo to the saved settings..................... 2-17
2.13.4 How to restore a user customized echo to the factory default settings........ 2-17
2.14 How to Suppress Second-trace Echoes .................................................................. 2-17
2.15 Presentation Modes ................................................................................................. 2-18
2.15.1 How to select a presentation mode.............................................................. 2-18
2.15.2 Description of presentation modes............................................................... 2-19
2.15.3 How to reset the course-up automatically .................................................... 2-21
2.15.4 How to scroll the display in true motion mode (B-type only) ........................ 2-21
2.16 How to Select the Range Scale ............................................................................... 2-21
2.17 How to Measure the Range to a Target ................................................................... 2-22
2.17.1 How to measure the range by using a VRM ................................................ 2-22
2.17.2 How to set VRM attributes ........................................................................... 2-23
2.18 How to Measure the Bearing to a Target ................................................................. 2-24
2.18.1 How to measure the bearing ........................................................................ 2-24
2.18.2 How to select bearing reference .................................................................. 2-25
2.19 Collision Assessment by Offset EBL........................................................................ 2-25
2.19.1 How to assess risk of collision .................................................................... 2-25
2.19.2 Point of reference for origin point of offset EBL ........................................... 2-26
2.20 How to Measure the Range and Bearing Between Two Targets ............................. 2-27

vi
 TABLE OF CONTENTS

2.21 How to Off-center the Display...................................................................................2-28

2.22 Target Trails .............................................................................................................2-29
2.22.1 Target trails-related indications ....................................................................2-29
2.22.2 True or relative target trails ..........................................................................2-29
2.22.3 Trail time.......................................................................................................2-30
2.22.4 How to reset target trails ..............................................................................2-30
2.22.5 How to temporarily remove all target trails from the display.........................2-30
2.22.6 Trail stabilization in true motion ....................................................................2-30
2.22.7 Target trail attributes on the TRAIL menu ....................................................2-31
2.23 Parallel Index (PI) Lines ...........................................................................................2-32
2.23.1 How to display, erase a PI line .....................................................................2-32
2.23.2 How to enable/disable PI lines .....................................................................2-32
2.23.3 How to adjust PI line orientation, PI line interval ..........................................2-33
2.23.4 How to select the number of PI lines to display............................................2-33
2.23.5 How to select the bearing reference for the PI line ......................................2-33
2.23.6 How to select the PI lines orientation ...........................................................2-34
2.23.7 How to reset PI lines ....................................................................................2-34
2.23.8 How to adjust PI line length..........................................................................2-35
2.24 Zoom ........................................................................................................................2-36
2.25 Markers.....................................................................................................................2-37
2.25.1 Heading line .................................................................................................2-37
2.25.2 Stern marker.................................................................................................2-37
2.25.3 North marker ................................................................................................2-37
2.25.4 Own ship marker ..........................................................................................2-37
2.25.5 Vectors .........................................................................................................2-38
2.25.6 Barge marker................................................................................................2-38
2.25.7 Antenna marker............................................................................................2-39
2.25.8 Cursor...........................................................................................................2-39
2.25.9 Curved EBL ..................................................................................................2-40
2.25.10Display predictor...........................................................................................2-40
2.26 How to Adjust Brilliance of Screen Data...................................................................2-41
2.27 Watch Alert ...............................................................................................................2-42
2.28 Information Box ........................................................................................................2-43
2.28.1 Information box contents ..............................................................................2-43
2.28.2 How to show the information box .................................................................2-45
2.28.3 How to turn NAV data on/off.........................................................................2-45
2.28.4 How to output data to the wave analysis software (option) ..........................2-47
2.29 Interswitch ................................................................................................................2-48
2.29.1 Displaying antenna information ....................................................................2-48
2.29.2 How to preset antenna and display combinations ........................................2-49
2.29.3 How to select an antenna.............................................................................2-51
2.29.4 How to revert to own antenna ......................................................................2-51
2.30 Dual Radar ...............................................................................................................2-51
2.30.1 How to enable or disable the dual radar display ..........................................2-52
2.30.2 Operating considerations for the dual radar display .....................................2-52
2.31 Performance Monitor ................................................................................................2-54
2.32 Magnetron Reset (For A- and B-types) ....................................................................2-56
2.33 CCRP (Common Consistent Reference Point).........................................................2-57
2.34 Drop Mark.................................................................................................................2-59
2.34.1 How to show, hide the drop mark box ..........................................................2-59
2.34.2 How to inscribe a drop mark.........................................................................2-59
2.34.3 Drop mark bearing reference .......................................................................2-59
2.34.4 How to erase a drop mark ............................................................................2-60
2.35 Anchor Watch ...........................................................................................................2-60
2.36 SART ........................................................................................................................2-61
2.36.1 What is an SART?........................................................................................2-61

vii
TABLE OF CONTENTS

2.36.2 How to receive an SART.............................................................................. 2-61

2.37 Doppler Feature (X-band Solid State Radars only).................................................. 2-62
2.38 Alert Box, Alert List................................................................................................... 2-63
2.38.1 Alert box ....................................................................................................... 2-63
2.38.2 Alert list ........................................................................................................ 2-63
2.39 Echo Area ................................................................................................................ 2-64
2.40 Echo Color ............................................................................................................... 2-64
2.41 Icing Prevention ....................................................................................................... 2-64
2.42 Shuttle Ferry............................................................................................................. 2-65
2.43 Chart Radar Functions ............................................................................................. 2-66
2.43.1 How to switch between radar and chart radar modes.................................. 2-66
2.43.2 How to show or hide chart objects ............................................................... 2-67
2.43.3 How to create and recall custom sets of chart display objects..................... 2-69
2.43.4 Chart database information.......................................................................... 2-70
2.43.5 How to set value for shallow contour, safety depth, safety contour and
deep contour ................................................................................................ 2-70
2.43.6 How to select the chart color and tone......................................................... 2-71
2.43.7 Chart scale indications ................................................................................. 2-71
2.43.8 Chart status.................................................................................................. 2-71
2.43.9 Chart alert function....................................................................................... 2-71
2.43.10Notes details ................................................................................................ 2-73
2.44 Radar Observation ................................................................................................... 2-74
2.44.1 General ........................................................................................................ 2-74
2.44.2 False echoes................................................................................................ 2-75
2.44.3 RACON ........................................................................................................ 2-77
2.44.4 Radar Target Enhancer (RTE) ..................................................................... 2-77
2.44.5 Solid state radar ........................................................................................... 2-78

3. TARGET TRACKING (TT) .....................................................................................3-1

3.1 About TT .................................................................................................................... 3-1
3.2 How to Show, Hide the TT Display ............................................................................ 3-1
3.3 How to Input Your Ship's Speed ................................................................................ 3-2
3.3.1 Echo-referenced speed input ......................................................................... 3-2
3.4 Automatic Acquisition................................................................................................. 3-3
3.4.1 How to enable auto acquisition ...................................................................... 3-3
3.4.2 How to set an automatic acquisition zone...................................................... 3-4
3.5 Manual Acquisition ..................................................................................................... 3-5
3.5.1 How to set manual acquisition conditions ...................................................... 3-5
3.5.2 How to manually acquire a target................................................................... 3-6
3.6 How to Stop Tracking Targets (including reference targets)...................................... 3-7
3.6.1 How to cancel tracking on individual tracked targets ..................................... 3-7
3.6.2 How to cancel tracking on all TTs .................................................................. 3-7
3.7 TT Symbols and TT Symbol Attributes ...................................................................... 3-7
3.7.1 TT symbols..................................................................................................... 3-7
3.7.2 TT symbol brilliance ....................................................................................... 3-8
3.7.3 Color for TT symbol........................................................................................ 3-9
3.8 How to Display TT Data ........................................................................................... 3-10
3.8.1 How to display target data for individual TT ................................................. 3-10
3.8.2 TT pop-up information.................................................................................. 3-11
3.8.3 Target list ..................................................................................................... 3-12
3.9 Vector Modes ........................................................................................................... 3-13
3.9.1 Description of vectors................................................................................... 3-13
3.9.2 Vector motion and length ............................................................................. 3-15
3.10 Past Position Display ............................................................................................... 3-15
3.10.1 How to enable/disable the past position display, select past position
reference ...................................................................................................... 3-16

viii
 TABLE OF CONTENTS

3.10.2 Past position points ......................................................................................3-16

3.11 How to Enter Set and Drift........................................................................................3-16
3.12 TT CPA/TCPA Alarm................................................................................................3-17
3.12.1 How to set the CPA and TCPA limits ...........................................................3-17
3.12.2 How to enable, disable the TT CPA/TCPA alarm.........................................3-17
3.12.3 How to acknowledge the TT CPA/TCPA alarm ............................................3-17
3.13 TT Lost Target Alert..................................................................................................3-19
3.13.1 How to enable, disable the TT lost target alert.............................................3-19
3.13.2 How to set the TT lost target filter ................................................................3-19
3.14 Trial Maneuver..........................................................................................................3-20
3.14.1 Types of trial maneuvers ..............................................................................3-20
3.14.2 How to do a trial maneuver ..........................................................................3-21
3.14.3 How to terminate a trial maneuver ...............................................................3-24
3.15 TT Simulation Mode .................................................................................................3-25
3.16 TT Alerts ...................................................................................................................3-26
3.17 How to Set a Target Name (B-types only)................................................................3-26
3.17.1 How to enable the target name feature ........................................................3-26
3.17.2 How to set up preset names.........................................................................3-27
3.17.3 How to assign a name to a target.................................................................3-28
3.18 Criteria for Selecting Targets for Tracking................................................................3-29
3.19 Factors Affecting Target Tracking ............................................................................3-30

4. AIS OPERATION ...................................................................................................4-1

4.1 How to Deactivate the AIS Function...........................................................................4-2
4.2 How to Show, Hide the AIS Display ...........................................................................4-3
4.3 AIS Symbols ...............................................................................................................4-3
4.4 How to Filter AIS Targets ...........................................................................................4-6
4.5 How to Activate Targets .............................................................................................4-6
4.5.1 How to activate specific target........................................................................4-6
4.5.2 How to automatically activate targets .............................................................4-7
4.6 How to Sleep Targets .................................................................................................4-7
4.6.1 How to sleep an activated AIS target .............................................................4-7
4.6.2 How to sleep all activated AIS targets ............................................................4-8
4.7 How to Display AIS Target Data.................................................................................4-8
4.7.1 AIS pop-up information...................................................................................4-8
4.7.2 Basic AIS target data......................................................................................4-8
4.7.3 Expanded AIS data ......................................................................................4-10
4.8 AIS CPA/TCPA Alarm ..............................................................................................4-11
4.9 AIS Symbol Brilliance ...............................................................................................4-11
4.10 AIS Symbol Color .....................................................................................................4-12
4.11 AIS Lost Targets.......................................................................................................4-12
4.11.1 How to enable, disable the AIS lost target alert ...........................................4-12
4.11.2 How to set the AIS lost target filter ...............................................................4-13
4.12 How to Display AIS Target Past Positions................................................................4-13
4.12.1 How to enable/disable the past position display, select past position
reference ......................................................................................................4-13
4.12.2 Past position points ......................................................................................4-14
4.13 How to Display True or Relative Speed Vectors ......................................................4-14
4.14 Association of TT and AIS Targets...........................................................................4-14
4.14.1 How to select association method................................................................4-14
4.14.2 How to set the conditions for association .....................................................4-15
4.15 Voyage Data.............................................................................................................4-15
4.16 AIS Messages ..........................................................................................................4-16
4.16.1 How to create and transmit a new AIS message .........................................4-17
4.16.2 How to transmit a saved AIS message ........................................................4-17
4.16.3 How to display received AIS messages .......................................................4-18

ix
TABLE OF CONTENTS

4.17 How to View Own Ship Data .................................................................................... 4-19

4.18 Other AIS Features .................................................................................................. 4-19

5. RADAR MAP AND TRACK ...................................................................................5-1

5.1 What is a Radar Map? ............................................................................................... 5-1
5.2 Presentation Modes ................................................................................................... 5-1
5.3 How to Show, Hide the Radar Map Display ............................................................... 5-1
5.4 How to Enter Radar Map Marks and Lines ................................................................ 5-2
5.5 How to Find Number of Map Points Used.................................................................. 5-3
5.6 How to Select the Radar Map to Display ................................................................... 5-4
5.7 How to Attach a Comment to a Radar Map, Find Comment for a Map...................... 5-4
5.7.1 How to attach a comment to a radar map ...................................................... 5-4
5.7.2 How to find the comment for a map ............................................................... 5-4
5.8 How to Erase Radar Map Marks and Lines ............................................................... 5-5
5.8.1 How to erase individual radar map marks and lines ...................................... 5-5
5.8.2 How to erase map marks and lines in an area............................................... 5-5
5.8.3 How to erase all radar map marks and lines in a map file ............................. 5-6
5.9 How to Copy Radar Map Marks and Lines ................................................................ 5-7
5.9.1 How to copy individual radar map mark and line to another map file............. 5-7
5.9.2 How to copy radar map marks and lines within an area to another map file........ 5-7
5.9.3 How to copy all radar map marks and lines in a map file to another map file ...... 5-8
5.10 How to Export Radar Map.......................................................................................... 5-9
5.11 How to Import Radar Map ........................................................................................ 5-10
5.12 How to Show, Hide Radar Map Features................................................................. 5-13
5.13 Track ........................................................................................................................ 5-13
5.13.1 How to set up ship's track ............................................................................ 5-13
5.13.2 How to erase track ....................................................................................... 5-14
5.14 Route Display........................................................................................................... 5-14
5.15 User Chart Display ................................................................................................... 5-15

6. CHART OVERVIEW...............................................................................................6-1
6.1 Chart Screen Overview .............................................................................................. 6-1
6.1.1 Electronic chart area ...................................................................................... 6-2
6.1.2 Status bar....................................................................................................... 6-4
6.1.3 InstantAccess bar™ ....................................................................................... 6-6
6.1.4 Sensor information box .................................................................................. 6-9
6.1.5 Own ship functions box ................................................................................ 6-10
6.1.6 Route information box .................................................................................. 6-11
6.1.7 Overlay/NAV Tools box................................................................................ 6-12
6.1.8 Alert box ....................................................................................................... 6-12
6.1.9 Permanent warning box ............................................................................... 6-12
6.1.10 EBL, VRM boxes.......................................................................................... 6-12
6.1.11 North mark ................................................................................................... 6-13
6.1.12 Context-sensitive menus.............................................................................. 6-13
6.1.13 How to enter alphanumeric data .................................................................. 6-14
6.2 How to Select a Display Mode ................................................................................. 6-15
6.3 How to Select the Chart Operating Mode ................................................................ 6-16
6.4 How to Select the Chart Scale ................................................................................. 6-16
6.5 How to Select the Presentation Mode...................................................................... 6-17
6.6 Cursor Position Box ................................................................................................. 6-18
6.7 The Silent Mode ....................................................................................................... 6-18
6.8 True Motion Reset.................................................................................................... 6-19
6.9 How to Control Route and User Charts in Voyage Navigation and Voyage
Planning Modes ....................................................................................................... 6-20
6.10 How to Use the VRM and EBL................................................................................. 6-21
6.10.1 How to hide/show an EBL, VRM .................................................................. 6-21

x
 TABLE OF CONTENTS

6.10.2 How to measure the range and bearing .......................................................6-21

6.10.3 How to select bearing reference...................................................................6-21
6.10.4 EBL, VRM functions available with the context-sensitive menu ...................6-22
6.10.5 How to select the calculation method for EBL and VRM ..............................6-23
6.11 Split Screen ..............................................................................................................6-24
6.11.1 How to activate, deactivate the split screen .................................................6-24
6.11.2 Function availability ......................................................................................6-24
6.11.3 Split screen usage characteristics ................................................................6-25
6.12 Datum .......................................................................................................................6-25
6.12.1 General.........................................................................................................6-25
6.12.2 Paper charts .................................................................................................6-25
6.12.3 Electronic sea charts ....................................................................................6-25
6.12.4 Positioning devices and datum.....................................................................6-25
6.12.5 Chart radar and datum .................................................................................6-26
6.13 How to Select Sensor Settings .................................................................................6-26
6.14 How to Enter Ship Speed .........................................................................................6-27
6.15 How to Enter Heading ..............................................................................................6-29
6.16 Set up Before Departure...........................................................................................6-30
6.16.1 Updates before departure ............................................................................6-30
6.16.2 Create or update a route ..............................................................................6-32
6.16.3 How to check and prepare the route, user chart to monitor .........................6-33
6.16.4 Check configuration of navigation sensors...................................................6-36
6.16.5 How to reset odometer and trip meter ..........................................................6-37

7. HOW TO MANAGE CHARTS................................................................................7-1

7.1 How to Install Public Keys for ENC Charts.................................................................7-1
7.2 How to Install ENC Licenses, Charts..........................................................................7-2
7.2.1 How to install an ENC license ........................................................................7-2
7.2.2 How to install ENC charts...............................................................................7-3
7.3 How to Delete ENC Licenses .....................................................................................7-5
7.4 How to Update ENC Chart Manufacturer Info ............................................................7-6
7.5 How to Install C-MAP Charts......................................................................................7-7
7.5.1 How to register the eToken ............................................................................7-7
7.5.2 How to install the C-MAP database................................................................7-7
7.5.3 How to install C-MAP licenses .......................................................................7-9
7.5.4 How to generate and order an update file ....................................................7-10
7.5.5 How to apply the update file .........................................................................7-10
7.5.6 How to check license status .........................................................................7-11
7.6 How to Delete a C-MAP Database ...........................................................................7-11
7.7 How to Export a List of Charts..................................................................................7-11
7.8 How to Export a List of Specific Licenses.................................................................7-11
7.9 How to Show the ENC Permit ..................................................................................7-12
7.10 How to Backup, Restore Licenses............................................................................7-12
7.11 How to View Permit Expiration Date.........................................................................7-13
7.12 How to Display Install/Update History ......................................................................7-14
7.13 Catalog of Chart Cells ..............................................................................................7-15
7.13.1 How to group chart cells ...............................................................................7-17
7.13.2 How to view status of chart cells ..................................................................7-19
7.14 How to Open Charts .................................................................................................7-19
7.15 How to Print Chart List, Cell Status List....................................................................7-20
7.15.1 How to print the chart list ..............................................................................7-20
7.15.2 How to show the cell status list ....................................................................7-21
7.16 How to Delete Charts ...............................................................................................7-22
7.17 How to Show Publishers Notes for ENC Charts.......................................................7-22
7.18 How to Find the Chart Type......................................................................................7-23
7.19 How to Update ENC, C-MAP Charts Manually.........................................................7-23

xi
TABLE OF CONTENTS

7.19.1 How to insert update symbols ...................................................................... 7-24

7.19.2 How to copy objects from an official chart and insert them.......................... 7-25
7.19.3 How to ignore chart objects.......................................................................... 7-25
7.19.4 How to delete (hide) a chart object .............................................................. 7-26
7.19.5 How to modify existing update symbols ....................................................... 7-26
7.19.6 How to review a chart object ........................................................................ 7-26
7.19.7 How to remove all manual update data........................................................ 7-27
7.20 How to Synchronize Chart Data............................................................................... 7-27
7.20.1 How to select the units to synchronize......................................................... 7-28
7.20.2 How to check synchronization status ........................................................... 7-28
7.20.3 Manual updates and synchronization........................................................... 7-29
7.21 How to Reconvert All SENC Charts ......................................................................... 7-30
7.22 How to Manage Gate-1 Charts ................................................................................ 7-30
7.22.1 How to select the chart type(s) to install ...................................................... 7-30
7.22.2 How to install charts and licenses ................................................................ 7-31
7.22.3 How to order licenses................................................................................... 7-31
7.23 How to Delete Chart Data ........................................................................................ 7-32

8. HOW TO CONTROL CHART OBJECTS...............................................................8-1

8.1 How to Browse Your Charts....................................................................................... 8-1
8.2 How to Control Visibility of Chart Objects .................................................................. 8-1
8.2.1 How to set value for shallow contour, safety depth, safety contour and
deep contour .................................................................................................. 8-1
8.2.2 Basic Setting menu ........................................................................................ 8-3
8.2.3 Chart Display menu........................................................................................ 8-4
8.2.4 Display base................................................................................................... 8-5
8.3 How to Control Visibility of Symbols, Features .......................................................... 8-6
8.3.1 General page ................................................................................................. 8-6
8.3.2 Tracking page ................................................................................................ 8-7
8.3.3 Route page .................................................................................................... 8-9
8.3.4 Mariner page ................................................................................................ 8-10
8.3.5 Targets page ................................................................................................ 8-11
8.4 Control of Predefined IMO Chart Display Settings................................................... 8-12

9. VECTOR (S57) CHARTS .......................................................................................9-1

9.1 Introduction to S57 Charts ......................................................................................... 9-1
9.1.1 Definitions of terms ........................................................................................ 9-2
9.1.2 Chart legend for S57 charts ........................................................................... 9-2
9.1.3 Permanent warnings for S57 charts............................................................... 9-3
9.2 Chart Viewing Dates and Seasonal Features of the S57 Chart ................................. 9-4
9.2.1 Introduction .................................................................................................... 9-4
9.2.2 How to set Display date and Update Review dates ....................................... 9-4
9.2.3 About chart viewing date dependency of S57 standard................................. 9-5
9.2.4 How to approve and highlight S57 chart updates .......................................... 9-6
9.3 Symbology Used in S57 Charts ................................................................................. 9-7
9.3.1 Presentation library used for S57 chart features............................................ 9-7
9.4 How to Find Information About S57 Chart Objects .................................................... 9-8
9.5 Admiralty Information Overlay (AIO) .......................................................................... 9-9
9.5.1 Installation ...................................................................................................... 9-9
9.5.2 How to display the AIO................................................................................... 9-9
9.5.3 Catalog of AIO cells ..................................................................................... 9-10
9.5.4 How to find AIO chart object information...................................................... 9-10
9.5.5 How to select the information to display....................................................... 9-11

10. C-MAP CHARTS ..................................................................................................10-1

10.1 How to Register the System at C-MAP .................................................................... 10-1

xii
 TABLE OF CONTENTS

10.2 How to Order Charts.................................................................................................10-1

10.3 How to Apply for Licenses ........................................................................................10-1
10.4 Troubleshooting........................................................................................................10-2
10.5 Chart Display ............................................................................................................10-2
10.5.1 Introduction...................................................................................................10-2
10.6 Permanent Warnings................................................................................................10-3
10.7 Notice to Mariners (NM) ...........................................................................................10-4

11. CHART ALERTS .................................................................................................11-1

11.1 Chart Alerts...............................................................................................................11-2
11.1.1 How to set safety contour.............................................................................11-2
11.1.2 Chart object related settings.........................................................................11-3
11.2 How to Activate Own Ship Look-ahead Area ...........................................................11-4
11.3 Route Planning .........................................................................................................11-5
11.3.1 Chart alerts for route planning......................................................................11-5

12. ROUTES ..............................................................................................................12-1

12.1 Route Planning Overview .........................................................................................12-1
12.2 Main Menu for Route Planning .................................................................................12-2
12.3 How Route Data is Synced.......................................................................................12-2
12.4 How to Create a New Route.....................................................................................12-4
12.4.1 How to use the Waypoints page...................................................................12-6
12.4.2 How to use the User Chart page ..................................................................12-7
12.4.3 How to use the Optimize page .....................................................................12-8
12.4.4 How to use the Alert Parameters page ........................................................12-8
12.4.5 How to use the Check Results page ..........................................................12-11
12.5 How to Modify an Existing Route............................................................................12-11
12.5.1 How to change waypoint position...............................................................12-11
12.5.2 How to change other waypoint data ...........................................................12-12
12.5.3 How to add a new waypoint at the end of a route ......................................12-12
12.5.4 How to insert a waypoint ............................................................................12-12
12.5.5 How to delete a waypoint ...........................................................................12-12
12.5.6 Geometry check of route ............................................................................12-13
12.6 SAR Operations......................................................................................................12-14
12.7 Route Bank.............................................................................................................12-17
12.8 Route Optimization .................................................................................................12-18
12.8.1 Available route optimization strategies .......................................................12-18
12.8.2 How to optimize a route..............................................................................12-19
12.8.3 How to plan a speed profile........................................................................12-20
12.9 How to Import Routes.............................................................................................12-21
12.9.1 How to import FMD-3x00, FCR-2xx9, FAR-3xx0 route data ......................12-21
12.9.2 How to import FEA-2x07 route data ...........................................................12-21
12.9.3 How to import RTZ, CSV, ASCII format route data ....................................12-22
12.10How to Export Route Data .....................................................................................12-23
12.10.1How to export FAR-3xx0 route data ...........................................................12-23
12.10.2How to export route data in RTZ, CSV, ASCII format ................................12-23
12.11How to Delete Routes ............................................................................................12-24
12.12How to Transfer Routes .........................................................................................12-25
12.12.1How to turn route transfer on/off.................................................................12-25
12.12.2How to send and receive monitored routes ................................................12-26
12.12.3How to send and receive planned routes ...................................................12-27
12.13Reports ..................................................................................................................12-28

13. USER CHARTS ...................................................................................................13-1

13.1 Introduction...............................................................................................................13-1
13.1.1 Objects of user charts ..................................................................................13-1

xiii
TABLE OF CONTENTS

13.2 How User Charts are Synced................................................................................... 13-2

13.3 How to Create a User Chart..................................................................................... 13-4
13.4 How to Edit Objects on a User Chart ....................................................................... 13-8
13.5 How to Delete Objects from a User Chart................................................................ 13-9
13.6 How to Copy User Chart Objects ............................................................................. 13-9
13.7 How to Select the User Chart Objects to Display................................................... 13-10
13.8 How to Import User Chart Data.............................................................................. 13-10
13.8.1 How to import user chart data from other units .......................................... 13-10
13.8.2 How to import a user chart created with ECDIS FEA-2x07........................ 13-11
13.8.3 How to import RTZ format user charts ....................................................... 13-12
13.9 How to Export User Chart Data.............................................................................. 13-12
13.9.1 How to export user chart data created on the FMD-3x00 .......................... 13-12
13.9.2 How to export RTZ format user chart data................................................. 13-12
13.10How to Delete User Charts.................................................................................... 13-13
13.11User Chart Reports................................................................................................ 13-13
13.12How to Select the User Chart(s) to Use in Route Monitoring ................................ 13-17

14. HOW TO MONITOR ROUTES .............................................................................14-1

14.1 How to Start Route Monitoring ................................................................................. 14-1
14.2 How to Stop Route Monitoring (Manual, Auto)......................................................... 14-4
14.3 How to Select What Parts of a Route to Display...................................................... 14-4
14.4 How to View Waypoint Information .......................................................................... 14-5
14.5 How to View User Chart Information Linked Monitoring Route................................ 14-6
14.6 How to View User Chart Object Information in Route Monitoring ............................ 14-6
14.7 How to Change Monitored Route to Planned Route ................................................ 14-7
14.8 How to Use Instant Track to Return to or Deviate from Monitored Route................ 14-7
14.8.1 Safe off track mode ...................................................................................... 14-8
14.8.2 Back to track mode ...................................................................................... 14-9
14.8.3 Instant track messages .............................................................................. 14-10
14.8.4 Instant track details .................................................................................... 14-11
14.8.5 How to monitor, stop monitoring an instant track route.............................. 14-11
14.8.6 How to change a monitored route when following an instant track route
(safe off track mode only)........................................................................... 14-12
14.8.7 Button label and unit state.......................................................................... 14-13
14.9 How to Share Route During Route Monitoring....................................................... 14-13

15. NAVIGATION TOOLS..........................................................................................15-1

15.1 How to Access the NAV Tools in the Overlay/NAV Tools Box................................. 15-1
15.2 Radar Overlay .......................................................................................................... 15-2
15.2.1 How to show the radar overlay..................................................................... 15-3
15.2.2 Error Between Radar Echo Image and Chart .............................................. 15-3
15.2.3 Error Sources for Radar Echo Image and TT Mismatch .............................. 15-4
15.3 Parallel Index (PI) Lines ........................................................................................... 15-5
15.3.1 How to activate, deactivate PI lines ............................................................. 15-5
15.3.2 PI line bearing reference .............................................................................. 15-5
15.3.3 Number of PI lines to display ....................................................................... 15-5
15.3.4 PI line mode ................................................................................................. 15-5
15.3.5 How to adjust PI line orientation, PI line interval .......................................... 15-6
15.3.6 How to reset the PI lines .............................................................................. 15-6
15.3.7 How to adjust PI line length.......................................................................... 15-7
15.4 Look-ahead .............................................................................................................. 15-7
15.5 Ring.......................................................................................................................... 15-8
15.6 Predictor................................................................................................................... 15-9
15.7 Anchor Watch......................................................................................................... 15-10
15.8 UKC (Under Keel Clearance)................................................................................. 15-11
15.8.1 UKC overview ............................................................................................ 15-11

xiv
 TABLE OF CONTENTS

15.8.2 How to set UKC..........................................................................................15-12

15.8.3 UKC window...............................................................................................15-12
15.9 Curved EBL ............................................................................................................15-13
15.10Divider....................................................................................................................15-14
15.10.1How to use the divider................................................................................15-14
15.10.2Usage characteristics, limitations ...............................................................15-15
15.10.3How to deactivate and erase the divider ....................................................15-15
15.10.4How to select the calculation method for the divider ..................................15-16

16. NAVIGATION SENSORS ....................................................................................16-1

16.1 CCRS .......................................................................................................................16-1
16.2 How to Select Navigation Sensors ...........................................................................16-2
16.2.1 Sensors menu description............................................................................16-2
16.3 Source of Position ....................................................................................................16-6
16.4 Primary and Secondary Positions of Own Ship........................................................16-7
16.5 Source of Navigation Data........................................................................................16-8
16.6 Switching of Sensor and Indication ........................................................................16-10
16.7 Filter Status ............................................................................................................16-10
16.8 Position Alignment..................................................................................................16-13
16.8.1 How to align position ..................................................................................16-13
16.8.2 How to cancel position alignment...............................................................16-13
16.9 Wind Sensor ...........................................................................................................16-13
16.10Depth Sensor .........................................................................................................16-15

17. AIS SAFETY, NAVTEX MESSAGES ..................................................................17-1

17.1 AIS Safety Messages ...............................................................................................17-1
17.1.1 How to send an AIS safety message ...........................................................17-1
17.1.2 How to display received and sent AIS safety messages ..............................17-2
17.1.3 How to delete received and sent AIS safety messages ...............................17-3
17.2 Navtex Messages .....................................................................................................17-3
17.2.1 How to receive Navtex messages ................................................................17-4
17.2.2 How to delete received Navtex messages ...................................................17-5

18. TT AND AIS DISPLAYS ......................................................................................18-1

18.1 TT Display ................................................................................................................18-1
18.1.1 TT symbols ...................................................................................................18-1
18.1.2 TT symbol color and size .............................................................................18-1
18.1.3 How to display tracked target data ...............................................................18-2
18.1.4 Past position point attributes ........................................................................18-3
18.1.5 How to set the TT lost target filter ................................................................18-3
18.1.6 TT recording functions..................................................................................18-3
18.2 AIS Display ...............................................................................................................18-4
18.2.1 AIS symbols .................................................................................................18-4
18.2.2 Voyage data .................................................................................................18-4
18.2.3 How to filter AIS targets................................................................................18-5
18.2.4 How to set conditions for automatic activation of sleeping targets ...............18-6
18.2.5 How to sleep all activated targets.................................................................18-6
18.2.6 How to set the AIS lost target filter ...............................................................18-7
18.2.7 How to display AIS target data .....................................................................18-7
18.2.8 How to display own ship data.......................................................................18-9
18.3 Association ...............................................................................................................18-9
18.3.1 How to select association method................................................................18-9
18.3.2 How to set the conditions for association ...................................................18-10

19. RECORDING FUNCTIONS .................................................................................19-1

19.1 How to Record User, Position Events ......................................................................19-1

xv
TABLE OF CONTENTS

19.1.1 User events .................................................................................................. 19-1

19.1.2 Position events............................................................................................. 19-3
19.2 Details Log ............................................................................................................... 19-6
19.3 Voyage Log .............................................................................................................. 19-7
19.3.1 How to set conditions of logging .................................................................. 19-9
19.4 Chart Usage Log ...................................................................................................... 19-9
19.5 Danger Targets Log ............................................................................................... 19-10
19.5.1 How to filter the danger targets log ............................................................ 19-11
19.6 Route Transfer Log ................................................................................................ 19-12

20. ALERTS ...............................................................................................................20-1

20.1 What is an Alert?...................................................................................................... 20-1
20.2 Alert Box................................................................................................................... 20-2
20.3 How to Temporarily Silence the Buzzer for an Emergency, Alarm or Warning........ 20-5
20.4 How to Acknowledge an Emergency, Alarm or Warning ......................................... 20-5
20.5 Alert List ................................................................................................................... 20-7
20.6 Alert Log................................................................................................................. 20-10
20.7 Alert Reception from Connected Sensors.............................................................. 20-11

21. PARAMETERS.....................................................................................................21-1
21.1 Ship and Route Parameters..................................................................................... 21-1
21.2 Forwarding Distances .............................................................................................. 21-2
21.3 Cost Parameters ...................................................................................................... 21-3
21.4 Instant Track Parameters......................................................................................... 21-4

22. SETTINGS MENU ................................................................................................22-1

22.1 How to Access the Settings Menu ........................................................................... 22-1
22.2 File Export ................................................................................................................ 22-2
22.3 File Import ................................................................................................................ 22-3
22.4 File Maintenance...................................................................................................... 22-4
22.5 Self Test ................................................................................................................... 22-5
22.6 Data Sharing ............................................................................................................ 22-9
22.7 Customize .............................................................................................................. 22-10
22.8 Display Test ........................................................................................................... 22-11
22.9 Keyboard Test........................................................................................................ 22-12
22.10Screenshots........................................................................................................... 22-14
22.10.1How to export screenshots......................................................................... 22-15
22.10.2How to delete screenshots......................................................................... 22-15
22.10.3How to print screenshots............................................................................ 22-15
22.11User Default........................................................................................................... 22-16
22.12CCRP .................................................................................................................... 22-17

23. COMMON REFERENCE SYSTEM ......................................................................23-1

23.1 Installation of the System ......................................................................................... 23-1
23.2 Accuracy of the System ........................................................................................... 23-1

24. CONNING (optional specification)/MINI CONNING/SIDE CONNING ..............24-1

24.1 Conning Display ....................................................................................................... 24-1
24.2 Conning Display Examples ...................................................................................... 24-3
24.3 Mini Conning Display ............................................................................................. 24-11
24.4 Side Conning Display (landscape monitor only) .................................................... 24-12

25. MAINTENANCE AND TROUBLESHOOTING.....................................................25-1

25.1 Maintenance............................................................................................................. 25-2
25.2 How to Replace the Fuses ....................................................................................... 25-3
25.3 Trackball Maintenance ............................................................................................. 25-4

xvi
 TABLE OF CONTENTS

25.4 How to Clean and Replace the Air Inlet Filter...........................................................25-5

25.4.1 EC-3000 Processor Unit...............................................................................25-5
25.4.2 RCN-303/304 Console Units ........................................................................25-6
25.5 Troubleshooting........................................................................................................25-7
25.6 Consumable Parts ....................................................................................................25-9
25.7 Color Differentiation Test for S57 Charts................................................................25-10
25.8 Fallback Arrangements...........................................................................................25-11

APPX. 1 MENU TREE ..............................................................................................AP-1

APPX. 2 ABBREVIATIONS AND SYMBOLS..........................................................AP-9
APPX. 3 DATA COLOR AND MEANING ..............................................................AP-22
APPX. 4 ALERT LIST ............................................................................................AP-23
APPX. 5 RADIO REGULATORY INFORMATION .................................................AP-48

SPECIFICATIONS ..................................................................................................... SP-1

INDEX ......................................................................................................................... IN-1

xvii
FOREWORD
Congratulations on your choice of the FURUNO FAR-3xx0 Series Marine Radar. We are confident
you will see why the FURUNO name has become synonymous with quality and reliability.

Since 1948, FURUNO Electric Company has enjoyed an enviable reputation for innovative and
dependable marine electronics equipment. This dedication to excellence is furthered by our ex-
tensive global network of agents and dealers.

This equipment is designed and constructed to meet the rigorous demands of the marine environ-
ment. However, no machine can perform its intended function unless installed, operated and
maintained properly. Please carefully read and follow the recommended procedures for operation
and maintenance.

Features
This radar series meets the requirements of IEC 62388 (Marine navigation and radio-communica-
tion equipment and systems - Shipborne radar - Performance requirements, method of testing and
required test results) and IMO MSC.192(79), IMO Resolution A.817(19), and IEC 61174. This ra-
dar displays radar targets, electronic charts, nav lines, Tracked Target (TT) data, AIS targets and
other navigation data on a display.

The main features of this series are

• The FAR-3xx0 series consists of the following models and configurations:

Frequency Size of Output Transceiver
Model
band monitor unit*1 power location
Magnetron radar
FAR-3210 19.0” 12 kW Antenna unit
FAR-3210-BB Local supply 12 kW Antenna unit
FAR-3310 23.1”/27” 12 kW Antenna unit
FAR-3220 19.0” 25 kW Antenna unit
X-band
FAR-3220-BB Local supply 25 kW Antenna unit
FAR-3320 23.1”/27” 25 kW Antenna unit
FAR-3320W 23.1”/27” 25 kW Transceiver unit
FAR-3220W-BB Local supply 25 kW Transceiver unit
FAR-3230S 19.0” 30 kW Antenna unit
FAR-3230S-BB Local supply 30 kW Antenna unit
FAR-3330S S-band 23.1”/27” 30 kW Antenna unit
FAR-3330SW 23.1”/27” 30 kW Transceiver unit
FAR-3230SW-BB Local supply 30 kW Transceiver unit
Solid state radar
FAR-3230S-SSD 19.0” 250 W Antenna unit
FAR-3330S-SSD S-band 23.1”/27” 250 W Antenna unit
FAR-3230S-SSD-BB Local supply 250 W Antenna unit
FAR-3220-NXT 19.0” 600 W*2 Antenna unit
FAR-3320-NXT X-band 23.1”/27” 600 W*2 Antenna unit
FAR-3220-NXT-BB Local supply 600 W*2 Antenna unit

*1: Viewing distance: 1020 mm *2: 500 W for a Japanese flag vessel.

xviii
 FOREWORD

• New HMI (Human Machine Interface) gives improved operability.

• Accepts SXGA, UXGA video inputs.
• The following monitors have been approved by the IMO under the following categories:
• MU-231/MU-270W: CAT 1C and CAT 1HC; effective diameter: 320 mm or higher
• MU-190: CAT 2C and CAT 2HC; effective diameter 250 mm or higher
• Radar, chart and chart radar modes. (The chart radar mode does not meet the criteria for naviga-
tion aid for Japanese flag vessels as defined by Japanese law.)
• Many warning features to support safer and more efficient navigation.
• Grounding warnings, safe depth contours.
• Chart database loaded and updated using CD-ROMs.
• Tracked Target (TT) data and AIS data to aid in collision avoidance.
• AIS messaging.
• Route created in chart mode can be displayed on the radar.
• Route planning and route monitoring facilities in the chart mode.

Signal Processing Functions

This radar has the signal processing functions described in the table below. All signal processing
functions are set with the picture preset feature.

Signal processing function Description Section

Interference rejector Suppress interference transmitted by other radars. Inter- 2.7
ference received simultaneously from many radars can
be difficult to reduce.
Echo stretch Enlarge target echoes, especially small echoes. Sup- 2.8
press interference, sea clutter and rain clutter before us-
ing echo stretch, to prevent the enlargement of unwanted
echoes.
Echo averaging The radar samples echoes with each scan. Targets that 2.9
show a large change with each scan are judged as clutter
and are reduced to display only echoes from legitimate
targets.
Automatic clutter elimination Discriminate the clutter from the radar echo then reduce 2.10
the clutter automatically.
Noise rejector Reduce the white noise then improves the on-screen S/N 2.11
ratio by processing the weighted moving average filter for
the received echoes in the range direction. Use this func-
tion with caution. Weak target echoes may disappear
from the screen or the range resolution may worsen.

Standards Used in this Manual

• Three types of Control Units are available: Radar Control Unit RCU-025 (radar controls with
trackball module), ECDIS Control Unit RCU-024 (alphabet keyboard, controls, trackball mod-
ule) and Trackball Control Unit RCU-026 (trackball module only). Unless noted otherwise, “Con-
trol Unit” refers to the RCU-025.
• The system can be operated with the controls of the Radar Control Unit, ECDIS Control Unit or
a trackball module. The descriptions in this manual use the trackball module.
• Unless noted otherwise, "click" means to push the left button on a trackball module.
• The keys and controls of the Radar Control Unit are shown in bold face; for example, the EN-
TER key.
• The buttons on the InstantAccess bar™, Status bar and menu items are shown in brackets; for
example, the [TUNE] button.

xix
FOREWORD

• Context-sensitive menus are available with many buttons, and boxes and objects. Right-click
an item to display the related context-sensitive menu.
• This radar is available in three types of specifications: IMO, A, or B. This manual provides the
descriptions for the B type, of which some functions are not available with the IMO or A type.
See the menu tree in Appendix 1 for function availability.
• The display colors mentioned in this manual are those with the color palette setting “Day-Gray”.
• InstantAccess bar™ is a trademark of FURUNO Electric Co., Ltd.

Program Number
System Program no. Version no. Remarks
Antenna unit
SPU 0359281 01.xx For magnetron radar
SPU 0359286 01.xx For solid state radar
MTR-DRV 0359293 01.xx
PM 0359296 01.xx
RF-Converter 0359302 01.xx For solid state radar
Power supply unit
PSU-Control 0359299 01.xx
Processor Unit: EC-3000
Main 0359266 02.xx

xx: Minor change

The latest IHO standard can be found at http://www.iho.int

Virus Prevention
This equipment is not equipped with a virus checker. This equipment operates in real time; there-
fore, having a virus checker that periodically checks the equipment for viruses would increase the
processing load, which can affect operation. However, you can avoid viruses by following the in-
structions in this section.

When you update a chart

The PC and medium (USB flash memory, etc.) used to download and store an update for an ex-
isting chart or a new chart may be infected with a virus. Check the PC and the medium for viruses
with a commercial virus checker - BEFORE you connect them to the ECDIS. Be sure the virus
checker contains the latest virus definition files.

Network connection
The ECDIS receives and displays information from various navigation equipment and radar via a
LAN. A PC and other equipment connected to a network can carry viruses. To prevent the intro-
duction of a virus to the LAN, DO NOT connect the ECDIS or HUB to an external network, includ-
ing other shipboard LAN.

Do not install 3rd party programs in the ECDIS

Programs installed via an external network can carry viruses that can cause the ECDIS to mal-
function. Do not install any Windows® software.

xx
 FOREWORD

Open Source Software

This product includes software to be licensed under the GNU General Public License (GPL), GNU
Lesser General Public License (LGPL), BSD, Apache, MIT and others. The program(s) is/are free
software(s), and you can copy it and/or redistribute it and/or modify it under the terms of the GPL
or LGPL as published by the Free Software Foundation. Please access the following URL if you
need source codes: https://www.furuno.co.jp/en/contact/cnt_oss_e01.html

This product uses the software module that was developed by the Independent JPEG Group.

Reverse engineering
Reverse engineering (disassemble, decompile) of the software of this equipment is prohibited.
However, reverse engineering is permitted under the following conditions:

• The library used for the reverse engineering (GNU Library General Public License Version 2,
GNU Lesser General Public License Version 2.1, or later editions) is clearly noted.
• The reverse engineered software is used only within the scope outlined under the appropriate
license.

CE/UKCA declaration
With regards to CE/UKCA declarations, please refer to our website (www.furuno.com), for further
information on RoHS conformity declarations.

Disclosure of Information about China RoHS

With regards to China RoHS information for our products, please refer to our website
(www.furuno.com).

xxi
SYSTEM CONFIGURATIONS

NOTICE
The radar(s) must be interconnected to the following type approved sensors:
QEPFS meeting the requirements of the IMO resolution MSC.112(73).
QGyrocompass meeting the requirements of the IMO resolution A.424(XI).
QSDME
meeting the requirements of IMO resolution MSC.96(72).
The radar may be interconnected via HUB-3000 to other FURUNO processing units having approved LAN ports.

Basic configuration is shown with solid line. For footnotes, see "Notes" on page xxvi.

X-band (TR-UP)

for FAR-3220-NXT(-BB)/3320-NXT, for FAR-3210(-BB)/3310, 12 kW

600 W (500 W for a Japanese flag vessel) w/ Performance Monitor PM-32A)
(w/ Performance Monitor PM-32B) XN12CF-RSB128-105
XN12CF-RSB128-123 XN20CF-RSB128-105
XN20CF-RSB128-123 XN24CF-RSB128-105
XN24CF-RSB128-123 Antenna Unit
Sub display for FAR-3220(-BB)/3320, 25 kW
w/ Performance Monitor PM-32A)
100-115/220-230 VAC XN12CF-RSB128-106
1ø, 50-60 Hz (for de-icer) XN20CF-RSB128-106
Junction Box RJB-0016 XN24CF-RSB128-106
Antenna Cable
Junction Box RJB-0016

100-230 VAC
PSU-014
1ø, 50-60 Hz POWER SUPPLY
UNIT
440 VAC LAN Serial
1ø, 50-60 Hz Transformer
250V-TTYCS-1Q
Sensor
Adapter4 100-115/220-230 VAC
Switching HUB
1ø, 50-60 Hz
VDR HUB-100
Select one Serial 1 to 4
IEC 61162-2
Radar Control Unit RCU-025
(Gyrocompass1, AIS)
Trackball Control Unit RCU-026
IEC 61162-1
Select one (EPFS2 (Navigator),
ECDIS Control Unit RCU-024 SDME (Speed Log))
Radar Control Unit RCU-025 EC-3000
Trackball Control Unit RCU-026 PROCESSOR Serial 5 to 7
UNIT IEC 61162-1
Select one (EPFS2 (Navigator),
ECDIS Control Unit RCU-024 SDME (Speed Log),
Radar Control Unit RCU-025 Echo Sounder, Wind,
Trackball Control Unit RCU-026
Alarm7, Navtex, etc.)

Monitor Unit3 Digital Out 1 to 65

1: System Fail
Digital In (ACK IN) 2: Power Fail
VDR 3: Normal Close 1
Intelligent HUB 4: Normal Close 2
: Standard supply 5: Normal Open 1
HUB-3000
: Optional or local supply 6: Normal Open 2

xxii
 SYSTEM CONFIGURATIONS

S-band (TR-UP)

for FAR-3230S(-BB)/3330S, 30 kW for FAR-3230S-SSD(-BB)/3330S-SSD, 250 W

(w/Performance Monitor PM-52A) (w/Performance Monitor PM-52B)
SN24CF-RSB129-107 SN24CF-RSB133-111
SN30CF-RSB129-107 SN30CF-RSB133-111
Antenna Unit
SN36CF-RSB129-107 SN36CF-RSB133-111

Sub monitor
Antenna Cable
100-115/220-230 VAC
1ø, 50-60 Hz
(for de-icer)
PSU-014 or PSU-015
100-230 VAC
1ø, 50-60 Hz
POWER SUPPLY
UNIT
440 VAC
1ø, 50-60 Hz Transformer LAN Serial

Sensor
Adapter4 Switching HUB 100-115/220-230 VAC
VDR HUB-100 1ø, 50-60 Hz
Serial 1 to 4
Select one IEC 61162-2
Radar Control Unit RCU-025 (Gyrocompass1, AIS)
Trackball Control Unit RCU-026 IEC 61162-1
Select one (EPFS2 (Navigator),
SDME (Speed Log))
ECDIS Control Unit RCU-024
Radar Control Unit RCU-025
EC-3000 Serial 5 to 7
Trackball Control Unit RCU-026
PROCESSOR IEC 61162-1
Select one UNIT (EPFS2 (Navigator),
ECDIS Control Unit RCU-024 SDME (Speed Log),
Radar Control Unit RCU-025 Echo Sounder, Wind,
Trackball Control Unit RCU-026 Alarm7, Navtex, etc.)

Monitor Unit3 Digital Out 1 to 65

1: System Fail
Digital In (ACK IN) 2: Power Fail
3: Normal Close 1
VDR 4: Normal Close 2
Intelligent HUB 5: Normal Open 1
6: Normal Open 2
HUB-3000

xxiii
SYSTEM CONFIGURATIONS

X-band (TR-DOWN)

TRANSCEIVER UNIT
Waveguide RTR-108 Sub monitor

ANTENNA UNIT
w/ Perf. Monit. PM-32A 100-115/220-230 VAC
XN20CF-RSB-130 1ø, 50-60 Hz Antenna cable
XN24CF-RSB-130 (for de-icer)

PSU-014
100-230 VAC POWER SUPPLY
1ø, 50-60 Hz UNIT
440 VAC LAN Serial
Transformer
1ø, 50-60 Hz
Sensor
Adapter4 Switching HUB 100-115/220-230 VAC
HUB-100 1ø, 50-60 Hz
VDR
Select one Serial 1 to 4
Radar Control Unit RCU-025 IEC 61162-2
Trackball Control Unit RCU-026 (Gyrocompass1, AIS)
IEC 61162-1
Select one (EPFS2 (Navigator),
ECDIS Control Unit RCU-024 EC-3000 SDME (Speed Log))
Radar Control Unit RCU-025 PROCESSOR
Trackball Control Unit RCU-026 Serial 5 to 7
UNIT
IEC 61162-1
Select one (EPFS2 (Navigator),
ECDIS Control Unit RCU-024 SDME (Speed Log),
Radar Control Unit RCU-025 Echo Sounder, Wind,
Trackball Control Unit RCU-026
Alarm7, Navtex, etc.)
Monitor Unit3
Digital Out 1 to 65
Digital In (ACK IN) 1: System Fail
VDR 2: Power Fail
3: Normal Close 1
Intelligent HUB
4: Normal Close 2
HUB-3000
5: Normal Open 1
6: Normal Open 2

xxiv
 SYSTEM CONFIGURATIONS

S-band (TR-DOWN)

ANTENNA UNIT (w/Performance Monitor PM-52A)

SN36CF-RSB-131

TRANSCEIVER
UNIT Sub monitor
Coaxial cable RTR-109

100-115/220-230 VAC Antenna cable

1ø, 50-60 Hz
(for de-icer)

PSU-014 or PSU-015
100-230 VAC POWER SUPPLY
1ø, 50-60 Hz UNIT
PSU-014: 24 rpm antenna unit
440 VAC LAN Serial PSU-015: 42 rpm antenna unit
Transformer
1ø, 50-60 Hz

Sensor
Adapter4 Switching HUB
HUB-100 100-115/220-230 VAC
VDR 1ø, 50-60 Hz

Select one Serial 1 to 4

Radar Control Unit RCU-025 IEC 61162-2
Trackball Control Unit RCU-026 (Gyrocompass1, AIS)
IEC 61162-1
Select one EC-3000 (EPFS2 (Navigator),
ECDIS Control Unit RCU-024 SDME (Speed Log))
Radar Control Unit RCU-025
PROCESSOR
Trackball Control Unit RCU-026 UNIT Serial 5 to 7
IEC 61162-1
Select one (EPFS2 (Navigator),
ECDIS Control Unit RCU-024 SDME (Speed Log),
Radar Control Unit RCU-025 Echo Sounder, Wind,
Trackball Control Unit RCU-026 Alarm7, Navtex, etc.)

Monitor Unit3
Digital Out 1 to 65
Digital In (ACK IN) 1: System Fail
VDR 2: Power Fail
3: Normal Close 1
Intelligent HUB 4: Normal Close 2
HUB-3000 5: Normal Open 1
6: Normal Open 2

xxv
SYSTEM CONFIGURATIONS

Category of units
Antenna units: Exposed to the weather
Other units: Protected from the weather

Notes
1) The gyrocompass must be type approved for compliance with IMO resolution A.424(XI) (and/
or resolution A.821(19) for installation on HSC). The gyrocompass must also have an update
rate that is adequate for the ship’s rate of turn. The update rate must be better than 40 Hz
(HSC) or 20 Hz (conventional vessel).
2) The EPFS must be type approved for compliance with IMO resolution MSC.96(72).
3) The monitors listed in the following table have been approved by the IMO.
If a different monitor is to be used on IMO vessels, its effective diameter must meet the appli-
cable Category requirements.
• CAT 1C and CAT 1HC: effective diameter of 320 mm or higher
• CAT 2C and CAT 2HC: effective diameter of 250 mm or higher

Category Maker Model Viewing distance

CAT 1C and FURUNO MU-231 1.02 m
CAT 1HC MU-231CE 1.02 m
MU-270W 1.02 m
Hatteland Technology JH 23T12 FUD* 1.02 m
JH 23T14 FUD 1.02 m
HD 26T22 FUD 0.99 m
HD 26T21 MMD 0.99 m
HD 27T22 FUD 1.07 m
HD 32T22 FUD 1.15 m
HD 55T22 FUD 1.95 m
North Invent WA270-01.MON.01 1.07 m
WA460-01.MON.01 1.64 m
CAT 2C and FURUNO MU-190 1.02 m
CAT 2HC MU-201CE 1.08 m
Hatteland Technology JH 19T14 FUD 1.02 m
JH 20T17 FUD 0.88 m
HD 19T22 FUD 1.01 m
HD 24T22 FUD 0.86 m

For installation and operation of other monitors, see the respective manuals.
For BB types, a monitor unit is prepared by the user.
*: For use with radar only; do not use for Back-up ECDIS.
4) The sensor adapters are Control Serial MC-3000S, Analog IN MC-3010A, Digital IN
MC-3020D and Digital OUT MC-3030D.
5) Characteristics of contact output for Alarm:
• (Load current) 250 mA
• (Polarity) Normally Open: 2 ports, Normally Close: 2 ports
• Serial I/O for alarm is also possible, which complies with IEC 61162-1.

6) Junction boxes are required for antenna cable length greater than 100 m. Max. length is 400 m.
7) The ALR format is not BAM-compliant and shall not be used for new installation. It may be
used for retrofitting on ships-in-operation only.

xxvi
 SYSTEM CONFIGURATIONS

8) When using this unit as a Back-up ECDIS, the setup of the Back-up ECDIS must be completed
by a FURUNO approved service engineer.
9) When setting up Operator Fitness and connecting this unit to the BNWAS, ensure the Monitor
Unit and Control Unit are installed on the bridge where proper look-out can be carried out.

xxvii
SYSTEM CONFIGURATIONS

This page is intentionally left blank.

xxviii
1. OPERATIONAL OVERVIEW

1.1 Radar Control Unit RCU-025

1.1.1 Radar Control Unit RCU-025 description

The Radar Control Unit RCU-025 consists of various controls and a trackball module
(trackball, scrollwheel and left and right buttons). The trackball module functions like
a PC mouse. The user rolls the trackball and operates the left and right buttons and
the scrollwheel to do various functions.

Navigation tool Radar signal processing Navigation tool

Display control Radar system 28 2 1 38 37
3

8 9 10 11

4 12 13 14 15 29

5 16 17 18 19 30 31

32 33
20 21 22 23
34
24 25 26 27
35

Alert 7 6 Menu control Range Target 36

When you press the correct key, a single beep sounds to alert you to correct opera-
tion. For wrong operation, several beeps sound. You can select the loudness of the
beep or deactivate the beep on the [Customize] menu.

No. Control Description

1 Turns the system on or off. (For configurations using a FURUNO monitor
with the slide switch ON, this key also turns the monitor unit on or off.)
2 Status LED The color and state of the LED change according to system or alert status.
Green, lighting: Normal operation status; no alerts generated.
Green, flashing: The heater on the CPU board is on, because ambient
temperature is not at least 0°C. The heater takes about two minutes to
warm the processor unit. The LED lights green after the heater goes off.
Red, lighting: Acknowledged alert or SYSTEM FAIL. SYSTEM FAIL oc-
curs when there is trouble in the Processor Unit or communication failure
between the Processor Unit and a Control Unit. Each Control Unit detects
trouble and its lamp flashes in red and the buzzer sounds. If this condition
occurs at the No. 1 Control Unit, the SYSTEM FAIL signal is output.
Red, flashing: Unacknowledged alert or SYSTEM FAIL.
3 Rotary control, Rotary control: Adjusts the active EBL.
4 EBL1, EBL2 EBL1, EBL2: Activates or deactivates the respective EBL.

1-1
1. OPERATIONAL OVERVIEW

No. Control Description

5 ALARM ACK • Acknowledges unacknowledged alert.
• Silences the audio alarm.
6 InstantAccess Selects the buttons on the InstantAccess bar™.
knob
7 ESC Goes back one step in current operating sequence on the InstantAccess
bar™.
8 BRILL Rotate: Adjusts the brilliance of the display.
Push: Selects a color palette.
9 A/C RAIN Rotate: Suppresses rain clutter.
Push: Toggles between manual and automatic rain clutter adjustment.
10 A/C SEA Rotate: Suppresses sea clutter.
Push: Toggles between manual and automatic sea clutter adjustment.
11 GAIN Rotate: Adjusts the sensitivity of the radar receiver.
12 HL OFF • Temporarily erases everything except radar echoes when pressed and
held down.
• Enters the numeric 1.
• Selects like-numbered menu item.
13 EBL OFFSET • Activates or deactivates the offset EBL.
• Enters the numeric 2.
• Selects like-numbered menu item.
14 MODE • Selects a presentation mode.
• Enters the numeric 3.
• Selects like-numbered menu item.
15 STBY TX Toggles the radar between standby and TX.
16 OFF CENTER • Puts sweep origin at the cursor location.
• Enters the numeric 4.
• Selects like-numbered menu item.
17 CU/TM RESET • Course-up: Resets heading line to 000°.
• True motion: Moves own ship position 75% of the radius in stern direc-
tion.
• Enters the numeric 5.
• Selects like-numbered menu item.
18 INDEX LINE • Selects an index line (in the PI line box).
• Long-press to activate or deactivate selected index line.
• Enters the numeric 6.
• Selects like-numbered menu item.
19 MENU Opens, closes the menu.
20 VECTOR TIME • Sets the vector time (length) for TT and AIS targets.
• Enters the numeric 7.
• Selects like-numbered menu item.
21 VECTOR • Sets the vector mode (relative, true) for TT and AIS targets.
MODE • Enters the numeric 8.
• Selects like-numbered menu item.
22 TARGET LIST • Displays AIS, TT data in the target list.
• Enters the numeric 9.
• Selects like-numbered menu item.
23 CANCEL Cancels the changes made on the currently selected menu.
24 TRAIL • Goes back one page in the menu.
• Moves cursor leftward in text box.
• Turns the echo trail display on or off.
• Long-press to reset all trails.

1-2
 1. OPERATIONAL OVERVIEW

No. Control Description

25 PANEL • Adjusts the backlighting of the keys.
• Enters the numeric 0.
• Selects like-numbered menu item.
26 MARK • Goes forward one page in the menu.
• Moves cursor rightward in text box.
• Inputs selected mark on the radar screen, at the position selected.
27 ENTER Confirms selection on menu.
28 Rotary control, Rotary control: Adjusts the diameter of the active VRM.
29 VRM1, VRM2 VRM1, VRM2: Activates or deactivates the respective VRM.
30 UNDO Undoes edit or text input when creating a radar map, route, user chart.
31 VIEW/HIDE Radar mode, chart radar mode: Shows or hides the AZ box, Drop mark
boxes, Mark box, PI line box, Trial box.
Chart for radar mode: Shows or hides the EBLs, InstantAccess bar™,
[Overlay/NAV Tools] box, [Route information] box, VRMs.
32 RANGE Selects radar range (radar and chart radar modes), chart scale (chart
mode).
33 ACQ/ACT • TT: Acquires cursor-selected target, for target tracking.
• AIS: Activates cursor-selected sleeping AIS target.
34 TARGET DATA Displays the detailed data for selected TT, AIS target, in the TT/AIS infor-
mation box.
35 TARGET • TT: Stops tracking cursor-selected tracked target.
CANCEL • AIS: Sleeps cursor-selected activated AIS target.
• Long-press to erase all displayed TT target data.
36 Trackball The trackball module is the same as that used in the Trackball Control Unit
module RCU-026. See the description in the next section.
37 USB port For connection of USB flash memory (FAT16 or FAT32 format). Do not con-
nect a USB HDD or PC keyboard. The DVD drive (Maker: TEAC, Type: PU-
DRV10) is for chart updates.
38 Speaker Activates key beeps and alert sounds.
Note: A thin waterproofing sheet is attached to the speaker on the control
unit. Do not insert brushes or other objects into the speaker holes when
cleaning them. If the sheet is torn, the speaker may be damaged if water
leaks through the holes.

1.1.2 Operator fitness

The system outputs the operator fitness signal when a key or button is pressed, the
trackball is moved or a rotary control is rotated.

1-3
1. OPERATIONAL OVERVIEW

1.2 Trackball Control Unit RCU-026

1.2.1 Trackball Control Unit RCU-026 description

The Trackball Control Unit RCU-026 has a power switch, a trackball module (trackball,
scrollwheel and left and right mouse buttons), a status LED, and a USB port. The
trackball module functions like a PC mouse; the user rolls the trackball and operates
the left and right buttons and the scrollwheel to do various functions.

1 3 4

2 7

No. Control Description

1 Power switch Turns the system on or off. (For configurations using a FURUNO monitor with
the slide switch ON, this key also turns the monitor unit on or off.)
2 Status LED The color and state of the LED change according to system or alert status. See
the Status LED description on page 1-1page 1-1.
3 Left button • Does the operation related to the object selected.
• Confirms the operation done for the object selected.
4 Scrollwheel • Selects menu options.
• Selects chart scale.
• Sets numeric data.
(The scrollwheel does not have a "push" function.)
5 Right button • Displays context-sensitive menu when the cursor is put in the display area.
• Cancels operation done on the object selected.
6 Trackball • Moves the cursor.
• Selects an object.
7 USB port For connection of USB flash memory (FAT16 or FAT32 format). Do not con-
nect a USB HDD or PC keyboard.

1.2.2 Operator fitness

The system outputs the operator fitness signal when a key or button is pressed, the
trackball is moved or a rotary control is rotated.

1-4
 1. OPERATIONAL OVERVIEW

1.3 Processor Unit EC-3000

The Processor Unit is the heart of the chart system, and is mainly responsible for the
chart management, route planning and route navigation.

The Processor Unit has two power switches. The Mains switch controls the power
from the switchboard, and the Power switch controls the power to the chart radar sys-
tem.

DVD
drive

RJ45 Network

Mains switch LAN1 port (Gateway network)

LAN2 port (IEC 61162-450 equipment)
LAN3 port (for radar sensor connection䠅
Power switch
Note 1: Do not operate the chart radar with a DVD or CD inserted in the DVD drive,
to prevent damage to the drive and media. Remove media from the drive after usage.
Insert media only to update charts. After completion of an update, remove the media
from its drive and store it in its case. Store media out of direct sunlight, in a place
where temperature and humidity are moderate and stable.
Note 2: To keep the system stable, restart the unit at least once every two weeks.
Note 3: Close the lid of the DVD drive when the drive is not in use.

1-5
1. OPERATIONAL OVERVIEW

1.4 How to Turn the System On/Off

Normally, leave the power switches at the front of the Processor Unit on and control
the power with the power switch on a Control Unit (RCU-025, RCU-026). The monitor
unit is powered independently.

How to power the system

Push the mains switch on the Processor Unit for the "I" position. Turn on the power
switch on the Processor Unit or a Control Unit. The start-up display appears on the
monitor.

After the power is applied, the program starts up and about one minute later the bear-
ing scale appears. The radar then goes into three minutes of warm-up time to warm
the magnetron, which transmits radar pulses. The timer at the center of the screen
counts the time remaining for warm-up. When the timer shows 0:00, the indication
"ST-BY" appears at the screen center. The radar is now ready to transmit radar puls-
es. In the stand-by condition, no radar pulses are transmitted and TT nor AIS is active.

The settings on the menus are stored in a non-volatile memory (hard disk) and are
preserved when the power is turned off.

Note 1: The solid state radar does not have a magnetron, therefore it has no warming
period.
Note 2: If the ambient temperature is less than 0°C (32°F) when the power is applied,
nothing appears on the display and the Status LED on the Control Unit flashes. This
is because the heater is warming the unit. The display appears in approx. two minutes.

How to power off the system

Press the power switch on the Processor Unit or a Control Unit. Push the Mains switch
for the "O" position.

Note: Provided that the radar was once in use with the transmitter tube (magnetron)
still warm, you can put the radar in transmit state without three minutes of warm-up. If
the Power switch was turned off by mistake or the like and you wish to restart the radar
promptly, turn on the Power switch not later than 10 seconds after power-off.

1-6
 1. OPERATIONAL OVERVIEW

1.5 How to Select a Color Palette

This radar provides three sets of color and brilliance sets (palette), day, dusk and
night, to match any ambient lighting condition. The default specifications of each pal-
ette are as shown in the table below. The panel dimmer setting is automatically
changed, and the number of steps depends on the color palette selected.

Brilliance
Panel dimmer Text Background
Palette 19” display 23”/27”
(step) color color
unit display unit
Day-gray 110cd/m2 120cd/m2 9 White Gray
Day-blue 110cd/m2 120cd/m2 9 White Blue
Dusk-gray 50cd/m2 50cd/m2 8 Light gray Dark gray
Dusk-blue 50cd/m2 50cd/m2 8 Light gray Dark blue
Night-gray 5cd/m2 5cd/m2 5 Orange Dark gray
Night-blue 5cd/m2 5cd/m2 5 Light gray Dark blue

To select a palette, do the following:

1. Click the [Palette] button.

[Palette] S
button

2. Click [Day], [Dusk] or [Night] as appropriate. For example, select [Day] to show its
options.

3. Click the palette (gray, blue) desired.

Note 1: A palette can also be selected by pushing the BRILL control on the Control
Unit.
Note 2: S or L appears at the right edge of the button to denote sharing method. See
section 22.6section 22.6.

1-7
1. OPERATIONAL OVERVIEW

1.6 How to Adjust the Display Brilliance, Control

Unit Backlighting
The brilliance setting is defined according to the color palette setting (see
section 1.5section 1.5). However, manual adjustment of the brilliance is also possible.

Note 1: Use a serial cable for brilliance adjustment to make the connection between
the Processor Unit and the Control Unit.
Note 2: For details regarding your monitor, see its operator’s manual.
Note 3: Improper brilliance may affect the visibility of information, especially on the
night display.
Note 4: S or L appears at the right edge of the button to denote sharing method. See
section 22.6section 22.6.

1.6.1 Manual brilliance adjustment

How to adjust the brilliance manually with the BRILL control
Operate the BRILL control to adjust brilliance. Turn it clockwise to increase the bril-
liance; counterclockwise to decrease the brilliance. Watch the brilliance level indica-
tion on the [BRILL] button (see the illustration below) to see the current brilliance level.

How to adjust the brilliance manually with the InstantAccess knob

1. Push the InstantAccess knob.
2. Rotate the knob to select the [BRILL] button then push the knob to show the bril-
liance adjustment window.
Calibration state
CALIB: Default setting
UNCALIB: Manual setting
Current
S brilliance level
Slider bar

[BRILL] S [CALIB]
button button

Control unit backlight adjustment

(Appears in chart for radar mode only.)
3. Push the knob, rotate the knob to set the brilliance then push the knob to confirm
the setting. The calibration state indication changes to "UNCALIB".
4. To restore the default setting, rotate the knob to select the [CALIB] button then
push the knob. The calibration state indication changes to "CALIB".

Manual brilliance adjustment with the trackball module

1. Click the [BRILL] button on the InstantAccess bar™ to show the brilliance adjust-
ment window.
2. For coarse adjustment, put the cursor on a location within the slider bar area
then push the left button. For fine adjustment, put the cursor on the end of the
slider bar and roll the trackball while holding down the left button.

1-8
 1. OPERATIONAL OVERVIEW

3. Release the left button to confirm setting. The calibration state indication changes
to "UNCALIB".
4. To restore the default setting, click the [CALIB] button. The calibration state indi-
cation changes to "CALIB".

1.6.2 Control unit backlighting

How to adjust the brilliance manually with the control unit (RCU-025)
Push the PANEL key to adjust backlighting of the control unit.

How to adjust the brilliance manually on the menu (For Radar mode and
Chart radar mode)
1. Right-click the BRILL button on the InstantAccess bar™ then select [Brill Menu].
2. Adjust the backlighting on the [1 CONTROL PANEL] menu.

How to adjust the brilliance manually with the InstantAccess knob (For chart
mode)
1. Push the InstantAccess knob.
2. Rotate the knob to select the [BRILL] button then push the knob to show the bril-
liance adjustment window.
3. Put the cursor on the backlighting setting, and up and down arrows appear. Click
the arrows to adjust the backlighting.

Backlight
S setting range

Current backlighting level

Click arrows to set backlighting.

1-9
1. OPERATIONAL OVERVIEW

1.7 Display Modes

This chart radar has the following display modes:

• [RADAR]: - The radar mode provides the traditional radar display.

- The chart radar mode overlays the electronic chart on the radar image.
• [CHART for RADAR]: The chart mode shows the electronic charts.
• [CONNING for RADAR]*: The conning mode provides a comprehensive navigation
data display. * Optional specification.

1.7.1 How to select a display mode

Click the Display mode button to select desired mode.

• [RADAR]: Radar or chart radar mode (see subsection 1.8.2subsection 1.8.2)

• [CHART for RADAR]: Chart for radar mode
• [Back-up ECDIS]: Back-up ECDIS mode (replaces [CHART for RADAR]
• [CONNING for RADAR]: Conning mode (see section 24.1section 24.1)

Display
mode
button

With Back-up
ECDIS enabled

1.7.2 Limitations when using the chart radar mode

The presentation mode for the chart radar mode can be course-up RM, north-up RM,
or north-up TM. The presentation mode is automatically switched to north-up RM if the
mode is head-up at the time the chart radar mode is selected.

1.7.3 Limitations when using Back-up ECDIS mode

When Back-up ECDIS mode is enabled, the following changes are also applied.

• The [CHART for RADAR] button changes to read "Back-up ECDIS".

• Own Ship look-ahead Area is always active and cannot be turned off.
• The talker for some sentences (route/alerts) changes from "RA" to "EI".

1-10
 1. OPERATIONAL OVERVIEW

1.8 Display Screens

All display screens have operational buttons, boxes and indications, and display mark-
ers. Click a button or indication to execute the related operation. Context-sensitive
menus are available with several boxes and objects. Right-click the appropriate box
or object to show the related context-sensitive menu.

Monitor viewing distance

The optimal viewing distance for the FURUNO-supplied monitors is 1020 mm.

1.8.1 Radar display

The illustration below shows the markers, data, etc. as they appear on the FURUNO
19-inch monitor unit. The layout for the 23-inch and 27-inch monitor unit is partially dif-
ferent - the button appears on the bottom of the InstantAccess bar™.

Message
area 1
6

* 22 2
21
23
20 24
19 25 3

28 27
ACE 26 4
OFF 29
35

18
32 31 30

33
17 10
16

S
15
11
S 5
34
12
6
7

14 13 9 8
TX CH TX CH
*: For solid state radar, 1 2

No. Name Description

1 Status bar • Selects an antenna.
• Selects the mode.
• Adjusts the radar picture.
• Displays radar operational messages.

1-11
1. OPERATIONAL OVERVIEW

No. Name Description

2 Sensor information, Shows your ship's heading, heading source, ship's speed, water
datum box tracking speed, speed source, course over ground, speed over
ground, course and speed source, ship's position, position source,
chart datum.
Note: Position source shall meet the requirements of IMO
MSC.112(73).
3 Menu Drop-down menu with various radar and chart functions.
4 Information box Provides various navigation data and route information.
5 TT/AIS setting box Sets the parameters for TT and AIS targets.
6 Trail box Sets the parameters for the target trails.
7 Alert box Shows alert messages by alert name and alert number.
• Unacknowledged or regenerated alerts flash in red (alarm) or yel-
low-orange (warning).
• Acknowledged alerts are shown in normal video.
8 Acquisition zone box Sets an acquisition zone for TT, AIS.
9 VRM boxes Shows the range and TTG to the VRM1, VRM2.
10 Target list button Displays the TT and AIS target list.
11 Trial maneuver box Sets the parameters for the trial maneuver.
12 Drop mark 2 box Shows the bearing and range to the drop mark 2.
13 EBL boxes Shows the bearing to the EBL1, EBL2.
14 Mark box Selects the mark to inscribe on the radar display.
15 Drop mark1 box Shows the bearing and range to the drop mark 1.
16 PI line box • Adjusts the direction and width of the parallel index lines.
• Activates or deactivates the parallel index lines.
17 Watch box Counts down the time remaining until the buzzer sounds to alert the
operator to view the radar picture.
18 InstantAccess bar™ Quick access to often-used radar, chart radar and chart functions. For
radar and chart radar functions, see section 1.10section 1.10. For
chart functions, see subsection 6.1.3subsection 6.1.3.
19 Tuning bar Shows tuning status. (No function with solid state radar.)
20 Range/Presentation • Selects the radar range.
mode box • Selects the presentation mode.
21 REF point box Selects the reference point (antenna or CCRP) for measurements
(range, bearing, etc.) and markers (position, etc.)
22 Heading line Indicates ship's heading.
23 Bearing scale The bearing scale provides an estimate of the bearing to a target.
24 Cursor position box This box shows
• Latitude and longitude of the cursor position.
• Range and bearing to the cursor position.
• TTG to the cursor position.
25 EBL1
Measures the bearing to a target.
26 EBL2
27 VRM1
Measures the range to a target.
28 VRM2
29 Drop mark 1
Finds the range and bearing to drop mark position.
30 Drop mark 2
31 Antenna marker A cross marks antenna position.
32 Own ship marker An inverted “T” marks your ship’s position.
33 Stern marker Marks location of stern.
34 North marker Marks North.
35 Range rings Provide an estimate of the range to a target.

1-12
 1. OPERATIONAL OVERVIEW

How to minimize, maximize the boxes at the bottom of the screen

The boxes at the bottom of the screen that contain an arrow can be minimized. Click
the arrow to minimize the box. To restore maximum size, click the minimized box.

Click arrow
to minimize.

Click here to
maximize.

Example: Mark box

Note: The respective VRM or EBL is erased from the screen when the corresponding
VRM or EBL box is minimized.

1.8.2 Chart radar display

The chart radar display overlays an electronic chart on the radar picture. To switch be-
tween the radar and chart radar displays, click the [Chart ON/OFF] button on the In-
stantAccess bar™.

ACE
OFF

Click to hide,
show chart.

1-13
1. OPERATIONAL OVERVIEW

1.8.3 Chart display

The chart display shows only the electronic chart. Click the Display mode button to se-
lect [CHART for RADAR] to activate this display. See chapter 6 or a description of the
chart display.

Select [CHART for RADAR].

CHART
for RADAR

DISP ALL
S
0.5NM 4min
AUTO ACT FILT

1-14
 1. OPERATIONAL OVERVIEW

1.9 Status Bar

The Status bar is displayed at the top of screen in all modes. This bar provides, in the
radar and chart radar modes, buttons for selection of the mode, antenna and chart da-
tabase, and adjustment of the radar picture.

For a description of the Status bar used in the chart for radar mode, see
subsection 6.1.2subsection 6.1.2. For a description of the Status bar used in the con-
ning mode, see section 24.1section 24.1.

1.9.1 Status bar for radar, chart radar mode

2 4 6 8 10 12

1 3 5 7 9 11 13

No. Button name Description

1 Display Mode Selects the display mode: [RADAR], [CHART for RADAR], [CONNING for
RADAR]*. * Optional specification.
2 STBY TX Toggles the radar between stand-by and transmit.
3 Antenna Selects an antenna.
4 Customize Presets the radar controls for specific navigation purpose; for example,
Echo congested waters.
5 Chart database Selects the chart database (IMO Base, IMO Primary, IMO Standard, IMO
All or PERSONAL).
6 Message area Displays the message or icon.
7 RAIN* Reduces rain clutter.
8 SEA* Reduces sea clutter.
9 GAIN Adjusts the gain of the radar receiver.
10 Settings Manages user profiles; opens the Settings menu.

11 Date • Displays the date.

• Selects the time to use, local or UTC.
• Sets the time difference between local and UTC (to use local time).
12 Time Displays the time, local or UTC.
13 Working • Rotates clockwise if the system is working properly. If it is not spinning
Indicator the system is not working. Shortly after the working indicator stops spin-
ning the buzzer sounds and the status LED turns red. Reset the power
R to restore normal operation.
• If the primary display mode is specified during installation, the first letter
E C of the primary mode name appears at the center of the working indicator
as follows: C: Conning, E: ECDIS, R: Radar. The letter can be clicked to
return to the primary display mode.

*: The indication is grayed out when the Automatic Clutter Elimination (ACE) function
is [ON].

1-15
1. OPERATIONAL OVERVIEW

1.9.2 How to operate the buttons, slider bars on the Status bar
The Status bar has three types of controls: toggle button, drop-down list button and
slider bar. You operate the buttons and bars with the trackball module.

Control type Example of control

Toggle button
A toggle button alternately selects one of two
functions assigned to the button. For example,
the [STBY TX] button toggles the radar between
stand-by and TX. The background color of the
[STBY TX] button momentarily changes to light-
blue when switching from standby to TX.
Drop-down list button
A drop-down list button provides a list from which
to select an option related to the label on the but-
ton. A drop-down list button is identified by a tri-
angle on the button’s bottom-right corner. The Click button to show
[Chart database] button, shown in the right figure, drop-down list.
is an example of a drop-down list button.

Slider bar
The slider bars provide for adjustment of the ra-
dar picture. [RAIN], [SEA] and [GAIN] are slider
bar buttons. To adjust the bar coarsely, put the
cursor at any location within the slider bar area
then push the left button. For fine adjustment, put
the cursor at the end of the slider bar and roll the
trackball while holding down the left button. Re-
lease the button to finish.

1-16
 1. OPERATIONAL OVERVIEW

1.10 InstantAccess Bar™

The InstantAccess bar™ runs vertically along the
left edge of the screen and is displayed always.
1 PULSE PULSE
This bar provides, in the radar and chart radar M3 M3
modes, buttons for adjustment of the radar picture
and chart, AIS operations, display brilliance con- *1 TUNE TUNE
2
trol, MOB, screenshot, etc. MAN MAN

For a description of the InstantAccess bar™ used 3 IR IR

OFF OFF
in the chart mode, see
subsection 6.1.3subsection 6.1.3. ES ES
4 OFF OFF
*1: For solid state radar, [TX CH] icon is displayed
instead of [TUNE]. 5 EAV EAV
OFF OFF
*2: This button is not displayed on the FURUNO
19-inch monitor unit. ACE ACE
6 OFF OFF

HL HL
7 OFF OFF

8 CU/TM CU/TM
reset reset

9 MAP MAP
ON OFF

Chart Chart
10 OFF ON

Chart Chart
Disp 11 Disp

OWN OWN
12 AIS AIS

13
AIS AIS
S S
14
Day Day
S S
15
88 88

16 MOB MOB

17 Radar
Radar
mode, mode,
2 chart chart
18 * OFF ON

1-17
1. OPERATIONAL OVERVIEW

No. Button name Description

1 PULSE Selects the radar pulse length.
2 TUNE (Magnetron radar) Selects the radar receiver tuning method, automatic or manual,
and manually tunes the radar receiver.
TX CH (solid state radar) Selects the transmit frequency from [TX CH 1] or [TX CH 2]. If your
radar is receiving interference from another radar operating at the
same frequency, use the [TX CH] button to change the TX fre-
quency.
3 IR Activates or deactivates the interference rejector.
4 ES Activates or deactivates the echo stretch.
5 EAV Activates or deactivates the echo averaging when Automatic Clut-
ter Elimination (ACE) function is off.
6 ACE Activates or deactivates the Automatic Clutter Elimination (ACE)
function.
Automatic Clutter Elimination (ACE) automatically sets the gain,
rain and sea clutter controls according to the sea and rain clutter
states.
7 HL OFF Temporarily erases everything but radar echoes.
8 CU/TM reset • Puts the ship’s heading at the top of the screen in course-up
mode the moment this button is pressed.
• Resets the ship's position to a point of 75% radius opposite to
the extension of the heading line passing through the display
center in true motion modes.
9 MAP ON/OFF Shows or hides the radar map marks on the radar display, in the
radar mode.
10 CHART ON/OFF Shows or hides the electronic chart.
11 Chart Disp Shows or hides various chart objects. Shown in the chart radar
mode. See subsection 2.43.2subsection 2.43.2.
12 OWN AIS Shows the [VOYAGE DATA] menu, to set your ship’s AIS data.
13 AIS message Displays screen for “received AIS messages”.

14 Palette Selects a color palette, day, dusk or night. The S or L at the right
S OR L edge of the label indicates how the color palette selection is
shared, among the units of the system (S) or locally (L). The de-
fault setting is “S”. See section 22.6section 22.6.
15 BRILL • Adjusts the brilliance of the monitor.
S OR L
• Adjusts the backlighting for the control unit. (CHART for RA-
DAR mode)
The S or L at the right edge of the label indicates how the bril-
liance/backlighting selection is shared, among the units of the sys-
tem (S) or locally (L). The default setting is “S”. See
section 22.6section 22.6.
16 MOB Enters a MOB mark at the current position.
17 Capture Takes a screenshot.

18 UNDO Restores previous condition in radar map and text input.

1-18
 1. OPERATIONAL OVERVIEW

1.10.1 How to operate the buttons, slider bars on the InstantAccess

bar™
The InstantAccess bar™ has three types of controls: toggle button, drop-down list but-
ton and slider bar. (The MOB and Capture buttons are special buttons.) You operate
the buttons and bars with the trackball module or the InstantAccess knob. This sec-
tion shows you how to use the InstantAccess knob.

Toggle button Drop-down list button Slider bar

A drop-down list button provides a
list from which to select an option
related to the label on the button.
A drop-down list button is identi-
fied by a triangle on the button’s
bottom-right corner.
[Palette]
button
S

Palette list

1. Push the InstantAccess knob to enable its use with the InstantAccess bar™.
2. Rotate the InstantAccess knob to select a button. The background color of the
button selected is light-blue.
3. Do one of the following depending on button type.
1) Toggle button: Push the knob to select setting.
2) Drop-down list button or slider bar: Push the knob then rotate the knob to
select an item or adjust the slider bar. Push the knob to confirm your selection.
Note: You can use the ESC key to go back one step in the current operating
sequence.

1-19
1. OPERATIONAL OVERVIEW

1.11 Sensor Information, Datum Box

Sensor information, datum box displays the sen-
sor data and the name of the datum in use. If the
selected sensor’s signal is interrupted or lost, the
system automatically switches to a usable sen-
sor. The sensor indications and names are col-
ored according to sensor state. See the table
below.
• HDG: Heading and its source.
• SPD: Longitudinal speed and its source. The
direction of transverse speed is indicated with
arrows, , Starboard, , Port.
• COG: Course over ground and its source.
• SOG: Speed over ground and its source.
Note: The position source shall meet
• POSN: Latitude and longitude position of own
the requirements of IMO
ship and its source.
MSC.112(73).
• Datum: Chart datum (WGS84, WGS72, etc.)
in use. No datum appears when there is no
datum sentence.

Color of nav data indications and sensor name

The color of the nav data indications and sensor names changes according to the
state of the sensor data. The table shown below provides basic indication and color
meanings. For detailed information, see Appendix 3. When no sensor data is received,
the sensor source indication is blank and the related indication shows asterisks.

Color of nav Color of

Nav data indication State
data indication sensor name
Green White Sensor is normal.

Yellow White Validity of data is low or

offset is applied.

Yellowish- Yellowish- Integrity check failed

12.5kn GPS1 orange orange
0.3kn
286.0°T GPS1
13.1kn
30°00.0000'N
GPS1 020°00.0000'E

Green, data No display Data is not being re-

shown with as- ceived.
terisks (***.*)

Yellow White Data is input manually

MAN

MAN
(manual heading, gyro
correction, manual
speed, dead reckoning).
DR

1-20
 1. OPERATIONAL OVERVIEW

Note: Depending on settings selected at installation, the integrity check (see

section 16.7section 16.7) result colors can be changed. In this case, nav data color
changes according to status as follows:
• [Passed]: Green
• [Doubtful]: Yellow
• [Failed], [Not Available] or [Excluded]: Bright Yellow

1.12 Menu Overview

The menu consists of eight main menus and several sub menus. You can operate the
menu with the Radar Control Unit or trackball module. The system closes open menus
whenever there is no menu operation for 30 seconds.

1.12.1 Basic menu operation

1. Open the main menu.
Control Unit: Press the MENU key.
Trackball module: Click the menu title bar at the right side of the display.

Menu title bar

2. Select a menu.
Control Unit: Press the corresponding numeric key. For example, press the 3 key
to show the [NAV TOOL] menu.
Trackball module: Click the menu desired. The current selection is highlighted in
blue.

Click [3 NAV TOOL]

or press the 3 key.

3. Select a menu item.

Control Unit: Press the corresponding numeric key.
Trackball module: Click the menu item desired. The current selection is highlight-
ed in blue.
4. Select a menu option.
Control Unit: Press the corresponding numeric key. The current selection is high-
lighted in orange.
Trackball module: Spin the scrollwheel. The current selection is highlighted in or-
ange.

1-21
1. OPERATIONAL OVERVIEW

5. Confirm your selection.

Control Unit: Press the ENTER key.
Trackball module: Push the left button.
Note: Hereafter, "select" in a menu operating procedure means to press the applica-
ble numeric key on the Control Unit or push the left button on the trackball module.

Keys, buttons to use in menus

Control Unit

MENU key: Open main menu, or close menu.

CANCEL key: Go back one layer in menu, or close menu when main menu is dis-
played.
←key: Return to main menu, in no. 2 layer or higher.

Trackball module

Right button: Go back one layer, or close menu when main menu is displayed.
Left button: (1) Click menu title bar to go back one layer, or close menu when main
menu is displayed, (2) Click the left arrow on the menu title bar to return to the main
menu, in no.2 layer or higher.

1.12.2 Menu history feature

This chart radar remembers the 10 last-used menus to help you go to recently used
menus quickly. The memorized menus are cleared when the power is turned off. In-
stallation- and service-related menus and menus where no operation occurred are not
memorized. Menus accessed multiple times are counted as one menu.

Click the memory history buttons on the menu title bar to navigate through the last-
used menus.

Menu history buttons

History back History forward

button button
For example, the last two used menus are [NAV TOOL] and [AIS].

Click

Click

Memorized menu no. 1

Memorized menu no. 2

1-22
 1. OPERATIONAL OVERVIEW

1.12.3 How to enter numeric data

Select the numeric data, then do one of the following:
Control Unit: Use the ten keys to enter data.
Trackball module: Spin the scrollwheel to set data then push the left button.

1.12.4 How to enter alphanumeric character data

Some operations display a software keyboard to enter alphanumeric character data.

Click to switch between

letters and symbols.

To enter characters, click applicable characters on the software keyboard. You can
switch between letter input and symbol input by clicking the key circled in the illustra-
tion above.

1-23
1. OPERATIONAL OVERVIEW

1.13 Context-Sensitive Menus in the Radar Mode

Context-sensitive menus are available with many of the boxes and buttons surround-
ing the display area and objects within the display area. Right-click the boxes and but-
tons marked with numerals in the illustration below to show the related context-
sensitive menus. If a menu is not operated within 30 seconds, it is automatically
closed.

For context-sensitive menus in the chart mode, see the chapter on chart overview.

1.13.1 Context-sensitive menus available with buttons and boxes

41 42 1

39 40 2

38
3

37

Context-sensitive menus
on the radar echoes
36
(see paragraph 1.13.2)
35

33 5
34 6 7
8 9 10
11 12
32 13 14
23
15 16
30 25 18
17 20
21
31 19 20
3229
29 ° 28
240.8° 27 26 24 22
0.088

No. Box name Menu No. Box name Menu

1 Adjust Local Time Adjust Local Time 2 Cursor Position Range-Bearing Po-
sition, X-Y Position,
Cursor Menu
3 Sensor Informa- Select Sensor, OS 4 AIS Info Expanded AIS Data,
tion, Datum Box Info Menu AIS Message
5 Association Association OFF/ 6 TT OFF / MAN / AUTO /
TT/AIS, Association MAN/AUTO,TT
Menu Menu, Symbol Menu
7 AIS DISP OFF / FILT / 8 Vector OS Vector Menu,
ALL, AIS Menu, Target Vector Menu
Symbol Menu

1-24
 1. OPERATIONAL OVERVIEW

No. Box name Menu No. Box name Menu

9 Vector Time Vector Time (30 s - 10 Vector Reference True-G(S), REL, OS
60 min), OS Vector Vector Menu, Target
Menu, Target Vector Vector Menu
Menu
11 CPA Range CPA Range 12 CPA time CPA Time
(0.5 - 20 NM) (1 - 60 min)
13 AIS CPA Auto Activate Menu 14 Auto Activate OFF, AUTO ACT
FILT, AUTO ACT
ALL, Auto Activate
Menu
15 Lost TGT TT Lost Filter Menu, 16 Lost TGT Filter OFF, FILT, ALL, TT
AIS Lost Filter Menu Lost Filter Menu,
AIS Lost Filter Menu
17 Past POSN Past POSN Menu 18 Past POSN display Past POSN display
interval interval (OFF, 30 s -
6 min), Past POSN
Menu
19 Trail Trail All Clear, Trail 20 Trail Time Trail Time (OFF, 15
Menu s - 30 min, CONT),
Trail Menu
21 Trail/Past POSN True-G(S), REL, 22 Alert List Alert List/Log Win-
Reference Past POSN Menu, dow
Trail Menu
23 Trial Trial Mode, Trial 24 AZ Acquisition Zone
Maneuver Menu Menu
25 Drop Mark 2 Drop2 Off 26 VRM 2 VRM2 Off,
EBL•VRM Menu
27 VRM 1 VRM1 Off, 28 EBL 2 EBL2 Off,
EBL•VRM Menu EBL•VRM Menu
29 EBL 1 EBL1 Off, 30 Drop Mark 1 Drop1 Off
EBL•VRM Menu
31 Mark Mark Color (B-type 32 PI Line Number of PI Line,
only), Mark Position, Reset PI Line,
MAP File, Edit Map PI Menu
Comment,
Map•Mark Menu
33 Watch Watch Time 34 Brill Menu Brill Menu
(OFF, 6 - 20 min)
35 Chart ON/OFF Chart Display Menu 36 MAP ON/OFF Radar Map Menu,
Route Menu, Event
Menu, User Chart
Menu
37 ACE Automatic Clutter 38* TUNE Tune Initialize
Elimination (ACE)
Menu
39 PULSE Pulse Menu 40 RANGE Range Scales
0.125 to 96.0 NM
41 Antenna Selection Dual Radar, 42 Customize Echo Customize Echo
ANT Select Menu Menu

*: For solid state radar, this menu is not displayed.

1-25
1. OPERATIONAL OVERVIEW

1.13.2 Context-sensitive menus in the display area in the radar and

chart radar modes
Right-click anywhere in the display area in the radar and chart radar modes to show
the context-sensitive menu.

Radar Map Off, Chart On

Radar Map On, Chart Off Radar Map Off, Chart Off

Radar Map Off, Chart On,

area selected
Radar Map On, Chart Off, Radar Map Off, Chart Off,
area selected area selected

[Target Data/ACQ/ACT]: For cursor-selected TT or AIS target, display target data, ac-
quire target for TT, or activate sleeping AIS target.
[Target Cancel]: Cancel tracking on selected tracked target (erase target), sleep activat-
ed AIS target.
[Off Center]: Off center the display.
[EBL Offset]: Offset EBL1, EBL2 (to measure range and bearing between two targets).
[Zoom Set]: Select zoom area.
[Area Select]: Specify the area where to delete, copy marks.
[Mark Delete]: Delete cursor-selected mark. Grayed out when radar map is off.
[Mark Copy]: Copy cursor-selected mark. Grayed out when radar map is off.
[Own Ship Offset]: Apply an offset to own ship
position.
[REF Mark]: Make cursor-selected target a reference target (for use in TT). Grayed out
unless TT is active.
[Cursor Size]: Select cursor size, large or small.
[Notes Detail]: Show details about cursor-selected Notes.
[MOB Delete]: Delete selected MOB mark.

Area selected
[Area Target Cancel]: Cancel tracking on targets within the area selected. The targets to
cancel tracking can be selected as follows;
• [Any]: Cancel tracking of TT or AIS target; delete REF mark.
• [TT Only]: Cancel tracking of TT; delete REF mark.
• [AIS Only]: Cancel tracking of AIS target.
[Area Mark Delete]: Delete all marks within the area selected.
[Area Mark Copy]: Copy all marks within the area selected.
[Area Cancel]: Cancel the area created.

1-26
 1. OPERATIONAL OVERVIEW

1.14 Cursor Position

Cursor data appears in the cursor position box at the top-right position on the display.
The appearance of the box is slightly different between different size monitors, al-
though the content is the same.

For the cursor position box that appears in the chart mode, see section 6.6section 6.6.

Cursor position
(lat/lon) Time to go to
cursor position
Bearing and
range to cursor Click indication to switch
position between bearing and range
and x and y coordinates.
x and y
coordinates of
cursor position

The indication below the cursor position can show the range and bearing to the cursor
or x-y coordinates of the cursor position. Click that indication and select [Range-Bear-
ing Position] or [X-Y Position] as appropriate. For the x-y coordinate display, the y-axis
is the heading line, right/top is "plus" and left/lower is "minus".

Note 1: The cursor bearing can be selected to true or relative with [1 CURSOR BEAR-
ING] in the [CURSOR] menu. Right-click the indication and select [Cursor Menu] to
open the [CURSOR] menu.
Note 2: The cursor position is shown as "---.-" when the cursor is not within the effec-
tive display area.

1.15 How to Select Sensor Settings

This radar system accepts navigation data input two ways: System or Local. System
shares sensor data among multiple radars in a network. Sensor priority is also com-
monly shared among the radars. Local selects a sensor outside the network.

1. Right-click anywhere in the Sensor information, datum box to show the context-
sensitive menu.
2. Click [Select Sensor].

Select Sensor System

[OS Info Menu] Local
[Setting]
3. Click [System] or [Local].
Note: The sensor system can also be selected in the chart mode through this pro-
cedure and through the menu. Open the menu then select [7 OWN SHIP INFO]
followed by [1 SENSOR].

1-27
1. OPERATIONAL OVERVIEW

1.16 How to Enter Ship Speed

The TT and azimuth stabilized presentation modes require own ship speed input and
compass signal. The speed can be entered automatically from a speed log (STW,
SOG) or GPS (SOG), or manually on the menu.

1. Right-click anywhere in the Sensor information, datum box to show the context-
sensitive menu.
2. Click [Select Sensor] then click [Setting].

Select Sensor System

[OS Info Menu] Local
[Setting]

3. Use the arrow buttons to select the [SPD] page.

Arrow buttons

Stabilization
mode
Sensor type
selection

Check for automatic

speed input

Speed
sensor
list

Check for manual

speed input

Select to use radar Set speed and

as source for speed course of drift
and course

4. For automatic input, follow the procedure below. For manual input, go to
step 5step 5.
1) Check [Sensors].
2) Set the priority for the speed sensors in case of Local sensor. Click the triangle
on any line then select the sensor to set as the primary source of speed. All
other sensors are then set as secondary source. Only one sensor can be pri-
mary while the others can be secondary. If a speed sensor is changed from
secondary to primary state and another speed sensor was selected as prima-
ry, then that sensor previously selected to primary state is then automatically
selected to secondary state.
3) Select [Bottom] or [Water] at [Stabilization Mode] to set the stabilization meth-
od. Select [Bottom] for GPS or [Water] for a speed log.

1-28
 1. OPERATIONAL OVERVIEW

4) Check [GPS] or [LOG] at [Sensor Type] to select the source of speed data.
5) Go to step 6step 6.
5. For manual input, set the stabilization mode for [Water] and check [Manual].
Click the manual box to show the up and down arrows. Click the arrows to set
speed.
Note: For [Set Drift], see section 3.11section 3.11.
6. Click the [OK] button to save the settings then click the [MENU] bar to close the
menu.

Notes on speed input

• IMO Resolution A.823(19) for TT requires that a speed log to be interfaced with a
TT should be capable of providing through-the-water speed (forward speed).
• A single-axis water log cannot measure speed when the wind is coming from the
leeway direction.
• When AIS is active, [Manual], [Reference SPD] and [Set Drift] are shown in gray to
indicate that they are not available for selection.

1-29
1. OPERATIONAL OVERVIEW

1.17 How to Enter Heading

Heading can be entered manually or automatically.

Note: When the vessel is in high latitudes (over 85°), data from the gyrocompass is
not used. The internal filter data is used for heading calculation. In this case, the head-
ing source in the sensor information box appears as "FILT". However, high latitudes
are not supported in RADAR mode.
1. Right-click anywhere in the Sensor information, datum box to show the context-
sensitive menu.
2. Click [Select Sensor] then click [Setting].
3. Use the arrow buttons to select the [HDG] page.

Arrow buttons

Check for automatic heading input

GY001
2
Heading sensor list

Analog gyro heading

Manual heading input

(not shown on IMO type)

[Gyro Correction] is shown when a Gyro Correction

autopilot which is compliant with
IEC 62065 Ed. 2 is connected.

4. For automatic input, follow the procedure below. For manual input, go to
step 5step 5.
1) Check [Sensors].
2) Set the priority for the heading sensors. Click the triangle on any line then se-
lect the sensor to set as the primary source of heading. All other sensors are
then set as secondary source. Only one sensor can be primary while the oth-
ers can be secondary. If a heading sensor is changed from secondary to pri-
mary state and another heading sensor was selected as primary, then that
sensor previously selected to primary state is then automatically selected to
secondary state.
3) Go to step 6step 6.
5. For manual input, check the [Manual] box. Click the heading input box to show
the up and down arrows. Click the arrows to set heading.
6. Click the [OK] button to save the settings then click the [MENU] bar to close the
menu.

1-30
 1. OPERATIONAL OVERVIEW

1.18 How to Mark MOB Position

Use the MOB (man overboard) feature to mark the position of man overboard on the
display screen. Click the [MOB] button (in any mode) on the InstantAccess bar™.

[MOB]
button

The MOB mark instantly appears at the geographical position of your ship when the
button is clicked.

Up to 100 MOB marks can be saved. When the capacity for MOB marks is reached,
the oldest mark is automatically erased to make room for the latest.

To hide an MOB mark, get into the Navigation voyage mode ([NAVI]) or Voyage plan-
ning mode ([PLAN]), right-click the mark to show the context-sensitive menu then se-
lect [Hide MOB].
Exercise caution when using this feature in strong tide or current. The person will not
be at the MOB position for a very long time.

How to find MOB information

In Navigation voyage mode or Voyage planning mode, put the cursor on a MOB mark
and click. Text can be entered in the [MOB Description] window. Click the [OK] button
to save the text and close the window.

1-31
1. OPERATIONAL OVERVIEW

1.19 How to Offset Position

The position shown in the Sensor information, datum box (section 1.11section 1.11)
may be different from the actual position. This error affects the positioning accuracy of
radar echoes, radar map and TT and AIS symbols. If there is a difference, apply an
offset to position as shown below to compensate for the error.

1. Right-click the display area to show the context-sensitive menu.

2. Select [Own Ship Offset] and push the left button. The color of the cursor becomes
blue.
3. Roll the trackball until the cursor is at the "correct position".
4. Push the left button to confirm.

Offset value
(range, bearing)

To cancel the offset, show the context-sensitive menu then select [Reset Own Ship
Offset]. The indication [Offset] and the offset values are then erased from the display.

1.20 How to Select Time Format, Set Local Time

The time indication on the Status bar shows either UTC time and date, or on-board
time and date, and cannot be adjusted. On-board time display requires synchroniza-
tion with the on-board clock. For further details, consult your local dealer.
You can switch between the local time and the UTC time by left-clicking the Current
time format indication (requires synchronization with local time, consult your local
dealer for details).

Current time format

Left click: Switch between local
and UTC times Time
Right click: Adjust local time

Note: If the ZDA sentence is not input to this system, the date and time indications on
the status bar appear in yellow color.
To use the local time, enter the time difference between the local time and the UTC
time as shown below.

Note: Where the on-board time is synchronized, the local time setting is not available.
1. Right-click the Current time format indication to
show the context-sensitive menu.
2. Click [Adjust Local Time] to display the [Local Time + 0 0
Adjust] dialog box.
3. Enter the time difference between the local time
and the UTC time, in hours and minutes. Use the
button on the left to select the time offset direction. Select "+" if the local time is
ahead of the UTC time, or "-" if it is behind the UTC time.
4. When input is complete, click [OK] to apply the changes.

1-32
 1. OPERATIONAL OVERVIEW

1.21 How to Take a Screenshot of the Display

Click the [Capture] button on the InstantAccess bar™ to
take a screenshot and save it to the SSD (Solid State
Drive). You can save a maximum of 100 screenshots.
When the capacity for screenshots is reached, the old-
[Capture]
est screenshot is automatically deleted to make room button
for the latest. You cannot take a screenshot when a
menu or a dialog box is opened.

Screenshots can be copied to a USB flash memory. For how to process screenshots,
see section 22.10section 22.10.

1.22 The Settings Menu

The [Settings] button gives you access to the user profiles and the [Settings] menu.
The [Settings] menu has facilities for screenshot management, file management, di-
agnostic tests and customizing. See chapter 22chapter 22.

[Settings]
button

1.23 User Profiles for Radar, Chart Radar

The [Settings] button lets you store ten sets of custom settings and color settings
(echoes, TT and AIS symbols and echo trails). This allows individual users to quickly
set the system according to their preferences.

1.23.1 How to create a profile

1. Set the settings (echoes, TT and AIS symbols, echo trail, etc.) as desired.
2. Click [ ] on the Status bar then click [Manage
Profile].
3. Select a profile number from the “Profile” drop-
down list.
Note: Profiles 06-10 are disabled in the default set-
ting. To enable a disabled profile, select the profile
to enable from the “Profile” drop-down list then un-
check [Disable this profile].
4. Click [Save Current Settings].

1.23.2 How to disable a profile

1. Click [ ] on the Status bar then click [Manage Profile].
2. Select a profile number from the “Profile” drop-down list.
3. Check [Disable this profile].
The profile enabled at section 1.23.3section 1.23.3 cannot be disabled.

1-33
1. OPERATIONAL OVERVIEW

1.23.3 How to activate a profile

1. Click [ ] on the Status bar.
2. Click the profile number to activate. The confirmation
message "Attention: Settings will be changed to Profile
XX. Do you wish to continue?" appears. Profiles
3. Click [Yes]. (enabled)

1.23.4 How to restore a profile to the default set-

tings
1. Click [ ] on the Status bar then click [Manage Profile].
2. Select a profile number from the [Profile] drop-down list.
3. Click [Clear Profile]. The confirmation message "Attention: This profile will be re-
stored to the default. Do you wish to continue?" appears.
4. Click [Yes].

1.23.5 How to change the settings on the current display to the rec-
ommended settings
1. Click [ ] on the Status bar.
2. Click [Default Settings]. The confirmation message "Attention: Settings will be
changed to the default. Do you wish to continue?" appears.
3. Click [Yes]. The settings on the following table are changed to the recommended
settings.
Note: This function is not available when using the interswitch function (see
section 2.29section 2.29).

Radar Mode
Items Settings
RAIN, SEA AUTO
GAIN 80
EAV No change
Automatic Clutter Elimination (ACE) OFF
TUNE (other than solid state radar) TUNE AUTO
TX CH (for solid state radar) No change
RANGE 6 NM, 6 SM, 6 km, 6 kyd
VRM1 0.25 NM, 0.25 SM, 0.25 km, 0.25 kyd
VRM2 OFF (No change)
EBL1 ON (No change)
EBL2 OFF (No change)
Presentation mode North-up TM
Note: Head-up RM with no heading or position
data.
Off Center The ship’s position is put beyond 75% of the
range scale.
Trail Trail time: 6 min, Trail mode: True-G
Past POSN OFF
Lost TGT OFF

1-34
 1. OPERATIONAL OVERVIEW

Items Settings
TT ACQ No change
Note: TT OFF with no heading data.
Vector Vector time: 6 min, Vector reference: REL
AZ1, AZ2 (acquisition zone) OFF
AIS DISP ALL
Note: FUNC OFF with no heading or position da-
ta.
Association TT (>)
CPA/TCPA CPA: 2 NM, TCPA: 12 min
AUTO ACQ AUTO ACQ OFF
Nautical chart ON/OFF button Chart OFF
MAP (Radar map) No change
Route No change
Alert AZ1/AZ2: OFF, Lost TGT: OFF
Antenna connection status No change
RANGE RING OFF
PI LINE PI1 to PI6: OFF
Number of PI line, mode, bearing range truncate:
No change
SPD (Own Ship Sensor Setting) Stabilization Mode: Bottom*
Sensor Type: GPS*
Sensor Setting: No change (System or Local)

*: These settings can not be applied, the settings are changed according to the priority
order of SPD.

Chart for Radar mode

Item Settings
[Route Information] menu
Route information page unit of “XTD” m
[System Sensor Settings]/[Local Sensor Settings] menu
SPD page Stabilization Mode Bottom
[Other Sensor Settings] menu
Other Sensor page Wind m/s
[Basic Setting] menu
Basic Setting page TM Reset 90%
[Chart Display] menu
General page Symbols Paper Chart
Boundaries Plain
Four Shades Unchecked
Full Light Lines Unchecked
Scale MIN Unchecked
Shallow Pattern Unchecked
Shallow Water Dangers Checked
Unknown Checked
Accuracy Unchecked
Highlight Date Dependent Unchecked
Highlight INFO Unchecked
Highlight Document Unchecked

1-35
1. OPERATIONAL OVERVIEW

Item Settings
General page Contour Labels Unchecked
LAT/LON Grid Unchecked
Text page Important Text Checked
NtoM page Temporary Notices Unchecked
Preliminary Notices Unchecked
No Information Unchecked
[Symbol Display] menu
General page Ship Outlines OFF
AIS Outlines OFF (grayed out)
Tracking page CCRP Checked
Primary Checked
Secondary Checked
Pivot Checked
Length 720 min
Labels 30 min
Mariner page Labels Checked
Lines Checked
Clearing Lines Checked
Tidals Checked
Areas Checked
Circles Checked
[Chart Alert] menu
Chart Alert page Safety Contour Keeps previous setting
Safety Depth Keeps previous setting
Safety Contour check box Checked
1 Checked
Dangerous or special areas *
Navigational Hazard check Checked
box
Navigation Hazard Alert level C (Caution)
[TT/AIS]-[Setting] menu
Setting.1 page Sleeping Class A*2 OFF
Sleeping Class B*2 OFF
Physical AtoN ON
Virtual AtoN ON
MAX Range ON, 6 NM
Chart scale/presentation mode box
Chart scale 3 NM
Presentation mode North Up TM
[Overlay/NAV Tools] box
Look-ahead page Ahead Time, 6 min
Echo page * 3 Display OFF
TT/AIS page TT display OFF
AIS display DISP ALL
Vector 6 min, REL
Past POSN OFF
Other functions
Brilliance CALIB
Viewing Date - Display Date Auto: Today

1-36
 1. OPERATIONAL OVERVIEW

Item Settings
Split Screen Full Screen (no split)
Chart database mode CUSTOM
TM Reset function Enabled
Own track Disabled
Log - NAV Log - Detail dialog Show Track

*1: Chart alert objects other than the following:

• Safety Contour • Navigational Hazard • No Vector Chart
• UKC Limit • Sounding UKC Limit • Non-official ENC
• Not up-to-date • Permit Expired
*2: Not shown on A- or IMO-type specification.
*3: Available only when the [Echo] page is enabled at installation.

1.24 How to View Chart Software Version No., Chart

System Information, and Operator's Manual
You can show chart program no., chart system information, and the operator's manual
as follows:

1. Click the Display mode button at the left end of the Status bar to select [CHART
for RADAR].
2. Click the [?] button on the Status bar.
[?] button

3. Select [Manual] to show the operator's manual, or [About] to show chart and sys-
tem information.
On the [About] screen, click the [Version] tab to show the chart software version no.,
conning software version no., S52 presentation library version, ENC user permit no.,
and C-MAP SDK software version no. Click the [System 1] tab to show system infor-
mation: CPU type, RAM capacity, SSD free/SSD capacity, Equipment ID and dongle
information. [Function] shows this unit’s capabilities. Click the [System 2] tab to show
the startup time for this equipment.

1-37
1. OPERATIONAL OVERVIEW

The information shown in the following illustration may be different from those on your
system.

㼄㼄㼄㼄㼄㼄㼄㼄㼄㼄㼄㼄㼄㼄㼄㼄㼄㼄㼄㼄㼄㼄㼄㼄㼄㼄㼄㼄 㻱㼝㼡㼕㼜㼙㼑㼚㼠㻌㻵㻰㻌㻦

C-MAP SDK Software Ver.: 㻲㼡㼚㼏㼠㼕㼛㼚㻌㻦 ecdis, conning, radar

Actual permit number

appears here
[Version] tab [System 1] tab

㻿㼠㼍㼞㼠㼡㼜㻌㼀㼕㼙㼑㻌㻦 㻜㻢㻌㻶㼍㼚㻌㻞㻜㻝㻠㻌㻜㻥㻦㻞㻟㻦㻞㻜

[System 2] tab

1.25 Tips (operational guidance)

This chart radar provides operational tips for the display area, InstantAccess bar™
and Mark box. To get a tip, simply put the cursor on the object. For example, put the
cursor on the [BRILL] button on the InstantAccess bar™. The tip "Adjust brilliance" ap-
pears.

Tip
S

If you do not need the tips, you can turn them off with [TIPS GUIDANCE] in the [INI-
TIAL SETTING] menu.

1.26 Printer Information

A Hewlett Packard (HP) printer may be connected to the system to print ENC Publish-
er's Notes, reports, logs, etc.

The available HP printers are Officejet Pro 8000, Officejet Pro 8100, Officejet Pro
8210, Officejet 100 Mobile and Officejet 200 Mobile. No other makes or models are
permitted.

1-38
2. RADAR, CHART RADAR OPERA-
TION

2.1 How to Transmit

After the power is turned on and the magnetron has
[STBY TX] button
warmed*, "STBY" appears at the screen center, meaning the
radar is ready to transmit radar pulses. You can transmit by
pushing the STBY TX key on the Control Unit, or clicking the
[STBY TX] button on the Status bar.

*: The solid state radar does not have a magnetron, therefore it has no warming peri-
od.
The radar is initially set to previously used range and pulse length. Other settings such
as brilliance levels, VRMs, EBLs and menu option selections are also set to previous
settings.

The STBY TX key (or [STBY TX] button) toggles the radar between STBY and
TRANSMIT state. The antenna is stopped in stand-by and rotates in transmit. Set the
radar in standby when its use is not required, to conserve the life of the magnetron.

When the antenna stops, it faces the bow. However, wind and other factors may cause
the antenna to move slightly.

2.2 How to Tune the Radar Receiver

After the radar is transmitting, adjust the receiver to the exact frequency of the trans-
mitter.

2.2.1 Tuning for magnetron radar

[TUNE] button Tuning bar

TUNE MAN: Manual tuning
TUNE AUTO: Automatic tuning

How to initialize tuning

Automatic tuning is initialized during the installation. However, if you feel that automat-
ic tuning is not working properly try re-initializing the tuning. Right-click the [TUNE] but-
ton then select [Tune Initialize] to start the initialization. The indication [Tune INI]
appears during initialization.

Automatic tuning
Click the [TUNE] button on the InstantAccess bar™ to display [TUNE AUTO].

2-1
2. RADAR, CHART RADAR OPERATION

Manual tuning
To tune the radar, start by setting the brilliance to a comfortable level, adjusting the
gain until the background speckle just disappears, and selecting the 48 NM range.
Then, do the following:

1. Select a weak contact somewhere near the edge of the screen and concentrate
on that, while adjusting the gain control in small steps - allowing at least two sec-
onds between each step - until the chosen contact is as big, bright and consistent
as possible.
2. Click the [TUNE] button on the InstantAccess bar™ to display [TUNE MAN].
3. Put the cursor on the tuning bar.
4. Spin the scrollwheel to tune. The best tuning point is where the bar swings maxi-
mum. The arrow below the bar shows the tuning control position; not the tuning
condition.

2.3 Pulse Length

The pulse length in use is displayed at the top-left position on the screen, using the
indications shown in the table below.

Pulse length (μs)

Pulse length indication
Magnetron radar Solid state radar (P0N/Q0N)
S1 0.07 0.07/5.0
S2 0.15 0.18/7.5
M1 0.3 0.3/12.5
M2 0.5 0.5/17.5
M3 0.7 0.7/18.3
L 1.2 1.2/18.3

Appropriate pulse lengths are preset to individual range scales and function keys. If
you are not satisfied with the current pulse length settings, you can change them as
shown below.

2.3.1 How to select a pulse length

You can select the pulse length for the 0.5 to 24 NM range MENU
scales as shown below. ECHO
CUSTOMIZE ECHO
1. Open the menu then select [1 ECHO], [1 CUSTOM- ← PULSE
IZE ECHO] and [8 PULSE] menus to show the 1 0.5NM
S1 / S2
[PULSE] menu. 2 0.75NM
2. Do one of the following: S1 / S2 / M1

Control Unit: Press appropriate numeric key to select 3 1.5NM

S1 / S2 / M1 / M2
corresponding item number. 4 3NM
Trackball module: Click appropriate item. S2 / M1 / M2 / M3

3. Select desired option by pressing the numeric key 5 6NM

M1 / M2 / M3 / L
pressed at step 2 or spinning the scrollwheel. 6 12NM
4. To confirm selection, press the ENTER key on the M1 / M2 / M3 / L

Control Unit, or push the left button. 7 24NM

M2 / M3 / L

2-2
 2. RADAR, CHART RADAR OPERATION

2.3.2 How to change the pulse length

1. Click the [Pulse] button at the top of the
InstantAccess bar™.
2. Click a pulse length.

2.4 How to Adjust the Sensitivity

The GAIN control (or [Gain] button) adjusts the sensitivity of the receiver. The proper
setting is such that the background noise is just visible on the screen. If you set up for
too little sensitivity, weak echoes may be missed. On the other hand excessive sensi-
tivity yields too much background noise; strong targets may be missed because of the
poor contrast between desired echoes and the background noise on the screen.

Adjust the gain so background noise is just visible on the screen.

Note: For adjustment of gain when the Automatic Clutter Elimination (ACE) function
is ON, see subsection 2.10.2subsection 2.10.2.
To adjust the sensitivity, do one of the following:

Control Unit: While monitoring the radar image and the gain slider bar, operate the
GAIN control to adjust the sensitivity.

Trackball module: For coarse adjustment, put the cursor within the slider bar area
then push the left button. For fine adjustment, put the cursor at the end of the slider
bar then roll the trackball while pushing and holding down the left button. Release the
button to finish.

Put cursor on slider bar and push and hold left button.
Drag cursor to new location then release left button.

2.5 How to Suppress Sea Clutter

Echoes from waves cover the central part of the display with random signals known
as sea clutter. The higher the waves, and the higher the antenna above the water, the
further the clutter will extend. When sea clutter masks the picture, suppress it with the
A/C SEA control (or [SEA] on the Status bar), either manually or automatically.

When both sea clutter and rain clutter are reduced, the sensitivity is decreased more
than when only one is adjusted. For that reason adjust them carefully.

The echo average (see section 2.9section 2.9) is useful for reducing reflections from
the sea surface. However, high-speed targets are harder to detect than stationary
ones when the echo average is active.

2-3
2. RADAR, CHART RADAR OPERATION

2.5.1 How to reduce sea clutter automatically

Auto A/C SEA allows for fine-tuning of the A/C SEA circuit, within ±20 dB. Lower the
auto A/C SEA level because the average value of the original input echo is low in ar-
eas where there are no see surface reflections. For example, when the ship is along-
side a quay and the radar picture shows echoes from both land and sea, you can
observe the size of echoes because the STC curve is different depending size of
echoes.

To get automatic adjustment of sea clutter, do one of the following:

Control Unit: Push the A/C SEA control to display [AU-

SEA mode
TO] on the SEA mode indication on the Status bar. indication
Trackball module: Click the SEA mode indication on the
Status bar to display [AUTO].

2.5.2 How to reduce sea clutter manually

The A/C SEA control reduces the ampli-
fication of echoes at short ranges (where
clutter is the greatest) and progressively
increases amplification as the range in-
creases, so amplification will be normal
at those ranges where there is no sea
clutter. Sea clutter at A/C SEA adjusted; sea
screen center clutter suppressed
The proper setting of the A/C SEA
should be such that the clutter is broken up into small dots, and small targets become
distinguishable. If the setting is set too low, targets will be hidden in the clutter, while
if the setting is too high, both sea clutter and targets will disappear from the display. In
most cases adjust the control until clutter has disappeared to leeward, but a little is still
visible windward.

Be careful not to remove all sea clutter, because you may erase weak echoes. Fur-
ther, the possibility of losing weak echoes is greater when you use both A/C SEA and
A/C RAIN to reduce clutter.

To reduce sea clutter manually, do one of the following:

Control Unit: Push the A/C SEA control to display [MAN] on the SEA mode indication
on the Status bar. Rotate the A/C SEA control to adjust the sea clutter.

Trackball module: Click the SEA mode indication on the Status bar to display [MAN].
For coarse adjustment, put the cursor within the slider bar area then push the left but-
ton. For fine adjustment, put the cursor at the end of the slider bar then roll the trackball
while pushing and holding down the left button. Release the button to finish.

2-4
 2. RADAR, CHART RADAR OPERATION

2.5.3 How to use the BERTHING STC function

The [BERTHING STC] function allows you to show the main bang echo, even with the
range set at 0.5 NM or less with AUTO SEA at maximum setting. This is particularly
useful when attempting to berth, as it gives a clearer view of the berthing area and your
ship’s location.

To use the [BERTHING STC] function, follow the procedure below.

1. Open the menu then select [1 ECHO], [0

NEXT] to show the second page of the
[ECHO] menu.
2. Select [1 BERTHING STC].
3. Select [OFF] or [ON] as appropriate.
4. Close the menu

Shown only for FAR-3220-NXT,

FAR-3220-NXT-BB and FAR-3320-NXT.

2.6 How to Suppress Rain Clutter

The vertical beam width of the antenna is designed to see surface targets even when
the ship is rolling. However, by this design the unit will also detect rain clutter (rain,
snow, or hail) in the same manner as normal targets.

The A/C RAIN control adjusts the receiver sensitivity as the A/C SEA control does but
rather in a longer time period (longer range). The higher the setting, the greater the
anti-clutter effect. When echoes from precipitation mask solid targets, adjust the A/C
RAIN control to split up these unwanted echoes into a speckled pattern, making rec-
ognition of solid targets easier.

Be careful not to remove all rain clutter, because you can erase weak echoes. Further,
the possibility of losing weak echoes is greater when you use both A/C RAIN and A/C
SEA to reduce clutter.

When both sea clutter and rain clutter are reduced the sensitivity is decreased more
than when only one is adjusted. For that reason adjust them carefully.

The echo average (see section 2.9section 2.9) is useful for reducing reflections from
the sea surface. However, high-speed targets are harder to detect than stationary
ones when the echo average is active.

2.6.1 How to reduce rain clutter automatically

Control Unit: Push the A/C RAIN control to display [AU-
RAIN mode indication
TO] on the RAIN mode indication on the Status bar.

Trackball module: Click the RAIN mode indication on

the Status bar to display [AUTO].

2-5
2. RADAR, CHART RADAR OPERATION

2.6.2 How to reduce rain clutter manually

Control Unit: Push the A/C RAIN control to display [MAN] on the RAIN mode indica-
tion on the Status bar. While watching the radar picture, adjust the A/C RAIN control
to reduce the clutter.

Trackball module: Click the RAIN mode indication on the Status bar to show [MAN].
For coarse adjustment, put the cursor within the slider bar area then push the left but-
ton. For fine adjustment, put the cursor at the end of the slider bar then roll the trackball
while pushing and holding down the left button. Release the button to finish.

Note: The detection range is reduced when the RAIN is used to show targets in rain.
Generally, the amount of rain, TX pulse length and TX frequency are factors in deter-
mining how the detection range is affected. The figures shown below illustrate this oc-
currence.
How to interpret the graph

Using the X-band graph as an example, a radar target originally detected on the 8 NM
range can only be detected in rain at ranges shown below:

16
4 mm/h rain (short pulse)
(NM)

16 mm/h rain - short pulse

Detection(NM)

14 4 mm/h rain - short pulse 16 mm/h rain (short pulse)

16 mm/h rain - long pulse
4 mm/h rain - long pulse
detection

12
4 mm/h rain (long pulse)
10
First

16 mm/h rain (long pulse)

ofoffirst

16 mm/h rain - short pulse

48mm/h rain - short pulse
16 mm/h rain - long pulse
Range

46mm/h rain - long pulse

range
of of

4
Reduction
Reduction

0
0 2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16
Original range of first detection (NM)
Reduction of rain to first detection due to rain at S-band

16
16 mm/h rain - short pulse
4 mm/h rain - short pulse
14
Reduction of Range of First Detection (NM)

16 mm/h rain - long pulse

4 mm/h rain - long pulse 4 mm/h rain (short pulse)
12
4 mm/h rain (long pulse)
10
16 mm/h rain (short pulse)
8

4
16 mm/h rain (long pulse)
2

0
0 2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16
Original range of first detection (NM)
Reduction of rain to first detection due to rain at X-band
The author thanks the International Electrotechnical Commission (IEC) for permission to reproduce Information from its Interantional
Standard IEC 62388 ed.1.0 (2007). All such extracts are copyright of IEC, Geneva, Switzerland. All rights reserved. Further
information on the IEC is available from www.iec.ch. IEC has no responsibility for the placement and context in which the extracts
and contents are reproduced by the author, or is IC in any way responsible for the other content or accuracy therein.

Accordingly the short pulse may be preferable in rain on ranges < 10NM.

2-6
 2. RADAR, CHART RADAR OPERATION

2.7 Interference Rejector

Mutual radar interference may occur in the vicinity of an-
other shipborne radar operating in the same frequency
band. It is seen on the screen as a number of bright
spikes either in irregular patterns or in the form of usual-
ly curved spoke-like dotted lines extending from the cen-
ter to the edge of the picture. Activating the interference
rejector circuit can reduce this type of interference.

The interference rejector is a kind of signal correlation

circuit. It compares the received signals over successive
transmissions and reduces randomly occurring signals.
There are three levels of interference rejection depending on the number of transmis-
sions that are correlated.

Click the [IR] button on the InstantAccess bar™

then click desired rejection level. The higher the
[IR]
number the greater the degree of interference re- button
jection.

For solid state radar: When there is a lot of interference, switch the [TX CH]. Click
the [TX CH] button on the InstantAccess bar™ then click [1] or [2].

[TX CH] button TX CH

([TX CH 1] or [TX CH 2])
1

Note: When multiple radars using the same frequency

are nearby, interference may appear in a similar manner
to that shown in the figure to the right. If this kind of inter-
ference appears, press the HL OFF key, or click the [HL
OFF] button on the InstantAccess bar™.

Interference from radars

using the same frequency.

2-7
2. RADAR, CHART RADAR OPERATION

2.8 Echo Stretch

The echo stretch feature enlarges targets in the range and bearing directions to make
them easier to see, and it is available on any range. There are three levels of echo
stretch, 1, 2 and 3. The higher the number the greater the amount of stretching.

The echo stretch magnifies not only small target pips but also returns from the sea sur-
face, rain and radar interference. For this reason, suppress those types of interference
before activating the echo stretch.

Click the [ES] button on the InstantAccess

bar™ then click desired echo stretch level. [ES] button

2.9 Echo Averaging

The echo averaging feature, which requires heading, position and speed data, effec-
tively reduces sea clutter. Echoes received from stable targets such as ships appear
on the screen at almost the same position every rotation of the antenna. On the other
hand, unstable echoes such as sea clutter appear at random positions.

To distinguish real target echoes from sea clutter, echoes are averaged over succes-
sive picture frames. If an echo is solid and stable over successive frames, it is present-
ed in its normal intensity. Sea clutter is averaged over successive scans and its
brilliance reduced, making it easier to discriminate real targets from sea clutter.

Echo averaging uses scan-to-scan signal correlation technique based on the true mo-
tion over the ground of each target. Thus, small stationary targets such as buoys will
be shown while reducing random echoes such as sea clutter. True echo averaging is
not however effective for picking up small targets running at high speeds over the
ground.

Note 1: With echo average active it is harder to detect high-speed targets than station-
ary ones.
Note 2: Do not use echo averaging under heavy pitching and rolling; loss of targets can
result.
Note 3: When the heading sensor signal is lost, [EAV] is turned OFF and the indication
is grayed out.

Before using the echo averaging function, reduce sea clutter with the A/C SEA control.
Leave a little sea clutter on the screen so as not to erase weak targets. Then, do as
follows:

Click the [EAV] button on the InstantAccess bar™

then click desired setting. [EAV]
button
OFF: Echo averaging is OFF.
1, 2: Detects targets hidden in sea clutter. "2" is more effective than "1" in detecting tar-
gets hidden in strong sea clutter. However, "1" is more effective than "2" in displaying
high-speed targets. Select the setting best suited to your objective.
3: Stably displays unstable targets; distinguishes high-speed craft from sea clutter.

When the Automatic Clutter Elimination (ACE) function is ON (see

section 2.10section 2.10), the indication for the EAV button is grayed out.
Note: When [PERFORMANCE MON] (see section 2.31section 2.31) or [SART] (see
section 2.36section 2.36) is ON, [EAV] is OFF and the indication is grayed out.

2-8
 2. RADAR, CHART RADAR OPERATION

2.10 Automatic Clutter Elimination (ACE) Function

This radar has the Automatic Clutter Elimination (ACE) function. This function detects
sea and rain clutter from received echoes’ range and bearing trend and automatically
reduces sea and rain clutter according to the Automatic Clutter Elimination (ACE)
threshold setting.

Note: Use this function with caution. Weak target echoes may disappear from the
screen.

2.10.1 How to turn the Automatic Clutter Elimination (ACE) function

on/off
Click the [ACE] button on the InstantAccess bar™ to turn the Automatic Clutter Elim-
ination (ACE) function on or off. When the Automatic Clutter Elimination (ACE) func-
tion is [ON], the indications for [RAIN] and [SEA] on the Status bar are grayed out.

ACE ACE
ON OFF
Note: When [PERFORMANCE MON] (see section 2.31section 2.31) or [SART] (see
section 2.36section 2.36) is ON, [ACE] is OFF and the indication is grayed out.

2.10.2 How to adjust the gain in the Automatic Clutter Elimination

(ACE) mode
Control Unit: Rotate the GAIN control to adjust the sensitivity.

Trackball module: For coarse adjustment, put the cursor within the slider bar area on
the Status bar then push the left button. For fine adjustment, put the cursor at the end
of the slider bar then roll the trackball while pushing and holding down the left button.
Release the button to finish.

Put cursor on slider bar and push and hold left button.
Drag cursor to new location then release left button.

2.10.3 Automatic Clutter Elimination (ACE) menu

Open the menu then select the [1 ECHO] and [0 ACE]
MENU
menus to show the [ACE] menu. ECHO
← ACE
• [1 ADJUST]: No use. 1 ADJUST
OFF / ON
• [2 SIGNAL ENHANCEMENT]: Set the level for the high
2 SIGNAL ENHANCEMENT
sensitivity mode (see 2
subsection 2.10.4subsection 2.10.4). 3 SUPPRESS SECTOR
START 0°
• [3 SUPPRESS SECTOR]: Set the angular range for
ANGLE 0°
suppression of false echoes (see
subsection 2.10.5subsection 2.10.5).

2-9
2. RADAR, CHART RADAR OPERATION

2.10.4 How to get the high sensitivity

When Automatic Clutter Elimination (ACE) function is [ON], the high sensitivity mode
operates while pushing the GAIN control. You can select the level for the high sensi-
tivity mode as follows:

1. Open the menu then select [1 ECHO].

2. Select [0 ACE] and [2 SIGNAL ENHANCEMENT].
3. Select the level from [1], [2] or [3].
4. Close the menu.

2.10.5 How to suppress the false echoes

The echo signals can appear on the screen at positions where there is no target or
disappear when there are targets (see subsection 2.44.2subsection 2.44.2). You can
suppress the false echoes.

1. Open the menu then select [1 ECHO].

2. Select [0 ACE] and [3 SUPPRESS SECTOR].
3. Select [START] then set the start angle from which you want to suppress the false
echoes.
4. Select [ANGLE] then set the angle range to which you want to suppress the false
echoes.
5. Close the menu.

2-10
 2. RADAR, CHART RADAR OPERATION

2.11 Noise Rejector

White noise may show itself on the screen as random
"speckles" spread over the entire radar image. This equip-
ment reduces the white noise then improves the on-screen
S/N ratio by processing the weighted moving average filter
for the received echoes in the range direction.

Note: Use this function with caution. Weak target echoes

may disappear from the screen or the range resolution may
worsen.
You can remove this noise as follows:

1. Open the menu then select [1 ECHO].

2. Select [1 CUSTOMIZE ECHO] menus to show the [CUS-
TOMIZE ECHO] menu.
3. Select [4 NOISE REJECT].
4. Select [OFF] or [ON] as appropriate.
5. Close the menu.
The status of the noise rejector is indicated at the top-left position, [NR: ON] or [NR:
OFF].

Noise Rejector ON Noise Rejector OFF

2.12 Wiper
The wiper feature automatically reduces the brilliance of unwanted weak echoes, such
as noise, sea clutter and rain clutter, to clear the picture. There are two wiper settings,
1 and 2. The difference between 1 and 2 is that the brilliance is lowered more slowly
in 2.

To use the wiper feature, do the following:

1. Open the menu then select [1 ECHO].

2. Select [8 WIPER].
3. Select [OFF], [1] or [2] as appropriate.
4. Close the menu.

2-11
2. RADAR, CHART RADAR OPERATION

2.13 How to Preset Controls for Specific Navigation

Purpose
Every time your navigating environment or task changes, you must adjust the radar,
which can be a nuisance in a busy situation. Instead of changing radar settings case
by case, it is possible to assign the function keys to provide optimum settings for often-
encountered situations.

The radar's internal computer offers several picture preset options to be assigned to
each function key for your specific navigating requirements. For instance, one of the
presets is labeled [HARD RAIN], and is designed to be used in heavy rain.

Two user-programmable presets are also provided (labeled [CUSTOM1], [CUS-

TOM2]), so that you can have the radar automatically adjusted to those conditions that
are not covered by the provided setup options.

Below are the preset options provided with this radar.

Label Description Label Description

OCEAN Optimum setting for long HARD Optimum setting for
range detection, on a range RAIN rough weather or
scale of 6 NM or larger. heavy rain.
CANAL Optimum setting for operating ICE* (op- Optimum setting for
in a canal. tional spec- showing areas of ice
ification) on the sea surface.
BERTHING Optimum setting when CUSTOM1 User-defined custom
berthing. settings.
CONGESTION Optimum setting for short CUSTOM2 User-defined custom
range navigation (for exam- settings.
ple, a harbor) using a range
scale of 1.5 NM or less.
ROUGH SEA Optimum setting for operation
in rough seas.

* See "About the ICE custom setting (optional specification)" on page 2-14"About the
ICE custom setting (optional specification)" on page 2-14.

Each picture option defines a combination of several radar settings for achieving op-
timum setup for a particular navigating situation. These include interference rejector,
echo stretch, echo average, noise rejector, automatic anti-sea and anti-rain clutters,
video contrast, pulse length and sea and radar conditions.

Adjusting these features from the [CUSTOMIZE ECHO] menu changes the original
function key settings. To restore the original settings for a particular customize option,
it is necessary to select the default setting. For this reason, we recommended that you
use the user-programmable presets ([CUSTOM1] or [CUSTOM2]) when frequent ad-
justment of the radar image is necessary.

The tables on the following page show the default settings for reference.

2-12
 2. RADAR, CHART RADAR OPERATION

VIDEO
INT ECHO ECHO NOISE AUTO AUTO
CONT-
REJECT STRETCH AVERAGE REJECT SEA RAIN
RAST
OCEAN 2 2 3 ON OFF* OFF* 3-B
CANAL 2 OFF OFF OFF OFF* OFF* 2-B
BERTH-
2 OFF OFF OFF OFF* OFF* 2-B
ING
CONGES-
2 OFF 2 OFF OFF* OFF* 1-B
TION
ROUGH
2 OFF 2 OFF OFF* OFF* 2-A
SEA
HARD
2 OFF OFF OFF OFF* ON 2-A
RAIN
ICE 2 OFF OFF OFF OFF* OFF* ICE
CUS-
2 OFF OFF OFF OFF* OFF* 1-B
TOM1
CUS-
2 2 1 OFF OFF* OFF* 2-B
TOM2

*: Manual

PULSE LENGTH

0.5 NM 0.75 NM 1.5 NM 3 NM 6 NM 12, 24 NM

OCEAN S2 M1* M1 M3 L L
CANAL S1 S2 M1 M2 M3 L
BERTHING S1 S1 S2 M1 M3 L
CONGESTION S1 S2 S2 M1 M2 L
ROUGH SEA S1 S1 S2 M1 M2 M3
HARD RAIN S1 S2 S2 M1 M2 L
ICE S1 S1 S1 S2 M1 M1/M2
CUSTOM1 S1 S2 S2 M1 M1 L
CUSTOM2 S2 S2 M1 M2 M3 L

*: S2 for solid state radar.

CONDITION

STC ANT LOW LEVEL

GAIN SEA RAIN ACE
HEIGHT ECHO
OCEAN Set at installation 0 80 MAN-30 MAN-0 OFF
CANAL 0 80 MAN-30 MAN-0 OFF
BERTHING 0 80 MAN-30 MAN-0 OFF
CONGESTION 0 80 MAN-30 MAN-0 OFF
ROUGH SEA 0 80 MAN-60 MAN-0 OFF
HARD RAIN 0 80 MAN-60 AUTO OFF
ICE 0 80 MAN-30 MAN-0 OFF
CUSTOM1 0 80 MAN-30 MAN-0 OFF
CUSTOM2 0 80 MAN-30 MAN-0 OFF

2-13
2. RADAR, CHART RADAR OPERATION

About the ICE custom setting (optional specification)

The [ICE] custom setting sets up the radar to detect areas of ice on the sea surface.
With ICE active, the following restrictions or requirements apply.

• Turn off [COMBINE FUNC] in the radar installation menu to enable the [ICE] custom
setting. See the installation manual.
• EAV 2, EAV 3, video contrast and ACE are inoperative.
• The video contrast setting for the performance monitor is fixed at [ICE] also.
• When a FAR-3xx0 operates as the main radar, and a FAR-2xx7 as a sub radar, the
areas of ice will not be displayed in the correct echo color on the FAR-2xx7. For this
reason, do not use this radar combination when ICE is active.

2.13.1 How to select a customized echo

Click the [Customize Echo] button on the Status bar to select a customize echo option
from the drop-down list.
[Customize Echo] button

Click to show
drop-down list.

2-14
 2. RADAR, CHART RADAR OPERATION

2.13.2 How to edit a customized echo

You can edit a customized echo as below.

1. Select a customize echo option to edit (see subsection 2.13.1subsection 2.13.1).

2. Right-click the [Customize Echo]
button on the Status bar then click
[Customize Echo Menu].
3. Set the items below referring to the
sections shown.
[1 INT REJECT]:
section 2.7section 2.7
[2 ECHO STRETCH]:
section 2.8section 2.8
[3 ECHO AVERAGE]:
section 2.9section 2.9
[4 NOISE REJECT]:
section 2.11section 2.11
[5 AUTO SEA]:
section 2.5section 2.5
[6 AUTO RAIN]:
section 2.6section 2.6
[8 PULSE]: section 2.3section 2.3
[1 ACE]: section 2.10section 2.10
4. Click [7 VIDEO CONTRAST].

5. Spin the scrollwheel to select 1, 2, 3 or 4 (Dynamic Range) or A, B, C (Curve) as

appropriate then push the left button. Refer to the description and illustration be-
low.
CONTRAST CONTRAST
C 4
3
B 2 1
A

1-4: Control dynamic range. 1 provides the widest dynamic range; 4 is the narrow-
est dynamic range.
A: The mid-level in the curve is low, so this setting is suitable for suppressing rain
clutter.
B: Curve between A and C.
C: The mid-level in the curve is high, so this setting is suitable for detecting distant
targets.
6. Click [9 CONDITION].
7. Click [2 STC ANT HEIGHT].
8. Spin the scrollwheel to select appropriate radar antenna height (above the water-
line) then push the left button.
9. If necessary, select [3 LOW LEVEL ECHO] to reject low level echoes. The setting
range is 0-8. The higher the figure, the stronger the low level echo that is erased.

2-15
2. RADAR, CHART RADAR OPERATION

10. To save the custom settings, select [SAVE] from [0 DEFAULT].

2-16
 2. RADAR, CHART RADAR OPERATION

2.13.3 How to restore a user customized echo to the saved settings

If you get lost in operation while adjusting the settings for a user customized echo, you
can easily restore the settings for that user customized echo saved at
subsection 2.13.2subsection 2.13.2).

1. Right-click the [Customize Echo] button on the Status bar then click [Customize
Echo Menu].
2. Click [0 DEFAULT].
3. Select [USER].

2.13.4 How to restore a user customized echo to the factory default

settings
You can erase a customized echo options to restore its factory default options (see
the tables on pages 2-12 and 2-13).

1. Click the [Customize Echo] button on the Status bar to select [CUSTOM1] or
[CUSTOM2] for which you want to restore its factory default settings.
2. Right-click the [Customize Echo] button on the Status bar then click [Customize
Echo Menu].
3. Click [0 DEFAULT].
4. Select [FACTORY].

2.14 How to Suppress Second-trace Echoes

In certain situations, echoes from very far distance targets may appear as false
echoes (second-trace echoes) on the screen. This occurs when the return echo is re-
ceived one transmission cycle later, or after a next radar pulse has been transmitted.

Pulse
interval

Actual ranges
Second-trace
echo

Measured ranges

This equipment lengthens the pulse repetition period to reject the false echoes.

Note: This function decreases the number of echoes hits. Carefully use this function
so that the possibility of detecting small targets and high-speed craft does not lessen.
To reject second-trace echoes, open the [1 ECHO] menu then set [5 2ND ECHO REJ]
to [ON] then close the menu.

2-17
2. RADAR, CHART RADAR OPERATION

2.15 Presentation Modes

This radar has the following presentation modes in the radar mode:

Relative Motion (RM)

Head-up: Unstabilized.
STAB H UP: Head-up with compass-stabilized bearing scale (True Bearing) where
the bearing scale rotates with the compass reading.
Course-up: Compass-stabilized relative to ship's orientation at the time of selecting
course-up.
North-up: Compass-stabilized with reference to North.
Stern-up: Unstabilized.

True Motion (TM)

North-up: Ground- or sea-stabilized with compass and speed inputs.

Mode availability

Availability
Presentation mode
Radar Chart radar
Course-up RM Yes Yes
Head-up RM Yes No
STAB H UP RM Yes No
North-up RM Yes Yes
North-up TM Yes Yes
Stern-up RM* Yes No

*: Not available with IMO or A type.

2.15.1 How to select a presentation mode

How to select a presentation mode from the Control Unit
Push the MODE key consecutively to select radar presentation mode desired. The
Range/Presentation mode box shows the current presentation mode.

How to select a presentation mode from the Range/Presentation mode box

Selection method 2

6 Click to show drop-down list.

Click desired mode on list.

STAB H UP RM
Selection method 1
Click indication to select mode.

2-18
 2. RADAR, CHART RADAR OPERATION

IMPORTANT
Loss of gyrocompass signal

When the gyrocompass signal is lost, the Alert “Gyro xxx COM1
Error” (xxx=a number between 255 and 259 (ALF format:
between 10400,1 and 10400,5) according to gyro no.) appears
in the [Alert] box. After all signals are lost, the Alert 450 (ALF
format: 10601,9) “Heading Sensor Not Available” appears, the
presentation mode becomes head-up and all TT and AIS are
erased. Check the gyrocompass and select the presentation
mode with the MODE key or the Range/Presentation mode box.

2.15.2 Description of presentation modes

Head-up mode
The head-up mode is a display in which the line con- North marker Heading
necting own ship and the top of the display indicates line
own ship's heading.

The target pips are painted at their measured dis-

tances and in their directions relative to own ship's
heading.

The short line on the bearing scale is the north

marker, which indicates heading sensor north. A failure of all the heading sensor in-
puts will cause the heading readout to disappear, and the Alert 450 (ALF format:
10601,9) "Heading Sensor Not Available" or "Gyro xxx COM1 Error" (a number be-
tween 255-259 (ALF format: between 10400,1 and 10400,5) according to gyro no.) ap-
pears in the [Alert] box.

Course-up mode
The course-up mode is an azimuth stabilized dis- North marker Heading
play in which a line connecting the center with the line
top of the display indicates own ship's intended
course (namely, own ship's previous heading just
before this mode has been selected).

Target pips are painted at their measured distanc-

es and in their directions relative to the intended
course, which is maintained at the 0-degree posi-
tion. The heading line moves in accordance with ship's yawing and course change.
This mode is useful for avoiding smearing of the picture during course change.

STAB Head-up mode

Radar echoes are shown in the same way as in the head-up mode. The difference
from the normal head-up presentation lies in the orientation of the bearing scale. The
bearing scale is heading sensor stabilized. That is, it rotates in accordance with the
heading sensor signal, enabling you to know own ship's heading at a glance.

This mode is available when the radar is interfaced with a gyro heading sensor. If the
gyro heading sensor fails, the bearing scale returns to the state of head-up mode.

2-19
2. RADAR, CHART RADAR OPERATION

North-up mode
The north-up mode paints target pips at their mea-
North
sured distances and in their true (heading sensor) di- marker Heading
line
rections from own ship, north bearing maintained at the
top of the screen. The heading line changes its direc-
tion according to the ship's heading. Requires heading
signal.

If the compass fails, the presentation mode changes to

head-up and the north marker disappears. A failure of
the heading sensor input will cause the heading readout to disappear, and the Alert
450 (ALF format: 10601,9) "Heading Sensor Not Available" or "Gyro COM1 Error" (a
number between 255-259 (ALF format: between 10400,1 and 10400,5) according to
gyro no.) appears in the [Alert] box.

Stern-up mode
The stern-up mode is a display in which the line con-
Heading
necting own ship and the top of the display indicates line
own ship's stern.

The target pips are painted at their measured dis-

tances and in their directions relative to own ship's
stern.
North
The short line on the bearing scale is the north mark- marker
er, which indicates stern sensor north.

True motion mode

Own ship and other moving objects move in accor- Heading
dance with their true courses and speed. In ground sta- line
North
bilized TM, all fixed targets, such as landmasses, marker
appear as stationary echoes. In the sea stabilized TM
without set and drift inputs, the landmass can move on
the screen. Note that true motion is not available on the
96 NM or higher range scale range scale. If COG and
SOG (both over the ground) are not available on the
TM mode, enter the set (tide direction) and drift (tide
speed) manually referring to a Tide Table.
If the position of the CCRP results in a part of the bearing scale not being distinguish-
able, that part of the bearing scale is indicated with appropriate reduced detail.

A failure of the heading sensor input will cause the heading readout to disappear, and
the Alert 450 (ALF format: 10601,9) "Heading Sensor Not Available" or "Gyro COM1
Error" (a number between 255-259 (ALF format: between 10400,1 and 10400,5) ac-
cording to gyro no.) appears in the [Alert] box.

2-20
 2. RADAR, CHART RADAR OPERATION

When own ship reaches a point corresponding to 50% of the radius of the display, own
ship position is automatically reset to a point of 75% radius opposite to the extension
of the heading line passing through the display center. You can also reset the own ship
symbol manually by pushing the CU/TM RESET key, or click the [CU/TM reset] button
on the InstantAccess bar™.

North marker
Heading
line

(a) True motion (b) Own ship has reached a (c) Own ship is automatically
is selected point 50% of display radius reset to 75% of display radius

2.15.3 How to reset the course-up automatically

The heading line moves in accordance with ship's yawing and course change. During
course-up mode, you can reset the heading line automatically to match the course.

1. Open the menu then select [8 INITIAL SETTING] and [6 AUTO COURSE UP RE-
SET].
2. Select [ON].
3. Spin the scrollwheel to set the angle (22.5° to 45.0°) then push the left button.
When the angle between the heading line and the course reaches the setting, the
heading line automatically matches the course.

2.15.4 How to scroll the display in true motion mode (B-type only)
The display can be scrolled manually in the true motion mode with the B-type specifi-
cation radar.

1. Open the menu then select [8 INITIAL SETTING] and [NEXT].

2. Set [1 TM CURSOR SCROLL] to [ON] to enable scrolling.
3. Put the cursor at an edge of the screen to scroll the screen.

2.16 How to Select the Range Scale

The selected range scale and range ring interval are shown at the top-left position on
the screen. When a target of interest comes closer, reduce the range scale so that it
appears in 50-90% of the display radius.

Range ring interval

Range scale
6 Range selection
buttons

2-21
2. RADAR, CHART RADAR OPERATION

Note: The IMO- and A-type radars do not have the 1 NM, 2 NM, 4 NM, 8 NM, 16 NM
and 32 NM ranges.

How to select a range scale from the Control Unit

Use the RANGE key to select range desired. Hit the "+" part of the key to raise the
range; the "-" part to lower the range.

How to select a range scale from the Range/Presentation mode box

Method 1: Click the range scale indication.
Method 2: Click the range selection buttons. Click the "+" button to raise the range;
the "-" button to lower the range.
Method 3: Right-click the range scale indication to show a drop-down list of available
ranges then click a range.

2.17 How to Measure the Range to a Target

The range to a target may be measured three ways: with the fixed range rings, with
the cursor, or with the VRM.

Use the range rings to obtain a rough estimate of the range to a target. They are the
concentric solid circles about own ship, or the sweep origin. The number of rings is
automatically determined by the selected range scale and their interval is displayed in
the Range/Presentation mode box at the top-left position on the screen. Count the
number of rings between the center of the display and the target. Check the range ring
interval and judge the distance of the echo from the inner edge of the nearest ring.
The range rings can be turned on/off with [RANGE RING] on the [NAV TOOL] menu.

2.17.1 How to measure the range by using a VRM

There are two VRMs, No. 1 and No. 2, which appear as dashed rings so that you can
distinguish them from the fixed range rings. The two VRMs can be distinguished from
each other by the different lengths of their dashes; the dashes on the No. 2 VRM are
longer.

350 000 010

340 020
330 030
VRM 1 320 040 Target
310 050

300 060

290 070

280 080

270 090

260 100

250 110 VRM 2

240 120
230 130
220 140
210 150
200 160
190 180 170
VRM 1 VRM 2
TTG 45:02 TTG 99:59
0.660 NM 1.180 NM

How to measure the range from the Control Unit

1. Press the VRM 1 or VRM 2 key to display desired VRM.

2-22
 2. RADAR, CHART RADAR OPERATION

2. Rotate the VRM rotary control to align the active variable range marker with the
inner edge of the target of interest and read its distance at the bottom-right posi-
tion on the screen. Each VRM remains at the same geographical distance when
you operate the range control. This means that the apparent radius of the VRM
ring changes in proportion to the selected range scale.
To erase a VRM, press the VRM 1 or VRM 2 key to erase corresponding VRM.

How to measure the range from the trackball module

1. Click the title bar on a VRM box to activate the corresponding VRM.
2. Click the VRM box.
3. Use the trackball to align the active variable range marker with the inner edge of
the target of interest and read its distance at the bottom-right position on the
screen. Each VRM remains at the same geographical distance when you operate
the range control. This means that the apparent radius of the VRM ring changes
in proportion to the selected range scale set the outer edge of the VRM on the in-
ner edge of the target.
4. To anchor the VRM, push the left button.
To turn off a VRM, click the arrow in the applicable VRM box. The VRM disappears
and the VRM box is minimized.

2.17.2 How to set VRM attributes

You can customize the VRMs to suit
your needs.

1. Open the menu then select [3

NAV TOOL] and [2 EBL•VRM] (B
type) or [2 EBL•VRM•CURSOR]
(IMO and A types) to display the
[EBL•VRM] menu
([EBL•VRM•CURSOR] menu for
the IMO and A types).
IMO- and A-type radars
2. For the B-type radar, select [3
VRM1] or [4 VRM2] as appropri-
ate. Spin the scrollwheel to se-
lect desired unit then push the
left button.
B-type radar
3. Select [6 VRM TTG] and then se-
lect the VRM(s) that are to show/hide the TTG indication. [OFF] shows no TTG
indication.
4. The [LINK EBL] option for [7 VRM OFFSET] automati- 330
340
350 000 010
020
030

cally activates the corresponding VRM when the offset

320 040
310
VRM 050

EBL is enabled. 290

300 060

070

5. Close the menu.

280 080

270 090

260
Offset 100

250 EBL 110

240 120
230 130
220 140
210 150
200 160
190 180 170

2-23
2. RADAR, CHART RADAR OPERATION

2.18 How to Measure the Bearing to a Target

Use the Electronic Bearing Lines 350 000
EBL 2 340
010
020
Target
(EBLs) to take bearings of targets. 320
330 030
040

There are two EBLs, No. 1 and No. 2. 310 050

Each EBL is a straight dashed line 300 060

extending from the own ship position

290 070

280 080
up to the circumference of the radar 270 090

picture. The two EBLs can be distin- 260 100

EBL 1
guished from each other by the differ- 250 Range marker 110

ent lengths of their dashes; the 240 120

dashes on the No. 2 EBL are longer.

230 130
220 140
210 150
200 160
Each EBL carries a range marker, or EBL 1 EBL 2
190 180 170

a short line crossing the EBL at right 128.0° R 100.8° R

angles. Its distance from the EBL ori- EBL reference

gin is indicated at the VRM readout EBL bearing
whether or not the corresponding
VRM is displayed. The range marker changes its position along the EBL with the ro-
tation of the VRM control. To operate this marker, rotate the VRM rotary control on
the Control Unit, or put the cursor in the applicable VRM box and roll the scrollwheel.

2.18.1 How to measure the bearing

How to measure the bearing from the Control Unit
1. Press the EBL 1 or EBL 2 key to display desired EBL.
2. Rotate the EBL rotary control to bisect the target with the EBL. Read the bearing
to the target at the appropriate EBL box.
To erase an EBL, press the EBL 1 or EBL 2 key to erase corresponding EBL.

How to measure the bearing from the trackball module

1. Click the title bar on a EBL box to activate the corresponding EBL.
2. Click the EBL box.
3. Use the trackball to bisect the target with the EBL.
4. To anchor the EBL, push the left button.
To turn off an EBL, click the arrow in applicable EBL box. The EBL disappears and the
EBL box is minimized.

2-24
 2. RADAR, CHART RADAR OPERATION

2.18.2 How to select bearing reference

An EBL box has an "R" (relative) if the EBL bearing is relative to own ship's heading;
"T" (true) if it is referenced to the north. True or relative indication is available regard-
less of presentation mode.

To change the bearing reference, click the EBL reference indication to display R or T
as appropriate. The bearing reference can also be selected on the [EBL•VRM] menu
([EBL•VRM•CURSOR] menu with the IMO- and A-type radars).

Note: When the gyrocompass heading changes, the EBL and its indication change as
follows:
Course-up, relative: EBL indication remains the same, EBL moves.
Course-up, true: EBL indication and EBL remain unchanged.
Head-up, relative: EBL indication and EBL remain unchanged.
Head-up, true: EBL indication remains the same; EBL moves.
North-up, relative: EBL indication remains the same, EBL moves.
North-up, true: EBL indication and EBL remain unchanged.

2.19 Collision Assessment by Offset EBL

The origin of the EBL can be placed anywhere with the trackball to enable measure-
ment of range and bearing between two targets. This function is also useful for as-
sessment of the potential risk of collision. It is possible to read CPA (Closest Point of
Approach) by using a VRM as shown in Figure (a) on the next page. If the EBL passes
through the sweep origin (own ship) as illustrated in Figure (b), the target ship is on a
collision course.

2.19.1 How to assess risk of collision

How to assess risk of collision from the Control Unit
1. Press the EBL 1 or EBL 2 key to activate an EBL.
2. Put the cursor on a target that appears as a threatening target (A in the figure on
the next page).
3. Press the EBL OFFSET key to shift the EBL origin to the cursor location.
4. Press the EBL OFFSET key again to anchor the EBL. Wait approx. three minutes,
then operate the EBL rotary control to bisect the target at the new position (A').
The EBL indication shows the target ship's course, which may be true or relative
depending on the EBL bearing reference setting.
5. If relative motion is selected, it is also possible to read CPA by using a VRM as
shown in the left figure on the next page. If the EBL passes through the sweep
origin (own ship) as illustrated in the right figure on the next page, the target ship
is on a collision course.
To return the EBL origin to the center of the screen, press the EBL OFFSET key.

2-25
2. RADAR, CHART RADAR OPERATION

How to assess risk of collision from the context-sensitive menu

1. Right-click the display area to show the context-sensitive menu.
2. Select [EBL Offset] and then [EBL 1] or [EBL 2].
3. Put the cursor on a target that appears as a threat (A in the figure below).
4. Push the left button to shift the EBL origin to the cursor location.
5. Spin the scrollwheel or use the trackball to bisect the target at the new position
(A'). The EBL indication shows the target ship's course, which may be true or rel-
ative depending on the EBL bearing reference setting.
6. It is also possible to read CPA by using a VRM as shown in left-hand figure below.
If the EBL passes through the sweep origin (own ship) as illustrated in the right-
hand figure below, the target ship is on a collision course.
To return the EBL origin to the center of the screen, click the EBL box.

350 000 010 350 000 010

340 020 340 020
330 030 330 030
320 040 320 040

310 050 310 050

300 A 060 300 060

290 070 290

A 070

280 080 280 080

A’ A’ VRM1
270 090 270 090

260 100 260 100

250 250 110

110

240 240 120

120
230 130 230 130
EBL1 220 140 EBL1 220 140
210 150
210
200 160
150
(a) 200
190
160 (b)
190 180 170 180 170

EBL 1 VRM 1 EBL 1 VRM 1

TTG 10:00 TTG 10:00
150.3° T 0.850 NM 138.2° T 0.850 NM

2.19.2 Point of reference for origin point of offset EBL

The origin point of the offset EBL can be ground stabilized (geographically fixed), north
stabilized (true) or referenced to your ship's heading (relative).

1. Open the menu then select the [3 NAV TOOL] and [2 EBL•VRM] (B type) or [2
EBL•VRM•CURSOR] (IMO and A types) menus to display the [2 EBL•VRM] (B
type) or [2 EBL•VRM•CURSOR] (IMO and A types) menu.
2. Select [5 EBL OFFSET BASE POINT].
3. Select [STAB GND], [STAB HDG], or [STAB NORTH] as appropriate.
STAB GND: Reference to latitude and longitude. Origin position is always fixed
regardless of your ship's movement.
STAB HDG: Reference to heading. The relationship of relative bearing between
origin position and own position is kept always.
STAB NORTH: Reference to North. The relationship of true bearing between or-
igin position and own position is kept always.
4. Close the menu.

2-26
 2. RADAR, CHART RADAR OPERATION

2.20 How to Measure the Range and Bearing Between

Two Targets
How to measure the range and bearing between two targets from the Control
Unit
1. Press the EBL 1 key to activate EBL1.
2. Operate the trackball to place the origin of the EBL 1 on a target of interest.
3. Press the EBL OFFSET key.
4. Operate the EBL rotary control to bisect the other target of interest.
5. Press the VRM 1 key to activate VRM 1.
6. Operate the VRM rotary control until the range marker on the EBL is on the inside
edge of target 2.
You can repeat the same procedure on third and fourth targets (targets 3 and 4) by
using the EBL 2 and the VRM 2.

Bearing is shown relative to own ship with suffix "R" or as a true bearing with suffix "T".
To return the EBL origin to the screen center, push the EBL OFFSET key.

How to measure the range and bearing between two targets from the track-
ball module
1. Right-click the display area to show the context-sensitive menu.
2. Select [EBL Offset] then [EBL 1].
3. Put the origin of the EBL on a target of interest.
4. Push the left button to anchor the EBL.
5. Put the cursor on the EBL 1 box then spin the scrollwheel or use the trackball to
bisect the other target of interest.
6. Put the cursor on the VRM 1 box then spin the scrollwheel to put the range marker
on the EBL on the inside edge of target 2.
You can repeat the same procedure on third and fourth targets (targets 3 and 4) by
using the EBL 2 and the VRM 2.

Bearing is shown relative to own ship with suffix "R" or as a true bearing with suffix "T".
To return the EBL to its origin, click the EBL box.

350 000 010

020
Range marker 330
340
030 EBL 2
320 040
310 050
Range marker
300 Target 2 Target 4 060
EBL 1 290 070
Target 1
280 080

270 090

EBL origin Target 3

260 100

250 110

240 120
230 130
220 140
EBL 1 EBL 2 210 150
200 160
VRM 1 VRM 2
190 180 170 TTG 45:02 TTG 99:59
140.0° R 335.2° R 0.500 NM 0.980 NM
Range/bearing between Range/bearing between
targets 1 and 2 targets 3 and 4

2-27
2. RADAR, CHART RADAR OPERATION

2.21 How to Off-center the Display

Own ship position, or sweep origin, can be displaced to expand the view field without
switching to a larger range scale. The sweep origin can be off-centered to the cursor
position, but not more than 75% of the range in use; if the cursor is put beyond 75%
of the range scale, the sweep origin will be off-centered to the point of 75% of the limit.

Cursor

Normal display Off-centered display

This feature is available on the ranges between 0.125 and 48 NM and any presenta-
tion mode other than true motion.

If the position of the CCRP results in a part of the bearing scale not being distinguish-
able, that part of the bearing scale is indicated with appropriate reduced detail.

How to off-center the display from the Control Unit

1. Put the cursor on the position within the display area where you want to move the
sweep origin.
2. Press the OFF CENTER key to move the sweep origin to the cursor position.
To cancel off-centering, press the OFF CENTER key again.

How to off-center the display from the context-sensitive menu

1. Put the cursor in the display area then right-click to show the context-sensitive
menu.
2. Select [Off Center].
3. Put the cursor where to put the sweep origin, and push the left button.
To cancel the off-center display, do steps 1 and 2 above, then click the display area.

If you cannot cancel off-center…

When the conditions shown below are met, off-center cannot be cancelled. This is be-
cause the radar antenna position is located at a position greater than 75% of the ef-
fective radar display.
• Own ship marker is large.
• The distance between the antenna position and the conning position is large.
• Short-distance display range.
To cancel the off-center in the above-mentioned conditions, first select a larger range,
then cancel the off-center.

2-28
 2. RADAR, CHART RADAR OPERATION

2.22 Target Trails

The trails of the radar echoes of targets may be displayed in the form of synthetic af-
terglow. Target trails are selected either relative or true and may be sea or ground sta-
bilized. True motion trails require a compass signal, and position and speed inputs.

2.22.1 Target trails-related indications

Trail-related indications are located at the bottom-right position on the screen. Several
trail-related operations can be done from the [TRAIL] menu, which you can show by
right-clicking the Trail time indication. You can also left-click the trail time indication to
change the trail time.

Trail mode

Elapsed trail time

Trail time
Click to change the
setting or right-click to
show the [TRAIL] menu.

TRAIL COLOR not available

with IMO or A type.

2.22.2 True or relative target trails

You may display echo trails in true or relative motion. Relative trails show relative
movements between targets and own ship. True motion trails present true target
movements in accordance with their over-the-ground speeds and courses.

Click the Trail mode indication to select [True-G], [True-S] or [REL] as appropriate.

True target trails Relative target trails

(No smearing of (Targets moving
stationary targets) relative to own ship)

2-29
2. RADAR, CHART RADAR OPERATION

2.22.3 Trail time

Trail time, the trail plotting interval, can be selected with the scrollwheel, left button or
right button.

The trail timer counts up the trail time and is erased once the terminal count is
reached. For example, if the trail time is six minutes, the timer is erased when trails
have been plotted six minutes. The maximum time of count up for continuous plotting
is 29:59.

Note: Caution is advised when using the trail timer, as the trail accuracy of other ship’s
echoes may be lowered.

How to select a trail time

Four controls are available to select a trail time.

• Control Unit: Push the TRAIL key.

• Trackball module: Put the cursor on the Trail time indication at the bottom-right po-
sition then operate the control (left button or scrollwheel). For the right button, a con-
text-sensitive menu appears. Click the desired time.
The times available depend on the control used as shown in the table below.

Control Available setting

Left button, right button, OFF, 15 sec, 30 sec, 1 min, 3 min, 6 min, 15 min, 30 min,
TRAIL key CONT(inuous)
Scrollwheel OFF, 15 sec, 30 sec, 1-30 min (30 sec intervals), CONT(inu-
ous)

2.22.4 How to reset target trails

All trails can be erased (including those in the memory) and restarted to start trails
fresh.

Control Unit: Press and hold down the TRAIL key until trails disappear.
Context-sensitive menu: Right-click the Trail box to show the context-sensitive
menu then select [Trail All Clear].

2.22.5 How to temporarily remove all target trails from the display
You can temporarily remove all trails from the display. Trails are removed but are con-
tinued internally.
Control Unit: Press the TRAIL key to show [OFF] in the trail time indication.
Trackball module: Click the trail time indication to display [OFF].

2.22.6 Trail stabilization in true motion

True motion trails can be ground stabilized or sea stabilized. The [Trail time] indication
shows current stabilization as [True-G] or [True-S]. To change the stabilization mode,
open the [SPD] page of the sensor settings menu (see section 1.16section 1.16) and
set [Stabilization Mode] to Bottom (GPS) or Water (speed log).

2-30
 2. RADAR, CHART RADAR OPERATION

2.22.7 Target trail attributes on the TRAIL menu

[1 TRAIL MODE]: Switch the trail mode to [REL] or
[TRUE].
[2 TRAIL GRAD]: The afterglow of the target trails can be
shown in a single tone or gradual shading.

Monotone Gradual shading

(SINGLE) (MULTI)

[3 TRAIL COLOR]: The trail color can be selected from the

colors shown in the left figure. This feature is not available
with the IMO or A type.
[4 TRAIL LEVEL]: The level (intensity) of the afterglow
that extends from radar targets can be adjusted. The high-
er the number the greater the intensity of the afterglow.
[5 OS TRAIL]: Show or hide trail for own ship.
[6 SUPPRESS TRAIL AROUND OS]: You can prevent the
display of sea clutter in true trails about your ship, to clear
the radar picture.

Note: [6 SUPPRESS TRAIL AROUND OS] is automatically turned on when [5 OS

TRAIL] is activated. The possible ON/OFF combinations between [5 OS TRAIL] and
[6 SUPPRESS TRAIL AROUND OS] are as shown in the table below.
Setting ON/OFF pairings available
[5 OS TRAIL] OFF ON OFF ON
[6 SUPPRESS TRAIL OFF ON ON OFF
AROUND OS]
Remarks No OS trail - - Setting not
possible

2-31
2. RADAR, CHART RADAR OPERATION

2.23 Parallel Index (PI) Lines

PI lines are useful for keeping a constant distance be-
tween own ship and a coastline or a partner ship when
navigating. Up to six sets of PI lines are available depend-
ing on the maximum number of PI lines selected on the
menu. PI
lines
Control of the orientation and interval of the PI lines is
done from the PI line box, which is at the bottom-left posi-
tion.

Minimize button

PI line no. PI line status indication (ON, OFF)

PI line angle
T PI line reference

PI line interval

2.23.1 How to display, erase a PI line

How to display, erase a PI line from the Control Unit
Displaying a PI line: Press the INDEX LINE key until desired PI line no. appears.

Erasing a PI line: Press the INDEX LINE key until desired PI line no. appears. Press
and hold down the INDEX LINE key to erase the PI line.

How to display, erase a PI line from the trackball module

Click the PI line no. indication to select a PI line. Click the PI line status indication (ON,
OFF) to display or erase a PI line.

2.23.2 How to enable/disable PI lines

The PI line function can be enabled or disabled at any time. Dis-
able this function to hide all PI lines and also disable the PI line
box. To use the PI line box, enable this function.
1. Open the menu.
2. Select [3 NAV TOOL] and [1 PI LINE] to show the [PI LINE]
menu.
3. Select [2 SET ALL PI LINE], then select [OFF] to disable the
PI line function, or select [ON] to enable the PI line function.
4. Close the menu.

2-32
 2. RADAR, CHART RADAR OPERATION

2.23.3 How to adjust PI line orientation, PI line interval

1. If not already displayed, display a PI line.
2. Put the cursor on the PI line angle indication then spin the scrollwheel to set the
angle (000 to 359.9).
3. Put the cursor on the PI line interval indication then spin the scrollwheel to adjust
the PI line interval.

2.23.4 How to select the number of PI lines to display

You can select the number of PI lines to display among 1, 2, 3 or 6.

For all PI lines

1. Open the menu.
2. Select [3 NAV TOOL] and [1 PI LINE] to show the [PI LINE] menu.
3. Select [3 NUMBER OF ALL PI LINE] and the desired number of PI lines among
[1], [2], [3] or [6].
Note: This setting cannot be changed if [2 SET ALL PI LINE] is set to [OFF] in the
[PI LINE] menu.
4. Close the menu.

For individual PI line

1. Select the PI line no. to set the number of PI lines referring to
subsection 2.23.1subsection 2.23.1.
2. Right-click the PI line box to show the context-sensitive menu then select [Number
of PI Line].
3. Select the desired number of PI lines among [1], [2], [3] or [6].
Note: The actual number of lines visible can be less depending on line interval.

2.23.5 How to select the bearing reference for the PI line

PI line bearing reference can be relative to your ship's heading (Relative) or refer-
enced to North (True).

Note: This function is not available with IMO type. The setting is fixed to [True].
1. Open the menu.
2. Select [3 NAV TOOL] and [1 PI LINE] to show the [PI LINE] menu.
3. Select [1 PI LINE BEARING].
4. Select [REL] or [TRUE].
5. Close the menu.

2-33
2. RADAR, CHART RADAR OPERATION

2.23.6 How to select the PI lines orientation

1. Open the menu.
2. Select [3 NAV TOOL] and [1 PI LINE] to show the [PI LINE] menu.
3. Select [4 PI LINE MODE].
4. Select [PARALLEL] or [PERPENDICULAR].
[PARALLEL]: PI lines are displayed in parallel to your ship's heading when PI line
angle is set to 0°.
[PERPENDICULAR]: PI lines are displayed in perpendicular to your ship's head-
ing when PI line angle is set to 0°.
5. Close the menu.

2.23.7 How to reset PI lines

You can automatically return all or selected PI lines to default orientation, 0-degrees
for parallel orientation, 90-degrees for perpendicular orientation. This is faster than do-
ing it manually.

1. Open the menu.

2. Select [3 NAV TOOL] and [1 PI LINE] to show the [PI LINE] menu.
3. Select [5 RESET PI LINE] (reset currently displayed line) or [6 RESET ALL PI
LINE] as appropriate. The confirmation message "Attention: Do you wish to reset
PI No.x line setting?" or "Attention: Do you wish to reset all PI line settings?" ap-
pears. Click the [OK] button to reset the PI line(s).
4. Close the menu.

2-34
 2. RADAR, CHART RADAR OPERATION

2.23.8 How to adjust PI line length

You can adjust the length of each PI line. This function is available when [3 NUMBER
OF ALL PI LINE] is set to [1].

1. If not already displayed, display a PI line to adjust the length referring to

subsection 2.23.1subsection 2.23.1.
2. Open the menu.
3. Select [3 NAV TOOL] and [1 PI LINE] to show the [PI LINE] menu.
4. Select [7 TRUNCATE].
5. Select [ON] in [PI 1 (or 2, 3, 4, 5, 6) TRUNCATE].

MENU
NAV TOOL
PI LINE
← TRUNCATE
1 PI 1 TRUNCATE
OFF / ON
Adjust the length 24.000NM 24.000NM Adjust the length
forward a PI line. 2 PI 2 TRUNCATE backward a PI line.
OFF / ON

6. Set the length (setting range: 0.000 to 24.000 NM).

Heading line PI line

Own ship position

Adjust the length
forward a PI line.

Adjust the length

backward a PI line.

7. Close the menu.

2-35
2. RADAR, CHART RADAR OPERATION

2.24 Zoom
The zoom function enlarges an area of interest in the information area (magnification
range: 1.0, 1.5, 2.0, 2.5, 3.0; 2.0 is default). To use the zoom display, right-click the
operational area to show the context-sensitive menu then select [Zoom Set]. Roll the
trackball to put the zoom cursor on the area to zoom. Spin the scrollwheel to change
the magnification then push the left button to confirm the magnification and the posi-
tion. See the zoom display at the right side of the screen.

Zoomed
echo

Zoom
display

Zoom
cursor

To deactivate the zoom function, right-click the operational area to show the context-
sensitive menu then select [Zoom Off].

Zoom display format

You can select the zoom display format with the following procedure.

1. Open the menu then select [4 INFORMATION BOX] and [3 ZOOM DISPLAY].
2. Select the appropriate zoom display format:
[STAB GND]: Ground stabilized zoom (Geographically fixed).
[STAB HDG]: Heading stabilized zoom (Relative).
[STAB NORTH]: North stabilized zoom (True).
[TT TRACK]: Tracked targets are zoomed.
3. Close the menu.

2-36
 2. RADAR, CHART RADAR OPERATION

2.25 Markers

2.25.1 Heading line

The heading line indicates the ship's heading in all presentation modes. The heading
line is a line from the own ship position to the outer edge of the radar display area and
appears at zero degrees on the bearing scale in head-up mode. It changes its orien-
tation in the north-up and true motion modes according to orientation.

Temporarily erasing the heading line

To temporarily extinguish the heading line (and anything but radar echoes within the
display area) to look at targets existing dead ahead of own ship, push the HL OFF key
on the Control Unit, or click the [HL OFF] button on the InstantAccess bar™. Release
the respective control to redisplay the heading line, etc.

2.25.2 Stern marker

The stern marker, which is a dotted line, appears opposite to the heading line and
marks your ship’s stern. To display or erase this marker, do the following:

1. Open the menu then select [5 MAP•MARK] and [1 MARK SETTING].

2. Select [6 STERN MARK].
3. Select [ON] or [OFF] as appropriate.

2.25.3 North marker

The north marker appears as a short dashed line. In the head-up mode, the north
marker moves around the bearing scale in accordance with the compass signal.

2.25.4 Own ship marker

The own ship marker is displayed at your ship's position. It can be turned on or off and
its configuration selected from the [MARK SETTING] menu. Two configurations are
available: minimized marker and scaled marker. The scaled marker is scaled accord-
ing to the length and beam of the vessel. If the beam width or length of the marker (set
at installation) gets smaller than 3 mm, the marker is replaced with the minimized
marker. Ship's dimensions should be entered at installation to use the scaled marker.

Antenna Heading line

Heading line position X Beam line

Beam line

Minimized marker Scaled marker

1. Open the menu then select [5 MAP•MARK] and [1 MARK SETTING].

2. Select [4 OWN SHIP MARK].
3. Select [MIN] or [SCALED] as appropriate.
MIN: Show the minimized own ship marker.
SCALED: Show the scaled own ship marker.

2-37
2. RADAR, CHART RADAR OPERATION

2.25.5 Vectors
You can show or hide the vector for own ship and reference targets, on the [NAV
TOOL] menu.

[TARGET VECTOR] menu

[1 REF TARGET VECTOR]: Turn the vec-
tor for the reference target on or off.
4 VECTOR COLOR [RED] and [YEL]
GRN / BLU / CYA / are added with A
MAG / WHT and B types.

[OWN SHIP VECTOR] menu

[1 VECTOR STAB IND]: Turn ON to show
double arrow for ground tracking; single
arrow for water tracking.
[2 TIME INCREMENTS]: A short horizon-
tal line can be marked on the own ship
vector in one-minute intervals to show ap-
proximate later positions.
[3 OWN SHIP VECTOR]: Turn vector
OFF, or show ship's heading or course
with a vector.
[4 VECTOR COLOR]: Set the vector color
for own ship.

2.25.6 Barge marker

The length and breadth of the total barge size can be displayed as a simple rectangle
on the radar display. Up to five rows of barges and nine barges per row can be shown.

Barge mark

This feature is available with an installation preset. Set up barge information with the
procedure on the following page:

2-38
 2. RADAR, CHART RADAR OPERATION

1. Open the menu then select [3 NAV TOOL].

2. Select [7 BARGE].
3. Select [1 BARGE MARK].
4. Select [ON] to turn on the barge mark.
5. At [2 BARGE SIZE], enter length (three digits) and width
(two digits) of the total number of barges.
6. Select [3 ARRANGEMENT].
7. Enter the number of barges that will be in front of your
vessel, row by row:
1) Select a barge row.
2) Spin the scrollwheel to set the number of barges in
the row. (The maximum number is nine.) The numer-
ical indication to the right of the squares changes with scrollwheel operation.
3) Push the left button to confirm your selection. The squares on the row are
“filled” according to the number of barges selected at step 2.
8. Close the menu.
The radar display now shows the barge mark on the display.

2.25.7 Antenna marker

The antenna marker appears as a blue cross at the antenna location. The marker can
be shown or hidden as follows:

1. Open the menu then select [5 MAP•MARK] and [1 MARK SETTING].

2. Select [5 ANTENNA MARK].
3. Select [ON] or [OFF] as appropriate.

2.25.8 Cursor
The cursor measures the range and bearing to an object, selects menu items, selects
location for mark entry, etc. For the B-type radar, you can select cursor attributes
(bearing reference, range unit and size for the cursor) on the [CURSOR] menu in the
[NAV TOOL] menu. For the IMO- and A-type radars you can select only the cursor
bearing reference, with [1 EBL•CURSOR BEARING] in the [EBL•VRM•CURSOR]
menu of the [NAV TOOL] menu.

[1 CURSOR BEARING]: Show cursor bearing reference in

true or relative.

[2 CURSOR RANGE]: Show the cursor range indication in

the NM, SM, km or kyd. Not available with either IMO- or A-
type radar.

[3 CURSOR SIZE]: Select the cursor size for small or large.

The large cursor covers the entire echo area. Not available
with either IMO- or A-type radar.

2-39
2. RADAR, CHART RADAR OPERATION

2.25.9 Curved EBL

The [Curved EBL] function, avail-
able in the chart radar mode, shows XTD limit Curved EBL
the planned steering radius. You
can use this function to determine
the best location to begin a turn.
You can also use the [Curved EBL]
function to determine whether a turn
is conducted as planned. Steering line

To show/hide the [Curved EBL],

click the [ON]/[OFF] button on the
[Curved EBL] page of the [Overlay/
NAV Tools] box. OS mark

Note: This function is only available WPT1

when a EC-3000 with TCS function-

ality (optional specification) is connected to the network.
1. Open the menu and select [5 MAP•MARK] and [MARK SETTING].
2. Select [DISP CURVED EBL] from page 2 of the [MARK SETTING] menu.
3. Select [ON] to display the curved EBL, [OFF] to hide the curved EBL.
4. Close the menu.

2.25.10 Display predictor

The predictor is a tool for estimating your ship's future positions and behavior. The on-
screen predictor graphic consists of three pieces of your ship, drawn in true scale to
successive future positions. The position of the third symbol will be your approximate
position at the end of the time interval selected, which you set on the [Predictor] page
in the [Overlay/NAV Tools] box. (See section 15.6section 15.6.) The predictor is cal-
culated using current speed and rate of turn. Docking speed components (transversal
bow speed, transversal stern speed, transversal center speed and rate of turn) are as-
sumed to be stable during the prediction period. The predictor can be used in every
steering-state, including manual steering.

Predictor

1. Open the menu then select [5 MAP•MARK] and [1 MARK SETTING].

2. Select [NEXT (1/2→2/2)].
3. Select [3 DISP PREDICTOR].
4. Select [ON] or [OFF] as appropriate.

2-40
 2. RADAR, CHART RADAR OPERATION

2.26 How to Adjust Brilliance of Screen Data

You can adjust the relative brilliance levels of various markers and alphanumeric read-
outs displayed on the screen.

1. Right-click the [BRILL] button on the InstantAccess bar™ then select [Brill Menu].

[BRIGHTNESS] menu, page 1 [BRIGHTNESS] menu, page 2

2. Click the brilliance adjustment bar of the item to adjust.
Page 1 Page 2
Item Adjust brightness of Item Adjust brightness of
[1 CONTROL backlighting of keys [1 EBL] EBLs, blind sector
PANEL] on Control Unit
[2 CHARAC- Alphanumeric charac- [2 VRM] VRMs
TER] ters
[3 CURSOR] Cursor [3 PI LINE] PI lines
[4 ECHO] Radar echoes [4 TT SYMBOL] TT symbols, AZ area,
TT vector, TT past
posn
[5 TRAIL] Target trails [5 AIS SYMBOL] AIS symbols, AIS
vector, AIS past posn
[6 HL] Heading line, stern [6 MARK] Radar map marks,
line route, waypoint/MOB
mark, anchor watch,
drop1/2, zoom, north
mark, user chart
[7 OS SYM- Own ship symbol, [7 CHART] Chart-related objects
BOL] barge mark, antenna
mark, own ship track,
own ship vector
[8 RING] Fixed range rings
[9 BEARING Bearing cursor
CURSOR]

3. Spin the scrollwheel to set brilliance level.

4. Close the menu.

2-41
2. RADAR, CHART RADAR OPERATION

2.27 Watch Alert

The watch alert provides a flashing visual alert at regular in-
tervals to remind you to monitor the radar picture for safety
or other purposes.

To enable the watch alert, open the [8 INITIAL SETTING]

menu followed by the [4 ALERT] menu. Select [1 WATCH
ALERT] and set desired watch interval. The [Watch] box
appears at the bottom-left position. (The watch interval can
also be selected from the [Watch] box when the watch alert
feature is active. Right-click the time indication in the [Watch] box to show a drop-down
list of watch intervals. Select a watch interval from the list.)

S Watch box

The timer counts down from the interval set and when the time interval elapses;

• the buzzer sounds

• the visual Alert 500 (ALF format: 10499) “Watch Alert” flashes in orange in the [Alert]
box
• the watch alert timer freezes at "0:00".
Stop the flashing visual alert with the ALARM ACK key on the Control Unit or click the
[Alert] box.

After the alert is acknowledged the count-down sequence is repeated.

Note: The countdown can be restarted, before the count reaches 0:00, by clicking the
countdown indication in the watch box.

2-42
 2. RADAR, CHART RADAR OPERATION

2.28 Information Box

The information box shows navigation data and, when following a route set on the
chart display, route information is also shown. You can navigate the information tabs
by clicking the arrow buttons ([←] or [→]) at the top-right of the information box.

2.28.1 Information box contents

Navigation data
• Depth, analog and graph
• Current (tide) direction and speed
• Wind direction and speed
• Water temperature
• Current and wind gauge
Nav data requires appropriate navigation sensors and IEC 61162-1/2 sentences out-
put from the sensor. If there is no sentence or data input, asterisks (**) appear at the
corresponding indication.

Depth

Depth graph*
Water
temperature

Wind direction
and speed
Current and
wind gauge Current direction
(See inset.) and speed

*: When a depth is set for [DEPTH MARK] in the [SET NAV DATA]
menu, the set depth is indicated with a yellow line.

Current and wind gauge

N
Heading

W E

Current Wind
direction S direction

2-43
2. RADAR, CHART RADAR OPERATION

Route information
The route 1 information displays route name, plan speed, plan course, course to steer,
XTD limit and XTD (off track). The route 2 information displays waypoint no., distance
to WOP (wheel over point), time to go, planning turn radius, turn rate, next waypoint
no., bearing to next waypoint.

ROUTE1 ROUTE2
ROUTE10 2
10 2 1.70 NM
123 2 T 0 10 27
123 2 T Turn RAD: 0.80 NM
250 2 ROT: 00
45 4 3
123 7 T

Route 1 Route 2

Wave data display

You can view wave data when a PC (with the wave analysis software installed) is con-
nected to the same network as this radar. The software requires radar echo data in
order to calculate and display wave data. For details, see
section 2.28.4section 2.28.4.

Note: To use the wave data display, connection with the analysis PC and software
setup must be done at installation. Consult your local dealer.

Significant wave height appears here.

Wind angle and

speed appear here

Wind/wave directions appear as colored

triangle icons around the compass circle.
The center of the circle shows the own ship
and current bearing as an icon.
Magenta color: wind direction
Cyan color: 1st wave’s direction
Green color: 2nd wave’s direction
[1 WAVE STAB] setting appears
here.

Wave information appears here.

[HEIGHT]: Wave height
[DIR]: Direction from which the wave is approaching.
[PERIOD]: Time until the wave meets own ship.
For details regarding the wave data display, see the manual supplied with the software
(OMC-36181).

2-44
 2. RADAR, CHART RADAR OPERATION

2.28.2 How to show the information box

1. Open the menu and select [4 INFORMATION BOX].

2. Select [1 DISP INFO BOX] then [ON].

3. Close the menu.

2.28.3 How to turn NAV data on/off

Wind, depth, ocean current and water temperature may be set up as follows:

1. Open the menu then select [4 INFORMATION BOX].

2. Select [2 SET NAV DATA].

Page 2

Page 1
3. Set up the nav data referring to the table on the following page.

2-45
2. RADAR, CHART RADAR OPERATION

Item Description
Page 1
[1 DEPTH] Selects the unit of depth measurement, or turn depth
indication off.
[2 DEPTH GRAPH SCALE] Selects depth scale range. The depth for the last 30
minutes is plotted with a yellow line. The [Auto] set-
ting automatically adjusts the scale according to
depth.
[3 DEPTH MARK] Selects the depth at which to show the depth mark.
[4 CURRENT] Turns the current (tide) display on (current relative to
North) or off.
[5 WIND] Selects the unit of wind speed measurement.
[6 WIND STAB] Selects Wind vector format, among three choices:
[APPARENT]: Apparent wind measured by wind me-
ter, with ship's bow as reference.
[NORTH]: Apparent wind minus ship's movement,
with North as reference.
[THEORETICAL]: Apparent wind minus ship's move-
ment, with ship's bow as reference.
[7 TEMPERATURE] Selects the unit of water temperature measurement,
or turns water temperature indication off.
Page 2
[1 WAVE STAB] Set the stabilization for the echo data output for wave
analysis.
[NORTH]: Apparent wave minus ship's movement,
with North as reference.
[THEORETICAL]: Apparent wave minus ship's
movement, with ship's bow as reference.
Note: This menu item appears only when setup and
connection with a wave analysis PC is done at instal-
lation.

Note: Appropriate sensors are required to display any data. The wind vector
shows a direction from which the wind blows in, relative to own ship heading, and
is labeled “T *”. Wind velocity is a true wind speed as a result of compensating for
own ship's speed and orientation. Ocean current (tide) is shown relative to bow in
head-up, cursor gyro and course-up, and reference to North in north-up and true
motion.
4. Close the menu.

2-46
 2. RADAR, CHART RADAR OPERATION

2.28.4 How to output data to the wave analysis software (option)

You can output echo data from this radar to a PC with the wave analysis software in-
stalled. The wave analysis software calculates incoming waves and gives you an on-
screen indication as to wave size, direction and time between waves.

This section covers how to use enable data output for wave mode. For details regard-
ing the analysis software and PC indications, see the manual supplied with the soft-
ware.

Preparations and cautions for wave mode

• Wave mode requires the connection of a PC to the same network as this radar.
• The connected PC must have the wave analysis software installed. See the soft-
ware manual for how to install the software.
• Wave mode may only be active on one radar at any time. If a second radar has
wave mode activated, wave mode is disabled on the first radar.
• Wave analysis and the output data are intended for reference purposes only, as an
aid to safe navigation. Always confirm conditions, visually and with other methods.
• The menu item [2 WAVE MODE] is not available in the following circumstances:
• This radar is connect via interswitch with another radar.
• The connected antenna is malfunctioning, or the LAN connection with the anten-
na is unstable or severed.
• The analysis PC and software are not connected with this radar.
1. Establish a LAN connection with the analysis PC.
2. Open the menu, then select [1 ECHO].
3. Select [NEXT], then [2 WAVE MODE].
4. Select [ON] or [OFF] as appropriate.
[ON]: enables data output to the analysis PC.
[OFF]: disables data output to the analysis PC.
5. Close the menu.

2-47
2. RADAR, CHART RADAR OPERATION

2.29 Interswitch
The interswitch uses a network to transfer multiple radar signals to the monitor units
connected in the network. A master/slave relation can be set for a single radar signal
and that signal can be shown on multiple displays. Up to four antennas and four dis-
play units can be connected. Set the radar display and antenna groups from the [An-
tenna] button on the Status bar.

When you switch to a different antenna, the heading skew and timing adjustment (set
at installation) for that antenna are automatically applied.

The [Antenna] button on the Status bar shows current antenna selection.
[Antenna] button
- ANT-3(M): Antenna no. 3, (M)=Master (or (S)=Slave)
- X-BAND (or S-BAND)

Note: Switch to a different antenna or change the interswitch settings in the standby
mode.

2.29.1 Displaying antenna information

The [ANT SELECT] menu shows:
• Radar band, output power and antenna position of each antenna currently powered.
(If an antenna is not powered, its data area is blank.)
• Current antenna and display combinations.
To show antenna information, open the menu then select the [8 INITIAL SETTING]
and [5 ANT SELECT] menus.

ANT 1 : X-BAND Using the information displayed in this example the antenna system configuration
25UP Main Top would look something like this.

ANT 2 : S-BAND ANT1 ANT3 ANT4

ANT2
30UP Main 2nd
ANT 3 : X-BAND ← Antenna Unit
12 Fore
ANT 4 : X-BAND
12 Aft ← Power Supply Unit

DISP1 DISP2 DISP3 DISP4 ← Processor Unit

HUB-3000

2-48
 2. RADAR, CHART RADAR OPERATION

2.29.2 How to preset antenna and display combinations

You can preset the antenna and display combinations for each antenna and display
in the radar system. As an example, the procedure below shows how to select the no.
1 antenna unit for the no. 2 display unit.

1. Open the menu then select the [8 INITIAL SETTING] and [5 ANT SELECT]
menus.
2. Select the display unit for which to select an antenna (at the next step). For exam-
ple, select [DISP2] to select the no. 2 display unit.
3. Select [ANT 1] and [M].
4. Repeat steps 2 and 3 to set other display and antenna combinations.
5. Click [STORE INTER-SW] and select [YES] to save your selections.
6. Close the menu.

Antenna selection considerations

• An antenna unit cannot be controlled from multiple display units. Select one Master
display unit for one antenna unit. If two antenna units are set as masters, the display
last-set as master becomes the master and all other displays are automatically
changed to slave.
• An antenna unit without a Master display cannot be selected on the sub display
units. If there is no antenna unit set as master, the lowest number display is auto-
matically set as master.
• If the Alert 750 (ALF format: 10740,3) “EXT Radar COM Error” appears, do one of
the following as applicable:
• If only your antenna is not displayed on the [ANT SELECT] display, the LAN line
in the Processor Unit may be faulty. In this case, use the standalone mode.
• If the antenna that was in use does not appear on the [ANT SELECT] display, the
LAN line in other Processor Unit may be faulty. In this case, see the preceding
page for how to select a different antenna unit.
• When the Network fails, the Interswitch does not work, but standalone operation is
possible.
• Radar functions are controlled independently, dependently or commonly depending
on selection as Master or Slave (see the table on the next page).
• When connecting with an FAR-2xx7 or FAR-2xx8 series radar, the maximum num-
ber of acquired targets ([NUMBER OF TT]) should be set to 100 in the [RADAR IN-
STALLATION] menu. The service man only can set the [RADAR INSTALLATION]
menu. Contact your dealer.
• Do not use the interswitch function when the icing prevention feature (see
section 2.41section 2.41) is active.

Compatibility of display and operation

• When connecting with FCR-2xx9 series radar
The FCR-2xx9 is compatible with the FAR-3xx0 in display and operation. For exam-
ple, when switching the antenna from FAR-3xx0 to FCR-2xx9, the image for FCR-
2xx9 is displayed on the screen and each function is operative, and vice versa.

2-49
2. RADAR, CHART RADAR OPERATION

• When connecting with FAR-2xx8 series radar

The FAR-2xx8 is compatible with the FAR-3xx0 in display and operation. For exam-
ple, when switching the antenna from FAR-3xx0 to FAR-2xx8, the image for FAR-
2xx8 is displayed on the screen and each function is operative, and vice versa.
• When connecting with FAR-2xx7 series radar
When switching the antenna from FAR-3xx0 to FAR-2xx7, the image for FAR-2xx7
is displayed on the screen and each function is operative. However, when switching
the antenna from FAR-2xx7 to FAR-3xx0, the following functions are not operative.
• Automatic Clutter Elimination (ACE) function
• Selection of the transmit frequency by the [TX CH] button for solid state radar
Master Display Slave Display
Radar Functions Control
Option Option
AIS function
Brilliance
Echo trails
EBL
Lat/long data
Presentation mode
Speed data
TT, AIS on/off
TT, AIS track interval
Vector mode
Vector time
Desired value can
VRM Independent
be set
Range
Reference Point
Desired value can
A/C SEA be set
A/C RAIN
Auto Rain
Gain
Echo stretch
Echo averaging
IR
Automatic Clutter
Elimination (ACE)
Picture setting
(Customize echo)
Performance monitor Dependent
Cannot control
SART control
STBY TX
Tuning
TT Lost alert
TT CPA/TCPA alert
Common Item commonly Item commonly con-
TT ALARM ACK
control controlled trolled
TT acquire
TT/AIS AZ

2-50
 2. RADAR, CHART RADAR OPERATION

2.29.3 How to select an antenna

For the ship that carries multiple antennas, you can select the antenna to use. Click
the [Antenna] button to select the antenna.

2.29.4 How to revert to own antenna

To release the interswitch and revert to viewing the radar image from own antenna,
right click the Antenna selection box on the Status bar, then select [Reset Antenna].
You are asked if you are sure to reset the antenna; click the [Yes] button to revert to
own antenna.

2.30 Dual Radar

When installing two FAR-3xx0 series radars, the image from both radars (main radar
and external radar) may be shown together on one radar display. This allows you to
take advantage of the best characteristics each type of radar has to offer.
Image from main radar

Image from external radar

The following should be done from the [RADAR INSTALLATION] menu at the time of
installation in order to enable the dual radar display:

• Set the display area on both the main radar and the external radar ([2 COMBINE
SECTOR], [3 COMBINE RANGE]).
• Select the number of external radar to use ([4 EXT RADAR]).
• Turn the dual radar function on ([5 COMBINE FUNC] is set to [ON]).

TT information
When a TT target crosses over the boundary line of the display area, its information is
passed to the other radar display. Tracking on the TT continues. The number of the
antenna which acquires a TT target is displayed in front of the TT number.

TT
TT

TT target crosses over the

boundary line of the display area.

Boundary lines of display area TT information is passed to the other radar

display. Tracking on the TT continues.

2-51
2. RADAR, CHART RADAR OPERATION

2.30.1 How to enable or disable the dual radar display

Turn on the power of main radar and external radar to set them in standby. The dual
radar function is not available when one of two radars is in TX (transmit) state or turned
off.

From the menu

1. Open the menu then select [1 ECHO] and [9 DUAL RADAR].
2. Select [COMBINE] to enable the dual radar display. To disable the dual radar dis-
play, select [OFF].
3. Close the menu.

From the antenna button

1. Right-click the [Antenna] button on the Status bar to show the context-sensitive
menu.
2. Select [Dual Radar].
3. Select [Combine]. To disable the dual radar display, select [Off].

2.30.2 Operating considerations for the dual radar display

In the dual radar mode, you can operate the antenna displayed in the [Antenna] button
on the Status bar. To operate the other antenna, select it in the [Antenna] button on
the Status bar.

The [Antenna] button lets you switch control

ANT-1&2 of the radar antennas when dual radar is ANT-2&1
active. The indication changes to show which
X-BAND antenna you are currently operating. X-BAND
In the left-hand example, radar antenna no.1 is controlled; in the right-hand example, no.2 is controlled.

You can toggle each radar between standby and TX in the dual radar display. When
switching to the standby mode, the Alert 730 (ALF format: 10740,1) "EXT Radar ST-
BY" appears and the radar echoes are not displayed.

The following functions are based on the settings in the radar which enables the dual
radar display. These settings are common with two radars.

• Off-center display • CU/TM reset

• Range scale • Trail settings
• Presentation mode • TT lost target filter
• Electronic chart on/off

2-52
 2. RADAR, CHART RADAR OPERATION

Notes
• The dual radar function is available between two FAR-3xx0 series radars using the
LAN. FAR-2xx7, FAR-2xx8 and FCR-2xx9 are not available.
• When a transmission error occurs between two radars in the dual radar mode, the
Alert 750 (ALF format: 10740,3) "EXT Radar COM Error" appears and the dual ra-
dar function is turned off.
• The dual radar display is not available on the external radar which overlays the main
radar image even though the dual radar is turned on.
• If TT data (two places) are passed between two radars (see page 2-51page 2-51),
TT targets are lost in the external equipment using TT informations (TTM) of this
equipment.

Restrictions
The followings are the restrictions of the dual radar function.

• A REF (reference) mark can be entered on the display of the main radar but not the
external radar.
• TT targets can be acquired manually. [TT SELECT] is set to manual acquisition.
• The reference position is set to [CCRP] (see section 2.33section 2.33). Set the
same CCRP position between two radars at the time of installation.
• [ECHO AREA] is set to [CIRCLE] (see section 2.39section 2.39).
• The following functions are not available in the dual radar mode.
• Performance monitor • TT simulation mode
• SART • Icing prevention
• Tune initialize • Interswitch

2-53
2. RADAR, CHART RADAR OPERATION

2.31 Performance Monitor

The performance monitor, installed in the antenna unit, produces a visual indication
on the radar display screen when the radar transmitter power and the radar receiver
sensitivity and tuning are within the prescribed limits. A graph is also provided and it
shows degradation of TX/RX/Power over time.

How to activate, deactivate the performance monitor

To activate, deactivate the performance monitor, do the following.

Note: Activate, deactivate the performance monitor in TX (transmit) state.

1. Set the radar in TX (transmit) state.
2. Open the menu then select the [1 ECHO] menu.
3. Select [6 PERFORMANCE MON].
4. Select [ON] or [GRAPH ONLY] as appropriate.
[ON]: Activate the performance monitor. The performance monitor graph is dis-
played.
[GRAPH ONLY]: Display the performance monitor graph. (The performance mon-
itor is not executed.)
5. Select [0], [2], [3], [5] or [6] in [ARC] (see "How to set the number of arcs""How to
set the number of arcs" on page 2-55page 2-55).
6. Close the menu after 30 seconds.
7. When selecting [ON] or [GRAPH ONLY], the performance monitor graph is dis-
played in the information box.
Click [X] to close the PM graph.

Value for degradation 8

of transmission/ -10.2 dB
reception/total power

Total transmission
time
Graph for transmission/ A total of 10 dB loss
reception/total power
8. Open the menu then select the [1 ECHO] menu.
9. Select [6 PERFORMANCE MON].
10. Select [OFF] to deactivate the performance monitor.
11. Close the menu. The icon "PM" appears in the message area on the status bar
(see subsection 1.8.1subsection 1.8.1) when the performance monitor is active.
Note: If the blind sector and the direction of the PM antenna overlap one another, turn
off the blind sector in order to display echoes correctly.
The radar is automatically set as follows when the performance monitor is activated.

2-54
 2. RADAR, CHART RADAR OPERATION

Setting at activation Adjustable while Setting at deactivation

Item
of PM PM is active of PM
CONDITION Setting stored No Setting before activation
CUSTOM- Grayed out, setting No Return to active display
IZE ECHO stored
EAV OFF No Setting before activation
ES OFF No Setting before activation
GAIN 70 *1 Yes*3 Setting before activation
IR OFF No Setting before activation
LOW LEVEL Setting stored No Setting before activation
ECHO
NOISE OFF No Setting before activation
REJECT
OFF center OFF Yes Setting at deactivation
Presentation Setting stored * 2 Yes Setting at deactivation
Mode
PULSE LONG No Setting before activation
RAIN 0 No Setting before activation
RAIN AUTO MAN No Setting before activation
RANGE 24 NM, 24 SM, Yes *4 Setting at deactivation
48 km, 48 kyd
SEA 0 No Setting before activation
SEA AUTO MAN No Setting before activation
TUNE AUTO No Setting before activation
VIDEO 4B*5 No Setting before activation
CONTRAST
WIPER OFF No Setting before activation

*1 Gain is automatically set according to [PM GAIN ADJ] if it was adjusted at installa-
tion.
*2 North-up RM is selected when the mode is North-up TM.
*3 The setting is not memorized.
*4 The performance monitor is deactivated if the range is changed.
*5 “ICE” video contrast setting is used when the ICE mode is active.

How to check radar performance

The range scale is automatically set to 24 NM. The radar screen will show arcs. You
can set the number of arcs. If the radar transmitter and receiver are in good working
order in as much as the original state when the monitor was turned on, the innermost
arc should appear between 8.0 NM and 19.8 NM. The performance monitor can ob-
serve a total of 10 dB loss in the transmitter and receiver.

Note 1: The location of the arcs changes with the setting of [ARC].
Note 2: When [ARC] (the number of arcs) is set to [0] (see "How to set the number of
arcs""How to set the number of arcs" below), there are no arc indications. Only the
performance monitor graph is displayed in the information box.
How to set the number of arcs

1. Open the menu then select the [1 ECHO] menu. Select [6 PERFORMANCE
MON].

2-55
2. RADAR, CHART RADAR OPERATION

2. Select [0], [2], [3], [5] or [6] in [ARC].

3. Close the menu.
Note: The lengths and location of the arcs may change with the direction in which the
antenna unit is installed. Judge the strength of the echo that appears within 60° from
arc location to confirm if the radar is working properly or not.
Turn off the performance monitor when finished.

The following illustrations in the table are the examples when [ARC] is set to [5].

Display Transmitter, receiver state

Transmitter: Normal
Receiver: Normal

8.0 NM to
19.8 NM

Transmitter and receiver:

No arc indicates 10 dB loss.
Contact your dealer for advice. (For a mag-
netron radar, have a technician check the
8.0 NM to
19.8 NM
magnetron.)

Note: The location of the arcs changes with the setting of [ARC].

2.32 Magnetron Reset (For A- and B-types)

After replacing the magnetron for the antenna unit, reset the TX time then adjust the
PM gain as follows:

1. Open the menu then select [8 INITIAL SETTING].

2. Select [9 MAGNETRON RESET].
3. Select [1 TX TIME] then set the transmit time to MENU
INITIAL SETTING
000000.0H. ← MAGNETRON RESET
4. Select [2 PM GAIN ADJ]. 1 TX TIME
4000H
5. Select [AUTO] or [MANUAL]. 2 PM GAIN ADJ
[AUTO]: PM gain is automatically adjusted. Go to AUTO/ 0
step 7step 7.
[MANUAL]: Set PM gain manually. Go to step 6step 6.
6. Adjust the PM gain manually as follows:
Note: If the blind sector and the direction of the PM antenna overlap one another,
turn off the blind sector before adjusting the PM gain.
1) Set the radar settings as follows:
• Range: 24 NM • A/C RAIN: OFF (turn off manually)
• Pulse Length: Long • Echo Averaging (EAV): OFF
• A/C SEA: OFF (turn off manually) • Video Contrast: 2-B

2-56
 2. RADAR, CHART RADAR OPERATION

2) Adjust the gain so that a slight amount of white noise appears on the screen.
Arcs for the performance monitor appear on the screen.
3) Set [PM GAIN ADJ] so that the outer arc faintly appears. The setting range is
0 to 255. Wait at least eight scans then adjust.
The following illustration is an example when [ARC] is set to [5] (see "How to
set the number of arcs""How to set the number of arcs" on page 2-55page 2-
55).
Before setup After setup

8.1 NM to 8.1 NM to
10.1 NM 10.1 NM

Approx. 12.1 NM (10 dB)

Note: The location of the arcs changes with the setting of [ARC].
7. Close the menu.

2.33 CCRP (Common Consistent Reference Point)

The reference position for measurements (range, bearing, etc.) and markers (heading
line, stern mark, etc.) can be the antenna position or CCRP, which is a location on own
ship to which all horizontal measurements, for example range, bearing, relative
course, relative speed, closest point of approach (CPA) or time to closest point of ap-
proach (TCPA), are normally referenced.

To select the reference position, click the button below [REF point] at the top-left po-
sition to select [ANT] or [CCRP] as appropriate.

Click button to switch

Radar antenna Conning position set

position set at at center of display
center of display

ANT position CCRP position

The position of the own ship marker changes according to reference position as
above. If the CCRP is positioned outside of the effective display area, the bearing
scale is indicated with the appropriate reduced detail.

Range and bearing are measured and graphics are drawn according to reference
point as shown in the table below.

2-57
2. RADAR, CHART RADAR OPERATION

Reference point
Category Item
CCRP Antenna position
Range and bearing EBL Range and bearing Range and bearing
measurement VRM measured from measured from an-
Cursor CCRP tenna position
PI line
Range ring
Drop mark
Graphics Heading line Drawn from CCRP Drawn from anten-
Stern mark na position
Beam line
Own ship vector
Own ship track
Bearing cursor Drawn with CCRP Drawn with antenna
at center position at center
Course, speed Calculated with Calculated with an-
CCRP at center tenna position at
center
CPA, TCPA Calculated with Calculated with an-
CCRP at center tenna position at
center
BCR, BCT Calculated from bow position
Own ship data Heading Data from sensor, regardless of reference
Speed point selected
Course over ground
Speed over ground
Own L/L Location of the CCRP

2-58
 2. RADAR, CHART RADAR OPERATION

2.34 Drop Mark

The drop mark is used to find the angle and
distance from a point to your ship. This can
be useful for marking a point to avoid while
navigating to a destination. The drop marks
can be shown or hidden on the screen. Drop mark

The Drop mark box shows the angle and dis-

tance between the drop mark and your ship.

Drop mark no. Minimize button

(1 or 2)
Drop angle

Drop distance

Note: The drop mark feature is inoperative when position data is lost.

2.34.1 How to show, hide the drop mark box

The drop mark box can be shown or hidden by trackball.
OFF: Click the arrow on the [Drop mark] box or right-click the box and select
[DROPx Off] (x=Drop mark no.).
ON: Click the minimize box.

2.34.2 How to inscribe a drop mark

Click the desired Drop mark box at the bottom of the screen. Click a position on the
display area where to put a drop mark, and a drop mark is inscribed at the position
selected. The angle and distance to the point appear in the corresponding Drop mark
box.

2.34.3 Drop mark bearing reference

The bearing of a drop mark is automatically referenced to True or Relative according
to the presentation mode.

Presentation mode Bearing reference

Head-up RM Relative
STAB H UP RM
Stern-up RM
Course-up RM True
North-up RM
North-up TM

2-59
2. RADAR, CHART RADAR OPERATION

2.34.4 How to erase a drop mark

Erase drop mark from menu
1. Open the menu then select the [5 MAP•MARK] and [1 MARK SETTING] menus.
2. Select [7 DROP MARK].
3. Select [ON] or [OFF].
4. Close the menu.

Erase drop mark by trackball

Right-click the applicable Drop mark box to show the context-sensitive menu then se-
lect [Drop1 Off] (or [Drop2 Off]). The drop mark and its data are erased.

2.35 Anchor Watch

The anchor watch is used to monitor if the ship is staying at anchor. If your vessel trav-
els more than the distance set here, the Alert 495 (ALF format: 10802) "Anchor Watch"
appears in the [Alert] box and the audio alarm sounds.

Alarm
setting

Your ship's position, where

you start the anchor watch. : Alarm triggered

How to activate anchor watch

1. Open the menu then select [8 INITIAL SET-
TING] and [4 ALERT] menus.
2. Select [2 ANCHOR WATCH].
3. Select [ON]. Use the scrollwheel to set the alarm
radius (0.01 to 9.99 NM).
4. Close the menu.

0.01NM

2-60
 2. RADAR, CHART RADAR OPERATION

2.36 SART

2.36.1 What is an SART?

A Search and Rescue Transponder (SART) may be triggered by any X-band (3 cm)
radar within a range of approximately 8 NM. Each radar pulse received causes it to
transmit a response which is swept repetitively across the complete radar frequency
band.

Screen A: When SART is distant Screen B: When SART is close

Radar antenna beamwidth

Echo from SART Echo from SART
(Lines of 12 dots (Lines of 12 dots
are displayed in are displayed in
concentric arcs.) concentric arcs.)

Own ship position Own ship position

Position of SART Position of SART
24 NM 1.5 NM

2.36.2 How to receive an SART

This radar is equipped with a feature that optimally sets up the radar for SART detec-
tion. This feature automatically detunes the radar receiver out of its best tuning condi-
tion. This erases or weakens all normal radar echoes, but the SART marks are not
erased because the SART response signal scans over all frequencies in the 9 GHz
band. When the radar approaches the SART in operation, the SART marks will en-
large to large arcs, blurring a large part of the screen.

Note: The SART function is not available with solid state radars other than FAR-3220-
NXT/FAR-3220-NXT-BB/ FAR-3320-NXT.
1. Open the menu then select the [1 ECHO] menu.
2. Select [7 SART].
3. Select [ON].
4. Close the menu. The icon “SART” appears in the Message area on the status bar
(see subsection 1.8.1subsection 1.8.1) when the SART function is active.
When the SART is activated the radar controls are automatically set as follows.

Adjustable during
Setting at activation Setting at deactivation
Item activation of SART
of SART feature of SART feature
feature
CONDITION Setting stored Yes Setting at deactivation
CUSTOMIZE Grayed out, setting No Return to active display
ECHO stored
EAV OFF No Setting before activation
ES OFF No Setting before activation
GAIN Setting stored Yes Setting at deactivation
IR OFF No Setting before activation

2-61
2. RADAR, CHART RADAR OPERATION

Adjustable during
Setting at activation Setting at deactivation
Item activation of SART
of SART feature of SART feature
feature
LOW LEVEL Setting stored Yes Setting at deactivation
ECHO
NOISE OFF No Setting before activation
REJECT
OFF center OFF*3 Yes Setting at deactivation
Presentation Setting stored *1 Yes Setting at deactivation
Mode
PULSE LONG No Setting at deactivation
RAIN Setting stored Yes Setting at deactivation
RAIN AUTO MAN No Setting before activation
RANGE*4 12 NM, 12 SM, Yes *2 Setting at deactivation
24 km, 24 kyd
SEA Setting stored Yes Setting at deactivation
SEA AUTO Setting stored Yes Setting at deactivation
TUNE Setting stored Yes Setting at deactivation
VIDEO Setting stored Yes Setting at deactivation
CONTRAST
WIPER Setting stored Yes Setting at deactivation

*1: North-up RM selected when the mode is North-up TM.

*2: For radars other than FAR-3220-NXT/FAR-3220-NXT-BB/ FAR-3320-NXT, the
SART feature is deactivated if the range is changed.
*3: For models FAR-3220-NXT/FAR-3220-NXT-BB/ FAR-3320-NXT, the OFF-CEN-
TER setting used when SART is activated is retained.
*4: For models FAR-3220-NXT/FAR-3220-NXT-BB/ FAR-3320-NXT, range at SART
activation is 24 NM, 24 SM, 32 km, 48 kyd. Ranges below these are selectable,
however pulselength is fixed at the highest pulselength available for the selected
range.

2.37 Doppler Feature (X-band Solid State Radars

only)
The doppler feature is available only for FAR-3220-NXT, FAR-3220-NXT-BB and
FAR-3320-NXT. This feature is designed to further reduce clutter or noise.
To use the doppler feature, do the following:

1. Open the menu, then select [1 ECHO].

2. Select [NEXT], then [3 DOPPLER].
3. Select the appropriate setting, referring to the list below:
• [0]: disables the doppler feature.
• [1]: reduces noise, making weak targets easier to find.
• [2]: reduces clutter from rain, etc., making it easier to find targets previously hid-
den by clutter.
4. Close the menu.

2-62
 2. RADAR, CHART RADAR OPERATION

2.38 Alert Box, Alert List

2.38.1 Alert box

When an alert condition is found, the applicable alert message and alert ID appear in
the [Alert] box. For the alarm- and warning-type alerts a buzzer sounds. The [Alert] box
is composed of the four items shown in the figure below. See chapter 20chapter 20 for
details.

Alert state
171
Buzzer stop button
icon Crossing Safety C
Click to temporarily
silence buzzer.

Alert message Alert List/Alert Log button

(alert number and name) (Right click to select.)

2.38.2 Alert list

The [Alert List] displays the status of the latest 900 system alerts, in order of genera-
tion, latest to the earliest. To display the list, click the Alert list/log icon in the [Alert]
box. The Alert list/log icon is light-blue when the list is displayed. A maximum of nine
alerts are shown per page. Unacknowledged alerts are displayed in flashing red
(alarm) or flashing yellow-orange (warning). The ZDA sentence is required to display
time in the list.
Click to close list.
• Click to close list. (Press ← on the
Control Unit to close list.)
• [BACK] shown when there are two
or more pages. Switch to previous
page in multiple page displays.
The name of the alert not
acknowledged or not rectified.

Status icon

Switch to next page in multiple page

displays. (Not shown when only one
page exists.)

How to acknowledge or rectify from the list

Control Unit: Press appropriate numeric key.
Trackball module: Click alarm name.

2-63
2. RADAR, CHART RADAR OPERATION

How to find details about an alert

Click the status icon in the list to show details about an
alert.

2.39 Echo Area

The echo display area for the B-type radar can be selected for [CIRCLE] or [WIDE].

CIRCLE WIDE

To select the echo display area type to use, open the menu, select the [1 ECHO] menu
then set [2 ECHO AREA] to [CIRCLE] or [WIDE] as appropriate.

2.40 Echo Color

The default echo color is yellow. Echo color is also available in the following colors:

B type: Yellow, green, white, amber, and “color”. “Color” displays echoes in red, yel-
low or green corresponding to the signal levels of strong, medium and weak.
IMO and A types: Yellow, green and white.
To select the echo color, open the [1 ECHO] menu then select desired color from [3
ECHO COLOR].

2.41 Icing Prevention

You can rotate the antenna (24 rpm) without transmission to keep the antenna from
freezing.

1. Open the menu then select the [8 INITIAL SETTING] menu. Select [0 ICING PRE-
VENTION].
2. Select [ON]. The following message appears at the bottom of the screen.

2-64
 2. RADAR, CHART RADAR OPERATION

3. Click [Start Antenna Rotation] to rotate the antenna without transmission. The
message changes as follow.

To stop the antenna rotation, click [Stop Antenna Rotation].

[STBY TX] is grayed out.

ACE ACE

S ICING PREVENTION S ICING PREVENTION

Rotate Antenna to Prevent Icing. Antenna Rotating, No TX.
S Start Antenna Rotation S Stop Antenna Rotation

When the antenna stops When the antenna rotates

With this feature active and the antenna stopped, pushing the STBY TX key on the
Control Unit or click the [STBY TX] button on the Status bar rotates the antenna and
transmits pulses. Operating one of the above-mentioned controls again stops trans-
mission but the antenna rotates.

2.42 Shuttle Ferry

The shuttle ferry feature changes the screen orientation by 180°. This feature requires
an external switch (local supply).

There are two variations: Standard display ([SHUTTLE FERRY] is turned OFF) and
reversed display ([SHUTTLE FERRY] is set for [MODE1] or [MODE2]).

Note 1: Have a FURUNO dealer or representative install the necessary external

switch.
Note 2: The shuttle ferry feature requires gyro data. The feature is disabled when gyro
data is lost.
When the display is reversed the following is done:

• Radar echoes are rotated 180°.

• Bearing for speed data is corrected by 180°.
• Wind direction based on speed input is corrected by 180°.
• With [MODE 2] active, the gyro value is corrected by 180°.
Note: [MODE 1] uses externally corrected gyro data, therefore gyro data is not re-cal-
ibrated.

2-65
2. RADAR, CHART RADAR OPERATION

StandardNormal display
display: Gyro Reversed
Reversed display
display: Gyro
input is displayed
Gyro inputnormally.
is input is displayed
Gyro in reverse.
input is displayed
displayed normally. 180° opposite to normal.

To activate or deactivate the shuttle ferry mode do as follows:

1. Open the menu then select the [8 INITIAL SETTING]

menu.
2. Select [NEXT (1/2→2/2)].
3. Select [2 SHUTTLE FERRY] and the mode desired.
[OFF]: Deactivate the shuttle ferry mode.
[MODE1]: Activate the shuttle ferry mode. Gyro data is not re-calibrated 180° op-
posite to normal.
[MODE2]: Activate the shuttle ferry mode. Gyro data is re-calibrated 180° opposite
to normal.
4. Close the menu.
When the shuttle ferry feature is active, the indication [Re-
verse] appears at top left corner on the display.

2.43 Chart Radar Functions

2.43.1 How to switch between radar and chart radar modes

Click the [CHART ON/OFF] button on the InstantAccess bar™ to show or hide the
chart.

[Chart
ON/OFF]
button

Indication on button and corresponding mode

[Chart ON]: Chart radar mode active. (Chart and radar picture are displayed.)
[Chart OFF]: Radar mode active. (Only the radar picture is displayed.)

When the GPS position is lost, the chart radar mode cannot be used. When this oc-
curs, the label on the button shows [Chart OFF] and the button is grayed out.

2-66
 2. RADAR, CHART RADAR OPERATION

2.43.2 How to show or hide chart objects

The [Chart Disp] button on the InstantAccess bar™ has several buttons which control
chart object visibility.

1 2 3 4 5

No. Item Function

1 [Coast Line Only] Hold down the left button to temporarily display only the
coastline. Chart symbols (depth contours, navigation buoys,
etc.) are temporarily erased from the screen.
2 [Chart Top Layer] Hold down the left button to temporarily put the chart objects
(buoy, lighthouse, etc.) on the top layer.
3 [Chart DISP Menu] Show the [CHART DISPLAY] menu, where you set safety
contours, safety depth, etc. See the figure on the next page
for the content of this menu and see section 8.2section 8.2
"How to Control Visibility of Chart Objects""How to Control
Visibility of Chart Objects" for details.
Note: This menu can also be shown by right-clicking the
[CHART ON/OFF] button and selecting [Chart Display
Menu].
4 [Sel DISP Object] Show the [SEL DISPLAY OBJECT] menu, where you can
select the chart objects and text to show or hide. See the
next page for the menus and see section 8.3section 8.3
"How to Control Visibility of Symbols, Features""How to Con-
trol Visibility of Symbols, Features" (symbol display) for de-
tails.
5 [Chart Legend] Show the chart informa-
tion for your current posi-
tion, with your vessel at
the center. See
chapter 9chapter 9 and
chapter 10chapter 10 for
a description of the chart
legends.

2-67
2. RADAR, CHART RADAR OPERATION

CHART DISPLAY menu GENERAL menu

STANDARD objects OTHER objects TEXT objects

[SEL DISPLAY OBJECT] menu

2-68
 2. RADAR, CHART RADAR OPERATION

2.43.3 How to create and recall custom sets of chart display objects
You can create one custom set of chart display objects and recall them when required.
For example, you can create a custom set of chart display objects to display when you
navigate a certain coastline.

How to create a custom set of chart display objects

1. Open the menu then select the [6 CHART DISPLAY] and [2 SEL DISPLAY OB-
JECT] menus.
2. Open the [2 STANDARD ITEMS], [3 OTHER ITEMS], [4 IMPORTANT TEXT] and
[5 OTHER TEXT] menus and turn objects and text on or off as appropriate.
3. Click [SEL DISPLAY OBJECT] on the menu.
4. Select [1 SAVE TO PERSONAL] to save the settings. The confirmation message
"Attention: Do you wish to overwrite current settings to PERSONAL?" appears.
5. Click the [OK] button to save the settings.

How to activate the custom set of chart display objects

Click the [Chart database] button (see subsection 2.43.4subsection 2.43.4) on the
Status bar then select [PERSONAL].

2-69
2. RADAR, CHART RADAR OPERATION

2.43.4 Chart database information

You can select the quantity of objects and text to display on the chart radar screen,
with the [Chart database] button on the Status bar. There are four different pre-defined
settings available and one user-definable ([PERSONAL]). Indication of selected set-
ting appears on the label of the [Chart database] button. The [Chart ON/OFF] button
(on the InstantAccess bar™) must be ON to show the [Chart database] button. The
[Chart database] button is grayed out if the [Chart ON/OFF] button is OFF.

[Chart database] button Selection Setting in [SEL DISP OBJECT] menu

[IMO Base] Nothing checked in [GENERAL], [STAN-
DARD], [OTHER] or [TEXT].
[IMO Primary] Nothing else checked but [BUOYS AND
BEACONS] in [STANDARD] and [SHAL-
LOW WATER DANGERS] in [GENER-
AL]. This is the “Primary Chart
Information Set (PCIS)”, based on IEC
62388 Ed.2 section12.1.5.1, IEC61174
and IMO Resolution MSC.232(82).
[IMO Standard] All objects checked in [STANDARD];
nothing checked in [GENERAL], [OTH-
ER] or [TEXT].
[IMO All] Everything checked in [STANDARD] and
[OTHER].
[PERSONAL] Use the settings recorded for [GENER-
AL], [STANDARD], [OTHER] and [TEXT].

2.43.5 How to set value for shallow contour, safety depth, safety con-
tour and deep contour
You can set values for shallow contour, safety depth, safety contour and deep contour,
on the [CHART DISPLAY] menu. Colors used for depth presentation on the electronic
chart are controlled by setting values for shallow contour, safety depth, safety contour
and deep contour. Soundings on the electronic chart, which are equal to or less than
the value of safety depth, are highlighted. For details, see the ECDIS operator’s man-
ual.

Note: The shallow contour cannot be set higher than the safety contour.
1. Open the menu then select the [6 CHART DISPLAY] menu.
2. Select [3 SHALLOW CONTOUR], [4 SAFETY DEPTH], [5 SAFETY CONTOUR],
or [6 DEEP CONTOUR].
3. Spin the scrollwheel to set the value then push the left button.
4. Close the menu.
To reset the value for shallow contour, safety depth, safety contour and deep contour,
open the menu then select [6 CHART DISPLAY] and [9 RESET CNT AND DEPTH]
menus. The message "Do you wish to restore default contour and depth settings?" ap-
pears. Select [Yes].

2-70
 2. RADAR, CHART RADAR OPERATION

2.43.6 How to select the chart color and tone

You can select color and tone for chart display.

1. Open the menu then select the [6 CHART DISPLAY] menu.

2. Select [7 CHART MONOCHROME].
3. Select [OFF] or [ON] as appropriate.
[OFF]: Displays the chart in multicolor.
[ON]: Displays the chart in monochrome.
4. Select [8 AREA COLOR].
5. Select [COLOR FILL], [GRAY SCALE], or [NO COLOR] as appropriate.
[COLOR FILL]: Displays chart in multi color.
[GRAY SCALE]: Displays water area in gray scale.
[NO COLOR]: Does not fill the chart.
6. Close the menu.

2.43.7 Chart scale indications

The system alerts you to the availability of larger Location of chart scale indications
scale ENC and overscale, at the top-left posi-
tion.

When the radar display range is higher than the

chart scale of the ENC chart, the indication,
"Larger scale ENC" is displayed. For example,
the radar range is 24 NM and the range avail-
able with the ENC chart is less than 12 NM.
When the radar display range is lower than the
chart scale of the ENC chart, the indication
"Overscale x.xx" (x.xx=overscale factor). For ex-
ample, the radar range is 0.25 NM and the chart scale is 0.5 NM.

If both conditions exist, both indications are displayed.

2.43.8 Chart status

The indication “Chart Status” appears at the top-right position on the screen when the
display date for the currently displayed chart has passed.

2.43.9 Chart alert function

The chart alert function operates in chart mode only. There are two types of chart
alerts: your ship's predicted course, and route alert. See chapter 11chapter 11 for de-
tails.

For the ship's predicted course alert, the operator sets a safety contour. (See
subsection 8.2.1subsection 8.2.1 for how to set a safety contour suitable for the ship.)
The operator also sets the parameters for own ship predicted movement. (See
section 11.2section 11.2 "How to Activate Own Ship Look-ahead Area""How to Acti-
vate Own Ship Look-ahead Area".)

For the route alert, route planning (see section 12.4section 12.4 "How to Create a
New Route""How to Create a New Route") and route monitoring (see

2-71
2. RADAR, CHART RADAR OPERATION

section 14.1section 14.1 "How to Start Route Monitoring""How to Start Route Monitor-
ing") functions are available.

2-72
 2. RADAR, CHART RADAR OPERATION

2.43.10 Notes details

"Notes" provides messages for the operator relative to a specific ship position. The
chart radar compares the Notes position and own ship position and displays the Notes
when own ship is at the distance from the Notes specified in route planning. To display
the Notes at other times, right-click the display area to show the context-sensitive
menu, then select [Notes Detail]. In the example below, the Notes about a wreck are
shown.

• [Object name]: The name assigned to the Notes.

• [Object class]: The type of object (point, line, area or
Wreck area circle) linked to the Notes.
• [Position]: Position of the object in latitude and
longitude.
• [Range]: The range to the object.
• [Description]: A description of the object, input in the
Voyage planning mode.

Wreck within circle

2-73
2. RADAR, CHART RADAR OPERATION

2.44 Radar Observation

2.44.1 General
Minimum range
The minimum range is defined by the shortest distance at which, using a scale of 1.5
or 0.75 NM, a target having an echoing area of 10 m2 is still shown separate from the
point representing the antenna position.

It is mainly dependent on the pulse length, antenna height, and signal processing such
as main bang suppression and digital quantization. It is a good practice to use a short-
er range scale as far as it gives favorable definition or clarity of picture. The IMO Res-
olution MSC.192(79) requires the minimum range to be less than 40 m, respectively.
This series of radars satisfy this requirement.

Maximum range
The maximum detecting range of the radar, radar horizon, varies considerably de-
pending on several factors such as the height of the antenna above the waterline, the
height of the target above the sea, the size, shape and material of the target, and the
atmospheric conditions.

Under normal atmospheric conditions, the maximum range is equal to the radar hori-
zon or a little shorter. The radar horizon is longer than the optical one by about 6%
because of the diffraction property of the radar signal. The radar horizon is given in the
following equation.

D: Radar horizon

h2
Optical horizon
h1 Grobe

D = 2.2 x ( h1 + h2)
where D: radar horizon (nautical miles)
h1: antenna height (m)
h2: target height (m)

For example, if the height of the antenna above the waterline is 9 meters and the
height of the target is 16 meters, the maximum radar range is;

D = 2.2 x ( 9 + 16 ) = 2.2 x (3 + 4) = 15.4 NM

It should be noted that the detection range is reduced by precipitation (which absorbs
the radar signal).

X-band and S-band

In fair weather, the equation on the previous page does not give a significant differ-
ence between X- and S-band radars. However, in heavy precipitation condition, an S-
band radar would have better detection than an X-band radar.

Radar resolution
There are two important factors in radar resolution (discrimination): bearing resolution
and range resolution.

2-74
 2. RADAR, CHART RADAR OPERATION

Bearing resolution
Bearing resolution is the ability of the radar to display as separate pips the echoes re-
ceived from two targets which are at the same range and close together. It is propor-
tional to the antenna length and reciprocally proportional to the wavelength. The
length of the antenna radiator should be chosen for a bearing resolution better than
2.5° (IMO Resolution). This condition is normally satisfied with a radiator of 1.2 m (4
ft) or longer in the X-band. The S-band radar requires a radiator of about 12 feet (3.6
m) or longer.

Range resolution
Range resolution is the ability to display as separate pips the echoes received from
two targets which are on the same bearing and close to each other. This is determined
by pulse length only. Practically, a 0.08 microsecond pulse offers the discrimination
better than 40 m as do so with all FURUNO radars. Test targets for determining the
range and bearing resolution are radar reflectors having an echoing area of 10 m2 (X-
band) or 1 m2 (S-band).

Bearing accuracy
One of the most important features of the radar is how accurately the bearing of a tar-
get can be measured. The accuracy of bearing measurement basically depends on
the narrowness of the radar beam. However, the bearing is usually taken relative to
the ship's heading, and thus, proper adjustment of the heading line at installation is an
important factor in ensuring bearing accuracy. To minimize error when measuring the
bearing of a target, put the target echo at the extreme position on the screen by se-
lecting a suitable range.

2.44.2 False echoes

Occasionally echo signals appear on the screen at positions where there is no target
or disappear even if there are targets. They are, however, recognized if you under-
stand the reason why they are displayed. Typical false echoes are shown below.

Multiple echoes
Multiple echoes occur when a transmitted pulse returns from a solid object like a large
ship, bridge, or breakwater. A second, a third or more echoes may be observed on the
display at double, triple or other multiples of the actual range of the target as shown
below. Multiple reflection echoes can be reduced and often removed by decreasing
the gain (sensitivity) or properly adjusting the sea clutter.

True
echo

Target
Own ship Multiple echo

2-75
2. RADAR, CHART RADAR OPERATION

Sidelobe echoes
Every time the radar pulse is transmitted, some radiation escapes on each side of the
beam, called "sidelobes." If a target exists where it can be detected by the side lobes
as well as the main lobe, the side echoes may be represented on both sides of the true
echo at the same range. Side lobes show usually only on short ranges and from strong
targets. They can be reduced through careful reduction of the gain or sea clutter.

Mainlobe (beam)

True target

Sidelobe Sidelobe

Antenna False echoes by sidelobes

Virtual image
A relatively large target close to your ship may be represented at two positions on the
screen. One of them is the true echo directly reflected by the target and the other is a
false echo which is caused by the mirror effect of a large object on or close to your
ship as shown in the figure below. If your ship comes close to a large metal bridge, for
example, such a false echo may temporarily be seen on the screen.

Target ship
Route for direct reflection

Own ship

True
echo

Bridge

Route for indirect reflection False

echo
Mirror image
of target ship

2-76
 2. RADAR, CHART RADAR OPERATION

Shadow sectors
Funnels, stacks, masts, or derricks in the path of the antenna block the radar beam. If
the angle subtended at the antenna is more than a few degrees, a non-detecting sec-
tor may be produced. Within this sector targets can not be detected.

Radar
antenna

Radar
mast

Shadow sector

2.44.3 RACON
A RACON is a radar beacon which emits radar receivable signals in the radar frequen-
cy spectrum (X- or S-band). There are several signal formats; in general, the RACON
signal appears on the radar screen as a rectangular echo originating at a point just
beyond the position of the radar beacon. It has a Morse coded pattern. Note that the
position on the radar display is not accurate.

RACON

2.44.4 Radar Target Enhancer (RTE)

An RTE is a radar transponder that is mounted on navigation buoys and masts of
small crafts to significantly improve their detection by radar. Unlike a SART or
RACON, which are passive, the RTE receives a radar signal, amplifies it and re-trans-
mits it, with the intention of making the target's signal look larger on a radar display.
The RTE can be detected on both X-band and S-band radars.

2-77
2. RADAR, CHART RADAR OPERATION

2.44.5 Solid state radar

In Solid State radars, long-range and short-range pictures are mixed before they are
displayed on the screen. Due to this mixing process, echoes may be displayed differ-
ently when compared with magnetron radars.

: Short-range
: Long-range

Approx. 0.5 NM to 2 NM
(depending on the pulse length)

Range and signal intensity

At long-range, even though the Solid State radar has lower transmission power than
magnetron radars, the signal intensity is equivalent.

At short-range on the other hand, due to the lower transmission power the signal in-
tensity of closer targets (including sea clutter and rain clutter) is reduced.

For this reason, when a long-range target enters short-range the signal intensity ap-
pears weaker.

Range sidelobe
As a result of pulse compression, range sidelobes may appear to the front and rear of
a strong reflected echo. When the direction of the echo changes, the reflection weak-
ens and the range sidelobes may disappear. Range sidelobes can also be removed
by reducing the gain.

False echoes Echo

2-78
3. TARGET TRACKING (TT)

3.1 About TT
The TT tracks and plots the movement of up to 200 radar targets and fully complies
with IMO standards for TT.

The TT automatically tracks an automatically or manually acquired radar target and

calculates its course and speed, indicating them with a vector. Since the data gener-
ated by the TT depends on the radar targets selected, the radar must be optimally
tuned for use with the TT, to ensure required targets will not be lost or unnecessary
targets like sea returns and noise will not be acquired and tracked.

Tracking accuracy is affected by course change. One to two minutes is required to re-
store vectors to full accuracy after an abrupt course change. (The actual amount de-
pends on gyrocompass specifications.)
The amount of tracking delay is inversely proportional to the relative speed of the tar-
get. Delay is approx. 15-30 seconds for the higher relative speed; approx. 30-60 sec-
onds for the lower relative speed. The following factors can affect accuracy:

• Echo intensity
• Radar transmission pulse length
• Radar bearing error
• Gyrocompass error
• Course change (own ship and targets)

3.2 How to Show, Hide the TT Display

Click the TT mode indication at the bottom-right position
to show [OFF] to hide the TT display, or [AUTO]*,
[MAN]* or [MAN/AUTO]* to show the TT display. You
can right-click the TT mode indication to show a context-
sensitive menu with the choices shown above. In this
case, click the applicable option.

* The indication shown depends on the setting of [TT

SELECT] in the [TT•AIS] menu.

3-1
3. TARGET TRACKING (TT)

3.3 How to Input Your Ship's Speed

The TT requires own ship's speed and heading data. The speed can be STW, SOG,
or echo-referenced speed (based on 3 max. stationary objects) taken from this radar.
Manual input is also possible.

For automatic or manual speed input, see section 1.16section 1.16. For echo-refer-
enced speed input see the next section.

3.3.1 Echo-referenced speed input

The use of echo-referenced speed is recommended when:

• The speed log is not operating properly or not connected to the radar.
• The vessel has no device that can measure ship's leeward movement (doppler so-
nar, speed log, etc.) when leeward movement cannot be disregarded.
If you select echo-referenced speed, the TT calculates own ship's speed relative to a
fixed reference target. The number of targets may be 1, 2 or 3. They appear as tracked
targets, each denoted with a small circle. When a plural number of objects are select-
ed, the mean value is used.

Note: This feature is not available when the AIS is active.

1. Right-click the display area to show the context-sensitive menu then select [REF
Mark].
2. Select a small fixed island or any radar prominent point located at 0.1 to 24 NM
from own ship.
3. Use the trackball to put the cursor (+) on the target selected at step 2.
4. Push the left button to insert the reference mark.
Chart for Radar mode Radar mode
R01 R01
Changes to R in three minutes.
R 01 01 Changes to in three minutes.
5. Repeat steps 2-4 to continue entering reference marks. Three may be entered.
6. Right click the Sensor information, datum box then select [Select Sensor] and
[Setting]. Open the [SPD] page and put a checkmark at [Reference SPD]. Click
the [OK] button to finish.

Notes on speed input by reference target

• Reference targets are only used for the calculation of true speed.
• Do not use reference target generated true speed to calculate relative speed. Rel-
ative speed data is not accurate because response to speed change is slow, ham-
pering the TT's ability to accurately judge the possibility of collision.
• Select a stationary target as a reference target to calculate own ship speed as
ground tracking speed. Do not choose a moving target as a reference target. A mov-
ing target produces error in the vector for TT and AIS, which results in wrong colli-
sion avoidance information. Further, an unstable stationary target produces
inaccurate speed data and the target itself may become lost.
• When a reference target is lost or goes out of the acquisition range, the reference
target mark flashes and the Alert 528 (ALF format: 193,2) "REF Target Lost" ap-
pears in the [Alert] box. If all reference targets are lost, the speed indication disap-
pears. Select a different reference target if the currently selected one is lost.

3-2
 3. TARGET TRACKING (TT)

• When all tracked targets are deleted, the reference target mark is also deleted and
the target-based speed becomes invalid.
• Loss of reference target will affect the calculation of true speed and true course of
targets. Further, own ship speed will be inaccurate.

How to cancel echo-referenced speed input

Right click the Sensor information, datum box then select [Select Sensor] and [Set-
ting]. Open the [SPD] page and select a speed sensor.

3.4 Automatic Acquisition

This radar can automatically acquire and track a maximum of 200 targets. The maxi-
mum number of acquired targets ([NUMBER OF TT]) is set at the time of installation.
The options are 200 ([MAX]) and 100.

The number of automatically and manually acquired targets is determined by the set-
ting of [TT SELECT] in the [TT] menu.

A target just acquired automatically is marked with a dashed circle and a vector ap-
pears within one minute to indicate the target's motion trend. Within three minutes, the
initial tracking stage is finished and the target becomes ready for stable tracking. At
this time, the dashed circle changes to a solid circle.

Note: When connecting with an FAR-2xx7 or FAR-2xx8 series radar, the maximum
number of ac-quired targets ([NUMBER OF TT]) should be set to 100 in the [RADAR
INSTALLATION] menu. The service man only can set the [RADAR INSTALLATION]
menu. Contact your dealer.

3.4.1 How to enable auto acquisition

1. Right-click the TT mode indication then select [TT Menu] to show the [TT] menu.
2. Select [1 TT SELECT] and the acquisition condition.
[NUMBER OF TT] is [MAX] [NUMBER OF TT] is [100]
Menu setting Acquisition condition Menu setting Acquisition condition
[MANUAL 200] 200 targets manually, [MANUAL 100] 100 targets manually,
Not available for auto ac- Not available for auto ac-
quisition quisition
[MANUAL 150 • 50 targets automatically, [MANUAL 75 • 25 targets automatically,
AUTO 50] 150 targets manually AUTO 25] 75 targets manually
[MANUAL 100 • 100 targets automatical- [MANUAL 50 • 50 targets automatically,
AUTO 100] ly, 100 targets manually AUTO 50] 50 targets manually
[MANUAL 50 • 150 targets automatical- [MANUAL 25 • 75 targets automatically,
AUTO 150] ly, 50 targets manually AUTO 75] 25 targets manually
[AUTO 200] 200 targets automatical- [AUTO 100] 100 targets automatical-
ly, Not available for man- ly, Not available for man-
ual acquisition ual acquisition

3. Close the menu.

Note 1: The TT indication in the TT/AIS setting box shows [AUTO], [MAN/AUTO] or
[MAN] depending on the acquisition condition selected.

3-3
3. TARGET TRACKING (TT)

Note 2: When the menu-set number of automatically acquired targets have been ac-
quired, the Alert 523 (ALF format: 190,4) "TT Auto ACQ 100%" appears in the [Alert]
box.

3.4.2 How to set an automatic acquisition zone

You can set an automatic acquisition zone to automatically track any targets entering
the zone. The acquisition zone can be fan-shaped or polygonal. The maximum track-
ing range is set during the installation.

Fan-shaped zone of AZ1: The range is fixed at 3 - 6 NM (width 0.5 - 1.0 NM).
Fan-shaped zone of AZ2: The range is available between 0.7 - 24 (or 32) NM (width
0.5 - 1.0 NM)
Polygon zone of AZ2: The zone can be set within the range of 0.125 NM to 96 NM.

Note: When processing two acquisition zones, create the zones in numerical order
and turn them off in reverse numerical order.

To set the zone for AZ2, first set the zone for AZ1.

To turn off the zone for AZ1, first turn off the zone for AZ2.

When a target enters an acquisition zone, the following occurs:

• the buzzer sounds

• the Alert 521 (ALF format: 192,1) "TT New Target" appears in the [Alert] box
• the symbol of the target is red and flashes
• the AIS function is automatically turned on if it is off
1. Click one of the boxes AZ1 or AZ2 at the right side of the screen. The indication
in the AZ box changes from [OFF] to [SET].

For example,
click here for
AZ1.
2. Click point A.
3. Click point B. The indication in the AZ box changes from [SET] to [WORK].

340
350 000 010
020 Acquisition zone Other acquisition zone examples
330 030
320 040 Point A
310 050
X
300 060 Point B
290 A B
070 X
280 080
X
270 090 Point A X
260 100 Point B
250 110

240 120
230 130
220 140
210 150
200 160
190 180 170

3-4
 3. TARGET TRACKING (TT)

Note 1: You are alerted when the capacity for automatic acquisition is 95% and 100%.
These alerts are 522 (ALF format: 10190,4) "TT Auto ACQ 95%" and 523 (ALF format:
190,4) "TT Auto ACQ 100%".
Note 2: If the range scale is changed to less than half of the acquisition zone, the AZ
box shows [OUT]. If the left button is pushed in this state, the acquisition alarm zone
goes into [SLEEP] state (inactive).

How to sleep, deactivate an acquisition zone

Use the trackball to select the appropriate AZ box. Sleep or deactivate the acquisition
zone as appropriate:
Sleep acquisition zone: Push the left button momentarily to remove the acquisition
zone from the screen. The indication in the AZ box changes from [WORK] to [SLEEP].
To reactivate and display the acquisition zone, repeat this procedure to display
[WORK].
Deactivate acquisition zone: Click applicable AZ box and select [OFF].

How to acknowledge the acquisition zone audio alarm

Press the ALARM ACK key, or click the [Alert] box.

Acquisition zone stabilization

The acquisition zone may be referenced to heading or North. Open the menu then se-
lect the [TT•AIS] and [1 ACQUISITION ZONE] menus. Set [1 AZ STAB] to [STAB
HDG] or [STAB NORTH] as appropriate. For a polygon acquisition zone, stabilization
can be selected to [2 AZ POLYGON].

3.5 Manual Acquisition

This radar can manually acquire and track a maximum of 200 targets. The maximum
number of acquired targets ([NUMBER OF TT]) is set at the time of installation. The
options are 200 ([MAX]) and 100.
The number of automatically and manually acquired targets is determined by the set-
ting of [TT SELECT] in the [TT] menu.

Note: When connecting with an FAR-2xx7 or FAR-2xx8 series radar, the maximum
number of ac-quired targets ([NUMBER OF TT]) should be set to 100 in the [RADAR
INSTALLATION] menu. The service man only can set the [RADAR INSTALLATION]
menu. Contact your dealer.

3.5.1 How to set manual acquisition conditions

1. Right-click the TT mode indication then select [TT Menu] to show the [TT] menu.
2. Select [1 TT SELECT] and the acquisition condition.
[NUMBER OF TT] is [MAX] [NUMBER OF TT] is [100]
Menu setting Acquisition condition Menu setting Acquisition condition
[MANUAL 200] 200 targets manually, [MANUAL 100 targets manually,
Not available for auto ac- 100] Not available for auto ac-
quisition quisition
[MANUAL 150 50 targets automatically, [MANUAL 75 25 targets automatically,
• AUTO 50] 150 targets manually • AUTO 25] 75 targets manually

3-5
3. TARGET TRACKING (TT)

[NUMBER OF TT] is [MAX] [NUMBER OF TT] is [100]

[MANUAL 100 100 targets automatically, [MANUAL 50 50 targets automatically,
• AUTO 100] 100 targets manually • AUTO 50] 50 targets manually
[MANUAL 50 • 150 targets automatically, [MANUAL 25 75 targets automatically,
AUTO 150] 50 targets manually • AUTO 75] 25 targets manually
[AUTO 200] 200 targets automatically, [AUTO 100] 100 targets automatical-
Not available for manual ly, Not available for man-
acquisition ual acquisition

3. Close the menu.

3.5.2 How to manually acquire a target

Acquire a target from the Control Unit
Use the trackball to put the cursor on the target you want to acquire. Push the ACQ/
ACT key.

Acquire a target by the trackball module

1. When the target to acquire and the AIS symbol overlap one another, push the right
button to show the context-sensitive menu then select [Target Data/ACQ/ACT]
and [TT Only] to acquire the target.
2. Put the cursor on the target to acquire then push the left button.
The plotting symbol is drawn by a dashed circle during the initial acquisition stage. A
vector appears approximately one minute after acquisition. The vector indicates the
motion trend of the target. If the target is consistently detected for three minutes, the
plotting symbol changes to a solid circle. If acquisition fails, the target symbol blinks.

Note 1: For successful acquisition, the target should be within 24 NM (or 32 NM, de-
pending on initial setting) from own ship and not obscured by sea or rain clutter.
Note 2: You are alerted when the capacity of manual acquisition is 95% and 100%.
These alerts are Alert 524 (ALF format: 10190,5) "TT MAN ACQ 95%" and Alert 525
(ALF format: 190,5) "TT MAN ACQ 100%". If the capacity is 100% you cannot acquire
more targets. Cancel tracking of non-threatening targets if you wish to acquire addi-
tional targets manually.
Note 3: When a target being tracked nears another target being tracked, the targets
may be "swapped". When two targets acquired either automatically or manually come
close to each other, one of the two may become a lost target. If this occurs, manual
re-acquisition of the lost target may be necessary after the two have separated.
Note 4: You can reuse a target number. This is useful when you acquire the “wrong”
target. Drag and drop the symbol onto the correct target.

3-6
 3. TARGET TRACKING (TT)

3.6 How to Stop Tracking Targets (including refer-

ence targets)
When the TT has acquired the menu-set number of targets, the Alert 523 (ALF format:
190,5) "TT AUTO ACQ 100%" (automatic acquisition) or 525 (ALF format: 190,4) "TT
MAN ACQ 100%" (manual acquisition) appears in the [Alert] box and no more auto or
manual acquisition occurs unless targets are lost. Should this happen, cancel tracking
of less important targets to acquire new targets.

3.6.1 How to cancel tracking on individual tracked targets

Cancel tracking on a target from the Control Unit
1. Use the trackball to put the cursor (+) on the TT or reference target to cancel track-
ing.
2. Push the TARGET CANCEL key.

Cancel tracking on a target by the trackball module

1. Right-click the operational area of the screen to show the context-sensitive menu.
2. Select [Target Cancel] and [Any] or [TT Only] as applicable.
3. Click the TT or reference target to cancel tracking.

3.6.2 How to cancel tracking on all TTs

Cancel tracking on all target from the menu
1. Right-click the TT mode indication on the bottom-right of the screen then select
[TT Menu] to show the [TT] menu.
2. Select [2 ALL CANCEL].
3. Select [YES].
4. Close the menu.

Cancel tracking on all target from the Control Unit

Long-press the TARGET CANCEL key to erase all displayed TT target data.

3.7 TT Symbols and TT Symbol Attributes

3.7.1 TT symbols
The symbols used in this equipment comply with IEC 62288.

Symbol Default color Name Description

Green Past position marker Past position point
Green Target under acquisi- Plotting symbol selected for a tar-
tion get acquired manually is shown in
broken lines.

3-7
3. TARGET TRACKING (TT)

Symbol Default color Name Description

Red Target under auto- Thick, broken circle around an
matic acquisition echo to indicate the target under
acquisition and initial stage of
tracking, before steady-state
tracking.
Green Acquired target Solid circle with vector indicating
steady state tracking (within three
minutes after acquisition)
Red Acquired target in Solid circle with vector indicating
ACQ zone (before steady state tracking (within three
acknowledgment) minutes after acquisition)
Red Dangerous target Dangerous TT (thick, solid circle)

Green Reference target Used to calculate own ship’s over-

R 01 the-ground speed (echo-refer-
Or enced speed) for ground stabiliza-
R01 tion.
Green Association target Association TT is shown in AIS
symbol and TT data.
Red Association danger- Association dangerous TT is
ous target shown in AIS symbol and TT data.
Red Lost target Lost TT is shown with cross mark.

Green Target selected TT selected to show its data.

White Trial maneuver Displayed (flashing) during trial

T
maneuver test.
S White TT test Displayed (flashing) during TT
test.

3.7.2 TT symbol brilliance

1. Right-click the [BRILL] button on the InstantAccess bar™ then select [Brill Menu].
2. Go to page 2, select [4 TT SYMBOL] then spin the scrollwheel to adjust the bril-
liance.

㪈㪌

㪈㪌

㪈㪌

㪈㪌

㪈㪌

㪈㪌

㪈㪌

3-8
 3. TARGET TRACKING (TT)

3.7.3 Color for TT symbol

You can select the color for the TT symbol as follows:

1. Right-click the TT mode indication then select [Symbol Menu] to show that menu.

2. Select [1 SYMBOL COLOR] and desired color. (Yellow is available with the A- and
B-type.)

3-9
3. TARGET TRACKING (TT)

3.8 How to Display TT Data

The TT mode provides the full functionality of TT as required by the IMO MSC.192(79)
and IEC 62288, including display of range, bearing, course, speed, CPA and TCPA of
all tracked targets.

The target bearing is show in relative bearing in the head-up mode and true bearing
in the course-up, north-up and true motion modes, with the suffix "R" (Relative) or "T"
(True).

The target speed and course are shown as speed over the ground or speed through
the water depending on speed source.

3.8.1 How to display target data for individual TT

You can show the data for two (19-inch display) or three (23-inch display) tracked tar-
gets in the TT information window.

From the Control Unit

Put the cursor on a target then push the TARGET DATA key.

By trackball module
Click the target for which you want to show its data.

Tracked target data

 To erase data from a data box, click the appropriate close data button.
 The basic target data display for a TT consists of the following information:
• TT no. Target numbering starts from "1". When a target is erased the number will
not be reused until the power is re-set or more than 200 targets are acquired.
• Bearing (BRG) and distance (RNG) of the target from own ship
• True speed over the ground (SOG) and true course over the ground (COG) of
the target
• CPA and TCPA. A negative TCPA value means that you have already passed
the closest point and the TT is going away from own ship.
• Bow Crossing Range (BCR) and Bow Crossing Time (BCT)

Title bar
TT
TT no. 001 002
Bearing BRG 137.0° T 138.5° T
Range RNG 8.587NM 8.726NM
Course over ground T COG 040.0° T 062.5° T
Speed over ground T SOG 9.81kn 7.35kn
CPA CPA 5.724NM 5.847NM
TCPA TCPA -33:24 -35:48
Bow crossing range BCR -7.171NM -7.326NM
Bow crossing time BCT -12:05 -13:03

3-10
 3. TARGET TRACKING (TT)

Number of TT/AIS target data box to display

You can select how many target data boxes to display with the following procedure.

1. Open the menu, then select [4 INFORMATION BOX] and [4 TARGET DATA].
2. Select the number of boxes to display from [1 BOX], [2 BOX], or [3 BOX].
Note: The [3 BOX] option is not available for 19 inch monitors.
3. Close the menu.
The target data are displayed from bottom up in order of acquisition. When target data
box(es), information box and zoom display are available, target data box(es) has pri-
ority.

TT/AIS Information Information

data 3 box box

TT/AIS TT/AIS Zoom

data 2 TT/AIS data 3 data 2 TT/AIS data 2 display
is canceled. is canceled.

TT/AIS TT/AIS TT/AIS

data 1 data 1 data 1

[3 BOX] selected

3.8.2 TT pop-up information

The TT pop-up shows abbreviated TT data (target no., tar-
get name*, COG, SOG, CPA and TCPA) for the selected
TT. Simply put the cursor on the TT symbol to show the pop-
up. The pop-up can be enabled or disabled with [TT POP-
UP INFO] in the [TT•AIS SYMBOL] menu.

*: The target name feature is available for B-type radars on-

ly. See section 3.17section 3.17.

3-11
3. TARGET TRACKING (TT)

3.8.3 Target list

The target list shows the data for all tracked targets and AIS targets. To show the list,
click the [Target List] button at the right side of the screen or press the TARGET LIST
key on the Control Unit. (The button is light-blue when the target list is displayed.)

To close the list, click the Close button (×) on the list or press the TARGET LIST key.

Sort targets by:

Filter targets:
CLOSE
1 TT Target
No. 21
BRG: 125.5°T RNG 3.434NM
CPA: 2.923NM TCPA: 12:00

2 AIS Target INFO: A [INFO] column: Click to show/hide the

FURUNO target information for each target. The
BRG: 120.2°T RNG: 5.211NM information displayed varies depending
CPA: 3.345NM TCPA: 14:30 on the target selected.
TT target name: • For AIS targets: The order in which the
Appears only on 3 TT Target
No. 01 FURUNOMARU targets appear in the details window is
B-types and only displayed (A, B or C). For example, a
when a name is set. BRG: 168.1°R RNG: 1.007 NM
CPA: 0.984 NM TCPA: 01:21 target with the indication “B” in the [INFO]
column appears in the second target
details box.
Click to refresh data 0 Refresh data “C” is not shown for 19” monitors.
→ Next • For TT targets: The target number (01
to 200) appears.
• For reference targets: The referrence
number (R01 to R03) appears.

How to sort the list

You can sort the list by CPA, TCPA, BCR, BCT, RANGE, SPEED or NAME, with the
[Sort by] drop-down list.

How to filter the list

The list shows all tracked targets and AIS targets received. If you do not need to see
all targets you can filter unnecessary ones. Use the [Filter] drop-down list to select
what targets to filter: Show all targets, TT only, AIS targets only, or show only the AIS
targets that meet the criteria set on the [DISP FILTER] menu.

3-12
 3. TARGET TRACKING (TT)

3.9 Vector Modes

Target vectors can be displayed relative to own ship's heading (Relative) or North
(True).

Note: IMO recommends the use of the true vector mode in sea stabilization or relative
vector mode for collision avoidance.

3.9.1 Description of vectors

Stabilization modes
It is important to select the optimum stabilization mode for the radar display. To assess
risk of collision the relative motion of a target gives the clearest indication of CPA and
may be monitored by observing either the direction of the target's relative trail, or the
CPA predicted by the relative vector. By default, relative motion displays relative target
trails and true motion displays true target trails. Where true target trails is selected, a
sea stabilized display will indicate all targets' motion through the water. A ground sta-
bilized display will indicate all targets' motion over the ground.

In coastal, estuarial and river waters where a significant set and drift may be experi-
enced, a sea stabilized display will produce significant target trails from all fixed (sta-
tionary) objects possibly producing an unacceptably high level of clutter and masking.
In such circumstances a ground stabilized display may reduce its effect and enable
the observer to detect clearly the trails of moving targets, thus enhancing the observ-
er's situational awareness.

However, the display should be considered only as an approximation of the course

and speed made good over the ground. Among other factors, the accuracy of the
ground-stabilization is affected by inaccuracies in speed and heading inputs as well
as radar measurement imprecision and will require the display to be readjusted peri-
odically. The information displayed should be interpreted with due regard to these fac-
tors.

Note: It should be noted that in determining a target's aspect by radar; the calculation
of its true track is dependent on the choice and accuracy of the own ship's course and
speed input. A ground-stabilized target plot may accurately calculate the ground track
of the target, but the target's heading may be significantly different from its track when
experiencing set, drift or leeway. Similarly, a sea stabilized target plot may be inaccu-
rate when own ship and the target, are experiencing different rates of set, drift or lee-
way.

Ground stabilization and sea stabilization

Target vectors can be ground stabilized or sea stabilized. To select speed over the
ground or speed through the water data, open the page from the menu. Select for
ground stabilization or for sea stabilization. The Vector mode indication shows the sta-
bilization mode in the true motion as [True-G] or [True-S].

Sea stabilization is a mode where own ship and all targets are referenced to the sea
using a compass heading and single-axis log water speed inputs in the true motion
mode. Ground stabilization is a mode where own ship and all targets are referenced
to the ground using the ground track or set and drift inputs. If the accuracy seems un-
satisfactory, enter set and drift corrections. Note that set and drift should not be used
when the radar is displaying AIS targets.

3-13
3. TARGET TRACKING (TT)

True vector
In the true motion mode, all fixed targets such as land, navigational marks and ships
at anchor remain stationary on the radar screen with vector length zero. But in the
presence of wind and/or current, the vectors appear on fixed targets representing the
reciprocal of set and drift affecting own ship unless set and drift values are properly
entered.

In the true vector mode, there are two types of stabilization: ground stabilization (True-
G) and sea stabilization (True-S). The stabilization mode is automatically selected ac-
cording to speed selection, as shown in the table below. Manual selection is available
with [Stabilization Mode] in the [SPD] page in the [Sensor Settings] menu.

Speed selection True vector mode

LOG(WT) True-S
LOG(WTC) True-G
LOG(BT) True-G
GPS(BT) True-G
REF(BT) True-G
MAN(WT) True-S
MAN(WTC) True-G

Relative vector
Relative vectors on targets that are not moving over the ground such as land, naviga-
tional marks and ships at anchor will represent the reciprocal of own ship's ground
track. A target whose vector passes through own ship is on a collision course. (Dotted
lines in the figure are for explanation only.)

Current
TT TT (Set and drift) TT
Buoy Buoy Buoy

Own Ship Own Ship Own Ship

AIS AIS AIS

True vectors in ground True vectors in sea Relative vectors

stabilization stabilization

3-14
 3. TARGET TRACKING (TT)

3.9.2 Vector motion and length

Vectors may be displayed in true or relative motion. Vector time (or the length of vec-
tors) can be set between 30 seconds and 60 minutes.

The vector tip shows an estimated position of the target after the selected vector time
elapses. It can be valuable to extend the vector length to evaluate the risk of collision
with any target.

From the Control Unit

Vector motion: Push the VECTOR MODE key consecutively to select relative or true
vector mode. Your selection is shown in the Vector mode indication.

Vector length: Push the VECTOR TIME key consecutively to select vector time,
among 30 seconds, 1 minute, 3 minutes, 5 minutes, 6 minutes, 10 minutes, 20 min-
utes, 30 minutes, 45 minutes and 60 minutes.

By trackball module
Vector motion: Click the vector motion indication at the right side of the screen to se-
lect relative or true vector mode.

Vector length: Click the vector time indication at the right side of the screen to select
time among 30 seconds, 1 minute, 3 minutes, 5 minutes, 6 minutes, 10 minutes, 20
minutes, 30 minutes, 45 minutes and 60 minutes. Or, spin the scrollwheel to select the
length from 30 seconds or 1 - 60 minutes, in one-minute intervals.

Vector length
Vector motion

3.10 Past Position Display

The past position display shows equally time-spaced dots marking the past positions
of any targets being tracked.

If a target changes its speed, the spacing will be uneven. If it changes the course, its
plotted course will not be a straight line. See the illustration below for dot pattern and
ship status.

(a) Ship turning (b) Ship running (c) Ship reduced (d) Ship increased
straight speed speed

3-15
3. TARGET TRACKING (TT)

3.10.1 How to enable/disable the past position display, select past

position reference
Click the indications circled in the fig-
ure below to set the plot interval (or Plot interval, past
disable the display) and the past po- position display
sition reference (true or relative). ON/OFF

Past position
reference

3.10.2 Past position points

You can show 5 or 10 past position points per tracked target. Right-click the past po-
sition indication then select [Past POSN Menu] to show that menu. Set [6 TT•AIS
PAST POSN POINTS] to [5] or [10].

3.11 How to Enter Set and Drift

Set, the direction in which a water current flows, can be manually entered in 0.1-de-
gree steps. Drift, the speed of the tide, can also be entered manually in 0.1 knot steps.

When course through water and speed through water are available, activate set and
drift to get course over ground and speed over ground.

Set and drift corrections are beneficial for increasing the accuracy of vectors and tar-
get data. Refer to the tide table on board the ship for setting information. These values
are applied to all targets. If stationary targets have vectors, set and drift values should
be adjusted until they lose vectors.

Note: For the IMO type, turn off the AIS function in order to enter set and drift.
To enter set and drift do the following:

1. Right-click the Sensor information then select [OS Info Menu] to show the [OWN
SHIP INFO] menu.
2. Select [2 SYSTEM SETTING] or [3 LOCAL SETTING] as appropriate.
3. Use the right and left arrow buttons to select
the [SPD] page.
4. Set [Stabilization Mode] to [Water].
5. Click the [Set Drift] box to show a checkmark
in the box.
6. Put the cursor in the course input box then
spin the scrollwheel to select the set.
7. Put the cursor in the drift input box then spin
the scrollwheel to select the drift.
8. Click [OK].
Set speed and
9. Close the menu. course of drift
Note: Set and drift should be checked periodi-
cally for correctness.

3-16
 3. TARGET TRACKING (TT)

3.12 TT CPA/TCPA Alarm

The TT continuously monitors the predicted range at the Closest Point of Approach
(CPA) and predicted time to CPA (TCPA) of each TT. When the predicted CPA of any
TT becomes smaller than the preset CPA range and its predicted TCPA less than the
preset TCPA limit, the audio alarm sounds and the Alert 526 (ALF format: 191,1) "TT
CPA/TCPA" appears in the [Alert] box. In addition, the symbol of the offending TT is
red and flashes together with its vector.

This feature, when used correctly, helps prevent the risk of collision by alerting you to
threatening targets. It is important that the gain, sea clutter and rain clutter and other
radar controls are properly adjusted.

The accuracy of TT calculations is a function of several variables including target glint,

clutter conditions and signal-to-noise ratio. The design of the TT minimizes the effects
of these variables but you must be aware that such errors will produce inaccuracies in
the derived CPA and TCPA in particular during the initial tracking period.

CPA and TCPA settings must be set up properly taking into consideration the size,
tonnage, speed, turning performance and other characteristics of own ship.

The TT CPA/TCPA alarm should not be solely relied upon to warn you of collision sit-
uations. The operator should check all aids to navigation to monitor possible collision
situations.

3.12.1 How to set the CPA and TCPA limits

To set the CPA and TCPA ranges, do the following:

1. If the values for CPA and TCPA are blank,

click [CPA/TCPA] to show them.
2. Click the CPA indication to select desired
CPA range (0.1-20 NM).
3. Click the TCPA indication to select desired
TCPA time (1-60 minutes).
CPA setting TCPA setting

3.12.2 How to enable, disable the TT CPA/

TCPA alarm
The TT CPA/TCPA alarm can be enabled or disabled
from the TT/AIS box. Click the indication shown in the
right figure to enable or disable the TT CPA/TCPA
alarm. The alarm is disabled when the CPA and TCPA
settings are not shown.

3.12.3 How to acknowledge the TT CPA/TCPA alarm

When the CPA or TCPA of a target is within the CPA and TCPA limits, the Alert 526
(ALF format: 191,1) "TT CPA/TCPA" appears in the [Alert] box and the audio alarm
sounds. To acknowledge the alarm and silence the buzzer, push the ALARM ACK
key on the Control Unit, or click the alert indication in the [Alert] box.

3-17
3. TARGET TRACKING (TT)

The alert in the [Alert] box and the flashing of the plotting symbol and vector continue
until the dangerous situation is gone or you intentionally terminate tracking of the tar-
get.

3-18
 3. TARGET TRACKING (TT)

3.13 TT Lost Target Alert

Tracked targets not detected in nine consecutive scans become "lost targets". When
this occurs;

• A red × is put on the TT symbol (flashing) of the lost target. (The lost target symbol
disappears after the lost target alert is acknowledged.)
• The audio alert sounds and the Alert 527 (ALF format: 193,1) "TT Lost" appears in
the [Alert] box.

3.13.1 How to enable, disable the TT lost target alert

The [Lost TGT] indication at the bottom-right position en-
ables, disables the lost target alert. Click the indication to
select [OFF], [FILT] or [ALL] as appropriate.

[OFF]: Disable the alert.

[FILT]: Get the alert against the targets whose criteria
meet the settings made in section 3.13.2section 3.13.2.
[ALL]: Get the alert against all lost targets.

Note: The [Lost TGT] setting is shared commonly between TT and AIS.

3.13.2 How to set the TT lost target filter

If you are in an area where tracked tar-

gets are lost frequently, you may want
to disable the lost target alert against
certain tracked targets, by maximum
range. MANUAL 200/
1. Right-click the TT mode indication AUTO 50/
then select [TT Menu] to show AUTO 100/
that menu. AUTO 150/
AUTO 200
2. Select [3 LOST FILTER MAX
RNG].
3. Select [ON]. Select the range set-
ting then spin the scrollwheel to
set the range. Any TT lost targets
beyond this range will not trigger
the TT lost target alert. Appears for
4. Close the menu. B-types only

3-19
3. TARGET TRACKING (TT)

3.14 Trial Maneuver

The trial maneuver feature simulates the effect of own ship's movement against all
tracked targets, without interrupting the updating of target information. It is available
for use with the TT and AIS functions. For more accurate results, use relative motion
and sea stabilization (water tracking).

3.14.1 Types of trial maneuvers

There are two types of trial maneuvers: dynamic and static.

Dynamic trial maneuver

A dynamic trial maneuver displays predicted
positions of the tracked targets and own ship.
You enter own ship's intended speed and
course with a certain "delay time." Assuming
that all tracked targets maintain their present
speeds and courses, the targets' and own Delay time = 2 m 30 s.
ship's future movements are simulated in 0.5-
second increments indicating their predicted
Current position
positions in 30-second intervals as illustrated
in the right figure.

The delay time represents the time lag from

the present time to the time when own ship will
actually start to change her speed and/or
course. You should therefore take into consid-
eration own ship's maneuvering characteris-
tics such as rudder delay, turning delay and acceleration delay. This is particularly
important on large vessels. Regardless of how much delay is set the situation starts
immediately and ends in a minute.

In the example shown on the previous page, own ship will advance straight ahead
(even after a maneuver) for a delay time of 2:30 and alters speed and course until op-
erator-specified intended speed and course are achieved (position OS7 in this exam-
ple).

Static trial maneuver

The static trial maneuver shows the relationship between your ship and tracked tar-
gets at the completion of the trial maneuver. The expected position of TTs at the end
of the trial maneuver are shown on the display.

By shortening and extending the trial time you can find the safe time to make a ma-
neuver. Thus, the static trial maneuver will be convenient when you wish to know the
maneuver result immediately.

3-20
 3. TARGET TRACKING (TT)

Position of target B at end of trial maneuver

Course and speed changes
completed; position where
course and speed are changed

Position of target A at end B

of trial maneuver
Delay time

Current
position

A
T

3.14.2 How to do a trial maneuver

To do a trial maneuver:

1. Right click the DELAY setting in the [Trial] box

(see step 7step 7) then select [Trial Maneuver
Menu].
2. Select [1 TRIAL MANEUVER] then select
[STATIC] or [DYNAMIC] as appropriate.
3. Select [2 SPEED RATE] then set the speed rate
with the scrollwheel. For low speed, enter the
ship’s speed and the speed rate on the upper
line, then push the left button. For high speed,
enter the ship’s speed and the speed rate on the
lower line, then push the left button.
4. Select [3 TURN RATE] then set the turn rate
with the scrollwheel. For low speed, enter the
ship’s speed and the turn rate on the upper line,
then push the left button. For high speed, enter
the ship’s speed and the turn rate on the lower line, then push the left button.
Note 1: Two sets of trial speed and trial turn rate combinations are provided. This
is done to provide accurate trial maneuver results for various ship's speeds and
turn rates.
Note 2: If the speed rate or turn rate are not entered and left as blank ([0.00kn/s]
or [0.0°/s]), the trial immediately begins at the set speed and course.

3-21
3. TARGET TRACKING (TT)

Setting example for [3 TRIAL TURN RATE]

5 kn, 0.15 kn/s

10 kn, 0.45 kn/s

0.45 kn/s
Trial speed rate

(Second setting)

0.15 kn/s
(First setting)

5 kn 10 kn
(First setting) (Second setting)

Trial maneuver speed

Setting example for [3 TRIAL TURN RATE]

5 kn, 0.15 kn/s

5 kn, 0.45 kn/s

0.45 kn/s
Trial speed rate

(Second setting)

0.15 kn/s
(First setting)

5 kn
(First and second setting)

Trial maneuver speed

3-22
 3. TARGET TRACKING (TT)

Setting example for [3 TRIAL TURN RATE]

5 kn, 1.5 °/s

10 kn, 4.5 °/s

4.5 °/s
Trial speed rate (Second setting)

1.5 °/s
(First setting)

5 kn 10 kn
(First setting) (Second setting)

Trial maneuver speed

Setting example for [3 TRIAL TURN RATE]

5 kn, 0.15 °/s

5 kn, 0.45 °/s

0.45 °/s
Trial speed rate

(Second setting)

0.15 °/s
(First setting)

5 kn
(First and second setting)

Trial maneuver speed

5. For B-type radars, select [4 TGT DATA] then select whether to use [ACTUAL] or
[TRIAL] data. (Skip this step if your radar is the IMO or A type.)
6. Close the menu.
7. Find the [Trial] box at the right side of the screen.

Trial time Trial ON/OFF

Trial course
Trial speed

Trial delay time

8. Right-click the Trial title bar, select [Trial Mode] then select a trial mode, [Static] or
[Dynamic].

3-23
3. TARGET TRACKING (TT)

9. Click the Trial ON/OFF indication to show [ON].

10. Put the cursor on the Trial course indication. Spin the scrollwheel to set the trial
course.
11. Put the cursor on the Trial speed indication. spin the scrollwheel or use the Control
Unit to set the trial speed.
12. Put the cursor on the [DELAY] indication. Spin the scrollwheel to set the amount
of delay. This is the time after which own ship takes a new situation, not the time
the simulation begins. Change the delay time according to own ship loading con-
dition, etc.
The time indication depends on trial mode:

Dynamic mode: The position of your ship and TTs is displayed every 30 seconds and
updating occurs every 0.5 seconds.

Static mode: The position of your ship and TTs when set course and speed are
reached are displayed. Put the cursor in the Trial time indication and roll the scroll-
wheel. Increase or decrease the time to get a safe maneuver. If a maneuver is unsafe,
change speed, course and delay until it is safe.

The trial maneuver takes place with the letter "T" displayed at the bottom of the screen.
The time appears at the top-right position on the display. If any TT is predicted to be
on a collision course with own ship (that is, the target ship comes within preset CPA/
TCPA limits), the target plotting symbol flashes. If this happens, change own ship's tri-
al speed, course or delay time to obtain a safe maneuver.

3.14.3 How to terminate a trial maneuver

The termination method depends on the trial mode as follows:
Dynamic mode: The trial is terminated when 60 minutes is shown in the Trial time in-
dication.
Static mode: The trial is terminated when you terminate the trial maneuver manually.

To terminate the trial maneuver manually, click the Trial ON/OFF indication to show
[OFF].

3-24
 3. TARGET TRACKING (TT)

3.15 TT Simulation Mode

You can simulate the risk of collision by using the TT simulation mode and the trial ma-
neuver together.

1. Execute the TT simulation mode as follows:

1) Open the menu then select [8 INITIAL SETTING] and [8 TT SIMULATION
MODE].
2) The confirmation message "Attention: Do you wish to start TT SIMULATION
MODE?" appears. Click the [OK] button to start the test.
2. The normal operation is suspended then three simulated targets appear on the
display.
The indication "S" appears at the bottom of the effective display area during the
simulation mode. The simulation may be terminated any time by going to the
STBY mode.
Three simulated targets move as the following table. The simulated target is au-
tomatically generated with the relative movement in the following table based on
own ship's movement at the start of simulation mode.
Note: If own ship moves after the start of simulation mode, the movement of the
simulated target is not matched with the values in the following table.
Range (R) Bearing (R) Speed (R) Course (R) CPA TCPA
Target A 9.5 NM 270.0° 20.0 kn 90.0° 0.0 NM 28.5 min
Target B 1.1 NM 333.0° 9.4 kn 90.2° 1.0 NM 2.9 min
Target C 9.3 NM 45.0° 19.9 kn 225.1° 0.0 NM 28.0 min

B
A

3. Acquire the simulated targets after the TT simulation mode is performed. The
tracking state changes from unstable to stable and the vector appears. You can
simulate the movement of each function with changing true/relative vector, stabi-
lization through the water/over the ground, range or length of vector.
4. After the target B crosses in front of own ship, that is the target B is not a danger-
ous target, you can simulate the risk of collision by using the trial maneuver as fol-
lows:
1) Set the TT CPA/TCPA alarm. For example, set 0.5 nm for CPA, 30 min for
TCPA.
2) Execute the trial maneuver (see section 3.14section 3.14). In the static mode,
the movements of own ship and the target after the time set as the trial time
elapses are displayed. If the target is dangerous after the time set as the trial
time elapses, its symbol is the one for the dangerous target. Adjust the trial
course and trial delay time so the target symbol does not become the danger-
ous symbol when executing the trial maneuver.

3-25
3. TARGET TRACKING (TT)

3.16 TT Alerts
The table below list situations that cause the TT to trigger visual and audio alerts. To
acknowledge the audio alerts, push the ALARM ACK key, or click the [Alert] box.

Alert No. Message Category Description

ALR: 521 TT New Target Warning Tracked target entered the acquisi-
ALF: 192,1 tion zone.
ALR: 522 TT Auto ACQ 95% Caution The capacity for auto acquisition has
ALF: 10190,4 reached 95%.
ALR: 523 TT Auto ACQ 100% Warning The capacity for auto acquisition has
ALF: 190,4 reached 100% and no more target
acquisition is possible. Cancel track-
ing on unnecessary targets.
ALR: 524 TT Man ACQ 95% Caution The capacity for manual acquisition
ALF: 10190,5 has reached 95%.
ALR: 525 TT Man ACQ 100% Warning The capacity for manual acquisition
ALF: 190,5 has reached 100% and no more tar-
get acquisition is possible. Cancel
tracking on unnecessary targets.
ALR: 526 TT CPA/TCPA Alarm Tracked target on collision course.
ALF: 191,1 Take evasive action.
ALR: 527 TT Lost Warning Tracked target lost. Check target.
ALF: 193,1
ALR: 528 REF Target Lost Warning Tracked target used for speed input
ALF: 193,2 is lost. To continue using reference
target for speed input, select another
tracked target.

3.17 How to Set a Target Name (B-types only)

You can assign a preset name to TT targets, which is displayed alongside the TT sym-
bol on-screen, beside the target number in the target list and in the pop-up target data.

3.17.1 How to enable the target name feature

1. Right-click the TT mode indication then select [TT Menu] to show that menu.
2. Select [4 TARGET NAME FUNCTION].
3. Select [ON].
4. Close the menu.

3-26
 3. TARGET TRACKING (TT)

3.17.2 How to set up preset names

1. Right-click the TT mode indication then select [TT Menu] to show that menu.
2. Select [5 TARGET NAME PRESETS].

PRESET1 PRESET6

PRESET2 PRESET7

PRESET3 PRESET8

PRESET4 PRESET9

PRESET5 PRESET10

1/2 2/2 2/2 1/2

Page 1 Page 2
3. Select the preset number you want set up. The software keyboard appears.

(8 TO INPUT)

4. Input a name for the preset (maximum eight characters), then click [OK].
5. Close the menu.

3-27
3. TARGET TRACKING (TT)

3.17.3 How to assign a name to a target

1. Referring to section 3.17.1section 3.17.1, enable the target name feature.
2. Referring to section 3.8.1section 3.8.1, display the data for the target you want to
name.
3. Right-click the target information, then select [Edit Target Name]. The editing win-
dow appears.
Note: When [4 TARGET NAME FUNCTION] is set to [OFF], [Edit Target Name]
is not selectable.

4. Do one of the following to assign a name to the target:

• Select a preset from the [PRESET LIST]. The selected name appears in the in-
put section at the top of the window.
• Enter a name using the software keyboard.

5. Select OK to confirm the name.

The assigned name now appears in the target list, target infor-
mation window and beside the TT symbol on the screen (see fig-
ure to the right).

3-28
 3. TARGET TRACKING (TT)

3.18 Criteria for Selecting Targets for Tracking

The FURUNO TT video processor detects targets in midst of noise and discriminates
radar echoes on the basis of their size. Target whose echo measurements are greater
than those of the largest ship in range or tangential extent are usually land and are
displayed only as normal radar video. All smaller ship-sized echoes that are less than
this dimension are further analyzed and regarded as ships and displayed as small cir-
cles superimposed over the video echo.

When a target is first displayed, it is shown as having zero true speed but develops a
course vector as more information is collected. In accordance with the IMO require-
ments for TT, an indication of the motion trend should be available within 20 scans of
antenna and full vector accuracy within 60 scans. The FURUNO TT complies with
these requirements.

Echo detection (quantization)

The entire picture is converted to a digital from called “Quantized Video”. A sweep
range is divided into small segments and each range element is “1” if there is radar
echo return above a threshold level, or “0” if there is no return.

The digital radar signal is then analyzed by a ship-sized echo discriminator. As the an-
tenna scans, if there are five consecutive radar pulses with 1's indicating an echo pres-
ence at the exact same range, a target “start” is initiated. Since receiver noise is
random, it is not three-bang correlated, and it is filtered out and not classified as an
echo.

The same is true of radar interference. Electronic circuits track both the closest and
most distant edges of the echo. At the end of the scanning of the echo, the discrimi-
nator indicates the measured maximum range extent and total angular extent sub-
tended by the echo. If the echo is larger than a ship-sized echo in range extent and/or
angular width, adjusted as a function of range, it is declared to be a land. This land
echo is not used by TT acquisition and tracking process. All smaller echoes are de-
clared to be ship sized and the middle of the leading edge is used to provide precise
range and bearing coordinates of each echo on every scan. This range/bearing data
is matched to previous data and analyzed from scan-to-scan for consistency. When it
is determined to be as consistent as a real target, automatic acquisition occurs and
tracking is initiated. Continued tracking and subsequent calculation develop the rela-
tive course and speed of the target.

Acquisition
A target that is hit by five consecutive radar pulses is judged to be a radar echo. Man-
ual acquisition is done by designating a detected echo with the trackball. Automatic
acquisition is done in the acquisition areas when a target is detected 5-7 times contin-
uously depending upon the congestion.

Tracking
The range and bearing of an echo are found from the relative distance of the target
from the radar antenna. The distance a tracked target moves between radar antenna
rotations is used to calculate the relative speed of the tracked target. However, be-
cause of calculation error, smoothing is applied to get stable target speed and course
data. When a target changes course, smoothing is reduced in order to quickly follow
target movement.

3-29
3. TARGET TRACKING (TT)

Tracking is achieved when the target is clearly distinguishable on the display for 5 out
of 10 consecutive scans, whether acquired automatically or manually.

Required tracking facilities are available within 0.1-32 nm on range scales including 3,
6, 12 nm, full plotting information is available within one scan when the range scale is
changed. Targets not detected in nine consecutive scans become “lost targets”.

The true course and speed of own ship are computed from own ship's gyro and speed
inputs, and the resulting course and speed of each tracked target is easily computed
by vector summing of the relative motion with own ship's course and speed. The re-
sulting true or relative vector is displayed for each of the TTs. This process is updated
continually for each target on every scan of the radar.

The REF point for tracked target calculation can be the radar antenna position or the
CCRP. For CCRP, the displayed value includes the distance between the CCRP and
the antenna position. Therefore, when switching the REF point, the range, bearing,
CPA and TCPA of the tracked targets change.

Qualitative description of tracking error

The FURUNO TT's accuracy complies with or exceeds IMO standards.

Own ship maneuvers

For slow turns there is no effect. For very high turning rates (greater than 150°/minute,
depending on gyro), then all tracked targets revert to full accuracy.

Other ship maneuvers

Target ship courses; lag 15 to 30 seconds at high relative speed, or 3 to 6 seconds at
low (near 0) relative speed. It is less accurate during a turn due to lag, but accuracy
recovers quickly.

3.19 Factors Affecting Target Tracking

Sea returns
If the radar anti-clutter control is adjusted properly, there is no serious effect because
distant wave clutter, not eliminated by this control, is filtered out by more than one
bang correlation and scan-to-scan matching of data.

Rain and snow

Rain clutter can be acquired and tracked as targets. Adjust the rain clutter control to
suppress the clutter. If it is heavy rain, switch to S-band if provided, or switch on the
interference rejector on the radar. If heavy clutter still exists, switch to manual acqui-
sition. Accuracy can be affected.

Low clouds
Usually no affect. If necessary, adjust the rain clutter control.

Non-synchronous emissions
No effect.

3-30
 3. TARGET TRACKING (TT)

Low gain
Insufficient or low radar receiver gain will result in some targets not being acquired at
long distance. The TT display will be missing on one or more targets that could only
be visible if the radar sensitivity control (GAIN control) were increased.

The setting of the correct radar receiver gain is not critical but the target should be on
the radar PPI and be clearly visible and well defined.

Manual acquisition is done if a target is positively displayed more than once. Automat-
ic acquisition is done when the target is detected 5-7 times continuously.

Tracking continues if a return echo is received at least once in nine antenna rotations.
However, the fewer the return echoes the lower the accuracy. If no return echo is re-
ceived within nine antenna rotations the target is declared a lost target.

Second trace echoes

When the radar beam is super refracted, strong echoes may be received at such long
ranges that they appear on a different timebase sweep than the transmitted pulse.
This gives an incorrect range indication. Second- and third-trace echoes can be
tracked if they are consistent enough to meet acquisition and tracking criteria but tar-
get course and speed data will be in error.

Blind and shadow sectors

Radar shadow or blind areas caused by obstructions aboard the ship, for example,
funnels and masts, in the path of the radar beam can result in reduction of radar beam
intensity in that particular direction. This may eliminate the detection of some targets.
The TT system will lose track of targets shortly after they are lost on the radar picture
and if they remain in a blind zone. These targets will however be acquired and tracked
when they pass out of the blind zone and again present normal radar echo. The an-
gular width and bearing of any shadow sector should be determined for their influence
on the radar. In certain cases false echoes in the shadow sector cause the TT system
to acquire, track, and vector them. Shadow sectors should be avoided.

Indirect echoes
A target at close range is usually picked up directly, but it can also be received as re-
flection from a large, flat surface. This will result in the radar presenting two or more
echoes on the display, each at a different range. The TT system can acquire and track
a false echo if it is detected in five consecutive scans. Reduction in radar gain can
eliminate the multiple echoing but care should be taken as range detection also will be
reduced.

Radar interference
If interference is extreme due to another radar operating at close range, spiral "dotting"
and/or false targets may appear momentarily. The interference rejector can clear the
display.

Delay of sensor input

If the refresh rate of the gyrocompass signal is too slow, error in target bearing occurs
when own ship turns. To prevent this error, the refresh rate of the gyrocompass signal
must be as indicated in the System Configuration drawings.

3-31
3. TARGET TRACKING (TT)

This page is intentionally left blank.

3-32
4. AIS OPERATION
An AIS transponder can be connected to this radar to overlay AIS targets on the radar
display. The radar can store up to 2,000 AIS targets in its storage buffer. When this
buffer becomes full of AIS targets, the Alert 533 (ALF format: 190,2) "AIS Target Ca-
pacity 100%" is generated to alert you to full storage buffer. The storage buffer con-
tains automatic dead reckoning for all AIS targets, which is based on reported Speed
Over the Ground (SOG), Course Over the Ground (COG), Rate Of Turn (ROT) and
heading. The storage buffer also contains calculation of range, bearing, CPA, TCPA,
etc. The CPA and TCPA limits set for dangerous targets are common for TT and AIS
targets.

This radar can activate 500 AIS targets. The Alert 535 (ALF format: 190,1) "AIS Target
Activate 100%" is generated when 500 AIS targets are activated.

This radar can display a maximum of 1,000 AIS targets. The Alert 531 (ALF format:
190,3) "AIS Target Display 100%" is generated when 1,000 AIS targets, which in-
cludes both activated and sleeping targets, are displayed.

The frequency for update of AIS transponder-sent data depends on speed and course
of tracked AIS target. The table below shows the IMO standardized reporting rates for
the AIS transponder. Based on the table below, the radar defines which AIS targets
are in tracking or lost. When you acknowledge a lost target alert, the corresponding
AIS symbol will be removed from the display.

IMO Lost target

nominal indication
Type of Ship
reporting (reporting
interval interval >)
Class A: Navigation status is “anchor” or “not under 3 min 10 min
command” or “moored” or “aground”, and SOG ≤ 3kn
Class A: Navigation status is “anchor” or “not under 10 s 50 s
command” or “moored” or “aground”, and SOG > 3kn
Class A: 0kn ≤ SOG < 14kn 10 s 50 s
Class A: 14kn ≤ SOG ≤ 23kn 6s 30 s
Class A: SOG > 23kn 2s 10 s
Class B: “CS” SOG < 2kn 3 min 10 min
Class B: “CS” SOG ≥ 2kn 30 s 150 s
Class B: “SO” 0 kn ≤ SOG < 2kn 3 min 10 min
Class B: “SO” 2 kn ≤ SOG < 14kn 30 s 150 s
Class B: “SO” 14 kn ≤ SOG ≤ 23kn 15 s 75 s
Class B: “SO” SOG > 23kn 5s 25 s
Class A and Class B: no SOG available N/A 10 min
AIS SAR aircraft 10 s 50 s
AIS aid to navigation 3 min 10 min
AIS base station 10 s 50 s
AIS search and rescue transponder N/A 10 min

Note: AIS operations on IMO-types require the WGS-84 Datum. Make sure the GPS
connected to the radar is set to WGS-84.

4-1
4. AIS OPERATION

An AIS transponder "sees" all ships fitted with an AIS transponder belonging to either
a Class A or Class B AIS. Additionally, the AIS transponder receives messages from
ships and non-ships (AIS SAR aircraft, AIS aid to navigation, AIS base station, and
AIS search and rescue transmitter).

There can be several hundreds or several thousands of AIS targets, and of those only
a few will be significant for your ship. To remove unnecessary AIS targets from the ra-
dar display, the feature "active and sleeping AIS targets" is available. Initially any new
AIS target received by an AIS transponder is not active (="sleeping"). Such sleeping
targets are shown with a small triangle. The operator can pick any AIS target and
change it from sleeping to active. Active AIS targets are shown with a large triangle
with speed vector, headline, ROT indicator, etc. Further, the operator can pick active
AIS targets and change their status to sleeping.

An indication of AIS target activated capacity limit is given well before it is reached.
When 95% of 500 targets are activated, the Alert 534 (ALF format: 10190,3) "AIS Tar-
get Activate 95%" appears. When 500 targets are activated, the Alert 535 (ALF format:
190,3) "AIS Target Activate 100%" appears.

An indication of AIS target display capacity limit is given well before it is reached.
When 95% of 1,000 targets are displayed, the Alert 530 (ALF format: 10190,1) "AIS
Target Display 95%" appears. When 1,000 targets are displayed, the Alert 531 (ALF
format: 190,3) "AIS Target Display 100%" appears.

An indication of AIS target processing capacity limit is given well before it is reached.
The Alert 533 (ALF format: 190,2) "AIS Target Capacity 100%" appears when 2,000
targets are in the storage buffer.

This radar generates AIS-related alerts. These are Alert 536 (ALF format: 191,2) "AIS
CPA/TCPA" and Alert 537 (ALF format: 193,3) "AIS Lost". Only active AIS targets gen-
erate alerts. The operator can activate or sleep AIS target alerts as desired. The fea-
ture "active and sleeping AIS targets" is very effective for focusing on only those AIS
targets that need supervision. This radar further eases the task of the operator by au-
tomatically changing non-active targets to active targets, if their CPA and TCPA are
within a preset limit.

4.1 How to Deactivate the AIS Function

Long-click the AIS mode indication at the bottom-right position to display [FUNC OFF]
to deactivate the AIS function (sleep all AIS targets) and AIS messaging facility. To
activate AIS, push the left button again.

Note: You cannot enable AIS if any of the items listed below are active.
• Manual speed • Speed is calculated from reference targets
• Manual set & drift

4-2
 4. AIS OPERATION

4.2 How to Show, Hide the AIS Display

Targets that are being tracked by an AIS transponder
can also be displayed on the display. Click the AIS
mode indication to select [DISP OFF], [DISP FILT] or
[DISP ALL].

[DISP OFF]: Turn off the AIS display. (Tracking contin-

ues internally.)
[DISP FILT]: Filter AIS targets according to the settings
of the AIS target filter. See section 4.4section 4.4.
[DISP ALL]: Display all AIS targets.

4.3 AIS Symbols

Target symbols
AIS targets are marked with an appropriate symbol as shown in the table below.

Default
Symbol Name Description
color
Green AIS tracked target Mark past position.
past position point
Green Sleeping AIS target Denote sleeping AIS symbol. (Lines
are thinner than Active AIS symbol.)
Green Activated AIS target Denote active AIS target, with vector
for course and speed. (Lines are
thicker than sleeping AIS symbol.)
Color can be changed with the
menu.
Red (fixed) Activated target in AZ Unacknowledged active AIS target
(without acknowledg- in acquisition zone, with vector for
ment) course and speed. (Lines are thicker
than sleeping AIS symbol.)
Green Activated target in AZ Acknowledged active AIS target in
(with acknowledg- acquisition zone, with vector for
ment) course and speed. (Lines are thicker
than sleeping AIS symbol.) Color
can be changed with the menu.
Green Activated target, true Active AIS target with symbol shown
scale symbol in true scale. Association AIS sym-
bol or activate AIS symbol is dis-
played within the ship’s symbol
when activated. This symbol disap-
pears when the size of the true scale
symbol is smaller than 3 mm on the
display.
Blue AIS SART test Denote AIS SART (search and res-
cue radar transponder) test.
Red (fixed) Dangerous AIS target Target’s CPA and TCPA are within
the CPA and TCPA settings. Vector
shown. The symbol flashes until ac-
knowledgment.

4-3
4. AIS OPERATION

Default
Symbol Name Description
color
Green Association AIS tar- AIS and TT target declared as "as-
get sociation target". AIS symbol and
AIS data are used.
Red (fixed) Association AIS dan- AIS and TT target declared as "as-
gerous target sociation target". AIS symbol and
AIS data are used. Target's CPA
and TCPA are within limits set.
Green Heading-turn indica- Show target’s direction of turning.
tor
Green SAR Aircraft Denote SAR aircraft.

Blue AIS base station Denote AIS base station.

BS

Green AIS select symbol Target selected to display its data.

Green SAR vessel SAR (search and rescue) vessel

Red (fixed) AIS lost symbol X is superimposed on the AIS target

symbol and is flashing.
Green Non HDG/COG Denote sleeping AIS symbol without
sleeping AIS target HDG and COG. Dashed line.
Green Non HDG/COG acti- Denote active AIS symbol without
vated AIS target HDG and COG. Dashed line.

Note 1: The equipment continues to process AIS targets when the AIS feature is
switched off. When the AIS is again turned on, symbols are immediately displayed.
Note 2: AIS symbols are momentarily erased after the screen is redrawn when the
heading is changed from the head-up mode.
Note 3: When no AIS data is received, the Alert 380 (ALF format: 10380,131) "AIS
COM Error" appears in the [Alert] box. Check the AIS transponder.
Note 4: An AIS target is declared a lost target if it is not detected in five consecutive
reporting periods (see the table on page 4-1).
Note 5: Physical and virtual AIS AtoN symbols that may appear are listed in the table
on the following page.

4-4
 4. AIS OPERATION

AIS physical and virtual AtoN symbols

The table below shows all the physical and AIS virtual AtoN symbols.

AIS Physical AIS Virtual Default

Meaning
AtoN Symbol*1 AtoN Symbol Color

Blue Basic shape

Blue RACON

Blue Emergency wreck mark

Blue North cardinal mark

Blue East cardinal mark

Blue South cardinal mark

Blue West cardinal mark

Blue Port hand mark

Blue Starboard hand mark

Blue Isolated danger

Safe water

Blue Special mark

OFF POSN
Line: Yellow*2 Off position (Displayed with yellow
Char: Yellow*2 line and yellow text)

UNLIT UNLIT Line: Blue Light fail or at reduced range

Char: Yellow*2 (Displayed with yellow text)

RACON ERR RACON ERR

Line: Blue RACON error
Char: Yellow*2 (Displayed with yellow text)

MISSING Missing
Line: Yellow*2
*2 (Displayed with yellow dashed
Char: Yellow
line and yellow text)

*1
The purpose indicator (for example, ) appears at the top of a physical AtoN symbol. The
indicator is always displayed in the radar mode, and when a symbol of this type is selected in
the chart mode or chart radar mode. See the example below.
Purpose indicator

Symbol not Symbol

selected selected

*2
Color not changeable.

4-5
4. AIS OPERATION

4.4 How to Filter AIS Targets

If the screen becomes cluttered with AIS targets, you can filter out unnecessary AIS
targets, from the [DISP FILTER] menu.

1. Right-click the AIS mode indication then click [AIS Menu]

to show that menu.
2. Open the [5 DISP FILTER] menu.
3. At [1 SLEEPING CLASS A] - [5 VIRTUAL ATON], dis- *
able or enable tracking of respective item as appropriate. *
Select [ON] to filter out targets.
4. Select [6 MAX RANGE] and set the maximum range to
display an AIS target. A sleeping AIS target not within the
range set here is not displayed.
5. Set the minimum ship speed for AIS targets, with [7 MIN
SHIP SPEED]. Any sleeping AIS target whose speed is
slower than that set here will not be displayed.
6. Close the menu.
Note: This function is not available for an activated target. * Not shown on IMO- or
A-type specification.

4.5 How to Activate Targets

When you convert a sleeping target to an activated target, an activated target's course
and speed are shown with a vector. You can easily judge target movement by moni-
toring the vector.

4.5.1 How to activate specific target

From the Control Unit
Select the target with the cursor then press the ACQ/ACT key.

By the trackball module

Click the AIS target symbol.
SOG (Speed Over the Ground) and COG
(Course Over the Ground) vector*1
Turning direction (ROT)
*1
Vector shows STW (speed
through the water) and CTW Heading line*2
(course through the water) *2
when sea stabilized mode is Line points in direction of
selected at the radar. COG when there is no
heading data.

4-6
 4. AIS OPERATION

4.5.2 How to automatically activate targets

You can get automatic activation of a sleeping AIS target when its CPA/TCPA are
within a preset limit. The CPA/TCPA alarm must be active to use this feature.

How to set conditions for automatic activation of AIS targets

1. Right-click the AIS mode indication then click [AIS Menu] to show that menu.
2. Open the [4 CPA AUTO ACTIVATE] menu.
3. Set each menu item, referring to the description below.
[1 MAX RANGE]: Set the maximum range to use. Any AIS
target at a distance greater than set here will not be acti-
vated. 0NM

[2 MIN SHIP SPEED]: Set the minimum speed to use.

1.0kn
Any AIS target whose speed is slower than set here will
not be activated.
[3 EXCEPT CLASS B]: Select [ON] to exclude class B
AIS targets.
4. Close the menu.

How to enable, disable automatic activation of AIS targets

Click the location circled in the figure below to select one of the following:
[AUTO OFF]: Disable automatic activation of AIS target by CPA.
[AUTO ACT FILT]: Activate AIS targets that fulfill the requirements set on the [CPA
AUTO ACTIVATE] menu.
[AUTO ACT ALL]: Activate all AIS targets within the CPA range set.

4.6 How to Sleep Targets

4.6.1 How to sleep an activated AIS target

You can "sleep" an activated AIS target as shown below when the screen becomes
filled with targets that might prevent important radar and AIS targets from being iden-
tified. The targets that have been activated automatically cannot be "slept."

From the Control Unit

Put the cursor on the AIS target to sleep then press the TARGET CANCEL key.

By the trackball module

1. Right-click the screen to show the context-sensitive menu.
2. Select [Target Cancel] and [Any] or [AIS Only] as applicable.
3. Click the AIS target to sleep.

4-7
4. AIS OPERATION

4.6.2 How to sleep all activated AIS targets

Sleep all activated targets from the menu
1. Open the menu then select [2 TT•AIS] and [4 AIS].
2. Select [3 SLEEP ALL TGTS] then [YES].
3. Close the menu.

Sleep all activated targets from the AIS box

Long-click the AIS mode indication at the bottom-right position to display [FUNC OFF]
then click [DISP ALL] to sleep all AIS targets redisplayed.

4.7 How to Display AIS Target Data

You can display an AIS target's data by selecting it on the display.

4.7.1 AIS pop-up information

The AIS pop-up shows abbreviated AIS data (COG, SOG, CPA,
TCPA and destination*) for the selected AIS target. Simply put
the cursor on the AIS target to show the pop-up. The pop-up can
be enabled or disabled with [AIS POP-UP INFO] in the [TT•AIS
SYMBOL] menu.

*: Not displayed in CHART for RADAR mode.

4.7.2 Basic AIS target data

From the Control Unit
1. Use the trackball to put the cursor on the activated AIS target
symbol you want to know its data.
2. Press the TARGET DATA key.
3. The selected target is marked with a broken square and AIS
data is shown in the AIS data box when the target is correctly
selected.

4-8
 4. AIS OPERATION

By the trackball module

Click the activated AIS target symbol. The selected target is marked with a broken
square and AIS data is shown in the AIS data box when the target is correctly selected.

AIS no. (information

display order)
Vessel name FURUNO
Bearing
Heading
Range
Course over ground
Rate of turn
Speed over ground
CPA
TCPA
Bow crossing range
Bow crossing time
Navigation
Position status*

*: Where the selected AIS target is an aircraft, the

STATUS box shows the aircraft’s altitude.

Note 1: AIS is not available in dead reckoning when the radar type is selected to [IMO]
on the [INSTALLATION] menu.
Note 2: If the TCPA value is negative, this means that you have already passed the
closest point and the AIS target is going away from your ship.
Note 3: For the maximum displayable number of TT•AIS boxes, see
section 3.8.1section 3.8.1.

4-9
4. AIS OPERATION

4.7.3 Expanded AIS data

The expanded AIS data display provides additional information about an AIS target,
including call sign, MMSI No., IMO No., etc. To display expanded AIS data, show the
basic data for a target, right-click the target data display then select [Expanded AIS
Data].

Title bar
Vessel name

Call sign
Position

Type of position sensor

Position accuracy
(HIGH or LOW)

Navigation status*

MMSI No.
IMO No.

Length of vessel
Width of vessel

Draught of vessel
Destination

ETA at destination
Version of AIS transponder

Association (On or Off)

Ship and cargo type

*: Where the selected AIS target is an aircraft, the

STATUS box shows the aircraft’s altitude.

If data for an item is unknown, "missing" appears. In the example above, the name of
the position sensor is “missing”.

4-10
 4. AIS OPERATION

4.8 AIS CPA/TCPA Alarm

This radar calculates CPA and TCPA by using own ship and relative target positions.
An AIS dangerous target is one whose CPA and TCPA are within the range of the CPA
and TCPA limits set in the TT/AIS box. The AIS symbol of an AIS dangerous target is
red and flashing, and is announced with the Alert 536 (ALF format: 191,2) "AIS CPA/
TCPA". After the alert is acknowledged the target symbol is displayed in red color.

To set the CPA and TCPA ranges, do the following:

1. If the CPA and TCPA settings are not shown, click [CPA/TCPA].
Note: When clicking [CPA/TCPA], the CPA/TCPA alarm function is off.
2. Click the CPA indication to select desired CPA range.
3. Click the TCPA indication to select desired TCPA setting.

CPA setting
TCPA setting

4.9 AIS Symbol Brilliance

1. Right-click the [BRILL] button on the InstantAccess bar™ then select [Brill Menu].
2. Go to page 2, select [5 AIS SYMBOL] then spin the scrollwheel to adjust the bril-
liance.

㪈㪌

㪈㪌

㪈㪌

㪈㪌

㪈㪌

㪈㪌

㪈㪌

3. Close the menu.

4-11
4. AIS OPERATION

4.10 AIS Symbol Color

1. Right-click the AIS mode indication then click [Symbol Menu] to show that menu.

2. Select [1 SYMBOL COLOR] and desired color. (Yellow is not available with the
IMO type.)
3. Close the menu.

4.11 AIS Lost Targets

An AIS target is declared a lost target when it fails to produce data
for intervals which are based on the table on page 4-1. When this oc-
curs, the target is marked with the lost target symbol (flashing),
shown in the right figure, the buzzer sounds (for activated targets on-
ly) and the Alert 537 (ALF format: 193,3) "AIS Lost" appears.

To acknowledge a lost target, push the ALARM ACK key or click the [Alert] box.

Note: The AIS data transmission interval depends on target's speed. For example, the
data is transmitted every 10 seconds on the ship speed of 0 to 14 kn and every two
seconds on the ship speed of more than 23 knots. For details, see the owner's manual
of the AIS transponder.

4.11.1 How to enable, disable the AIS lost target alert

The[ Lost TGT] indication (at the bottom-right position)
enables, disables the lost target alert. Click the indica-
tion to select [OFF], [FILT] or [ALL] as appropriate.

[OFF]: Disable the lost target alert.

[FILT]: Get the alert against the targets whose criteria
meet the settings made in section 4.11.2section 4.11.2.
[ALL]: Get the alert against all lost targets.

Note: The [Lost TGT] setting is shared commonly between TT and AIS.

4-12
 4. AIS OPERATION

4.11.2 How to set the AIS lost target filter

If you are in an area where AIS targets often become lost, the lost target alert may ac-
tivate frequently. In this case, you may want to specify which targets to classify as lost
targets, to prevent frequent triggering of the lost target alert.

1. Right-click the AIS mode indication then click [AIS Menu]

to show that menu.
2. Open the [6 LOST FILTER] menu.
3. Set each menu item, referring to the description below.
0NM
[1 MAX RANGE]: Set the maximum range to use. Any
AIS target at a distance greater than set here will not trig- 1.0kn
ger the lost target alert.
[2 MIN SHIP SPEED]: Set the minimum speed to use.
Any AIS target whose speed is slower than set here will
not trigger the lost target alert.
[3 EXCEPT CLASS B]: Select [ON] to exclude class B AIS targets from the lost
target alert.
4. Close the menu.

4.12 How to Display AIS Target Past Positions

The past position display shows equally time-spaced dots marking past positions of
activated AIS targets. If a target changes its speed, the spacing will be uneven. If it
changes course, its plotted course will not be a straight line.
Below are sample past position displays.

(a) Ship turning (b) Ship running (c) Ship reduced (d) Ship increased
straight speed speed

4.12.1 How to enable/disable the

past position display, se- Plot interval, past
position display
lect past position refer- ON/OFF
ence
Click the indications circled in the Past position
figure below to set the plot interval reference
(or disable the display) and the past
position reference (true or relative).

4-13
4. AIS OPERATION

4.12.2 Past position points

You can show 5 or 10 past position points per AIS target. Right-click the past position
indication then click [Past POSN Menu] to show that menu. Set [6 TT•AIS PAST
POSN POINTS] to [5] or [10].

4.13 How to Display True or Relative Speed Vectors

AIS targets vector can be displayed relative to your ship's heading (relative) or with
reference to the North (True).

Vector time (or the length of vectors) and presentation mode can be set at the bottom-
right position on the screen. For further information, see section 3.9section 3.9.

4.14 Association of TT and AIS Targets

An AIS-equipped ship is usually displayed by two symbols on the radar display. This
is because the AIS ship position is measured by a GPS navigator (L/L) whereas the
radar detects the same ship by PPI principle (range and bearing relative to own ship
radar antenna).

To avoid the presentation of two target symbols for the same physical target, use the
"association" function. If target data from both AIS and TT are available and if the as-
sociation criteria are fulfilled, either the AIS or TT symbol is presented according to the
association method selected.

Association will not happen between AIS and TT if the AIS target is sleeping or the AIS
target is lost.

All association settings, including ON/OFF, can also be controlled from the chart for
radar mode, with the [TT/AIS] page in the [Overlay/NAV Tools] box. All settings are
mutually shared.

4.14.1 How to select association method

Click the location circled below to show "<" to select AIS symbol for associated target,
or ">" to select TT symbol for associated target. This setting overrides the correspond-
ing item on the [TT•AIS] menu. To turn off association, click the location to remove the
arrow.
< >

Note: You can also select the method by right-cllcking the loca-
Association: OFF
tion. Click desired association method. Association: TT
Association: AIS
[Association Menu]

4-14
 4. AIS OPERATION

4.14.2 How to set the conditions for association

1. Open the menu then select [TT•AIS] and [6 ASSOCIA-
TION].
2. Enter the association conditions, referring to the follow-
ing:
[1 ASSOCIATION TGT]: Disable Association with [OFF],
or select [AIS] or [TT]. [AIS] selects the AIS symbol for as-
sociation target; [TT] selects the TT symbol for the asso-
ciation target.
[2 GAP]: Range between AIS target and TT.
Setting range: 0.000 to 0.050(NM)
[3 RANGE]: Enter the range difference from own ship to
AIS target and TT.
setting range: 0.000 to 0.100(NM)
[4 BEARING]: Enter the bearing difference from own ship to AIS target and TT.
Setting range: 0.0 to 9.9(°)
[5 SPEED]: Enter the speed difference between AIS target and TT.
Setting range: 0.0 to 6.0(kn)
[6 COURSE]: Enter the course difference between AIS target and TT.
Setting range: 0.0 to 25.0(°)
When the association criteria are met either the AIS or TT symbol is erased according
to association made in section 4.14.1.

4.15 Voyage Data

Before you embark on a voyage, set your navigation status, ETA, destination, draught
and the number of crew, on the [VOYAGE DATA] menu.

1. Click the [OWN AIS] button on the InstantAccess bar™ to show the [VOYAGE
DATA] menu.

Display of [2 CARGO CATEGORY]

and [All ships of this type] is
dependant on the settings for the
connected AIS transponder.

4-15
4. AIS OPERATION

2. Select [1 NAV STATUS] then use the scrollwheel to set the applicable two-digit
nav status code, referring to the table below.
No. Nav status No. Status
00 Underway using engine 08 Under way Sailing
01 At anchor 09 Reserved for high speed craft
02 Not under command 10 Reserved for wing in ground
03 Restricted Maneuverability 11 power-driven vessel pushing
ahead or towing alongside (re-
gional use)
04 Constrained by her draught 12 power-driven vessel towing
astern (regional use)
05 Moored 13 Reserved for future use
06 Aground 14 AIS SART (Active)
07 Engaged in fishing 15 Not Defined

3. Select [2 ETA] then use the scrollwheel to enter ETA: day (two digits), month (two
digits), year (four digits) and time (four digits).
4. Select [3 DESTINATION] then use the software keyboard to enter the name of
your destination, using a maximum of 20 characters.
5. Select [4 DRAUGHT] then use the scrollwheel to enter ship's draft (0.0 - 25.5 (m)).
6. On page 2, select [1 CREW] then use the scrollwheel to enter the number of crew
(0-8191).
7. Where required, spin the wheel to enter the appropriate [CARGO CATEGORY],
referring to the table below.
No. Cargo Type No. Cargo Type
0 All ships of this type 5 Reserved for future use
1 Carrying DG, HS, or MP, IMO 6 Reserved for future use
hazard or pollutant category X
2 Carrying DG, HS, or MP, IMO 7 Reserved for future use
hazard or pollutant category Y
3 Carrying DG, HS, or MP, IMO 8 Reserved for future use
hazard or pollutant category Z
4 Carrying DG, HS, or MP, IMO 9 No Additional Information
hazard or pollutant category OS

8. Close the menu.

4.16 AIS Messages

You can send and receive messages via the VHF link, to a specified destination
(MMSI) or all AIS-equipped ships within communication range of your ship. Messages
can be sent to warn of safety of navigation, for example, an iceberg sighted. Routine
messages are also permitted. Short safety-related messages are only an additional
means to broadcast safety information. They do not remove the requirements of the
GMDSS.

4-16
 4. AIS OPERATION

4.16.1 How to create and transmit a new AIS message

You can create and send an AIS message as follows:

1. Right-click the AIS mode indication then click [AIS Menu]

to show that menu.
2. Open the [8 TRANSMIT MESSAGE] menu.
3. At [1 ADDRESS TYPE], select [ADDRESSED] to send
the message to a specific AIS-equipped ship, or [BROAD-
CAST] to send the message to all AIS-equipped ships
within VHF communication range. For [ADDRESSED],
enter MMSI of ship at [3 MMSI No.].
4. At [2 MESSAGE TYPE], select [SAFETY] for safety mes-
sage, or [BINARY] for routine message.

5. At [4 CHANNEL], select the channel over which to broad-

cast your message. The choices are [A], [B], [A or B] or [A
and B].
6. Click [NEXT] to go to the next page.
7. Select [3 EDIT]. A text input box appears together with the
software keyboard. Use the software keyboard to enter
your message. The number of characters that may be en-
tered depends on message type, and the number of char-
acters available appears below the text box.
Safety message broadcast: 90 characters
Binary message broadcast: 86 characters
Safety message addressed to MMSI: 85 characters
Binary message addressed to MMSI: 80 characters
8. To save the file, select [2 SAVE FILE].
9. To transmit the message, click [4 TRANSMIT MESSAGE]. The confirmation mes-
sage "Attention: Do you wish to transmit AIS message?" appears. Click the [OK]
button to transmit the message.
If the message could not be transmitted, the Alert 541 (ALF format: 10540,2) "AIS
Message Transmit Error" appears.

4.16.2 How to transmit a saved AIS message

If you have saved some previously transmitted AIS messages, you can edit one and
send it as follows:

1. Right-click the AIS mode indication then click [AIS Menu] to show that menu.
2. Open the [8 TRANSMIT MESSAGE] menu.
3. Go to page 2 of the menu, select [1 OPEN FILE] then select the number of the
message to transmit.
4. Select [3 EDIT] to edit the message.
5. To save the message, select [2 SAVE FILE].
6. To transmit the message, select [4 TRANSMIT MESSAGE]. The confirmation
message "Attention: Do you wish to transmit AIS message?" appears. Click the
[OK] button to transmit the message.

4-17
4. AIS OPERATION

4.16.3 How to display received AIS messages

When you receive an AIS message, the Alert 539 (ALF format: 10540,1) "AIS Mes-
sage Received" appears.

To display the message, click the [AIS message]

button on the InstantAccess bar™.

[AIS message]
button
How to get notification of AIS message re-
ception with the [AIS message] button
S
Right-click the AIS mode indication then click [AIS
Menu] to show that menu. Go to page 2 and set [1 AUTO DISP MESSAGE] to [ON].
When you receive an AIS message, the [AIS message] button is displayed in orange.

AIS Received Messages list

Received AIS messages are stored in the AIS received message list. A maximum of
200 messages are saved over 50 pages for FURUNO 19-inch monitor unit, 34 pages
for FURUNO 23-inch monitor unit.

1. Right-click the AIS mode indication then click [AIS Menu] to show that menu.
2. Select [7 RECEIVED MESSAGES].

Title bar
Page no./total no. of pages
Close current window
1 10/APR/2012 08:21
ADDRESSED SAFETY
MMSI: 431060309
2 10/APR/2012 10:45
ADDRESSED BINARY AIS message list
MMSI: 303056302

NAME: FURUNO Ship’s name and call sign

CALL: 098657334
<OSAKA MARTIS R41-5-
1>TEST:INFORMATRIOIN
SW 2M/S WEATHER Message content
RAINY VISIBILITY -5000M

3. Click an AIS message in the list to show its contents.

4. Click the [CLOSE] window button to close the window.

4-18
 4. AIS OPERATION

4.17 How to View Own Ship Data

Own ship’s static data (type of ship, call sign, MMSI, name and position of external
GPS antenna) can be viewed as follows:

1. Right-click the AIS mode indication then click [AIS Menu] to show the AIS menu.
2. Select [STATIC DATA].

External GPS antenna position

Type of ship

Ship length
A
Call sign

MMSI no. here

B C D External GPS
Ship name
antenna position

Ship width
3. Close the menu.

4.18 Other AIS Features

The [TT•AIS SYMBOL] menu additionally provides the features described below.

To show the [TT•AIS SYMBOL] menu, right-click the AIS mode indication on the bot-
tom-right of the screen then select [Symbol Menu].

Page 1 Page 2

[2 ATON SYMBOL COLOR]: Select the ATON symbol color.

4-19
4. AIS OPERATION

[3 AIS ROT TAG LIMIT]: The ROT marker appears on the heading line of an AIS target
and points in the direction of the turn when the ship's rate of turn is greater than that
set here.

[1 AIS SCALED SYMBOL]: The AIS target symbol can be shown as a simple triangle
or a symbol scaled according to a vessel's dimensions. Select [ON] to show the scaled
symbol.

Standard AIS scaled

AIS symbol symbol

4-20
5. RADAR MAP AND TRACK

5.1 What is a Radar Map?

A radar map consists of a layer of marks and lines overlaid on the radar display. A map
is intended for indicating safety-related areas and objects. Ten radar maps can be
made and each map can have a total of 4,000 lines and marks. The map data can be
saved to facilitate repeated use on a routine navigation area. The user can create a
radar map in real time while using the radar for navigation or at leisure time at anchor
or while the radar is not being used. Waypoints, events and user charts from the chart
can be shown or hidden on the radar map display.

The radar map does not affect any radar function.

5.2 Presentation Modes

Six presentation modes are available: North-up, Course-up, Head-up, STAB Head-up,
Stern-up and North-up TM. To select a mode, use the MODE key on the Control Unit
or click the [Range/Presentation mode] box.

Note: Chart data is not displayed in the Head-up and STAB Head-up modes.

5.3 How to Show, Hide the Radar Map Display

Click the [MAP ON/OFF] button to display [MAP ON] or [MAP OFF] as appropriate.

[MAP ON/OFF]
button

5-1
5. RADAR MAP AND TRACK

5.4 How to Enter Radar Map Marks and Lines

Marks and lines can be entered in the radar mode. (Marks cannot be entered in the
chart radar mode.) These marks and lines can be displayed in red, green, blue, cyan,
magenta, yellow or white. (Some marks, lines and colors may not be available de-
pending on the specifications of your radar.)

The capacity for map storage is 10 maps/4,000 points per map. When 4,000 marks
and lines have been entered into a map, the message "MARK FULL" replaces the
mark icon in the [Mark] box and no more marks and lines can be entered into that map.
In this case save the marks/lines to another map file or erase some marks from the full
map file in order to save the mark.
The procedure below shows how to enter a mark, including mark selection, mark entry
method, and save location. You can skip steps in the procedure where it is not neces-
sary to complete the corresponding action.

1. Put the cursor on the mark shown in the [Mark] box at the bottom-left position on
the display.

Minimize button

Selected mark

Map file number

2. Spin the scrollwheel to select a mark. The name of the mark appears to the right
of the mark.

Name of mark

3. Select mark color (B-type only), mark position, and where to save the mark as fol-
lows:
1) Right-click the [Mark] box to show the context-sensitive menu then click [Mark
Color].

2) Click the mark color desired.

3) At the context-sensitive menu, click [Mark
Position] to select the mark input method.
The choices are [CURSOR], [OWN SHIP]
and [L/L].
For L/L, the mark is entered at the L/L po-
sition entered at [MAP MARK L/L] on the [MAP•MARK] menu.

5-2
 5. RADAR MAP AND TRACK

4) At the context-sensitive menu, click [MAP File] then click the map file number
where to save the mark.

4. For entry with the cursor, use the trackball to put the cursor on the location de-
sired. (You can see the range and bearing from own ship to the cursor location by
monitoring the Cursor position box.) Push the left button or the MARK key on the
Control Unit to inscribe the mark or line point.
Note: To continue entering the same mark or line under the same conditions, do the
following at the next time of entry.
Entry by cursor: Click the location where to put a mark.
Entry by ship's position, or manual input of latitude and longitude: Click the mark
icon.

5.5 How to Find Number of Map Points Used

You can show the number of points used in each radar map file.
Right-click the [Mark] box then select [Map•Mark Menu]. See [MARK POINTS] at the
bottom of the menu to see how many mark points have been used per map file. In the
example below 7 points out of 4,000 points have been used in Map 1.

EVENT
5 USER CHART

Map no., no. of points used/total no.

of points

5-3
5. RADAR MAP AND TRACK

5.6 How to Select the Radar Map to Display

1. Right-click the [Mark] box to show the context-sensitive menu.
2. Click [MAP File] and then click the map no. you want to display.

5.7 How to Attach a Comment to a Radar Map, Find

Comment for a Map

5.7.1 How to attach a comment to a radar map

You can attach a comment to radar maps you have created, to help you distinguish
your maps.

1. Right-click the [Mark] box to show the context-sensitive menu.

2. Click [Edit Map Comment]. A text input box appears to-
Edit map comment X
gether with the software keyboard, as shown in the right Radar map file
figure. MAP 1
Edit comment
3. Select the map no. with the [Radar map file] drop-down
list.
4. Enter your comment in the text input box. The number of
characters available appears below the box. 53 up input

5. Click the [OK] button to finish.

5.7.2 How to find the comment for a map

Put the cursor on the map no.
indication. The comment is
displayed to the right of the
map no. In the example below
the comment is "Kobe".

Map no. Location of

comment

5-4
 5. RADAR MAP AND TRACK

5.8 How to Erase Radar Map Marks and Lines

A total of 4,000 marks and lines is allotted per map. When this amount is exceeded in
a map, no more map marks or lines may be entered into the map unless you erase
some unnecessary marks or lines.

5.8.1 How to erase individual radar map marks and lines

1. Right-click the display area to show the context-sensitive menu.

Target Cancel
Off Center
EBL Offset
Zoom Set
Area Select
Mark Delete
Mark Copy
Own Ship Offset
REF Mark
Cursor Size
Notes Detail
2. Click [Mark Delete].
3. Click the mark or line to erase.

5.8.2 How to erase map marks and lines in an area

You can erase all marks and lines within an area as follows:
1. Right-click the display area to show the context-sensitive menu.

Target Cancel
Off Center
EBL Offset
Zoom Set
Area Select
Mark Delete
Mark Copy
Own Ship Offset
REF Mark
Cursor Size
Notes Detail
2. Click [Area Select].

5-5
5. RADAR MAP AND TRACK

3. Specify the area as follows:

1) Put the cursor on the start point and push the left button.
2) Drag the cursor diagonally to the end point and push the left button.

Start point

Marks within the area

are colored cyan End point
(A and B types only)

4. Right-click the display area to show the context-sensitive menu.

5. Click [Area Mark Delete] to delete the marks and lines in the area selected.

5.8.3 How to erase all radar map marks and lines in a map file
You can erase all radar map marks and lines in the map file currently displayed. Be
absolutely sure you want to erase the marks and lines - erased marks and lines cannot
be restored.

1. Right-click the [Mark] box, select [Map•Mark Menu] and [1 MARK SETTING].
2. Select [8 MAP MARK ALL DELETE]. The confirmation message "Attention: Do
you wish to delete all map mark?" appears. Click the [OK] button to erase all
marks and lines.
3. Close the menu.

5-6
 5. RADAR MAP AND TRACK

5.9 How to Copy Radar Map Marks and Lines

5.9.1 How to copy individual radar map mark and line to another
map file
You can copy individual mark and line from the currently displayed radar map to the
radar map file of your choice.

1. Right-click the display area to show the context-sensitive menu.

2. Click [Mark Copy] then click the map file no. where to copy the mark.

3. Put the (light-blue) cursor on the mark or line then click.

5.9.2 How to copy radar map marks and lines within an area to an-
other map file
You can copy radar map marks and lines within an area of the currently displayed ra-
dar map to the radar map file of your choice.

1. Right-click the display area to show the context-sensitive menu.

2. Click [Area Select].
3. Specify the area as follows.
1) Put the cursor on the start point and push the left button.
2) Drag the cursor diagonally to the end point and push the left button.
All marks and lines within the area selected are highlighted in blue (A and B
types only).
4. Right-click to show the context-sensitive menu.

5. Click [Area Mark Copy] then click the map file number where to copy the marks
and lines.

5-7
5. RADAR MAP AND TRACK

5.9.3 How to copy all radar map marks and lines in a map file to an-
other map file
You can copy all radar map marks and lines in the currently displayed radar map to
the radar map file of your choice.

1. Display the map file of which to copy all its marks and lines. See
section 5.6section 5.6.
2. Right-click the [Mark] box then click [Map•Mark Menu].
3. Select [1 MARK SETTING].
4. Select [9 MAP MARK ALL COPY].

5. Select [1 COPY TO] then select where to copy the map marks and lines.
6. Select [2 ALL MARK COPY]. The confirmation message "Attention: Do you wish
to copy all map mark?" appears. Click the [OK] button to copy.
7. Close the menu.

5-8
 5. RADAR MAP AND TRACK

5.10 How to Export Radar Map

You can export a radar map to a USB flash memory. For safety, only export radar
maps while the radar is in standby.

1. Set the USB flash memory in the USB port on the Control Unit.
2. Open the menu then select the [5 MAP•MARK] and [1 MARK SETTING] menus.
3. Go to page 2 of the menu, select [1 MAP MARK MANAGE]. The confirmation
message appears.
Note: The [1 MAP MARK MANAGE] menu appears only when the radar is in
standby.
Attention X
Do you wish to open
map convert window?
Cancel OK

4. Click the [OK] button to show the [Map Convert] dialog box.
Map Convert
Export Import

No. Comment Points

Map1 NO COMMENT 100/4000
Map2 NO COMMENT 100/4000
Map3 NO COMMENT 100/4000
Map4 NO COMMENT 100/4000
Map5 NO COMMENT 100/4000
Map6 NO COMMENT 100/4000
Map7 NO COMMENT 100/4000
Map8 NO COMMENT 100/4000
Map9 NO COMMENT 100/4000
Map10 NO COMMENT 100/4000
Export

Exit

5. Check [Export] at the top-left position of the dialog box.

6. Check the radar map(s) (Map1 to Map10) to export.
7. Click the [Export] button to show the [Save file] dialog box.
8. Select the USB flash memory as the destination to save then click the [Save] but-
ton. After the data export is completed, the message "x file(s) have exported suc-
cess." appears (x is the number of the radar map(s)).
9. Click the [OK] button.

5-9
5. RADAR MAP AND TRACK

5.11 How to Import Radar Map

You can import a radar map created on another equipment (FCR-2xx9, FAR-3xx0 or
FAR-2xx7). For safety, only import radar maps while the radar is in standby. Copy the
radar maps to a USB flash memory.

1. Set the USB flash memory that contains the radar map(s) to import in the USB port
on the Control Unit.
2. Open the menu then select the [5 MAP•MARK] and [1 MARK SETTING] menus.
3. Go to page 2 of the menu, select [1 MAP MARK Attention X

MANAGE]. The confirmation message appears. Do you wish to open

map convert window?
Note: [1 MAP MARK MANAGE] is only available
Cancel OK
when the radar is in standby.
4. Click the [OK] button to show the [Map Convert] dialog box.
5. Check [Import] at the top-left position of the dialog box then click the [Select file to
import] button to show the [Select file] dialog box.
Select file

Volume select:

Lock in:
Space: Total

Name Size Modified

File Name:

File Type: Export File(*.mrk;*.MRK)

Cancel Open

6. Select the folder that contains the file to import then click the [Open] button to
show the [Map Convert] dialog box.
Map Convert
Export Import

Select file to import Points: 76

Import file: 2107000.MRK
No. Comment Points From To
Map1 NO COMMENT 0/4000
Map2 NO COMMENT 0/4000
Map3 NO COMMENT 0/4000
Map4 NO COMMENT 0/4000
Map5 NO COMMENT 0/4000
Map6 NO COMMENT 0/4000
Map7 NO COMMENT 0/4000
Map8 NO COMMENT 0/4000
Map9 NO COMMENT 0/4000
Map10 NO COMMENT 0/4000
Import

Exit

7. Check the radar map(s) (Map1 to Map10) to which the data created on another
unit are imported.
8. Click the [Import] button to import the data to the radar map(s) selected at
step 7step 7.
Note: When importing a radar map created on another FAR-2xx7, the radar maps
marks and lines are converted. See the tables on pages 5-11 and 5-12.

5-10
 5. RADAR MAP AND TRACK

The list of the radar map marks and lines

The radar map marks and lines created on another FAR-2xx7 are converted to ones
on the FAR-3xx0 series as below.

Marks
FAR-2xx7 FAR-3xx0
IMO or A type B type
Symbol Color Name
Symbol Color Name Symbol Color Name
Red Buoy Red Buoy Red Buoy

Green Buoy Green Buoy Green Buoy

Red Buoy Red Buoy Red Buoy

Green Buoy Green Buoy Green Buoy

Red Buoy Red Buoy Red Buoy

Green Buoy Green Buoy Green Buoy

Red Buoy Red Buoy Red Buoy

Green Buoy Green Buoy Green Buoy

* Buoy Red Buoy * Buoy

* Buoy Red Buoy * Buoy

* Buoy Red Buoy * Buoy

* Buoy Red Buoy * Buoy

* Danger Magenta Danger * Danger

* Danger Magenta Danger * Danger

Magenta Danger Magenta Danger Magenta Danger

Yellow-
* Mark Mark * Mark
orange
Yellow-
* Mark Mark * Mark
orange
Yellow-
* Mark Mark * Mark
orange
Yellow-
* Mark Mark * Mark
orange
Yellow-
* Mark Mark * Mark
orange
Yellow-
* Mark Mark * Mark
orange
Yellow-
* Mark Mark * Mark
orange
Yellow-
Other - - Mark * Mark
orange

*: The display color is selectable. See "Contrast table for the display colors""Contrast
table for the display colors" on page 5-12page 5-12.

5-11
5. RADAR MAP AND TRACK

Lines
FAR-2xx7 FAR-3xx0
IMO or A type B type
Symbol Color Name
Symbol Color Name Symbol Color Name
Yellow-
* Mark Buoy * Mark
orange
Yellow-
* Mark Buoy * Mark
orange
* Nav Line Magenta Buoy * Nav Line
* Coast Line White Buoy * Coast Line
Contour Contour
* Gray Buoy *
Line Line
Prohibited Prohibited Prohibited
* Magenta *
Area Area Area
* Danger Magenta Danger * Danger
Yellow-
* Line Buoy Line Mark * Line Buoy
orange
Yellow-
* Line Buoy Line Mark * Line Buoy
orange
Yellow-
* Line Mark Line Mark * Line Mark
orange
Yellow-
* Line Mark Line Mark * Line Mark
orange
Yellow-
Other - - Line Mark * Mark
orange

*: The display color is selectable. See "Contrast table for the display colors""Contrast
table for the display colors" on this page.

Contrast table for the display colors

Below is the contrast table for the display colors of the radar map marks and lines.

FAR-2xx7 FAR-3xx0
Red Red
Yellow Yellow
Green Green
Cyan Cyan
Magenta Magenta
Blue Blue
White White
Other Green

5-12
 5. RADAR MAP AND TRACK

5.12 How to Show, Hide Radar Map Features

You can show or hide radar map objects as follows:

1. Right-click the [Mark] box then select [Map•Mark Menu]

and [2 RADAR MAP].
2. Turn objects on or off as appropriate.
3. Close the menu.

5.13 Track

5.13.1 How to set up ship's track

The track traces your ship's movement. This radar records track at the interval you set
on the [OWN TRACK] menu, and the recording interval determines the maximum re-
cording time. The longer the interval the longer the recording time, as shown in the
table below.

When the memory for track becomes full, the oldest track is deleted to make room for
the latest. For that reason you may want to adjust the recording interval so as to keep
the track on the display for a longer time.

Save Interval Max. Recording Time Save Interval Max. Recording Time
30 s 6 days 22 hr 40 min 3 min 41 days 16 hr
1 min 13 days 21 hr 20 min 6 min 83 days 8 hr
2 min 27 days 18 hr 40 min 15 min 208 days 5 hr

1. Open the menu then select the [6 CHART DISPLAY] and

[1 OWN TRACK] menus.
2. Select [1 DISP OWN TRACK].
3. Select [ON] to show your ship's track or [OFF] to hide the
track.
4. Select [2 OWN TRACK SOURCE].
5. Select the navigation sensor that is to feed the position
data to use to plot your ship's track, among [PRIMARY],
[SECONDARY] and [SYSTEM].
[PRIMARY]: Navigation sensor having first priority.
[SECONDARY]: Navigation sensor having second prior-
ity.
[SYSTEM]: Plot own ship's track using system-fed posi-
tion.
6. Select [3 SAVE INTERVAL].
7. Select how often to save your ship's track, among [30s], [1min], [2min], [3min],
[6min] and [15min]. [DRAW ONLY] draws the track but does not save it.
8. For the B-type radar, you can select the color for the track with [5 OWN TRACK
COLOR].

5-13
5. RADAR MAP AND TRACK

9. Close the menu.

5.13.2 How to erase track

When the display becomes filled with track, for example, your ship traces the same
route several times, you may want to delete some or all of your track from the display.

1. Open the menu then select the [6 CHART DISPLAY] and [1 OWN TRACK]
menus.
2. Select [5 DELETE OWN TRACK].
3. Select the color to delete (A and B types), or the percentage of track to delete
among [30%], [50%], [80%] and [ALL].
4. Close the menu.

5.14 Route Display

The route selected for navigation (in the chart mode) (see
chapter 12chapter 12) can be shown on the radar display.
You can show or hide the entire route, and show or hide ele-
ments of the route (channel limits, safety margin, leg marks
and wheel over line).

1. Right-click the [Mark] box then select [Map•Mark Menu]

and [3 ROUTE].
2. Turn the route display on or off at [1 DISP ROUTE].

5-14
 5. RADAR MAP AND TRACK

3. Turn the XTD limit, safety margin, leg marks and wheel over line displays on or off
at [2 SEL ROUTE OBJECT].
Safety
margin

㼃㻼㼀㻟

XTD
Wheel over limit
line*

WPT1 WPT2
124.8° 87.9°
Leg mark
0.8NM 1.2NM

* Wheel over line (WOL)

Direction of Direction of
movement WOL movement WOL

WOL for next section Vertical WOL for the current interval

Case 1: Normal Case 2: Angle for next section is narrow (Not 20 deg)

4. Close the menu.

5.15 User Chart Display

The active user chart can be shown in the chart radar
mode. See chapter 13chapter 13 for a description of the
user chart.
1. Right-click the [Mark] box then select [Map•Mark
Menu] and [5 USER CHART].
2. Show or hide the user chart on the radar display with
[1 DISP USER CHART].
3. Show or hide the user chart objects on the radar dis-
play with [2 SEL USER CHART OBJECT].
4. Close the menu.

5-15
5. RADAR MAP AND TRACK

This page is intentionally left blank.

5-16
6. CHART OVERVIEW

6.1 Chart Screen Overview

The ECDIS (Electronic Chart Display and Information Systems) screen is divided into
several areas, as illustrated below. (The layout may be slightly different depending on
your monitor’s resolution.) The ECDIS operational area has no limitations. That is,
high latitudes (85° and higher) are correctly displayed always. The ECDIS uses “or-
thographic” presentation for areas of high latitude and small chart scales. All other
conditions use the “cylindrical equidistant” presentation.
Status
bar Cursor position box Sensor
information
box
Chart scale/presentation mode box Own ship
functions
box

Electronic chart area Route

Instant information
Access box
bar

S
Overlay/NAV
S Tools box

Alert box

EBL1 box, EBL2 box Permanent warning box VRM1 box, VRM2 box

*: High latitudes are not supported in RADAR mode.

• The Status bar provides for selection of display mode, chart format, IMO chart display; one-click
restoration of IMO standard display, etc.
• The Sensor information box displays ship's speed, course and position and selects sensors.
• The Own ship functions box applies offset to the chart.
• The Route information box shows route and waypoint data, when a route is selected for naviga-
tion.
• The Overlay/NAV Tools box provides for setup of navigation-related functions.
• The Alert box shows operational and system alert messages.
• The VRM boxes measure the range to an object.
• The Permanent warning box displays chart-related warning messages.
• The EBL boxes measure the bearing to an object.
• The InstantAccess bar™ provides quick access to functions such as brilliance adjustment, dis-
play palette and the chart-related menu. The contents change according to the display mode se-
lected.
• The Chart scale/presentation mode box selects the chart scale and presentation mode.
• The Cursor position box shows the latitude and longitude position of the cursor and the TTG to
the cursor.
• The Electronic chart area shows the chart.
Note: If the display indications freeze, the buzzer sounds continuously. Restart the unit to restore
normal operation.

6-1
6. CHART OVERVIEW

6.1.1 Electronic chart area

This chart radar can use the following types of charts:

• S-57 (IHO)
• S-63 (IHO) (S-63 encrypted)
• C-MAP
The following information can also be displayed:

• Cursor (moved by trackball)

• Planned route
• EBL (Electronic Bearing Line) and VRM
• Own ship symbol with speed vector
• TT-acquired target from radar
• AIS target

Electronic charts
The electronic navigational charts, ENC or C-MAP vector format, are displayed in the
electronic chart area.

The chart radar combines chart and navigational information. It should be noted that
modern navigation systems (e.g., differential GPS) may offer more accurate position-
ing than what was used to position some of the surveys from which the electronic nav-
igational chart was derived.

This chart radar is compatible with S57 release 3 ENC format charts. ENC charts are
converted to SENC for use with the chart radar.

When you open a chart, it is displayed with the default scale, called the compilation
scale. The details for the chart are displayed in the electronic chart area and these can
be modified. You can change the chart scale with the ZOOM IN and ZOOM OUT func-
tions, and the scale range is 1:1,000 - 1:70,000,000.

C-MAP vector format

The C-MAP charts require a contract with applicable provider. There are two types of
C-MAP charts; C-MAP ENC SERVICE, which are officially recognized charts, and C-
MAP PROFESSIONAL, which are charts from a private source and cannot be used
as a substitute for paper charts under any condition. To emphasize this point C-MAP
PROFESSIONAL charts are called "Non-ENC" charts in this manual.

Note: Some eToken dongles from the FEA-2xx7 can be used with this system. These
are labeled "JeT FURUNO XXXXX". Contact your dealer for details.
This chart radar accepts the following C-MAP chart types: ENC SERVICE, PROFES-
SIONAL+, ENC+ SERVICE and ADMIRALTY ENC SERVICE.

C-MAP ENC SERVICE charts comply with the IHO's (International Hydrographic Or-
ganization's) S-57 Edition 3 product specification. When used in the chart radar, the
ENC data improves the safety of navigation at sea.

6-2
 6. CHART OVERVIEW

What is ENC delivery?

ENCs can be distributed as ENC delivery or SENC delivery. Both deliveries can be
used in this system.

In ENC delivery, charts are distributed directly from source like PRIMAR, IC-ENC,
JHA, etc. They are delivered onboard in ENC format (using S-57 and S-63) then the
charts are installed into the system.
In SENC delivery, charts are converted from ENC to SENC before delivery to onboard
and then installed into the system. A C-MAP ENC delivery is SENC delivery.

Important notices
• If you are using both services (ENC and SENC deliveries) having the same chart
name installed into the system through both deliveries, priority of displaying the
chart is in ENC delivery.
• Chart updates for ENC delivery are only for charts of ENC delivery and chart up-
dates for SENC delivery is only for charts of SENC delivery. You have to keep
charts up-to-date separately.
• If you change from ENC delivery to SENC delivery, remove old charts from the sys-
tem before installing charts from new delivery.

6-3
6. CHART OVERVIEW

6.1.2 Status bar

The Status bar mainly provides for selection of display mode, chart type and IMO chart
display setting.

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15

NAVI

No. Button name Description

1 Display mode Selects the display mode: [RADAR], [CHART for RADAR], or
[CONNING for RADAR]*. *Optional specification.
2 NAVI Selects the Voyage navigation mode.
3 CHARTS Goes to the Chart maintenance mode.
4 PLAN Selects the Voyage planning mode.
5 OTHERS Sets system in silent mode.
6 CLEAR RADAR Hides radar echoes and TT/AIS symbols. Available only when
radar overlay is active, or when there is at least one TT/AIS
symbol displayed.
7 CHART ONLY Shows only the chart, when left button is pressed and held
down.
8 STD DISP Restores the IMO standard display instantly.
9 Chart priority No use.
10 Chart database Selects the pre-defined presentations of ENC content: IMO
BASE, IMO STD or IMO ALL. CUSTOM appears when the
symbols selected or deselected on the [Chart Display] menu
do not match the preset conditions for IMO BASE, IMO STD
or IMO ALL.
11 Displays the operator's manual, chart program no. and sys-
tem information.

12 Settings Manages user profiles; opens the Settings menu.

13 Date • Displays the date.

• Selects the time to use, local or UTC.
• Sets the time difference between local and UTC (to use lo-
cal time).
14 Time Displays the time, local or UTC.
15 Working • Rotates clockwise if the system is working properly. If it is
Indicator not spinning the system is not working. Shortly after it stops
spinning the buzzer sounds. Reset the power to restore
R normal operation.
• If the primary display mode is specified during the installa-
E C tion, the first letter of the mode name appears at the center
of the working indicator as follows: C: Conning, E: ECDIS,
R: Radar. The letter can be clicked to return to the primary
display mode.

6-4
 6. CHART OVERVIEW

How to operate the buttons on the Status bar

The Status bar has two types of controls: toggle button and drop-down list button. You
operate the buttons with the trackball module.

Button type Operating procedure

Mode button
A mode button selects the chart operating mode
(see section 6.3section 6.3). The background
color of a mode button is light-blue when its
OFF Click ON
chart operating mode is enabled; gray when dis- button.
abled. The [NAVI] button is an example of a (gray) (light-blue)
mode button.
Drop-down list button
A drop-down list button provides a list from
which to select an option related to the label on
the button. The [Chart Database] button is an
Click
example of a drop-down list button. See the right
button.
figure. A drop-down list button has a list status
indicator (a triangle) whose position changes
according to list status.

List closed List opened

6-5
6. CHART OVERVIEW

6.1.3 InstantAccess bar™

The InstantAccess bar™ runs vertically along the left edge of the screen. The bar con-
tains all the operating functions related to the selected chart operating mode (Voyage
planning, Voyage navigation and Chart maintenance). The bar is divided into two sec-
tions, upper and lower. The buttons in the lower section are common to all modes. A
button with a triangle mark at its bottom right corner indicates a button with multiple
functions.

[NAVI] [CHARTS] [PLAN]

button activated button activated button activated

Voyage navigation Chart maintenance Voyage planning

mode bar mode bar mode bar

6-6
 6. CHART OVERVIEW

Button name Description

Voyage navigation mode bar
← Minimize the InstantAccess bar™. To restore the maxi-
mized bar, click anywhere on the bar.
Click
arrow

Click
anywhere
on the bar

Voyage [Route]: Selects/deselects routes, and moves route to Voyage planning mode (for
editing).
[User Chart]: Selects/deselects user chart for monitoring.
[Monitor INFO]: Shows the [Monitor Information] dialog box.
[Stop Monitor]: Stops monitoring of route, user chart.
[Instant Track]: Creates a temporary track to return to or make a temporary detour
from the monitored course.
Processes AIS Safety and Navtex messages. If you have un-
read Navtex or Safety messages, the icon changes as shown S S/N

right; "N" for unread Navtex, "S" for unread Safety, "S/N" for
unread Safety and Navtex.
Manual Update Shows the menu for manual update of chart objects.
Mini Conning Shows or hides the mini conning display.
Chart maintenance mode bar
← Minimizes the InstantAccess bar™.
Gate-1 Automatically installs selected charts and their licenses. Requires presetting at in-
stallation. Does not appear unless the presetting is done.
AUTO Import Loads charts automatically.
Manage Charts Deletes charts; installs (loads) charts manually.
Cell Status Finds cell status.
License Enters license information.
Public Key Shows the current public key. The public key changes each time a new one is
installed.
System Functions for chart synchronization and chart data management.
Sync Config selects the ECDIS units to synchronize.
Sync Status checks synchronization status.
Gate-1 Config. manages Gate-1 charts. Does not appear unless the presetting
mentioned at [Gate-1] above is done.
Reconvert reconverts SENC charts.
Clear Charts removes chart data.
Voyage planning mode bar
← Minimizes the InstantAccess bar™.
Planning Creates and edits routes and user charts.
Report Displays route and user chart reports.

6-7
6. CHART OVERVIEW

Button name Description

Guide Box Shows or hides the guide box, which provides range and bearing measurement
between waypoints when creating a route.
Note: Range and bearing between waypoints can be calculated using either
[Rhumbline] or [Great Circle]. Select the appropriate method from the [Guide Box]
drop-down list in the [Geometry] section of the [NAV TOOLS] menu.
Manage Data Manages routes and user charts.
[Route]: Imports, exports, deletes routes.
[User Chart]: Deletes user charts.
[Data Import]: Imports route, user chart created with FEA-2x07 ECDIS.
Common bar
Chart INFO Provides chart information.
[Chart Legend]: Shows chart legend, with your vessel at the center, in the Voyage
navigation mode.
[Viewing Dates]: Sets Display date and Update Review dates.
[Chart 1]: Displays an overview of ECDIS chart symbols.
DISP [SET]: Shows the [Basic Setting] menu, [Chart Display] menu, [Symbol Display]
menu, [Chart Alert] dialog box.
[TWO DISP]: Splits the screen in two, vertically or horizontally, in the Voyage nav-
igation mode.
[NtoM]: Shows or hides the Notices to Mariners (NtoM).
: Shows or hides the software keyboard.

Log Displays Update log (ENC, C-MAP), Event log* (user event, POSN event), NAV
log (Voyage, Details, Chart Usage), Target log (Danger Target), and Route Trans-
fer log.
*: Voyage navigation and Voyage planning modes.
Selects a color palette, day, dusk or night. The S or L at the right edge of the label
S OR L
indicates how the color palette selection is shared, among the units of the system
(S) or locally (L). The default setting is “S”. See section 22.6section 22.6.
Palette
• Adjusts the brilliance of the monitor.
S OR L • Adjusts the backlighting for the control unit. (CHART for RADAR mode)
The S or L at the right edge of the label indicates how the brilliance/backlighting
BRILL selection is shared, among the units of the system (S) or locally (L). The default
setting is “S”. See section 22.6section 22.6.
MOB Inscribes the MOB (ManOverBoard) mark.
Capture
Takes a screenshot.

Restores previous condition in route and user chart creation.

UNDO

6-8
 6. CHART OVERVIEW

How to operate the buttons on the InstantAccess bar™

The InstantAccess bar™ has four types of buttons: toggle button, drop-down list but-
ton, slider bar button, and specialty button. (The [MOB], [Capture] and [UNDO] buttons
are specialty buttons that provide a single-action function.) The buttons can be oper-
ated with the trackball module or the InstantAccess knob. This section shows you
how to operate the buttons with the InstantAccess knob.

Toggle button Drop-down list button Slider bar button

[Palette] button

S
OFF ON
(gray) (light-blue)
Palette
choices

1. Push the InstantAccess knob to enable its use with the InstantAccess bar™.
2. Rotate the InstantAccess knob to select a button. The background color of the
button selected is light blue.
3. Do one of the following depending on button type.
• Toggle button: Push the knob to select setting.
• Drop-down list button or slider bar: Rotate the knob to select an item or ad-
just the slider bar. Push the knob to confirm your selection or setting.
Note 1: You can use the ESC key to go back one step in the current operating
sequence.
Note 2: The InstantAccess knob can only adjust the slider bar on the
InstantAccess bar™.

6.1.4 Sensor information box

Sensor information box displays the sensor data. When the user-selected sensor fails,
the system automatically selects another sensor. When this occurs, the color of the
sensor name changes according to the sensor status. For details, see
section 1.11section 1.11.

6-9
6. CHART OVERVIEW

6.1.5 Own ship functions box

The own ship functions box shows information about own ship, enables offset and TM
reset.
[Offset] button
[WGS84] button ENC info
appears here.

TM/CU status

• [Offset] button: See section 16.8.1section 16.8.1.

• [WGS 84] button: Convert position data between
datum; go to selected position on the current
chart. Click the button to display the dialog box
shown in the right figure. To convert a position
from one datum to another, select the datum
source at the [Source] pull-down list and enter po-
sition. Select the datum to convert to at the [Con-
verted] pull-down list then click the button. The
position on the chart selected is shown below the
[Converted] pull-down list. To go to a position,
click a [Go To] button.

• ENC info: ENC chart info appears here.

No indication: ENC chart is currently displayed.
"Non-ENC data": Non-official ENC material, in yellow characters. See
section 7.18section 7.18.
• TM/CU status:
"TM/CU Reset": True motion reset is active. (Chart is stationary and own ship
moves on the chart.)
"TM Reset off": When dragging the chart; true motion is OFF. To restart true motion,
click the indication.
"Ship off screen": Ship is out of the display area.

6-10
 6. CHART OVERVIEW

6.1.6 Route information box

Asterisks appear in data locations when no route
is selected for navigation.
• [Route]: Name of monitored route. cc_import_03
• [Plan Speed]: Planned speed to approach "To 20.0
WPT". 337.5
• [Plan Course]: Planned course between previ-
332.9
ous WPT and "To WPT".
• [Course to Steer]: Calculated set course to fol- 185.0
low the monitored route, including XTD, drift and 0.9
gyro error compensation.
• [XTD Limit]: Planned width of channel to ap- 36
proach "To WPT". 0.50
• [XTD]: Perpendicular distance the ship is from 00:05:38
the intended track. The XTD figure can be 0.50
shown in meters or nautical miles. Click this 000.0
box, then select [XTD] and unit desired, or open
the menu and select desired unit with [unit of 37
“XTD”] in the [Route Information] menu. 112.1
• [To WPT]: The waypoint that the ship is ap-
proaching.
• [DIST to WOP] (Wheel Over Point): Distance to
the point where rudder order for course change
at "To WPT" is given.
• [Time to Go]: Time to go to WOP (hh:mm:ss).
• [Turn RAD]: Planned turning radius at "To
WPT".
• [ROT]: Calculated rate of turn that is based on
current speed and planned turning radius.
• [Next WPT]: The WPT following the "To WPT".
• [Next Course]: Next course (in degrees).

Course to steer

WOL (Wheel Over Line) WOL

Course to steer: 110°

Course to steer: 120°

Planned course: 90° Planned course: 90°

Current

No current Current present

6-11
6. CHART OVERVIEW

6.1.7 Overlay/NAV Tools box

The [Overlay/NAV Tools] box sets up
the following objects and consists of Page name Minimize button
the following pages.
• TT•AIS Page
• Echo*1 selection
• Parallel index lines buttons
• Range rings
• Predictor (predicts ship’s future
movements)
• Under the keel clearance graphic
• Anchor watch
• Look-ahead*2
• Curved EBL*3
See chapter 15chapter 15 for infor-
mation about objects other than
TT•AIS.

*1: Available only when the Echo page is enabled at installation. Not available for B
types.
*2: Always active when Back-up ECDIS mode is enabled.
*3: Available only when a EC-3000 with TCS functionality (optional specification) is con-
nected to the same network.

6.1.8 Alert box

The [Alert] box shows operational and system
alert messages, with alert ID no. and alert mes-
sage. See chapter 20chapter 20.

6.1.9 Permanent warning box

The permanent warning box
displays chart-related warning
messages. Click the arrow to
show details. Click the arrow Click arrow to
again to minimize the box. show details.

6.1.10 EBL, VRM boxes

The EBL measures the bearing to an object, and the VRM measures the range to an
object. See section 6.10section 6.10.

6-12
 6. CHART OVERVIEW

6.1.11 North mark

The north mark appears at the top left of the Chart for Radar display, is North
always visible, and points in the northerly direction. At high latitudes
where north is not in a set direction, the north mark appears with the
text "at own ship" or "at center" below the mark to show the reference
point.
North mark
• "at own ship": Shown when your vessel is displayed on-screen.
North is shown with your vessel as the reference point.
• "at center": Shown when your vessel is not displayed on-screen. North is shown
with the center of the screen as the reference point.

6.1.12 Context-sensitive menus

Context-sensitive menus are available at the locations shown below. Right-click the
applicable area then select the appropriate item from the menu. The availability of the
context-sensitive menu depends on the mode in use, as shown in the table below.

Cursor info display

Sensor
selection
Chart scale

Route selection,
route information
Electronic chart area

TT/AIS
page

EBL reference VRM reference Alert list, Alert log

Mode and availability

Item Functions
NAVI CHARTS PLAN
Chart scale Drop-down list of chart scales. Yes Yes Yes
Cursor info display Switch cursor displays. Yes Yes Yes
Sensor selection Select sensors. Yes Yes Yes
Route selection, Select /unselect route for monitor- Yes Yes Yes
route information ing*; Move to plan*; Select user chart (XTD (XTD
for monitoring*; Monitor INFO box*; only) only)
Stop route monitoring*; XTD
TT, AIS page Access TT, AIS functions. Yes Yes Yes
Alert list, Alert log Open alert list, alert log. Yes Yes Yes
VRM reference Select VRM reference; offset (head- Yes Yes Yes
ing or north).

6-13
6. CHART OVERVIEW

Mode and availability

Item Functions
NAVI CHARTS PLAN
EBL reference Select EBL reference; offset (head- Yes Yes Yes
ing or north).
Electronic chart Own ship mark (or cursor position*) Yes No Yes*
area to screen center; object info; chart
legend; manual update*; divider,
hide MOB, [Message] dialog box.

* NAVI mode only

6.1.13 How to enter alphanumeric data

On some screens it is necessary to enter alphanumeric data. The data can be input
two ways: software keyboard or trackball.

Alphanumeric data entry from the software keyboard

A software keyboard is also available for entry of alphanumeric data. Do as follows to
use the software keyboard. Display the keyboard before opening menus.

1. On the InstantAccess bar™, press the [DISP], [ ] and [ON] buttons to show
the software keyboard. The [BS], [Enter], [↑], [↓],[ ←], [→] and [Space] on the key-
board function the same as those keys on the keyboard of the Control Unit.

2. To switch between the alphabet keyboard and symbols keyboard, click the [!$&]
key.

Alphabet keyboard Symbols keyboard

3. Click the input box.

4. Click appropriate keys and finally click the [Enter] key.
To erase the software keyboard, click the X button at the top right corner of the key-
board.

6-14
 6. CHART OVERVIEW

Alphanumeric data entry with the trackball module

The trackball module can also be used to enter alphanumeric data.

1. Put the cursor in the input box. Up and down arrows

appear at the right side of the box.
2. Enter data by one of the methods shown below.
• Spin the scrollwheel to set data. Upward to decrease the value; downward to
increase the value.
• Click  to increase the value;  to decrease the value.

How to enter latitude and longitude data with the trackball module
The trackball module can also be used to enter latitude and longitude data.

1. Put the cursor in the input box. A selection cursor (light-

Selection cursor
blue) appears.
2. Enter data by spinning the scrollwheel. Upward to de-
crease the value; downward to increase the value.
3. To switch coordinate between N and S and vice versa,
put the cursor at the right edge of the input box. Dual ar-
rows appear
4. Click to switch the coordinates. The method to switch E to W and vice versa is the
same.

6.2 How to Select a Display Mode

Click the display mode button at the far left side of the Status bar then click [RADAR],
[CHART for RADAR] or [CONNING for RADAR]* to select a display mode.
*Optional specification.

Display mode button

6-15
6. CHART OVERVIEW

6.3 How to Select the Chart Operating Mode

The chart display has three chart operating modes: Voyage navigation, Chart mainte-
nance and Voyage planning. Select a mode from the Status bar with the [NAVI],
[CHARTS] and [PLAN] buttons. The background of the button of the active mode is
light-blue.

For Voyage navigation For Voyage planning

mode mode

For Chart maintenance

mode
Note 1: When switching between the Voyage navigation and Chart maintenance
modes it may take several minutes to read the chart when using C-Map charts or there
are many charts installed.
Note 2: If the equipment accepts no key operation after switching to the Chart main-
tenance mode, reset the power.

6.4 How to Select the Chart Scale

When you open a chart it is displayed with the default scale, called the compilation
scale. To change the chart scale, do one of the procedures shown below. The scale
range is 1:1,000 to 1:70,000,000.

• Click the chart scale selection buttons in the Chart scale/presentation mode box.
• Right-click anywhere inside the Chart scale/presentation mode to show a drop-
down list of chart scales.
• Put the cursor anywhere on the chart and spin the scrollwheel.

Chart scale indication

Chart scale
Chart related selection buttons
message

The table below lists the chart related messages and their meanings.

Message Meaning
Display Not Real Time* Displayed date is not the current date.
Non-ENC data ENC non-compatible chart in use.
Larger scale ENC available Larger scale available at current position (TM reset
ON) or cursor location (TM reset OFF).
MAG Chart display magnification. In the example below the
magnification is 1.98. Appears with monitor size 32
inch or higher.

6-16
 6. CHART OVERVIEW

Message Meaning
Overscale Scale too large.
RM(OFF) Relative motion turned off when the chart is scrolled
or the trackball is operated.

*: Shown as "Display Not Real Time: display is based on viewing date range from
(start of date range) to (end of date range)" when the permanent warning dialog is
maximized.

6.5 How to Select the Presentation Mode

The presentation mode depends on the chart operating mode, as shown in the table
below.

Voyage navigation mode Voyage planning mode

North up TM Yes Yes*2
North up RM Yes No
Course up TM Yes Yes*2
Course up RM Yes No
Route up TM*1 No Yes*2
Route up RM*1 Yes No
Head up RM Yes No

*1
When monitoring a route.
*2Motion mode (TM) is not shown. For example, “North up”.

To select a presentation mode, click the presentation mode indication to cycle through
the presentation mode choices or click the triangle to show the drop-down list of pre-
sentation modes.

Click to show drop-down list of

presentation mode choices

Presentation mode

Presentation modes
North up: North (0 degrees) is at the top of the display.

Course up: The course is put at the top of the screen the moment it is selected.

Route up: The planned course is put at the top of the screen, in route monitoring.
When route monitoring is canceled, the course up presentation mode is automatically
selected.

Head-up: Heading is put at the top of the display.

TM (True Motion): Own ship mark follows ship’s movement. The chart is fixed.
RM (Relative Motion): Own ship mark is put at the screen center and is fixed. The
chart moves relative to own ship movement.

6-17
6. CHART OVERVIEW

6.6 Cursor Position Box

The Cursor position box shows

• Cursor position in latitude and longitude

• Time to go to the cursor position
• The bearing (True or Relative) and range to the cursor position, or x-y coordinates
of cursor position. Click the bearing and range indication or x-y coordinates indica-
tion to switch the indication, in the sequence shown below.

Cursor position, Time to go

to cursor position
Bearing(T) and range to cursor position

Bearing(R) and range to cursor position

x-y coordinates of cursor position

6.7 The Silent Mode

The silent mode, which requires a pass-
word to activate, deactivates the audio Click [OTHERS],
SILENT [SILENT].
alarms from the chart system. Use this
mode when the chart system is not re-
quired, like in a harbor. To go to the
standby mode, first click the [OTHERS]
button on the Status bar in the [CHART
for RADAR] mode then click [SILENT].
Have the holder of the password enter the
password then click the [OK] button.
Enter password;
To return to normal operation, click [Back click [OK] button.
to Normal Mode].

Note: The silent mode is automatically re-

leased when switching the operating
mode (radar/chart radar/conning).
Click to return to normal operation.

6-18
 6. CHART OVERVIEW

6.8 True Motion Reset

In the true motion mode, the chart is stationary and own ship moves on the screen.
With TM reset active, own ship moves until it reaches the true motion reset border-
line(s), then the chart is redrawn and own ship jumps back to an opposite position on
screen based on its course. (This resetting can also be done manually by clicking the
[TM/CU Reset] button.) When the TM reset function is active, "TM/CU Reset" appears
at the right side of the display.

TM reset borderline setting

(Ring does not appear on the display.)

OWN SHIP

TM
Reset
OWN SHIP

How to enable, disable automatic TM reset

To enable automatic TM reset, click the [TM Reset off] indication at the right side of
the display to show [TM/CU Reset].

Click

When the TM reset is disabled, change the chart scale with the scrollwheel and scroll
the chat by drag and drop. The own ship functions box shows [TM Reset off]. When
own ship moves off the screen the box shows [Ship off screen]. The TM reset is acti-
vated manually by clicking the [Ship off screen] button.

How to set the true motion reset borderline

You can set the limit for TM reset (in percentage) on the [Basic Setting] page. See
section 8.2.2section 8.2.2.

6-19
6. CHART OVERVIEW

6.9 How to Control Route and User Charts in Voyage

Navigation and Voyage Planning Modes
Click for Voyage navigation mode Click for Voyage planning mode

Functions in Voyage navigation mode Functions in Voyage planning mode

Click the appropriate chart mode button [NAVI] or [PLAN] at the top of the display to
go to respective mode. For the Voyage navigation mode, click the [Voyage] button
then click the button corresponding to the action to take. For the Voyage planning
mode, click the [Planning] button followed by the [Voyage] button to select a route, or
[User Chart] button to select a user chart.

Voyage navigation mode functions

[Route]: This button has three functions:
• [Select]: Selects the route to monitor.
• [Unselect]: Deselects monitored route.
• [Move to Plan]: Moves monitored route to Voyage planning mode (for editing).
[Instant Track]: Creates a temporary track to return to or make a temporary detour from
the monitored course.
[User Chart]: This button has one function.
• [Select/Unselect]: Selects and unselects user charts from monitoring regardless of
route being monitored.
[Monitor INFO]: Opens the Monitor Information dialog box, to view monitored route,
linked user chart and monitoring user chart information.
[Stop Monitor]: Stops monitoring a route and user charts.
Voyage planning mode functions
[Route]: Shows the [Route Plan] dialog box to create or edit a route.
[User Chart]: Shows the [User Chart] dialog box to create or edit a user chart.

6-20
 6. CHART OVERVIEW

6.10 How to Use the VRM and EBL

The VRM measures the range to an object and the EBL measures the bearing to an
object. There are two each of VRMs and EBLs. The lengths of the dashes on the EBL2
and VRM2 are longer than those of the EBL1 and VRM1 to distinguish them. The color
of the VRMs and EBLs is orange.

VRM1
EBL2

VRM2

EBL1

T T

EBL On/Off VRM no. VRM On/Off

EBL no.

240.8° T

EBL bearing VRM range

EBL reference

6.10.1 How to hide/show an EBL, VRM

Control Unit: Press the EBL or VRM key to hide or show respective marker.
Trackball module: Click the arrow on an EBL or VRM box to hide the respective
marker. To redisplay the marker, click the minimized box.

6.10.2 How to measure the range and bearing

Range: Put the cursor on the VRM then drag the cursor until the VRM is on the inner
edge of the object.
Bearing: Put the cursor on the EBL then drag the cursor until the EBL bisects the ob-
ject.

6.10.3 How to select bearing reference

The EBL bearing reference can be true or relative. Click the EBL reference indication
to display T (True) or R (Relative).

6-21
6. CHART OVERVIEW

6.10.4 EBL, VRM functions available with the context-sensitive menu

The EBLs and VRMs have additional functions that are accessed from the context-
sensitive menu. Right-click any VRM or EBL box to show the context-sensitive menu.

Function Description
[Centered] Centers the origin of the EBL and VRM on the current position.
[Ground] Anchors the EBL and VRM to ground; neither the EBL or VRM move
with ship's movement.
[Offset HDG]

Select
[Offset
HDG].

Drag and drop EBL, VRM When vessel changes course, the
on desired location. EBL, VRM move so that the range (L)
to their centers stays fixed.

[Offset North]

Select
[Offset
North].

Drag and drop EBL, VRM The EBL, VRM move to keep the
on desired location. angle from North to the center of the
EBL, VRM, even if the vessel
changes course. The distance to the
center of the EBL, VRM is fixed.

6-22
 6. CHART OVERVIEW

6.10.5 How to select the calculation method for EBL and VRM
The bearing for EBL and range for VRM can be calculated using either Rhumbline or
Great Circle. To select the calculation method, do the following:

1. Open the menu then select [NAV Tools] and [Geometry]. The [Geometry] settings
page appears.

2. Click the triangle at [EBL/VRM] to show the drop-down options.

3. Select [Rhumbline] or [Great Circle] as appropriate.
4. Click [Save] to apply the changes, then click [Close] to close the menu.

6-23
6. CHART OVERVIEW

6.11 Split Screen

You can split the screen in two, horizontally or vertically, in the [CHART for RADAR]
mode, Voyage navigation display.

6.11.1 How to activate, deactivate the split screen

To activate the split screen or return to the
full screen, click the [DISP] and [TWO NtoM
DISP] buttons on the InstantAccess bar™
to show the choices for screen division.
Click the screen division desired. Full screen

The example below shows the vertical split

Vertical split
screen. The active display can be switched screen
by clicking an [ACTIVE] button at the top of
the display. The dividing line between the Horizontal split
screen
main and sub views cannot be moved.

Click ACTIVE button to

switch active display.

MAIN SUB
VIEW VIEW

Dividing line

6.11.2 Function availability

Viewable Operable
Item (CHART for RADAR mode)
Main Sub Main Sub
AIS target Yes Yes Yes Yes
TT Yes Yes Yes Yes
EBL, VRM Yes Yes Yes Yes
Parallel index lines Yes Yes Yes Yes
Divider Yes Yes Yes No
Range rings Yes Yes Yes No
Anchor watch Yes Yes Yes No
Danger highlight Yes Yes Yes No
Chart display Yes Yes Yes No

6-24
 6. CHART OVERVIEW

6.11.3 Split screen usage characteristics

• If the sub view is not displayed correctly, restore the full screen display then try to ac-
tivate the split screen again.
• The display may not be updated when switching to the Voyage planning mode. If this
occurs, switch to the Voyage navigation mode, restore the split screen display then re-
turn to the Voyage planning mode.
• The own ship mark may not appear at the screen center when releasing the split
screen display. If this occurs, click the indication "TM/CU Reset" at the top right posi-
tion on the screen to show the own ship mark at the screen center.
• The TM reset feature only works on the active display. To return the own ship mark to
the screen center, click the indication [TM/CU Reset] at the top right position on the
screen.
• The sub view can use a location and chart scale different from the main view.
• The chart scale related messages (overscale, larger ENC available, etc.), which ap-
pear beneath the chart scale indication, show only on the main view.

6.12 Datum

6.12.1 General
Datum is a mathematical model of the earth based on which a sea chart is produced.
If the datum of a position sensor and that of a sea chart are different, a transformation
has to be made somewhere in the system. Not doing so can result in errors of several
sea miles. The difference between two datum is never constant, but depends on po-
sition. This means that the difference between WGS-84 and local datum, generally
used in paper charts, is not generally valid with electronic sea charts.

6.12.2 Paper charts

Datum used in paper charts have been traditionally national datum for historical rea-
sons. Many paper charts do not have a marked datum, therefore compatibility with
electronic charts may be complicated. In some paper charts, the correction terms are
printed in lieu of datum, for correction of the WGS-84 system satellite locations. The
correction terms are usable but only with the paper chart in question.

6.12.3 Electronic sea charts

The ENC vector material has to be produced by a National Hydrographic Office in the
WGS-84 datum.

6.12.4 Positioning devices and datum

In early days of electronic positioning devices, datum received little attention because
the commonly used systems utilized special charts (like Decca charts). Later on, data
output was added to these systems, but still no attention was paid to datum and the
position errors were considered as an inaccuracy of the system. With the spread of
the GPS, however, datum has become better known. An accurate position is of no val-
ue if co-ordinates are in a wrong datum. GPS satellites utilize the WGS-84 datum.

6-25
6. CHART OVERVIEW

6.12.5 Chart radar and datum

The chart radar uses ENC material, produced to standards using WGS-84 datum. Po-
sitioning devices connected to the chart radar must work in the WGS-84 datum. IMO
requires that the chart must give an alert if the datum of a positioning device is not the
WGS-84.

6.13 How to Select Sensor Settings

Sensor settings can also be selected in the chart for radar mode. Settings are mutually
changed between the radar and chart for radar modes.

This chart radar system accepts navigation data input two ways: [System] or [Local].
[System] shares sensor data among multiple chart radars in network. Sensor priority
is also commonly shared among the chart radar. [Local] selects a sensor outside the
network.

1. Right-click anywhere in the Sensor infor-

mation box to show the context-sensitive
menu.
2. Click [Local] or [System].

Note: Sensor system can also be selected

from the menu. Open the menu and click
[System/Local Select] on the [Sensor]
menu. Click the circle next to [System Sen- Open MENU
sor] or [Local Sensor] then click the [Save]
button.

6-26
 6. CHART OVERVIEW

6.14 How to Enter Ship Speed

Speed can also be entered in the chart for radar mode. Settings are mutually changed
between the radar and chart for radar modes.

The speed can be entered from a log (STW) or GPS (SOG), or manually on the menu.
1. Right-click anywhere in the Sensor information
box to show the context-sensitive menu.
2. Click [Open MENU].
3. Click [System Sensor Settings] or [Local Sen-
sor Settings].
4. Click the [SPD] tab.

Open MENU

Check for automatic speed input Speed sensor list

Stablilization PRIM
mode
LOG/GPS
selection

Check for
manual speed
input

[SPD] page, system sensor

Check for automatic speed input Speed sensor list

Stablilization
mode PRIM

LOG/GPS
selection
Check for
manual speed
input
Check to use
radar as
source for
speed and
course Set course and speed of drift

[SPD] page, local sensor

6-27
6. CHART OVERVIEW

5. For automatic input, follow the procedure below. For manual input, go to
step 6step 6.
1) Check [Sensors].
2) Set the priority for the speed sensors in case of Local sensor. Click the triangle
on the Priority1 line to select the sensor to be the Priority1 sensor. Do the
same for the Priority2. Only one sensor can be Priority1; all others are priority
2. If a speed sensor is changed from Priority2 to Priority1, then that sensor pre-
viously selected to Priority1 is then automatically selected to Priority2 state.
3) Check [LOG] or [GPS] at [Sensor Type].
4) Select [Bottom] or [Water] at [Stabilization Mode]. Select [Bottom] if GPS is the
source of speed data, or [Water] if a speed log is the source of speed data.
5) Go to step 7step 7.
6. For manual input, set the stabilization mode for [Water] and check [Manual]. En-
ter the speed using the scrollwheel, the software keyboard or the keyboard on the
Control Unit.
Note: For set and drift, see page 16-3page 16-3.
7. Click the [Save] button to save settings then click the [Close] button to close the
menu.

Notes on speed input

• Be sure not to select a LOG option when a speed log is not connected. If the log
signal is lost, the GPS sensor is used. In the event of GPS loss, the SPD is shown
as "**.* kn".
• The SPD is shown as "**.* kn", and the label "LOG" is erased if no log signal is pres-
ent for a certain amount of time. The timeout varies according to ship.
• If communication with a sensor is lost or interrupted, the system changes to the next
available sensor automatically. For example, if the sensor type is set to [LOG] and
the speed log signal is interrupted or lost, the system can switch to a GPS sensor.
In this case, the "LOG" indication appears in yellow color.
• A single-axis water log cannot measure speed when the wind is coming from the
leeway direction.

6-28
 6. CHART OVERVIEW

6.15 How to Enter Heading

Heading can also be entered in the chart for radar mode. Settings are mutually
changed between the radar and chart for radar modes.

Note: When the vessel is in high latitudes (over 85°), data from the gyrocompass is
not used. The internal filter data is used for heading calculation. In this case, the head-
ing source in the sensor information box appears as "FILT". However, high latitudes
are not supported in RADAR mode.
Heading can be entered manually or automatically.

1. Right-click anywhere in the Sensor information

box to show the context-sensitive menu.
2. Click [Open MENU].
3. Click [System Sensor Settings] or [Local Sensor
Settings].
4. Click the [HDG] tab.
Open MENU

PRIM:
Check for
automatic input
Sensor
list

Check for
manual input*

*: This is not available with the [System Sensor Settings] menu.

This is not shown on IMO type.
[HDG] page, system sensor

PRIM:
Check for
automatic input
Sensor
list The indication
for the second
Check for gyro appears
manual input* even when
only one
*: This is not shown gyrocompass
on IMO type. is connected.

[HDG] page, local sensor

6-29
6. CHART OVERVIEW

5. For automatic input, follow the procedure below. For manual input, go to
step 6step 6.
1) Check [Sensors].
2) For local system settings, set the priority for each sensor connected, referring
to section 6.14section 6.14.
3) Go to step 7step 7.
Note: For the local sensor, an offset can be applied to the gyro reading if it is
wrong. Check [Gyro Correction], then spin the scrollwheel to set the offset.
6. For manual input, check [Manual]. Enter the heading using the scrollwheel, the
software keyboard or the keyboard on the Control Unit.
7. Click the [Save] button to save settings then click the [Close] button to close the
menu.

6.16 Set up Before Departure

6.16.1 Updates before departure

Update S57 chart material
Update your S57 chart material before embarking on a new voyage. See
section 7.19section 7.19.

Display date and update review dates for S57 charts and manual updates
Note: It is very important that you set the Display and Update Review dates for charts
as the current date.
There may be features that require chart viewing dates or seasonal dates in charts.
Accordingly, if you have not set Display date and Update Review dates as the current
date, there is a possibility that you can get a wrong presentation or some feature may
be absent. See section 9.2section 9.2.

Create or update user chart, Notes

If necessary, create a new user chart and Notes or modify existing ones. See
chapter 13chapter 13.

Chart alert calculation

Set chart alert areas suitable for your coming voyage, on the [Look-ahead] page in the
[Overlay/NAV Tools] box. See section 11.2section 11.2.

6-30
6. CHART OVERVIEW

6-31
6. CHART OVERVIEW

6.16.2 Create or update a route

Create a new route or modify an existing one. See chapter 12chapter 12.

Check your route against chart alerts

Before you sail your route, you should always check your route against chart alerts.
This is important because your S57 charts and manual updates may contain chart
viewing dates information. You can check chart alerts from the [Check Results] page
on the [Route Plan] dialog box.

The following information is stored with the monitoring route plan:

• Conditions for chart alerts during route monitoring, which includes safety contour
and other chart alerts, on the [Alert Parameters] page of the [Route Plan] dialog box.

Check Status: Checked

• Name of the user chart to be used during route monitoring together with this planned
route, on the [User Chart] page of the [Route Plan] dialog box.

• Name of the Notes to be used during route monitoring together with this planned
route, on the [User Chart] dialog box (click the [Planning] button then click the [User
Chart] button).

Paste Copy Delete

6-32
 6. CHART OVERVIEW

Recalculate timetable and ETA values

Timetable and ETA values can be recalculated from the [Optimize] page in the [Route
Plan] dialog box. Minimally set ETD to equal departure time, and set optimization val-
ues.

6.16.3 How to check and prepare the route, user chart to monitor
Select the route to monitor, view linked user charts
Select a route for the voyage: In the Voyage navigation mode, click the [Voyage],
[Route] and [Select] buttons, or right-click the route indication in the [Route Informa-
tion] box (right edge of screen) then select [Select Route]. See chapter 14chapter 14.

The [Monitor Information] dialog box appears, showing the [Waypoints] tab.

Note: A route cannot be opened if its planned settings are different from its navigation
settings. The reason is given on the [Select Route] dialog box. In this case, open the
route in the Voyage planning mode and click the [Check Route] button, on the [Alert
Parameters] page. Adjust the route as necessary.
The To WPT can be selected, however WPT 01 cannot be selected.

Check ETA
WPT: 3
Distance: 0.00NM
Plan: 10:42 05 Jun 2016
Actual: 10:25 05 Jun 2016
To Localtime
Off Plan:
SPD Calculation:
10 25 05 Jun 2016
Start Calculate
Suggested SPD: 0.0kn

To see all the user charts linked to the route, click the [Linked User Chart] tab to show
the names of all the user charts linked to the route. Click a user chart to view its con-
tents.

6-33
6. CHART OVERVIEW

Check ETA
WPT: 3
Distance: 0.00NM
Plan: 10:42 05 Jun 2016
Actual: 10:25 05 Jun 2016
To Localtime
Off Plan:
SPD Calculation:
10 25 05 Jun 2016
Start Calculate
Suggested SPD: 0.0kn

Select confirm conditions of the route plan

Check the setting on the [Chart Alert] dialog box; click the [DISP], [SET] and [Chart
Alert] buttons to show that dialog box.

6-34
 6. CHART OVERVIEW

Select the user chart(s) to monitor

A user chart can be monitored without linking it to a route. You can select a user chart
two ways.

• Click the [Voyage], [User Chart] and [Select/Unselect] buttons on the InstantAccess
bar™ to open the [Select Monitor User Chart] dialog box.
• In the Voyage navigation mode, right click anywhere in the Route information box
(right side of screen) to show the [Select Monitor User Chart] dialog box.
Check the chart(s) to use in the [Stored User Chart] window, then click the [<<] and
[Open] buttons.

The [Monitor Information] dialog box automatically appears and the user chart(s) se-
lected are displayed in the [Monitoring User Chart] tab. Click a user chart to view its
contents.

Check ETA
WPT: 3
Distance: 0.00NM
Plan: 10:42 05 Jun 2016
Actual: 10:25 05 Jun 2016
To Localtime
Off Plan:
SPD Calculation:
10 25 05 Jun 2016
Start Calculate
Suggested SPD: 0.0kn

6-35
6. CHART OVERVIEW

6.16.4 Check configuration of navigation sensors

You can check the configuration of your navigation sensors.

Check speed settings ([SPD] page)

Open the menu and click the [SPD] tab in the [System Sensor Settings] page or [Local
Sensor Settings] page of the [Sensor] menu. The user can select navigation sensors
for use in navigation and view their current values.

PRIM

[SPD] page, system sensor

PRIM

[SPD] page, local sensor

Checkbox status shows whether the sensor is used for integrated navigation or not. If
there is no value shown for a sensor, it indicates that the sensor is not valid. Note that
the content of these pages depends on the sensors that are in use on the ship.

Select the available dual logs.

Note that manual speed should only be used in an emergency, when no other speed
reference is available. Remember that position sensors are also available as speed
sources. If no dual log is available, check [Reference SPD] (local sensor page) to use
a reference target from the radar as the source for speed and course.

6-36
 6. CHART OVERVIEW

Check position sensors ([POSN] page)

Open the menu and click the [POSN] tab in the [System Sensor Settings] page or [Lo-
cal Sensor Settings] page of the [Sensor] menu. The [PRIM] and [Second] labels indi-
cate the type of the position sensor. (In the figure below the [PRIM] label shows
GPS1.) [PRIM] and [Second] indicate sensor status and priority.

PRIM
LAT:
LON:

LAT:
LON:

“Second” appears even when only one

position-fixing equipment is connected.

Only one sensor can be primary while the others can be secondary or off position. Af-
ter a sensor is turned off, its status is changed to [Second] (Secondary) state. When
a position sensor state is changed to [PRIM] (Primary) and another sensor was [PRIM]
(Primary), the sensor formerly [PRIM] (Primary) becomes [Second] (Secondary).

Select the "Primary" navigation sensor as the sensor that is considered to be most ac-
curate and reliable. Set all other navigation sensors as "Secondary".

6.16.5 How to reset odometer and trip meter

To reset the odometer and/or trip meter do as follows:

1. Open the menu and select the [Voyage] menu from the [NAV Log] menu in the
[Log] menu.

2. Click one of the following buttons.

[Reset All]: Reset both the odometer and the trip meter for both "Water" and "Bot-
tom".
[Reset Trip]: Reset the trip distance for both "Water" and "Bottom".
3. Click the [Close] button to finish.

6-37
6. CHART OVERVIEW

This page is intentionally left blank.

6-38
7. HOW TO MANAGE CHARTS
This chapter mainly shows you how to install the public keys, licenses and charts,
manually update chart objects, and synchronize charts. All chart-related operations
begin from the Chart maintenance mode, which you access by clicking the [CHARTS]
button on the Status bar.

Note 1: Charts, routes and user charts are shared with other FMD-3xx0, FCR-2xx9 and
FAR-3xx0 units, via LAN. Data is shared automatically; no operation is required.
Note 2: Chart processing (installation, deletion, etc.) may take several minutes depend-
ing on the number of charts to be processed.
Note 3: If, when attempting to install charts, nothing appears on the display at the start
of the procedure, reset the power and try again.
Note 4: If installation of AVCS charts stops, the message "Chart installation has
stopped. Run the installation again. Installation will continue from the chart not yet in-
stalled." appears. This does not indicate completion of the installation. Restart the in-
stallation. The installation resumes from the chart not yet installed.
This message may also appear when installing C-MAP ENC SERVICE, C-MAP PRO-
FESSIONAL+ C-MAP ENC+ SERVICE charts if the user does not confirm completion
of the installation within approx. one hour. (Installation window remains on the screen.)
However, this is not an indication of failed installation.
Note 5: When installing the AVCS LargeMedia, the message "No connection to dongle"
may appear in the [Result] window at the completion of the installation. If this occurs,
reinstall the media.

7.1 How to Install Public Keys for ENC Charts

Public keys authenticate the source and integrity of the ENC chart materials used in
this chart system. Before you install a new ENC chart, confirm that the corresponding
public key is installed.
Generally, there are two types of public keys: IHO (file name: IHO.PUB), Primar (file
name: PRIMAR.pub)

1. Set the medium (DVD, USB flash memory, etc.) that contains the public key. (The
IHO public key is preinstalled.)
2. Get into the Chart maintenance mode then click the [Public Key] button on the
InstantAccess bar™.

3. Click the [Load New Key] button to show the [Open file] dialog box.
4. Find the .pub file then click the [Open] button. The [Select Public Key] dialog box
reappears.

7-1
7. HOW TO MANAGE CHARTS

5. Click the [Display Content] button on the [Select Public Key] dialog box to show
the display contents.

6. To accept the contents, click the [Activate] button on the [Select Public Key] dialog
box.

7.2 How to Install ENC Licenses, Charts

Install your ENC licenses and charts, in that order.

7.2.1 How to install an ENC license

Automatic installation
1. Insert the medium (DVD, USB flash memory, etc.) that contains the ENC license.
2. Get into the Chart maintenance mode then click the [License] button on the
InstantAccess bar™ to show the [Licenses] dialog box.
3. Click the [Import Licenses] button.

4. Select the medium, or folder, that contains the license then click the [Open] but-
ton.

7-2
 7. HOW TO MANAGE CHARTS

5. Find the license (permit.txt) then click the [OK] button to install the license.
The [Licenses] dialog box then shows cell name, date of expiration, data server
name and subscription type of the license.

6. Click the [Close] button to finish.

Manual installation
If you do not have the medium which has your ENC license, you can enter the license
number manually.

1. Click the [CHARTS] button on the Status bar to go the Chart maintenance mode,
then click the [License] button on the InstantAccess bar™.
2. Click the [Input Manually] button to show the [Input License Manually] box.

3. Select the type [ENC/ARCS] at the bottom of the screen.

4. Enter the license number(s) then click the [OK] button.

7.2.2 How to install ENC charts

When you install charts from a medium, the system first loads a catalog, which stores
certain information into your SSD such as cell IDs, their position, and edition number,
from the install medium. Then, the system asks which charts you want to install from
the chosen medium. After building the catalog, you can view the contents of it by click-
ing the [Cell Status] button on the InstantAccess bar™.

Note 1: Do not click the [Cancel] button during the installation of a chart. If you get an
error message, try to install the charts again.
Note 2: When any chart is installed, all checked routes are reverted to unchecked sta-
tus. Use the [Check Route] button on the [Alert Parameters] page to re-check routes
before starting any voyage.
1. Set the medium that contains the ENC charts.
2. Get into the Chart maintenance mode then click the [AUTO Load] button on the
InstantAccess bar™. The confirmation message "Attention: This process takes
time to complete, and the operation speed of the system will decline. Do you wish

7-3
7. HOW TO MANAGE CHARTS

to continue?" appears. Click the [OK] button to continue. A message informs you
that the system is searching the medium (in the figure below the medium is a
DVD) for chart data.

The results of the search are displayed, an example of which is shown below. To
cancel the installation, click the [Cancel] button.

3. Click the [OK] button to install the charts. The [Install chart data] window appears
and shows the percentage of completion, with digital and analog indications.

To show details during the installation, click the [Show detail] button.

To close the [Message] window, click the [Hide detail] button.

7-4
 7. HOW TO MANAGE CHARTS

4. When the installation is completed, information about the installation appears in

the [Result] window. Click the [Confirm] button to finish.

5. If applicable, set the next sequential medium then repeat steps 2-4 to install the
next database.
6. After all necessary charts are installed, reset the power.
Note 1: When many charts are installed, the chart system checks for error in the in-
stalled chart data at the next power up. This is not an indication of malfunction.
Note 2: Previous versions of charts cannot be displayed if installed after installing the
latest versions.

7.3 How to Delete ENC Licenses

1. Get into the Chart maintenance mode.
2. Click the [License] button on the InstantAccess bar™.
3. Click the [ENC] tab as appropriate to show a list of licenses.

4. Put a checkmark next to the license(s) to delete.

5. Click the [Delete Licenses] button to delete the license(s) selected.
6. Reset the power.

7-5
7. HOW TO MANAGE CHARTS

7.4 How to Update ENC Chart Manufacturer Info

An ENC chart has official or unofficial attributes. You can determine if an ENC chart is
official or unofficial by viewing the chart manufacturer’s information. Manufacturer’s in-
formation has the following functions.

• [Filter] window (see section 7.13section 7.13) can Official:

show or hide official or unofficial charts. Official Unofficial

• Chart judgment with chart alert (see

subsection 11.1.2subsection 11.1.2). (Unofficial charts are subject to chart alert.)
• Unofficial charts are denoted on the [Check Results] of the [Route Plan] dialog box
(see subsection 12.4.5subsection 12.4.5). (Unofficial charts are subject to chart
alert.)
The ENC manufacturer information can be updated as follows.

Note 1: ENC chart manufacturer information is built in the FMD beforehand, and it is
not normally necessary to update the information.
Note 2: The ENC chart manufacturer information file has its own format. For details,
contact a FURUNO dealer.
1. In the Chart maintenance mode, click the [License] button to show the [Licenses]
dialog box.
2. Click the [ENC] tab.
3. Click the [Producer Code] button.

4. Select the ENC chart manufacturer information file then click the [Open] button.
5. Reset the power.

7-6
 7. HOW TO MANAGE CHARTS

7.5 How to Install C-MAP Charts

Synchronize chart data before you install C-MAP charts, grouping the chart radar units
to synchronize, otherwise the chart data cannot be shared. See the procedure in
subsection 7.20.1subsection 7.20.1 for how to synchronize chart data. If C-MAP
charts are not synchronized after installation, delete all C-MAP charts, and do the
above procedure again.

7.5.1 How to register the eToken

The eToken is a hardware mechanism (installed inside the processor unit) used for
password authentication. Registration of the eToken is required only once, before you
install the C-MAP database.

1. Get into the Chart maintenance mode then click the [License] button on the
InstantAccess bar™ to show the [License] dialog box.
2. Click the [C-MAP] tab to the show the [Licenses] dialog box for C-MAP.

3. Click the [C-MAP Setup] button.

4. The confirmation message "Attention: C-MAP eToken will be initialized. Do you
wish to continue?" appears. Click the [OK] button to continue and register the eTo-
ken.
Note 1: "CMAP: No connection to eToken" disappears from the Permanent warning
box after completion of the registration.
Note 2: You can show your C-MAP system ID by clicking the [C-MAP SystemID] but-
ton on the [Licenses] dialog box for C-MAP.

C-MAP system ID
appears here.

7.5.2 How to install the C-MAP database

When you install the C-MAP database from a medium, all data is saved to the SSD.

Note 1: To synchronize chart data between multiple units (FMD-3x00, FAR-3xx0 or

FCR-2xx9), group the units (see section 7.20.1section 7.20.1) you wish to synchro-
nize before you install the charts. If the group setting is done after chart installation,
the units will not synchronize. If, after setting the group and installing the charts, the
charts are not synchronized, delete, then reinstall the chart.
Note 2: The installation of a chart cannot be cancelled while it is in progress. If you get
an error message, try to install the charts again.

7-7
7. HOW TO MANAGE CHARTS

Note 3: The C-MAP database in the units selected for synchronization are synchro-
nized at the successful completion of the database installation.
1. Insert the medium that contains the C-MAP database.
2. Get into the Chart maintenance mode then click the [AUTO Load] button on the
InstantAccess bar™.
3. The [Install chart data] window appears and shows the percentage of completion,
with digital and analog indications.

To show details during the installation, click the [Show detail] button.

To close the [Message] window, click the [Hide detail] button.

4. When the installation is completed, information about the chart database installed
appears in the [Result] window. Click the [Confirm] button to finish.
Result

5. If applicable, set the next sequential medium and repeat steps 2-3 to install the
next databases.
6. After all databases are installed, reset the power.
Note 1: If, after installation, C-MAP charts do not appear, delete all corresponding
charts and then reinstall them.
Note 2: Synchronization is not done for charts which could not be installed success-
fully. Reinstall failed charts.

7-8
 7. HOW TO MANAGE CHARTS

7.5.3 How to install C-MAP licenses

A C-MAP license should be installed using the automatic installation method shown
below. If the automatic installation fails, try the manual installation method.

Automatic installation
1. Set the medium (DVD, USB flash memory, etc.) that contains the C-MAP license.
2. Get into the Chart maintenance mode then click the [License] button on the
InstantAccess bar™.
3. Click the [Import Licenses] button.
4. Select the medium that contains the license then click the [Open] button.
5. Click the [OK] button to install the license.
6. Click the [Close] button to finish.
7. Reset the power.

Manual installation
1. Click the [CHARTS] button on the Status bar to go the Chart maintenance mode,
then click the [License] button on the InstantAccess bar™.
2. Click the [Input Manually] button to show the [Input License Manually] box.

3. Select the type [C-MAP] at the bottom of the window.

4. Enter the [Database name] and [Collection name] information as shown in the ta-
ble below. Enter the names exactly as shown to ensure correct installation.
Name to enter
Chart type
Database name Collection name
Enter “Zone *” (without quotations, *=
PROFESSIONAL+ Professional+ contracted zone number)
Ex. Zone 1
ENC SERVICE ENC Enter “Zone * ENC” (without quotations,
*= contracted zone number)
ENC+ SERVICE ENC+ Ex. Zone 1 ENC
ADMIRALTY ENC
CAES Enter the contracted collection name.
SERVICE

5. Enter the license (max. 16 characters) in the bottommost window.

6. Click the [OK] button to install the license.
7. Reset the power.

7-9
7. HOW TO MANAGE CHARTS

7.5.4 How to generate and order an update file

To update the C-MAP chart database, you have to generate an update file, and e-mail
the file directly to C-MAP. The update file defines coverage of charts you can display
on your chart system.

1. Connect a USB flash memory to the USB port on the Control Unit.
2. Get into the Chart maintenance mode then click the [License] button on the
InstantAccess bar™.
3. Click the [C-MAP] tab to show the [Licenses] dialog box for C-MAP.
4. From the [E-mail Size] drop-down list, select the size of the update file. The choic-
es are [100KB], [200KB], [300KB], [400KB], [500KB], [750KB], [1MB], [2MB],
[3MB], [4MB], [10MB], [Unlimited]. This is the size of the data file in an e-mail. The
file may be sent in pieces depending of the size selected.
5. Click the [Order Update File] button. A file name (C-MAP system ID and chart
type) is automatically created, with the extension .ord.

6. Select the USB flash memory.

7. Click the [Save] button to save the order file to the USB flash memory.
8. Send the order file to update@c-map.com.
Within a few minutes you will receive a file that includes the terms for using the chart
service and the chart updates. Save the file to a USB flash memory and apply it as
shown in the next section.

7.5.5 How to apply the update file

1. Insert the USB flash memory that contains the update file (.ans extension) into the
USB port on the Control Unit.
2. Get into the Chart maintenance mode then click the [License] button on the
InstantAccess bar™.
3. Click the [C-MAP] tab to show the [Licenses] dialog box for C-MAP.
4. Click the [Update from File] button.
5. Find the update file on the USB flash memory then click the [Open] button.

7-10
 7. HOW TO MANAGE CHARTS

7.5.6 How to check license status

You can check the status of your chart licenses with the following procedure. The chart
database and respective licenses must be installed before you check the status.

1. Get into the Chart maintenance mode then click the [License] button on the
InstantAccess bar™.
2. Click the [C-MAP] tab to show the C-MAP license dialog.
3. Click the [Check Signature] button at the right-side of the dialog.
The results appear in the window as "Ok" or "Not Ok". Where the results appears
as "Not Ok", consult your local dealer.
4. Click the [OK] button to close the results window.

7.6 How to Delete a C-MAP Database

If you are going to delete all C-MAP databases, turn off chart synchronization (see
section 7.20section 7.20) and delete the databases from each unit.

1. Get into the Chart maintenance mode then click the [License] button on the
InstantAccess bar™.
2. Click the [C-MAP] tab to show the [Licenses] dialog box for C-MAP.
3. Select the database to delete with the [Database] pull-down list.
4. Click the [Delete Database] button.
5. Reset the power.

7.7 How to Export a List of Charts

Get into the Chart maintenance mode, click the [Manage Charts] button on the
InstantAccess bar™ to show the [Manage Charts] dialog box. Check the charts to add
to the list. Click the [Export List] button to export the checked charts to a USB flash
memory, in .txt format.

7.8 How to Export a List of Specific Licenses

You can export a list of your ENC or C-MAP licenses to a USB flash memory, in .txt
format.

1. Set a USB flash memory in the USB port on the Control Unit.
2. Get into the Chart maintenance mode then click the [License] button.
3. Click the [ENC] or [C-MAP] tab.
4. Click the [Export List] button.
5. Change the file name at [File Name] if desired.
6. Select the USB flash memory then click the [Save] button.
7. Click the [OK] button to finish.

7-11
7. HOW TO MANAGE CHARTS

7.9 How to Show the ENC Permit

1. Get into the Chart maintenance mode then click the [License] button.
2. Click the [ENC] tab.
3. Click the [ENC User Permit] button to show the ENC permit.

4. Click the [OK] button to finish.

7.10 How to Backup, Restore Licenses

You can make backup copies of your ENC, ARCS and AVCS (AIO) licenses and save
them to a USB flash memory. If re-installation of the licenses becomes necessary, you
can reinstall them from the USB flash memory. The backup and restore functions are
not available with C-MAP charts.

To backup licenses:
1. Insert a USB flash memory into the USB port on the Control Unit.
2. Get into the Chart maintenance mode then click the [License] button on the
InstantAccess bar™ to show the [Licenses] dialog box.
3. Click the [Backup Licenses] button.
4. Select the USB flash memory then select the folder in which to save the licenses,
then click the [OK] button.
The license files (ENCpermit.dat, ARCSpermit.dat) are saved in the selected fold-
er.
5. Click the [OK] button.

To restore licenses:
1. Insert the USB flash memory that has the licenses into the USB port on the Control
Unit.
2. Get into the Chart maintenance mode then click the [License] button on the
InstantAccess bar™ to show the [Licenses] dialog box.
3. Click the [Restore Licenses] button.
4. Select the USB flash memory then select the folder in which licenses are saved,
then click the [OK] button.
5. Click the [OK] button.

7-12
 7. HOW TO MANAGE CHARTS

7.11 How to View Permit Expiration Date

Permits are used to control the right to use chart data in this chart system. A permit is
connected to the edition of a chart. Permits are issued in two different types:

• Subscription permit: This type of permit includes updates for subsequent 3, 6, 9

or 12 months.
• One-Off permit: This type of permit includes only updates up to the issue date of
the permit.
The expiry date of a permit controls the installation of Base charts and their updates
to the chart. The system will warn you when you are installing charts or updates that
are issued less than 30 days before the expiration date of a permit. If a permit has ex-
pired, it is impossible to install a chart or its update that was issued after the expiration
date of the permit. The user has a right to view a chart forever, except C-MAP charts
that have viewing periods which end two months after the expiry date of the license.
If the charts are not updated regularly it will not complete the requirements for having
up-to-date charts. To view the permit status of a chart, click the [License] button on the
InstantAccess bar™ and then click the applicable "chart" tab ([ENC], or [C-MAP]).

The example below shows the status of ENC charts. The expiration date of each cell
appears in the [Expires] window.

Subscription warnings for RENC

If you have at least one subscription-type permit, the system will automatically warn
you about the expiration date of your subscription license, in the Permanent warning
box.

Note: If you change service provider for some reason, it is recommended that you
remove all the charts from this chart system before installing new charts of new ser-
vice provider.

7-13
7. HOW TO MANAGE CHARTS

7.12 How to Display Install/Update History

You can see a history of chart installations and updates. On the InstantAccess bar™,
click the [Log] and [Update Log] buttons followed by the [ENC] or [C-MAP] button. The
example below shows the install/update history for ENC charts.

You can filter the log with [Period Covered (UTC)]. Enter the period to display then
click the [Set Period] button. Click the [Clear Period] button to display all entries. The
[Refresh] button updates the list. [Print Text] prints hard copy of the history. [Export
File] exports the log file.The file name “UpdateLog_***YYYYMMDDhhmmss.txt” is au-
tomatically assigned. (***=ENC, CMAP)

The [Find] button searches required text string as follows:

1. Click the [Find] button to show the [Find text] box.

Input box
Find
Enter text in box and
[Find] button appears.
2. Click the input box then enter the text to search.
3. Select the search direction with the [up] or [down] radio button.
4. Click the [Find] button. The first matching text is highlighted in yellow at the top of
the screen.
5. To continue the search click the [Find] button. To cancel the search, click the
[Cancel] button.

7-14
 7. HOW TO MANAGE CHARTS

7.13 Catalog of Chart Cells

A catalog is used to view graphical coverage of the charts stored in your SSD. Avail-
able charts are displayed showing their border limits. Note that sometimes the real
coverage of the charts may be considerably less than the declared limits of it.

To display the catalog, get into the Chart maintenance mode then click the [Manage
Charts] button on the InstantAccess bar™. The [Filter] window lets you select what to
display. Check or uncheck items as appropriate.

Filter
window

13

10 11

1) Chart Type
ENC: Display ENC charts.
ARCS: Display ARCS charts.
C-MAP: Display C-MAP charts.
2) Availability
Display available or unavailable charts.
3) License
Valid: Cell with valid license.
Missing/Expired: Cell with missing or expired license.
Valid + Missing/Expired: Display cell regardless of license.
Uncheck both: Hide all cells.
4) C-MAP Collections
A collection is a pre-defined dataset, the contents of which can be defined by zone,
individual chart or any of those combinations. Applicable to C-MAP charts also.

7-15
7. HOW TO MANAGE CHARTS

5) Official
Display official or unofficial charts.
6) Up-to-date
Display charts which are or are not up to date.
7) Purpose
Display chart according to its purpose - Overview, General, Coastal, NtoM,
Approach, Harbour, Berthing.
8) Group
See the next section for how to group charts.
9) Route
The cells within a route and route waypoints (start and end points settable) are
shown. When checked, the [Action] column of the [Manage Charts] dialog box
shows the necessary action to be taken for each chart within the specified route in
order to navigate the route.
Action Description
[install] License is installed, however the chart has not been installed. Install the
chart.
[no action] The latest chart is installed, and the license expiration date is 30 or more
days away.
[order] License not purchased. Order the license.
[reinstall] The chart is corrupted. Reinstall the chart.
[remove] Chart status is “withdrawn”. It is not necessary to purchase the license.
[renew] The latest chart is installed, however the license expires within 30 days.
Purchase the license.
[update] Chart is not up-to-date. Install the latest chart.

Further, the range of the cell (square region) and the range in which the cell has
actual data do not necessarily match. If the cell has not been purchased, the cell
range is filtered, and if it has been purchased, the actual data range is filtered.
: Filter applied
Cell range
WPT1 WPT1

WPT2 WPT2 Range of

WPT3 WPT3
actual data
(not shown
on display)

Cells have not been purchased Cells have been purchased

Two cells are displayed on the No cells are displayed on the
screen because the route is filtered. screen because there is no filter
on the route.
10) [Set Default] button
Restores all factory defaults for items in the window.
11) Apply button
Changes made to the filter window are applied to the chart. This button is only vis-
ible if changes are made to the filter window settings.
12) Chart boundary boxes
Define the area covered by a chart and are color-coded according license and per-
mit status.

7-16
 7. HOW TO MANAGE CHARTS

13) Line color legend

The line color legend provides information about license validity.
Color Message Color Message
Internal charts External charts
Green Chart is up-to-date Green Already installed and up-to-date
Dark Permit will expire within 30 days Yellow Can be installed/updated but a
Green warning
Yellow Permit missing/expired Orange Already installed but not up-to-date
Orange Chart is not up-to-date Magenta Can be installed/updated
Magenta Permit available, chart not installed Red No valid permit
Red Permit not available Gray Cannot be installed/updated
Blue Chart’s status is unknown
Gray Chart is withdrawn or corrupted

7.13.1 How to group chart cells

You can define groups of like-format chart cells. This means you can collect related
charts, for example, all cells that cover a route from Liverpool to New York or all cells
available from a National Hydrographic Office.

You can make a group and define charts from the [Edit Group] dialog box.

How to make a new group of chart cells

1. In the Chart maintenance mode, click the [Manage Charts] button on the
InstantAccess bar™.
2. Click the [Edit] button in the [Filter] window to show the [Edit Group] dialog box.

Group Name:

3. Click the [New] button.

4. In the [Outside Group] window, click the box to the left of the chart cell you want
to add to the group to show a checkmark. (A context-sensitive menu with [Select
All] and [Deselect All] functions is available by right-clicking the box to the left of
[Name], in either window.)
5. After you have selected the cells to add to the group, click the [<<] button to move
the names of the selected cells to the [Inside Group] window. If you want to re-
move a chart from the group, select it then click the [>>] button.
6. Click the [Save] button.
7. Enter a name for the group, using the keyboard on the Control Unit or software
keyboard, then click the [OK] button.
8. Click the [Close] button to finish.

7-17
7. HOW TO MANAGE CHARTS

How to edit a group of chart cells

You can edit a group of chart cells from a group as follows:

1. In the Chart maintenance mode, click the [Manage Charts] button on the
InstantAccess bar™ to show the [Filter] window.
2. Click the [Edit] button.
3. Select the name of the group with the pull-down list at the item [Group Name].
4. In the [Inside Group] window, click the box to the left of the chart cell you want to
remove from the group to show a checkmark. (A context-sensitive menu with [Se-
lect All] and [Deselect All] functions is available by right-clicking the box to the left
of [Name].)
5. After you have selected the charts to remove to the group, click the [>>] button to
remove the selected charts cells from the group.
6. Click the [Save] button.
7. Click the [Close] button to finish.

How to delete a group of chart cells

You can delete group of chart cells as follows:
1. In the Chart maintenance mode, click the [Manage Charts] button on the
InstantAccess bar™ to show the [Filter] window.
2. Click the [Edit] button.
3. Select the name of the group with the pull-down list at the item [Group Name].
4. Click the [Remove] button.
5. Click the [OK] button.
6. Click the [Close] button to finish.

How to select the group to view

1. In the Chart maintenance mode, click the [Manage Charts] button on the
InstantAccess bar™ to show the [Filter] window.
2. Select the group to view from the pull-down list at [Group].
3. Click the [Close] button to finish.

7-18
 7. HOW TO MANAGE CHARTS

7.13.2 How to view status of chart cells

The [Cell Status] dialog box shows the status of the chart cells stored in the system.
To show this dialog box, get into the Chart maintenance mode then click the [Cell Sta-
tus] button on the InstantAccess bar™.

• [Type]: Type of chart cell, ENC or C-MAP.

• [Chart Name]: Chart name
• [Data Server]: The name of the data server where the chart was downloaded from.
• [Edition/Issue Date]: Edition no. and issued date of the chart cell.
• [Update: Num/Date]: No. and date of the update of the chart cell.
• [Updated]: The update status for the selected cell. "up to date" is shown for cells that
are up-to-date, "not up to date" is shown for cells that are not up-to-date, "withdrawn"
is shown if a cell is canceled, "unknown" is shown if the cell is not delivered as part of
a data service and "broken" is shown if the cell is corrupted.
• [Status]:
• [up to date]: Cell is up-to-date.
• [not up to date]: Cell is not up-to-date.
• [not installed]: Cell is not installed.
• [withdrawn]: Cell has been withdrawn (cell will not be updated).
• [unknown]: Cell is not delivered as part of a data server service (ex. unencrypted
ENC).
• [broken]: Cell is corrupted.

7.14 How to Open Charts

In the Chart maintenance mode, click the [Manage Charts] button on the
InstantAccess bar™ to display the dialog box shown below. Select the chart to open
then click the [Open Chart] button.

7-19
7. HOW TO MANAGE CHARTS

7.15 How to Print Chart List, Cell Status List

7.15.1 How to print the chart list

1. In the Chart maintenance mode, click the [Manage Charts] button on the
InstantAccess bar™ to show the [Manage Charts] dialog box.
2. Check the charts to print.
3. On the [Filter] window, check the information to print.
4. Click the [Print List] button to print. (If you have selected more than 30 charts, the
message "The number of page is 1. Do you want to continue?." appears. Click the
[OK] button to continue, or the [Cancel] button to escape.)

Example

Description of chart list printout

Item Description
[Ship Name] Name of ship
[IMO Number] Ship’s IMO number
[Call Sign] Ship’s call sign
[MMSI Number] Ship’s MMSI number
[Printing Date] Date list printed
[Data Location] Location of charts; normally [Internal].
[Filter] Settings of the items in the [Filter] window.
[Status Summary] [yes]: charts with yes status/total number of charts
[no]: charts with no status/total number of charts

7-20
 7. HOW TO MANAGE CHARTS

7.15.2 How to show the cell status list

1. In the Chart maintenance mode, click the [Cell Status] button on the
InstantAccess bar™ to show the [Cell Status] dialog box.
2. On the [Filter] window, check the information to show.
3. Click the [Create Report] button to generate the report. A report for all cells shown
in the [Cell Status] dialog appears.
Note: If there are no cells shown in the [Cell Status] dialog box, the [Create Re-
port] button is not available.

Example
4. To print the report, click the [Print Text] button.

Description of cell status printout

Item Description
[Ship Name] Name of ship
[IMO Number] Ship’s IMO number
[Call Sign] Ship’s call sign
[MMSI Number] Ship’s MMSI number
[Printing Date] Date list printed
[Content] Settings of the items in the [Filter] window.
[Status Summary] [up to date]: charts with "up to date" status/total number of charts
[not up to date]: charts with "not up to date" status/total number of
charts
[withdrawn]: charts with "withdrawn" status/total number of charts
[unknown]: charts with "unknown" status/total number of charts
[other]: charts with "other" status/total number of charts

7-21
7. HOW TO MANAGE CHARTS

7.16 How to Delete Charts

If you are going to delete all charts, turn off chart synchronization (see
section 7.20section 7.20) and delete charts from each unit.

1. Click the [Manage Charts] button to show the [Manage Charts] dialog box.
2. Click the block to the left of the chart to remove, a checkmark appears. A context-
sensitive menu with [Select All] and [Deselect All] functions is available by right-
clicking the block to the left of [Type].
3. Click the [Delete Charts] button to delete the charts selected.
4. Reset the power.

7.17 How to Show Publishers Notes for ENC Charts

You should read the text file associated with each catalog, which you can view when
installing a chart from a medium. Click the [Note] button in the [Manage Charts] dialog
box. You can print a hard copy with the [Print Text] button.

7-22
 7. HOW TO MANAGE CHARTS

7.18 How to Find the Chart Type

The electronic chart system can display more than one ENC chart cell at a time. This
feature is called multi-cell display. If one ENC chart cell does not cover the whole dis-
play, the system opens more ENC chart cells for display, if appropriate cells for the
displayed area are available. The Own ship functions box shows information about
ENC chart cells displayed on the electronic chart display area. When automatic TM
reset is active, the information is displayed with reference to your ship's position. If TM
reset is OFF, the information is displayed with reference to current cursor position.

ENC info
appears here.

Chart type indication

No indication (Official ENC chart)
“Non-ENC data” (Unofficial ENC chart, indication in yellow)
“ENC data available” (Currently, RNC chart is in use, but
ENC material is available. Indication shown in yellow.)

7.19 How to Update ENC, C-MAP Charts Manually

Manual update may include deleting an already existing object, modifying a position
or other characteristics of an already existing object or inserting of a new object. In this
system, manual updates are stored in a common database.

Mariners cannot permanently remove any of the official objects from the chart display.
If a mariner needs to make obsolete any official objects which were entered manually,
he “deletes” them. Then, in practice, the deleted objects are still visible, but a diagonal
line on the object indicates it is a deleted object.
However, a mariner can remove objects that he has inserted himself.

Note that the manual updates have no automatic connection to any automatic update
received later for charts. If a manual update itself became obsolete, because the offi-
cial chart has been updated to include the update defined as a manual update, the
mariner must himself delete the obsolete manual update in question.

The system records complete usage of manual updates. All deletions, modifications
and insertions are recorded and time stamped. If the mariner wishes to see what kind
of manual updates he had in the past, for example, two weeks ago, he uses Update
History to specify the relevant date range. For information on how to set Display date
and Update Review dates, see section 9.2.4section 9.2.4.

Note 1: Do not manually update charts while charts are being synchronized. Wait until
synchronization is completed.
Note 2: When any chart is updated, all checked routes are reverted to unchecked sta-
tus. Use the [Check Route] button on the [Alert Parameters] page to re-check routes
before starting any voyage.

7-23
7. HOW TO MANAGE CHARTS

7.19.1 How to insert update symbols

A manual update symbol can be added as shown in the procedure below.

Note 1: If the system freezes when updating the drawing type [Area], reset the power.
Note 2: An update symbol that straddles the international date line cannot be edited.
In this case, insert the same symbol on each side of the line.
Note 3: Do not do manual updating during chart synchronizing. Do the updating after
the completion of synchronizing or do the updating where the chart is installed.
1. Go to the Voyage navigation mode.
2. Click the [Manual Update] button on the InstantAccess bar™ to open the [Manual
Update] dialog box.
3. Click the [Planning] tab.

4. Click the [Add] button.

Note: This window can also be shown from the con-
text-sensitive menu. Right-click the display area then
select [Manual Update] and [Add New].
5. Use the [Drawing Type] pull-down list to select draw-
ing type: [Point], [Line] or [Area].
6. Click desired object.
7. Put the cursor on the location where to insert the
symbol then left click. The [Manual Update] dialog
box shows:
- [Object]
- [Drawing Type]

8. You can add a comment related to a manual update object in the [Annotation] box.

7-24
 7. HOW TO MANAGE CHARTS

9. To add textual information to an attribute, select the attribute from the [Attributes]
window then add text in the [Edit Attribute’s Value] window.
The [Date end] factory default is set to three months from the date of insertion and
applies to all chart items. You can adjust the dates here.
10. Click the [Commit] button to add all selected objects to the chart.
Note 1: If there is no textual information entered in the [Annotations] window, a con-
firmation message appears when you click the [Confirm] button. Check that the infor-
mation is correct and click [Yes] or [No] as appropriate.
Note 2: A manual update object is displayed until the display until date entered for it
has passed. If the object remains on the screen after the display until date, do some
operation on the screen to refresh the screen to erase the object.

7.19.2 How to copy objects from an official chart and insert them
You can copy objects from an official chart and insert them as a manual update with
the following procedure:

1. Right-click the object you wish to copy to show the context-sensitive menu, the
click [Manual Update] and [Copy From Chart]. The Copy Chart dialog box ap-
pears.

2. Click the object to copy, then click [Copy]. The object is copied to the [Manual Up-
date] dialog box.
3. Referring to step 8 and step 9 in section 7.19.1section 7.19.1, edit the object as
required.
4. Click the [Commit] button to add the object to the chart.
Note: If there is no textual information entered in the [Annotations] window, a con-
firmation message appears when you click the [Confirm] button. Check that the
information is correct and click [Yes] or [No] as appropriate.

7.19.3 How to ignore chart objects

Manually entered update symbols cannot be deleted until the display until date arrives
or is changed. However, you can mark the symbol to indicate that it can be ignored.

1. Put the cursor on the symbol then right-click to show the context-sensitive menu.
2. Select [Manual Update] and [Delete]. Deleted symbol is
The symbol is marked with a diagonal line. marked with a
diagonal line

7-25
7. HOW TO MANAGE CHARTS

7.19.4 How to delete (hide) a chart object

You can hide a manually inserted chart object by doing the following:

1. Referring to step 1 and step 2 of section 7.19.1section 7.19.1, show the [Manual
Update] dialog box.
2. Click the [List] tab.
3. Click the object to hide, then click the [Remove] button. The selected item is hid-
den from the chart display.

7.19.5 How to modify existing update symbols

The position, display until date and description of an update symbol can be modified.
A symbol that is marked as “deleted” cannot be modified.

1. Follow steps 1-2 in subsection 7.19.1subsection 7.19.1 to display the [Manual Up-
date] dialog box.
2. Click the [List] tab.

3. Select the object to modify then click the [Modify] button. The [Planning] dialog
box appears.
4. Modify the object referring to steps 8-9 in subsection 7.19.1subsection 7.19.1.
Note: The annotation for all modified objects is reset to blank when the Modify but-
ton is clicked. Check and re-input the annotations as necessary.
5. Click the [Commit] button. A confirmation dialog appears. Click [Yes] or [No] as
appropriate.

7.19.6 How to review a chart object

You can review a chart object in order to see the object before any changes were
made. To review an object, do the following:

1. Follow steps 1-2 in subsection 7.19.1subsection 7.19.1 to display the [Manual Up-
date] dialog box.
2. Click the [List] tab.
3. Select the object to review then click the [Review] button.
Manually updated objects appear with a thick line,
Objects under review
as shown in the figure to the right.
appear with a thick
Objects under review appear in the [Manual Update] line attached.
dialog box with the status "Review x" (x indicates the
state at which you are viewing the reviewed object). The object appears in a pre-

7-26
 7. HOW TO MANAGE CHARTS

modified state, and with each press of the [Review] button, one modification is “re-
verted”.

7.19.7 How to remove all manual update data

You can remove all manual update data by doing the following:

1. Do steps 1-2 in subsection 7.19.1subsection 7.19.1 to display the [Manual Up-

date] dialog box.
2. Click the [List] tab.
3. Click the [Clear All] button.

7.20 How to Synchronize Chart Data

This section shows you how to synchronize chart data between FMD-3xx0, FCR-2xx9
and FAR-3xx0 units, so that all units share the same chart data. Synchronization can
be done automatically or manually (see subsection 7.20.2subsection 7.20.2), howev-
er all units selected for synchronization must be powered to complete the synchroni-
zation. Synchronization includes the following actions:

• Synchronize public keys

• Synchronize chart permits and licenses
• Synchronize chart data
• Synchronize manual updates
Note 1: Before synchronizing chart data, confirm that all units selected for synchroni-
zation are powered. (Do not turn off a unit during synchronizing.) If a unit is turned off
during the synchronizing, do the following on the unit which contains the medium:
• Open the [Sync Status] dialog box then click the [Disable Sync] button to disable
synchronization. Power all units registered for synchronization, then click the [Urge
Sync] button on the [Sync Status] dialog box on the unit containing the media to
forcibly synchronize.
• Make a group of all the units currently powered, referring to
subsection 7.20.1subsection 7.20.1, and register the group with [Grouped with This
Unit]. Reset the power on all units selected for synchronization.

Note 2: C-MAP charts are not automatically synchronized. C-MAP charts are only
synchronized immediately after installing or updating the C-MAP database. If the sys-
tem has several FCRs or FMDs, make a group of associated units before you install
C-MAP charts.

7-27
7. HOW TO MANAGE CHARTS

7.20.1 How to select the units to synchronize

Do as follows to select the units to synchronize.

1. Get into the Chart maintenance mode. On the InstantAccess bar™, click [System]
followed by [Sync Config] to show the [Sync Config] dialog box.

CRA002
CRA003
CRA004

[Grouped with This Unit]: This window shows the units currently selected for syn-
chronization.
[Not Synchronize with This Unit]: This windows shows the units not selected for
synchronization.
2. To select a unit for synchronization: Put a checkmark next to the unit’s name
in the [Not Synchronize with This Unit] window then click the [<<] button. That
unit’s name is moved to the [Grouped with This Unit] window.
To deselect a unit from synchronization: Put a checkmark next to the unit’s
name in the [Grouped with This Unit] window then click the [>>] button. That unit’s
name is moved to the [Not Synchronize with This Unit] window.
To deselect all units, click the [Reset All] button.
3. Click the [Save] button to finish.
4. Restart the power on applicable units to apply synchronization configuration
changes.

7.20.2 How to check synchronization status

You can check chart synchronization status on the [Sync Status] dialog box. Chart
synchronization operations also are available from this dialog box. Normally, chart
synchronization is done automatically, according to the sync settings on the [Sync
Config] dialog box. Use the [Sync Status] dialog box to manually synchronize chart
data when there is network failure, for example.

Get into the Chart maintenance mode. On the InstantAccess bar™, click [System] fol-
lowed by [Sync Status] to show the [Sync Status] dialog box.

7-28
 7. HOW TO MANAGE CHARTS

[Current Status]: Displays current synchronization status. The table below shows all
the synchronization status messages.

Sync status Meaning

[disabled] Synchronization is disabled.
[must receive] This chart radar will receive chart data from another FMD-3xx0,
FCR-2xx9 or FAR-3xx0 series.
[must send] This chart radar will send chart data to another FMD-3xx0, FCR-
2xx9 or FAR-3xx0 series.
[none] No synchronization task ready.

Note: Do not update charts manually when the sync status is “must receive”. Data
may be corrupted. Wait until syncing is completed before updating charts manually.
[Update] button: Click this button to update [Current Status].

[Enable Sync] button: Enables synchronization. The confirmation message "Attention:

Do you want to enable sync?" appears. Click the [OK] button to enable synchroniza-
tion. Synchronization is always enabled when chart radar starts. A progress bar indi-
cates progress in synchronization. The bar is erased within five minutes after
completion of synchronization.

[Disable Sync] button: Disables synchronization function temporarily. Use this feature
to enable chart administration in case of network failure, for example. The confirmation
message "Attention: Do you want to disable sync?" appears. Click the [OK] button to
temporarily disable synchronization.

Note 1: In normal operation do not disable synchronization. If you accidentally disable

synchronization, try to synchronize by clicking the [Enable Sync] button. If that does
not work, reset the power of all units selected for synchronization then click the [Urge
Sync] button to synchronize.
Note 2: With synchronization disabled, the message "Synchronization disabled" may
appear twice when installing a license. This does not affect installation of a license.
[Urge Sync] button: Does immediate synchronization. The confirmation message "At-
tention: Chart data in other units will be overwritten by this unit. Do you wish to contin-
ue?" appears. Click the [OK] button to synchronize. If synchronization is not
successful, restart applicable units and try again.

[Reset Status] button: Reset synchronization status to recover from synchronization

status conflict. The confirmation message "Attention: Do you want to reset sync sta-
tus? This unit may be synchronized from the other unit." appears. Click the [OK] button
to reset.

7.20.3 Manual updates and synchronization

If you are synchronizing multiple units (FMD-3x00, FCR-2xx9 or FAR-3xx0) while
manual updating is being done on one of the units, the message "File not found" may
appear, meaning the manual update data was deleted. If this occurs, follow the pro-
cedure below to synchronize the FAR-3xx0 units. The procedure uses CRA001 and
CRA002 as an example.

1. At the CRA001, get into the Chart maintenance mode, then click [System] and
[Sync Config] on the InstantAccess bar™.
2. Add CRA002 to [Grouped with This Unit] then click the [Save] button.

7-29
7. HOW TO MANAGE CHARTS

3. Reset the power on the CRA001 and CRA002.

4. At the CRA001, get into the Chart maintenance mode, then click the [System] and
[Sync Status] buttons on InstantAccess bar™ to show the [Sync Status] dialog
box.
5. Click the [Urge Sync] button to synchronize charts between CRA001 and
CRA002.
6. To confirm synchronization, do as follows:
1) At the CRA001, get into the Voyage navigation mode, then click the [Manual
Update] button on the InstantAccess bar™ to open the [Manual Update] dialog
box.
2) Click the [Planning] tab followed by the [Add] button.
3) Insert an object at the CRA001.
4) At the CRA002, move the cursor or change the chart scale. Confirm that the
chart is updated.

7.21 How to Reconvert All SENC Charts

If you unintentionally installed outdated SENC charts, you can reconvert those charts
to the latest SENC charts. Click the [System] and [Reconvert] buttons on the
InstantAccess bar™ to reconvert all your SENC charts.

Note: All manual updates are removed in the reconversion.

7.22 How to Manage Gate-1 Charts

Gate-1 provides the ECDIS with the up-to-date UKHO chart data and permit file. To
use Gate-1, the [Chart Service] setting must be set to [FURUNO], in the installation.

7.22.1 How to select the chart type(s) to install

1. Click the [CHARTS] button on the Status bar.
2. Click the [System] button on the InstantAccess bar™, then click [Gate-1 Config.]
to show the [Gate-1 Config] window.

Future use

3. Check the chart type(s) that you want to install, then click the [Save] button.
4. You are asked if you are sure to save Gate-1 settings. Click the [OK] button to
save settings. The message "Gate-1 services are saved. New services are ap-
plied after reboots." appears.
5. Click the [OK ]button several times, then restart the unit.

7-30
 7. HOW TO MANAGE CHARTS

7.22.2 How to install charts and licenses

To install the chart selected at section 7.22.1section 7.22.1 and its license, click the
[CHARTS] button on the Status bar, then click the [Gate-1] button on the on the In-
stantAccess bar™. The message "This process takes time to complete, and the oper-
ation speed of this system will decline. Do you wish to continue?" appears. Click the
[OK] button to continue and install your charts.

7.22.3 How to order licenses

Follow the procedure below to order licenses from Gate-1.

1. Click the [Manage Charts] button to show the [Manage Charts] dialog box.

2. At the [License Ordering] window, select the license duration from the pull-down
list.
3. Click an appropriate block in the far-left hand column to select the chart to order.
Repeat to select other charts.
4. After selecting the chart(s) to order, click the [Create Order] button. A window
shows the charts ordered together with total cost.

5. Confirm the licenses and prices, then click the [Order] button.
After completing the purchase operation, the chart license purchase procedure is
done via Gate-1. It takes several hours for a new license to arrive at Gate-1.

Note 1: Once a purchase is made you cannot cancel the purchase. Take care when
making your order.
Note 2: Only UKHO AVCS and AIO licenses can be purchased.

7-31
7. HOW TO MANAGE CHARTS

Note 3: A network communication usage fee is assessed when purchasing a license.

Note 4: Unselected cells may appear in the order window because of the AVCS sales
format.
Note 5: When navigating a route with the chart filter on, the filter is applied to the re-
gion of the cell where a cell has not been purchased. A region does not always have
actual data in all ranges.

7.23 How to Delete Chart Data

Converted data, license, and product list data can be deleted collectively as follows:

To clear all ENC data: Click the [CHARTS] button on the Status bar. On the Instant-
Access bar™, click the [System], [Clear Charts] and [ENC] buttons.

Sync Sync Recon Clear

System
Config Status -vert Charts

No use

Note: For how to delete C-MAP data, see section 7.6section 7.6.

7-32
8. HOW TO CONTROL CHART OB-
JECTS
This chapter provides the information necessary for controlling chart features.

8.1 How to Browse Your Charts

You can view your charts using different positions and different scales. The basic tools
for browsing charts are the RANGE key, chart offcenter, and scroll.

RANGE - and RANGE + change the chart scale. (The scrollwheel also can change
the chart scale. Spin to change.) If true motion reset is active, ZOOM IN and ZOOM
OUT keep the relative position of your ship with respect to the display. If true motion
reset is off, ZOOM IN and ZOOM OUT keep the relative position pointed by the cursor
with respect to the display. The system automatically selects next larger or smaller
scale. If a chart with larger compilation scale is available at your current viewing posi-
tion, the message "Larger scale ENC available" appears.

The own ship position can be easily relocated to the screen center in the Navigation
voyage and Navigation planning modes. Further, in the Navigation voyage mode, the
own ship position can be put at the cursor position.

To move the own ship mark to the screen center, put the cursor in the chart area
and right-click [Ship on center]. To move the own ship mark to a location, right-click
the position on the chart where to put the own ship mark then right-click [Ship off cen-
ter]. ([Ship off center] is not available in the Voyage planning mode.)

To scroll your chart, simply drag and drop.

8.2 How to Control Visibility of Chart Objects

The [Chart Display] menu has several pages of chart features that you may show or
hide as appropriate. To display this menu, click the [DISP], [SET] and [Chart DISP]
buttons on the InstantAccess bar™.

8.2.1 How to set value for shallow contour, safety depth, safety con-
tour and deep contour
You can set values for shallow contour, safety depth, safety contour and deep contour,
on the [Chart Alert] dialog box (sequence: [DISP], [SET], [Chart Alert]). Colors used
for depth presentation on the electronic chart are controlled by setting values for shal-
low contour, safety depth, safety contour and deep contour. Soundings on the elec-
tronic chart, which are equal to or less than the value of safety depth, are highlighted.
See the illustrations on the next page for multi-color presentation and two-color pre-
sentation. Selection of multi- and two-color presentations can be done with [Four
Shades] on the [General] page of the [Chart Display] menu. Check the check box for
multi-color; uncheck the box for two-color.

Note: The shallow contour cannot be set higher than the safety contour.

8-1
8. HOW TO CONTROL CHART OBJECTS

MULTI-COLOR presentation

Chart zero

Shallow contour
Safety contour (input value)
Safety contour (exisiting in ENC)

Deep contour

Non-navigable area Navigable area

In the multi-color presentation four colors are used for depths. If the value entered as
the safety contour does not exist in the electronic chart, the system automatically se-
lects the next available deeper depth contour as the safety contour. For example, the
input value is 8 m, but there is no 8 m depth contour in the electronic chart. Then, the
system automatically selects the next available deeper depth contour (10 m) as the
safety contour. The depth contour value of 10 m is used as the safety contour in the
electronic chart.

Shallow contour shows visual color change inside an unsafe water area. An unsafe
water area is all areas shallower than the safety contour. Set the value for the shallow
contour less than the value of the safety contour.

TWO-COLOR presentation

Chart zero

Shallow contour
Safety contour (input value)
Safety contour (exisiting in ENC)

Deep contour

Non-navigable area Navigable area

In the two-color presentation, unsafe water is shown in blue and safe water is shown
in white. The safety contour is used to qualify unsafe water (depth shallower than safe-
ty contour) and safe water (depths deeper than safety contour).

If the value entered as the safety contour does not exist in the electronic chart, the sys-
tem automatically selects the next deeper available depth contour as the safety con-
tour, the same as with the multi-color presentation.

8-2
 8. HOW TO CONTROL CHART OBJECTS

8.2.2 Basic Setting menu

To display this menu, click [DISP], [SET] and [Basic Setting] on the InstantAccess
bar™.

[Light Popup]: Show or hide light sectors informa-

Light sector center
tion. [ON] provides light sector information (includ-
ing length of arc of visibility) when the cursor is put
on a light or light sector.
Light house info

[Attributes Display]: Set how to show attributes in a Pick Report. The options are:
• [Text Box]

• [List]

[TM Reset]: In the true motion mode, own ship moves until it reaches the true motion
reset borderline (set here), and then it jumps back to an opposite position on screen
based on its course. Set the limit for TM reset (in percentage). For example, "80" resets
the position when the own ship marker is at a location which is 80% of the range.

8-3
8. HOW TO CONTROL CHART OBJECTS

8.2.3 Chart Display menu

To access the [Chart Display] menu and its pages, click [DISP], [SET] and
[Chart?DISP] on the InstantAccess bar™. then select [General], [Standard], [Other],
[Text], or [NtoM] page as appropriate.

General page
This page turns chart features on (checkbox checked) or off.

Symbol: Determines how to display chart symbols.

- Paper Chart: Symbols displayed the same as the conventional paper chart symbols
- Simplified: Symbols displayed in simplified style, and the sea is displayed in color.

Boundaries: Determines how to show boundary lines of chart objects.

- Plain: Boundary line shown with solid and dashed lines.
- Symbolized: Symbol is attached to the line according to the purpose of the line.

Scale MIN: Set the minimum chart scale to display chart objects. When the chart scale
is lower than set here, the chart objects will not be displayed.

Highlight Date Dependent: Put a highlight mark on

the chart object which carries a date dependent attri-
bute.
Highlight mark
Highlight INFO, Highlight Document: Put a highlight (date dependent)
mark on a chart object that has information or docu-
ment attribute. Highlight mark
(document)

8-4
 8. HOW TO CONTROL CHART OBJECTS

Standard page
The [Standard] page contains chart features defined by IMO that comprise a standard
display.

Other page
The [Standard] page contains chart features not contained in IMO standard display.

Text page
Show or hide text information on the chart.

NtoM page
Show or hide the Notice to Mariners data.

Note: To use the “pick report” feature, which provides information for cursor-chosen
chart feature, the associated chart feature must be turned on from the [General],
[Standard], [Other], [Text], or [NtoM] page.

8.2.4 Display base

A subset of chart features is called the “display base”. As required by IMO, these fea-
tures cannot be made invisible. To get the display base, click the [STD DISP] button
on the status bar.

The display base consists of the following chart features:

• Coastline (high water)

• Own ship's safety contour, which is selected by the user
• Indication of isolated underwater dangers of depths less than the safety contour that
lie within the safe waters defined by the safety contour
• Indication of isolated dangers that lie within the safe water defined by the safety con-
tour such as bridges, overhead wires, etc., and including buoys and beacons wheth-
er or not these are being used as aids to navigation.
• Traffic routine systems
• Scale, range, orientation and operating mode
• Units of depth and height

8-5
8. HOW TO CONTROL CHART OBJECTS

8.3 How to Control Visibility of Symbols, Features

Control of symbols and features is divided into five pages in the [Symbol Display]
menu, which you can access by clicking the [DISP], [SET] and [Symbol DISP] buttons
on the InstantAccess bar™.
[General] page: Controls own ship and target related items.
[Tracking] page: Controls past tracks and some other features.
[Route] page: Controls planned and monitored route.
[Mariner] page: Controls user charts.
[Targets] page: Controls TT and AIS targets.

The user can define settings for chart details that are displayed over the chart area.

8.3.1 General page

3 mm

3 mm

Ship, AIS Outlines

Ship Outlines: Select OFF or ON to show minimized or scaled symbol, respectively.
AIS Outlines: Select OFF or ON to show AIS targets in same size or scaled symbol,
respectively.
True outlines shown if: If the length or width of the own ship mark is greater than 3.0
mm, the own ship mark is shown with the true scale symbol. Select [Length] or [Beam
width].

The right illustration in the figure below shows own ship mark and AIS targets with
scaled symbols. The left illustrations shows own ship mark and AIS targets with point
symbols. AIS targets are displayed as true scale symbol if the displayed chart scale is
larger than set with "Outlines" limit (length>3.0 mm) on the [General] page in the [Sym-
bol Display] menu and your own ship are displayed as true symbol scale if the size of
the true scale symbol is larger than 3.0 mm on the chart display.

8-6
 8. HOW TO CONTROL CHART OBJECTS

Velocity Vectors
Ship Vectors: Show or hide own ship vector.
Target Vectors: Show or hide target vectors.
Style: Select the vector style. The [std ECDIS] vector is a speed-referenced vector
symbol. [Conventional] is a simplified symbol.
Time Increments: Check to show ticks of velocity vector. This controls both own ship
and targets ticks. If ticks are too tightly spaced, they will be automatically removed
from the display, until spacing between ticks is sufficient to distinguish them separate-
ly. This depends on display scale and speed of vessel and target.
Path Predictor: Check to show the path predictor. The path predictor is a single
dashed line originating at the CCRP and drawn at a length to represent the distance
and path own ship will travel over the ground in the user-selected time interval for own
ship speed vector.
Radar Antenna: Check to mark position of radar antenna (with "x”).

8.3.2 Tracking page

[Own Ship Past Tracks]

CCRP: Check to plot own ship’s track with CCRP position as reference.
Primary: Check to plot own ship's track with position fed from sensor with highest pri-
ority.
Secondary: Check to plot own ship's track with position fed from sensor with 2nd
highest priority.
Pivot: Check to plot own ship's track with own ship’s pivot position as reference.
Style: Select time stamp position for past track (indicated by Tick or Point).
Length: Select length of past track.
Labels: Select label interval.

8-7
8. HOW TO CONTROL CHART OBJECTS

[Events]
Events marks are based on the [Voyage] log records.

User Events: Display event symbols on the chart. User events are recorded by click-
ing [Log], [Event Log] and [User Event] on the InstantAccess bar™.
Auto Events: Display automatically entered event symbols, where the system has re-
corded an event based on conditions you have set. The available recording interval is
1 to 4 hours.
Position Events: Display the latitude and longitude of an event, recorded by clicking
[Log], [Event Log] and [POSN Event] on the InstantAccess bar™.

Note 1: A MOB event is visible always.

Note 2: You can select the period of time to display event marks, from the [Show] list
box. [Newer than 12 hours], [Newer than 24 hours], [Newer than 1 week], [Newer than
2 weeks], [Newer than 1 month], [Newer than 3 months], or [All].

8-8
 8. HOW TO CONTROL CHART OBJECTS

8.3.3 Route page

The [Route] page selects the route parts of the monitored and planned routes to show
on the chart.

[XTD Limit]: The distance from the

centerline to one side of the nav lane.
[Safety Margin]: The distance from
one side of the channel limit to the
safety margin distance.
[Leg Marks]: Indications of waypoint
no. and range and bearing to next
waypoint. ([True]: Reference to
North; [Relative]: Reference to head-
ing)
[Wheel Over Line]: The location
where the ship turns toward new
course.

Safety
margin

㼃㻼㼀㻟

XTD
Wheel over limit
line*

WPT1 WPT2
124.8° 87.9°
Leg mark
0.8NM 1.2NM

* Wheel over line (WOL)

Direction of Direction of
movement WOL movement WOL

WOL for next section Vertical WOL for the current interval

Case 1: Normal Case 2: Angle for next section is narrow (Not 20 deg)

8-9
8. HOW TO CONTROL CHART OBJECTS

8.3.4 Mariner page

[User chart]
[Labels]: Check to show labels on user charts.
[Lines]: Check to show lines on user charts.
[Clearing Lines]: Check to show clearing lines (for marking dangerous areas) on user
charts.
[Tidals]: Check to show symbols and tidals on user charts.
[Areas]: Check to show areas on the user charts.
[Circles]: Check to show circles on user charts.
[Density]: Set the degree of transparency for the user chart objects. Color fill for the
areas can be selected as transparent from 25%, 50%, 75% and as [No color fill]. If [No
color fill] is selected, only the boundaries of the areas are visible.
[Display user chart symbol name]: Check to display the name entered for a user chart
symbol in the [Name] column of the [User Chart] dialog box. Effective for the circle and
area symbols only. Names are shown in both the Voyage planning and Voyage navi-
gation modes. See the figure below for examples.

Reef
Wreck

Name as entered in [Name] column.

[NAVTEX]: Available only when a Navtex receiver is enabled at installation. Check to

put the Navtex symbol ( MSI ) at the coordinates received in a Navtex message. De-
pending on the information received, the symbols appears as shown in the figure on
the following page.

8-10
 8. HOW TO CONTROL CHART OBJECTS

Point(s) Circle(s) Area(s)

Line(s)

Right-click the MSI mark to show the context-sensitive menu, Ship off center
then click [NAVTEX MSG] to show the [NAVTEX] page of the Pick Report
Chart Legend
Message dialog box (see section 17.2.1section 17.2.1).
Manual Update
New Divider
8.3.5 Targets page NAVTEX MSG

[Color]: Select color of target (TT and AIS, common) from the list box.[AtoN Symbol Col-
or]: Select the color for AtoN symbols.
[TT Size]: Select symbol size for tracked targets, [Standard] or [Small].
[AIS ROT TAG Limit]: ROT (°/min.), limit to display AIS target with curved speed vector.
(Source of ROT must be ROT gyro on target vessel.)
[TT Label]: Show or hide the TT label (target no.).
[AIS Label]: Show or hide the AIS label (ship’s name).
[TT Pop-up INFO]: Show or hide the TT pop-up, which is shown by placing the cursor
on a TT.
[AIS Pop-up INFO]: Show or hide the AIS pop-up, which is shown by placing the cursor
on an AIS target.
TT pop-up info TT(04) AIS pop-up info AIS_CLASS...
COG: 235.0°T COG: 324.0°T
SOG: 6.1kn SOG: 8.1kn
CPA: 0.23NM CPA: 0.12NM
TCPA: -10:18 TCPA: -19:18

[Past Position]
[TT/AIS Points]: Select the number of TT/AIS past position points to display.
[Style]: Select style of presentation of target's past position.

8-11
8. HOW TO CONTROL CHART OBJECTS

8.4 Control of Predefined IMO Chart Display Set-

tings
There are three sets of predefined chart display settings that can be used to display
charts with certain chart features. The predefined chart display settings are

• [IMO BASE]
• [IMO STD] (STANDARD)
• [IMO ALL]
When the chart settings are changed. the following settings changes are also applied
to each page of the [Chart Display] menu.

[Chart Display] menu

IMO Base IMO Standard IMO All
[Standard] page All items are un- All items are All items are
checked. checked. checked.
[General] page All items are un- All items are un- All items are un-
checked. checked. checked.
[Other] page All items are un- All items are un- All items are
checked. checked. checked.
[Text] page All items are un- All items are un- All items are
checked. checked. checked.
[NtoM] page All items are All items are All items are
checked. checked. checked.

You can change the chart display setting in use [Chart database] button
with the [Chart database] button on the Status
bar.

8-12
9. VECTOR (S57) CHARTS
Theoretically a chart can be coded for use on a computer as a vector chart. Vector-
coded charts are coded using a variety of techniques. One technique is called S57ed3
and it has been chosen by IMO as the only alternative for SOLAS compliant electronic
charts. If an S57ed3-coded chart is published by a government-authorized Hydro-
graphic Office, then it is called "ENC". You can read more about ENC and related legal
issues in this chapter. Hereafter, all references to vector chart material are referred to
as "S57 charts" regardless of their source.

Sometimes you may wish to manually add Notices to Mariners or Navtex warnings into
your S57 charts. This is called "manual updates". Also, manual updates are valid for
all scales so that you don't need to repeat them for charts published in different scales
from the same area.

9.1 Introduction to S57 Charts

An ENC chart is encrypted to prevent unauthorized use so the user needs a permit to
view the ENC. This permit could be entered manually from the Control Unit, loaded
from a USB flash memory.

Any new ENC must be loaded into the system. Some parts of the charts may be date
dependent, i.e., they are visible after a set date or they are visible only for a limited
period, etc. In the electronic chart system, you control all date-dependent objects with
Display date and Update Review dates (see section 9.2.2section 9.2.2 for how to set
these dates). In the paper chart world, the Preliminary and Temporary Notices to Mar-
iners represent the date dependency described above for S57 charts.

An important part of ENCs are the updates. Hydrographic Offices can issue two kinds
of updates:

1. Incremental updates, which are small additions to original base cells.

2. Reissues and new editions, which are complete replacements of previous base
cells and their updates.
All updates are date stamped and they may also contain date-dependent parts. You
control usage of updates in the electronic chart system from Display date and Update
Review dates. Using Display date and Update Review dates, you can view your charts
correctly drawn on any date in the past or in the future.

Chart material will be stored in media such as DVD ROMs, CD ROMs and USB flash
memory or electronically through from LAN (Local Area Network) in which it could
have arrived in DVD ROMs, CD ROMs or USB flash memories. Such material can
contain only basic cells, cells and updates or only updates. The electronic chart sys-
tem contains as standard the software required to access a medium.

Each S57 chart may contain additional links to textual descriptions or pictures, besides
the chart itself. Typically additional textual descriptions and pictures contain important
sailing directions, tidal tables and other traditional paper chart features that do not
have any other method to be included into the S57 chart. This system copies these
textual descriptions and pictures into its SSD so the user may cursor-pick them for
viewing purposes.

9-1
9. VECTOR (S57) CHARTS

9.1.1 Definitions of terms

Cell A cell is a geographical area containing ENC data and it is the smallest di-
vision of ENC data. Each cell has a separate unique name. Hydrographic
Offices divide their responsibility area by the cells that they publish.
S57 chart A database, standardized as to content, structure and format, is issued for
use with this system without any authority of government-authorized Hydro-
graphic Office.
ENC A database, standardized as to content, structure and format, is issued for
use with this system on the authority of government-authorized Hydro-
graphic Offices. The ENC contains all the chart information necessary for
safe navigation and may contain supplementary information in addition to
that contained in the paper chart (e.g., sailing directions) that may be con-
sidered necessary for safe navigation. The name of the coding standard for
ENC is S57ed3.
SENC A database resulting from the transformation of the ENC by the system for
appropriate use, updates to the ENC by appropriate means, and other data
added by the mariner. It is this database that is actually accessed by the
system for display and other navigational functions. The SENC may also
contain information from other sources.

9.1.2 Chart legend for S57 charts

[Chart Legend] dialog box provides various information about the ENC chart currently
displayed. The information can be displayed two ways:

• Chart data for own ship position: Right click the chart area, select [Ship on center]
from the context menu, then click [Chart INFO] and [Chart Legend] on the Instant-
Access bar™.
• Chart data for cursor position: Right click the chart area, select [Ship off center]
from the context menu, then click [Chart INFO] and [Chart Legend] on the Instant-
Access bar™.
To close the dialog box, click the [Close] button.

This system is capable of showing more than one S57 chart at a time. This feature is
called the multi-chart display. If one S57 chart does not cover the whole display, the
system will open more S57 chart cells for display, if appropriate cells for the displayed
area are available. The chart legend shows information about S57 charts displayed on
the electronic chart display area.

[Name]: Name of chart.

[Type]: Type of chart.
[Edition]: Edition number of the chart.

9-2
 9. VECTOR (S57) CHARTS

[Edition Date]: Date the edition was published.

[Update Number]: Update number.
[Update Date]: Date of update.
[Compilation Scale]: The scale of the original paper chart is shown here.
[Projection]: Projection of current chart.
[Horizontal Datum]: Horizontal datum used with current chart.
[Sounding Datum]: Datum used to create sounding data.
[Vertical Datum]: Vertical datum used with current chart.
[Units of Depth]: Unit of depth used with current chart.
[Units of Height]: Unit of measurement used to measure height of objects above sea
level.
[Magnetic Variation]: Amount of magnetic variation. A positive value indicates a
change in an easterly direction and a negative value indicates a change in a westerly
direction.
[Quality Indication]: Quantitative estimate of the accuracy of chart features, given by
the chart producer.

9.1.3 Permanent warnings for S57 charts

Permanent warnings help you keep the installed S57 charts up-to-date and these are
shown at the bottom of the screen. Permanent warnings appear if the system detects
a condition that may cause a chart to be not up-to-date.

Message Meaning, Remedy

Display Not Real Time Display date is not the current date. Set
Display date and Update Review date to
the current date.
No connection to dongle The dongle is not inserted or not recog-
nized. Insert the dongle to erase the mes-
sage.
Not up to date (SSE 27): XXXXXXXX At least one chart is not up to date. Load
(Chart name appears at location of Xs.) updated material.
Permit expired (SSE 25): XXXXXXXX You have an expired permit for a chart. Re-
(Chart name appears at location of Xs.) move the chart or renew subscription for
the permit.

Note: The system can assist in keeping RENC-received charts up-to-date. For charts
that have been loaded from sources other than an RENC, the system is unable to
know the exact up-to-date situation.

9-3
9. VECTOR (S57) CHARTS

9.2 Chart Viewing Dates and Seasonal Features of

the S57 Chart

9.2.1 Introduction
S57 charts contain date-dependent features. Updating in general, including reissues,
new editions and updates, creates date dependency. In addition to the obvious date
dependency, some features of the S57 charts create additional date dependency.
These features include "Date Start", "Date End", "Seasonal date start" and "Seasonal
date end". Hydrographic Offices use these features to publish Temporary and Prelim-
inary Notices to Mariners, as their paper chart equivalent updates are called. "Season-
al date start" and "Seasonal date end" are used for seasonal chart features such as
summer-only sea marks, seasonal yacht race areas, etc.

You can efficiently use chart viewing date dependency in order to use the valid data
for any given date applicable for your navigation or planning purposes. For example,
you can check for existence of changes and restrictions weeks before they became
valid. Date dependency is a part of the new electronic method to keep your chart up-
to-date and valid for your intended use. Normally you should set Display date and Up-
date Review once per week to keep your chart up-to-date.

9.2.2 How to set Display date and Update Review dates

1. On the InstantAccess bar™, click the [Chart INFO] and [Viewing Dates] button.
The [Viewing Date] dialog box appears.

2. Select either [Single Date] or [Date Range] from the [Display Date] column, as ap-
propriate. The date button becomes active and selectable, as shown in the exam-
ple figure below.

Date button active and selectable

• [Single Date]: Display only charts which have this date.

9-4
 9. VECTOR (S57) CHARTS

• [Date Range]: Display all charts within the set range.

3. Click the date button to show the [Set date] dia-
log box.
4. Select the appropriate date from the calendar,
then click [OK] to close the [Set date] dialog box
and return to the [Viewing Dates] dialog box.
5. Click [Close].
6. Check the appropriate charts, then access the
Viewing Dates dialog again (see step 1).
7. Select [AUTO - Today] to show the current
date’s chart.
8. Click [Close].

9.2.3 About chart viewing date dependency of S57 standard

How the issue date of updates changes the visibility of the changes
Study the example below to understand the behavior of updates relative to date.

Update 3
Update 2
Update 1
Base cell

Date
1 2 3 4
The figure above shows how updates are dependent Chart viewing dates set in Dis-
play/Update Review date settings by user. Actions 1 to 4 are as follows:
1. Base cell including three updates is converted into SENC. Display Date is set as
current date of the system.
2. The date in which update 1 was issued. [Display Date] must be set to correct date
in order to see the chart with update 1.
3. The date in which update 2 was issued. [Display Date] must be set to correct date
in order to see the chart with update 1 and update 2.
4. The date in which update 3 was issued. [Display Date] must be set to correct date
in order to see the chart with update 1, update 2 and update 3.
Note 1: In order to display charts with correct updated situation, always use current
date during your voyage. If your voyage lasts more than one week, set current date at
least once per week during your voyage.
Note 2: In order to display charts with correct updated situation during route planning,
always use planned date of each waypoint to check your plan.

9-5
9. VECTOR (S57) CHARTS

9.2.4 How to approve and highlight S57 chart updates

You can highlight updated data by setting a date (or date period) and creating a report.

1. On the InstantAccess bar™, click the [Chart INFO] and [Viewing Dates] button.
The [Viewing Date] dialog box appears.
2. In the [Update Review] column, check the [Date Range] box. The [Start Date] and
[End Date] buttons become active and selectable.

Date buttons active

and selectable
Object Report
button

3. Click the [Start Date] button to show the [Set date] dialog box.
4. Select the start date, then click [OK].
5. Click the [End Date] button to show the [Set date] dialog box.
6. Select the end date, then click [OK].
7. Click [Object Report]. The [Object Update Review] dialog appears.

8. Select the items to highlight, then click the [View] button.

Items selected here appear with an orange highlight mark.
9. To remove highlights, set the [Update Review] column of the [Viewing Dates] di-
alog box to [OFF].
10. Click the [Close] button on the [Viewing Dates] dialog box to close the dialog box-
es.

9-6
 9. VECTOR (S57) CHARTS

9.3 Symbology Used in S57 Charts

You can familiarize yourself with the symbology used by browsing IHO Chart 1, which
is included in this system. Note that it behaves as any S57 chart and it follows your
selections. See section 8.2section 8.2.

1. Click the [Chart INFO] and [Chart 1] buttons on the InstantAccess bar™ to show
to the [ECDIS Chart 1] menu, shown below.
2. Click a chart feature to show detailed information about the feature. Click [Over-
view] to show a compilation of all features, shown below.

New symbols
Color diagram

[ECDIS Chart 1] menu

9.3.1 Presentation library used for S57 chart features

The system uses the official IHO presentation library to draw S57 charts. The presen-
tation library is replaceable, but this feature is only intended to be used by qualified
service personnel and type approval authorities.
When this manual was published the official presentation library was "pslb04_0.dai",
known as "Official IHO presentation library for system Ed 4".

9-7
9. VECTOR (S57) CHARTS

9.4 How to Find Information About S57 Chart Ob-

jects
The ability to cursor-pick an object to find additional information about the object is an
important function of the system. However, an unprocessed cursor pick, which does
not discriminate or interpret and merely dumps on the interface panel all the informa-
tion available at that point on the display, will normally result in pages of unsorted and
barely intelligible attribute information.

Do the following to find information about a chart object.

1. Get into the Voyage navigation mode or Voyage planning mode then right-click an
object to show the context-sensitive menu.
Ship off center
Pick Report
Chart Legend
Manual Update
New Divider
2. Click [Pick Report] to show the [Select Object] dialog box.

Note: The [Include Danger Objects] check box appears when there is at least one
dangerous object. To show dangerous objects in the [Select Object] dialog box,
check this box (after the box is check it becomes unselectable).
3. Click the object for which you want to know its details then click the [Select] button.
Note: Objects selected from the Select Object dialog box are highlighted in or-
ange color and are shown with a broken box( ).

Depending on the item selected,

these indications may be hidden.

• [Description] window: Click an attribute to view its description in this box.

• [All INFO]: Check the [All INFO] box to show all information in the [Attributes]
window. (The [All INFO] box becomes unselectable when checked.)
• [Connected Object]: Objects which are connected to the selected object are
shown in the drop-down list. Select an object from the list to show its details.

9-8
 9. VECTOR (S57) CHARTS

Note 1: If another window is active, the preview window may be partially obscured
by that window. Move the window to display the entire preview.
Note 2: The [Attributes] window of the [Chart Object] dialog box changes accord-
ing to the settings for [Attribute Display] in the [Basic Settings] menu (see
section 8.2.2section 8.2.2).

9.5 Admiralty Information Overlay (AIO)

The Admiralty Information Overlay includes all Admiralty Temporary and Preliminary
Notices to Mariners (T&P NMs) and provides additional navigationally significant in-
formation from UKHO's ENC validation programme. The AIO is displayed as a single
layer on top of the basic ENC and is available free of charge as part of the Admiralty
S57 Chart Service and within Admiralty Value Added Resellers' services.

The AIO has been developed to ensure mariners can simply view the information they
need - in addition to the standard chart - to navigate safely and compliantly. By clearly
showing where important Temporary or Preliminary changes may impact a voyage,
the Admiralty Information Overlay will give seafarers the same consistent picture of
the maritime environment on their charts as they have always had.

The AIO license is free of charge for AVCS license holders.

9.5.1 Installation
Installation is the same as that for the ENC chart. See section 7.2section 7.2.

9.5.2 How to display the AIO

Click the [DISP], [NtoM] and [ALL] buttons to show the AIO. To hide the AIO, click the
[DISP], [NtoM] and [OFF] buttons.

The area(s) that contain temporary or preliminary changes are marked with a hatched
red rectangle.

9-9
9. VECTOR (S57) CHARTS

9.5.3 Catalog of AIO cells

A catalog of AIO cells is maintained in the [Manage Charts] dialog box. To show this
box, get into the Chart maintenance mode then click the [Manage Charts] button on
the InstantAccess bar™. The AIO cell is GB800001.

9.5.4 How to find AIO chart object information

Do the following to find chart object information contained in the AIO.

1. Right click a red hatched area in the chart area, then select [Pick Report] to show
the [Select Object] dialog box.

2. Click [Preliminary Notice] in the dialog box to show the [Chart object] dialog box.

The [Chart object] dialog box shows the following information:

• Cell (name)
• Drawing type (Preliminary Notice, Temporary Notice)
• Category (AIO)
• Positional accuracy
• Quality of position

9-10
 9. VECTOR (S57) CHARTS

• The preview box provides a scaled-down image of the area selected. Click the im-
age to enlarge it.
• The [Attribute] window shows the attributes for the AIO area selected. To find infor-
mation about an attribute, click it to show its information in the [Description] box.
Information: Description of area (for example, danger area).
Object name: Object name (number)Textual description: Full text of the Notice to
Mariners (NtoM)
ENC affected: ENC affected by the NtoM
Included in updates: Date this item was updated ([Preliminary Notice] items only)
• [All INFO] checkbox: Check the box to show [Source indication] at the bottom of the
[Attribute] window. (The [All INFO] box becomes unselectable when checked.)
Note: The [Attributes] window of the [Chart Object] dialog box changes according to
the settings for [Attributes Display] in the [Basic Settings] menu (see
section 8.2.2section 8.2.2).

9.5.5 How to select the information to display

Select what type of notices to display as follows:

1. Click the [DISP], [SET] and [Chart DISP] buttons on the InstantAccess bar™.
2. Click the [NtoM] tab.

3. In the [AIO] window, check or uncheck items as appropriate.

4. Click the [Save] button to save settings then click the [Close] button to close the
menu.

9-11
9. VECTOR (S57) CHARTS

This page is intentionally left blank.

9-12
10. C-MAP CHARTS
Your chart system has the capability of using and displaying the latest C-MAP world-
wide vector chart database. These charts are fully compliant with the latest IHO S-57
3.1 specifications.

In order to prepare the system for use with the C-MAP database, there are a number
of things that must be done.

The descriptions in this chapter apply to the C-MAP charts. (This system does not sup-
port CM-93/2 charts.)

10.1 How to Register the System at C-MAP

Your system has the capability to use the C-MAP database. To do so an gemalto eTo-
ken (supplied by C-MAP) must be connected to the system. The eToken provides the
system with a unique System ID that enables C-MAP to issue correct licenses. The
actual System ID can be found on the eToken itself, on the back of the installation CD
box or on a sticker placed on the equipment. This ID must be provided on all chart or-
ders, by e-mail (license.marine@c-map.com).

10.2 How to Order Charts

A chart order may be sent together with system registration as described above. It is
essential that the required information be sent to C-MAP when ordering charts for a
system. C-MAP issues order forms specifying the information that is required, and
contains vital information that will allows C-MAP to monitor and maintain your licenses
throughout the lifetime of the system.

For details on how to order charts see the C-MAP official website (http://www.c-
map.com/).

10.3 How to Apply for Licenses

Once the order has been received at C-MAP, a license will be generated and trans-
mitted back to the operator. This may be in the form of a single alphanumerical string
(16 characters), or in the form of a file called PASSWORD.USR. Once this license has
been received it should be input using the License Administrator software designed
and supplied by the chart manufacturer. There are two types of licenses, purchase
and subscription. Purchase licenses are valid indefinitely while subscription licenses
need to be renewed every 12 months from the start of the subscription. Failure to re-
new a subscription will result in the charts becoming unavailable.

10-1
10. C-MAP CHARTS

10.4 Troubleshooting
If you are having problems installing your software or charts please check the follow-
ing before contacting C-MAP:

• Check that the charts are available, with the chart management function.
• Check that the license is correctly installed, with the license function.
Contact Information: For information please call you're nearest C-MAP Office or con-
tact C-MAP. E-mail: technical.marine@c-map.com

10.5 Chart Display

10.5.1 Introduction
The two type of C-MAP charts can be displayed together. These charts have the pri-
ority order shown below.

1) C-MAP ENC
2) C-MAP PROFESSIONAL+
If the same navigational purpose charts are available over an area, priority is as shown
above. Areas where ENC is not available C-MAP ENC charts are shown. Where C-
MAP PROFESSIONAL+ are available, C-MAP PROFESSIONAL+ charts are dis-
played.

The [Chart Legend] dialog box provides various information about the C-MAP chart
currently displayed. The information can be displayed two ways:

• For current position: Click the [TM/CU Reset] button while in the Voyage navigation
mode then click the [Chart INFO] button on the InstantAccess bar™ followed by the
[Chart Legend] button.
• For a specific location: Put the cursor on the location then right-click and select [Chart
Legend].

To close the dialog box, click the [Close] button.

Chart Legend

Name: Name of chart.

Type: Type of chart.
Edition: Edition number of the chart.
Edition Date: Date the edition was published.
Update Number: Update number
Update Date: Date of update
Compilation Scale: The scale of the original paper chart is shown here.
Projection: Projection of current chart.

10-2
 10. C-MAP CHARTS

Horizontal Datum: Horizontal datum used with current chart.

Sounding Datum: Datum used to create sounding data.
Vertical Datum: Vertical datum used with current chart.
Units of Depth: Unit of depth used with current chart.
Units of Height: Unit of measurement used to measure height of objects above sea
level.
Magnetic Variation: Amount of magnetic variation. A positive value indicates a
change in an easterly direction and a negative value indicates a change in a westerly
direction.
Quality Indication: Quantitative estimate of the accuracy of chart features, given by
the chart producer.

10.6 Permanent Warnings

Permanent warnings help you keep the C-MAP up-to-date and these are shown at the
bottom of the screen. Permanent warnings appear if the system detects a condition
that may cause a chart to be not up-to-date.

Message Meaning, Remedy

[C-MAP]: Database not up to date Database is not up to date. Update the data
base.
[C-MAP]: No connection to eToken eToken dongle is not connected (inside the
Processor Unit) or the eToken has not been
initialized. If the dongle is connected, open
the [License] dialog box, click the [C-MAP]
tab, then click the [C-MAP Setup] and [OK]
buttons to initialize the eToken.
[C-MAP]: permits have expired You have an expired permit for a chart. Re-
move the chart or renew subscription for the
permit.
No connection to dongle. Dongle not connected. Connect dongle.
Permit expired (SSE 25): XXXXXXXX You have an expired permit for a chart. Re-
(Chart name replaces Xs.) move the chart or renew subscription for the
permit.

10-3
10. C-MAP CHARTS

10.7 Notice to Mariners (NM)

The NM has been developed to ensure mariners can simply view the information they
need - in addition to the standard chart - to navigate safely and compliantly. By clearly
showing where important Temporary or Preliminary changes may impact a voyage,
the NM will give seafarers the same consistent picture of the maritime environment on
their charts as they have always had.

The display and operation methods for NM is essentially the same as AIO. See
section 9.5section 9.5 for details.

How to select the NM information to display

Select what type of notices to display as follows:

1. Click the [DISP], [SET] and [Chart DISP] buttons on the InstantAccess bar™.
2. Click the [NtoM] tab.

3. In the [C-MAP] window, check the items to display.

4. Click the [Save] button to save settings then click the [Close] button to close the
menu.

10-4
11. CHART ALERTS
The chart radar can detect areas where the depth is less than the safety contour or
detect an area where a specified condition exists. If prediction of own ship movement
goes across a safety contour or an area where a specified condition exists, the system
does the following:

• Highlights alarm level alert objects in red (route checked in route planning, and
route navigation)
• Highlights warning and caution level alert objects in yellow (route checked in route
planning, and route navigation)
• Provides visual alerts in the [Alert] box for alarm, warning and caution level alert ob-
jects (route navigation)
• Sounds an aural alarm for alarm or warning alert objects (route navigation)

Alarm level chart

Warning/caution level object highlighted
chart object highlighted in red color
in yellow color

For this function, the chart radar utilizes the chart database (S57 charts) stored on the
SSD in SENC format. Note that the chart radar calculates dangerous areas using
the largest scale chart available, which may not be the visualized chart.

You can select objects that are included for calculation of danger area (for example,
restricted areas). A dialog box lists the various areas that activate danger warnings.

You can also define your own safe area by creating a user chart area. The system can
utilize these areas when calculating chart alerts.

 The system can check the following for you:

• Predicted movement area of own ship
• Planned route with an easy to use locator function to find dangerous areas
 The system will highlight the following for you
• Dangerous areas inside predicted movement area of the own ship
• Dangerous areas inside your monitored route
• Dangerous areas inside your planned route

11-1
11. CHART ALERTS

11.1 Chart Alerts

Official S57 chart material contains depth contours that can be used for calculation of
chart alerts. A chart database also includes different types of objects that the operator
can use for chart alerts. The procedure for setting chart alerts is outlined below.

1. Select suitable safety contour for your own ship. See

subsection 11.1.1subsection 11.1.1 for how to set the safety contour.
2. In the Voyage planning mode, define a new route or select an existing one. Make
a chart alert calculation of the route if there are indications of danger areas in the
route. Modify your route if necessary and do the chart alert calculation again. To
modify an existing route see section 12.5section 12.5.
3. Select route as monitored route.
4. Set the look-ahead area for your own ship (see section 11.2section 11.2).
The system is now ready for chart alert calculation of monitored route and estimated
own ship position.

11.1.1 How to set safety contour

Select safety contour suitable for the own ship.
1. Click the [DISP], [SET] and [Chart Alert] buttons on the InstantAccess bar™ to
show the [Chart Alert] page.

2. Enter desired depth at [Safety Contour] then click the [Save] button.
Any safety contours on the chart are highlighted with a thick gray line.
Note 1: The safety contour is not a new depth contour created by ECDIS - it is the
highlight and activation of an existing contour line already present on the chart.
Note 2: If the chart does not contain chosen depth contour, the system will automati-
cally choose next deeper contour.

11-2
 11. CHART ALERTS

11.1.2 Chart object related settings

When using the Look-ahead function or monitoring a route, you can set up the method
in which to report chart alerts and also show/hide chart highlights.

1. Click the [DISP], [SET] and [Chart Alert] buttons on the InstantAccess bar™ to
show the [Chart Alert] page.

Check to show highlights,

uncheck to hide highlights

2. Click a letter indication to select the type of alert, warning or caution, to receive for
the given chart object. [Safety Contours] is fixed to “A” (Alarm).
• W: Warning, visual and aural alerts
• C: Caution, visual alert only
• No display (OFF): No alert notification. Available with objects other than [No
Vector Chart].
3. Click the box to the right of the letter indication to show a check mark and show
the chart highlight. Click the box again to remove the check in the box and hide
the highlight.
Highlights are colored according to alert priority:
• A (Alarm): Red color highlight
• W (Warning) and C (Caution): Yellow color highlight
4. Click the [Save] button to finish.
Note 1: C-MAP PROFESSIONAL+ charts may take several minutes to identify danger
areas.
Note 2: The Type of Alert setting must be the same for all connected FMD-3x00/FAR-
3xx0/FCR-2xx9.

List of areas
There are areas that the chart radar detects and provides the audible alert and/or vi-
sual alert if the estimated own ship position, or planned or monitored route, crosses
the area defined on the [Chart Alert] page. You can select from the following areas:

• Safety Contour • Offshore Production Area • Too Many Dangers

• Navigational Hazard • Military Practice Area • UKC Limit
• Areas To Be Avoided • Seaplane Landing Area • Sounding UKC Limit
• User Chart Danger • Submarine Transit Lane • Non-official ENC
• Traffic Separation Zone • Anchorage Area • Not Up-to-date
• Inshore Traffic Zone • Marine Farm/Aqua Culture • Permit Expired
• Restricted Area • PSSA Area
• Caution Area • No Vector Chart

11-3
11. CHART ALERTS

11.2 How to Activate Own Ship Look-ahead Area

Calculation of own ship predicted movement area is
done using a check area about own ship position. Set
the look-ahead area as follows:

1. Select the [Look-ahead] page from the [Overlay/

NAV Tools] box.
Note 1: The [ON]/[OFF] button may not be shown
depending on installation setting.
Note 2: When Back-up ECDIS mode is active,
the [ON]/[OFF] button is hidden and look-ahead
is fixed at [ON].
2. Set the ahead time or distance and ahead width,
referring to the figure below. Also, set the "Around" figures: port, starboard, bow
and stern check distance. The reference point is the conning position (CCRP).
Width
Ahead: Sets an area with a length
Course based on own speed (Time) or
distance (DIST) ahead of your ship.
The [Width] setting is applied to
either [Time] or [DIST], depending on
Heading
your selection. The area set here is
always oriented based on your
course (COG).
Distance
Around: Sets a fixed area around
your ship. This area moves with your
ship, in relation to your current
heading (HDG).
Bow

Stern

Port
Starboard
3. To select the objects to use in chart alerts, click the [Chart Alert] button and see
subsection 11.1.2subsection 11.1.2.
When an object set from the [Chart Alert] menu enters a set area, an alert is generated
in the following manner:

• Alarm or Warning level alerts: Alert message and aural alert are generated.
• Caution level alerts: Alert message is generated (no aural alert).

Objects or areas that generate an alert are shown in the following manner. (Alarms:
red highlight, Warnings/Cautions: yellow outline)

• Individual objects: The object is highlighted in red or outlined in yellow.

• Area objects: If the area object is larger than the look-ahead area, the look-ahead
area is highlighted in red or outlined in yellow. If the area object is smaller than the
look-ahead area, the area object is highlighted in red or outlined in yellow.

11-4
 11. CHART ALERTS

11.3 Route Planning

The system will calculate chart alerts using user-defined channel limit for routes. Dan-
ger areas are shown highlighted if safety contour or user-chosen chart alert areas are
crossed by the planned route. For more information on route planning, see
chapter 12chapter 12.

Note: If your voyage is going to take a long time or you are planning it much earlier
than it is to take place, use the Display date and Update Review dates corresponding
to the dates you are going to sail (see section 9.2.2section 9.2.2).

11.3.1 Chart alerts for route planning

You can generate a list of chart alerts that are crossed by the planned route. This can
be done as follows:

1. Enter safety contour you want to use.

2. Plan a route; define waypoints and other necessary information. See
chapter 12chapter 12 for route planning.
3. Select dangerous objects to be monitored during route monitoring, on the [Alert
Parameters] page in the [Route Plan] dialog box, shown below. Click the box be-
low each object to show or hide the check mark.
When the route is checked, alert objects with a check mark which have their alert
activated are highlighted on the chart display. Alert objects with no check mark are
not highlighted.

4. Click the [Check Route] button to generate a list of chart alerts. The results appear
on the [Check Results] page.

The figure above shows the alerts to be monitored. If there are alerts included in
the planned route, check alerts leg by leg, or check alerts by using category of
alert.

11-5
11. CHART ALERTS

Note: When alerts are unchecked at step 3 in the above procedure, one or more
of the following messages appear in the permanent warning box.
• [Safety Contour] unchecked: "Indication of crossing safety contour if Off. (in
planning)"
• [Navigational Hazard] unchecked: "Indication of navigational hazards is Off. (in
planning)"
• Other alerts unchecked: "Indication of some prohibited areas or areas with spe-
cial conditions is Off. (in planning)"

11-6
12. ROUTES

12.1 Route Planning Overview

A route plan defines the navigation plan from starting point to the final destination. The
plan includes:

A route plan defines the navigation plan from starting point to the final destination. The
plan includes:
• Route name
• Name, latitude and longitude of each waypoint
• Radius of turn circle at each waypoint
• Safe channel limits
• Chart alarm calculation based on channel limits against chart database and user chart
danger
• UKC calculation
• Deadband width, nominal deadband width used for the chart operating modes with
moderate accuracy and economical sailing behavior
• Minimum and maximum speed for each leg
• The navigation method (rhumb line, great circle)
• Fuel saving
• ETD from each waypoint
• ETA to each waypoint
• Ship and environmental condition affecting the ship speed calculation
• Name of the user chart to use during route navigation together with the planned route
• Name of the Notes to use during route navigation together with this planned route, in
the user chart dialog box

Using the above-mentioned data, the system calculates speed, course and length for
each leg, ETAs for each waypoint, fuel consumption and WOP. It also calculates safe
water areas based on user-defined channel limits. The calculated data is displayed in
tabular form, which can be printed as a documented route plan and also stored in a
file for later use.

Main functions of route planning are:

• Define waypoints (maximum of 200 waypoints per route)
• Define turnings for each waypoint
• Define channel limits for each leg (a leg is the line connected between two waypoints).
The channel limits are used to detect chart alerts when you are planning or monitoring
your route.
• Define the speed for each leg
• Calculation for ETD and ETA
• Calculation for most economical sailing

Note 1: If you have small scale chart(s) on display having the whole eastern/western
(0-180°E/0-180°W) hemisphere and a part of the other hemisphere on display, there
is a limitation to display a route. To avoid this, set chart center so that the whole east-
ern/western hemisphere is not on the display. A maximum of five routes can be edited
simultaneously.
Note 2: If a planned route's Safety Margin or Channel Limit contains excessive land
masses, the chart radar may freeze during a route check. If this occurs, reset the chart

12-1
12. ROUTES

radar, then adjust the Channel Limit and Safety Margin settings in the Route Plan di-
alog box's Waypoints so that land mass is not included in the route.

12.2 Main Menu for Route Planning

The main parameters for the route planning are:

• Latitude and longitude of the waypoint

• Channel limits to the waypoint
• Turning radius of the waypoint
• Maximum speed limit and planned speed for each leg
There are two phases for a route: Route Plan and Route Monitor. Route plan is used
for planning the route and route monitor is used to control a route for monitoring.

To complete route planning, do the following.

1. Create a new route or select an existing one. See section 12.4section 12.4.
2. Modify your route if necessary. See section 12.5section 12.5.
3. Make chart alert (safe water) calculation. See section 12.4.5section 12.4.5.
4. Optimize your route. See section 12.8section 12.8.

12.3 How Route Data is Synced

Route data can be shared between this ECDIS and other like units (FMD-3x00, FCR-
2xx9, FAR-3xx0), through the LAN. A minimum of two units is required. Turn on all
units beforehand to enable syncing. The sync source (master unit) is automatically as-
signed by the system when each unit is powered. For configurations with three or
more units, two units are assigned as a sync source and have priority regardless of
their power status (ON or OFF). The priority is assigned as follows:

1) ECDIS unit assigned as the Planning ECDIS.

2) ECDIS unit assigned with the lowest unit number at installation.
3) CHART RADAR unit assigned with the lowest unit number at installation.
Be aware that if a unit is turned off, some route data may be deleted. Two examples
are shown below.

Using ECD001 and ECD002

This example assumes that ECD002 is assigned as a Planning ECDIS.

1. ECD002 is off; ECD001 is powered and a route is created at ECD001. Even

though ECD002 is the Planning ECDIS, route data is not transferred to ECD002
because the power is turned off.
2. ECD002 is turned on. As this unit is assigned as a Planning ECDIS, ECD001’s
route data is deleted.

12-2
 12. ROUTES

Using ECD001, ECD002 and CRA001

This example assumes that ECD001 and ECD002 is assigned as a Planning ECDIS.

1. ECD001/002 are both turned off; CRA001 is powered and a route is created on
CRA001. Route data is not transferred as both ECD001 and ECD002 are turned
off.
2. ECD001 is turned on. As this unit is assigned as a Planning ECDIS, CRA001’s
route data is deleted.
If the operator clicks the PLAN button on the Status bar when one or more units (in-
cluding the master unit) is turned off, one of the following messages appears.

Turn all units in the same network on, then plan or edit the route as required.

12-3
12. ROUTES

12.4 How to Create a New Route

To make a complete route for a voyage, do the following:

1. Click the [PLAN] button on the Status bar to activate the Voyage planning mode.
2. On the InstantAccess bar™, click the [Planning] button followed by the [Route]
button to open the [Route Plan] dialog box.
3. Click the [New] button.

Note: When accessing the database is failed after pressing the [New] button, the
message "Database access failure occurred. You can make a route but cannot
save it." appears. Contact your dealer in this case.
4. Use the cursor to select a position for the first waypoint then push the left mouse
button. A waypoint mark appears on the position selected, and the latitude and
longitude of the position, etc. are entered into the [Route Plan] dialog box. After
entering a waypoint, edit Name, Steering mode* ([Rhumbline] or [Greatcircle]),
Radius*, XTD limit*, Plan SPD*, SPD Max*, Margin* and Local Time* as appropri-
ate in the [Route Plan] dialog box, using the keyboard on the Control Unit or the
software keyboard. (*: Editable for waypoint 2 and thereafter only.)
For how edit the details, see section 1.12.3section 1.12.3 and
section 1.12.4section 1.12.4.
Note 1: A guide box that shows the range and bearing between waypoints as you
drag the cursor is available. You can show or hide the box with the [Guide Box]
button on the InstantAccess bar™. Click the button to show its background color
in light-blue and display the guide box.

Guide box

12-4
 12. ROUTES

Note 2: The bearing and range of the waypoint can be ad-

justed as shown below.
1) In the [Route Plan] dialog box, right click the bearing or
the distance of the waypoint to change.
2) Select [Adjust Position] to show the [Adjust Waypoint]
context menu shown right.
3) Enter value at [Direction] or [Distance], then click the
[OK] button.

5. Repeat step 4 to enter other waypoints.

6. After you enter the final waypoint, right-click the display area to show the context-
sensitive menu then select [Finish].
7. Click the [Save] button. Enter a name (max. 63 alphanumeric characters) for the
route, using the keyboard on the Control Unit or the software keyboard. Click the
[OK] button to finish.
8. Use the [Alert Parameters] page to define the safety contour and other specified
conditions for checking the route. Click a "block" under a check item to highlight
the areas. Also, input value for [Draught/m]. A parameter for [Draught/m] can also
be assigned globally to all legs from the context-sensitive menu. See
section 12.4.4section 12.4.4 for how to use the [Alert Parameters] page.
9. Use the [Check Route] button on the [Alert Parameters] page to detect areas
where the depth is less than the safety contour or where specified conditions exist.
The results appear on the [Check Results] page. This system can examine chart
database against planned route to make a list of alerts where a route crosses a
safety contour or specified areas used in chart alerts.
10. Use the [User Chart] page to link, de-link a user chart(s) with the route. See
section 12.4.2section 12.4.2.
11. Use the [Optimize] page to enter parameters for route optimization.See
section 12.4.3section 12.4.3.

How to use the Undo feature

The Undo feature, available when creating a route and a user chart, can be accessed
from the [UNDO] button on the InstantAccess bar™. In route creation the feature is
used with waypoint and text input as follows:

Waypoint input: Delete last-entered waypoint.

Text input: Erase last-entered character or character string.

12-5
12. ROUTES

12.4.1 How to use the Waypoints page

The following fields and boxes can be found in the [Waypoints] page. Scroll the list
rightward to see hidden items.

[WPT]: Each waypoint has a number. [XTD Limit/m]: For [Symmetrical] selected
[Name]: You can name each waypoint. at the radio button, define channel limit for
[Latitude]: WPTs latitude coordinate is dis- each leg. For [Asymmetrical] selected, de-
played in WGS-84 datum. fine channel limit for port, starboard side
[Longitude]: WPTs longitude coordinate is for each leg at [XTD Port/m] or [XTD
displayed in WGS-84 datum. STBD/m] respectively.
[Leg/°]: Bearing of leg (True: reference to [Plan SPD]: Define planned speed to use
North) with a leg.
[Leg/NM]: Length of leg (nm). Edit the indi- [SPD Max]: Define maximum speed to use
cation of leg to show as follows; with a leg.
1) Right-click the column title [Leg/NM]. [Margin/m]: Define extension for channel
2) Select the contents to show. to be checked against selected alerts.
• [Each]: Shows the distance of each [PL 1/m, PL 2/m]: One or two sets of par-
leg. allel lines, colored orange, can be drawn
• [Total]: Shows the total cumulative on a route. Set the distance (in meters) to
distance from leg to leg. offset the lines from the route,
• [Remain]: Shows the distance re- from -99999 to 99999. Parallel lines allow
maining from leg to leg. the navigator to maintain a given distance
Note: These settings are reflected to away from hazards. See the illustration be-
[Leg/NM] in the [Waypoints] page of low.
the [Monitor Information] dialog box. [XTD LIM]: Define channel limits.
[STR Mode]: Define steering mode for • [Symmetrical]: Define channel limit for
each leg - rhumb line or great circle. Click each leg.
to select [Rhumbline] or [Greatcircle]. • [Asymmetrical]: Define channel limit for
[RAD/NM]: Define turning radius for each port, starboard side for each leg, at [CH
waypoint. To change a radius, put the cur- Port/m], [CH STBD/m], respectively.
sor in this column to show up and down ar- [Local Time]: Define the local time at
rows. Click the arrows to set the radius. which the waypoint is passed.

WPT1

WPT2

Parallel Line for Leg 1

Parallel Line for Leg 2 WPT3

12-6
 12. ROUTES

Note: You can select the route information data to display on the
[Waypoints] page with the context-sensitive menu. Right-click
an item from [WPT] to [PL 2/m] then select [Edit Columns] to
show the context-sensitive menu. Check or uncheck items as
appropriate then click the [OK] button.

12.4.2 How to use the User Chart page

The [User Chart] page lets you link user charts to routes. To link a user chart, click the
box to the left of the user chart name in the [Stored User Chart] list to show a check-
mark. Click the [<<] button to copy that name to the [Linked User Chart] list. To de-link
a user chart, click the box to the left of the user chart name in the [Linked User Chart]
list then click the [>>] button to erase the name. The contents of each user chart are
shown in the [Contents] window.

[Linked User Chart]: List of user charts linked with selected route.
[Stored User Chart]: List of stored user charts.
[<<] button: Link a stored used chart. Check the chart in the [Stored User Chart] list
then click this button. The user chart name is then copied to the [Linked User Chart]
list.
[>>] button: Click to remove selected (checkmarked) user chart from the [Linked User
Chart] list.
[Contents]: Lists the objects saved to the user chart selected.

12-7
12. ROUTES

12.4.3 How to use the Optimize page

After all waypoints are inserted and you have made safe water calculation, you can
optimize your route, on the [Optimize] page. If not selected, then optimization will be
done automatically with max. speed. If you want do optimization with a specific strat-
egy, see section 12.8section 12.8 for how to optimize a route.

[Type]: Select optimization strategy: maximum speed, time table, maximum profit, or
minimum cost.
[Set ETD]: Set date, time and waypoint to start from.
[Parameters]: Set the parameters for optimization, speed limit and income (max prof-
it).
[Edit Cost Parameters] button: Enter fuel consumption figures. See
section 21.3section 21.3.
[Set ETA]: For the type [Time table], set the date and time that you want to arrive at
the waypoint selected.
[Optimized Speed/ETA]: The optimized speed for the date and time entered at [Set
ETA] appears here, after clicking the [Calculate] button.
[Calculate] button: Click to calculate optimization.
[Apply to Route] button: Apply the calculations on the [Optimize] page to the route.

12.4.4 How to use the Alert Parameters page

The [Alert Parameters] page sets the alert conditions to use when checking a route.
Put a “W” for an item to highlight on the chart. ([Safety Contour] is fixed to “A” (Alarm).
If you do not require the highlight display for an item, put a “C” for that object. The rel-
evant alerts (Alarm, Warning, Caution) are shown in the [Check Results] page.

You can select the safety contour and chart alerts used to check the safety of the
route. This allows you to check the safety with conditions different from those selected

12-8
 12. ROUTES

n for system use. This is useful when making a route for different loading or sailing
conditions.

Check a box to highlight the

appropriate chart alert area.

Item Description Item Description

Check type Check how to apply the Offshore Offshore production
alerts, to every leg or indi- Production Area area
vidual leg. (Only [Draught]
can be applied to every
leg.)
Safety Set the safety contour (in Military Practice Military practice area
Contour meters). Area
UKC Limit Under keel clearance lim- Seaplane Seaplane landing area
it. Landing Area
Date (UTC) A chart may have date- Submarine Submarine transit lane
dependent features. Enter Transit Lane
the actual data of embar-
kation to know date-de-
pendent features.
Leg Leg number Anchorage Area Anchorage area
Draught/m Ship’s draught MarineFarm Marine farm aquaculture
Aquaculture
Safety Con- Safety contour PSSA Area Particularly Sensitive
tour Sea Area
Navigation- Navigational hazards No Vector Chart No vector chart for area.
al Hazard
Areas to be Areas to be avoided Too Many Dan- Too many dangerous ar-
Avoided gers eas/objects.
User Chart User chart danger area UKC Limit
Danger
Traffic Traffic separation zone Sounding UKC Particularly Sensitive
Separation Limit Sea Area
Zone
Inshore Inshore traffic zone Non-official ENC No official ENC data
Traffic Zone
Restricted Restricted area Not Up-to-date Chart not up to date.
Area
Caution Caution area Permit Expired Permit for chart has ex-
Area pired.

Context sensitive menus

A context-sensitive menu for setting the draught is available on the [Alert Parameters]
page. Right-click [Draught/m] to show the menu. [Set "ALL" setting to all legs] applies

12-9
12. ROUTES

the draught value of [Check type: All Legs] to all legs. [Clear setting] restores previous
settings for each leg.

Set “ALL” setting to all legs

Clear setting

12-10
 12. ROUTES

12.4.5 How to use the Check Results page

The [Check Results] page allows you to make safe water calculation for your route.
Click the [Check Route] button to do the check. After the button is operated, the alert
type and latitude and longitude position of the alert appear for applicable legs on the
route.

Note 1: In order to display charts with correct updated situation, always use current
date during your voyage. If your voyage lasts more than one week, set current date at
least once per week during your voyage.
Note 2: A route check can take longer with C-MAP charts. Wait until the completion
of the check.
Note 3: When a chart is installed or updated, use the [Check Route] button on the
[Alert Parameters] page to re-check all routes before starting any voyage. If a route
which has not been checked is selected for a voyage, the error message "Route check
is not done in PLAN mode." appears at the bottom of the monitor page.

12.5 How to Modify an Existing Route

12.5.1 How to change waypoint position

To change position of a waypoint you have the following choices:

• Drag and drop waypoint using the left button.

• Enter latitude and longitude on the [Waypoints] page in the [Route Plan] dialog box.

How to drag and drop waypoint to new position

1. Put the cursor on the route waypoint to move then push the right button to show
the context-sensitive menu.
2. Select [Edit].
3. Press and hold down the left button while rolling the trackball to move the cursor
to a desired position. Release the button when the cursor is at the desired posi-
tion. Right-click the display area to show the context-sensitive menu then select
[Finish].

How to change latitude and longitude from the Waypoints page

1. Show the [Waypoints] page.
2. Put the cursor on the digit to change in the Latitude or Longitude field.
3. Enter position from the Control Unit’s keyboard, or spin the scrollwheel.

12-11
12. ROUTES

12.5.2 How to change other waypoint data

Other data of a waypoint, such as name, steering mode, turning radius, min/max
speed, can be edited from the [Waypoints] page. Select the route to edit and open the
[Waypoints] page. Put the cursor on a desired field and spin the scrollwheel to change
data. (Push the left button to change steering mode.)

12.5.3 How to add a new waypoint at the end of a route

How to add a new waypoint at the end of a route from the electronic chart
area
1. Put the cursor on the current last waypoint of the route.
2. Right-click the display area to show the context-sensitive menu then click [Edit].
3. Put the cursor to the new location for the last waypoint then push the left button.
4. Right-click, then click [Finish].

How to add a new waypoint at the end of a route from the Waypoints page
Open the [Waypoints] page then right-click the last waypoint. Select [Insert after].
A waypoint is added at the end of the list. Edit the Latitude, Longitude, etc. as neces-
sary.

12.5.4 How to insert a waypoint

How to insert a waypoint between waypoints from the electronic chart area
1. Put the cursor anywhere on the route where you want to insert a waypoint.
2. Right-click to show the context-sensitive menu then click [Edit].
3. Put the cursor on the leg where you want to insert a waypoint.
4. Right-click, then click [Insert WPT].
5. Right-click, then click [Finish].

How to insert a waypoint from the Waypoints page

Open the [Waypoints] page then right-click the waypoint to process. Select [Insert Af-
ter] or [Insert Before] as appropriate. A waypoint is added after or before the waypoint
selected. Edit the Latitude, Longitude, etc. as necessary.

12.5.5 How to delete a waypoint

How to delete a waypoint from the electronic chart area
Put the cursor on the waypoint to delete. Push the right button to show the context-
sensitive menu then select [Edit] followed by [Delete WPT].

How to delete a waypoint from the Waypoints page

Open the [Waypoints] page. Right-click the waypoint you want to delete then select
[Delete WPT].

12-12
 12. ROUTES

12.5.6 Geometry check of route

When you add a new waypoint, modify a waypoint or change other waypoint data, the
geometry check may reveal problems with the route. The problem(s) are indicated in
red and an appropriate message appears, also in red, on the [Waypoint] page. Refer
to the descriptions in this section for the geometry check error messages and the rem-
edies necessary to fix the route.

“Impossible turn at WPT XX” (XX=WPT no.)

The error message, next longitude and latitude and/or a turn radius appear in red.

00 ° 00 . 492 ‘ N 000 ° 01 .159 ‘ E 0.80

Next latitude and longitude Bad

radius

Impossible turn at WPT 3 Error message

This means that the geometry of route makes it impossible for the ship to accomplish
a turn. Typically, it is sufficient if you do the following, on the [Waypoints] page.

• Decrease the turn radius of the waypoint.

• Change latitude and longitude position of the waypoint or one of its neighbors.

“Bad Leg WPT XX to WPT XX” (XX=WPT no.)

The error message and a pair longitude and latitude appear in red.

00 ° 02 . 175 ‘ N 000 ° 01 .556 ‘ W

00 ° 00 . 492 ‘ N 000 ° 01 .159 ‘ E

Pair latitude and longitude

Bad Leg WPT 2 to WPT 3 Error message

This means that the length of a leg is too short to accomplish a turn. Typically, it is
sufficient if you do the following, on the [Waypoints] page.

• Change latitude and longitude position of the waypoint or one of its neighbors.

12-13
12. ROUTES

“Bad Turn at WPT XX” (XX=WPT no.)

The error message, turn radius and planned SPD indication (not shown in the figure
below) appear in red.

0.80

Bad
radius

Bad Turn at WPT 3 Error message

This means that the turn cannot be accomplished because the calculated ROT ex-
ceeds the MAX ROT. Typically, it is sufficient if you do the following, on the [Way-
points] page.

• Increase the turn radius of the waypoint.

• Decrease the planned SPD.

12.6 SAR Operations

The SAR feature facilitates search and rescue operations for MOB.

To use the SAR feature, get into the Voyage planning mode then do the following:

1. Click the [Planning] and [Route] buttons on the InstantAccess bar™ to show the
[Route Plan] dialog box then click the [SAR] button.

2. Enter your start point. To enter current position, click

the [Ship Position] button. (The start point can also
be entered directly on the screen. Put the cursor on
the start point, right-click the chart to show the con-
text-sensitive menu shown right then click [Set start
point].)
3. Enter your ship's speed and turn radius, current UTC date and time.
4. At [Search Point], enter the estimated position of the object to search. (The search
point can also be entered directly on the screen. Put the cursor on the search
point, right-click the chart to show the context-sensitive menu shown at
step 2step 2 then click [Set search point].

12-14
 12. ROUTES

5. Enter drift speed, drift direction, and the UTC date and time of the estimated po-
sition.
6. At the [Search Setting] window, select and set the search type, referring to the ta-
ble on the next page.

Search
Options Sample pattern
type
[Expand-
WPT7
ing square]
Start Leg 90.00° 6
Length
5 WPT3

90°
1 2 WPT4 WPT8
[Direction]: Set the direction to start
90.00° WPT2
the search, [Clockwise] or [Anti- WPT6
3
clockwise]. 4 Search
Pattern
90.00°
[Search Pattern Heading]: See the Heading

right figure.
WPT5
[Start Leg Length]: Enter the start
leg length. WPT1 Start Point
[Number of Legs]: Enter the num-
ber of legs to use.
Starting at the probable location of
the target, the search vessels ex-
pand outward in concentric
squares.
[Parallel
WPT13
tracks] Le
g6
/6
WPT10
Le
g5
WPT9 /6
Le
g4
WPT6 /6 WPT12
Le
g3
/6
WPT5 Le
g2 WPT11
/6
Search WPT8
Pattern
WPT7
[Direction]: Select the direction to Heading
(North ref.) WPT2 Le WPT4
g1
start the search, [Clockwise] or [An- S
Letart L
/6
Track space
ticlockwise]. ng eg
th
WPT3
WPT1
[Search Pattern Heading]: See the Start Point
right figure.
[Start Leg Length]: Enter the start
leg length.
[Track Space]: Enter the length of
the short legs in the route.
[Number of Legs]: Enter the num-
ber of legs to use.
The parallel tracks pattern is usual-
ly the first pattern used in undertak-
ing a search operation, since it
assumes that the object to be
searched.

12-15
12. ROUTES

Search
Options Sample pattern
type
[Sector
Search Pattern Heading
search]
WPT6 WPT3

radearch
ius
S
Sector #2 Sector #1
WPT9 60°
WPT4
[Direction]: Select the direction to WPT5 WPT2
start the search, [Clockwise] or [An-
ticlockwise].
[Search Pattern Heading]: See the Sector #3
right figure. WPT8
WPT7
[Search Radius]: Enter the search WPT1 Start Point
radius (in NM).
[Number of Sectors]: Enter the
number of sectors to use.
The sector search is used when the
position of the body is known accu-
rately and the search has to be
done over a small area. It is normal-
ly carried out in the area, where the
casualty or the object has been
sighted.

7. Click the [OK] button. The [Route Plan] dialog box appears and the system draws
the search and rescue route on the screen according to the search and rescue
settings.
8. To follow the route, click the [Exchange to MONIT] button.
Note: To monitor the route the following conditions must be met:
• The route must have at least two waypoints.
• The route must have no impossible turns.
• The route must have no bad turns.
• The route must have no bad legs.
• The route must have been checked.

9. To save the route, click the [Save] button and enter a name for the route, using
the keyboard on the Control Unit or the software keyboard.
If necessary you can drag waypoints to new position, like with an ordinary route.

12-16
 12. ROUTES

12.7 Route Bank

The route bank stores all the routes you have created. To show the route bank, in the
Voyage planning mode, select [Planning], [Plan] to show [Route Plan] dialog box, then
click the [Route Bank] button.

Route name Date created or modified

Total no. of waypoints 177.50NM Total distance of route

Position of start waypoint Position of final waypoint

In the Voyage planning mode, the waypoints of a route can be inserted into the route
currently selected.
1. Show the dialog box shown above.
2. Select the route for which you want to copy its waypoint(s) in the active route. For
example, select Route2.
3. Click the [Open] button.

Route1
Route2

4. At [Insert Position], select where you want to insert waypoints into the active route,
[Before] or [After] the waypoint selected in the next step. The [Reset] button re-
stores the route to the original condition.
5. In the left-hand column set the cursor on the waypoint where to insert waypoints
from the inactive route.
6. At the right-hand column, select the waypoint(s) to add to the active route. A con-
text-sensitive menu is available by right-clicking [WPT] in the inactive route. The
options available are [Select All], [Deselect All] and [Reverse] (reverse the order
of the waypoints in the inactive route).

12-17
12. ROUTES

7. Click the [<<] button to insert the waypoint(s) from the inactive route to the active
route. In the example below, WPT1 of the inactive route is inserted at the end of
the active route, becoming its waypoint 5.

Route1
Route2

8. Click the [OK] button to finish.

12.8 Route Optimization

12.8.1 Available route optimization strategies

After all waypoints are inserted, the route is optimized from the [Optimize] page in the
[Route Plan] dialog box. If no optimization strategy is selected, the optimization is
done with "max. speed," defined in ship parameters. Optimization calculates all pa-
rameters for route steering (course and distance between two waypoints, maneuver-
ing start point, WOP, etc.). There are four methods for optimization:

[MAX speed]: This calculation uses the maximum speed defined in the ship parame-
ters and multiplies by all reduction factors (weather, ice, fouling, etc.) together with
speed limits given for each waypoint to generate ETA. ETA may be entered, however
it is calculated with user-entered ETD and speed limit.

[Time table]: Calculates the speed required in order to arrive at destination at required
ETA. Maximum speed is never exceeded. The user enters ETD and ETA to calculate
speed to use. If, the user-entered ETA is earlier than that found with the Max. Speed
calculation, the Max. speed -calculated ETA will be indicated below the Time Table
ETA calculation figure. The calculated speed is shown on the [Route Information] box
as [Plan Speed].

[MAX profit]: Based on ETD, this calculation takes in account the fuel cost and the
fixed cost of the ship and calculates the most profitable speed (highest profit per time
unit).

[MIN cost]: Based on ETD, this calculation takes in account the fuel cost and the fixed
cost of the ship and calculates the speed that gives the minimum total cost. You need
to set [Cost Parameters] beforehand to use this feature.

12-18
 12. ROUTES

12.8.2 How to optimize a route

You can define Estimated Time of Departure (ETD), desired number of waypoints and
Estimated Time of Arrival (ETA) on the [Optimize] page in the [Route Plan] dialog box
to optimize your route.

1. Click the [Optimize] tab to open the [Optimize] page.

2. At [Type], click the drop-down list to select desired optimization strategy, referring
to subsection 12.8.1subsection 12.8.1 "Available route optimization strate-
gies""Available route optimization strategies".
3. Do the following:
1) At the [Set ETD] window, enter starting WPT and
date and time of departure. To enter the date, click
the gray box to the right of the [Date (UTC):] indi-
cation. The [Set date] window, shown right, ap-
pears. Click the applicable date in the calendar if
you are going to depart during the current month,
or click the applicable arrow on the month/year
button to select a different date. Click the [OK] but-
ton to save the ETA and close the window.
2) At the [Waypoints] window in the [Route Plan] di-
alog box, enter the maximum speed to use. For the Type [MAX profit], enter
[Income] value.
If necessary, click the [Edit Cost Parameters] button to enter fuel consumption
values.

12-19
12. ROUTES

3) For [Time table], the [Set ETA] window appears. Set the ETA to use for each
waypoint. To enter the Time and Date, click the [Date] window to show the [Set
date] window. Click the appropriate date. The date entered appears in the [Set
ETA] window.

4. Click the [Calculate] button to calculate optimal route. The [Optimized Speed/ETA]
dialog box shows the results of the calculation.

5. To apply the information to the route, click the [Apply to Route] button.
6. To save all optimization settings, click the [Save] button.
Note that the ETA used in route reports is the first-entered ETA.

12.8.3 How to plan a speed profile

A speed profile is defined by general max. speed and optimization types. These val-
ues are given while planning a route. You can define speed limit and optimize type in
the [Optimize] page of the [Route Plan] dialog box and in the [Waypoints] page you
can give planned and max. speed for each leg. The table below demonstrate how dif-
ferent optimize types and speed limits influence speed.

WPT MIN cost MAX profit Time table MAX speed

1 4.8 10.9 10.0 10
2 4.8 12.9 15.0 15
3 4.8 12.9 16.2 20
4 4.8 12.9 16.2 20
5 6.0 12.9 15.0 15
6 6.0 12.9 16.2 20
7 4.8 12.9 16.2 20
8 4.8 12.9 16.2 20
9 6.0 12.9 16.2 17
10 4.8 8.0 8.0 8

12-20
 12. ROUTES

12.9 How to Import Routes

12.9.1 How to import FMD-3x00, FCR-2xx9, FAR-3xx0 route data

You can import a route created on another FMD-3x00, FCR-2xx9, FAR-3xx0.

1. Set the USB flash memory that contains the route data to import in the USB port
on the Control Unit.

2. Click the [ ] button on the Status bar and select [Settings]. The confirmation
message appears.
3. Click the [OK] button.
4. Click the [File Import] tab.

Import file: 201310011155939.zip

Select data to import:
Setting data
Route/User chart
Playback data

5. Click the [Select file to import] button to select the file to import.
6. Check the data to import, at [Select data to import].
7. Click the [Import] button.

12.9.2 How to import FEA-2x07 route data

Routes created at an ECDIS FEA-2x07 can easily be imported to this ECDIS. Copy
the routes to a folder in a USB flash memory then follow this procedure. Note that FEA-
2x05-created routes cannot be imported.

1. Set the USB flash memory to the

USB port on the Control Unit.
2. Activate the Voyage planning mode.
3. On the InstantAccess bar™, click the
[Manage Data], [Data Import] and
[Route] buttons to show the [SELECT
DIRECTORY] dialog box.
4. Select the folder that contains the
route(s) to be imported then click the
[OK] button.
5. Check the route(s) to import then
click the [Import] button.

12-21
12. ROUTES

12.9.3 How to import RTZ, CSV, ASCII format route data

1. Set the USB flash memory to the USB port on the Control Unit.

0.92NM


RTZ

2. Activate the Voyage planning mode.

3. On the InstantAccess bar™, click the [Manage Data], [Route] and [Route Data
Management] buttons to show the [Route Data Management] dialog box.
4. At the drop-down list, select the import format. The choices are
[RTZ]: route data, XML format
[FEA-2x07]: route data, ECDIS FEA-2x07 format
[CSV Position]: waypoint position data, CSV format
[ASCII WPT Name Position]: waypoint name, position order, ASCII format
[ASCII Full]: all route data, ASCII format
[ASCII Full (Support Asymmetrical XTD Limit]: asymmetrical channel limit sup-
port, ASCII format
[CSV Route Sheet]: route data, CSV format
[RTE Format]: route data, RTE format
5. Click the [Import] button.
6. Select the file to import then click the [Open] button.
7. Click the [Close] button to close the dialog box.

12-22
 12. ROUTES

12.10 How to Export Route Data

12.10.1 How to export FAR-3xx0 route data

You can export route data to share the data with other FMD-3x00, FCR-2xx9 or FAR-
3xx0 units.

1. Set a USB flash memory in the USB port on the Control Unit.

2. Click the [ ] button on the Status bar and select [Settings]. The confirmation
message appears.
3. Click the [OK] button.
4. Click the [File Export] tab.

Playback data

5. At [Select data to export], check only [Route/User chart].

6. Click the [Export] button to save the data to the USB flash memory.

12.10.2 How to export route data in RTZ, CSV, ASCII format

1. Set the USB flash memory to the USB
port on the Control Unit.
2. Activate the Voyage planning mode.
3. On the InstantAccess bar™, click the
[Manage Data], [Route] and [Route
Data Management] buttons to show the
[Route Data Management] dialog box.
4. At the drop-down list, select the import
format. The choices are 0.92NM
[RTZ]: route data, XML format 

[CSV Position]: waypoint position data,

CSV format RTZ
[ASCII WPT Name Position]: waypoint
name, position order, ASCII format
[ASCII Full]: all route data, ASCII format
[ASCII Full (Support Asymmetrical XTD Limit]: Asymmetrical channel limit sup-
port, ASCII format
Note: When route transfer is enabled [Route transfer (LAN)] appears in the drop-
down list, but is not selectable (see section 12.13section 12.13).
5. Check the route(s) to export then click the [Export] button.

12-23
12. ROUTES

6. Select the destination to save the exported data.

7. Click the [OK] button.
8. Click the [Close] button to close the dialog box.

12.11 How to Delete Routes

1. Click the [PLAN] button on the Status bar to get into the Planning navigation
mode.
2. Click the [Manage Data] button on the InstantAccess bar™ followed by the
[Route] button.

0.92NM


RTZ

3. Put a checkmark in the check box to the left of the route name.
4. Click the [Delete] button. The confirmation message appears.
5. Click the [OK] button.
6. Click the [Close] button to close the dialog box.

12-24
 12. ROUTES

12.12 How to Transfer Routes

The route transfer feature lets you send and receive route data (RRT sentence)
among the units connected in the LAN. Information about transmitted and received
route data is stored in the route transfer log (see section 19.6section 19.6).

Note: This feature is not available with our FAR-2xx7 or FAR-2xx8 series radars.
When you start monitoring a route, the route will be automatically sent to the radar
connected in the network, regardless of the setting of this function.

12.12.1 How to turn route transfer on/off

To turn the route transfer feature on or off, do the following:

1. Open the menu, then click [Shared] and [Route Transfer] to show the following di-
alog box.

2. Click the function button (circled in the figure above) to change its label to read
[Func ON] (route transfer is enabled) or [Func. OFF] (route transfer is disabled)
as required.
When route transfer is enabled, the following functions are also enabled:
• Send/receive monitored routes
• Send/received planned routes
3. Use the radio buttons to select what to do when receiving route data having the
same name as existing route data - [Reject], [Overwrite], [Ask every time].
• [Reject]: Don’t save received route data. When route data is being received, a
pop-up message informs you that the data will not be saved.
• [Overwrite]: Previously existing route data is written over. No notification of the
overwriting is given.
• [Ask every time]: The [Route Transfer] dialog box appears. Click applicable but-
ton, referring to the description below.

12-25
12. ROUTES

• [Reject]: Route data is not saved.

• [Save for later use]: Route data is saved. (You can write over existing route
data or save received route data under a new name.)
4. Click the Save button to save your settings, then click the close button to finish
and close the window.
With route transfer selected to ON, the option [Route Transfer (LAN)] is added to
the drop down list box in the [Route Data Management ]dialog box.

12.12.2 How to send and receive monitored routes

Sending monitored routes
The ECDIS mode sends the route data for a route which is selected for monitoring to
other equipment with the ECDIS mode enabled and connected to the same network.
This is done automatically when route transfer is enabled and route monitoring is ini-
tiated.

Receiving monitored routes

When a route is received from another unit with the ECDIS mode enabled and on the
same network, the [Route Transfer] window appears.

12-26
 12. ROUTES

Select the appropriate handling for the received route from the buttons at the base of
the [Route Transfer] window.

• [Reject]: Route data is not saved.

• [Save for later use]: Route data is saved. (You can write over existing route data or
save received route data under a new name.)
• [Start Monitoring]: Moves the received route to the Route Monitor. This button is not
selectable until the route is checked.
• [Check Route]: Check route for safe navigation. The results are shown the [Check
Results] page. After the check is complete, the [Start Monitoring] button becomes
selectable.

12.12.3 How to send and receive planned routes

Sending a planned route
You can send a planned route to other units with the ECDIS mode enabled and in the
same network.

1. Click the [PLAN] button on the Status bar to get into the Voyage planning mode.
2. On the InstantAccess bar™, click the [Manage Data] and [Route] buttons to show
the [Route Data Management] dialog box.
3. Place a check in the box to left of the route(s) to transfer, then select Route trans-
fer (LAN) from the drop-down box.
4. Select [Export].
The selected route(s) are transfered to the units with the ECDIS mode enabled
and connected to the same network.
Note: If route transfer fails, the message "No response of route transfer. Please try
again route transfer." appears. Check connections, then retry the above procedure.

Receiving a planned route

When a planned route is received with same name as an existing route, it is handled
in the manner set at step 3 of section 12.12.1section 12.12.1.

For all other received routes, the system automatically saves the route.

12-27
12. ROUTES

12.13 Reports
This chart radar generates reports for waypoints in the selected route. If connected to
a printer, reports can be printed by clicking the [Print Text] button. Text in reports can
be searched with the [Find] button.

To generate a report, do the following:

1. Click the [Plan] button to go to the Voyage planning mode.

2. Click the [Report] button followed by the [Route] button. Click applicable “report”
button.

The following dialog box appears.

177.50NM

3. Select the appropriate route then click the [Open] button to show the selected re-
port. See the next several pages for examples.

12-28
 12. ROUTES

WPT table report

The WPT report contains the following information:

• Route name
• Date of report
• Waypoint no.
• Length of waypoint
• Distance remaining in route
• Position in latitude and longitude
• Planned courses and steering methods (RL (RhumbLine), GC (GreatCircle))
• Turning radius
• Planned speeds
• Estimated times of arrival (ETA)
• ETD from waypoint 1 (start point)
• ETA to waypoint “x” (final waypoint)
• Total length of route
• Estimated time required to run route using planned speeds and courses

12-29
12. ROUTES

Full WPT report

You can generate a full waypoint report for the route selected. The report includes the
following for each waypoint.

• Route name
• Date of report
• Waypoint no.
• Position in latitude and longitude
• Planned radius
• XTD (Channel) limit (If set individually, port and starboard channel limits are sepa-
rated with a diagonal.)
• Planned speed
• Planned course
• ETA
• Time difference from UTC
• Steering mode (rhumb line or great circle) to each waypoint
• ROT
• Margin for channel limit
• Speed Max
• Leg length
• Time used

12-30
 12. ROUTES

Passage plan report

The passage plan report generates waypoint information for each waypoint in the
route selected.

• Route name
• Date of report
• Waypoint no.
• Position in latitude and longitude
• Length
• Cumulative length
• Planned course
• Steering method (RL or GC)
• Name of waypoint

12-31
12. ROUTES

This page is intentionally left blank.

12-32
13. USER CHARTS

13.1 Introduction
User charts are overlays that the user creates to indicate safety-related objects and
areas. They can be displayed on both the radar display and the electronic chart. These
charts are intended for pointing out safety-related items like position of important nav-
igation marks, safe area for the ship, etc. User charts areas can be used to activate
alerts and indications based on user-defined danger symbols, lines and areas. When
route or own ship estimated position is going to cross a user chart symbol, line or area
that is defined as a dangerous one, an alert or indication is generated by the system.
See the chapter on chart alerts.

A user chart consists of various objects (points, lines, text, symbols, etc.). The maxi-
mum number of points per user chart is 300 (a circle is one point, a rectangle is four
points). You may link up to five user charts to a route, for a max. of 1,500 user chart
points per route.

The user chart is displayed on the radar display and its position and shape is based
on the ship's actual position. When own ship is moving in the area covered by the user
chart, the elements of the user chart are superimposed on the radar, with a maximum
of 80 of the nearest elements displayed.

13.1.1 Objects of user charts

Below is a description of the objects used in a user chart.

• Tidal: There are two types of tidals, current and predicted.

• Line: You can define four different types of lines. Lines can be used in chart alert
calculation and/or display on the radar:
• Navigation lines: Displayed on both the radar display and the chart display. Nav-
igation lines are reference lines for coast line.
• Coast line: Displayed on both the radar and the chart display. Coastal line is usu-
ally a well-defined (by chart digitizer) multi-segment line showing the coastline.
The user is able to create this type of line in case there is no suitable chart avail-
able over desired area in S57 format.
• Depth contour: Displayed on both the radar and chart display. Depth line shows
the chosen depth levels. The user is able to create this type of line in case there
is no suitable chart available over desired area in or S57 format.
• Route line: Displayed on both the radar display and the chart display. Route lines
are zones for anchoring, traffic separation lines, etc.
• Clearing line: A clearing line is used to define a line which a vessel can sail to avoid
navigational hazards. A clearing line can be of the NMT (Not More Than) or NLT
(Not Less Than) type. Displayed on the chart display only.
• Area: The operator can define closed areas, which the system can use to detect
safe water areas. If route or estimated ship position is going to cross the area, the
system generates a warning to the user. These areas can be used to specify safe

13-1
13. USER CHARTS

areas as defined by the master or by the policy of the ship's owner. They are always
available regardless of the type of chart material used.
• Circle: The operator can define an area with a circle, which can define a location to
avoid. If route or estimated ship position is going to cross the area, the system gen-
erates a warning to the user. These areas can be used to specify safe areas as de-
fined by the master or by the policy of the ship's owner. They are always available
regardless of the type of chart material used.
• Label: There are two types of labels: point and label. A "point" (i) is mainly used to
denote position of objects, such as buoys, light houses, fixed targets, wrecks, etc.
Points can be used in chart alert calculation. A "label" provides user-entered text to
show on the display.

13.2 How User Charts are Synced

User chart data can be shared between this ECDIS and other like units (FMD-3x00,
FCR-2xx9 or FAR-3xx0), through the LAN.A minimum of two units is required. Turn
on all units beforehand to enable syncing. The sync source (master unit) is automati-
cally assigned by the system when each unit is powered. For configurations with three
or more units, two units are assigned as a sync source and have priority regardless of
their power status (ON or OFF). The priority is assigned as follows:

1) ECDIS unit assigned as the Planning ECDIS.

2) ECDIS unit assigned with the lowest unit number at installation.
3) CHART RADAR unit assigned with the lowest unit number at installation.
Be aware that if a unit is turned off, some user chart data may be deleted. Two exam-
ples are shown below.

Using ECD001 and ECD002

This example assumes that ECD002 is assigned as a Planning ECDIS.

1. ECD002 is off; ECD001 is powered and a user chart is created at ECD001. Even
though ECD002 is the Planning ECDIS, user chart data is not transferred to
ECD002 because the power is turned off.
2. ECD002 is turned on. As this unit is assigned as a Planning ECDIS, ECD001’s
user chart data is deleted.

13-2
 13. USER CHARTS

Using ECD001, ECD002 and CRA001

This example assumes that ECD001 and ECD002 is assigned as a Planning ECDIS.

1. ECD001/002 are both turned off; CRA001 is powered and a user chart is created
on CRA001. user chart data is not transferred as both ECD001 and ECD002 are
turned off.
2. ECD001 is turned on. As this unit is assigned as a Planning ECDIS, CRA001’s
user chart data is deleted.
If the operator clicks the PLAN button on the Status bar when one or more units (in-
cluding the master unit) is turned off, one of the following messages appears.

Turn all units in the same network on, then plan or edit the user chart as required.

13-3
13. USER CHARTS

13.3 How to Create a User Chart

You can create and modify a user chart in the Voyage planning mode.

To make a complete user chart, do the following:

1. Click the [PLAN] button on the Status bar to go to the Voyage planning mode.
2. Click the [Planning] and [User Chart] buttons on the InstantAccess bar™ to show
the user chart palette and the [User Chart] dialog box.
3. Click the [New] button on the [User Chart] dialog box to create a new chart.

Tidal Area

Line Circle

Clearing
Label
line
4. Click the desired object (button) on the palette.The [Tidal], [Line], [Clearing line]
and [Label] buttons have multiple choices. Right-click the respective button to
show a context sensitive menu. The choices available for each object are shown
below.
Tidal: Current, Predicted
Line: Coast, Nav, Route, Depth
Clearing line: NMT (Not More Than), NLT (Not Less Than)
Label: Label, Point
5. Put the cursor on the location to insert the object then push the left button. See
the figure below for how to construct lines, areas and circles. For the “Tidal” object,
you can set Orientation, Strength and Time from the dialog box. With the “Label”
object you can enter text and show that text on the screen.
Note: An object can also be put at the center of the screen. Do steps 1-4 in this
procedure. On the [User Chart] dialog box, right-click the box to the left of [Object]
then select [Add Object] from the pop-up menu.

13-4
 13. USER CHARTS

(3) Click (1) Click

(2) Click
(4) Right-click;
select [Finish].
(2) Drag cursor;
(1) Click click to set.

1) Put cursor where to locate center of circle

then click.
2) Drag cursor to set radius; click to set.
How to create a line How to create a circle

(1) Click

(2) Click

(4) Right-click;
select [Finish].
(3) Click

How to create an area

6. When you insert an object, the following is done in the [User Chart] dialog box:
- Name of the object button appears in the [Object] window
- Latitude and longitude position of the object is displayed
- Total object count is updated
7. To enter a name for the object click the appropriate location in the [Name] window
then use the software keyboard on the Control Unit to enter a name.
Note: The name entered for circles and areas can be shown inside the area or
circle on the screen. For details, see page 8-10page 8-10.
8. To show the object on the radar display, click the corresponding box in the [Radar]
window to show a checkmark in the box.
For the label, line, clearing line, area and circle, click the corresponding box in
the [Danger] window to use or don't use the object in chart alert calculation. Show
a red checkmark to use the object in chart alert calculation.
For the area, circle and line, you can add Notes as shown below. See the de-
scription and figure below for a description of Notes.
1) Enter the text for the Notes in the [Description] box.
2) Click the box in the [Notes] window of the [User Chart] dialog box to set the
message indication.
• [E] (entering): Shows the message when the own ship enters into the ob-
jects (area or circle). For line setting, shows the message when the own ship
reaches range that is defined in the [Range of notes] menu, from the posi-
tion of setting in the [Notes].
• [P] (passing): Shows the message when the own ship runs over 10 NM in
the objects (area or circle).
• Empty: Shows nothing.

13-5
13. USER CHARTS

3) At the [Range of notes] (shown only for line) input box, enter the distance from
the Notes position at which to display the Notes.
Note: You cannot select both [Danger] and [Notes] for these symbols; select
either [Danger] or [Notes].

What are Notes?

“Notes” provide, in the Voyage navigation mode, messages for the operator
relative to your vessel’s position. When own ship is x miles from an area or cir-
cle chart object, a message appears in the [Monitor Note] dialog box. The mes-
sage appears for a line (set in [Range of notes]) when own ship is within x
miles of the line or x miles after passing the line.

Location of
Notes
i
Notes
range
setting

Own Position
The pop-up window at right
appears when own ship
approaches a user chart object
within the range set.
Example shown for “E” setting
(approaching object).
9. To continue entering the same symbol, click a new location on the screen and do
step 3. To enter a different symbol, do steps 3 and 4.
10. After you have entered all necessary objects, click the [Save] button.
Note: If the [Save] button is not shown, update the user chart to show the button.
11. The [Save user chart] window appears. Enter a name for the user chart and com-
ments then click the [Save] button.
The figure on the next page shows a user chart and the corresponding entries in the
[User Chart] dialog box.

13-6
 13. USER CHARTS

• The Line with the name "Coast" is a coastline.

• The Circle has the Notes "E" which means the message set in the [Description] box
when the own ship enters the circle will be shown.
• The Tidal marks line marks a tidal (current).
• The Area has Radar and Danger checked. This means the area is shown on the radar
display and is used in chart alert calculation.
• The Label with the name "Point No. 1" is a point label and is also shown on the radar
display.
• The Label with the name "Wreck" is a common label and has Danger checked; it is
used in chart alert calculation.

CIRCLE

LI
N
E
(C
TIDAL

oa
st
)
LABEL (Point)

LABEL (Label)
AREA

How to use the Undo feature

The Undo feature, available when creating a route and a user chart, can be accessed
from the [UNDO] button on the InstantAccess bar™, use double-click, or the context-
sensitive menu. In user chart creation the feature is used with object and text input as
follows:

Tidal, Circle, Current, Label: Delete last-entered object.

Area, Line: Erase last-entered point. For [Area], the area must have at least four
points. And for a [Line], there must be at least three points.
Text input: Erase last-entered character or character string.

13-7
13. USER CHARTS

13.4 How to Edit Objects on a User Chart

User chart object locations and names can be edited using the procedure below.

1. Referring to step 1 and step 2 in section 13.3section 13.3, show the [User Chart]
dialog box.
2. Click [Select] to show the [Select User Chart] di-
alog box.
3. Select the chart with objects to edit, then click
[OK]. The selected chart’s objects appear in the
[User Chart] dialog box. The chart objects also
appear on the currently displayed chart.
4. Edit the chart object information as required. You
can also edit the objects on the chart display.

How to move objects

Drag and drop the object. For circles, polygons, etc,
click the outer line of the area to drag and drop.

How to change corner points in lines and areas

Drag and
drop point to
new location

Drag and
drop point to
new location

How to change corner point on a line How to change corner point in an area

How to delete points in lines and areas

Place the cursor on the point to delete, right-click to show the context menu, then se-
lect [Delete]. The point is removed and the object is redrawn.

How to insert a corner point on a line or area

Put the cursor on the location where to insert a corner point, right-click the display area
to show the context-sensitive menu then select [Insert].

Note: You can also insert a point from the [User Chart] dialog box with the following
procedure.
1) Select the line or area from the [User Chart] dialog box.
2) At the bottom-right of the User Chart dialog, where the Latitude/Longitude ap-
pears, right-click the location for the new point. The context menu appears.
3) Click [Insert Before] or [Insert After] as required to insert a new point.
4) Adjust the latitude and longitude for the new point as required.
5) Click [Save] to save the changes and close the [User Chart] dialog box.

13-8
 13. USER CHARTS

13.5 How to Delete Objects from a User Chart

You can delete objects from a user chart with the following procedure.

1. Referring to step 1 and step 2 in section 13.3section 13.3, show the [User Chart]
dialog box.
2. Click [Select] to show the [Select User Chart] dialog box.
3. Select the chart with objects to delete, then click [OK]. The selected chart’s ob-
jects appear in the [User Chart] dialog box. The chart objects also appear on the
currently displayed chart.
4. Click the box to the left of the object to delete. A check mark appears. You can
select multiple objects in this manner.
5. Click the [Delete] button to remove the marked object(s).
Note: You can also delete an object from the context menu. Right-click the object
to delete to show the context menu, then select [Delete].
6. Click [Save] to save the changes and close the [User Chart] dialog box.

13.6 How to Copy User Chart Objects

You can copy user chart objects from one chart (the “origin” chart), then paste them
onto a different user chart (“destination” chart) with the following procedure.

1. Referring to step 1 and step 2 in section 13.3section 13.3, show the [User Chart]
dialog box.
2. Click [Select] to show the [Select User Chart] dialog box.
3. Select the “origin” chart, then click [OK].
4. Repeat step 2 and step 3 to select the “destination” chart.
5. On the [Select User Chart] dialog box, click the tab for the “origin” chart.
6. Check the box(es) for the object(s) you want to copy.
7. Click the [Copy] button.
8. On the [Select User Chart] dialog box, click the tab for the “destination” chart.
9. Click [Paste]. The objects selected at step 6 are copied to the chart.
10. Click [Save] to save the changes and close the [User Chart] dialog box.

13-9
13. USER CHARTS

13.7 How to Select the User Chart Objects to Display

User charts can be displayed on the electronic chart. Open the [Mariner] page in the
[Symbol Display] menu and check the user chart items to display. Select the degree
of transparency for the objects with [Density].

Note: Alpha blending technology is used for transparency effects.

13.8 How to Import User Chart Data

13.8.1 How to import user chart data from other units

You can import user chart data from other units (FMD-3x00, FCR-2xx9 or FAR-3xx0)
with the following procedure. For FEA-2x07 user charts, see
section 13.8.2section 13.8.2.
1. Set the USB flash memory to the USB port on the Control Unit.

2. Click the button on the InstantAccess bar™, then select [Settings]. A confir-
mation pop up window appears.
3. Click OK to show the [Settings] menu.
4. Click the [File Import] tab, then click the [Select file to import] button. The open file
dialog box appears.

5. Select the file to import, then click the [Open] button. The open file dialog closes.

13-10
 13. USER CHARTS

6. Click the box to the left of [Route/User chart] in the "Select data to import:" section
of the [File Import] tab.
7. Click [Import].

13.8.2 How to import a user chart created with ECDIS FEA-2x07

User charts created at the ECDIS FEA-2x07 can easily be imported to this ECDIS.
Copy the user charts to a folder (see chapter 17 in the operator’s manual of the FEA-
2x07) in a USB flash memory then do as follows. Note that FEA-2x05 created user
charts cannot be imported.

1. Set the USB flash memory to the USB port on the Control Unit.
2. Activate the Voyage planning mode.
3. Click the [Manage Data], [Data Import] and [User Chart] buttons to show the [SE-
LECT DIRECTORY] dialog box.

USB Flash 04.04.2013 19:23

4. Select the folder that contains the user chart(s) to be imported then click the [OK]
button.

User Chart Data Import from legacy ECDIS

5. Check the user chart(s) to import then click the [Import] button.

13-11
13. USER CHARTS

13.8.3 How to import RTZ format user charts

1. Set the USB flash memory to the USB port on the Control Unit.
2. Click the [PLAN] button on the Status bar to go to the Voyage planning mode.
3. Click the [Manage Data] button on the InstantAccess bar™ followed by the [User
Chart] button. The [User Chart Data Management] dialog box appears.
4. Click [Import]. The [SELECT DIRECTORY] pop up window appears.
5. Select the folder that contains the user chart(s) to be imported then click the [OK]
button.
6. Check the user chart(s) to import then click the [Import] button.
7. Click [Close].

13.9 How to Export User Chart Data

You can save user chart data to a USB flash memory and share the data with other
units (FMD-3x00, FCR-2xx9 or FAR-3xx0).

13.9.1 How to export user chart data created on the FMD-3x00

1. Set the USB flash memory to the USB port on the Control Unit.

2. Click the button on the InstantAccess bar™, then select [Settings]. A confir-
mation pop up window appears.
3. Click OK to show the [Settings] menu.
4. Click the [File Export] tab.

Playback data

5. Check [Route/User chart], then click the [Export] button.

13.9.2 How to export RTZ format user chart data

1. Set the USB flash memory to the USB port on the Control Unit.
2. Click the [PLAN] button on the Status bar to go to the Voyage planning mode.
3. Click the [Manage Data] button on the InstantAccess bar™ followed by the [User
Chart] button. The [User Chart Data Management] dialog box appears.
4. Check the user charts to export.
5. Click the [Export] button. The [SELECT DIRECTORY] pop up window appears.

13-12
 13. USER CHARTS

6. Select the destination folder then click the [OK] button.

7. Click [Close].

13.10 How to Delete User Charts

1. Click the [PLAN] button on the Status bar to get into the Planning navigation
mode.
2. Click the [Manage Data] button on the InstantAccess bar™ followed by the [User
Chart] button.

3. Check the user chart(s) to delete.

4. Click the [Delete] button.

13.11 User Chart Reports

1. Click the [Plan] button to go to the Voyage planning mode.
2. Click the [Report] button followed by the [User Chart] button to show the [Select
User Chart] dialog box.

3. Select the appropriate user chart then click the [OK] button to show the selected
report. See the next several pages for examples of reports.

13-13
13. USER CHARTS

Full report
The full report contains information about each tidal, line, clearing line, area, circle and
label in the user chart selected. Check or uncheck the boxes at the top of the display
to select the report(s) to display.
Check the report(s) to display.

Tidal report
A tidal report provides:

• Position of the tidal

• Type of tidal (current or predicted)
• Speed and direction of the tidal
• Time of the tidal

13-14
 13. USER CHARTS

Line report
A line report provides:

• Line name
• Latitude and longitude position of each point on the line
• Where a check mark is input in the column for [Radar], [Danger] or [Notes] on the [Us-
er Chart] dialog box, "On Radar", "Danger" or "Has Notes" appears in the report.

Clearing line
The Clearing line report shows the name and position of clearing lines entered on the
chosen user chart selected.

• "On radar" is shown if the area is shown on the radar overlay.

• "Danger" is shown when a check mark is input in the column for [Danger] on the [User
Chart] dialog box

13-15
13. USER CHARTS

Area report
An area report provides:

• Area no. and area name

• The latitude and longitude position of each point of the area
• The description of the area
• Where a check mark is input in the column for [Radar], [Danger] or [Notes] on the [Us-
er Chart] dialog box, "On Radar", "Danger" or "Has Notes" appears in the report.

Circle report
The circle report provides:

• The position and radius of circles drawn on a user chart.

• Where a check mark is input in the column for [Danger] or [Notes] on the [User Chart]
dialog box, "Danger" or "Has Notes" appears in the report.

Label report
A label report provides:

• Latitude and longitude position of each label

• Name of each label
• Where a check mark is input in the column for [Danger] or [Notes] on the [User Chart]
dialog box, "Danger" or "Has Notes" appears in the report.

13-16
 13. USER CHARTS

13.12 How to Select the User Chart(s) to Use in Route

Monitoring
Do the procedure below to monitor a user chart without linking it to a route. Click the
[NAVI] button on the Status bar then do as shown below.

1. Click the [Voyage], [User Chart] and [Select/Unselect] buttons on the

InstantAccess bar™ to open the [Select Monitor User Chart] dialog box. The [Se-
lect Monitor User Chart] can also be selected by right clicking anywhere inside the
[Route] information box (right side of screen) and then clicking [Monitor User
Chart].

2. Check the chart(s) to use in the [Stored User Chart] window, then click the [<<]
and [Open] buttons. The [Monitor Information] dialog box automatically appears,
and shows the user charts selected for use in route monitoring. Click a user chart
name to see details, in the [Contents] window.

Check ETA
WPT: 3
Distance: 0.00NM
Plan: 10:42 05 Jun 2016
Actual: 10:25 05 Jun 2016
To Localtime
Off Plan:
SPD Calculation:
10 25 05 Jun 2016
Start Calculate
Suggested SPD: 0.0kn

How to cancel use of a user chart during route monitoring

To cancel only a user chart during route monitoring, get into the Voyage navigation
mode, then click the [Voyage], [User Chart], [Select/Unselect] buttons on the Instant-
Access bar™ to show the [Select Monitor User Chart] dialog box. From the [Selected
User Chart] list, select the user chart(s) to cancel, then click the [>>], and [Open] but-
tons.

To cancel both route and user chart in route monitoring, get into the Voyage navigation
mode, then click the [Voyage] and [Stop Monitor] buttons on the InstantAccess bar™.

13-17
13. USER CHARTS

This page is intentionally left blank.

13-18
14. HOW TO MONITOR ROUTES
Route monitor is a means for permanent monitoring of the ship's behavior relative to
the monitored route. The [Monitor Information] box displays the data on the ship's po-
sition relative to the monitored route. The monitored route consists of the following in-
formation, displayed in the electronic chart area:

• The route is displayed with red dots.

• The limits of channels of each leg are displayed with solid red lines. These limits are
used to detect chart alerts when you are monitoring the route. See
chapter 11chapter 11 for how to set those limits.
• Each leg has information about planned speed, shown in the [Monitor Information]
dialog box.
• Each leg has information about planned course to steer.
Note 1: In order to display charts with correctly updated situation, always use current
date as Update Review and Display date during your voyage. If your voyage lasts
more than one week, set current date at least once per week during your voyage. See
section 9.2section 9.2 for how to set those dates.
Note 2: XTD is the distance, in a straight line, from the
monitored route to the CCRP. CCRP is set at installation. Monitored route
Where more than one CCRP is set, select the CCRP to
use from the [CCRP] page of the [Settings] menu (see
section 22.12section 22.12).

14.1 How to Start Route Monitoring XTD

: CCRP
Method 1: InstantAccess bar™
In the Voyage navigation mode, click the [Voyage], [Route] and [Select] buttons on the
InstantAccess bar™. Click a route then click the [Open] button.

177.50NM

14-1
14. HOW TO MONITOR ROUTES

Method 2: Selection from the Route information box

Right-click the [Route Information] box to show the context-sensitive menu, then se-
lect [Select Route] to show the [Select Route] dialog box. Select a route then click the
[Open] button.

177.50 NM

Red box indicates

detailed information
available in larger scale.

Chart alert area

(warning)

Waypoint

14-2
 14. HOW TO MONITOR ROUTES

About monitoring routes

 When you select a route for monitoring, the messages shown below appear, on the
[Select Route] dialog box or in a message window, when a route cannot be opened
for monitoring.
• "Impossible turn at WPT XX" (XX=waypoint no.). Geometry of the route makes it
impossible for the ship to accomplish a turn. Modify the route to make the turn pos-
sible.
• "Bad Leg WPT XX to WPT XX" (XX=waypoint no.). The length of a leg is too short,
making it impossible for the ship to accomplish a turn. Lengthen the offending leg
to accomplish the turn.
• Bad Turn at WPT XX" (XX=waypoint no.). The calculated ROT exceeds the maxi-
mum ROT, making it impossible for the ship to accomplish a turn. Increase the ra-
dius of the turn or lower the planned speed.
• "Unchecked / Check condition differs". The route has not been checked. Check the
route, on the [Alert Parameters] page.
• "Monitored in the NAVI mode". The route is currently being monitored.
• "More than one WPT needed". The route has only one waypoint. Add more way-
points to the route.
• "Route monitoring cannot be started. Please check ship’s position and conditions."
Click the [OK] button to close the message. Check ship’s position and conditions
of the route.
 If you have small-scale chart(s) on display that have the whole eastern/western (0-
180°E/0-180°W) hemisphere and a part of the other hemisphere on display, there is
a limitation to display a route. To avoid this, set chart center so that the whole eastern/
western hemisphere is not on the screen.
 The route check which occurs after selecting a route can take longer with C-MAP
charts. Wait until the completion of the check.
 If, in the radar mode, route monitoring is stopped, the Alert 691 (ALF format: 10800,1)
"RM Stop - Exceed Max XTE", 692 (ALF format: 10800,2) "RM Stop - Disconnect
Sensors", or 693 (ALF format: 10800,3) "RM Stop - Other Causes" appears. If this oc-
curs, switch to the Chart for Radar mode. The "Monitoring Failed" pop-up window ap-
pears. Click the OK button. Find the reason why route monitoring was stopped and
then restart route monitoring.
 Route monitoring is temporarily stopped (route is grayed out) and an alert appears
when the signal for position, speed or heading is lost. To restore route monitoring,
change the sensor system from System to Local (from the Sensor Information box),
manually enter the lost data, check [Set Drift], then switch to the DR mode.
 Route data is sent to the radar at the start of route monitoring or when the ship transits
a waypoint. If a route is not displayed on the radar, stop then restart monitoring at the
radar chart. A route is erased from the radar when route monitoring is stopped or the
radar chart is restarted. To redisplay the route, stop then restart monitoring at the ra-
dar chart.
 When chart alerts are unchecked while planning a route (see
section 11.1.2section 11.1.2) and route monitoring is activated, a message appears
in the permanent warning box.
• [Safety Contour] unchecked: "Indication of crossing safety contour if Off. (in moni-
toring)"
• [Areas to be Avoided] unchecked: "Indication of navigational hazards is Off. (in
monitoring)"
• Other alerts unchecked: "Indication of some prohibited areas or areas with special
conditions is Off. (in monitoring)"
 If this radar is connected in the network to an FMD-3200/3300 ECDIS that is inter-
faced with an IEC 62065 Ed.2 compliant TCS (YDK Technologies PT-900, Tokyo Kei-
ki PR-9000, EMRI FAP-3000, Raytheon Anschutz NP-5400), the alert 174 (WPT
Approach) is generated at each waypoint if the TCS is not connected to the ECDIS in
route monitoring. Note that TCS is only available on FMD-3200/3300.

14-3
14. HOW TO MONITOR ROUTES

14.2 How to Stop Route Monitoring (Manual, Auto)

You can stop route monitoring in two ways:

• In the Voyage navigation mode, click the [Voyage] and [Stop Monitor] buttons.
Route monitoring is also stopped automatically.
• In the Voyage navigation mode, click the [Voyage], [Route] and [Unselect] buttons.
When alert 691 (ALF format: 10800,1), 692 (ALF format: 10800,2) or 693 (ALF format:
10800,3) occurs, route monitoring is stopped automatically. See the Troubleshooting
table in section 25.5section 25.5 for details.

14.3 How to Select What Parts of a Route to Display

You can specify what parts of the moni-
tored route to display. Click the [DISP],
[SET] and [Symbol DISP] buttons on the In-
stantAccess bar™. Click the [Route] tab.

14-4
 14. HOW TO MONITOR ROUTES

14.4 How to View Waypoint Information

Click the [Voyage] and [Monitor INFO] buttons on the InstantAccess bar™ to show the
[Monitor Information] dialog box. Click the [Waypoints] tab to show waypoint informa-
tion.

* Scroll list horizontally to

view items shown in the
right figure.

No. Item Description

1 [To WPT], [GO] The system selects a next waypoint automatically. Check that the To way-
button point is the desired one. The system will automatically advance to a next
waypoint when you pass the To waypoint. The default [To WPT] is WPT2.
If you desire a different one, select it here and the click the [GO] button.
[Distance] Distance from current position to selected waypoint.
[Departure] The time the route was selected for monitoring.
[Actual Average The average speed over the ground, measured every 30 seconds.
SPD]
2 Waypoint list The waypoint list provides for each waypoint WPT no., name, latitude and
longitude position, ETA, plan speed, bearing and distance to leg*, steering
mode ([Rhumbline] or [Greatcircle]), radius, XTD limit, speed max, margin
and local time.
*: The bearing to a leg and the display method for leg distance can be
changed. For details, see subsection 12.4.1subsection 12.4.1. Can be
changed. See "Leg/NM" on page 12-6"Leg/NM" on page 12-6.
3 [Check ETA] Parameters for checking ETA. The arrow to the left of [Check ETA] col-
window lapse or display the [Waypoints], [Linked User Chart] and [Check Results
]tabs.
[WPT], Select a WPT to find the distance to that waypoint from current position.
[Distance]
[Plan] The planned ETA to the selected waypoint.
[Actual] The actual ETA to the selected waypoint, if current speed is maintained.
[To Localtime] Switch between UTC and local time for ETA. For local time, the settings
used in the creation of the route are used for the ETA calculation. See
section 12.4.1section 12.4.1.
[Off Plan] The time difference between planned ETA and calculated ETA to final
WPT, when different. The indication is prefixed with "-" if earlier than
planned; "+" if later than planned.
[SPD Calcula- Enter speed and ETA (time and date) to find the speed to use to arrive by
tion] the ETA.

14-5
14. HOW TO MONITOR ROUTES

3 [Start Calculate] Click to start calculation. The button label changes to [Stop Calculate].
button
[Suggested The system calculates suggested speed so that ETA to the WPT selected
SPD] would be same as planned ETA if type of optimization was "Time table".
4 [Total WPTs] The total number of waypoints in the route.
[Total Distance] The total distance of the route.

14.5 How to View User Chart Information Linked Mon-

itoring Route
1. In monitoring route mode, click the [Voyage] and [Monitor INFO] buttons on the
InstantAccess bar™ to show the [Monitor Information] dialog box.
2. Click the [Linked User Chart] tab.

Check ETA
WPT: 3
Distance: 0.00NM
Plan: 10:42 05 Jun 2016
Actual: 10:25 05 Jun 2016
To Localtime
Off Plan:
SPD Calculation:
10 25 05 Jun 2016
Start Calculate
Suggested SPD: 0.0kn

The [Linked User Chart] list shows all the user charts linked with the monitored route
and their contents. Click a user chart name to show the contents of the chart in the
[Contents] window. For the [Check ETA] window, see the preceding page.

14.6 How to View User Chart Object Information in

Route Monitoring
In route monitoring, you can cursor pick user chart objects to show their information.
Put the cursor on the user chart symbol to show the pop-up menu. Select [User Chart
INFO] from the pop-up menu. Below are some examples of user chart info.

User chart INFO: Circle User chart INFO: Line User chart INFO: Area

14-6
 14. HOW TO MONITOR ROUTES

14.7 How to Change Monitored Route to Planned

Route
The monitored route can be transferred to the Voyage planning mode. This is useful
when you don't need the route for monitoring but want to edit it. To transfer the moni-
tored route, click the [Voyage], [Route] and [Move to Plan] buttons on the InstantAc-
cess bar™.

Up to five planned routes can be shown on the display. If you try to display another
route, the route list appears. Deselect a route in order to transfer the monitored route
to the Voyage planning mode.

Note: When the monitored route is changed to a planned route, using the [Move to
Plan] function, the operating mode changes from the Navigation voyage mode to the
Voyage planning mode.

14.8 How to Use Instant Track to Return to or Deviate

from Monitored Route
The instant track feature provides a temporary track, consisting of four waypoints, to
return to or deviate from the monitored route. Correct data from navigation sensors is
essential to this function.

There are two instant track modes: [Safe Off Track] and [Back to Track].
[Safe Off Track]: This mode provides a track from the monitored route to a safe loca-
tion to avoid collision or the like.
[Back to Track]: This mode creates a track to follow to return to the monitored route
when the vessel goes outside the channel limits.

The mode is automatically selected according to whether a monitored route is active

or not and the amount of off course. Further, if a monitored route is active while follow-
ing the instant track route, the instant track mode can be changed manually.

Manual mode
Condition Mode
switching
Neither monitored route nor instant track route ac- [Safe Off Track] No
tive.*
• Both monitored route and instant track route are [Safe Off Track] Yes
active.*
• The absolute value of off track is within the chan-
nel limit setting.
• Both monitored route and instant track route are [Back to Track] Yes
active.*
• The absolute value of off track is outside the chan-
nel limit setting.

* An additional instant track route can continuously be created and monitored while
monitoring the instant track route.

The parameters for the track (channel limit, turn radius, etc.) can be set on the [Instant
Track] page. See section 21.4section 21.4.

14-7
14. HOW TO MONITOR ROUTES

14.8.1 Safe off track mode

If it becomes necessary to deviate from the monitored route; for example, to avoid col-
lision, use the [Safe Off Track] mode to create an instant track to a safe location. An
instant track can be created without a monitored route.

1. When the monitored route is active, Click here to show drop

click the [Voyage] and [Instant Track] down list to select mode.
on the InstantAccess bar™ to show the
[Instant Track] dialog box. The mes-
sage "Please click a destination." ap-
pears on the [Planning] page.
Note 1: If a monitored route is active,
the [Back to Track] mode can also be
selected.
Note 2: If a monitored instant track
route is already active, an instant track
When monitored route is active
mode different from the currently active
one can be selected.
2. Click a destination. The location is marked with an orange circle and arrow. The
message "Please click a point to decide an angle." appears in the [Instant Track]
dialog box. The location must be within 50 NM of current position.
3. Roll the trackball to select the angle of approach to the destination then click.

Current position
Monitored route
T1
T2

WPT2 T3 Instant track

WPT2 T4
(orange)
Instant track
Destination waypoints
(orange)

1 Click destination point . 2 Click a location to set desired angle of approach.

A circle and arrow appear. Instant track is drawn.

The system uses ship position, speed, angle of approach to create an instant track
route. The track is also checked for hazardous objects and the like against the chart
alerts.
During the calculation, the [Instant Track] dialog box shows "Checking" in the [Status]
field. If, after completion of the calculation, the track is suitable, the message "OK" re-
places "Checking". The track and its waypoints, labeled [T1] - [T4], are colored orange.
The track is saved to the database as "InstantTrack_XXX" (XXX=001 - 400).
If clicking the [Clear] button while or after creating the track, the track is erased from the
screen.
If there is a problem with the track, an error message appears and the track is erased
from the screen. See section 14.8.3section 14.8.3 for all the instant track messages and
their meanings.
To return to the monitored route, click a waypoint on a leg of the route to create an
instant track route to use to return to the monitored route.

14-8
 14. HOW TO MONITOR ROUTES

14.8.2 Back to track mode

When the vessel goes off track, the Alert 172 (ALF format: 172) "Off Track Alarm" ap-
pears in the [Alert] box. To create an instant track to return to the monitored route, use
the [Back to Track] mode as follows:

1. When the monitored route is active, Click here to show drop

click [Voyage] and [Instant Track] on down list to select mode.
the InstantAccess bar™ to show the
[Instant Track] dialog box. The mes-
sage "Please click a WPT on Leg." ap-
pears on the [Planning] page.
Note 1: If a monitored route is active,
the [Safe Off Track] mode can also be
selected.
Note 2: If a monitored instant track
route is already active, an instant track
mode different from the currently active When monitored route is active
one can be selected. Further, a com-
pletely new instant track route to the original monitored route can be created.
2. Click a leg or a waypoint on the monitored route. The location must be within 50
NM of current position.
Monitored route
Current position

T1
WPT2 T2
WPT2

T3

 
Click a leg on monitored route. Instant track
(orange) Instant track
waypoints
Point of return to route (orange)

The system uses ship position, speed and final waypoint to create a track. The track
is also checked for hazardous objects and the like against the chart alerts.

During the calculation, the [Instant Track] dialog box shows "Checking" in the [Status]
field. If, after completion of the calculation, the track is suitable, the message "OK" re-
places "Checking". The track and its waypoints, labeled [T1] - [T3], are colored or-
ange. The track is saved to the database as "InstantTrack_XXX" (XXX=001 - 400).

If clicking the [Clear] button while or after creating the track, the track is erased from
the screen.

If there is a problem with the track, an error message appears and the track is erased
from the screen. See section 14.8.3section 14.8.3 for all the instant track messages
and their meanings.

14-9
14. HOW TO MONITOR ROUTES

14.8.3 Instant track messages

The table below shows all the instant track messages and their meanings.

(1) (4)
(2) (1)

(3)

Message Meaning Color

(1) Instant Track mode
"Back to Track" Back to track mode White
"Safe Off Track" Safe off track mode White
(2) Check result, error message
"Could not create the Track." The track could not be created. Yellow
"Too far destination from own ship." Selected destination is 50 NM or more Yellow
from current position.
"ROT data is not inputted correctly" No ROT data input, or data is incorrect. Yellow
Cannot create instant track.
"Checking..." Checking route. Red
"OK" Instant track checked and is suitable to Green
follow.
"NG" Instant track check failed. Red
"Check error." Route check error. Red
"Instant Track is expired." Route monitor timeout. Red
"Too many WPTs in monitoring More than 190 waypoints are in the Red
route." monitored route. (Instant track cannot
be created.)
(3) User operation message
"Please click a destination." Select a destination in the [Safe Off White
Track] mode.
"Please click a point to decide an Set the angle of approach in the [Safe White
angle." Off Track] mode.
"Please click a WPT on leg." Click a waypoint on a leg in the [Back to White
Track] mode
(4) Name of instant track route
InstantTrack_XXX Name of monitored instant track route White
(XXX: 001 - 400)

14-10
 14. HOW TO MONITOR ROUTES

14.8.4 Instant track details

You can see the location and alert type found in an
instant track by clicking the [Details] button on the
[Planning] page in the [Instant Track] dialog box.

Note: If the Status is not [OK], an alert (alarm or

warning priority, depending on set-ting) appears in
the Alert box.

14.8.5 How to monitor, stop monitoring an

instant track route
How to monitor an instant track route
If the route check results is "OK", click the [Monitor] button on the [Planning] page in
the [Instant Track] dialog box to start monitoring the instant track route. Click the but-
ton before the time remaining counts to zero, otherwise the instant track will be can-
celed, followed by the message "Instant Track is expired." After the [Monitor] button is
clicked the [Monitoring] page is opened. The [Monitoring] page shows the name of the
instant track and the instant track mode.

Click the
[Monitor]
button.

The vessel follows the instant track route in the same method as a monitored route,
which is grayed out to indicate it is inactive. For the instant track route connected to a
monitored route, the previous instant track route is also grayed out to show it is inac-
tive. Any additional instant track routes are erased.

To close the [Instant Track] dialog box, click the [Close] button. (The system continues
monitoring the instant track route.)

The following occurs when sensor data is lost while using the instant track function.

Monitoring
Result
condition
Instant track route • An instant track route under creation is deleted. No route can be
monitoring. created.
• The [Stop] button is pushed or the instant track route is followed
until its completion.
• After the instant track route is completed, an error message ap-
pears and the [Instant Track] dialog box closes.
No monitored An instant track route under creation is deleted.
route
Monitored route After the route is completed, an error message appears and the [In-
active stant Track] dialog box closes.

14-11
14. HOW TO MONITOR ROUTES

Note: If there is no original route (safe off-track mode only) or the original route is not
checked, the message "Not checked against ENC chart" appears in the permanent
warning box.

How to stop monitoring an instant track route

Click the [Stop] button on the [Monitoring] page
in the [Instant Track] dialog box to stop monitor-
ing the instant track route. The system returns to
monitoring the monitored route and the [Plan-
ning] page of the [Instant Track] dialog box
opens.

For the [Back to Track] mode, the instant track

mode is canceled when the vessel returns to the
monitored route. The instant track is grayed out
to show that is inactive.

14.8.6 How to change a monitored route when following an instant

track route (safe off track mode only)
Do the following to change a monitored route while following an instant track route.

1. While monitoring an instant track route,

click the [Original Route] button on the
[Monitoring] page in the [Instant Track] dia-
log box to show the [Select Route] dialog
box. Check [Planned Route] to show a list of
planned routes, or check [Instant Track] to
show a list of instant track routes.
2. Select the route to use. The original route or 177.50 NM

the instant track route currently in use can-

not be selected.
3. Click the [Open] button to close the dialog
box. The vessel starts following the newly
selected route.
When an instant track route is completed, the vessel starts following the route selected
at step 2.

14-12
 14. HOW TO MONITOR ROUTES

14.8.7 Button label and unit state

The label on the button at the position circled in the figure below changes according
to the state of the instant track.

Instant track state Button label

Creating [Monitoring]
Monitoring [Stop]
Return to original route after [Reset] (Instant track route is erased - another instant
back to track mode track route can be created.)

14.9 How to Share Route During Route Monitoring

With multiple EC-3000 units, you can share the route monitored on the master EC-
3000 unit with other units (FMD-3x00, FCR-2xx9 or FAR-3xx0).

Follow the procedure below to enabling the route sharing feature.

1. Open the menu, select [Monitoring] from the [Shared] menu to show the [Setting]
dialog box.

CRA001
CRA002

2. Right click the equipment ID of the unit to show the pop-up menu. Select [MAS-
TER], [BACKUP], [SYNC] or [CLEAR] as appropriate.
[MASTER]: Assigns selected unit as the master unit. One unit must be assigned
as the master unit.
[BACKUP]: Assigns the selected unit to share route monitoring. Only one unit can
be assigned to share route monitoring. When route monitoring starts on the mas-
ter, the route and its information are displayed on the backup. If the master stops
during route monitoring, the backup will act as the master.
[SYNC]: Selected unit receives and displays the route data output from the mas-
ter, and monitors the route displayed on the master.
[CLEAR]: Removes the selected unit from route monitoring sharing.
Note: To restore the original setting for units, click the [Status] column, then select
[Reset].
3. Click the [Save] button to save settings, then click the [Close] button to finish.

14-13
14. HOW TO MONITOR ROUTES

This page is intentionally left blank.

14-14
15. NAVIGATION TOOLS
This chapter presents the various navigation tools available with the system. With the
exception of the divider, the tools listed below are in the [Overlay/NAV Tools] box.

• TT/AIS (see chapters 3 and 4) • Predictor

• Echo*1 • Anchor watch
• Parallel index lines • Under keel clearance
• Look-ahead • Curved EBL*2
• Range rings • Divider

*1: Shown only when the [Echo] page is enabled at installation. Not available for B
types.

*2: Shown only when a EC-3000 with TCS functionality (optional specification) is con-
nected to the network.

15.1 How to Access the NAV Tools in the Overlay/

NAV Tools Box
The [Overlay/NAV Tools] box is located at bottom-right position on the screen. There
are two methods to access the NAV Tools.

• Click the page selection buttons to show the desired page.

• Right-click the Overlay/NAV Tools box to show the context-
sensitive menu, then click the desired page.
TT/AIS display Page name Minimize button
settings

Page
selection
buttons

Click this button to

open the TT/AIS
display settings
menu. For details on
TT/AIS settings, see
chapter 18.

[Overlay/NAV Tools] box ([CheckArea] page)

15-1
15. NAVIGATION TOOLS

15.2 Radar Overlay

If the Echo page is enabled at installation, you can show the radar echoes “overlaid”
on the chart (Voyage navigation mode only).

Note: For B type radars, the [Echo] page is not available.

Radar
echo

This ECDIS has many features to support exact match in scale and orientation of the
chart and radar echo image. Exact match of the radar echo image and chart is an es-
sential security feature. If the radar echo image and the chart display match, then the
mariner can rely on what he sees and the mariner also gets a very good confirmation
that his navigation sensors (such as gyro and position receivers) operate properly and
accurately. However, if the mariner is unable to achieve exact match, it is a very strong
indication that something is wrong and he should not rely on what he sees.
Selected scale of displayed chart also defines scale of radar overlay. When you
change the chart scale, the scale of the radar overlay is automatically changed. The
table below shows the standard scale and equivalent radar range.

Radar Standard Radar Standard

range (nm) scale range (nm) scale
0.25 1:4,000 6 1:90,000
0.5 1:8,000 12 1:180,000
0.75 1:12,000 24 1:350,000
1.5 1:22,000 48 1:700,000
3 1:45,000 96 1:1,500,000

15-2
 15. NAVIGATION TOOLS

15.2.1 How to show the radar overlay

Radar echoes can be output to the ECDIS and shown on its display. Like details on
S57 charts, the radar overlay can be displayed or removed from the chart display. The
transparency of the echo display can be set from the [Echo] page in the [Overlay/NAV
Tools] box. To activate and setup the radar overlay, do the following:

1. With the system in [RADAR] mode, begin radar transmission.

Note: While the system is preparing for radar transmission, the radar overlay is
not shown on the chart display.
2. Switch the system to [CHART for RADAR]
mode, then select the [Echo] page from the
[Overlay/NAV Tools] box.
3. Click the [ON/OFF] button at [Display] to show
[ON] (radar overlay ON) to activate the overlay.
"Status: OK" appears under [Antenna] if the ra-
dar signal is being received. "Status: No Data"
is displayed if there is no radar signal.
Note: The radar display, TT symbols and AIS OK
symbols can also be hidden by clicking
[CLEAR RADAR] on the Status bar.

4. [Echo Level] adjusts the sensitivity of the radar picture. To adjust, put the cursor
on the slider bar and roll the scrollwheel.
5. [Density] controls the "see through" behavior of the radar overlay. [100%] overlays
the radar echo on the chart without modification. "75%" displays radar echoes
faintly, and "25%" displays radar echoes somewhat faintly. It is recommended to
use 25% or 50% when navigating narrow channels, so as not to conceal land-
masses.
6. Click the [Antenna] drop-down list to select the radar that is to feed radar echoes.

15.2.2 Error Between Radar Echo Image and Chart

There are several reasons why the radar echo image and chart display do not match
exactly. The mismatch is a combination of several reasons and removing one reason
doesn't solve the mismatch perfectly. There is a fundamental difference between the
radar echo image and corresponding chart feature. The radar echo is a reflection from
the real life target and the actual position of the real life target is the front edge of the
radar echo. Therefore, the radar echo should start from the chart feature and exist as
far as the radar pulse length goes.

How to compensate for bearing error

Bearing error occurs in the following instances:

• Gyro error
• Inaccurate chart
• Improper installation parameters (radar overlay bearing offset)

15-3
15. NAVIGATION TOOLS

How to compensate for position error

Position is caused by the following:

• Inaccurate position
• Position offset
• Inaccurate chart
• Improper installation parameters (conning position offset, position receiver antenna
offset, radar overlay range offset)

15.2.3 Error Sources for Radar Echo Image and TT Mismatch

There are several reasons why the radar echo image and tracked target symbols do
not match exactly.

1. Different gyro value at radar overlay and at ECDIS.

2. Improper installation parameters (radar overlay bearing offset, radar overlay
range offset, conning position offset).
The example below shows how different gyro value set at radar overlay and at ECDIS
affect the display of the ECDIS.

Different gyro value at Equal gyro value at

radar and ECDIS radar and ECDIS

15-4
 15. NAVIGATION TOOLS

15.3 Parallel Index (PI) Lines

The parallel index lines are useful for keeping a con-
stant distance between own ship and a coastline or
a partner ship when navigating. There are six sets
of PI lines (PI-P6) and you can turn them on or off
individually. Select the PI line to process with the
[Display] pull-down list then click the [ON] or [OFF]
button as appropriate. One, two, three or six lines
can be shown - the actual number of lines shown
depends on the line interval.

Only one set can be shown.

15.3.1 How to activate, deactivate PI lines

Select the PI line(s) set to activate or deactivate with the [Display] drop-down list. Ac-
tivate or deactivate the set selected with the [ON], [OFF] button.

The [Func. ON], [Func. OFF] button globally activates, deactivates all PI lines selected
to [ON].

15.3.2 PI line bearing reference

PI line bearing reference may be relative to own ship’s heading (Relative) or refer-
enced to North (True). Select [True] or [REL].

15.3.3 Number of PI lines to display

The maximum number of PI lines to display may be selected from 1, 2, 3 or 6 lines as
below. The actual number of lines visible may be less depending on line interval. Se-
lect the number of lines to display at [Index Lines].

15.3.4 PI line mode

The PI line mode can be set for parallel (0-degrees) or perpendicular (90-degrees).
Select [Parallel] or [Perpendicular] at [Mode].

15-5
15. NAVIGATION TOOLS

15.3.5 How to adjust PI line orientation, PI line interval

There are two ways to adjust PI line orientation and PI line interval: through the menu
and on the screen.

How to adjust PI line orientation, PI line interval from the menu

1. Set the orientation with [Bearing].
2. Set the line interval with [Distance].

How to adjust PI line orientation, PI line interval on the screen

Adjust orientation:
Adjust interval:
Put cursor on PI line
Put cursor on any PI line
bisecting own ship
other than the one
marker then drag cursor.
bisecting own ship
marker then drag cursor.

How to adjust orientation and interval, multiple PI lines

Adjust orientation:
Put cursor anywhere
on PI line (other than
own ship marker) then
drag cursor.
Adjust interval:
Put cursor on own
ship mark then
drag cursor.

How to adjust orientation and interval, single PI line

15.3.6 How to reset the PI lines

You can automatically return PI lines to default orientation, 0-degrees for parallel ori-
entation, 90-degrees for perpendicular orientation. This is faster than doing it manual-
ly. Click the [Reset] button to reset the parallel lines.

15-6
 15. NAVIGATION TOOLS

15.3.7 How to adjust PI line length

You can adjust the forward and backward lengths of a PI line when [Index Lines] is set
to 1.

1. Open the MENU and select [NAV Tools] and [PI Lines].

2. If not already displayed, click the [ON/OFF] button to display the PI line whose
length you want to adjust.
3. Click the value in [Forward] and [Backward] columns to adjust their lengths, refer-
ring to the illustration below.

PI line

Adjust the
forward length.
Adjust the
backward length.
4. Click the [Save] button to finish.

15.4 Look-ahead
Look-ahead sets the area ahead and around own ship for which to check for safe nav-
igation. See section 11.2section 11.2 for how to activate own ship check.

15-7
15. NAVIGATION TOOLS

15.5 Ring
The range rings are the concentric set of rings on the chart display. They provide an
estimation of the range to an object. You can turn them on or off from the [Ring] page.

Range
ring

The interval between rings changes with the chart scale as shown in the table below.

Chart scale Ring interval (nm) Chart scale Ring interval (nm)
1:1,000 0.025 1:100,000 2.0
1:2,000 0.05 1:200,000 4.0
1:5,000 0.10 1:500,000 8.0
1:10,000 0.25 1:1,000,000 16.0
1:20,000 0.5 1:2,000,000 20.0
1:50,000 1.0

How to select the range calculation method

The range calculation method for the EBL and VRM can be selected to Rhumbline or
Great Circle. Do as follows to select a calculation method.

1. Open the menu, then select [NAV Tools] and [Geometry] to show the [Geometry]
page.

2. Select [Rhumbline] or [Great Circle] with the drop down list box for [Rings].
3. Click the [Save] button to save the setting, then click the close button to finish.

15-8
 15. NAVIGATION TOOLS

15.6 Predictor
The predictor is a tool for estimating your ship's future positions and behavior. The on-
screen predictor graphic consists of three pieces of your ship, drawn in true scale to
successive future positions. The position of the third symbol will be your approximate
position at the end of the time interval selected. The predictor is calculated using cur-
rent speed and rate of turn. Docking speed components (transversal bow speed,
transversal stern speed, transversal center speed and rate of turn) are assumed to be
stable during the prediction period. The predictor can be used in every steering-state,
including manual steering.

To activate and set the Predictor, show the [Predictor] page. Turn the display on or off
with [Display]. Set the time (30, 60, 90, 120, 150, 180 seconds), with [Time].

Movement of
predictor
(three pieces)

The Predictor is updated every three seconds internally and the status of the predictor
is shown with [Status] as shown in the table below.

Indication Status
OK Speed is suitable, in accordance with esti-
mation of ship’s dynamics.
Not Enough Speed Speed is too low, in accordance with esti-
mation of ship’s dynamics.
Not Available. Reset Filter May Restore. Calculation not possible, in accordance
with estimation of ship’s dynamics.

Note: The ship speed must be 0.5 kn or higher. The predictor may not be displayed
or may not work properly if the speed is lower than that value.

15-9
15. NAVIGATION TOOLS

15.7 Anchor Watch

The anchor watch feature checks to see if your ship is drifting when it should be at rest.
The anchor mark appears at the location of your ship’s anchor. You can adjust the lo-
cation for the anchor (see section 22.12section 22.12).

Alarm radius

Anchor mark

Own ship mark

To set the anchor watch:

1. Select the [Anchor Watch] page.
2. Set the alarm radius (in nautical miles) with [Drag Circle].
3. Drop the anchor then click the [Drop Anchor] button.
The anchor mark and alarm radius circle appear. You can adjust the location of
the anchor mark and the alarm radius by drag and dropping them.
Note: A latitude and longitude position can be set as the anchor watch position.
Put a checkmark in the box below the [Drop Anchor] button to show the latitude
and longitude input boxes. Enter latitude and longitude then click the [Drop An-
chor] button.
4. Click the [Start Anchor Watch] button to start the anchor watch.
If your vessel travels more than the distance set here, the corresponding caution is
generated.

If your ship drifts more than the anchor watch setting, the Alert 495 (ALF format:
10802) “Anchor Watch Setting” appears. The alert is escalated from warning level to
alarm level if the alert is not acknowledged within two minutes. Also, if your vessel re-
turns to within the tolerable radius, the alert is status is automatically changed to rec-
tified.

To continue to use the anchor watch, click the [Clear Anchor] button to set the alarm
about your current position. To stop the anchor watch, click the [Stop Anchor Watch]
button. The caution is not generated even if your ship drifts more than the distance set
with [Drag Circle]. Also, if the anchor watch alert is active and the [Stop Anchor Watch]
button is clicked, the alert is also acknowledged and rectified.

15-10
 15. NAVIGATION TOOLS

15.8 UKC (Under Keel Clearance)

15.8.1 UKC overview

UKC is the distance between the deepest point of the vessel's hull and the seabed.
The UKC feature continuously checks the ship's draught setting and actual speed.

When a look-ahead area is set and the depth within the set area gets shallower than
the UKC, the Alert 634 (ALF format: 10173,1) "UKC Limit" is generated.

UKC takes into account the amount of hull subsidence (Squat Effect). The evaluation
criteria for Alert 634 (ALF format: 10173,1) is not based solely on the distance from
the keel to the seabed, UKC or draught.

Note: When conducting a route check, UKC is calculated based on the planned speed
for each leg.
The Echo Alarm Limit is compared with the depth (raw data) from the sensor. If the
depth is smaller than the echo alarm limit, the Alert 485 (ALF format: 10801) "Depth
Limit" and Alert 644 (ALF format: 10644) "Actual UKC Limit" are generated.

Sea surface

Draft

Under keel clearance (UKC) Distance from keel

to seabed

Echo alarm setting

Seabed

15-11
15. NAVIGATION TOOLS

15.8.2 How to set UKC

1. Select the [UKC] page from the [Overlay/NAV
Tools] box.
2. Use [Echo Alarm Limit] to set the distance for
the echo alarm. To activate the alarm, click the
[ON/OFF] button to show [ON].
3. At [UKC Limit], set ship's UKC limit. To activate
the UKC feature, click the [ON/OFF] button to
show [ON].
4. Use [Current Draught] to set your ship's draft.
Be sure to change the setting whenever the
draft changes.
5. Use [Type] to set the shape of your ship's hull
to show on the [UKC] window, [V-shape] or [Concave]. See the figure in
section 15.8.2section 15.8.2.
6. Click the [Apply] button.

15.8.3 UKC window

The UKC window provides a visual graphic of the relationship between UKC, draft and
current depth. The window can be shown or hidden as desired and located anywhere
within the electronic chart area. To show the window, click [Show UKC Window] on
the [UKC] page. To move the window, drag and drop.

100.2m 100.2m

V-shape hull presentation Concave hull presentation

15-12
 15. NAVIGATION TOOLS

15.9 Curved EBL

The [Curved EBL] function shows the planned steering radius. You can use this func-
tion to determine the best location to begin a turn. You can also use the [Curved EBL]
function to determine whether a turn is conduct as planned.

To show/hide the [Curved EBL], click the [ON]/[OFF] button on the [Curved EBL] page
of the [Overly/NAV Tools] box.

Note: This function is only available when a EC-3000 with TCS functionality (optional
specification) is connected to the network.

XTD limit Curved EBL

Steering line

OS mark

WPT1

15-13
15. NAVIGATION TOOLS

15.10 Divider
The divider performs the following calculations:

• Range and bearing between two points

• TTG between two points
• Total TTG from start to end
• Total distance from start to end
The divider is available in the Voyage navigation and Voyage planning modes. Only
one divider can be displayed. The divider is neither saved nor shared among other
units (FMD-3x00, FCR-2xx9 or FAR-3xx0).

15.10.1 How to use the divider

Do as shown below to use the divider.

Right-click
starting point Divider appears.
00.00
00.00

Select [New
Divider]


00:32 Drag circle to

00:32 next point
5.9NM

5.0NM
051.2°
- TTG to point
- Total TTG 2.6NM
00:00 - Total distance 00.00
055.1°
00:00 00.00
Distance and bearing
between points
Starting point

How to delete points

Point(s) can be deleted. Put the cursor on a point, right click, then select [Delete Points] from
the pop-up menu. The point(s) deleted depends on the point selected.
End point Intermediate point

Connecting
Delete points are
intermediate deleted.
Delete end point point

15-14
 15. NAVIGATION TOOLS

You can also drag from an intermediate point to make another point.

00:13
2.75NM
00:26 00:13 11.63NM 358.6°
22.60NM 00:26 261.1°
22.60NM
11.63NM
170.6° 11.63NM
Drag here. 170.6°

00:13 00:13
00:13 00:13
10.57NM 10.57NM
10.97NM 10.97NM°
213.6° 213.6°
00:00 00:00
00:00   00:00 

Note: If you drag a point to the edge of the displayed area, the chart scrolls in that
direction.

15.10.2 Usage characteristics, limitations

• The distance between points is shown to the hundredths decimal place up to 100
NM and to the tenths decimal place thereafter.
• A maximum of 50 points can be inserted, and the maximum measurable distance
between two points is 240.0 NM.
• The TTG value is rounded to the nearest decimal place. Therefore, the displayed
total TTG may not equal the sum of all the TTGs.
• The TTG is measurable to 99:00. If the TTG is higher, the TTG indication is
">99:00".
• The ship’s speed must be at least 0.5 kn to calculate TTG.
• The divider cannot be used in latitudes higher than 85°.
• In the split screen display, the divider is viewable on both the main and sub views,
but is operable only on the main view.

15.10.3 How to deactivate and erase the divider

Get into the Voyage navigation or Voyage planning mode then right-click the screen
to show the context-sensitive menu. Select [Clear Divider].

Ship on center
Pick Report
Chart Legend
Manual Update
Clear Divider

15-15
15. NAVIGATION TOOLS

15.10.4 How to select the calculation method for the divider

The range calculation method for the divider can be selected to Rhumbline or Great
Circle. Do as follows to select a calculation method.

1. Open the menu, then select [NAV Tools] and [Geometry] to show the [Geometry]
page.

2. Select [Rhumbline] or [Great Circle] with the drop down list box for [Divider].
3. Click the [Save] button to save the setting, then click the close button to finish.

15-16
16. NAVIGATION SENSORS

16.1 CCRS
This chart radar employs a Consistent Common Reference System (CCRS) for the ac-
quisition, processing, storage and distribution of sensor information. The CCRS en-
sures that all parts of the system uses the same source and values, e.g., speed
through water, heading, etc. The illustration below shows the CCRS diagram.

Processor Unit Processor Unit

CCRS CCRS

SENSOR
CCRS ADAPTER

Sensors

The CCRS process NMEA0183 and IEC 61162-1 sentences. No other types of data
(video signals, etc.) are processed.

Check for validity, legitimacy

The system checks received sentences for validity and legitimacy.

Validity check: A sentence’s checksum, status (A/V), Mode indicator and setting val-
ues are checked. (If checksum error is found, the sentence is disaffirmed.
Legitimacy check: The range and accuracy of a sentence is checked.)
If the check for both is OK a valid flag results. If either is invalid, the invalid flag is given.

Types of CCRS
There are two types of CCRS: System and Local. The System CCRS integrates all
navigation devices. In the Local CCRS each navigation device operates independent-
ly.

Representative sensors
If the system has multiple like sensors, the CCRS selects the representative sensor.
Generally, the system uses common representative sensors; however, independent
representative sensors (local representative sensors) can also be used.

16-1
16. NAVIGATION SENSORS

16.2 How to Select Navigation Sensors

The operator can select navigation sensors to use for navigation and view their current
values on the applicable page in the [System Sensor Setting] and [Local Sensor Set-
ting] menus. To access these menus, right-click the Sensor information, datum box
then click [Select Sensor] followed by [Setting].

The descriptions in this section show the sensor menus in the radar mode. The sensor
menus in the chart mode mirror those in the radar mode, although the layout is differ-
ent. Any change made in a sensor menu is reflected to the companion sensor menu,
to synchronize the data between the modes.

16.2.1 Sensors menu description

[HDG] page (Local Sensor)
[Sensors]: Select the heading sensor to use.
[Analog Gyro]: No use.
[Manual]: Set heading manually when there is no head-
ing sensor available. (Not shown on IMO type.)
[Gyro Correction]: Set correction manually for the head-
ing value. (Not available with the [System Sensor Set-
ting] menu.)

16-2
 16. NAVIGATION SENSORS

[SPD] page (System Sensor)

[Stabilization Mode]: Select the water stabilization
mode: Select [Bottom] for ground stabilization, or select
[Water] for sea stabilization.
[Sensor Type]: Select [GPS] in case of a GPS naviga-
tor, or [LOG] for speed log.
[Data Source]: Check [Sensors] to use a sensor in the
[Sensors] list, or click [Manual] to enter speed manually.
Use [Manual] when no speed source is available.
[Manual]: Input speed manually. Check [Water] in [Sta-
bilization Mode] and deactivate the AIS function to en-
able entry.
[Reference SPD]: Check to use radar as the source for
speed and course. (Only available with the Local Sen-
sor Setting and checking [Bottom] in [Stabilization
Mode].)
[Set Drift]: Check the [Set Drift] checkbox to manually
set speed and course of drift. Note that you can select
manual drift only if you check [Water] in [Stabilization
Mode].

Angle = Difference between heading and COG

Spd = Speed component of the drift vector
Cse = Course component of the drift vector

Vector defined by (SOG and COG) is equal to vector sum of vectors defined by (SPD
and HDG) and (set and drift).

North
cse
SOG
HDG
COG spd
SPD
SPD: water speed
HDG heading of ship
SOG: speed over ground
gle COG: course over ground
an spd: speed of drift
cse: course of drift
angle: difference between HDG and COG

16-3
16. NAVIGATION SENSORS

[COG/SOG] page
Select the source (GPS receiver) for speed over the
ground and course over the ground.

[POSN] (Position) page

The sensor label (here, GPS001, GPS002) indicates
the name of the sensor.

[Data Source]: Check [Sensors] to use a sensor in the

[Sensors] list, or click [DR] to enter position manually.
When the position source is changed based on priori-
ties and signal validity to another position source, then
you get the Alert 472 (ALF format: 10602,1) "Position
Source Change".

[DR]: Check [DR] when no position source is available.

16-4
 16. NAVIGATION SENSORS

[Other Sensor] page

To show the [Other Sensors] page, open the menu and select [Other Sensor Settings]
in the chart mode.

1.9 012.1°

130.7m Mid: 130.8m Aft: 130.8m

037.3° 3.2kn

[Wind]: Select wind unit, wind reference, and wind source. See
section 16.9section 16.9.
[Depth Below Trans]: Depth from hull at bow and aft to bottom. A depth alert value may
be entered to alert you when the depth is within the value set.
[Temperature]: Water surface temperature.
[Water Current]: Tide at own ship’s position.

16-5
16. NAVIGATION SENSORS

16.3 Source of Position

The figure below shows how source for position is chosen. The position sensors have
either primary or secondary as input for their calculation. DGPS position sensors are
considered more accurate than other position sensors.

The latitude and longitude position is shown at the top-right position on the chart radar
display, and in the example below the position source is DGPS. Other indications that
may be displayed in the position area are as follows:

• [DR]: Shown in yellow when position source is dead reckoning.

• [DGPS], [GPS]: Name of position source.

Position sensor Valid data exists

selected as
high priority

No valid data exists

Position sensor Valid data exists Position

selected as used by
low priority this system

No valid data exists

Backup
Selected
dead
reckoning

If the system changes the source of position because of lost sensor data, the system
immediately generates the Alert 472 (ALF format: 10602,1) "Position Source
Change".

16-6
 16. NAVIGATION SENSORS

16.4 Primary and Secondary Positions of Own Ship

This system displays position in one of four methods

• CCRP position: CCRP

• Primary position: Position generated by position source chosen as highest priority.
• Secondary position: Position generated by position source chosen as 2nd highest
priority.
• Pivot position: Ship’s pivot point position.
The position source for primary position of own ship is chosen as Primary on the
[POSN] page of the [Sensor] menu.

The position source for secondary position of own ship is chosen as Secondary on the
[POSN] page of the [Sensor] menu. Secondary position of own ship is not available as
latitude/longitude value for the user.

Position sensor
Valid data exists
selected as
Secondary

Position sensor Secondary

No valid data selected as position of
Valid data exists
priority lower than own ship
Secondary used by
this system

No valid data Secondary

position of own
ship is not valid

System, primary and secondary positions of your ship

may be plotted on the chart radar display with the past
tracks feature. You can control their visibility, etc. from
the [Tracking] page of the [Symbol Display] menu,
shown in the right figure. In this example, past tracks
are plotted using the primary position-fixing equip-
ment.

16-7
16. NAVIGATION SENSORS

16.5 Source of Navigation Data

The figure below shows how various sources of navigation data are chosen. "SOG,
COG" is speed over the ground and course over the ground, respectively. "SPD" is
speed through the water.”Drift” is the difference between speed through the water and
speed over ground.

Heading used by the system is shown at the top-right position on the chart radar dis-
play. In the example shown below, heading is received from a gyrocompass and it is
shown without additional text, meaning the value is referenced to true North.

Heading sensor
Selected
selected as
high priority Heading
used by
No valid this
data exists Heading sensor Valid data exists system
selected as low
priority

No valid
data exists Alert 450 (ALF format: 10601,10)
GPS1
“Heading Sensor Not Available”

SOG/COG used by the system is shown at the top-right position on the chart radar
display. In the example below, COG and SOG are from chosen position sensors and
this is indicated with the text "GPS*" or "LOG*" (* is the number of sensors).

COG/SOG from Valid data exists

position sensor
SOG/COG
used by
No valid COG/SOG this system
calculated from Valid data exists
data exists
speed log

16-8
 16. NAVIGATION SENSORS

Speed used by the system is shown at the top-right position on the chart radar dis-
play.The figure below shows the source of water speed is used for drift calculation.

Water Stabilization Selected and Manual

Manual speed Speed
Mode Selected Manual set drift exists
+ used by
speed Manual set drift this
system
Selected and no manual set
Not selected drift exists

Selected and
Manual set drift
LOG exists Manual speed
(Water speed) +
Manual set drift

Selected and No manual set

drift exists
No valid data exists

LOG Selected
(Ground speed)

No valid data exists

Selected
GPS

Not selected

Bottom Stabilization
Mode Selected Reference SPD Selected
(local only)

Alert related to SOG, COG, speed and heading components

It is possible that the operator has not chosen any speed or heading sensors, or that
the chosen sensors do not have any valid values. This kind of a situation is critical for
the system, because it cannot even perform dead reckoning.

When no heading source is available, the system generates the Alert 450 (ALF format:
10601,5) "Heading Sensor Not Available".

When no speed source is available, the system generates the Alert 453 (ALF format:
10601,6) “SDME Sensor Not Available”. When no COG/SOG data is available, the
system generates the Alert 279 (ALF format: 10601,3) “COG/SOG Not Available”.

16-9
16. NAVIGATION SENSORS

16.6 Switching of Sensor and Indication

When a sensor cannot be used because of some problem, the system automatically
switches the sensor. When this occurs the name of the newly selected sensor appears
in yellow.

GYRO1 GYRO1
LOG
BT

Speed sensor
changed

16.7 Filter Status

The ECDIS incorporates a filter that receives raw sensor data, checks sensor integrity
and processes multiple sensor data to produce a continuous estimate of ship’s posi-
tion and motion.

By default, the filter uses data from all available sensors for filtering and integrity mon-
itoring. The exception is heading data; only the selected heading device affects the
output of the filter, but other heading sensors (including magnetic compasses) are
used for integrity monitoring.

Sensors may be excluded manually or automatically. An excluded sensor participates

in neither integrity monitoring or filtering. The filter automatically excludes a sensor
from use if the sensor fails the first level of integrity check (for example, if a sudden
jump is detected). If the actual integrity check fails for some reason and the filter is able
to identify the faulty sensor, the faulty sensor is automatically excluded.

Sensor integrity is determined by: (1) monitoring the statistical accuracy of each sen-
sor independently and analyzing the input values and using the information of the type
of sensor, and (2) monitoring the difference between pairs of sensors. The system
checks heading, rate of turn, position, COG/SOG and CTW/STW data for integrity, in
accordance with INS regulations (IEC-61924-2). The result is either [Passed], [Doubt-
ful], [Failed], [Excluded] or [Not Available].

16-10
 16. NAVIGATION SENSORS

The integrity check result appears in the following locations:

• [Local Sensor Setting] and [System Sensor Setting] menus. The figure below shows
the result for the heading sensor GYRO1.

PRIM:GYRO1
GYRO1

Passed

Integrity
GYRO2 check
2.1°
Passed
result

Passed

Chart for Radar mode Radar mode

• [Filter Status] page in the [Other Sensor Setting] menu. See the next page.
Note: Depending on settings selected at installation, the integrity check result colors
can be changed.
[Passed]: Data is available for comparison and data is normal.
[Low Accuracy]: Data signal strength is low, but data is normal.
[Doubtful]: Data is not available for comparison, but data is normal.
[Failed]: Data is available (or not available) for comparison and data is abnormal.
[Excluded]: Value is greatly changed.
[Not Available]: Sentence is abnormal or improper.
For heading data, If there is only one gyro, the judgment is "Doubtful" when the ship
is stopped because there is no COG for comparison. When the ship begins to move,
the judgment is changed to "Passed" because there is COG for comparison.

The methods of integrity monitoring are outlined in the table below.

Sensor Comparison
Position • Comparison with other position sensors.
• Comparison with dead reckoning position.
Heading • Comparison with other heading sensors.
• Comparison with a COG sensor (used only if other heading sen-
sors are not available and if COG is high enough).
Speed over the • Comparison with other SOG sensors.
ground • Comparison with water speed sensors is a secondary option (used
only if other SOG sensors are not available).
Speed through • Comparison with other STW sensors.
the water • Comparison with STW sensors is a secondary option (used only if
other STW sensors are not available).
Rate of turn • Comparison with other rate of turn sensors.

The status and integrity of all sensors can be monitored from the [Filter Status] page
in the [Other Sensor Settings] menu. Sensors can also be unselected and the filter re-
set from this page.

16-11
16. NAVIGATION SENSORS

Passed
Passed
Passed
Passed
Doubtful
Passed
Passed

The [Status] column indicates sensor status as follows:

• [Selected] (sensor selected for use in filter)

• [Unselected] (sensor not used in filter)
• [Not Available] (no sensor information)
• [Excluded] (automatically excluded sensor)
The [Integrity] column indicates sensor integrity as either [Passed] or [Failed] . The in-
tegrity evaluation is [Doubtful] when there are no other sensors to compare with.

The [Comparisons] column shows the sensors compared and the integrity evaluation
of compared sensors in parentheses. Using the illustration above as an example,
SOG/COG data fed from GP0002 is compared with the sensors GP0001 and VD0001.
The integrity evaluation for the compared sensors is [Passed].
To unselect a sensor manually, select the sensor from the drop-down list at the bot-
tom left corner of the page, click the [Unselect] button then click the [Save] button. [Un-
selected] appears in the [Status] column. To reselect an unselected sensor, select the
sensor from the drop-down list, click the [Select] button. [Selected] appears in the [Sta-
tus] column.

The [Reset Filter] button functions to recover from sensor failure. When the button is
operated:

• Automatically excluded sensors are re-included.

• All data history is erased.
• Output values are re-estimated using new data.
• Integrity monitoring is restarted using new data.
Note 1: The filter can also be reset from the context-sensitive menu. Right-click any-
where in the Sensor information box to show the context-sensitive menu then select
[Filter Reset].
Note 2: When the filter is reset for this system, all networked equipment’s filters are
reset.

16-12
 16. NAVIGATION SENSORS

16.8 Position Alignment

The position alignment feature functions to fine tune ship's position by using radar
echo target and chart material.

If position alignment is in use, the Alert 640 (ALF format: 10803) "Chart Align: Over 30
Min." is generated every 30 minutes to remind the user to align position. The alert is
automatically erased in 10 seconds.

Note: This feature is effective with the chart radar unit whose data source for FILT is
assigned the highest priority.

16.8.1 How to align position

If the radar echo targets' symbols are not positioned correctly on the chart, there is ei-
ther position error or gyro error or some combination of these errors.

Position may be aligned on the chart radar display

by moving own ship position or by moving radar tar-
get position. To align position, get into the Voyage
navigation mode, click the [Offset] button at the top-right position on the screen. (You
are asked if you want to align position; click the [Yes] button to proceed.) Put the cur-
sor on the correct position then click. The amount of offset, in bearing and range, ap-
pears to the right the [Offset] button.

The latitude and longitude position indication is shown in yellow characters when the
position align feature is active.

16.8.2 How to cancel position alignment

Click the [Offset] button to cancel the position offset.

16.9 Wind Sensor

The chart radar can display and output wind data in the following three formats:
Apparent: Windmeter-measured wind speed and direction.
Wind angle reference: Heading
North: True wind angle, true wind speed
Wind angle reference: True North
Theoretical: True wind angle, true wind speed
Wind angle reference: Heading

The illustration below shows wind speed and direction with given ship data.

The wind values are as shown below.

Ship information:
COG: 60°
SOG: 8.7 kn
Heading: 45°

16-13
16. NAVIGATION SENSORS

Wind angle Wind speed

Apparent: 345° 10 kn
North: 330° 5 kn
Theoretical: 285° 5 kn

Wind Angle
(Apparent: 345°)
North
Wind from NNW (330°) Wind speed
(Apparent: 10 kn)

Apparent Wind

Heading

True Wind
Ship's Speed
(SOG: 8.7 kn)
Wind Speed
(North/Theoretical: 5.0 kn)
Wind Angle Angle (reference North)
(Theoretical: 285°)

Wind Angle
(North: 330°)

Apparent, North (true wind referenced to North), Theoretical (true wind referenced to
heading) may be selected from the [Other Sensor Settings] menu. If the wind indica-
tion is not accurate; for example, the wind is blowing from the North but the wind di-
rection displays otherwise, check if the format is Theoretical. If it is, switch to another
format.

16-14
 16. NAVIGATION SENSORS

Wind reference
(APPARENT, NORTH, THEORETICAL)

1.9 012.1°

130.7m Mid: 130.8m Aft: 130.8m

20.1°C

037.3° 3.2kn

Source of Wind data䠖

((T)HEORETICAL and (R)EL, (T)HEORETICAL, (T)RUE)

16.10 Depth Sensor

The depth output from a depth sensor (for example, echo sounder) is shown on the
[Other Sensor] page in the [Other Sensor Settings] menu.

The content of the [Other Sensor] page depends on sensors connected.

In this example there are three transducers (bow, mid and aft) installed.

1.9 012.1°

130.7m Mid: 130.8m Aft: 130.8m

037.3° 3.2kn

The system displays depth value as depth below the transducer. If required, you can
get an alert when the measured depth is less than the "Echo Alarm Limit" setting at
the [UKC] page in the [Overlay/NAV Tools] box. The system generates the Alert 485
(ALF format: 10801) "Depth Limit".

16-15
16. NAVIGATION SENSORS

This page is intentionally left blank.

16-16
17. AIS SAFETY, NAVTEX MESSAG-
ES

17.1 AIS Safety Messages

You can send and receive messages via the VHF link, to a specified destination
(MMSI) or all AIS-equipped ships within communication range of your ship. Messages
can be sent to warn of safety of navigation, for example, an iceberg sighted. Routine
messages are also permitted. Short safety-related messages are only an additional
means to broadcast safety information. They do not remove the requirements of the
GMDSS.

17.1.1 How to send an AIS safety message

Note: If you are using the Trackball Control Unit
RCU-026, display the software keyboard ([DISP]
button, [ ], [ON] on the InstantAccess bar™)
before starting this procedure.
1. In the Voyage navigation mode, click the
[MSG] and [Safety MSG] buttons on the In-
stantAccess bar™ to show the [Message] dialog box.
MMSI of receiver Type of message
(MMSI or “Broadcast”) (Binary, Safety)
MMSI of sender Status of message
Date received (Read, Unread)

17-1
17. AIS SAFETY, NAVTEX MESSAGES

2. Click the [New] button.

3. At [Send to], select where to send the message. Se-
lect [Broadcast] to send the message to all AIS-
equipped ships within communication range, or se-
lect [MMSI] and enter the MMSI of the ship where to
send the message.
4. At [Type], select the type of message, [Safety] or [Bi-
nary] (routine).
5. At [Channel], select the channel to use to send the
message.
6. At [Description], enter the text of your message. The
no. of characters available depends on the type of
message.
Safety message broadcast: 90 characters
Binary message broadcast: 86 characters
Safety message addressed to MMSI: 85 characters
Binary message addressed to MMSI: 80 characters
7. Click the [Send] button to send the message.

17.1.2 How to display received and sent AIS safety messages

When an AIS message is received, the Alert 539 (ALF format: 10540,1) "AIS Message
Received" appears. Do the following to view the message.

1. In Voyage navigation mode, click the [MSG] and [Safety MSG] buttons on the In-
stantAccess bar™.
2. Click the [Receive Box] or [Send Box] button as appropriate.
3. Click a message to view its contents.

WELCOME TO FURUNO

17-2
 17. AIS SAFETY, NAVTEX MESSAGES

17.1.3 How to delete received and sent AIS safety messages

Note: A large amount of messages may take some time to delete.

How to delete a received or sent message

1. Click the [Receive Box] or [Send Box] as appropriate.
2. Click the box that is before the date to show a check mark. (All messages can be
checked or unchecked with the context-sensitive menu. Right-click the box to the
left of "Date" then select [Check All] or [Uncheck All] as applicable.)
3. Click the [Delete] button.

How to delete received or sent messages permanently

1. Click the [Trash Box] button.
2. Click the box that is before the date to show a check mark. (All messages can be
checked or unchecked with the context-sensitive menu. Right-click the box to the
left of "Date" then select [Check All] or [Uncheck All] as applicable.)
3. Click the [Delete] button.

17.2 Navtex Messages

Navtex (Navigational Telex) is an international automated medium frequency direct-
printing service for delivery of navigational and meteorological warnings and fore-
casts, as well as urgent marine safety information to ships.
Navtex messages can be received and read.

The [Receive Box] can store up to 500 messages. When the [Receive Box] is full and
a new message is received, the system automatically deletes messages, in order,
from the oldest message.

Note: If the message "Database access failure occurred. NAVTEX messages cannot
be received." appears, your Navtex database may be corrupted. Consult your dealer
for advice.

17-3
17. AIS SAFETY, NAVTEX MESSAGES

17.2.1 How to receive Navtex messages

To display a received NAVTEX message, do the following:

1. In Voyage navigation mode, click the [MSG] and [NAVTEX MSG] buttons on the
InstantAccess bar™.
2. Click the message to view. The text of the message appears in the [Description]
box.
Message protection Date Frequency/ Type of
status: received Message ID message
P = Protected
Blank = Un-protected

Message
status:
Read or
Unread

Selection
column Where coordinates
are included in the
message, the
latitude and
Where the longitude are
selected message displayed here.
has a date range, The chart is also
the dates are appropriately
displayed here. marked with the
MSI marker.

• You can filter the displayed messages.

To filter by date: Enter the date range for displayed messages in the [Date
Range(UTC)] input area. To clear the filter, click the [Clear] button. Check the
Filter by Date box to activate the filter.
To filter by distance: Check the [Filter by Distance] box to activate the [Dis-
tance from Own Ship] input area. Enter the appropriate distance (setting range:
1 to 100 NM).
• To protect a message, or remove
the protection, click the protection
status column for the message.
When removing protection, the
confirmation window shown below
appears. Select [Yes] or [No] as
appropriate.
Note: You can protect up to 50
messages. When you try to protect more than 50 messages, the message
shown below appears.

17-4
 17. AIS SAFETY, NAVTEX MESSAGES

• You can check the settings for the Navtex receiver (if connected). Click the [Re-
ceiver] button to show the settings.

17.2.2 How to delete received Navtex messages

Note: A large amount of messages may take some time to delete.

How to delete received Navtex messages

1. Click the [MSG] and [NAVTEX MSG] buttons on the InstantAccess bar™.
2. Click the [Receive Box] button.
3. Click the selection column (indicated in the figure at section 17.2.1section 17.2.1)
to show a checkmark in the box. (All messages can be checked or unchecked with
the context-sensitive menu. Right-click the box to the left of "P" then select [Select
All] or [Deselect All] as applicable.)
4. Click the [Delete] button. The selected message is sent to the [Trash Box]. The
[Trash Box] can hold up to 200 messages.
Note: If a protected message is se-
lected for deletion, the confirmation
message shown to the right ap-
pears. Click [Yes] to delete the pro-
tected message or [No] to cancel
deletion.

How to deleted received Navtex messages permanently

1. Click the [MSG] and [NAVTEX MSG] buttons on the InstantAccess bar™.
2. Click the [Trash Box] button.
3. Click the selection column (indicated in the figure at section 17.2.1section 17.2.1)
to show a checkmark in the box. (All messages can be checked or unchecked with
the context-sensitive menu. Right-click the box to the left of "P" then select [Select
All] or [Deselect All] as applicable.)
4. Click the [Delete] button.

17-5
17. AIS SAFETY, NAVTEX MESSAGES

This page is intentionally left blank.

17-6
18. TT AND AIS DISPLAYS
Tracked targets and AIS targets can be overlaid on the chart. Only the differences be-
tween the radar and chart TT and AIS displays are described here.

The data of received radar-tracked targets must have reference to ground. If the data
does not meet that criteria, target vectors are not shown and the indications COG and
SOG in the TT info data box show [missing].

18.1 TT Display

18.1.1 TT symbols
Refer to subsection 3.7.1subsection 3.7.1.

18.1.2 TT symbol color and size

Do the following to select TT symbol color and size. Note that the color of the AIS sym-
bol is also changed.

1. Click the [DISP], [SET] and [Symbol DISP] buttons on the InstantAccess bar™ to
show the [Symbol Display] menu.
2. Click the [Targets] tab.

3. Select the color among, green, blue, black, magenta and brown, with the [Color]
pull-down list.
4. Select the size from standard or small, with the [TT Size] pull-down list.

18-1
18. TT AND AIS DISPLAYS

18.1.3 How to display tracked target data

Control Unit: Put the cursor on a target then push the TARGET DATA key.
Trackball module: Click the target for which you want to show its data.

Title bar (1/2)

Scroll buttons*
TT No.

Bearing

Range

Course over ground

Speed over ground
CPA

TCPA
Bow crossing range
Bow crossing time

*: Scroll buttons appear only when there is

more than one TT target’s data displayed.

To erase data from a data box, click the close (×) button.

The basic target data display for a TT consists of the following information:
• Target's number. Target numbering starts from "01". When a target is erased the
number will not be reused until the power is re-set or more than 200 targets are ac-
quired.
• Bearing (BRG) and distance (RNG) of the target from own ship
• True speed (SOG) and true course (COG) of the target
• CPA and TCPA. A negative TCPA value means that you have already passed the
closest point and the TT is going away from own ship.
• Bow Crossing Range (BCR) and Bow Crossing Time (BCT)

18-2
 18. TT AND AIS DISPLAYS

18.1.4 Past position point attributes

You can define past position point attributes for tracked targets by points and style.

1. Click the [DISP], [SET] and [Symbol DISP] buttons on the InstantAccess bar™ to
show the [Symbol Display] menu.
2. Click the [Targets] tab.

3. At [TT Points], select the number of points to show.

4. At [Style], select the style for the past position points. The choices are [Points] and
[Points and Dots].

18.1.5 How to set the TT lost target filter

If you are in a congested area the lost target alert may sound against many AIS tar-
gets. In this case, you can prevent the alarm from sounding against TT that are be-
yond a certain range and/or smaller than a specific length.

1. Open the MENU and select [TT/AIS] and [Setting] then click the [Setting.2] tab.

2. In the [TT Lost Target Filter] window, set the maximum range to track a target.
[MAX Range]: The maximum range at which to track a lost target. A tracked target
not within this range is not tracked.
3. Click the [ON/OFF] button to show ON or OFF as appropriate.

18.1.6 TT recording functions

Tracked target information is saved to the [Danger Targets] log. See
section 19.5section 19.5.

18-3
18. TT AND AIS DISPLAYS

18.2 AIS Display

18.2.1 AIS symbols

Refer to section 4.3section 4.3.

18.2.2 Voyage data

Before you embark on a voyage, set your navigation status, ETA, destination, draught
and the number of persons onboard, on the [Voyage Data] page in the [NAV Status]
menu. The data entered here is reflected to the AIS transponder.

1. Open the MENU then click both [NAV Status] in the [TT/AIS] menu and the [Voy-
age Data] tab.

Carrying DG, HS, or MP, IMO hazard or pollutant category Display according to
connected AIS transponder

2. Click the [Navigational Status] drop-down list then select your navigational status,
from the list below.
• Underway using engine • Reserved for high speed craft
• At anchor • Reserved for wing in ground
• Not under command • Power driven vessel towing astern (regional use)
• Restricted maneuverability • Power driven vessel pushing ahead or towing along-
• Constrained by her draught side (regional use)
• Moored • Reserved for future use
• Aground • AIS-SART (active)
• Engaged in fishing • Not defined
• Under way sailing

3. Enter the number of persons onboard (0-8191) at [Persons].

4. Enter ship's draught (0.0 - 25.5 (m)) at [MAX Draught].
5. Enter your ETA at [ETA].
[Day]: two digits; [Month]: Three-character abbreviation; [Year]: Four digits
6. Enter your destination at [Destination], using a maximum of 20 characters.
7. Use the [Cargo Type] pull-down menu to specify the type of cargo your vessel is
carrying.
• All ships of this type
• Carrying DG, HS, or MP, IMO hazard or pollutant category X
• Carrying DG, HS, or MP, IMO hazard or pollutant category Y
• Carrying DG, HS, or MP, IMO hazard or pollutant category Z
• Carrying DG, HS, or MP, IMO hazard or pollutant category OS
• Reserved for future use (x4)
• No additional information

8. Click the [Save] button to save the settings.

18-4
 18. TT AND AIS DISPLAYS

18.2.3 How to filter AIS targets

1. Right-click [AIS] on the [TT/AIS] page in the [NAV Tools/Overlay box], select [Set-
ting] and open the [Setting.1] page.

*
*

* Not shown on IMO- or A-type specification.

Note: You can also access the [Setting.1] page with one of the following methods:
• From the main menu, select [TT/AIS], [Settings] and [Setting.1].
• Click the TT/AIS settings radio button (indicated in the figure below) from the
Overlay/NAV Tools box. (The radio button is not available when the TT/AIS
page is displayed.)

Click this button.

2. In the [AIS DISP Filter] window, set each item referring to the description below.
• Click the buttons of [Sleeping Class A] and [Sleeping Class B] to show [OFF] or
[ON] to hide or show those targets.
• Click the button of [Base Station] to show [OFF] or [ON] to hide or show AIS
base stations.
• Click the button of [Physical AtoN] to show [OFF] or [ON] to hide or show Phys-
ical AtoN targets.
• Click the button of [Virtual AtoN] to show [OFF] or [ON] to hide or show Virtual
AtoN targets.
• Set the maximum range with [MAX Range]. Any target beyond the range set
here will not be displayed.
• Set the ship speed for AIS targets, with [MIN Ship Speed]. Any AIS target
whose speed is lower than that set here will not be displayed.

18-5
18. TT AND AIS DISPLAYS

3. Click the [Save] button to save settings. Click the [Close] button to close the dialog
box.
Note: AIS and tracked target viewing limitations are as follows:
AIS and tracked targets are displayed on top of chart 1:1,000,001 for S57 charts.

18.2.4 How to set conditions for automatic activation of sleeping tar-

gets
The AIS target automatic activation feature is turned on or off from the [TT/AIS] page
in the [Overlay/NAV Tools] box. Set the conditions for automatic activation as shown
below. The CPA/TCPA alarm must be active to get automatic activation of AIS targets.

Right-click [AIS] on the [TT/AIS] page in the [NAV Tools/Overlay box], select [Setting]
and open the [Setting.1] page.

*
*

* Not shown on IMO- or A-type specification.

18.2.5 How to sleep all activated targets

You can sleep all activated targets. Right-click [AIS] on the [TT/AIS ]page in the [NAV
Tools/Overlay box], select [Setting] and open the [Setting.1] page. Click the button to
the right of [Sleep All Targets] then click the [Set] button.

*
*

* Not shown on IMO- or A-type specification.

18-6
 18. TT AND AIS DISPLAYS

18.2.6 How to set the AIS lost target filter

You can select what AIS targets to exclude from the AIS lost target alert, on the [Set-
ting.2] page in the [TT/AIS] menu.

[MAX Range]: Set the max. range at which a target must be to be declared a lost tar-
get.
[MIN Ship Speed]: A tracked target whose speed is slower than set here does not trig-
ger the lost target alarm.
[Except Class B]: Exclude class B AIS targets from the AIS lost target alert.

18.2.7 How to display AIS target data

Normal data
Put the cursor on an activated target then push the left button.

Title bar (1/2)

Normal/Expand
button
MMSI Scroll buttons*1
Vessel name Close button

Bearing Heading
Range
Course over ground Rate of turn
Speed over ground
CPA
NAV status: * Navigation status*2
TCPA
Underway
Bow cross range using
Bow cross time engine
Position

*1: Scroll buttons appear only when there is more than one AIS target’s data displayed.
*2: [Altitude] appears when the selected target is an AIS SART airfcaft.

18-7
18. TT AND AIS DISPLAYS

Expanded data
Put the cursor on a desired AIS target then push the left button. Click the [Expand] but-
ton (level of detail) on the [AIS Info] box to show expanded AIS data.

Title bar
“Level of detail”
button
MMSI
Scroll buttons*1
Vessel name Close button

Bearing Heading
Range
Course over ground Rate of turn
Speed over ground
CPA NAV status:
TCPA Underway
Bow cross range using
Bow cross time engine
Position
Navigation status*2

Position sensor
Position sensor accuracy
(HIGH, LOW)
Call sign
IMO No.
Length
Width
Draught
Destination

ETA
AIS version no.
Ship & Cargo type

Association condition

*1: Scroll buttons appear when there are multiple AIS targets.
*2: Where the selected AIS target is an aircraft, the STATUS box
shows the aircraft’s altitude.

18-8
 18. TT AND AIS DISPLAYS

18.2.8 How to display own ship data

You can see own ship's data on the [Own Ship] page in the [NAV Status] menu. Open
the menu then click both [NAV Status] in the [TT/AIS] menu and the [Own Ship] tab.

MMSI: 457804356 Length(LOA): 223.2 m

Name: FURUNO Voyager
Width: 31.8 m

Call Sign: JZ5890312 Ref Bow: 3.3 m

Type: 0
Description: All ships of this type Ref Port: 2.8 m

18.3 Association
An AIS-equipped ship is usually displayed by two symbols on the chart for radar dis-
play. This is because the AIS ship position is measured by a GPS navigator (L/L)
whereas the radar detects the same ship by PPI principle (range and bearing relative
to own ship radar antenna).

To avoid the presentation of two target symbols for the same physical target, use the
“association” function. If target data from both AIS and TT are available and if the as-
sociation criteria are fulfilled, either the AIS or TT symbol is presented according to the
association method selected.

Association will not happen between AIS and TT if the AIS target is sleeping or the AIS
target is lost.
All association settings, including ON/OFF, can also be controlled from the radar
mode, with the [TT/AIS] setting box (see section 4.14section 4.14). All settings are
mutually shared.

18.3.1 How to select association method

Click the location circled below to show "<" to select AIS symbol for associated target,
or ">" to select TT symbol for associated target. This setting overrides the correspond-
ing item on the [TT/AIS] menu. To turn off association, click the location to remove the
arrow.

< >

18-9
18. TT AND AIS DISPLAYS

Note: You can also select the method by right-clicking the loca-
Association: OFF
tion. Click desired association method. Association: TT
Association: AIS
18.3.2 How to set the conditions for association
To set the criteria for association, right-click [AIS] on the [TT/AIS] page in the [NAV
Tools/Overlay] box, select [Setting] and open the [Setting.2] page. For setting details,
see subsection 4.14.2subsection 4.14.2.

18-10
19. RECORDING FUNCTIONS
The chart radar records various voyage-related items like movement and position of
own ship and dangerous radar targets (from Radar). These items are recorded in the
following logs:

Update log: Records the install and update history for the ENC, ARCS and C-
MAP charts (see section 7.12section 7.12).
Event log: Records user events and position events.
NAV log: Records entire voyage (i.e., a sailing of a route from first point to
the last, also MOB data), details (position, speed and course every
minute), chart usage (information on charts used for display).
Target log: Records dangerous TT, AIS.
Alert log: Records alerts generated by the system (see
section 20.6section 20.6).
Route transfer log: Records sent and received route-related communications.

19.1 How to Record User, Position Events

This equipment can save/show a maximum of 2,000 events.

19.1.1 User events

A user event is a comment about an event
(weather, etc.). You can show user events on the
chart area. Open the [Tracking] page of the
[Symbol Display] menu show or hide the events.

To record a user event:

1. Get into the Navigational or Voyage planning

mode then click the [Log], [Event Log] and
[User Event] buttons on the InstantAccess
bar™ to show the [Record User Event] win-
dow.
2. Enter a comment. Click the [OK] button to finish and close the text box.
An event marker ( ) appears at your position and the event is recorded to the [Voy-
age] log.

To view the comment entered for an event,

put the cursor on the event then left click to
show the [Event Information] window.

Note: The [Event Information] window is

shown with the [CHART for RADAR]
mode.

19-1
19. RECORDING FUNCTIONS

The window shows the name of the event ([UserEvent]), time and date of entry, lati-
tude and longitude position of the event and comment. Note that the comment can be
edited from this window. Edit the comment then click the [OK] button to save.

19-2
 19. RECORDING FUNCTIONS

19.1.2 Position events

The operator may manually save positions to the [Event] log by position or LOP (Line
of Position):

To record a position, do as follows:

1. Get into the Navigational or Voyage planning mode then click the [Log], [Event
Log] and [POSN Event] buttons on the InstantAccess bar™ to show the [Position
Event] dialog box.

2. At the list box at the top of the dialog box, select position type.
[Manual]: Manual input of ship’s position. Go to step 4step 4.
[LOP]: Latitude and longitude position of a fixed object at ship's position. Go to
step 5step 5.
[Position]: Ship’s position fed from navigator selected. Go to step 3step 3.
3. For [Position], click the [Log] button.

Ship’s position fed from

navigator selected Selected navigator

The position event mark appears at the ship’s position. The position is recorded
to the [Voyage] log.
Time of entry 1044

DGPS1

Navigator selected
Position event mark

19-3
19. RECORDING FUNCTIONS

4. For [Manual], manually enter position, enter a comment if required, then click the
[Log] button.

Enter position manually. Enter comment

here if required.

The position event mark appears at the manual input position. The position is re-
corded to the [Voyage] log.
Time of entry 1044

DGPS1

Navigator selected
Position event mark
5. For [LOP], see the description below.

Position fixes defined by Line of Position (LOP)

A plotted line on which a vessel is located, determined by observation or measure-
ment of the range or bearing to an aid to navigation or other charted element. Two or
more simultaneous observations can be combined to produce an estimate of the
ship's current position. If the position is based on only two observations, it is an “esti-
mated position” (EP); otherwise it is called a fix. A maximum of 6 observations can be
entered to obtain a fix.

Basic operation: Coordinates of the aid to navigation can be entered into dialog box-
es or they can be selected graphically on the chart. Click on a charted object (beacon,
light, buoy etc.). Description of the object appears above coordinate boxes.

Default values for bearing and range are approximated from ship's current position in-
formation. The time of observation is stopped when the object is selected (or when the
[Add] button is clicked). Click the [Add] box to include the observation in the fix com-
putation. The counter shows “new/1”, at the input of the second observation. The word
"new" indicates that the observation currently displayed is not yet included in the fix
computation, and it appears as a dashed line or ring on the chart. The added obser-
vations can be edited or deleted after selecting them at the counter. When at least two
measurements are entered, the EP or fix is computed and the coordinates are shown
in the top part of the dialog.To show a position symbol on the chart, click the [Log] but-
ton. In the case of an EP, the letters EP are shown on the right side of the coordinates.
If a valid position estimate cannot be obtained, a message is displayed under the co-
ordinates. This may happen, for example, if the lines / circles have multiple crossings
that are far apart, or if two lines are nearly parallel or don't intersect at all. The accu-
racy limit (estimated standard error) is 1.0 NM. If the estimate is valid, the [Log] box
can be clicked to record the current position estimate in the [Voyage] log. Discrepancy
between LOP result and ship position is also recorded in the log (this information may
be viewed by Info query on the position event symbol on the chart - which is displayed
if position event display is on in chart display settings).

19-4
 19. RECORDING FUNCTIONS

Time transfer: If the observations are not simultaneous, they should be transferred to
a common time. Transferring is based on dead reckoning of ship movement. If a po-
sition line (or ring) is transferred, the letters TPL are shown beside its timestamp on
the chart. The method of transfer may be selected in the bottom of the dialog. [Trans-
fer to latest] transfers the measurements as if they were all made at the time of the
newest measurement. [Continuous transfer] transfers all measurements to real time.
[Transfer off] can be used to check where the measurement origins are. The position
estimate and the record function follow the same logic, which means that Transfer off
shows a position that has no relevance and Transfer to latest sends an old position to
the [Voyage] log (timestamp in the log does not match the position).

If you are satisfied with the position shown in the latitude and longitude fields, then
click the [Log] button to save the position observation to the Voyage log. If you wish
you can also enter latitude and longitude values manually.

Timeouts: The observations cannot be used long after they were made because dead
reckoning is inaccurate.

Click the [Log] button to put a position event at the LOP-calculated position. The po-
sition is recorded to the [Voyage] log.

Time of entry 1044

Accuracy of position EP LOP
EP: Low accuracy
DR: High accuracy Position event
mark

How to find position event information

You can find information about a position event by putting the cursor on the event
mark then left click. The [Event Position] window shows event type (position event),
time of entry, event position, name of sensor ([Position] only), comment (automatic for
[LOP] and [Position]; user-entered comment* for [Manual]), and position line data
([LOP] only).
*Comment cannot be changed from this window.

Note: The [Event Information] window is shown with the [CHART for RADAR] mode.

Position event: Position

Position event: Manual Position event: LOP

19-5
19. RECORDING FUNCTIONS

19.2 Details Log

The [Details] Log records the voyage information for the last 24 hours. Information is
recorded every minute.

• Date of entry
• Time of entry
• Source: No. of unit which generated log
• Type: Type of position data
• Auto: Automatic input of position
• Latitude, Longitude, S.SRC: Position as output by selected sensor and sensor used
as the data source.
• Align/NM, Align/°T: Range, bearing offset, if used
• SOG/kn, COG/°T, S.SRC: Speed over the ground, Course over the ground and sensor
used as the data source.
• HDG/°T, S.SRC: Heading and sensor used as the data source.
• CORR/°T: Gyro correction value, if used.

How to view the Details log

Click the [Log], [NAV Log] and [Detail] buttons on the InstantAccess bar™.

• To show the logs of a specific period, enter the period to show with [Period Cov-
ered (UTC)] then click the [Set Period] button. Use the [Clear Period] button to display
all logs. Log entries outside the set period become gray and the entries inside the set
period remain visible. To show log entries which are not visible, spin the scrollwheel
upward to scroll up the log, downward to scroll down the log.
• To refresh the log, click the [Refresh] button.
• To search the log, do as follows:
1) Click the [Find] button to show the [Find Input box
text] box.
2) Click the input box then enter the text to
search.
3) Select the search direction with the up or
down radio button.
4) Click the [Find] button. The first matching Find
text is highlighted in yellow at the top of
the screen.
Input text in box and
5) To continue the search click the [Find] [Find] button appears.
button. To cancel the search, click the
[Cancel] button.
• To print the log, click the [Print Text] button. Select print-
ing format then click the [Print] button. [Spread Portrait]
prints two pages of data on one page.
• To show track for the period selected, click the [Show
Track] button. Use the [Hide Track] button to erase the
track.
• To export the log, click the [Export File] button. The file is
named
DetailsLogYYYYMMDDhhmmss.csv.

19-6
 19. RECORDING FUNCTIONS

19.3 Voyage Log

The [Voyage] log records all voyage-related data of the past three months. Recorded
events are:

• Date: Date of entry

• Time: Time of entry
• Type: Log entry types
• Auto: Automatic entry of ship position, in 1 to 4 hr intervals, set by operator.
• Ship: Logged if the amount of change in speed or course equals or is greater than
the set values.
• MOB: MOB position, entered with [MOB] button.
• User: Operator-entered position. The information entered in the [Description] box
is logged.
• Posdev: Record user-entered position event. The[ Description] window shows au-
tomatically entered data (Position, LOP) or manually entered comment (Manual).
Automatically entered data (Position: data source, LOP: see below.
The latitude and longitude position and bearing (or distance) of a maximum of
three objects are automatically recorded to each log entry. An object whose posi-
tion accuracy is low is not recorded. If an object has both a bearing and distance,
separate entries are made.
L/L position, bearing of object (no.1)

• Latitude, Longitude: Position as output by selected sensor and sensor used as the
data source.
• SOG/kn, COG/°T, S.SRC: Speed over the ground, course over the ground. and their
source
• HDG/°T, S.SRC: Heading and its source
• CORR/°T: Offset bearing, if used
• Wind/kn Wind/°T: Wind speed and angle
• Dist/NM: Navigation distance
• Depth/m: Depth in meters
• Description: Show recorded contents, for [User], [PosDev] above.
If desired items other than [Posdev] can be edited. Click an item to show the [Edit
Description] box. Edit the description as required then click the [OK] button.

19-7
19. RECORDING FUNCTIONS

How to view the Voyage log

To open the Voyage log, click the [Log], [NAV Log] and [Voyage] buttons on the In-
stantAccess bar™.

LO
OG1
LO
OG1
OG1
OG

Export
p File

• To show the logs of a specific period, enter the period to show with [Period Cov-
ered (UTC)] then click the [Set Period] button. Use the [Clear Period] button to dis-
play all logs. Log entries outside the set period become gray and the entries inside
the set period remain visible. To show log entries which are not visible, spin the
scrollwheel upward to scroll up the log, downward to scroll down the log.
• To refresh the log, click the [Refresh] button.
• To search the log, do as follows:
1) Click the [Find] button to show the [Find text] box.
2) Click the input box then enter the text to search.
3) Select the search direction with the up or down radio button.
4) Click the [Find] button. The first matching text is highlighted in yellow at the top
of the screen.
5) To continue the search click the [Find] button. To cancel the search, click the
[Cancel] button.
• To print the log, click the [Print Text] button. Select print-
ing format then click the [Print] button. [Spread Portrait]
prints two pages of data on one page.
• To show track for the period selected, click the [Show
Track] button. Use the [Hide Track] button to erase the
track.
• To export the log, click the [Export File] button. The file is
named
VoyageLogYYYYMMDDhhmmss.csv.

19-8
 19. RECORDING FUNCTIONS

19.3.1 How to set conditions of logging

The operator can set the conditions for automatic voyage logging (logging interval on-
ly). When the following conditions are met, data is stored into the Voyage log.

• Speed (or course) change is equal to the set value.

• The logging interval time has elapsed.
To set the conditions of logging, do as follows:

1. Open the menu and select [Log],

[NAV Log] and [Voyage] to show
the [NAV Log] dialog box.
2. Set desired limit for log interval.
Setting range: 1 to 4 hr, 1 hr inter-
val
When your speed or course changes
by the amount set here, an entry is
made in the [Voyage] log, at the inter-
val selected.

19.4 Chart Usage Log

The [Chart Usage] log stores which charts were used in chart alerts. To open the log,
click [Log], [NAV Log] and [Chart Usage] on the InstantAccess bar™. The following
information is recorded in the chart usage log:

• Date and time chart was displayed • Display scale

• Chart ID • Compilation scale
• Center position of display (Lat, Lon) • The latest update included to chart
• Chart source • Chart base
• Chart edition

19-9
19. RECORDING FUNCTIONS

• To show the logs of a specific period, enter the period to show with [Period Cov-
ered (UTC)] then click the [Set Period] button. Use the [Clear Period] button to dis-
play all logs. Log entries outside the set period become gray and the entries inside
the set period remain visible. To show log entries which are not visible, spin the
scrollwheel upward to scroll up the log, downward to scroll down the log.
• To refresh the log, click the [Refresh] button.
• To search the log, do as follows:
1) Click the [Find] button to show the [Find text] box.
2) Click the input box then enter the text to search.
3) Select the search direction with the up or down radio button.
4) Click the [Find] button. The first matching text is highlighted in yellow at the top
of the screen.
5) To continue the search click the [Find] button. To cancel the search, click the
[Cancel] button.
• To export the log, click the [Export File] button. The file is named ChartUsageLo-
gYYYYMMDDhhmmss.txt.
• To print the log, click the [Print Text] button.

19.5 Danger Targets Log

The [Danger Targets] log stores information about dangerous targets that are re-
ceived from a radar (TTs) and/or targets that are received from an AIS transponder
(AIS targets).

If a TT or AIS target is within the set CPA (Closest Point of Approach) and TCPA (Time
to CPA), information of all TTs (including non-dangerous targets) are recorded into the
danger target log. This data is as follows:

• Date: Date of entry

• Time: Time of entry
• Source: Unit which generated log
• Type: Type of dangerous target
• Target ID: When [Type] is [TT] - Dangerous target’s number.
When [Type] is [AIS] - MMSI number
• Latitude and Longitude: Latitude and longitude position of dangerous target
• SPD/kn: Speed of dangerous target
• CRS/°T: Course of dangerous target
• HDG/°T: Heading of dangerous target
• CPA/NM, TCPA/min: CPA and TCPA of dangerous target

How to view the danger targets log

To open the [Danger Targets] log, click the [Log], [Target Log] and [Danger Target]
buttons on the InstantAccess bar™.

2016-05-12 13:55:59 ECD001 TT 01 35°38.164’N 139°49.842’E 15.1 193.3 N/A 1.3

2016
201
2
200 6 05
05 08
08 13 53 42 ECD00
CD001 AIS
S 00000
00 000100
10033 35°°57 770
35 770’N
’N 139°°49 732
139 732’E
’E 12 1 200 6 N/A
N/
/A 11

19-10
 19. RECORDING FUNCTIONS

• To show the logs of a specific period, enter the period to show with [Period Cov-
ered (UTC)] then click the [Set Period] button. Use the [Clear Period] button to display
all logs. Log entries outside the set period become gray and the entries inside the set
period remain visible. To show log entries which are not visible, spin the scrollwheel
upward to scroll up the log, downward to scroll down the log.
• To refresh the log, click the [Refresh] button.
• To search the log, do as follows:
1) Click the [Find] button to show the [Find text] box.
2) Click the input box then enter the text to search.
3) Select the search direction, with the up or down radio button.
4) Click the [Find] button. Matching text is highlighted in yellow at the top of the
screen.
5) To continue the search click the [Find] button. To cancel the search, click the
[Cancel] button.
• To print the log, click the [Print Text] button. Select print-
ing format then click the [Print] button.
• To export the log, click the [Export File] button. The file
is namedDangerTargetLogYYYYMMDDhhmmss.csv.

19.5.1 How to filter the danger targets log

You can filter the danger targets log by CPA or TCPA. When a TT or AIS target’s CPA
or TCPA is lower than the setting here, the target’s details are automatically logged.

To set the filter, do the following:

1. Open the menu and select [Log], [Target Log] and [Danger Target] to show the
[Danger Targets] menu.

2. At [CPA/TCPA], select [ON].

3. At [CPA], set the distance for the CPA.
4. At [TCPA], set the time for the TCPA.
Note: [Log Interval] is fixed at 10 minutes.
5. Click [Save] to save the settings, then click [Close] to close the menu.

19-11
19. RECORDING FUNCTIONS

19.6 Route Transfer Log

The [Route Transfer] log keeps a tab of sent and received route-related communica-
tions. When one or more of the following conditions are met, an entry is made in the
[Route Transfer] log.

• RRT sentence is sent from this system.

• RRT sentence is received by this system.
• A sent RRT sentence is not acknowledged by an external device.
The log data includes the following:

• Date: Date of entry

• Time: Time of entry
• Communication Type: Send, Receive or No Response
• Source: UID of route related communication
• Destination: UID of destination of route related communication
• Detail: Content of transfer
• Transfer Type: Type of communication - Monitor route, Plan route, or Query
• Transfer Name: Name of transferred route
• Transfer Version: Transferred route’s version
• Current WPT: Current waypoint
• Transfer Status: Current transfer status of the transferred route
• Application Status: Current status of the transfer application

How to view the route transfer log

On the InstantAccess bar, click the [Log], [Target Log] and [Route TRANS Log] but-
tons

• To show the logs of a specific period, enter the period to show with [Period Cov-
ered (UTC)] then click the [Set Period] button. Use the [Clear Period] button to dis-
play all logs. Log entries outside the set period become gray and the entries inside
the set period remain visible. To show log entries which are not visible, spin upward
to scroll up the log, downward to scroll down the log.
• To refresh the log, click the [Refresh] button.
• To search the log, do as follows:
1) Click the [Find] button to show the [Find text] box.
2) Click the input box then enter the text to search.
3) Select the search direction with the up or down radio button.

19-12
 19. RECORDING FUNCTIONS

4) Click the [Find] button. Matching text is highlighted in yellow at the top of the
screen.
5) To continue the search click the [Find] button. To cancel the search, click the
[Cancel] button.
• To print the log, click the [Print Text] button. Select the printing format then click
the [Print] button.
• To export the log, click the [Export File] button. The file is namedRouteTransferL-
ogYYYYMMDDhhmmss.csv.

19-13
19. RECORDING FUNCTIONS

This page is intentionally left blank.

19-14
20. ALERTS

20.1 What is an Alert?

“Alert” is a generic name for a notice to any unusual or potentially dangerous situation
generated within the system.

Alerts are classified according to priority and category.

Alert priority
There are four alert priorities: emergency*, alarm, warning and caution.
* Generated when this radar is connected to an AMS.

Emergency: Immediate danger to human life or to the ship and its machinery exists
and that immediate action must be taken. Emergency alerts are handled the same
as an alarm.

Alarm: Situations or conditions which require immediate attention, decision and (if
necessary) action by the bridge team to avoid any kind of hazardous situation and to
maintain the safe navigation of the ship.

Warning: Conditions or situations which require immediate attention for precautionary

reasons, to make the bridge team aware of conditions which are not immediately haz-
ardous, but may become so.
Caution: Awareness of a condition which continues to require attention out of the or-
dinary consideration of the situation or of given information.

Alert category
An alert is further classified by category, A, B or C, according to its degree of severity
or source.

Category Description
A Category A alerts include alerts indicating
• Danger of collision
• Danger of grounding
B Category B alerts are alerts where no additional information for decision
support is necessary. Category B alerts are all alerts not falling under
category A.
C Engine-related alert

20-1
20. ALERTS

20.2 Alert Box

When an alert is generated, the related alert message and alert state icon appear in
the [Alert] box, which is at the bottom right corner on the screen. An audible alarm is
additionally generated for alarms and warnings.

In addition to the alert message and alert state icon, the [Alert] box has the buzzer stop
button and provides access to the [Alert List] and [Alert Log].

Alert state
171
Buzzer stop button
icon Crossing Safety C
Click to temporarily
silence buzzer.

Alert message Alert List/Alert Log button

(alert number (Right click to select.)
and name)
Alert state icon: The state of an alert is shown with an icon. See page 20-4page 20-4.

Alert message: The number and name of all active alerts appear in the message ar-
ea, with the alert of the highest priority on top always. The color of both the message
and the background change according to alert priority and alert state. See the table on
the next page.
An alert can be acknowledged from the [Alert] box or [Alert List]. An alert remains in
the [Alert] box and [Alert List] until it is acknowledged and rectified. See
section 20.5section 20.5.

Alert List/Alert Log button: Right-click to select [Alert List Window] or [Alert Log Win-
dow]. The background color of the button is light blue when the list or log is open. See
section 20.5section 20.5 and section 20.6section 20.6 for a description of the list and
log respectively.

Buzzer stop button: Click to temporarily silence the buzzer, which sounds against
alarms and warnings. See page 20-5page 20-5.

20-2
 20. ALERTS

Alert message display format

Priority of
Alert indication Alert state Display state
alert
Emergency, - Not acknowledged/ Black characters
171 Alarm Not rectified. on red back-
Crossing Safety C. OR ground.
- Not acknowledged/ (Flashing)
Displayed Rectified.
alternately Red characters on
gray background.
171
Crossing Safety C.
Emergency, Acknowledged/Not Red characters on
171 Alarm rectified. gray background.
! Crossing Safety C.

Warning - Not acknowledged/ Black characters

10173 Not rectified. on yellow-orange
Crossing Special Area OR background.
Not acknowledged/ (Flashing)
Displayed Rectified.
alternately Yellow-orange
10173 characters on gray
Crossing Special Area background.

Warning Acknowledged/Not Yellow-orange

10173 rectified. characters on gray
Crossing Special Area background.

Caution Not rectified. Yellow characters

10400 on gray back-
Sensor COM Error ground.

Emergency, Acknowledged/Recti- No display.

Alarm, fied.
Warning

Caution Rectified. No display.

20-3
20. ALERTS

Alert state icons

The table shows the icons used to indicate the various alert states for the alarm, warn-
ing and caution alerts.

Icon Alert state Icon description

Alert priority: Alarm
1 Not acknowledged/Not rec- Red triangle with black loudspeaker in
tified center of triangle. Flashing (on 1 s, off 1 s).
2 Not acknowledged/Not rec- Red triangle with crossed out black loud-
tified, speaker in center of triangle. Flashing (on
Buzzer temporarily silenced 1 s, off 1 s).
3 Acknowledged/Not rectified Steadily displayed red triangle with black
exclamation point in center of triangle.

4 Active - responsibility trans-

Steadily displayed red triangle. Right ar-
ferred alarm row at center. Presented together with
alert text.
5 Not acknowledged/Rectified Red triangle with black check mark in cen-
ter of triangle. Flashing (on 1 s, off 1 s).

Alert priority: Warning

6 Not acknowledged/Not rec- Yellow-orange circle with black loud-
tified speaker in center of circle. Flashing (on 1
s, off 1 s).
7 Not acknowledged/Not rec- Yellow-orange circle with crossed out
tified, black loudspeaker in center of circle.
Buzzer temporarily silenced Flashing (on 1 s, off 1 s).
8 Acknowledged/Not rectified Steadily displayed yellow-orange circle
with black exclamation point in center of
circle.
9 Active - responsibility trans- Steadily displayed yellow-orange circle.
ferred warning Right arrow at center. Presented together
with alert text.
10 Not acknowledged/Rectified Yellow-orange circle with black check
mark in center of circle. Flashing (on 1 s,
off 1 s).
Alert priority: Caution
11 Caution Steadily displayed yellow square with
black exclamation point in center of
square.

20-4
 20. ALERTS

Buzzer stop button

The color of both the background and the icon change according to alert state.

Button state Description

No alert generated. The background is gray and the icon is grayed
out.

An alarm or warning is being acknowledged. The background is gray

and the icon is white.

Button clicked to silence buzzer temporarily. The background is light-

blue and the icon is black.

20.3 How to Temporarily Silence the Buzzer for an

Emergency, Alarm or Warning
When the buzzer for an emergency, alarm or warning sounds, you can temporarily si-
lence it by doing one of the following:

• Click the buzzer stop button in the [Alert] box.

• In the [Alert List], click the [Silence] button.

The buzzer is stopped and the alert state changes. An alert message remains in the
[Alert] box and [Alert List] until acknowledged and rectified.

20.4 How to Acknowledge an Emergency, Alarm or

Warning
When an alarm or warning is generated, the buzzer sounds and the name of the alert
appears and flashes in the [Alert] box and [Alert List].

To acknowledge the alert, do one of the following:

• Press the ALARM ACK key.

• In the [Alert] box, click the unacknowledged alert.
• In the [Alert List], click either the alert name or the [ACK] button.

After acknowledgement, the buzzer and the flashing for the alert message are stopped
and the priority of the alert changes as shown in the table below. The alert message
remains on the display until rectified.

Priority no. Priority of alert Alert state

High 1 Emergency, Alarm Not acknowledged/Not rectified
2 Warning Not acknowledged/Not rectified
3 Emergency, Alarm Not acknowledged/Rectified
4 Warning Not acknowledged/Rectified
5 Emergency, Alarm Acknowledged/Not rectified
6 Warning Acknowledged/Not rectified
Low 7 Caution Not rectified

20-5
20. ALERTS

Category of alert and place of alert acknowledgement

The place of alert acknowledgement depends on the category of the alert.

Place of alert
Category Where alert notification occurs
acknowledgement
A Equipment that generated the alert Equipment that generated the alert.
and AMS* (Alert Management Sys-
tem).
B Equipment that generated the alert Equipment that generated the alert or
and AMS AMS.
C IAS (Integrated Automation Sys-
–
tem) generated engine alert.

* A category A alert does not sound at the AMS.

20-6
 20. ALERTS

20.5 Alert List

The [Alert List] displays all active alerts, with unacknowledged alerts at the top, in pri-
ority order. The ZDA sentence is required to display the time in the list.

Note 1: The [Alert List] cannot be opened while the radar is transmitting.
Note 2: A full list of alerts, along with their meaning and action required (if any) is sup-
plied at the back of this manual.
The log shows the following information for each alert:
• Alert no. • Time (UTC) alert was acknowledged
• Alert text • Details about the alert selected
• Source of alert • Quantity of unacknowledge alerts*
• Time (UTC) alert was generated *: Chart mode only.

Alert list in radar mode

To show the alert list in radar mode, right-click the [Alert List/Alert Log] button in the
Alert box, click [Alert List/Alert Log] then click the [Alert List] tab.
ACK ALL button Silence buzzer button

Alert details
Page selection buttons
Click to select page.
Available only when
multiple pages exist.
► : Show next page
►| : Jump to last page
◄ : Show previous page
|◄ : Jump to first page

No. of unacknowledged alerts

If there are no unacknowl-
edged alerts, “0” is shown.

Alert no./ Alert Time of

Instance name Alert acknowledgement
source Time
Alert state of alert
icon/Aggregate
icon

The background color of an unacknowledged alarm is red and flashing and unac-
knowledged warning is yellow-orange and flashing. An acknowledged alert is dis-
played steadily, in red for alarm and yellow-orange for warning. A caution is displayed
steadily in yellow.

The [Filter] checkboxes at the top of the window let you select what alerts to view.
Check or uncheck the boxes to show or hide the corresponding alerts.

To find details about an alert, click the applicable alert icon, the alert details appear in
the [Detail] box at the top of the window. The box shows the reason for the alert, how
to handle the alert, etc.

An individual alarm or warning can be acknowledged by clicking it.

The [Silence] button silences the buzzer.

20-7
20. ALERTS

Alert list in chart mode

To show the alert list in radar mode, right-click the [Alert List/Alert Log] button in the
Alert box, click [Alert List].

Filter Buzzer silence button

Alert details
ACK ALL
button Page selection buttons
Click to select page.
Available only when
multiple pages exist.
► : Show next page
►| : Jump to last page
◄ : Show previous page
|◄ : Jump to first page

Alert no Alert Alert Time alert

name source acknowledged
Alert state Time
icon/Aggregate of alert
icon

The background color of an unacknowledged alarm is red and flashing and unac-
knowledged warning is yellow-orange and flashing. An acknowledged alert is dis-
played steadily, in red for alarm and yellow-orange for warning. A caution is displayed
steadily in yellow.

The Status section has three columns. Icons appear in the columns as follows:

• Left column: Emergency, Alarm, Warning and Caution icons (numbers 1 to 11 in the
table at "Alert state icons" on page 20-4"Alert state icons" on page 20-4).
• Middle column: Blank.
• Right column: Blank.
The [Filter] checkboxes at the top of the window let you select what alerts to view.
Check or uncheck the boxes to show or hide the corresponding alerts.

To find details about an alert, click the applicable alert, the alert details appear in the
[Detail] box at the top of the window. The box shows the reason for the alert, how to
handle the alert, etc.

An individual alarm or warning can be acknowledged by clicking it.

The [Silence] button silences the buzzer.

20-8
 20. ALERTS

How the alert list is updated after acknowledgement, rectification

When you acknowledge an alert, its display method on the [Alert] list changes accord-
ing to alert category and alert state. Acknowledged and rectified alerts are immediately
removed from the list.

Alert Display after Display after

No. Alert state
priority acknowledgement rectification
1 Emergency, Not acknowledged/Not recti- 5 2
Alarm fied
2 Not acknowledged/Rectified 8 –
3 Warning Not acknowledged/Not recti- 6 4
fied
4 Not acknowledged/Rectified 9 –
5 Emergency, Acknowledged/Not rectified – 8
Alarm
6 Warning Acknowledged/Not rectified – 9
7 Caution Not rectified – 10
8 Emergency, Acknowledged/Rectified – –
Alarm
9 Warning Acknowledged/Rectified – –
10 Caution Rectified – –

20-9
20. ALERTS

20.6 Alert Log

The [Alert] log stores and displays the latest 10,000 alerts.

Note: The [Alert Log] cannot be opened while the radar is transmitting.
The log shows the following information for each alert:
• Priority of alert (Emergency, Alarm, • Time (UTC) alert was acknowledged
Warning, Caution) • Time (UTC) alert was rectified
• Category of alert (A, B or C) • Time (UTC) alert was silenced*1
1
• Alert no., alert instance* • Time (UTC) alert was transferred to AMS*1
• Alert name
• Details for selected alert*2
• Source of alert
• Time (UTC) alert occurred *1: Chart for Radar mode only
*2: Radar mode or Chart for Radar mode
only

Alert log in radar mode

To show the alert log in radar mode, right-click the [Alert List/Alert Log] button in the
Alert box, click [Alert List/Alert Log] then click the [Alert Log] tab.

Category
Priority filter filter

Page selection buttons

Click to select page.
Available only when
multiple pages exist.
► : Show next page
►| : Jump to last page
◄ : Show previous page
|◄ : Jump to first page

Time alert
occured

Scroll right to show:

• Time alert was
Priority Alert name Alert- acknowledged
source • Time alert cause was
Alert no.
Category rectified
Details

You can select what type of alerts to display with [Priority Filter] and [Category Filter]
at the top of the list. The list can be sorted by [Priority], [Cat.], [Alert No.], [Description],
[Source], [Occurred Time], [ACKed TIime] or [Rectified Time]. Click the corresponding
column title to sort. To find detailed information about an alert, select it to show de-
tailed information in the [Detail] box. To search the log, enter text in the [Log Search]
box then click the [Find] button. You can save the contents of the log to a USB flash
memory, in “.dat” format, by clicking the [Export Log] button.

20-10
 20. ALERTS

Alert log in chart mode

To show the alert list in radar mode, right-click the [Alert List/Alert Log] button in the
Alert box, click [Alert List].

Priority filter Category filter

Page selection buttons

Click to select page.
Available only when
multiple pages exist.
► : Show next page
►| : Jump to last page
◄ : Show previous page
|◄ : Jump to first page

Time alert
occured

Scroll right to show:

• Time alert was
Priority Alert name Alert- acknowledged
source • Time alert cause was
Alert no. rectified
Category Details

You can select what type of alerts to display with [Priority Filter] and [Category Filter]
at the top of the list. The list can be sorted by [Priority], [Cat.], [Alert No.], [Description],
[Source], [Occurred Time], [ACKed TIime] or [Rectified Time]. Click the corresponding
column title to sort. To find detailed information about an alert, select it to show de-
tailed information in the [Detail] box. To search the log, enter text in the [Log Search]
box then click the [Find] button. You can save the contents of the log to a USB flash
memory, in “.dat” format, by clicking the [Export Log] button.

20.7 Alert Reception from Connected Sensors

An “ALR receive and ACK transmit” communication is available for every serial line
input. The ALR message from the sensor includes information about alerts from the
sensor, and is presented though the normal alert system. When you acknowledge an
alert, an ACK message is sent to the sensor to do remote acknowledge.

This interface is based on IEC 61162-1 and IEC 80/520/INF.

20-11
20. ALERTS

This page is intentionally left blank.

20-12
21. PARAMETERS

21.1 Ship and Route Parameters

The purpose of the ship and route parameters is set the basic parameters for the ship.
These parameters are relative to ship steering and they are very important to get cor-
rect function of the integrated navigation system. They must be maintained carefully.
Modification requires a good knowledge of the parameters' importance.

Open the menu and select [Ship & Route Parameters] from the [General] menu to
show the [Ship & Route] page. Set each item referring to the description below.

Ship parameters description

[MAX Speed]: Maximum speed the ship can do.
[MAX Height]: Max. height of ship above sea level.
[MAX Draught]: Max. draught of ship.

Route parameters description

[MAX R.O.T]*: The maximum rate of turn of the ship. Set at installation.
[WPT Approach]*: The alert time before reaching the wheel over point.
[WPT Prewarning]*: The alert time before reaching the wheel over point.
[Default Line Radius]: Define the default value of radius between waypoints during au-
tomatic route steering.
[Default XTD Limit]: Define the default value of XTD limit.
[Default Safety Margin]: Define the default value of extension for channel limits to be
checked against selected alerts.
* Set at installation and cannot be changed by the operator.

21-1
21. PARAMETERS

21.2 Forwarding Distances

The forwarding distances are the distances the ship travels straight after the steering
command is given to the autopilot. These distances change according to the radius of
turn.

The forwarding distances are entered at installation and cannot be changed by the op-
erator. However, the operator can view the forwarding distances settings on the [For-
warding Distance] display ([MENU]→[General]→[Navigation Parameter]).

Note: These are the port side values. Starboard side values can also be shown. Con-
tact a FURUNO dealer for details.

21-2
 21. PARAMETERS

21.3 Cost Parameters

The cost parameters are used in the optimization calculation. Therefore define these
parameters before doing the calculation.

Open the menu and select [Cost Parameters] from the [General] menu to show the
[Cost Parameters] page. Set each item according to ship’s plan, etc.

At the [Cost] window, enter the cost/hour and cost/ton for heavy fuel oil and diesel oil.
At the [Fuel Consumption] window, define the fuel consumption figures for up to 12
different speeds. Before entering the data, plot the data on a graph, like the one shown
below. Use a second graph if, for example, diesel oil consumption is different from that
of heavy fuel oil. Reset the power to effect the settings.

FUEL CONSUMPTION
7

4
TON/h

0
0 1 2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16 20

SHIP’S SPEED (kn)

21-3
21. PARAMETERS

21.4 Instant Track Parameters

The instant track feature can create, in route monitoring, a simple route in the following
situations:

• Return to the monitored route when the vessel goes outside the channel limits.
• Temporarily deviate from the monitored route (avoid collision, etc.).

How to set instant track parameters

Set the parameters for the instant track ([MENU] → [General] → [Ship & Route Pa-
rameters] → [Instant Track] tab).

[Delay before Initiating First Turn]: Set the number of seconds (30 - 600 seconds) to
wait before initiating the first turn in the simple route.

[Turn Radius]: Set the turning radius (0.02 - 3.00 NM) to use between waypoints (four
waypoints) in the simple route.

[XTD Limit]: Set the channel limit (10 - 3704 m) for the instant track, automatically or
manually. The [Auto] setting uses the channel limit set for the monitored route.

[Route Check Strictly]: Check to prevent monitoring of instant track when a chart alert
(alarm or warning) is found through the route check. Uncheck to monitor instant track
in spite of chart alert found through the route check.

21-4
22. SETTINGS MENU
The [Settings] menu provides file import, export and maintenance, testing facilities
(display, keyboard, self test), data sharing, customizing, screenshot processing, and
CCRP selection.

Note: The [Alert Settings] page has no use.

22.1 How to Access the Settings Menu

Click the Settings button ( ) on the Sta-
tus bar then select [Settings]. The right
message appears.

Click the [OK] button to show the [Settings]

menu.

For the service

technician

DB Export:

Execute

Playback data Log Export:

Export Event Log

Export Application Log

No. Name Description

1 Pages (menus) Twelve menus.
2 Page selection Scroll the [Settings] menu.
buttons
3 Menu area The menu for the selected page appears here.
4 [Exit] button Click to close [Setting] menu.

To open a page, use the page selection buttons to select a page then click the tab of
the page required. The color of the border of the page selected is light blue.

22-1
22. SETTINGS MENU

22.2 File Export

The [File Export] page lets you export setting data, routes, user charts, radar maps,
radar installation, and logs (event, application) to a USB flash memory, in .zip file for-
mat, to share with other like units.

DB Export:

1
Execute 7
2
3 Playback data Log Export:
4
Export Event Log
5 8
Export Application Log

No. Name Description

1 [Setting data] Check to export setting data (radar, chart, conning, com-
mon, performance monitor data) and ten user profile data.
2 [Route/User chart] Check to export all routes and user charts.
3 [Playback data] No use.
4 [Radar map] Check to export all radar maps.
5 [Radar Installation] Check to export all setting of the [RADAR INSTALLATION]
menu. The [RADAR INSTALLATION] menu is for service
man only.
6 [Export] button Click the button to open the [SAVE FILE] dialog box. Select
the destination to save then click the [Save] button to export
all selected objects.
7 [Execute] button Save the inside check data to SSD. Only service technician
can extract the check data.
8 [Export Event Log] Export the (encoded) event log and application log, respec-
button, [Export Ap- tively. The exported file can be sent to an agent or dealer to
plication Log] but- assist in troubleshooting.
ton

Note 1: Item 5 does not appear until a object is selected.

Note 2: The message "Now processing" appears during the exporting. The message
"File export finished." appears upon completion of the exporting. Click the [OK] button.

22-2
 22. SETTINGS MENU

22.3 File Import

The [File Import] page lets you import setting data, routes, user charts, radar maps
and radar installation from an external media (USB flash memory, etc.).

2
Playback data

Radar Installation

No. Name Description

1 [Select file to Click to show the [OPEN FILE] dialog box, where you can select
import] button the file to import.
2 [Select data to Check the data to import, among [Setting data], [Route/User
import] chart] and [Radar map].
Note 1: [Playback data] is no use.
Note 2: [Radar Installation] available in Service mode only.
3 [Import] button Click to import the objects selected. The following message ap-
pears on the display.

Note 1: The system automatically restarts after setting data is imported.

Note 2: If importing could not be completed, first check if the USB flash memory is
properly inserted. If inserted properly, try importing again.
Note 3: The [Select data to import] menu does not appear until after a file is selected.
The [Import] button appears after the data to import is selected.
Note 4: The message "Now processing" appears during the importing. The message
"File import finished." appears upon completion of the importing. Click the [OK] button.

22-3
22. SETTINGS MENU

22.4 File Maintenance

The [File Maintenance] page lets you restore the last-saved route/user chart applica-
tion and route/user chart system.

1
2

No. Name Description

1 [Route/Userchart Click to restore last-saved route/userchart application.
Application Back-
up]
2 [Route/Userchart Click to restore last-saved route/userchart system.
System Backup]
3 [Restore] button Click to restore item selected.

Note: To restore the route data from the backup data, first check all route data then
do the restore from the latest data.

22-4
 22. SETTINGS MENU

22.5 Self Test

The [Self Test] page is mainly used to check the equipment. The chart radar is inop-
erative during the test.

XX.XX
XX.XX

XX.XX

XX.XX=Program version no.

No. Name Description

1 Test results, program • Self test results
numbers, SSD info, IP • Program numbers (subject to change) for each soft-
collision, dongle info ware program
• SSD’s SMART information
• IP collision check result
• Dongle information
2 [Start] button Start the self test.
3 [Stop] button Stop the self test. (Shown during test.)
4 [Export] button Export the results of the self test to an external medium
(ex. USB flash memory).

Self test results display

The normal results of the boards are shown as follows.

Normal result
Item
Magnetron radar Solid state radar
SPU Status
12V Power Supply (V) 11.4 to 12.6
5V Power Supply (V) 4.75 to 5.25
3.3V Power Supply (V) 3.18 to 3.42
2.5V Power Supply (V) 2.4 to 2.6
1.8V Power Supply (V) 1.71 to 1.89
1.25V Power Supply (V) 1.19 to 1.31

22-5
22. SETTINGS MENU

Normal result
Item
Magnetron radar Solid state radar
1.2V_1 Power Supply (V) 1.14 to 1.26
1.2V_2 Power Supply (V) 1.14 to 1.26
3.3V_A Power Supply (V) 3.18 to 3.42
-10V Power Supply (V) -10.5 to -9.5 not connect
0.9V_1 Power Supply (V) not connect 0.86 to 0.94
0.9V_2 Power Supply (V) not connect 0.86 to 0.94
1.8V_A Power Supply (V) not connect 1.71 to 1.89
HV (V) 500 to 560 not connect
Magnetron Heater Voltage • X-band 12kW: not connect
(V) 8.1 to 8.6 or 6.8 to 7.3
• X-band 25kW:
7.0 to 7.5 or 5.7 to 6.2
• S-band
7.4 to 7.9 or 6.3 to 6.8
Magnetron Heater Current • X-band: 0.5 to 0.6 not connect
(A) • S-band: 1.1 to 1.4
IF 5V Voltage (V) 4.75 to 5.25 not connect
IF -10V Voltage (V) -10.5 to -9.5 not connect
MD 12V Voltage (V) 11.4 to 12.6 not connect
Antenna Speed (rpm) • Antenna rotation 24 rpm: 22 to 26
• Antenna rotation 42 rpm: 39 to 44
Magnetron Current (A) • X-band: 5.0 to 12.0 not connect
• S-band: 6.0 to 10.0
Trigger Frequency (Hz) • STBY: 0
• [2ND ECHO REJ]=[OFF], TT range*= 24NM:
S1: 2640 to 3360, S2: 2640 to 3360,
M1: 1320 to 1680, M2: 1060 to 1340, M3: 880 to 1120,
L: 530 to 670
• [2ND ECHO REJ]=[OFF], TT range*= 32NM:
S1: 1940 to 2460, S2: 1940 to 2460,
M1: 1320 to 1680, M2: 1060 to 1340, M3: 880 to 1120,
L: 530 to 670
• [2ND ECHO REJ]=[ON]:
S1: 2640 to 3360, S2: 2640 to 3360,
M1: 440 to 560, M2: 440 to 560, M3: 440 to 560,
L: 440 to 560
*: TT range ([MAX RANGE]) is set at the installation.
LNA Monitor Voltage (V) 0.5 to 1.5 not connect
Tune Indicator (V) 2.0 to 3.0 not connect
Tune Initialize Indicator (V) 2.0 to 3.0 not connect
IF Frequency (MHz) • Pulse length = [S1], [S2]: not connect
0.0
• Pulse length = other than
the above settings:
55.0 to 65.0
FAN1 Rotation Speed (rpm) • X-band: 3000 to 5000 • X-band: 3000 to 5000
• S-band: 0 • S-band: not connect
FAN2 Rotation Speed (rpm) 3000 to 5000
Board Temperature (degC) -40 to -70
V TRIG Voltage (V) 10.0 to 18.0 not connect
ROM Check OK

22-6
 22. SETTINGS MENU

Normal result
Item
Magnetron radar Solid state radar
RAM Check OK
DIP Switch (SW7-SW0) Displays the DIP switch settings on the SPU board
Board Revision Number Displays the version of the SPU board
MD Board Revision Number Displays the version of the MD board
TX Type X-12kW/X-25kW/S-30kW X-Solid/S-Solid
IP Address Displays IP address of the SPU board
SPU Error Status ffff
MTR-DRV Status
Board Temperature (degC) Ambient temperature: below +20°C
12V Power Supply (V) 9 to 15
Motor Current (A) • X-band: 24rpm: 0.8 • 24rpm: 1.3
• X-band: 42rpm: 1.2 • 42rpm: 2
• S-band: 24rpm: 1.3
• S-band: 42rpm: 2
Motor Voltage (V) 43 to 53 (33 to 53*)
*: For antenna unit installed on the foremast.
Motor Rotation Speed (rpm) 0 (STBY)/24/36/42
Board Revision Number Displays the version of the MTR-DRV board.
ROM Check OK
RAM Check OK
PM Status
12V Power Supply (V) 9 to 15
PLL Status For X-band (with board revi- • PM activated: LOCK
sion number 1 or earlier) • PM inactive: UNLOCK
and S-band (with board re-
vision number 0): UNLOCK

For X-band (with board revi-

sion number 2 or later) and
S-band (with board revision
number 1 or later):
• PM activated: LOCK
• PM inactive: UNLOCK
Board Revision Number Displays the version of the PM board.
ROM Check OK
RAM Check OK
RF-Converter Status
HPA Board Temperature not connect -40 to 100
(degC)
6V Power Supply (V) not connect 4.9 to 8
48V Power Supply (V) not connect 40 to 53
IF PLL Status not connect LOCK
RF PLL Status not connect LOCK
Antenna Output Power not connect 48 to 55
(dBm) (After a restart, requires at
least one transmission be-
fore the result is shown.)
Board Revision Number not connect Displays the version of the
RF-CONV board.
ROM Check not connect OK

22-7
22. SETTINGS MENU

Normal result
Item
Magnetron radar Solid state radar
RAM Check not connect OK
Error Status not connect not connect
PSU-Control Status
Board Temperature (degC) 40 to 100
FAN1 Rotation Speed (rpm) 3700 to 5700
FAN2 Rotation Speed (rpm) 3700 to 5700
FAN3 Rotation Speed (rpm) • X-band: 0
• S-band: 3700 to 5700
3.3V Power Supply (V) 3.0 to 3.6
12V_LAN Power Supply (V) 10.8 to 13.2
12V Power Supply (V) 10.0 to 13.2
48V Voltage (V) 45.1 to 51.3
48V Current (A) 0 to 7.5
Motor1 Voltage (V) 45.1 to 51.3
Motor2 Voltage (V) • S-band, 42 rpm: 45.1 to 51.3
• Other than above: 100
HV (V) 499.6 to 565.5
Board Revision Number Displays the version of the PSU CTRL board.
ROM Check OK
RAM Check OK
48V Status OK
HV Status OK
Motor1 Status OK
Motor2 Status OK
Wave Analyzer
Error Status • When connected with analysis PC and software: 0000
• Not connected with analysis PC: not connect

22-8
 22. SETTINGS MENU

22.6 Data Sharing

The [Data Sharing] page sets how to share brilliance and color palette settings. select
the items to share with the applications in the unit (namely, ECDIS, Radar) and the
data to share with other units (other FMD or FAR-3xx0). Uncheck an item to use it lo-
cally.

No. Name Description

1 [VRM], [EBL], [PI Check the items you want to share between the applications
Line] of this unit (radar function, chart function).
2 [Color Palette], Check the display settings items you want to share between
[Display Brilliance] the applications of this unit (radar function, chart function).
The display brilliance setting is reflected to both main and
sub displays.
Note: Uncheck [Display Brilliance] or [Color Palette] in (3)
to activate this setting.

3 [Color Palette], Set how to share color palette and display brilliance among
[Display Brilliance] the units (other FMD-3x00, FAR-3xx0) of the system. Check
to share a setting among units, or uncheck to use local set-
ting. After checking an item, a confirmation message ap-
pears. Click the [Yes] button to confirm selection. The
chosen setting is reflected on the brilliance and color palette
buttons on the InstantAccess bar as shown below. See
page 1-18page 1-18 and page 6-8page 6-8.
• Item checked: “S” appears on the corresponding button
to indicate the item is shared among the units of the sys-
tem.
• Item not checked: “L” appears on the corresponding but-
ton to indicate the item is not shared among the units of
the system.

22-9
22. SETTINGS MENU

22.7 Customize
The [Customize] page lets you set buzzer volume, key beep volume, and scrollwheel
rotation direction.

No. Name Description

1 [Wheel rotation] Set the direction of scrollwheel rotation direction.
[Normal]: Downward to increase value, upward to decrease
value.
[Reverse]: Reverse of [Normal].
2 [Key beep volume] Set the loudness of the key beep that sounds for correct key
or mouse button operation.
0: No beep, 1: LOW, 2: MID, 3: HIGH
3 [Alert sound vol- Set the loudness of the alert buzzer.
ume] 1: LOW, 2: MID, 3: HIGH

22-10
 22. SETTINGS MENU

22.8 Display Test

The [DIsplay Test] page displays various test patterns to check the monitor for proper
display of colors. Click the [Display Test] button to start the test. The buzzer sounds
when the display test starts.

Left-click to proceed in the numerical order shown below; right-click to proceed in re-
verse order.

(1) (2) (3) (4)

Diagonal Black All colors Black

(5) (6) (7) (8)

White Red Green Blue

(9) (10) (11) (12)

Gray Red bars Green bars Blue bars

(13) (14) (15) (16)

Yellow bars Aqua bars Purple bars Gray bars

To quit the display test at any time, press the ESC key on the applicable Control Unit.

22-11
22. SETTINGS MENU

22.9 Keyboard Test

The [Keyboard Test] page checks the controls and keys on the Radar Control Unit and
the ECDIS Control Unit and the trackball module on the Radar Control Unit, ECDIS
Control Unit and Trackball Control Unit.

5 6

3
4 5

No. Name Description

1 Common controls Operate the corresponding controls on the Ra-
dar Control Unit and chart radar Control Unit.
Rotate a control and the window above the
control shows the setting value. Push a control
and the corresponding location on screen
lights in light blue. (The EBL and VRM controls
do not have a push function.)
2 InstantAccess knob/key Check the InstantAccess knob and key.
1) Rotate the knob and the setting value ap-
pears in the window.
2) Push the knob and the knob lights in light
blue.
3) Push the key and the key lights in blue.
3 Keys of the Radar Control Operate each key. The key pressed lights in
Unit light blue.
4 Keyboard of the chart radar Operate each key. The key pressed lights in
Control Unit light blue.

22-12
 22. SETTINGS MENU

No. Name Description

5 Keys of both the Radar Con- Operate each key. The pressed key lights in
trol Unit and chart radar light blue.
Control Unit
6 Trackball module Check the trackball module of a Control Unit:
1) Spin the scrollwheel and rotate the track-
ball. The indication above the operated
control shows the setting value.
2) Push each button. The window above a
pushed button lights in light blue.
3) Push the scrollwheel. The window above
the wheel lights in light blue.
7 [Buzzer ON] button Click the [Buzzer ON] button to sound the
buzzer. The buzzer sounds and the button
flashes (in red). Click the button again to can-
cel.
8 [Contact Output] button Click the [Contact Output] button to output the
Alarm output contact signal from the Proces-
sor Unit. Click the button again to cancel.

22-13
22. SETTINGS MENU

22.10 Screenshots
The [Screenshot] page handles the exporting (to a USB flash memory) and deleting
of screenshots from the SSD.

4 5 6 7 8

No. Name Description

1 List List of screenshots taken. Screenshots are automatically
assigned a file name consisting of the time and date the
screenshot was taken.
2 Check boxes Put a checkmark in the box of the screenshot to process.
3 [Preview] Preview of the screenshot selected.
4 [Delete] button Delete the screenshot(s) selected.
5 [Export] button Export selected screenshot(s) to a USB flash memory.
6 [Print] button Print the screenshot selected.
7 [Apply] button Save comment.
8 [Comment] box Enter comment for screenshot. Put a check in appropri-
ate checkbox then enter comment.

22-14
 22. SETTINGS MENU

22.10.1 How to export screenshots

You can export screenshots to a USB flash memory as follows:

1. Insert a USB flash memory in the USB port on the Control Unit.
2. Open the [Screenshot] page.
3. Put a checkmark in the checkbox of the screenshot(s) to export.
4. Click the [Export] button.
SAVE FILE

USB Flash 04.04.2012 19:23

5. Select the USB flash memory.

6. Click the [OK] button to export the screenshots selected.
7. If the exporting was successful, a window showing the number of files exported
appears. Click the [OK] button to finish.

22.10.2 How to delete screenshots

You can delete the screenshots saved in the SSD inside the EC-3000.
1. Select the [Screenshot] page.
2. Put a checkmark in the checkbox of the screenshot(s) to delete. To select all
screenshots, right-click the box to the left of the [Date] column then select [Select
all]. To clear all check marks, select [Clear all].
3. Click the [Delete] button. The confirmation message "Attention: Selected files will
be deleted. Do you wish to continue?" appears.
4. Click the [Yes] button to delete the screenshots selected. The message "File de-
letion succeeded" appears.
5. Click the [OK] button.

22.10.3 How to print screenshots

With connection of a printer you can print the screenshots stored in the SSD of the
processor unit.

1. Select the [Screenshot] page.

2. Select the screenshot to print. Note that multiple screenshots cannot be printed at
the same time.
3. Click the [Print] button.
4. Click the [OK] button to finish.

22-15
22. SETTINGS MENU

22.11 User Default

The [User Default] page restores all default settings for [Radar menu], [Chart menu],
[User profile] and [Setting menu]. Click the [Restore User Setting] button. The mes-
sage "All setting data will be restored to the default. Do you wish to continue?" ap-
pears. Click the [Yes] button to restore default settings and reset the power.

If you require the setting data, copy it to a USB flash memory (using the file export fea-
ture), BEFORE restoring user defaults.

22-16
 22. SETTINGS MENU

22.12 CCRP
The [CCRP] page provides for selection of CCRP (Consistent Common Reference
Point) and shows the location of various sensors.

No. Name Description

1 CCRP Select the CCRP to use in the case of multiple CCRPs.
2 Anchor Enter anchor installation position (X and Y values from
CCRP). The setting ranges are X, -15.0 to 15 m; Y, 0.0 to
300.0 m.
3 Display Filter Check the items to show on the ship’s graphic.
4 Ship’s graphic Shows the location of the sensors selected at the [Dis-
play Filter].

22-17
22. SETTINGS MENU

This page is intentionally left blank.

22-18
23. COMMON REFERENCE SYSTEM

23.1 Installation of the System

Special attention of following topics is required to maintain the "Common Reference
System." The origin of the common reference system is the conning position on ves-
sel.

• The values of the center and conning positions depend on the size and geometry of
the ship.
• Offsets from the antenna position to the conning position of position sensors de-
pend on the location of the antennas of the position sensor.
• Offsets from the antenna position to the conning position of the radars depend on
the location of the radar antennas.

23.2 Accuracy of the System

Accuracy depends on the following conditions:

 Gyro error referenced to chart orientation

 Accuracy of EPFS
 Accuracy of radar performance and display (see the specifications at the back of
this manual).
 Accuracy of setting of CCRP (see section 2.33section 2.33)
The following items must be properly adjusted to meet the above conditions:
 Timing (Tx timing of radar echo). Timing is adjusted from the [RADAR INSTALLA-
TION] menu, accessible by the service technician. Contact a FURUNO dealer for
details.
 Heading (Adjustment of radar echo heading). Heading is adjusted from the [RA-
DAR INSTALLATION] menu, accessible by the service technician. Contact a FU-
RUNO dealer for details.
 Radar ANT position (Center of radar image is the radar antenna position). Radar
antenna position is set on the [Common Installation Settings] menu, accessible by
the service technician. Contact a FURUNO dealer for details.
 Conning position:
• The chart radar uses position data fed from a GPS navigator to calculate the lat-
itude and longitude position of the conning position.
• GPS antenna position and conning position are entered during the installation.
GPS antenna and conning positions are set on the [Common Installation Set-
tings] menu, accessible by the service technician. Contact a FURUNO dealer for
details.
• The latitude and longitude position displayed at the top-right position on the
screen is the latitude and longitude position of the conning position.
• The chart datum used by the chart radar is recorded in geodetic datum WGS-84;
therefore, the geodetic datum setting on the GPS navigator must be WGS-84.

23-1
23. COMMON REFERENCE SYSTEM

 Gyro data:
• Serial format gyro data is fed directly from a gyrocompass, thus adjustment of
the heading indication on the chart radar is not necessary.
• If synchro or stepper gyro data is fed to the chart radar, the heading indication
on the chart radar must be adjusted to match that of the gyro. For the adjustment
procedure, see section 1.17section 1.17.
 Speed data:
• Speed may be input from SDME or GPS.
• SDME may be single-axis water speed or dual-axis ground speed.
• GPS may be used to input COG/SOG.
• Ground speed may also be taken from TT reference target.
• Speed is entered from the [Setting] menu. For details, see
section 1.16section 1.16.

23-2
24. CONNING (optional specifica-
tion)/MINI CONNING/SIDE CON-
NING

24.1 Conning Display

The conning display provides relevant sensor information data (including engine data)
from external equipment, on one display to facilitate safe and efficient monitoring. The
ECDIS accepts sensor information data in analog, serial and contact signal formats.

Six sets of conning displays are available, and they are arranged at installation. Con-
sult with the installer of the equipment to decide the content and layout of each display.

To show the conning display, click the Operating Mode button on the Status bar to se-
lect [CONNING for RADAR].
Note: Analog data is shown in the lowest value of the setting range when the data is
not input.

Conning display Status bar (see next page)

S S

Note: The cursor can be moved be-

tween the main monitor and a sub Cursor Cursor
monitor and vice versa if the sub Push
monitor is configured to show the scrollwheel
Conning display. Push the scroll- Conning Radar
wheel until the cursor moves to the Sub monitor Main monitor
other monitor.

24-1
24. CONNING (optional specification)/MINI CONNING/SIDE CONNING

Conning display Status bar

S S

No. Button Description

1 Operating mode Selects the operating mode, [RADAR], [CHART for RADAR] or [CON-
NING].
2 Conning display Selects the conning display sheet to use, Sheet.1 - Sheet.6. (Sheet name
sheet is decided at installation. “Sheet x” (x=sheet number) is the default sheet
name.)
3 [SILENT] Goes to the [SILENT] mode. See section 6.7section 6.7.
4 [TOOL] Shows, hides the software keyboard; adjusts the volume of the key beep
and audio alert.

Shows, hides
software keyboard
Adjusts volume of Volume setting
key beep, audio
alert

To adjust a
volume, put Click up arrow
cursor in to raise volume;
applicable down arrow to
box. lower volume.

5 Selects a display palette. See section 1.5section 1.5. The indication on

the button changes according to the [Data Sharing] page. The default set-
S ting is “S”. See section 22.6section 22.6.
OR

6 Adjusts the brilliance of a the monitor. See section 1.6section 1.6. The in-
dication on the button changes according to the [Data Sharing] page. The
S default setting is “S”. See section 22.6section 22.6.
OR

7 Takes a screenshot. See section 1.21section 1.21.

8 Displays AMS and conning software version and system information. The
information shown in the figure may differ from your own. For System and
System 2 see section 1.24section 1.24.
9 Date See section 1.20section 1.20.
10 Time See section 1.20section 1.20.

24-2
 24. CONNING (optional specification)/MINI CONNING/SIDE CONNING

No. Button Description

11 Status • Rotates clockwise if the system is working properly. If it is not spinning
Indicator the system is not working. Shortly after the working indicator stops spin-
ning the buzzer sounds and the status LED turns red. Reset the power
R to restore normal operation.
• If the primary display mode is specified during installation, the first letter
E C of the primary mode name appears at the center of the working indicator
as follows: C: Conning, E: ECDIS, R: Radar. The letter can be clicked
to return to the primary display mode.

24.2 Conning Display Examples

Six conning display sheets are available, and the content, layout and name of each
sheet can be customized, by the service technician. Below are some examples con-
ning display sheets.

Example 1 (General navigation)

24-3
24. CONNING (optional specification)/MINI CONNING/SIDE CONNING

Example 2 (General navigation)

Example 3 (General navigation)

24-4
 24. CONNING (optional specification)/MINI CONNING/SIDE CONNING

Example 4 (General navigation)

Example 5 (General navigation)

Silence

24-5
24. CONNING (optional specification)/MINI CONNING/SIDE CONNING

Example 6 (All waters, navigation)

Silence

Example 7 (All waters, harbor)

27 May 2016

Silence

24-6
 24. CONNING (optional specification)/MINI CONNING/SIDE CONNING

Example 8 (Ocean, navigation)

㻞㻣㻌㻹㼍㼥㻌㻞㻜㻝㻢

Silence

Example 9 (Ocean, harbor)

27 May 2016

Silence

24-7
24. CONNING (optional specification)/MINI CONNING/SIDE CONNING

Example 10 (Ocean, harbor)

Silence

Example 11 (Ocean, harbor)

Silence

24-8
 24. CONNING (optional specification)/MINI CONNING/SIDE CONNING

Example 12 (Offshore Service Vessel, Fore 1)

Silence

Example 13 (Offshore Service Vessel, Fore 2)

27 May 2016

Silence

24-9
24. CONNING (optional specification)/MINI CONNING/SIDE CONNING

Example 14 (Offshore Service Vessel, Aft 1)

Silence

Example 15 (Offshore Service Vessel, Aft 2)

27 May 2016

Silence

24-10
 24. CONNING (optional specification)/MINI CONNING/SIDE CONNING

24.3 Mini Conning Display

The mini conning display, available in the Voyage navigation mode, provides various
navigation information and is set during the installation. The display example below
shows heading, doppler log speed and rudder angle. To show or hide the mini conning
display, click the [Mini Conning] button on the InstantAccess bar™.

To shift the mini conning display, right-click the mini conning display to show the con-
text-sensitive menu. Click an option: [Left Top], [Left Middle], [Left Bottom], [Right
Top], [Right Middle] or [Right Bottom].

24-11
24. CONNING (optional specification)/MINI CONNING/SIDE CONNING

24.4 Side Conning Display (landscape monitor only)

With the landscape monitor, the side conning display can be shown in the information
area, in the radar mode. The presence or absence of the display is determined during
the installation.

Four side conning sheets are preset during the installation according to expected us-
age, possible navigation conditions, etc. (The operator cannot modify the sheets.) You
can select a sheet by clicking the current sheet name at the top right corner on the
display.

Note: When the output resolution of this equipment is “FHD” (set at installation), the
side conning display is not shown.

Sheet name

Rudder

Side conning display

24-12
25. MAINTENANCE AND TROUBLE-
SHOOTING
Periodic checks and maintenance are important for proper operation of any electronic
system. This chapter contains maintenance and troubleshooting instructions to be fol-
lowed to obtain optimum performance and the longest possible life of the equipment.
Before attempting any maintenance or troubleshooting procedure please review the
safety information below. If you cannot restore normal operation after following the
troubleshooting procedures, do not attempt to check inside any unit; there are no user-
serviceable parts inside. Refer any repair work to a qualified technician.

WARNING NOTICE
Do not open the equipment. Do not apply paint, anti-corrosive
sealant or contact spray to coating or
Hazardous voltage which can plastic parts of the equipment.
cause electrical shock exists
inside the equipment. Only Those items contain organic solvents that
qualified personnel should can damage coating and plastic parts,
work inside the equipment. especially plastic connectors.
Turn off the radar power
switch before servicing the
antenna unit. Post a
warning sign near the
switch indicating it should
not be turned on while the
antenna unit is being
serviced.

Prevent the potential risk of

being struck by the rotating
antenna.
A transmitting radar
antenna emits
electromagnetic waves,
which can be harmful,
particularly the eyes.

Wear a safety belt and hard

hat when working on the
antenna unit.

Serious injury or death can

result if someone falls from
the radar antenna mast.

25-1
25. MAINTENANCE AND TROUBLESHOOTING

25.1 Maintenance
Regular maintenance is essential to good performance. A regular maintenance pro-
gram should be established and should at least include the items shown in the table
below.

Maintenance schedule
Interval Check point Check and measures Remarks
When needed FURUNO-supplied Dust or dirt may be removed Do not use chemical-based
monitor unit and from a cabinet with a soft cleaners for cleaning. They
Processor Unit cloth. Water-diluted mild de- can remove paint and mark-
tergent may be used if de- ings.
sired. DO NOT use chemical
cleaners to clean the display
unit; they may remove paint
and markings.
To clean the LCD, wipe the
LCD carefully to prevent
scratching, using tissue paper
and an LCD cleaner. To re-
move dirt or salt deposits, use
an LCD cleaner, wiping slowly
with tissue paper so as to dis-
solve the dirt or salt. Change
paper frequently so the salt or
dirt will not scratch the LCD.
Do not use solvents such as
thinner, acetone or benzene
for cleaning. Also, do not use
a degreaser or an antifog
solution, as they can strip the
coating from the LCD.
Filter inside Proces- Have a technician clean the
sor Unit filter if it is dusty. See
section 25.4section 25.4.
3 to 6 months Cabling Check that all cabling is firmly
connected and is not dam-
aged.
Exposed bolts and Exposed bolts and nuts are Check that bolts and nuts
nuts of antenna unit subject to corrosion. Further, are not corroded and are se-
they may loosen by vibration. curely fastened. If corroded,
clean and coat with anticor-
rosive sealant.
Adhesive (marine Check for deteriorations such Adhesive deterioration can
sealant) on nuts as splits and peeling. Re-ap- result in water leakage,
and bolts ply as required. For areas with which can cause corrosion.
extensive deterioration, re-
move the existing adhesive
before re-applying a fresh
coat.

25-2
 25. MAINTENANCE AND TROUBLESHOOTING

Interval Check point Check and measures Remarks

3 to 6 months Radiator Dust, dirt and salt deposits on The radiator is made of fiber-
the radiator cause signal at- glass reinforced plastic.
tenuation, resulting in loss of Therefore, do not used gas-
sensitivity. Wipe radiator with oline, benzene and the like
a freshwater-moistened cloth. to clean the radiator.
If the radiator is iced, use a
wooden or plastic headed
hammer to remove the ice.
DO NOT use a steel ham-
mer.
Terminals, connec- Check that all terminals and Have a qualified technician
tors connectors on circuit boards check terminals and connec-
are securely fastened. tors.
6 months to 1 Screws on terminal Check that all screws are Have a qualified technician
year boards in Proces- tightly fastened. check screws.
sor Units
5 years Grease on antenna Insufficient grease on the an- Have a qualified technician
rotary tenna rotary my cause cracks apply the grease oil to the
in the waterproofing gasket antenna rotary. If exposed to
(V-ring). To prevent water heavy wind, rain, or waves, it
leakage due to cracks in the is recommended to apply
V-ring, use the optional lubri- the grease during the regu-
cation kit (OP03-229) to apply lar maintenance.
the grease to the antenna ro-
tary.

25.2 How to Replace the Fuses

The fuse in the following units protects those
units from overvoltage (overcurrent) and in- WARNING
ternal fault. If a unit cannot be turned on,
Use the proper fuse.
check if its fuse has blown. If the fuse has
blown, find out the cause before replacing the Use of a wrong fuse can damage the
fuse. If the fuse blows again after replace- equipment or cause fire.
ment, contact your dealer for advice.

Unit Power supply Type Code no.

Power Supply Unit PSU-014 100-230 VAC F1: FGBO-A 250V 7A PBF 000-178-084-10
Power Supply Unit PSU-015 100-230 VAC F1: FGBO-A 250V 3A PBF 000-155-841-10
F2: FGBO-A 250V 7A PBF 000-178-084-10
Power Supply Unit PSU-016 100-230 VAC F1: FGBO-A 250V 5A PBF 000-155-840-10
Power Supply Unit PSU-018 100-230 VAC F1: FGBO-A 250V 3A PBF 000-155-841-10
F2: FGBO-A 250V 7A PBF 000-178-084-10
Monitor Unit Refer to the Operator’s Manual for the Monitor Unit.
Processor Unit EC-3000 100-115 VAC FGMB-S 125V 10A PBF 000-157-470-10
220-230 VAC FGMB-A 250V 5A PBF 000-157-570-10
Sensor Adapter MC-3000S 24 VDC FGMB-A 125V 3A PBF 000-157-481-10
Antenna Unit* 100-115/ 220- FGBO-A 250V 3A PBF 000-155-841-10
230 VAC

*: Only for configurations with the De-icer Kit installed.

25-3
25. MAINTENANCE AND TROUBLESHOOTING

25.3 Trackball Maintenance

If the cursor moves abnormally, clean the trackball and inside the trackball housing (in-
cluding the lens) as shown below:

1. Turn the retaining ring on the trackball module in the direction of the arrows (see
figure below) to unlock it, then remove the retaining ring.

Trackball

Retaining ring

2. Use cellophane tape to remove the trackball form the trackball housing.
Place the trackball and the retaining ring on clean, soft cloth laid on a flat surface.
3. Clean the ball with a damp, soft cloth, then use a dry, lint-free cloth to carefully
wipe the ball dry.
4. Use a swab, moistened with water, to carefully clean the inside of the retaining
ring, the inside of the trackball housing, the supports and the lens. Change the
swab regularly so that dirt and dust build-up is easily removed.

Swab
Lens

Supports
Retaining ring - inner side

Trackball housing
5. Make sure that the trackball, trackball housing and retaining ring are completely
dry.
6. Re-set the ball and retaining ring. Be sure the retaining ring is not inserted re-
versely.

25-4
 25. MAINTENANCE AND TROUBLESHOOTING

25.4 How to Clean and Replace the Air Inlet Filter

25.4.1 EC-3000 Processor Unit

Clean the air inlet filter in the Processor Unit when it becomes dusty. Turn the Proces-
sor Unit off, then remove the filter and clean it with water and a mild detergent. Rinse
the filter, allow the filter to dry then return it to the Processor Unit.

Note 1: Be sure the air inlet is not blocked. A blocked inlet can cause the temperature
to rise inside the cabinet, which can lead to malfunction.
Note 2: The right side of the Processor Unit has an exhaust vent. Remove dust from
the vent as necessary.

Air inlet Filter

Processor unit, left side

If the filter appears brittle and leaves residue on your hands when dry, replace the fil-
ter.

For filter replacement, consult your local dealer and quote the following details:

Part number: 24-014-0105 Code: 100-366-821-10

25-5
25. MAINTENANCE AND TROUBLESHOOTING

25.4.2 RCN-303/304 Console Units

The console unit air filters are fitted on the inside of the console units and are not ac-
cessible normally. The figures below show the locations of each air filter.

Note: The monitor size may differ, depending on the configuration purchased. The fig-
ures below are for reference only and are not to scale.

RCN-303/304 Front view RCN-303/304 Rear view

It is recommended to have a qualified technician clean and check the air filters when
conducting routine service and maintenance. If the air filters require replacement, con-
sult your dealer and quote the following details:

No. Filter part no. Filter Code no. Remarks

1 03-163-7018 100-316-691-10 RCN-303/304: Front cover, lower section.
2 03-163-7219 100-320-810-10 RCN-303/304: Rear cover, upper section.

25-6
 25. MAINTENANCE AND TROUBLESHOOTING

25.5 Troubleshooting
The troubleshooting table below provides common faults and the remedy with which
to restore normal operation.

Radar troubleshooting
If… then… Remedy
the radar echoes disappear and check the connection between Reconnect the cable (if loos-
the alert 727 (ALF format: the EC-3000 and radar sensor. ened) then restart the equip-
194,8) "Radar Sensor COM Er- ment.
ror" appears
the alert 750 (ALF format: • check the connection be- Reconnect the cable (if loos-
10740,3) "EXT Radar COM Er- tween the EC-3000 of this ened) then restart the equip-
ror" appears equipment and the EC-3000 ment.
in the LAN line.
• check the connection be-
tween the EC-3000 and ra-
dar sensor in the LAN line.
the equipment cannot be turned • power connector may have • Check connector.
on loosened.
• ship's mains is off. • Check ship's mains.
• fuse has blown. • Replace fuse.
the equipment can be turned on • brilliance is too low. • Adjust brilliance.
but nothing appears on the dis- • the ambient temperature is • The heater is warming the
play less than 0°C (32°F). EC-3000. The display ap-
pears in approx. 10 minutes.
key doesn't beep when operat- • key beep is turned off. • Turn on key beep from the
ed menu.
picture not updated or picture • If the picture freezes, the • Restart the equipment.
freezes. buzzer sounds and the Sta-
tus LED blinks in red.
picture does not change even • suspect faulty the RANGE • Hit the RANGE key several
though range is changed. key or video freeze. times. If nothing happens, re-
start the equipment.
only two index lines are dis- • check index line distance set- • Refer to
played ting. section 2.23.3section 2.23.3
for how to adjust index line
distance.
range rings are not displayed • range rings are hid. • Turn on the range rings.
tracked target is not tracked • sea clutter etc. are masking • Adjust A/C SEA and A/C
correctly tracked target. RAIN to suppress sea and
rain clutters.
sensitivity is poor • suspect second-trace echo • Reject second-trace echo;
or soiled radiator. clean radiator.

25-7
25. MAINTENANCE AND TROUBLESHOOTING

Chart troubleshooting
If… then… Remedy
message "No connec- • dongle is not connected. • Connect dongle.
tion to dongle" appears
the message "There is • dongle is not connected. • Connect dongle.
no dongle or an error • data in the dongle is corrupted. • Contact FURUNO for assistance.
has occurred in the
dongle. The system will
automatically shut
down." appears
monitored route is not • route has not been selected. • Select route to monitor.
displayed • monitor route has not been se- • Open the [Route] page of the
lected to be visible above the [Symbol Display] menu and check
chart. the monitored route parts to show.
planned route is not • route has not been selected. • Select route as “planned”.
displayed • planned route has not been se- • Open [Route] page of [Symbol Dis-
lected to be visible above the play] menu and check the planned
chart. route parts to show.
route monitoring is • Alert 691 (ALF format: • Steer the ship back to the route
stopped 10800,1): RM Stop - Exceed then restart route monitoring.
Max XTE. Own ship is too far
away from the route. • Request service.
• Alert 692 (ALF format:
10800,2): RM Stop - No Valid
Sensor Data. Chart radar inter- • Check sensor connections.
nal error.
• Alert 693 (ALF format:
10800,3): RM Stop - Other
Causes. Required data (posi-
tion, SOG/COG) not found.
symbol of user chart • two or more symbols may be • Do the delete action several times.
cannot be erased superimposed on each other.
position cannot be • position sensor(s) is not select- • Check position sensor selections.
found ed on the [POSN] page.
• position sensor is turned off. • Turn on position sensor.
• sensor cable has loosened. • Check cable.
ENC chart cannot be • No ENC chart for area. • Open ENC chart from [Manage
displayed Charts] dialog box
• Dongle not connected. • Connect dongle.
past track is not • past track is not selected to be • Open [Tracking] page of [Symbol
displayed visible. Display] menu and select [Own
Ship Past Tracks] to [Primary] or
[Secondary] as appropriate.
monitored user chart is • user chart is not selected to be • Open [Mariner] page of [Symbol
not displayed on chart visible. Display] menu and select parts to
display show.
user chart is not dis- • user chart is not selected in • Select user chart in Voyage navi-
played on radar display Voyage navigation mode. gation mode.
the message "Nearing • the memory usage limit for soft- If you need to save your work, click
memory usage limit. ware is close to capacity. Per- the [Later] button then restart the
Click the Restart button formance may be affected. equipment. If you don't need to save
to restart the system to your work, click the [Restart] button.
prevent trouble." ap-
pears

25-8
 25. MAINTENANCE AND TROUBLESHOOTING

If… then… Remedy

the message "Memory • the memory usage limit for soft- Click the [Restart] button to reset the
usage limit reached. ware is reached. Performance power. No other operations are avail-
Click the Restart button may be affected. able than restart.
to restart the system to
prevent trouble." ap-
pears
both the display mode • the memory usage limit for soft- Stop all operations and restart the
buttons [RADAR] and ware is close to capacity. Per- equipment.
[CHART for RADAR] formance may be affected.
are yellow

25.6 Consumable Parts

The table below lists the consumable parts in the antenna unit, Monitor Units, Proces-
sor Unit and Sensor Adapters. Request a FURUNO agent or dealer to replace the con-
sumable parts, to get the best performance and longest possible life from the
equipment.

Note: The expected lifetimes are typical values. Actual lifetime depends on usage and
ambient temperature.

Consumable parts
Part Type Lifetime Remarks
Antenna Unit
Magnetron FNE1201 5,000 hours For X-Band radar Check number of
(12kW) hours used at TX
MG5436 5,000 hours For X-Band radar time. Reset time
(25kW) then adjust the
MG5223F 7,000 hours For S-Band radar PM gain after re-
(30kW) placement (see
section 2.32).
Motor* BV2-K155 - For S-band radar
BV2-K156 - For X-band radar
Monitor Unit
BEZEL& LCD Refer to the Operator’s Manual for the Monitor Unit.
ASSEMBLY
Processor Unit EC-3000
CPU Fan KTA-555-01 8.5 years
Power Fan 109P0612H761 8.5 years
Chassis Fan 109P0612H761 8.5 years
Sensor Adapter MC-3000S
MC-CS Board 24P0114 8.5 years
Sensor Adapter MC-3010A
MC-ANLG Board 24P0115(-00) 7.0 years 24P0115(-11) and after do not require
replacement.

*: Lifetime of the motor varies greatly depending on usage environment. Regularly re-
quest the maintenance by a service technician. Even if there is no trouble or error,
it is recommended to replace the motor every five years.

25-9
25. MAINTENANCE AND TROUBLESHOOTING

25.7 Color Differentiation Test for S57 Charts

The color differentiation checks if the chart radar monitor can distinguish between the
various color-coded areas, lines and symbols.

1. Click the [Chart INFO] and [Chart 1] buttons on the InstantAccess bar™ to show
the [ECDIS Chart 1] menu.

New symbols
Color diagram

2. Click [Color diagram] to show the color test diagram.

If the colors are correct, the diagonal line will be distinguishable from its surroundings,
at any brilliance setting.

25-10
 25. MAINTENANCE AND TROUBLESHOOTING

25.8 Fallback Arrangements

If the top priority sensor (e.g. GPS1) can not be used, this equipment automatically
uses the second priority sensor (e.g. GPS2) when the multiple sensors (e.g. GPS1
and GPS2) are installed. When all sensors can not be used, each function is limited
as follows:

Sensor Operation of this equipment

Heading sensor • The HDG indication reads "***.*°".
• The presentation mode is automatically set for head-up.
• TT, AIS, radar map, chart and echo averaging (EAV) are dis-
abled.
Speed sensor When LOG(WT) is selected:
• The sensor used is automatically switched in the following prior-
ity order:
GPS(BT) > LOG(BT).
• The SPD indication reads "***.* kn" when both GPS(BT) and
LOG(BT) can not be used.
When LOG(BT) is selected:
• The sensor used is automatically switched in the following prior-
ity order:
GPS(BT) > LOG(WT).
• The SPD indication reads "***.* kn" when both GPS(BT) and
LOG(WT) can not be used.
When GPS(BT) is selected:
• The sensor used is automatically switched in the following prior-
ity order:
LOG(BT) > LOG(WT).
• The SPD indication reads "***.* kn" when both LOG(BT) and
LOG(WT) can not be used.
COG/SOG sensor • When the GPS sensor can not be used, the values of COG and
SOG are calculated from HDG and LOG(BT).
• Additionally when the heading sensor can not be used, the val-
ues of SOG is calculated from LOG(BT). The COG indication
reads "***.*°".
Position sensor • The POSN indication reads all asterisks.
• AIS, radar map and chart are disabled.

25-11
25. MAINTENANCE AND TROUBLESHOOTING

This page is intentionally left blank.

25-12
APPX. 1 MENU TREE
Radar menu

MENU key (press)

or
MENU bar (click)

1 ECHO 1 CUSTOMIZE 1 INT REJECT (OFF, 1, 2, 3)

ECHO 2 ECHO STRETCH (OFF, 1, 2, 3)
3 ECHO AVERAGE (OFF, 1, 2, 3)
4 NOISE REJECT (OFF, ON)
5 AUTO SEA (OFF, ON)
6 AUTO RAIN (OFF, ON)
7 VIDEO CONTRAST (1, 2, 3, 4; A, B, C)
8 PULSE 1 0.5 NM (S1, S2)
2 0.75 NM (S1, S2, M1)
3 1.5 NM (S1, S2, M1, M2)
4 3 NM (S2, M1, M2, M3)
5 6 NM (M1, M2, M3, L)
6 12 NM (M1, M2, M3, L)
7 24 NM (M2, M3, L)
9 CONDITION 2 STC ANT HEIGHT (5, 7.5, 10, 15, 20, 25,
30, 35, 40, 45, more 45 m)
3 LOW LEVEL ECHO (0 to 8, 0)
0 DEFAULT (NO, SAVE, USER, FACTORY)
Page 2
1 ACE (OFF, ON)
2 ECHO AREA*1 (CIRCLE, WIDE)
3 ECHO COLOR (YEL, GRN, WHT, AMBER*1, COLOR*1)
4 TRAIL 1 TRAIL MODE (REL, TRUE)
2 TRAIL GRAD (SINGLE, MULTI)
3 TRAIL COLOR*1 (GRN, BLU, CYA, PNK,
MAG, WHT, YEL)
4 TRAIL LEVEL (1, 2, 3, 4)
5 OS TRAIL (OFF, ON)
6 SUPPRESS TRAIL AROUND OS (OFF, ON)
5 2ND ECHO REJ (OFF, ON)
6 PERFORMANCE MON (OFF, ON, GRAPH ONLY)
ARC (0, 2, 3, 5, 6)
7 SART (OFF, ON)
8 WIPER (OFF, 1, 2)
9 DUAL RADAR (OFF, COMBINE)
0 ACE 1 ADJUST (OFF, ON)
2 SIGNAL ENHANCEMENT (1 to 3, 2)
3 SUPPRESS SECTOR
Page 2 START (000 to 359, 0°)
1 BERTHING STC (OFF, ON) ANGLE (000 to 180, 0°)
2 WAVE MODE*2 (OFF, ON)
3 DOPPLER*3 (0, 1, 2)

2 TT•AIS 1 ACQUISITION ZONE 1 AZ STAB (STAB HDG, STAB NORTH)

2 AZ POLYGON (OFF, STAB GND, STAB
HDG, STAB NORTH)
2 TRIAL MANEUVER 1 TRIAL MANEUVER (STATIC, DYNAMIC)
2 SPEED RATE
3 TURN RATE
4 TGT DATA*1 (ACTUAL, TRIAL)
3 TT 1 TT SELECT
When [NUMBER OF TT] is [MAX]:
(MANUAL 200, MANUAL 150 • AUTO 50, MANUAL 100 • AUTO 100,
MANUAL 50•AUTO 150, AUTO 200),
When [NUMBER OF TT] is [100]:
(MANUAL 100, MANUAL 75 • AUTO 25, MANUAL 50 • AUTO 50,
MANUAL 25 • AUTO 75, AUTO 100)
2 ALL CANCEL (NO, YES)
3 LOST FILTER MAX RNG (OFF, ON (0 to 99, 12 NM))
4 TARGET NAME FUNCTION (OFF, ON)*1
5 TARGET NAME PRESETS (PRESET1 to PRESET10)*1
*1: Not available for IMO/A-type radars.
1 2 (Continued on next page) *2: Requires connection to Wave Analysis PC.
*3: Available only for FAR-3220-NXT(-BB) and FAR-3230-NXT.

AP-1
APPX. 1 MENU TREE

(Continued from previous page)

1 2
4 AIS 1 VOYAGE DATA (NAV STATUS, ETA,
DESTINATION, DRAUGHT, PERSONS)
2 STATIC DATA
3 SLEEP ALL TGTS (NO, YES)
4 CPA AUTO ACTIVATE
1 MAX RANGE (OFF, ON (0 to 99, 0 NM))
2 MIN SHIP SPEED (OFF, ON
(0 to 9.9, 1.0 kn))
3 EXCEPT CLASS B (OFF, ON)
5 DISP FILTER
1 SLEEPING CLASS A (OFF, ON)
2 SLEEPING CLASS B (OFF, ON)
3 BASE STATION (OFF, ON)
4 PHYSICAL ATON (OFF, ON)
5 VIRTUAL ATON (OFF, ON)
6 MAX RANGE (OFF, ON (0 to 99, 12 NM))
7 MIN SHIP SPEED (OFF, ON
(0 to 9.9 kn, 1.0 kn))
6 LOST FILTER
1 MAX RANGE (OFF, ON (0 to 99, 12 NM))
2 MIN SHIP SPEED (OFF, ON
(0 to 9.9, 1.0 kn))
3 EXCEPT CLASS B (OFF, ON)
7 RECEIVED MESSAGES
8 TRANSMIT MESSAGE
*1
Not shown on IMO or A type. 1 ADDRESS TYPE (ADDRESSED,
*2
Not shown with IMO or A type. BROADCAST)
*3
[2 EBL•VRM•CURSOR] on IMO or A 2 MESSAGE TYPE (SAFETY, BINARY)
type. [1 EBL•CURSOR BEARING 3 MMSI No.
(REL, TRUE)] additionallly shown on 4 CHANNEL (A, B, A or B, A and B)
those types.) Page 2
*4
[RED] and [YEL] are added with A 1 OPEN FILE
and B types. 2 SAVE FILE
*5
Not shown on IMO type. 3 EDIT
4 TRANSMIT MESSAGE
Page 2
1 AUTO DISP MESSAGE (OFF, ON)
5 TT•AIS SYMBOL 1 SYMBOL COLOR (GRN, BLU, CYA, MAG,
5
WHT, YEL* )
2 ATON SYMBOL COLOR (GRN, BLU, CYA,
MAG, WHT)
3 AIS ROT TAG LIMIT (0.0 to 720.0, 0.0°/min)
4 TT POP-UP INFO (OFF, ON)
5 AIS POP-UP INFO (OFF, ON)
6 TT•AIS PAST POSN POINTS (5, 10)
Page 2
1 AIS SCALED SYMBOL (OFF, ON)
6 ASSOCIATION 1 ASSOCIATION TGT (OFF, AIS, TT)
2 GAP (0.000 to 0.050, 0.050 NM)
3 RANGE (0.000 to 0.100, 0.100 NM)
4 BEARING (00.00 to 9.9, 9.9°)
5 SPEED (0.0 to 6.0, 6.0 kn)
6 COURSE (00.0 to 25.0, 25.0°)
5
3 NAV TOOL 1 PI LINE 1 PI LINE BEARING* (REL, TRUE)
2 SET ALL PI LINE (OFF, ON)
3 NUMBER OF ALL PI LINE (OFF, 1, 2, 3, 6)
4 PI LINE MODE (PARALLEL, PERPEN-
DICULAR)
5 RESET PI LINE
6 RESET ALL PI LINE
7 TRUNCATE
PI 1 (to 6) TRUNCATE (OFF, ON)

2 EBL•VRM*3 1 EBL1*2 (REL, TRUE)

2 EBL2*2 (REL, TRUE)
3 VRM1*2 (NM, SM, km, kyd)
4 VRM2*2 (NM, SM, km, kyd)
5 EBL OFFSET BASE POINT (STAB GND,
STAB HDG, STAB NORTH)
6 VRM TTG (OFF, 1, 2, 1 and 2)
7 VRM OFFSET (OFF, LINK EBL)
3 CURSOR*2 1 CURSOR BEARING (REL, TRUE)
2 CURSOR RANGE (NM, SM, km, kyd)
3 CURSOR SIZE (SMALL, LARGE)
4 OWN SHIP VECTOR 1 VECTOR STAB IND (OFF, ON)
2 TIME INCREMENTS (OFF, ON)
3 OWN SHIP VECTOR (OFF, HDG, COURSE)
4 VECTOR COLOR (GRN, BLU, CYA, MAG, WHT*4)
5 TARGET VECTOR 1 REF TARGET VECTOR (OFF, ON)
6 RANGE RING (OFF, ON)
7 BARGE 1 BARGE MARK (OFF, ON)
2 BARGE SIZE (LENGTH, WIDTH)
1 (Continued on next page) 3 ARRANGEMENT

AP-2
 APPX. 1 MENU TREE

1 (Continued from previous page)

4 INFORMATION 1 DISP INFO BOX (OFF, ON)
BOX 2 SET NAV DATA 1 DEPTH (OFF, m, ft)
3 ZOOM DISPLAY (STAB GND, 2 DEPTH GRAPH SCALE (10, 20, 50, 100,
STAB HDG, STAB NORTH, 200, 500, Auto)
TT TRACK) 3 DEPTH MARK (0 - 500, 0))
4 TARGET DATA (1 BOX, 2 BOX, 4 CURRENT (OFF, ON)
3 BOX#) 5 WIND (OFF, m/s, kn)
6 WIND STAB (APPARENT, NORTH,
#: 23-inch monitor
THEORETICAL)
7 TEMPERATURE (OFF, °C, °F)
Page 2
1 WAVE STAB (NORTH, THEORETICAL)
5 MAP•MARK 1 MARK SETTING 1 MAP MARK POSN (CURSOR, OS, LL)
2 MAP MARK L/L
3 MAP MARK COLOR*1 (RED, GRN, BLU, CYA,
MAG, YEL, WHT)
4 OWN SHIP MARK (MIN, SCALED)
*1: Not shown with IMO or A type. 5 ANTENNA MARK (OFF, ON)
6 STERN MARK (OFF, ON)
7 DROP MARK (OFF, ON)
8 MAP MARK ALL DELETE
9 MAP MARK ALL COPY
Page 2
1 MAP MARK MANAGE
2 DISP CURVED EBL (OFF, ON)
3 PREDICTOR (OFF, ON)
2 RADAR MAP 1 SEL MAP OBJECT (MARK, BUOY, DANGER,
COASTLINE, CONTOUR LINE, NAV LINE,
PROHIBITED AREA)
3 ROUTE 1 DISP ROUTE (OFF, ON)
2 SEL ROUTE OBJECT (XTD LIMIT, SAFETY
MARGIN, LEG MARKS, WHEEL OVER LINE)
4 EVENT 1 DISP EVENT (OFF, ON)
2 SEL EVENT OBJECT (USER EVENT, AUTO
EVENT, POS EVENT)
5 USER CHART 1 DISP USER CHART (OFF, ON)
2 SEL USER CHART OBJECT (LINES,
LABELS, TIDALS, AREAS, CIRCLES,
CLEARING LINES)
6 CHART DISPLAY 1 OWN TRACK 1 DISP OWN TRACK (OFF, ON)
2 OWN TRACK SOURCE (PRIMARY,
SECONDARY, SYSTEM)
3 SAVE INTERNAL (30s, 1min, 2min, 3 min,
6min, 15min, DRAW ONLY)
4 DELETE OWN TRACK (NO, RED*2, GRN*2
BLU*2, YEL*2, CYA*2, MAG*2, WHT*2, 30%,
50%, 80%, ALL)
5 OWN TRACK COLOR*2 (RED, GRN, BLU,
YEL, CYA, MAG, WHT)
2 SEL DISPLAY OBJECT 1 SAVE TO PERSONAL
2 GENERAL
1 SYMBOLS (SIMPLIFIED, PAPER CHART)
2 BOUNDARIES (PLAIN, SYMBOLIZED)
3 SELECT OBJECTS (FOUR SHADES, FULL
LIGHT, SCALE MIN)
Page 2
1 SELECT OBJECTS (SHALLOW PATTERN,
SHALLOW WATER DANGER, UNKNOWN,
ACCURACY, HIGHLIGHT DATE DEPENDENT,
HIGHLIGHT INFO, HIGHLIGHT DOCUMENT,
CONTOUR LABELS, LAT/LON GRID)
3 STANDARD
1 SELECT OBJECTS (DRYING LINE, BUOYS,
BEACONS, AIDS TO NAVIGATION,
BOUNDARIES AND LIMITS, PROHIBITED
AND RESTRICTED AREAS, CHART SCALE
BOUNDARIES, CAUTIONARY NOTES, SHIP’S
ROUTEING SYSTEM AND FERRY ROUTES,
ARCHIPELAGIC SEA LANES,
MISCELLANEOUS)
*2: Not shown with IMO type. 4 OTHER
1 SELECT OBJECTS (SPOT SURROUNDINGS,
SUBMARINE CABLES AND PIPELINES, ALL
ISOLATED DANGERS, MAGNETIC VARIATION,
DEPTH CONTOURS, SEABED, TIDAL, NATURAL,
AND MAN-MADE FEATURES, MISCELLANEOUS)
5 TEXT
1 SELECT OBJECTS (IMPORTANT TEXT (CLEARANCE,
BEARINGS, RADIO CHANNELS), OTHER TEXT,
NAMES, LIGHT DESCRIPTION, ALL OTHER,
1 2 NATURE OF SEABED, MAGNETIC VARIATION
AND SWEPT DEPTH, HEIGHT OF ISLET OR
(Continued on next page) LAND FEATURE, NTOM, OTHERS)

AP-3
APPX. 1 MENU TREE

(Continued from previous page)

1 2
3 SHALLOW CONTOUR (0 to 99, 10 m)
4 SAFETY DEPTH (0 to 99, 20 m)
5 SAFETY CONTOUR (0 to 99, 30 m)
6 DEEP CONTOUR (0 to 99, 60 m)
7 CHART MONOCHROME (OFF, ON)
8 AREA COLOR (COLOR FILL, GRAY SCALE WATER, NO COLOR)
9 RESET CNT AND DEPTH
7 OWN SHIP INFO 1 SENSOR (SYSTEM, LOCAL)
2 SYSTEM SETTING (HDG, SPD, COG/SOG, POSN)
3 LOCAL SETTING (Same choices as 2 SYSTEM SETTING.)

8 INITIAL 1 TUNE INITIALIZE*1

SETTING 2 PALETTE (DAY-GRY, DAY-BLU, DUSK-GRY, DUSK-BLU,
NIGHT-GRY, NIGHT-BLU)
3 BRIGHTNESS 1 CONTROL PANEL
(Default setting for all 2 CHARACTER
brightness items is 15.) 3 CURSOR
4 ECHO
5 TRAIL
6 HL
7 OS SYMBOL
8 RING
9 BEARING CURSOR
Page 2
1 EBL
2 VRM
3 PI LINE
4 TT SYMBOL
5 AIS SYMBOL
6 MARK
7 CHART
4 ALERT 1 WATCH ALERT (OFF, 6MIN, 10MIN,
12MIN, 15MIN, 20MIN)
2 ANCHOR WATCH (OFF, ON, 0.01 to
9.99 NM, 0.01 NM)
5 ANT SELECT 1 DISP1 (ANT 1, 2, 3, 4; M, S)
2 DISP2 (ANT 1, 2, 3, 4; M, S)
3 DISP3 (ANT 1, 2, 3, 4; M, S)
4 DISP4 (ANT 1, 2, 3, 4; M, S)
5 STORE INTER-SW (NO, YES)
6 AUTO COURSE UP RESET (OFF, ON (22.5 to 45.0, 22.5°))
7 TIPS GUIDANCE (OFF, ON)
8 TT SIMULATION MODE
9 MAGNETRON RESET*2 1 TX TIME (000000.0 to 999999.9, 000000.0 H)
2 PM GAIN ADJ (AUTO, MANUAL: 000 to 255, 0)
0 ICING PREVENTION (OFF, ON)
Page 2 *1: Not shown on solid state radar.
3
1 TM CURSOR SCROLL* (OFF, ON) *2: Not shown on IMO type.
2 SHUTTLE FERRY (OFF, MODE1, MODE2) *3: Not shown on A or IMO type.

AP-4
 APPX. 1 MENU TREE

Chart menu

MENU key
(press)
or
MENU bar
(click)
General Ship & Ship & Ship Parameters MAX Speed (0.8 to 80, 22.1 kn)
Route Route MAX Height (0.0 to 100, 16.1 m)
Parameters MAX Draught (0.0 to 100, 20.0 m)
Route Parameters MAX ROT (5 to 200, 60°/min)
WPT Approach (30 to 60, 30 sec)
WPT Prewarning (75 to 198, 90 sec)
Default Line Radius (0.1 to 3.0, 0.8 NM)
Default XTD Limit (10 to 3704, 185 m)
Default Safety Margin (0 to 1000, 40 m)
Instant Delay before Initiating First Turn (30 to 600, 60 sec)
Track Turn Radius (0.03 to 3.00, 1.00 NM)
XTD Limit (Auto, Manual; 10 to 3704 m, 185 m)
Route Check Strictly (Checkbox checked)
Navigation Forwarding Distance
Parameter
TCS (No use)
Cost Cost (Input values for Hour, Heavy Fuel Oil, Diesel Oil)
Parameters Fuel Consumption (Input values for Speed, Heavy Fuel Oil, Diesel Oil)
Route unit of “XTD” (m, NM)
Information
Sensor System/Local Sensor Type (System Sensor, Local Sensor)
Select
System HDG Data Source (Sensors)
Sensor PRIM*1, Second*1
Settings SPD Stabilization Mode (Bottom, Water)
Sensor Type (GPS, LOG) *1: Display only
Data Source (Sensors, Manual)
1
PRIM*
COG/ Data Source (Sensors)
SOG PRIM*1
POSN Data Source (Sensors, Manual)
PRIM*1, Second*1
Local Sensor HDG Data Source (Sensors, Analog Gyro (No use), Manual*2,
Settings Gyro Correction)
PRIM*1, Second*1 *2: Not available
SPD Stabilization Mode ( Bottom, Water) with IMO type.
Sensor Type (GPS, LOG)
Data Source (Sensors, Manual, Reference SPD, Drift)
PRIM*1
COG/ Data Source (Sensors)
SOG PRIM*1
POSN Data Source (Sensors, Manual)
PRIM*1, Second*1

Other Sensor Other Wind Speed (kn, m/s)

Settings Sensor Reference (APPARENT, NORTH, THEORETICAL)
Source of Wind ((T)HEORETICAL and (R)EL,
(T)HEORETICAL, (T)RUE)
Depth Below Trans. (Values for Bow, Mid and Aft)
Temperature (Temperature of water surface)
Water Current (Course and speed of water current)
Filter Status (Monitor status and integrity of sensors.)
1
(Continued on next page)

AP-5
APPX. 1 MENU TREE

(Continued from previous page)

1
DISP Setting Basic Light Popup (OFF, ON)
Setting Attributes Display (List, Text)
TM Reset (20 to 99, 80%)
Chart General Symbols (Simplified, Paper Chart)
Display Boundaries (Plain, Symbolized)
Check boxes (Four Shades, Full Light Lines, Scale MIN, Shallow
Pattern, Shallow Water Dangers, Uknown, Accuracy, Highlight Date
Dependent, Highlight INFO, Highlight Document, Contour Labels,
*1: All checked LAT/LON grid)
*2: All unchecked
Standard (Drying Line, Bouys, Beacons, Aids to Navigation, Buoys, Beacons, Structures,
Buoys, Beacons, Radar, Fog Signals, Others, Lights, Boundaries and Limits,
Prohibited and Restricted Areas, Chart Scale Boundaries, Cautionary Notes, Ship’s
Routeing System and Ferry Routes, Archipleagic Sea Lanes, Services,
Miscellaneous)
Other (Spot Surroundings, Submarine Cables and Pipelines, All Isolated Dangers, Magnetic
Variation, Depth Contours, Seabed, Tidal, Natural and Man-made Features, Port
Features, Miscellaneous)
Text (Important Text (Clearances, Bearings, Routes, Radio Channels, Other Text, Names,
Light Description, All Other, Nature of Seabed, Magnetic Variation and Swept Depth,
Height of Islet or Land Feature, NtoM, Others)
NtoM AIO (Temporary Notice, Preliminary Notice, No Information)
C-MAP (Temporary Notice, Preliminary Notice, No Information)
Symbol General Ship Outlines Ship Outlines (ON, OFF)
Display AIS Outlines (ON, OFF)
True outlines shown if (Set length and beamwidth.) > limit
*3: Display only Own Ship Limit*3 = 3 mm
AIS Limit*3 = 3 mm
Velocity Vectors Ship Vectors (ON, OFF)
Target Vectors (ON, OFF)
Style (std ECDIS, Conventional)
Time Increments (Checkbox unchecked)
Path Predictor (Checkbox unchecked)
Radar Antenna (Checkbox unchecked)
Tracking Own Ship CCRP (Checkbox unchecked)
Past Tracks Primary (Checkbox unchecked)
Secondary (Checkbox unchecked)
Pivot (Checkbox unchecked)
Style (Tick, Point)
Length (1-720 min, 1)
Labels (0-60 min, 0)
Events User Events (Checkbox unchecked)
Auto Events (Checkbox unchecked)
Position Events (Checkbox unchecked)
Show (Newer than 12 hours, Newer
than 24 hours, Newer than 1 week,
Newer than 2 weeks, Newer than 1
month, Newer than 3 months, All)
Route Monitored XTD Limit (Checkbox unchecked)
Route Safety Margin (Checkbox unchecked)
Leg Marks (Checkbox unchecked)
Wheel Over Line (Checkbox unchecked)
Planned XTD Limit (Checkbox unchecked)
Route Safety Margin (Checkbox unchecked)
Leg Marks (Checkbox unchecked)
Mariner User Chart Labels (Checkbox checked)
Lines (Checkbox checked)
Clearing Lines (Checkbox checked)
*4: Available on [NAVTEX Tidals (Checkbox checked)
Receiver] at installation only. Areas (Checkbox checked)
Circles (Checkbox checked)
Density (25%, 50%, 75%, No color fill)
Display user chart symbols name (Checkbox unchecked)
NAVTEX*4 (Checkbox checked)
Targets Color (Green, Blue, Black, Magenta, Brown)
AtoN Symbol Color (Green, Blue, Black, Magenta, Brown)
TT Size (Standard, Small)
AIS ROT TAG Limit (0.0°/min to 720.0°/min, 0.0)
TT Label (ON, OFF)
AIS Label (ON, OFF)
TT Pop-up INFO (ON, OFF)
1 2 AIS Pop-up INFO (ON, OFF)
Past Position TT/AIS Points (5, 10)
(Continued on next page)
Style (Points, Points and dots)

AP-6
 APPX. 1 MENU TREE

(Continued from previous page)

1 2
Chart Set WARNING or CAUTION for (Safety Contour*4, Navigational Hazard,
Alert Areas To Be Avoided, User Chart Danger, Traffic Separation Zone,
Inshore Traffic Zone, Restricted Area, Caution Area, Offshore Production
Area, Military Practice Area, Seaplane Landing Area, Submarine Transit
Lane, Anchorage Area, Marine Farm / Aqua Culture, PSSA Area, No
Vector Chart, Too Many Dangers, UKC Limit, Sounding UKC Limit,
Non-official ENC, Not Up-to-date, Permit Expired)
Shallow Contour (0-99*5, 10 m)
Safety Depth (0-99, 20 m)
Safety Contour (0-99, 30 m)
Deep Contour (0-99, 60 m)
Log NAV Voyage Limits Speed (0 to 10, 5 kn)
Log Course (0.0 to 30.0, 10.0°)
Log Interval (1 to 4, 4 hours)
Distance Counter*1 Odometer
Trip Meter
Target Danger Target (Log Interval 1 to 100, 10 min)
Log

TT/AIS Setting Setting.1 AIS DISP Sleeping Class A*2 (ON, OFF)
Filter Sleeping Class B*2 (ON, OFF)
Sleep All MAX Range (ON, OFF; 0 to 99 NM, 12 NM)
Targets MIN Ship Speed (ON, OFF; 0.0 to 9.9 kn, 1.0 kn)
AIS-CPA MAX Range (ON, OFF; 0 to 99 NM, 0 NM)
Auto MIN Ship Speed (ON, OFF; 0.0 to 9.9 kn, 1.0 kn)
Activate Except Class B (ON, OFF)
Setting.2 AIS Lost MAX Range (ON, OFF; 0 to 99 NM, 12 NM)
Target MIN Ship Speed (ON, OFF; 0.0 to 9.9 kn, 1.0 kn)
Filter Except Class B (ON, OFF)
TT Lost MAX Range (ON, OFF; 0 to 99 NM, 12 NM)
Target
Filter
Association Gap (0.000 to 0.050 NM, 0.050 NM)
Target Range (0.000 to 0.100 NM, 0.100 NM)
Bearing (0.0 to 9.9°, 9.9°)
Speed (0.0 to 6.0 kn, 6.0 kn)
Course (0.0 to 25.0°, 25.0°)
NAV Own Ship (Shows own ship’s MMSI No., Name, Call Sign, Type, Description,
Status Length, Width, Ref Bow, and Ref Port.)
Voyage Navigational Status (Underway using engine, At anchor, Not under
data command, Restricted maneuverability, Constrained by her
draught, Moored, Aground, Engaged in fishing, Under way sailing,
*1
Reserved for high speed craft, Reserved for wing in ground,
Display only power-driven vessel towing astern (regional use), power-driven
*2
Not shown on IMO or A type. vessel pusing ahead or towing alongside (regional use), Reserved
*3
May be hidden depending o AIS for future use, AIS-SART (active), Not defined)
transponder settings. Persons (0 to 8191, 0)
*4
Fixed at Alarm. MAX Draught (0.0 to 25.5, 0.0 m)
*5
Maximum value defined by value for ETA
Destination
Safety Contour Cargo Category*3 (All ships of this type, Carrying DG, HS, or
MP, IMO hazard or pollutant category X, Carrying DG, HS, or MP,
IMO hazard or pollutant category Y, Carrying DG, HS, or MP, IMO
hazard or pollutant category Z, Carrying DG, HS, or MP, IMO
hazard or pollutant category OS, Reserved for future use (×4), No
Additional Information)
NAV Tools Geometry Guide Box (Rhumbline, Great Circle)
EBL/VRM (Rhumbline, Great Circle)
PI Lines (Great Circle)
Rings (Rhumbline, Great Circle)
Divider (Rhumbline, Great Circle)
PI Lines Truncate Setting (Set forward and backward lengths of each PI line.)
Shared Monitoring (Set master and backup units.)
Route Transfer Func. OFF, Func. ON
Storing received route plans (Reject, Overwrite, Ignore)

AP-7
APPX. 1 MENU TREE

Settings menu

Settings File Export Select data to export (Setting data, Route/User chart, Playback data, Radar map, Radar Installation)
DB export
(Click)
Log export (export event log, application log)

File Import Select file to import

Select data to import (Setting data, Route/User chart, Playback data, Radar map, Radar Installation)

File Maintenance (Restore the last-saved route/user chart application and route/user chart system.)

Alert Settings (No use.)

Self Test (Check various components of the system.)

Data NAV Tools (EBL, VRM, PI Line)

Sharing Display Settings (Color Palette, Briiliance) (for applications)
Display Settings (Color Palette, Brilliance) (for units)
Customize Wheel rotation (Normal, Reverse)
Key beep volume (0 to 3, 1)
Alert sound volume (1 to 3, 3)

Display Test (Display test patterns.)

Keyboard Test (Test the Radar Control Unit, ECDIS Control Unit and Trackball
Control Unit.)
Screenshot (Manage screenshots.)

User Default (Restore all user default settings.)

CCRP Select CCRP

Anchor X (-15.0 to 15.0, 0.0 m)
Y (0.0 to 300.0, 0.0 m)
Display Filter (CCRP, Center of Gravity, Pivot Point, Radar Antenna, GPS
Sensor, AIS Transponder, Echo Sounder, SDME Sensor, Anchor)

AP-8
APPX. 2 ABBREVIATIONS AND SYM-
BOLS
Abbreviations
Abbreviation Meaning
A/C Anti Clutter
ACE Automatic Clutter Elimination
ACK Acknowledge
ACQ Acquire
ACT Activate
ADJ Adjustment
AIO Admiralty Information Overlay
AIS Automatic Identification System
ALL All
ALARM Alarm
ANT Antenna
Apr April
ATON Aid To Navigation
Aug August
AUTO Automatic
BB Blackbox
BCR Bow Cross Range
BCT Bow Cross Time
BLU Blue
BNWAS Bridge Navigational Watch Alarm System
BRG Bearing
BRILL Brilliance
BT Bottom Tracking
CANCEL Cancel
Caps Capital (letters)
CAT Category
CCRP Common Consistent Reference Position
CH Channel
COG Course over the ground
COM Communication
CORRE Correlation
CPA Closest Point of Approach
CPU Central Processing Unit
CSE Course
CU/TM Course-up/True Motion
CYA CYAN
DATA Data
Dec December
DEMO Demonstration
DGPS Differential Global Positioning System
DISP Display

AP-9
APPX. 2 ABBREVIATIONS AND SYMBOLS

Abbreviation Meaning
DIST Distance
DR Dead Reckoning
E English
E East
EAV Echo Average
EBL Electronic Bearing Line
ENTER Enter
EPFS Electronic Position Fixing System
ES Echo Stretch
ESC Escape
ETA Estimated Time of Arrival
EXT External
Feb February
FILT Filter
GAIN Gain
GPS Global Positioning System
GRN Green
GRY Gray
GYRO Gyrocompass
HDG Heading
HIDE Hide
HL Heading Line
hr hour
IMO International Maritime Organization
IND Indication
INS Integrated Navigation System
IR Interference Rejection
J Japanese
Jan January
Jul July
Jun June
kyd kiloyard
L Long (pulse length), Local
L/L Latitude/Longitude
LAN Local Area Network
LIST List
LL Latitude, Longitude
LO Low
MAG Magenta, Magnetic, or Magnify
MAN Manual
Mar March
MARK Mark
MAX Maximum
MENU Menu
MID Middle
min minute
MIN Minimum
MMSI Maritime Mobile Service Identity
MOB Man Overboard

AP-10
 APPX. 2 ABBREVIATIONS AND SYMBOLS

Abbreviation Meaning
MODE Mode
MON Monitor
MSG Message
NAV Navigation
Navtex Navigational Telex
NM Nautical miles
NO. Number
N North
Nov November
NtoM Notices to Mariners
Oct October
OFF Off
OFFSET Offset
OS Own Ship
OWN Own
PALETTE Palette
PANEL Panel Illumination
PC Personal Computer
PERPENDIC Perpendicular
PI Parallel Index (lines)
POSN Position
PRIM Primary
PSSA Particularly Sensitive Sea Area
PULSE Pulse
R Relative
RAD Radius
RAIN Rain
RANGE Range
REF Reference
Rel Relative
RM Relative Motion
RNG Range
ROT Rate of Turn
S South, System
s second
S1 (2) Short1(2) (pulse length)
SAR Search And Rescue
SART Search And Rescue Transponder
SDME Speed and Distance Measuring Equipment
SEA Sea
SEL Select
Sep September
SM Statute Miles
SOG Speed Over the Ground
SPD Speed
SPEC Specification
SSD Solid State Drive, Solid State Device
S.SRC Sensor Source
STAB Stabilization

AP-11
APPX. 2 ABBREVIATIONS AND SYMBOLS

Abbreviation Meaning
STBY Stand-by
STD Standard
SW Switch
T True
TARGET Target
TB True Bearing
TCPA Time to Closest Point of Approach
TEMP Temperature
TGT Target
TGT, TGTS Target, Targets
TIME Time
TM True Motion
TM/CU True Motion/Course-up
TRAIL Trail
True-G True-ground
True-S True-sea
TT Tracked Target or Target Tracking
TTD Tracked Target Data
TTG Time to go
TTM Tracked Target Information
TUNE Tune
TX Transmit
UKC Under Keel Clearance
UNDO Undo
UTC Universal Time, Coordinated
VECT Vector
VECTOR Vector
VIEW View
VRM Variable Range Marker
W West
W/O Without
WHT White
WOL Wheel Over Line
WOP Wheel Over Point
WPT Waypoint
WT Water Tracking
XTD Cross Track Distance
YEL Yellow

AP-12
 APPX. 2 ABBREVIATIONS AND SYMBOLS

Symbols
Symbols on Control Unit

Symbol Name
Power switch

Gain

Symbols on display

Symbol name and description Symbol graphic(s)

Own ship - true scaled outline
This can be displayed when based on user selection
either beam width or length is more than 3 mm.

Own ship - simplified symbol

Own ship - minimized symbol

Radar antenna position

This symbol indicates location of the radar antenna.
Select if position of radar antenna is displayed with
symbol + in [MARK SETTING] menu.

Own ship heading line

This line originates from CCRP or Radar antenna
position.
CCRP: Consistent Common Reference Point
Beam line
This line passes through the CCRP or radar antenna
position.

Stern line

Velocity vector - time increments

AP-13
APPX. 2 ABBREVIATIONS AND SYMBOLS

Symbol name and description Symbol graphic(s)

Velocity vector - stabilization indicator
Ground stabilization is indicated by double arrow-
head and water stabilization is indicated as single
arrowhead.

Past track
System past track is indicated by thick line. Raw
sensor primary past track is indicated by thin line.
Raw sensor secondary past track is indicated by
gray thin line.

Radar targets in acquisition state

5 mm in diameter
Radar targets in acquisition state - automatically
detected
Automatically detected target symbol is red and it
flashes until acknowledged. 5 mm in diameter
Tracked radar targets

18
3 mm in diameter
Tracked radar targets - dangerous targets
Dangerous target symbol is red and it flashes until
acknowledged.
18
Reference targets
TT: Std or small user selection by Symbol Display.
R4 18

Sleeping AIS targets

Orientation is towards heading (or COG if heading
unknown).
Activated AIS targets
Orientation is towards heading (or COG if heading
unknown).

AP-14
 APPX. 2 ABBREVIATIONS AND SYMBOLS

Symbol name and description Symbol graphic(s)

Activated AIS targets - true scaled outlines
• This can be displayed when based on user selec-
tion either beam width or length is more than 3
mm.
• AIS outline: ON/OFF

Activated AIS targets - dangerous targets

Dangerous target symbol is red and it flashes until
acknowledged.

No heading/COG data targets

AIS target with no heading/COG data. Symbol faces
the top of the screen. Furthermore, if CPA/TCPA
cannot be calculated, symbol appears as a dashed
line.
Activated AIS targets - alternative Associated targets represented by AIS target
symbols

Sarah J Sarah J
Associated targets represented by radar tar-
get symbols

18
Activated AIS targets - heading lines

Activated AIS targets - heading lines - turn indica-

tors

AP-15
APPX. 2 ABBREVIATIONS AND SYMBOLS

Symbol name and description Symbol graphic(s)

Velocity vectors Radar target velocity vectors

AIS target velocity vectors

Sarah J Sarah J
Associated target velocity vectors

Sarah J Sarah J 18
Target past positions Radar target past positions

AIS target past positions

S arah J S arah J

Associated target past positions

S arah J S arah J 18

AIS aid to navigation (ATON)

Physical (real) ATON is solid line and virtual ATON
is dashed line.
An ATON in off position is yellow.

AIS search and rescue transmitter -SART

AP-16
 APPX. 2 ABBREVIATIONS AND SYMBOLS

Symbol name and description Symbol graphic(s)

AIS base station
BS

AIS SAR vessel

AIS aircraft

Selected targets Selected radar targets

Selected AIS targets

5 S arah J S arah J
5

Selected association targets

5 S arah J 5 S arah J 18
5

Selected AIS ATON

5
Selected AIS SART

AP-17
APPX. 2 ABBREVIATIONS AND SYMBOLS

Symbol name and description Symbol graphic(s)

Lost targets Lost radar targets
Lost target symbol is red and it flashes until acknowl-
edged.

Lost AIS targets

S arah J S arah J
Lost associated targets

S arah J S arah J 18
LOST AIS ATON

Lost AIS SART

Radar and AIS target acquisition area

Waypoint

Next waypoint

Routes

Event marker

AP-18
 APPX. 2 ABBREVIATIONS AND SYMBOLS

Symbol name and description Symbol graphic(s)

User cursor

Electronic bearing line (EBL)

Second example show with range marker.

Variable range marker (VRM)

Range rings

Parallel index lines

Trial maneuver
Displayed (flashing) during trial maneuver.

Simulation mode
T
Displayed (flashing) during TT performance test.

Drop mark
S

AP-19
APPX. 2 ABBREVIATIONS AND SYMBOLS

Radar map symbols

IMO and A types B-type

Category Symbol Color* Name Category Symbol Color Name

Red Buoy 7 colors Buoy

Green Buoy 7 colors Buoy

Red Buoy 7 colors Buoy

Green Buoy 7 colors Buoy

Red Buoy 7 colors Danger

Green Buoy 7 colors Danger

Mark Red Buoy Mark 7 colors Mark

Green Buoy 7 colors Mark

Magenta Danger 7 colors Mark

Magenta Danger 7 colors Mark

Yellow- 7 colors Mark

Mark
Orange
Yellow- 7 colors Mark
Mark
Orange
Yellow- 7 colors Mark
Mark
Orange
Magenta Nav Line 7 colors Mark

White Coast Line 7 colors Mark

Gray Contour Line 7 colors Nav Line

Line Magenta Prohibited Area 7 colors Coast Line

Magenta Cable (Danger) 7 colors Contour Line

Yellow-
Line Mark Line 7 colors Prohibited Area
Orange
Yellow- Line Mark 7 colors Cable (Danger)
Orange
7 colors Line Buoy
*Fixed
7 colors Line Mark

7 colors Line Mark

7 colors Line Mark

AP-20
 APPX. 2 ABBREVIATIONS AND SYMBOLS

Symbols on operating buttons

Symbol Meaning
Minimize button (on InstantAccess bar™)

Access AIS, Navtex functions (chart mode)

Display received AIS message (radar mode)

Access user profile, common settings

Information (show program no., operator's manual)

Undo, redo
Note: This symbol is not displayed on the FURUNO 19-inch monitor unit on
radar mode or chart radar mode.

Screenshot capture

• Adjust the monitor brilliance

• Adjust the control unit backlighting. (Chart mode only)
S
The sharing method is shown as “S” (System) or “L” (Local).
OR

Color palette selection

The sharing method is shown as “S” (System) or “L” (Local).
S

OR

AP-21
APPX. 3 DATA COLOR AND MEANING

Indication Sensor
HDG L/L SPD COG/SOG Display example
color color
SYSTEM/ GRN WHT THS-A GNS-A, D, F, P, R VBW-A VTG-A,D,P All values in
LOCAL HDT GGA-1, 2, 3, 4, 5 VHW RMC-A, D, green.
GLL-A, D and (status: A) F, P, R and
RMC-A, D, F, P, R and (status: A) (status: A)
*1 *1

YEL WHT DGPS update interval in GGA, RMC-A,D, Position in

GNS sentence is higher than 10 F, P, R and
seconds. yellow
GNS-A, D, F, P, R (status: A) characters.
RMC-A, D, F, P, R and (status: A)
*2 *2
YEL-ORG WHT GNS-E,M,S VBW (SOG: VTG-E,M,S SPD, COG,
GGA-6,7,8 12.5kn
without either RMC-E,M,S 0.3kn
GPS1 SOG and
GLL-E,M,S and (status: A) of Field 4 or 5) and (status: A) 286.0°T GPS1 POSN values
13.1kn
RMC-E,M,S and (status: A) 30°00.0000'N and pos. source
GPS1 020°00.0000'E
name in
yellow-orange.
GRN WHT THS-E, M, S: GNS-N: Invalid VBW-V: VTG-N: Invalid HDG value
(***.*) Invalid GGA-0: Invalid Invalid RMC-N or shown with
HDT: Invalid GLL-N or (status: V): Invalid VHW: Invalid (status: V): asterisks.
No sentences RMC-N or (status: V): Invalid No sentences Invalid
No sentences No sentences

GRN YEL Internally calculated due to Position in

(DR) loss of communication with 12.5kn GPS1
0.3kn green
sensor. 286.0°T
13.1kn
GPS1 characters,
(Dead Reckoning) 30°00.0000'N DR in yellow
DR 020°00.0000'E
characters.

MANUAL YEL WHT Manual Manual setting value Manual HDG, SPD
(MAN) setting (Dead Reckoning) setting and POSN
(DR) value value values and
(Type
A or B) "MAN"*3 in
Correction yellow
setting characters.
value
(Local
setting)

*1: Navigational status in RMC, GNS sentence shown in “S”, “V” only (IEC 61162-1 ed4 or later).
*2: Navigational status in RMC, GNS sentence shown in “C”, “U”, “null” only (IEC 61162-1 ed4 or later).
*3: “CORR1” replaces “MAN” in case of heading offset.

AP-22
APPX. 4 ALERT LIST
The table below lists the possible alerts for this radar. Each alert is listed with priority, category
and escalation. This radar can output alerts in ALF or ALR format. The alert number for each de-
pends on the output format and may differ.

Note: The ALR format is not BAM-compliant and shall not be used for new installations. It may be
used for retrofitting on ships-in-operation only.
The default escalation time is 60 seconds, with the exception of the following:
- Alert 495 (ALF format: 10802) Anchor Watch: (120 seconds)
Alerts which are not acknowledge within the set time limit are escalated to either Alarm level (**),
or are repeated as a warning (*). If you require a different time limit or different level, consult your
FURUNO dealer.

You can downgrade the priority for some alerts to [Warning] from the [Chart Alerts] page (see
section 11.1.2section 11.1.2).

Note: When this unit is assigned as a backup ECDIS, the following ALF alerts are output with the
EI talker.(170 to 174,10173,10644,10700,10800 to 10803,10850,10860)
Priority/
ALF ALR Alert Name, Meaning and Remedy
Category
170,- 170 Name: Positioning System Failure* Warning/B
Meaning: All position data has been lost for more than 30 seconds.
Remedy: Check the connection with all GPS.
171,- 171 Name: Crossing Safety Contour Alarm/A
Meaning: When a check area is set, the vessel entered a shallower
area than the threshold set in [Safety Contour].
Remedy: Reconfirm Safety Contour setting or change the course.
172,- 172 Name: Off Track Alarm Alarm/A
Meaning: Deviation is big between planning course and current
heading. While monitoring route, ship position deviates XTD Limit.
Remedy: Reconfirm XTD Limit or keep own ship inside of channel
limit.

173,1 620 Name: User Chart Danger Area* Warning/A

Meaning: A User Chart Danger Area that is set to Warning/Caution
in chart alert is detected inside the check area.
Remedy: Be careful of the object mentioned, on ship's direction.
173,2 621 Name: Traffic Separation Zone* Warning/A
Meaning: A Traffic Separation Zone that is set to Warning/Caution in
chart alert is detected inside the check area.
Remedy: Be careful of the object mentioned, on ship's direction.
173,3 622 Name: Inshore Traffic Zone* Warning/A
Meaning: An Inshore Traffic Zone that is set to Warning/Caution in
chart alert is detected inside the check area.
Remedy: Be careful of the object mentioned, on ship's direction.
173,4 623 Name: Restricted Area* Warning/A
Meaning: A Restricted Area that is set to Warning/Caution in chart
alert is detected inside the check area.
Remedy: Be careful of the object mentioned, on ship's direction.

AP-23
APPX. 4 ALERT LIST

Priority/
ALF ALR Alert Name, Meaning and Remedy
Category
173,5 624 Name: Caution Area* Warning/A
Meaning: A Caution Area that is set to Warning/Caution in chart alert
is detected inside the check area.
Remedy: Be careful of the object mentioned, on ship's direction.
173,6 625 Name: Offshore Production Area* Warning/A
Meaning: An Offshore Production Area that is set to Warning/Caution
in chart alert is detected inside the check area.
Remedy: Be careful of the object mentioned, on ship's direction.
173,7 626 Name: Military Practice Area* Warning/A
Meaning: A Military Protection Area that is set to Warning/Caution in
chart alert is detected inside the check area.
Remedy: Be careful of the object mentioned, on ship's direction.
173,8 627 Name: Seaplane Landing Area* Warning/A
Meaning: A Seaplane Landing Area that is set to Warning/Caution in
chart alert is detected inside the check area.
Remedy: Be careful of the object mentioned, on ship's direction.
173,9 628 Name: Submarine Transit Lane* Warning/A
Meaning: A Submarine Transit Lane that is set to Warning/Caution in
chart alert is detected inside the check area.
Remedy: Be careful of the object mentioned, on ship's direction.
173,10 629 Name: Anchorage Area* Warning/A
Meaning: An Anchorage Area that is set to Warning/Caution in chart
alert is detected inside the check area.
Remedy: Be careful of the object mentioned, on ship's direction.
173,11 630 Name: Marine Farm/Aquaculture* Warning/A
Meaning: A Marine Farm/Aquaculture that is set to Warning/Caution
in chart alert is detected inside the check area.
Remedy: Be careful of the object mentioned, on ship's direction.
173,12 631 Name: PSSA Area* Warning/A
Meaning: A PSSA Area that is set to Warning/Caution in chart alert
is detected inside the check area.
Remedy: Be careful of the object mentioned, on ship's direction.
173,13 632 Name: Areas to be Avoided* Warning/A
Meaning: An Areas to be Avoided that is set to Alarm in chart alert is
detected inside the check area.
Remedy: Be careful of the object mentioned, on ship's direction.

174,- 174 Name: WPT Approach* Warning/A

Meaning: If this radar is connected in the network to an FMD- 3200/
3300 ECDIS that is interfaced with an IEC 62065 Ed.2 compliant TCS
(YDK Technology PT-900, Tokyo Keiki PR-9000, EMRI FAP-3000),
this alert is generated at each waypoint if the TCS is not connected to
the ECDIS in route monitoring. Check ECDIS and network connec-
tions.
Remedy: Check ECDIS and network connections.

175,1 455 Name: EPFS1 Invalid/missing datum* Warning/B

Meaning: Ship position data from No.1 GPS has been discontinued
for more than set time.(Set at installation) Default: 60 seconds No.1
GPS is turned off, or there is a problem with network.
Remedy: Check the connection with No.1 GPS and network.

AP-24
 APPX. 4 ALERT LIST

Priority/
ALF ALR Alert Name, Meaning and Remedy
Category
175,2 456 Name: EPFS2 Invalid/missing datum* Warning/B
Meaning: Ship position data from No.2 GPS has been discontinued
for more than set time.(Set at installation) Default: 60 seconds No.2
GPS is turned off, or there is a problem with network.
Remedy: Check the connection with No.2 GPS and network.
175,3 457 Name: EPFS3 Invalid/missing datum* Warning/B
Meaning: Ship position data from No.3 GPS has been discontinued
for more than set time. (Set at installation) Default: 60 seconds No.3
GPS is turned off, or there is a problem with network.
Remedy: Check the connection with No.3 GPS and network.
175,4 458 Name: EPFS4 Invalid/missing datum* Warning/B
Meaning: Ship position data from No.4 GPS has been discontinued
for more than set time. (Set at installation) Default: 60 seconds No.4
GPS is turned off, or there is a problem with network.
Remedy: Check the connection with No.4 GPS and network.
175,5 459 Name: EPFS5 Invalid/missing datum* Warning/B
Meaning: Ship position data from No.5 GPS has been discontinued
for more than set time. (Set at installation) Default: 60 seconds No.5
GPS is turned off, or there is a problem with network.
Remedy: Check the connection with No.5 GPS and network.
175,6 460 Name: EPFS6 Invalid/missing datum* Warning/B
Meaning: Ship position data from No.6 GPS has been discontinued
for more than set time. (Set at installation) Default: 60 seconds No.6
GPS is turned off, or there is a problem with network.
Remedy: Check the connection with No.6 GPS and network.
175,7 461 Name: EPFS7 Invalid/missing datum* Warning/B
Meaning: Ship position data from No.7 GPS has been discontinued
for more than set time. (Set at installation) Default: 60 seconds No.7
GPS is turned off, or there is a problem with network.
Remedy: Check the connection with No.7 GPS and network.
175,8 462 Name: EPFS8 Invalid/missing datum* Warning/B
Meaning: Ship position data from No.8 GPS has been discontinued
for more than set time. (Set at installation) Default: 60 seconds No.8
GPS is turned off, or there is a problem with network.
Remedy: Check the connection with No.8 GPS and network.
175,9 463 Name: EPFS9 Invalid/missing datum* Warning/B
Meaning: Ship position data from No.9 GPS has been discontinued
for more than set time. (Set at installation) Default: 60 seconds No.9
GPS is turned off, or there is a problem with network.
Remedy: Check the connection with No.9 GPS and network.
175,10 464 Name: EPFS10 Invalid/missing datum* Warning/B
Meaning: Ship position data from No.10 GPS has been discontinued
for more than set time. (Set at installation) Default: 60 seconds No.10
GPS is turned off, or there is a problem with network.
Remedy: Check the connection with No.10 GPS and network.

190,1 531 Name: AIS Target Display 100%* Warning/A

Meaning: 100% of maximum number of target which can be dis-
played is used.
Remedy: The number of AIS target became 100% of that can be dis-
played. Change the display number using filter function.

AP-25
APPX. 4 ALERT LIST

Priority/
ALF ALR Alert Name, Meaning and Remedy
Category
190,2 533 Name: AIS Target Capacity 100%* Warning/A
Meaning: 100% of memory capacity for AIS targets is filled.
Remedy: Memory for AIS targets is filled 100%. Cancel unnecessary
targets.
190,3 535 Name: AIS Target Activate 100%* Warning/A
Meaning: 100% of capacity for active AIS is used.
Remedy: The number of active AIS target became 100% of its limit.
Change the unnecessary targets to sleep mode.
190,4 523 Name: TT Auto ACQ 100%* Warning/A
Meaning: 100% of capacity for automatically acquired TT is used.
Remedy: The number of acquired TT target became 100% of its limit.
Stop tracking unnecessary TT targets.
190,5 525 Name: TT MAN ACQ 100%* Warning/A
Meaning: 100% of capacity for manually acquired TT is used.
Remedy: The number of acquired TT target became 100% of its limit.
Stop tracking unnecessary TT targets.

191,1 526 Name: TT CPA/TCPA* Alarm/A

Meaning: The system has detected a dangerous TT target.
Remedy: Check the target details, avoid collision.
191,2 536 Name: AIS CPA/TCPA* Alarm/A
Meaning: The system has detected a dangerous AIS target.
Remedy: Check the target details, avoid collision.

192,1 521 Name: TT New Target* Warning/A

Meaning: The system detected a new TT target.
Remedy: Check the target details and take appropriate action.
192,2 529 Name: AIS New Target* Warning/A
Meaning: The system detected a new AIS target.
Remedy: Check the target details and take appropriate action.

193,1 527 Name: TT Lost* Warning/A

Meaning: The system lost a TT target.
Remedy: Confirm that the target is lost, then acknowledge the alert.
If the target was used as a speed reference, acquire a new reference
target.
193,2 528 Name: REF Target Lost* Warning/A
Meaning: The system lost a reference target.
Remedy: Confirm that the target is lost, then acknowledge the alert.
If the target was used as a speed reference, acquire a new reference
target.
193,3 537 Name: AIS Lost* Warning/A
Meaning: The system lost an AIS target.
Remedy: Confirm that the target is lost, then acknowledge the alert.
If the target was used as a speed reference, acquire a new reference
target.

194,1 720 Name: No ANT Heading Signal* Warning/B

Meaning: There is a problem with the heading signal from the radar
antenna.
Remedy: Check connections between the radar antenna and the pro-
cessor unit. If the problem appears to be caused by the radar anten-
na, contact your local dealer for service.

AP-26
 APPX. 4 ALERT LIST

Priority/
ALF ALR Alert Name, Meaning and Remedy
Category
194,2 721 Name: No ANT Azimuth Signal* Warning/B
Meaning: There is a problem with the azimuth signal from the radar
antenna.
Remedy: Check connections between the radar antenna and the pro-
cessor unit. If the problem appears to be caused by the radar anten-
na, contact your local dealer for service.
194,3 722 Name: No ANT Trigger Signal* Warning/B
Meaning: There is a problem with the trigger signal from the radar an-
tenna.
Remedy: Check connections between the radar antenna and the pro-
cessor unit. If the problem appears to be caused by the radar anten-
na, contact your local dealer for service.
194,4 723 Name: No ANT Video Signal* Warning/B
Meaning: There is a problem with the video signal from the radar an-
tenna.
Remedy: Check connections between the radar antenna and the pro-
cessor unit. If the problem appears to be caused by the radar anten-
na, contact your local dealer for service.
194,5 724 Name: No RPU Gyro Signal* Warning/B
Meaning: There is a problem with the gyro signal from the radar an-
tenna.
Remedy: Check connections between the radar antenna and the pro-
cessor unit. If the problem appears to be caused by the radar anten-
na, contact your local dealer for service.
194,6 725 Name: No ANT Echo Signal* Warning/B
Meaning: There is a problem with the echo signal from the radar an-
tenna.
Remedy: Check connections between the radar antenna and the pro-
cessor unit. If the problem appears to be caused by the radar anten-
na, contact your local dealer for service.
194,8 727 Name: Radar Sensor COM Error* Warning/B
Meaning: There is a problem communicating with the SPU board in
the radar antenna.
Remedy: Check connections between the radar antenna and the pro-
cessor unit. If the problem appears to be caused by the radar anten-
na, contact your local dealer for service.
194,9 770 Name: SPU Error* Warning/B
Meaning: There is a problem with the SPU board in the radar anten-
na.
Remedy: For detailed information, conduct a [Self Test].
194,10 771 Name: MTR-DRV Error* Warning/B
Meaning: There is a problem communicating with the MTR-DRV
board in the radar antenna.
Remedy: For detailed information, conduct a [Self Test].
194,11 772 Name: PM Error* Warning/B
Meaning: There is a problem communicating with the PM board in
the radar antenna.
Remedy: For detailed information, conduct a [Self Test].
194,12 773 Name: RF-Converter Error* Warning/B
Meaning: There is a problem with the RF-Converter board in the ra-
dar antenna.
Remedy: For detailed information, conduct a [Self Test].

AP-27
APPX. 4 ALERT LIST

Priority/
ALF ALR Alert Name, Meaning and Remedy
Category
194,13 774 Name: PSU-Control Error* Warning/B
Meaning: There is a problem with the PSU-Control board in the pow-
er supply unit.
Remedy: For detailed information, conduct a [Self Test].
194,14 781 Name: MTR-DRV COM Error* Warning/B
Meaning: There is a problem communicating with the SPU board in
the radar antenna.
Remedy: Check connections between the radar antenna and the pro-
cessor unit. If the problem appears to be caused by the radar anten-
na, contact your local dealer for service.
194,15 782 Name: PM COM Error* Caution/B
Meaning: There is a problem communicating with the MTR-DRV
board in the radar antenna.
Remedy: Check connections between the radar antenna and the pro-
cessor unit. If the problem appears to be caused by the radar anten-
na, contact your local dealer for service.
194,16 783 Name: RF-Converter COM Error* Warning/B
Meaning: There is a problem communicating with the RF-Converter
board in the radar antenna.
Remedy: Check connections between the radar antenna and the pro-
cessor unit. If the problem appears to be caused by the radar anten-
na, contact your local dealer for service.
194,17 775 Name: HPA Error* Warning/B
Meaning: There is a problem with the HPA board in the radar anten-
na.
Remedy: For detailed information, conduct a [Self Test].
194,18 784 Name: PSU-Control COM Error* Warning/B
Meaning: There is a problem communicating with PSU-Control board
in the power supply unit.
Remedy: For detailed information, conduct a [Self Test].

10001,1 001 Name: Main Monitor Fan1 Rotation Speed Lowering Caution/B
Meaning: For MU-190/231: Connected to COM1 (Main Monitor).
Fan1 rotation speed is below threshold.
Remedy: If the error frequently occurs, contact FURUNO and inform
frequency of occurrence.
10001,2 002 Name: Main Monitor Fan2 Rotation Speed Lowering Caution/B
Meaning: For MU-231: Connected to COM1 (Main Monitor). Fan2 ro-
tation speed is below threshold.
Remedy: If the error frequently occurs, contact FURUNO and inform
frequency of occurrence.
10001,3 003 Name: Main Monitor Fan3 Rotation Speed Lowering Caution/B
Meaning: For MU-231: Connected to COM1 (Main Monitor). Fan3 ro-
tation speed is below threshold.
Remedy: If the error frequently occurs, contact FURUNO and inform
frequency of occurrence.
10001,4 004 Name: Main Monitor Fan4 Rotation Speed Lowering Caution/B
Meaning: For MU-190: Connected to COM1 (Main Monitor). Fan4 ro-
tation speed is below threshold.
Remedy: If the error frequently occurs, contact FURUNO and inform
frequency of occurrence.

AP-28
 APPX. 4 ALERT LIST

Priority/
ALF ALR Alert Name, Meaning and Remedy
Category
10001,5 014 Name: Sub Monitor Fan1 Rotation Speed Lowering Caution/B
Meaning: For MU-190/231: Connected to COM2 (Sub Monitor). Fan1
rotation speed is below threshold.
Remedy: If the error frequently occurs, contact FURUNO and inform
frequency of occurrence.
10001,6 015 Name: Sub Monitor Fan2 Rotation Speed Lowering Caution/B
Meaning: For MU-231: Connected to COM2 (Sub Monitor). Fan2 ro-
tation speed is below threshold.
Remedy: If the error frequently occurs, contact FURUNO and inform
frequency of occurrence.
10001,7 016 Name: Sub Monitor Fan3 Rotation Speed Lowering Caution/B
Meaning: For MU-231: Connected to COM2 (Sub Monitor). Fan3 ro-
tation speed is below threshold.
Remedy: If the error frequently occurs, contact FURUNO and inform
frequency of occurrence.
10001,8 017 Name: Sub Monitor Fan4 Rotation Speed Lowering Caution/B
Meaning: For MU-190: Connected to COM2 (Sub Monitor). Fan4 ro-
tation speed is below threshold.
Remedy: If the error frequently occurs, contact FURUNO and inform
frequency of occurrence.
10001,9 011 Name: Main Monitor RS485 Communication Timeout Caution/B
Meaning: For MU-190/231: Connected to COM1. There has been no
communication from processor unit through RS485 for 180 seconds.
(No communication implies in completed sentence or checksum er-
ror.)
Remedy: Check the connection of brightness control cable.
10001,10 024 Name: Sub Monitor RS485 Communication Timeout Caution/B
Meaning: For MU-190/231: Connected to COM2. There has been no
communication from processor unit through RS485 for 180 seconds.
(No communication implies in completed sentence or checksum er-
ror.)
Remedy: Check the connection of brightness control cable.
10001,11 012 Name: Main Monitor No Signal Caution/B
Meaning: For MU-190/231: Connected to COM1. There has been no
signal continuously for 60 seconds.
Remedy: Check the connection of video cable.
10001,12 025 Name: Sub Monitor No Signal Caution/B
Meaning: For MU-190/231: Connected to COM2. There has been no
signal continuously for 60 seconds.
Remedy: Check the connection of video cable.
10001,13 013 Name: Main Monitor Sentence Syntax Error Caution/B
Meaning: For Main monitor, connected to COM1, value of externally
input sentence is out of range that defined by sentence.
Remedy: If the error frequently occurs, contact FURUNO and inform
frequency of occurrence.
10001,14 026 Name: Sub Monitor Sentence Syntax Error Caution/B
Meaning: For Main monitor, connected to COM2, value of externally
input sentence is out of range that defined by sentence.
Remedy: If the error frequently occurs, contact FURUNO and inform
frequency of occurrence.
10001,15 027 Name: Main Monitor COM Timeout Caution/B
Meaning: Communication with MU is interrupted. 60 seconds time-
out.
Remedy: Check the connection with the monitor.

AP-29
APPX. 4 ALERT LIST

Priority/
ALF ALR Alert Name, Meaning and Remedy
Category
10001,16 028 Name: Sub Monitor COM Timeout Caution/B
Meaning: Communication with MU is interrupted. 60 seconds time-
out.
Remedy: Check the connection with the monitor.
10001,17 073 Name: Processor Unit CPU Temp High Caution/B
Meaning: CPU temperature in processor unit exceeds threshold.
Remedy: Turn off Processor Unit. If same error occurs after a few
minutes, contact FURUNO.
10001,18 074 Name: Processor Unit GPU Temp High Caution/B
Meaning: GPU temperature in processor unit exceeds threshold.
Remedy: Turn off Processor Unit. If same error occurs after a few
minutes, contact FURUNO.
10001,19 075 Name: Processor Unit CPU Board Temp High Caution/B
Meaning: CPU temperature in processor unit exceeds threshold.
Remedy: Turn off Processor Unit. If same error occurs after a few
minutes, contact FURUNO.
10001,20 076 Name: Processor Unit Remote 1 Temp High Caution/B
Meaning: CPU temperature in this processor remote control unit ex-
ceeds threshold.
Remedy: Turn off Processor Unit. If same error occurs after a few
minutes, contact FURUNO.
10001,21 077 Name: Processor Unit Remote 2 Temp High Caution/B
Meaning: CPU temperature in this processor remote control unit ex-
ceeds threshold.
Remedy: Turn off Processor Unit. If same error occurs after a few
minutes, contact FURUNO.
10001,22 078 Name: Processor Unit CPU Fan Rotation Speed Lowering Caution/B
Meaning: Rotation speed of CPU fan in processor unit is below
threshold.
Remedy: If the error frequently occurs, contact FURUNO and inform
frequency of occurrence.
10001,23 079 Name: Processor Unit Fan1 Rotation Speed Lowering Caution/B
Meaning: Rotation speed of CPU fan1 in processor unit is below
threshold.
Remedy: If the error frequently occurs, contact FURUNO and inform
frequency of occurrence.
10001,24 080 Name: Processor Unit Fan2 Rotation Speed Lowering Caution/B
Meaning: Rotation speed of CPU fan2 in processor unit is below
threshold.
Remedy: If the error frequently occurs, contact FURUNO and inform
frequency of occurrence.
10001,25 081 Name: Processor Unit Fan3 Rotation Speed Lowering Caution/B
Meaning: Rotation speed of CPU fan3 in processor unit is below
threshold.
Remedy: If the error frequently occurs, contact FURUNO and inform
frequency of occurrence.
10001,26 089 Name: Processor Unit CPU board Battery Power Error Caution/B
Meaning: CPU board battery voltage in processor unit is out of
threshold.
Remedy: Turn off Processor Unit. If same error occurs after a few
minutes, contact FURUNO.

AP-30
 APPX. 4 ALERT LIST

Priority/
ALF ALR Alert Name, Meaning and Remedy
Category
10001,27 090 Name: Processor Unit CPU board Core Power Error Caution/B
Meaning: CPU board battery voltage in processor unit is out of
threshold.
Remedy: Turn off Processor Unit. If same error occurs after a few
minutes, contact FURUNO.
10001,28 070 Name: RCU 1 COM Timeout Caution/B
Meaning: Communication error with this remote control unit is detect-
ed. 40 seconds timeout.
Remedy: Check the connection with this remote control unit.
10001,29 071 Name: RCU 2 COM Timeout Caution/B
Meaning: Communication error with No.2 remote control unit is de-
tected. 40 seconds timeout.
Remedy: Check the connection with No.2 remote control unit.
10001,30 072 Name: RCU 3 COM Timeout Caution/B
Meaning: Communication error with No.3 remote control unit is de-
tected. 40 seconds timeout.
Remedy: Check the connection with No.3 remote control unit.
10001,31 400 Name: Network Printer Not Available Caution/B
Meaning: When executing printout, network printer is not recognized,
network printer connection is interrupted, or printer error such as pa-
per shortage, paper jam and run out of ink occurs.
Remedy: Check that the printer is connected to network, or printer er-
rors such as paper shortage, paper jam and run out of ink does not
occur.
10001,32 401 Name: Local Printer Not Available Caution/B
Meaning: When executing printout, local printer is not recognized,
network printer connection is interrupted, or printer error such as pa-
per shortage, paper jam and run out of ink occurs.
Remedy: Check that the printer is connected, or printer errors such
as paper shortage, paper jam and run out of ink does not occur.

10002,1 005 Name: Main Monitor LCD Unit Lifetime Over* Warning/B
Meaning: For MU-190: Connected to COM1. LCD unit operating time
exceeds 50000 hours. For MU-231: Connected to COM1. LCD unit
operating time exceeds 50000 hours.
Remedy: LCD unit replacement is required. Contact FURUNO.
10002,2 018 Name: Sub Monitor LCD Unit Lifetime Over* Warning/B
Meaning: For MU-190: Connected to COM2. LCD unit operating time
exceeds 50000 hours. For MU-231: Connected to COM2. LCD unit
operating time exceeds 50000 hours.
Remedy: LCD unit replacement is required. Contact FURUNO.
10002,3 006 Name: Main Monitor High Temperature Inside Monitor* Warning/B
Meaning: Internal temperature exceeds threshold. Monitor: Connect-
ed to COM1 (Main Monitor).
Remedy: If the error frequently occurs, contact FURUNO and inform
frequency of occurrence.
10002,4 019 Name: Sub Monitor High Temperature Inside Monitor* Warning/B
Meaning: Internal temperature exceeds threshold. Monitor: Connect-
ed to COM2 (Main Monitor).
Remedy: If the error frequently occurs, contact FURUNO and inform
frequency of occurrence.

AP-31
APPX. 4 ALERT LIST

Priority/
ALF ALR Alert Name, Meaning and Remedy
Category
10002,5 007 Name: Main Monitor Fan1 No Rotation* Warning/B
Meaning: For MU-190/231: Connected to COM1 (Main Monitor).
Fan1 rotation speed is below threshold.
Remedy: If the error frequently occurs, contact FURUNO and inform
frequency of occurrence.
10002,6 008 Name: Main Monitor Fan2 No Rotation* Warning/B
Meaning: For MU-190/231: Connected to COM1 (Main Monitor).
Fan2 rotation speed is below threshold.
Remedy: If the error frequently occurs, contact FURUNO and inform
frequency of occurrence.
10002,7 009 Name: Main Monitor Fan3 No Rotation* Warning/B
Meaning: For MU-231: Connected to COM1 (Main Monitor). Fan3 ro-
tation speed is below threshold.
Remedy: If the error frequently occurs, contact FURUNO and inform
frequency of occurrence.
10002,8 010 Name: Main Monitor Fan4 No Rotation* Warning/B
Meaning: For MU-190: Connected to COM1 (Main Monitor). Fan4 ro-
tation speed is below threshold.
Remedy: If the error frequently occurs, contact FURUNO and inform
frequency of occurrence.
10002,9 020 Name: Sub Monitor Fan1 No Rotation* Warning/B
Meaning: For MU-190/231: Connected to COM2 (Sub Monitor). Fan1
rotation speed is below threshold.
Remedy: If the error frequently occurs, contact FURUNO and inform
frequency of occurrence.
10002,10 021 Name: Sub Monitor Fan2 No Rotation* Warning/B
Meaning: For MU-190/231: COM2 (Sub Monitor). Fan2 rotation
speed is below threshold.
Remedy: If the error frequently occurs, contact FURUNO and inform
frequency of occurrence.
10002,11 022 Name: Sub Monitor Fan3 No Rotation* Warning/B
Meaning: For MU-231: COM2 (Sub Monitor). Fan3 rotation speed is
below threshold.
Remedy: If the error frequently occurs, contact FURUNO and inform
frequency of occurrence.
10002,12 023 Name: Sub Monitor Fan4 No Rotation* Warning/B
Meaning: For MU-190: Connected to COM2 (Sub Monitor). Fan4 ro-
tation speed is below threshold.
Remedy: If the error frequently occurs, contact FURUNO and inform
frequency of occurrence.
10002,13 082 Name: Processor Unit CPU Fan No Rotation* Warning/B
Meaning: Rotation speed of fan in processor unit is below threshold.
Remedy: If the error frequently occurs, contact FURUNO and inform
frequency of occurrence.
10002,14 083 Name: Processor Unit Fan1 Fan No Rotation* Warning/B
Meaning: Rotation speed of fan1 in processor unit is below threshold.
Remedy: If the error frequently occurs, contact FURUNO and inform
frequency of occurrence.
10002,15 084 Name: Processor Unit Fan2 Fan No Rotation* Warning/B
Meaning: Rotation speed of fan2 in processor unit is below threshold.
Remedy: If the error frequently occurs, contact FURUNO and inform
frequency of occurrence.

AP-32
 APPX. 4 ALERT LIST

Priority/
ALF ALR Alert Name, Meaning and Remedy
Category
10002,16 085 Name: Processor Unit Fan3 Fan No Rotation* Warning/B
Meaning: Rotation speed of fan3 in processor unit is below threshold.
Remedy: If the error frequently occurs, contact FURUNO and inform
frequency of occurrence.
10002,17 086 Name: Processor Unit CPU board 5V Power Error Warning/B
Meaning: 5 V power voltage of CPU board in processor unit is out of
threshold.
Remedy: If the error frequently occurs, contact FURUNO and inform
frequency of occurrence.
10002,18 087 Name: Processor Unit CPU board 3.3V Power Error Warning/B
Meaning: 3.3 V power voltage of CPU board in processor unit is out
of threshold.
Remedy: If the error frequently occurs, contact FURUNO and inform
frequency of occurrence.
10002,19 088 Name: Processor Unit CPU board 12V Power Error* Warning/B
Meaning: 12 V power voltage of CPU board in processor unit is out
of threshold.
Remedy: If the error frequently occurs, contact FURUNO and inform
frequency of occurrence.

10050,1 320 Name: Processor Unit Ch.01 COM Timeout Caution/B

Meaning: Input from EC-3000 serial ch.1 has been discontinued for
more than certain time (Set at installation). Default: No timeout
Remedy: Check the connection of Ch.1.
10050,2 321 Name: Processor Unit Ch.02 COM Timeout Caution/B
Meaning: Input from EC-3000 serial ch.2 has been discontinued for
more than certain time (Set at installation). Default: No timeout
Remedy: Check the connection of Ch.2.
10050,3 322 Name: Processor Unit Ch.03 COM Timeout Caution/B
Meaning: Input from EC-3000 serial ch.3 has been discontinued for
more than certain time (Set at installation). Default: No timeout
Remedy: Check the connection of Ch.3.
10050,4 323 Name: Processor Unit Ch.04 COM Timeout Caution/B
Meaning: Input from EC-3000 serial ch.4 has been discontinued for
more than certain time (Set at installation). Default: No timeout
Remedy: Check the connection of Ch.4.
10050,5 324 Name: Processor Unit Ch.05 COM Timeout Caution/B
Meaning: Input from EC-3000 serial ch.5 has been discontinued for
more than certain time (Set at installation). Default: No timeout
Remedy: Check the connection of Ch.5.
10050,6 325 Name: Processor Unit Ch.06 COM Timeout Caution/B
Meaning: Input from EC-3000 serial ch.6 has been discontinued for
more than certain time (Set at installation). Default: No timeout
Remedy: Check the connection of Ch.6.
10050,7 326 Name: Processor Unit Ch.07 COM Timeout Caution/B
Meaning: Input from EC-3000 serial ch.7 has been discontinued for
more than certain time (Set at installation). Default: No timeout
Remedy: Check the connection of Ch.7.
10050,8 327 Name: Processor Unit Ch.08 COM Timeout Caution/B
Meaning: Input from EC-3000 serial ch.8 has been discontinued for
more than certain time (Set at installation). Default: No timeout
Remedy: Check the connection of Ch.8.

AP-33
APPX. 4 ALERT LIST

Priority/
ALF ALR Alert Name, Meaning and Remedy
Category
10173,1 634 Name: UKC Limit* Warning/A
Meaning: Measured depth from echo sounder is less than set UKC
limit value.
Remedy: Be careful that measured depth is less than UKC limit.
10173,2 635 Name: Non-official ENC* Warning/A
Meaning: When Non-official ENC is set to Warning/Caution in chart
alert, the non-official chart area is detected inside the check area.
Remedy: Be careful of the object mentioned above.
10173,3 636 Name: No Vector Chart* Warning/A
Meaning: When No Vector Chart is set to Warning/Caution in chart
alert, the No Vector Chart area is detected inside the check area.
Remedy: Be careful of the object mentioned above.
10173,4 637 Name: Not Up-to-date* Warning/A
Meaning: When Not Up to Date is set to Warning/Caution in chart
alert, a chart area that is not up-to date is detected inside the check
area.
Remedy: Be careful of the object mentioned above.
10173,5 638 Name: Permit Expired* Warning/A
Meaning: When Permit Expired is set to Warning/Caution in chart
alert, a chart area that has an expired permit is detected inside the
check area.
Remedy: Be careful of the object mentioned above.
10173,6 646 Name: Sounding UKC Limit Warning/A
Meaning: Chart depth for one or more legs is outside of UKC thresh-
old.
Remedy: Adjust course accordingly.q
10173,7 647 Name: Too Many Dangers Warning/A
Meaning: Selected route has too many dangerous objects in one or
more legs.
Remedy: Shorten the route or the look-ahead area.

10190,1 530 Name: AIS Target Display 95% Caution/B

Meaning: 95% of maximum number of target which can be displayed
is used.
Remedy: The number of AIS target became 95% of that can be dis-
played. Change the display number using filter function.
10190,3 534 Name: AIS Target Activate 95% Caution/B
Meaning: 95% of capacity for active AIS is used.
Remedy: The number of active AIS target became 95% of its limit.
Change the unnecessary targets to sleep mode.
10190,4 522 Name: TT Auto ACQ 95% Caution/B
Meaning: Appears when capacity for automatically tracked targets is
full.
Remedy: Remove TT symbol manually because the capacity for TT
is 95%.
10190,5 524 Name: TT MAN ACQ 95% Caution/B
Meaning: Appears when capacity for manually tracked targets is full.
Remedy: Remove TT symbol manually because the capacity for TT
is 95%.

AP-34
 APPX. 4 ALERT LIST

Priority/
ALF ALR Alert Name, Meaning and Remedy
Category
10300,1 030 Name: Sensor Adapter 1 COM Timeout Caution/B
Meaning: Communication error with this sensor adapter is detected.
30 seconds timeout. This sensor adapter is turned off, or there is a
problem with network.
Remedy: Check the connection with No.1 sensor adapter and net-
work.
10300,2 031 Name: Sensor Adapter 2 COM Timeout Caution/B
Meaning: Communication error with No.2 sensor adapter is detected.
30 seconds timeout. No.2 sensor adapter is turned off, or there is a
problem with network.
Remedy: Check the connection with No.2 sensor adapter and net-
work.
10300,3 032 Name: Sensor Adapter 3 COM Timeout Caution/B
Meaning: Communication error with No.3 sensor adapter is detected.
30 seconds timeout. No.3 sensor adapter is turned off, or there is a
problem with network.
Remedy: Check the connection with No.3 sensor adapter and net-
work.
10300,4 033 Name: Sensor Adapter 4 COM Timeout Caution/B
Meaning: Communication error with No.4 sensor adapter is detected.
30 seconds timeout. No.4 sensor adapter is turned off, or there is a
problem with network.
Remedy: Check the connection with No.4 sensor adapter and net-
work.
10300,5 034 Name: Sensor Adapter 5 COM Timeout Caution/B
Meaning: Communication error with No.5 sensor adapter is detected.
30 seconds timeout. No.5 sensor adapter is turned off, or there is a
problem with network.
Remedy: Check the connection with No.5 sensor adapter and net-
work.
10300,6 035 Name: Sensor Adapter 6 COM Timeout Caution/B
Meaning: Communication error with No.6 sensor adapter is detected.
30 seconds timeout. No.6 sensor adapter is turned off, or there is a
problem with network.
Remedy: Check the connection with No.6 sensor adapter and net-
work.
10300,7 036 Name: Sensor Adapter 7 COM Timeout Caution/B
Meaning: Communication error with No.7 sensor adapter is detected.
30 seconds timeout. No.7 sensor adapter is turned off, or there is a
problem with network.
Remedy: Check the connection with No.7 sensor adapter and net-
work.
10300,8 037 Name: Sensor Adapter 8 COM Timeout Caution/B
Meaning: Communication error with No.8 sensor adapter is detected.
30 seconds timeout. No.8 sensor adapter is turned off, or there is a
problem with network.
Remedy: Check the connection with No.8 sensor adapter and net-
work.
10300,9 038 Name: Sensor Adapter 9 COM Timeout Caution/B
Meaning: Communication error with No.9 sensor adapter is detected.
30 seconds timeout. No.9 sensor adapter is turned off, or there is a
problem with network.
Remedy: Check the connection with No.9 sensor adapter and net-
work.

AP-35
APPX. 4 ALERT LIST

Priority/
ALF ALR Alert Name, Meaning and Remedy
Category
10300,10 039 Name: Sensor Adapter 10 COM Timeout Caution/B
Meaning: Communication error with No.10 sensor adapter is detect-
ed. 30 seconds timeout. No.10 sensor adapter is turned off, or there
is a problem with network.
Remedy: Check the connection with No.10 sensor adapter and net-
work.
10300,11 094 Name: Sensor Adapter 11 COM Timeout Caution/B
Meaning: Communication error with No.11 sensor adapter is detect-
ed. 30 seconds timeout. No.11 sensor adapter is turned off, or there
is a problem with network.
Remedy: Check the connection with No.11 sensor adapter and net-
work.
10300,12 095 Name: Sensor Adapter 12 COM Timeout Caution/B
Meaning: Communication error with No.12 sensor adapter is detect-
ed. 30 seconds timeout. No.12 sensor adapter is turned off, or there
is a problem with network.
Remedy: Check the connection with No.12 sensor adapter and net-
work.
10300,13 096 Name: Sensor Adapter 13 COM Timeout Caution/B
Meaning: Communication error with No.13 sensor adapter is detect-
ed. 30 seconds timeout. No.13 sensor adapter is turned off, or there
is a problem with network.
Remedy: Check the connection with No.13 sensor adapter and net-
work.
10300,14 097 Name: Sensor Adapter 14 COM Timeout Caution/B
Meaning: Communication error with No.14 sensor adapter is detect-
ed. 30 seconds timeout. No.14 sensor adapter is turned off, or there
is a problem with network.
Remedy: Check the connection with No.14 sensor adapter and net-
work.
10300,15 098 Name: Sensor Adapter 15 COM Timeout Caution/B
Meaning: Communication error with No.15 sensor adapter is detect-
ed. 30 seconds timeout. No.15 sensor adapter is turned off, or there
is a problem with network.
Remedy: Check the connection with No.15 sensor adapter and net-
work.
10300,16 099 Name: Sensor Adapter 16 COM Timeout Caution/B
Meaning: Communication error with No.16 sensor adapter is detect-
ed. 30 seconds timeout. No.16 sensor adapter is turned off, or there
is a problem with network.
Remedy: Check the connection with No.16 sensor adapter and net-
work.

10310,- 510 Name: IAS COM Timeout* Warning/B

Meaning: Connection to the IAS (MODBUS) is lost or interrupted.
Remedy: Check connection.
10331,- 331 Name: Selected Gyro status missing Warning/B
Meaning: When connected with Double Gyro System, instrument
produced by YDK Technology, "Double Gyro" status cannot be ac-
quired.
Remedy: If the error frequently occurs, contact FURUNO and inform
frequency of occurrence.

AP-36
 APPX. 4 ALERT LIST

Priority/
ALF ALR Alert Name, Meaning and Remedy
Category
10380, 380 Name: AIS COM Error* Warning/B
131 Meaning: Data from AIS has been discontinued for more than set
time. (Set at installation) Default: 60 seconds AIS is turned off, or
there is a problem with network.
Remedy: Check the connection with AIS and network.

10400,1 255 Name: Gyro 1 COM Error Caution/B

Meaning: Data from this gyro has been discontinued for more than
set time. (Set at installation) Default: 60 seconds This gyro is turned
off, or there is a problem with network.
Remedy: Check the connection with this gyro and network.
10400,2 256 Name: Gyro 2 COM Error Caution/B
Meaning: Data from this gyro has been discontinued for more than
set time. (Set at installation) Default: 60 seconds This gyro is turned
off, or there is a problem with network.
Remedy: Check the connection with this gyro and network.
10400,3 257 Name: Gyro 3 COM Error Caution/B
Meaning: Data from this gyro has been discontinued for more than
set time. (Set at installation) Default: 60 seconds This gyro is turned
off, or there is a problem with network.
Remedy: Check the connection with this gyro and network.
10400,4 258 Name: Gyro 4 COM Error Caution/B
Meaning: Data from this gyro has been discontinued for more than
set time. (Set at installation) Default: 60 seconds This gyro is turned
off, or there is a problem with network.
Remedy: Check the connection with this gyro and network.
10400,5 259 Name: Gyro 5 COM Error Caution/B
Meaning: Data from this gyro has been discontinued for more than
set time. (Set at installation) Default: 60 seconds This gyro is turned
off, or there is a problem with network.
Remedy: Check the connection with this gyro and network.
10400,11 391 Name: ROT Gyro 1 COM Error Caution/B
Meaning: Data from this ROT gyro has been discontinued for more
than set time. (Set at installation) Default: 60 seconds
Remedy: Check the connection with this ROT gyro.
10400,12 392 Name: ROT Gyro 2 COM Error Caution/B
Meaning: Data from this ROT gyro has been discontinued for more
than set time. (Set at installation) Default: 60 seconds
Remedy: Check the connection with this ROT gyro.
10400,13 393 Name: ROT Gyro 3 COM Error Caution/B
Meaning: Data from this ROT gyro has been discontinued for more
than set time. (Set at installation) Default: 60 seconds
Remedy: Check the connection with this ROT gyro.
10400,21 290 Name: EPFS 1 COM Error Caution/B
Meaning: Ship position data from this GPS has been discontinued for
more than set time. (Set at installation) Default: 60 seconds. This
GPS is turned off, or there is a problem with network.
Remedy: Check the connection with this GPS and network.
10400,22 291 Name: EPFS 2 COM Error Caution/B
Meaning: Ship position data from this GPS has been discontinued for
more than set time. (Set at installation) Default: 60 seconds. This
GPS is turned off, or there is a problem with network.
Remedy: Check the connection with this GPS and network.

AP-37
APPX. 4 ALERT LIST

Priority/
ALF ALR Alert Name, Meaning and Remedy
Category
10400,23 292 Name: EPFS 3 COM Error Caution/B
Meaning: Ship position data from this GPS has been discontinued for
more than set time. (Set at installation) Default: 60 seconds. This
GPS is turned off, or there is a problem with network.
Remedy: Check the connection with this GPS and network.
10400,24 293 Name: EPFS 4 COM Error Caution/B
Meaning: Ship position data from this GPS has been discontinued for
more than set time. (Set at installation) Default: 60 seconds. This
GPS is turned off, or there is a problem with network.
Remedy: Check the connection with this GPS and network.
10400,25 294 Name: EPFS 5 COM Error Caution/B
Meaning: Ship position data from this GPS has been discontinued for
more than set time. (Set at installation) Default: 60 seconds. This
GPS is turned off, or there is a problem with network.
Remedy: Check the connection with this GPS and network.
10400,26 295 Name: EPFS 6 COM Error Caution/B
Meaning: Ship position data from this GPS has been discontinued for
more than set time. (Set at installation) Default: 60 seconds. This
GPS is turned off, or there is a problem with network.
Remedy: Check the connection with this GPS and network.
10400,27 296 Name: EPFS 7 COM Error Caution/B
Meaning: Ship position data from this GPS has been discontinued for
more than set time. (Set at installation) Default: 60 seconds. This
GPS is turned off, or there is a problem with network.
Remedy: Check the connection with this GPS and network.
10400,28 297 Name: EPFS 8 COM Error Caution/B
Meaning: Ship position data from this GPS has been discontinued for
more than set time. (Set at installation) Default: 60 seconds. This
GPS is turned off, or there is a problem with network.
Remedy: Check the connection with this GPS and network.
10400,29 298 Name: EPFS 9 COM Error Caution/B
Meaning: Ship position data from this GPS has been discontinued for
more than set time. (Set at installation) Default: 60 seconds. This
GPS is turned off, or there is a problem with network.
Remedy: Check the connection with this GPS and network.
10400,30 299 Name: EPFS 10 COM Error Caution/B
Meaning: Ship position data from this GPS has been discontinued for
more than set time. (Set at installation) Default: 60 seconds. This
GPS is turned off, or there is a problem with network.
Remedy: Check the connection with this GPS and network.
10400,41 280 Name: SDME 1 COM Error Caution/B
Meaning: Speed data from this SDME sensor has been discontinued
for more than set time. (Set at installation) Default: 60 seconds This
SDME sensor is turned off, or there is a problem with network.
Remedy: Check the connection with this SDME sensor and network.
10400,42 281 Name: SDME 2 COM Error Caution/B
Meaning: Speed data from this SDME sensor has been discontinued
for more than set time. (Set at installation) Default: 60 seconds This
SDME sensor is turned off, or there is a problem with network.
Remedy: Check the connection with this SDME sensor and network.

AP-38
 APPX. 4 ALERT LIST

Priority/
ALF ALR Alert Name, Meaning and Remedy
Category
10400,43 282 Name: SDME 3 COM Error Caution/B
Meaning: Speed data from this SDME sensor has been discontinued
for more than set time. (Set at installation) Default: 60 seconds This
SDME sensor is turned off, or there is a problem with network.
Remedy: Check the connection with this SDME sensor and network.
10400,51 235 Name: Echo Sounder 1 COM Error Caution/B
Meaning: Input of depth data from this echo sounder has been dis-
continued for more than set time. (Set at installation) Default: 60 sec-
onds This echo sounder is turned off, or there is a problem with
network.
Remedy: Check the connection with this echosounder and network.
10400,52 236 Name: Echo Sounder 2 COM Error Caution/B
Meaning: Input of depth data from this echo sounder has been dis-
continued for more than set time. (Set at installation) Default: 60 sec-
onds This echo sounder is turned off, or there is a problem with
network.
Remedy: Check the connection with this echosounder and network.
10400,53 237 Name: Echo Sounder 3 COM Error Caution/B
Meaning: Input of depth data from this echo sounder has been dis-
continued for more than set time. (Set at installation) Default: 60 sec-
onds This echo sounder is turned off, or there is a problem with
network.
Remedy: Check the connection with this echosounder and network.
10400,61 300 Name: Rudder 1 COM Error Caution/B
Meaning: Rudder data from this rudder sensor has been discontin-
ued for more than set time. (Set at installation) Default: 60 seconds.
This rudder sensor is turned off, or there is a problem with network.
Remedy: Check the connection with this rudder sensor and network.
10400,62 301 Name: Rudder 2 COM Error Caution/B
Meaning: Rudder data from this rudder sensor has been discontin-
ued for more than set time. (Set at installation) Default: 60 seconds.
This rudder sensor is turned off, or there is a problem with network.
Remedy: Check the connection with this rudder sensor and network.
10400,63 302 Name: Rudder 3 COM Error Caution/B
Meaning: Rudder data from this rudder sensor has been discontin-
ued for more than set time. (Set at installation) Default: 60 seconds.
This rudder sensor is turned off, or there is a problem with network.
Remedy: Check the connection with this rudder sensor and network.
10400,71 303 Name: HCS 1 COM Error Caution/B
Meaning: Data from this HCS has been discontinued for more than
set time. (Set at installation) Default: 60 seconds This HCS is turned
off, or there is a problem with network.
Remedy: Check the connection with this HCS and network.
10400,72 304 Name: HCS 2 COM Error Caution/B
Meaning: Data from this HCS has been discontinued for more than
set time. (Set at installation) Default: 60 seconds This HCS is turned
off, or there is a problem with network.
Remedy: Check the connection with this HCS and network.
10400,81 305 Name: VDR COM Error Caution/B
Meaning: Sentence from VDR has been discontinued for more than
set time. (Set at installation) Default: 180 seconds VDR is turned off,
or there is a problem with network.
Remedy: Check the connection with VDR and network.

AP-39
APPX. 4 ALERT LIST

Priority/
ALF ALR Alert Name, Meaning and Remedy
Category
10400,91 306 Name: BNWAS1 COM Error Caution/B
Meaning: Caution Sentence from BNWAS1 has been discontinued
for more than set time. (Set at installation) Default: 180 seconds BN-
WAS is turned off, or there is a problem with network.
Remedy: Check the connection with BNWAS1 and network.
10400,92 307 Name: BNWAS2 COM Error Caution/B
Meaning: Caution Sentence from BNWAS2 has been discontinued
for more than set time. (Set at installation) Default: 180 seconds BN-
WAS is turned off, or there is a problem with network.
Remedy: Check the connection with BNWAS2 and network.
10400,93 308 Name: BNWAS3 COM Error Caution/B
Meaning: Caution Sentence from BNWAS3 has been discontinued
for more than set time. (Set at installation) Default: 180 seconds BN-
WAS is turned off, or there is a problem with network.
Remedy: Check the connection with BNWAS3 and network.
10400, 360 Name: Wind Sensor 1 COM Error Caution/B
101 Meaning: Data from this wind sensor has been discontinued for more
than set time. (Set at installation) Default: 60 seconds This wind sen-
sor is turned off, or there is a problem with network.
Remedy: Check the connection with this wind sensor.
10400, 361 Name: Wind Sensor 2 COM Error Caution/B
102 Meaning: Data from this wind sensor has been discontinued for more
than set time. (Set at installation) Default: 60 seconds This wind sen-
sor is turned off, or there is a problem with network.
Remedy: Check the connection with this wind sensor.
10400, 362 Name: Wind Sensor 3 COM Error Caution/B
103 Meaning: Data from this wind sensor has been discontinued for more
than set time. (Set at installation) Default: 60 seconds This wind sen-
sor is turned off, or there is a problem with network.
Remedy: Check the connection with this wind sensor.
10400, 370 Name: Water Current COM Error Caution/B
111 Meaning: Data from water current has been discontinued for more
than set time. (Set at installation) Default: 60 seconds Water current
sensor is turned off, or there is a problem with network. Check the
connection with water current and network.
Remedy: Check the connection with water current sensor and net-
work.
10400, 371 Name: Water Temp COM Error Caution/B
121 Meaning: Data from water temp. has been discontinued for more
than set time. (Set at installation) Default: 60 seconds Water temp
sensor is turned off, or there is a problem with network.
Remedy: Check the connection with water temp sensor and network.
10400, 390 Name: NAVTEX COM Error Caution/B
141 Meaning: Data from NAVTEX has been discontinued for more than
set time. (Set at installation) Default: 180 seconds NAVTEX is turned
off, or there is a problem with network
Remedy: Check the connection with NAVTEX and network.

10431,- 431 Name: HUB-3000 LinkUP Error* Warning/B

Meaning: A network error has occurred between the HUB-3000 and
one or more connected units.
Remedy: Check network connections between the EC-3000 and net-
worked units.

AP-40
 APPX. 4 ALERT LIST

Priority/
ALF ALR Alert Name, Meaning and Remedy
Category
10450,- 330 Name: Double Gyro Status Conflict* Warning/B
Meaning: When connected with Double Gyro System, instrument
produced by YDK Technology, two gyro has been displayed "Select-
ed" status for 3 seconds.
Remedy: If the error frequently occurs, contact FURUNO and inform
frequency of occurrence.
10499,- 500 Name: Watch Alert* Warning/B
Meaning: Watch alert interval reached.
Remedy: ACK the alert, check the radar display.

10500,1 851 Name: EPFS 1 Sensor Banned Caution/B

Meaning: Own ship position data from this GPS is determined abnor-
mal by integrity check.
Remedy: Reset the filter to confirm that it isn't a temporal error value.
If the data is normal, it is reusable. However, if it's continually re-
moved, there is a possibility that correct data is not received from sen-
sor. In this case, contact FURUNO.
10500,2 852 Name: EPFS 2 Sensor Banned Caution/B
Meaning: Own ship position data from this GPS is determined abnor-
mal by integrity check.
Remedy: Reset the filter to confirm that it isn't a temporal error value.
If the data is normal, it is reusable. However, if it's continually re-
moved, there is a possibility that correct data is not received from sen-
sor. In this case, contact FURUNO.
10500,3 853 Name: EPFS 3 Sensor Banned Caution/B
Meaning: Own ship position data from this GPS is determined abnor-
mal by integrity check.
Remedy: Reset the filter to confirm that it isn't a temporal error value.
If the data is normal, it is reusable. However, if it's continually re-
moved, there is a possibility that correct data is not received from sen-
sor. In this case, contact FURUNO.
10500,4 854 Name: EPFS 4 Sensor Banned Caution/B
Meaning: Own ship position data from this GPS is determined abnor-
mal by integrity check.
Remedy: Reset the filter to confirm that it isn't a temporal error value.
If the data is normal, it is reusable. However, if it's continually re-
moved, there is a possibility that correct data is not received from sen-
sor. In this case, contact FURUNO.
10500,5 855 Name: EPFS 5 Sensor Banned Caution/B
Meaning: Own ship position data from this GPS is determined abnor-
mal by integrity check.
Remedy: Reset the filter to confirm that it isn't a temporal error value.
If the data is normal, it is reusable. However, if it's continually re-
moved, there is a possibility that correct data is not received from sen-
sor. In this case, contact FURUNO.
10500,6 856 Name: EPFS 6 Sensor Banned Caution/B
Meaning: Own ship position data from this GPS is determined abnor-
mal by integrity check.
Remedy: Reset the filter to confirm that it isn't a temporal error value.
If the data is normal, it is reusable. However, if it's continually re-
moved, there is a possibility that correct data is not received from sen-
sor. In this case, contact FURUNO.

AP-41
APPX. 4 ALERT LIST

Priority/
ALF ALR Alert Name, Meaning and Remedy
Category
10500,7 857 Name: EPFS 7 Sensor Banned Caution/B
Meaning: Own ship position data from this GPS is determined abnor-
mal by integrity check.
Remedy: Reset the filter to confirm that it isn't a temporal error value.
If the data is normal, it is reusable. However, if it's continually re-
moved, there is a possibility that correct data is not received from sen-
sor. In this case, contact FURUNO.
10500,8 858 Name: EPFS 8 Sensor Banned Caution/B
Meaning: Own ship position data from this GPS is determined abnor-
mal by integrity check.
Remedy: Reset the filter to confirm that it isn't a temporal error value.
If the data is normal, it is reusable. However, if it's continually re-
moved, there is a possibility that correct data is not received from sen-
sor. In this case, contact FURUNO.
10500,9 859 Name: EPFS 9 Sensor Banned Caution/B
Meaning: Own ship position data from this GPS is determined abnor-
mal by integrity check.
Remedy: Reset the filter to confirm that it isn't a temporal error value.
If the data is normal, it is reusable. However, if it's continually re-
moved, there is a possibility that correct data is not received from sen-
sor. In this case, contact FURUNO.
10500,10 860 Name: EPFS 10 Sensor Banned Caution/B
Meaning: Own ship position data from this GPS is determined abnor-
mal by integrity check.
Remedy: Reset the filter to confirm that it isn't a temporal error value.
If the data is normal, it is reusable. However, if it's continually re-
moved, there is a possibility that correct data is not received from sen-
sor. In this case, contact FURUNO.
10500,11 871 Name: Gyro 1 Sensor Banned Caution/B
Meaning: Heading data from this Gyro is determined abnormal by in-
tegrity check.
Remedy: Reset the filter to confirm that it isn't a temporal error value.
If the data is normal, it is reusable. However, if it's continually re-
moved, there is a possibility that correct data is not received from sen-
sor. In this case, contact FURUNO.
10500,12 872 Name: Gyro 2 Sensor Banned Caution/B
Meaning: Heading data from this Gyro is determined abnormal by in-
tegrity check.
Remedy: Reset the filter to confirm that it isn't a temporal error value.
If the data is normal, it is reusable. However, if it's continually re-
moved, there is a possibility that correct data is not received from sen-
sor. In this case, contact FURUNO.
10500,13 873 Name: Gyro 3 Sensor Banned Caution/B
Meaning: Heading data from this Gyro is determined abnormal by in-
tegrity check.
Remedy: Reset the filter to confirm that it isn't a temporal error value.
If the data is normal, it is reusable. However, if it's continually re-
moved, there is a possibility that correct data is not received from sen-
sor. In this case, contact FURUNO.

AP-42
 APPX. 4 ALERT LIST

Priority/
ALF ALR Alert Name, Meaning and Remedy
Category
10500,14 874 Name: Gyro 4 Sensor Banned Caution/B
Meaning: Heading data from this Gyro is determined abnormal by in-
tegrity check.
Remedy: Reset the filter to confirm that it isn't a temporal error value.
If the data is normal, it is reusable. However, if it's continually re-
moved, there is a possibility that correct data is not received from sen-
sor. In this case, contact FURUNO.
10500,15 875 Name: Gyro 5 Sensor Banned Caution/B
Meaning: Heading data from this Gyro is determined abnormal by in-
tegrity check.
Remedy: Reset the filter to confirm that it isn't a temporal error value.
If the data is normal, it is reusable. However, if it's continually re-
moved, there is a possibility that correct data is not received from sen-
sor. In this case, contact FURUNO.
10500,21 861 Name: SDME 1 Sensor Banned Caution/B
Meaning: Own ship speed data from this SDME is determined abnor-
mal by integrity check.
Remedy: Reset the filter to confirm that it isn't a temporal error value.
If the data is normal, it is reusable. However, if it's continually re-
moved, there is a possibility that correct data is not received from sen-
sor. In this case, contact FURUNO.
10500,22 862 Name: SDME 2 Sensor Banned Caution/B
Meaning: Own ship speed data from this SDME is determined abnor-
mal by integrity check.
Remedy: Reset the filter to confirm that it isn't a temporal error value.
If the data is normal, it is reusable. However, if it's continually re-
moved, there is a possibility that correct data is not received from sen-
sor. In this case, contact FURUNO.
10500,23 863 Name: SDME 3 Sensor Banned Caution/B
Meaning: Own ship speed data from this SDME is determined abnor-
mal by integrity check.
Remedy: Reset the filter to confirm that it isn't a temporal error value.
If the data is normal, it is reusable. However, if it's continually re-
moved, there is a possibility that correct data is not received from sen-
sor. In this case, contact FURUNO.
10500,31 881 Name: ROT Gyro 1 Sensor Banned Caution/B
Meaning: Heading data from this ROT Gyro is determined abnormal
by integrity check.
Remedy: Reset the filter to confirm that it isn't a temporal error value.
If the data is normal, it is reusable. However, if it's continually re-
moved, there is a possibility that correct data is not received from sen-
sor. In this case, contact FURUNO.
10500,32 882 Name: ROT Gyro 2 Sensor Banned Caution/B
Meaning: Heading data from this ROT Gyro is determined abnormal
by integrity check.
Remedy: Reset the filter to confirm that it isn't a temporal error value.
If the data is normal, it is reusable. However, if it's continually re-
moved, there is a possibility that correct data is not received from sen-
sor. In this case, contact FURUNO.

AP-43
APPX. 4 ALERT LIST

Priority/
ALF ALR Alert Name, Meaning and Remedy
Category
10500,33 883 Name: ROT Gyro 3 Sensor Banned Caution/B
Meaning: Heading data from this ROT Gyro is determined abnormal
by integrity check.
Remedy: Reset the filter to confirm that it isn't a temporal error value.
If the data is normal, it is reusable. However, if it's continually re-
moved, there is a possibility that correct data is not received from sen-
sor. In this case, contact FURUNO.

10510,1 900 Name: No Filter Source of Position Warning/B

Meaning: No valid position sensor is available for filter. (Banned or
connection error)
Remedy: Check the connection with all GPS.
10510,2 901 Name: No Filter Source of COG/SOG Warning/B
Meaning: No valid COG/SOG sensor is available for filter. (Banned
or connection error)
Remedy: Check the connection with all GPS.
10510,3 902 Name: No Filter Source of CTW/STW Warning/B
Meaning: No valid CTW/STW sensor is available for filter. (Banned
or connection error)
Remedy: Check the connection with all GPS.
10510,4 903 Name: No Filter Source of Heading Warning/B
Meaning: No valid heading sensor is available for filter. (Banned or
connection error)
Remedy: Check the connection with all GPS.
10510,5 904 Name: No Filter Source of ROT Warning/B
Meaning: No valid heading sensor is available for filter. (Banned or
connection error)
Remedy: Check the connection with all GPS.

10540,1 539 Name: AIS Message Received Caution/B

Meaning: AIS message is received.
10540,2 541 Name: AIS Message Transmit Error Caution/B
Meaning: AIS message transmission failed.
Remedy: Check the connection with AIS.

10601,1 272 Name: UTC Time Not Available* Warning/B

Meaning: Time data of all available GPS sensor has been not avail-
able for more than 3 seconds.
Remedy: Check the connection with all GPS.
10601,2 277 Name: Wind Speed/Direction Not Available* Warning/B
Meaning: Wind speed/direction data of all available WIND sensors
has been not available for more than 3 seconds.
Remedy: Check the connection with all wind sensors.
10601,3 279 Name: COG/SOG Not Available* Warning/B
Meaning: COG/SOG data of all available GPS sensor has been not
available for more than 3 seconds.
Remedy: Check the connection with all GPS.
10601,4 284 Name: SOG Not Available* Warning/B
Meaning: There is no SOG sensor data or the SOG sentence is in-
valid.
Remedy: Check that the sensor is powered.

AP-44
 APPX. 4 ALERT LIST

Priority/
ALF ALR Alert Name, Meaning and Remedy
Category
10601,5 450 Name: Heading Sensor Not Available Warning/B
Meaning: Heading data of all available gyro has been not available
for more than 2 seconds.
Remedy: Check the connection with all gyro.
10601,6 453 Name: SDME Sensor Not Available* Warning/B
Meaning: Speed data from all available SDME has been not avail-
able for more than 3 seconds.
Remedy: Check the connection with all SDME.

10602,1 472 Name: Position Source Change Caution/B

Meaning: Position sensor used in system (distributed by own ship's
information management) is changed.
10602,2 473 Name: Heading Source Change Caution/B
Meaning: Heading sensor used in system (distributed by own ship's
information management) is changed.
10602,3 474 Name: COG/SOG Source Change Caution/B
Meaning: COG/SOG sensor used in system (distributed by own
ship's information management) is changed.
10602,4 475 Name: CTW/STW Source Change Caution/B
Meaning: CTW/STW sensor used in system (distributed by own
ship's information management) is changed.
10602,5 470 Name: Datum Change Caution/B
Meaning: Current datum of EPFS is changed. Acquisition timing:
Once in 60 seconds or when position sensor is changed.
Remedy: Check the operator's manual of the GPS.

10603,1 273 Name: Depth (Bow) Not Available Caution/B

Meaning: Depth data of all available depth sensors (Bow) has been
not available for more than 3 seconds.
Remedy: Check the connection with all echo sounders.
10603,2 274 Name: Depth Midship Not Available Caution/B
Meaning: Depth data of all available depth sensors (Midship) has
been not available for more than 3 seconds.
Remedy: Check the connection with all echo sounders.
10603,3 275 Name: Depth (Stern) Not Available Caution/B
Meaning: Depth data of all available depth sensors (Stern) has been
not available for more than 3 seconds.
Remedy: Check the connection with all echo sounders.
10603,4 278 Name: STW Not Available Caution/B
Meaning: STW data of all available SDME sensors has been not
available for more than 3 seconds.
Remedy: Check the connection with all SDME.
10603,5 285 Name: Heading Magnetic Not Available Caution/B
Meaning: Heading data of all available magnetic gyro has been not
available for more than 3 seconds.
Remedy: Check the connection with all magnetic gyro.

10644,- 644 Name: Actual UKC Limit Warning/A

Meaning: Actual depth is outside the preset UKC limit.
Remedy: Check depth, adjust heading accordingly.

AP-45
APPX. 4 ALERT LIST

Priority/
ALF ALR Alert Name, Meaning and Remedy
Category
10700,- 700 Name: RT Version is higher Caution/B
Meaning: Received route transfer sentence (RTZ) is a higher version
than this system.
Remedy: Check route details. Some route details may not be dis-
played correctly.
10718,- 728 Name: Radar Sensor SW Version Error* Warning/B
Meaning: Software version not correct.
Remedy: Update the radar software. If the problem persists, consult
your dealer.

10740,1 730 Name: EXT Radar STBY* Warning/B

Meaning: The antenna unit selected with the Interswitch is in stand-
by
Remedy: Set the antenna unit to transmit state.
10740,2 740 Name: EXT Radar No Signal* Warning/B
Meaning: No video signal from the antenna unit selected with the In-
terswitch.
Remedy: Check the antenna unit.
10740,3 750 Name: EXT Radar COM Error* Warning/B
Meaning: No communication from the antenna unit selected with the
Interswitch.
Remedy: Check that both the antenna unit and the processor unit are
powered. Also check the wiring between the antenna unit and the pro-
cessor unit.

10755,1 755 Name: SART DETECTED Warning/B

Meaning: A SART signal was detected. This alert appears only for
FAR-3220-NXT(-BB) and FAR-3320-NXT.
Remedy: Press the ALARM ACK key. Show the SART marks on the
radar display, referring to section 2.36.2section 2.36.2.
Note: Keep in mind the following points:
• This alert can occur when this equipment receives interference si-
multaneously from multiple radars.
• This alert may not occur under the bad weather conditions such as
at rain.
10760,- 760 Name: Datum Mismatch Caution/B
Meaning: Datum mismatch between EPFS and chart.
Remedy: Match the datum.

10800,1 691 Name: RM Stop - Exceed Max XTD Alarm/A

Meaning: Route monitoring is stopped because distance from route
is more than set value of Max XTD.
Remedy: Start route monitoring after approaching the monitoring
route.
10800,2 692 Name: RM Stop - Sensor lost Alarm/A
Meaning: Error occurs inside of route monitoring function.
Remedy: If the error frequently occurs, contact FURUNO and inform
frequency of occurrence.
10800,3 693 Name: RM Stop - Internal Error Alarm/A
Meaning: Required data for route monitoring such as position, SOG/
COG cannot be acquired.
Remedy: Check the connection with GYRO, GPS and SDME.

AP-46
 APPX. 4 ALERT LIST

Priority/
ALF ALR Alert Name, Meaning and Remedy
Category
10801,- 485 Name: Depth Limit* Alarm/A
Meaning: Seabed has been less than set depth for more than 3 sec-
onds.
Remedy: Be careful of risk of grounding.
10802,- 495 Name: Anchor Watch** Warning/A
Meaning: While anchor watch alert function is enabled, ship's posi-
tion has been outside of alarm area centering certain position for
more than 3 seconds.
Remedy: Be careful of dragging anchor.
10803,- 640 Name: Chartalign: Over 30 min* Caution/B
Meaning: Own ship position has been offset for more than 30 min-
utes.
Remedy: Reset offset.
10807,- 820 Name: NAVTEX Message Received 30 min* Caution/B
Meaning: NAVTEX message is received.
10850,- 652 Name: End of Track Warning/A
Meaning: Ship will reach last waypoint in 30 seconds.
Remedy: Be careful that last waypoint is approaching.
10860,1 645 Name: Navigational Hazard Warning/A
Meaning: One or more navigational hazards detected by the Look-
ahead function.
Remedy: Adjust course as necessary.

10910,1 911 Name: Wave Analyzer Error(UTC) Caution/B

Meaning: An input error has occurred for time/date data.
Remedy: Check data input to the Wave Analysis software.
10910,2 912 Name: Wave Analyzer Error(Speed/Course) Caution/B
Meaning: An input error has occurred for speed/course data.
Remedy: Check data input to the Wave Analysis software.
10910,3 913 Name: Wave Analyzer Error(Wind) Caution/B
Meaning: An input error has occurred for wind data.
Remedy: Check data input to the Wave Analysis software.
10910,4 914 Name: Wave Analyzer Error(Radar) Caution/B
Meaning: An input error has occurred for radar data.
Remedy: Check data input to the Wave Analysis software.
10910,5 915 Name: Wave Analyzer Error(Gyro) Caution/B
Meaning: An input error has occurred for gyrocompass data.
Remedy: Check data input to the Wave Analysis software.

10950,- 950 Name: BAM COM Error Caution/B

Meaning: Communication with the Bridge Alert Management System
interrupted. BAM is turned off, or there is a problem with network.
Remedy: Check the connection with BAM and network.
10999,- 999 Name: Alert setting file read error* Warning/B

AP-47
APPX. 5 RADIO REGULATORY IN-
FORMATION

XX cm
FAR-3210(-BB) FAR-3330SW
RTR-105 440 cm RTR-109 230 cm
FAR-3310 FAR-3230SW-BB
FAR-3220(-BB) FAR-3230S-SSD(-BB)
RTR-106 950 cm RTR-111 100 cm
FAR-3320 FAR-3330S-SSD
FAR-3320W(-BB) RTR-108 550 cm FAR-3220-NXT(-BB)/ 330 cm
RTR-123
FAR-3230S(-BB) FAR-3320-NXT/
RTR-107 460 cm
FAR-3330S

AP-48
FURUNO FAR-32x0/33x0 SERIES

SPECIFICATIONS OF MARINE RADAR/ARPA

FAR-32x0/33x0 SERIES
1 ANTENNA RADIATOR
1.1 Type Slotted waveguide array
1.2 Beam width and sidelobe attenuation
X-band S-band
Radiator type
XN12CF XN20CF XN24CF SN24CF SN30CF SN36CF
Length 4 ft 6.5 ft 8 ft 8 ft 10 ft 12 ft
Horizontal beam width 1.9° 1.23° 0.95° 2.6° 2.3° 1.8°
Vertical beam width 20° 25°
Sidelobe within ±10° -24 dB -28 dB -28 dB -24 dB
－
Sidelobe outside ±10° -30 dB -32 dB -32 dB -30 dB
Sidelobe within ±20° -23 dB -24 dB
－ －
Sidelobe outside ±20° -27 dB -30 dB
1.3 Polarization Horizontal
1.4 Rotation 24 rpm or 42 rpm (for high speed craft)
1.5 Wind load 100 kn relative

2 TRANSCEIVER
2.1 TX Frequency and modulation
X-band (Magnetron) 9410 MHz ±30 MHz, P0N
X-band (Solid state) CH1: 9403.75 MHz (P0N)/ 9423.75 MHz ±5 MHz (Q0N) or
CH2: 9413.75 MHz (P0N)/ 9433.75 MHz ±5 MHz (Q0N)
S-band (Magnetron) 3050 MHz ±30 MHz, P0N
S-band (Solid state) CH1: 3043.75 MHz (P0N)/ 3063.75 MHz ±5 MHz (Q0N) or
CH2: 3053.75 MHz (P0N)/ 3073.75 MHz ±5 MHz (Q0N)
2.2 Output power
FAR-3210/3310 12 kW
FAR-3220/3320/3320W 25 kW
FAR-3220-NXT/3320-NXT 600 W (500 W for Japanese vessel)
FAR-3230S/3330S/3330SW 30 kW
FAR-3230S-SSD/3330S-SSD 250 W
2.3 Pulse Repetition Rate, Range scale and Pulselength,
X/S-band Magnetron radar
PRR Range scale (NM)
(Hz approx.) 0.125 0.25 0.5 0.75 1 1.5 2 3 4 6 8 12 16 24 32 48 72 96
3000* S1
3000* S2
1500 M1
1200 M2
1000 M3
600** L
1/2/4/8/16/32/72 NM ranges: non-IMO radar only
*: 2200 Hz with TT range on 32 NM. **: 500 Hz on 96 NM range.

SP - 1 E3616S02D-M
240131
FURUNO FAR-32x0/33x0 SERIES

X-band Solid state radar

PRR Range scale (NM)
(Hz approx.) 0.125 0.25 0.5 0.75 1 1.5 2 3 4 6 8 12 16 24 32 48 72 96
1500 S1
1500 S2
1200 M1
1000 M2
1000 M3
600 L
1/2/4/8/16/32/72 NM ranges: non-IMO radar only

S-band Solid state radar

PRR Range scale (NM)
(Hz approx.) 0.125 0.25 0.5 0.75 1 1.5 2 3 4 6 8 12 16 24 32 48 72 96
2400* S1
2000* S2
1500 M1
1060 M2
1000 M3
600 L
1/2/4/8/16/32/72 NM ranges: non-IMO radar only
*: 1800 Hz (S1) and 1500 Hz (S2) with TT range on 32 NM.

3 PROCESSOR UNIT
3.1 Minimum range 22 m
3.2 Range discrimination 26 m
3.3 Range accuracy 1% of the maximum range of the scale in use or 10 m,
whichever is the greater
3.4 Bearing discrimination
X-band: 2.1° (XN12CF), 1.5° (XN20CF), 1.2° (XN24CF)
S-band: 2.8° (SN24CF), 2.5° (SN30CF), 2.0° (SN36CF)
3.5 Bearing accuracy ±1°
3.6 Range scale and Range ring interval (RI)
Range (NM) 0.125 0.25 0.5 0.75 1 1.5 2 3 4 6 8 12 16 24 32 48 72 96
RI (NM) 0.025 0.05 0.1 0.25 0.25 0.25 0.5 0.5 1 1 2 2 4 4 8 8 12 16
Number of rings 5 5 5 3 4 6 4 6 4 6 4 6 4 6 4 6 6 6
3.7 Warm-up time 3 min. approx. (solid state radar excluded)
3.8 Orientation mode Head-up RM, STAB head-up RM, Course-up RM, North-up RM
North-up TM, Stern-up RM
3.9 Stabilization mode Ground or sea stabilization
3.10 Target tracking (TT) Auto or manual acquisition: 200 targets in 32 NM
Auto tracking on all acquired targets,
Past position: 5/10 pts on all activated targets
Vector time: Off, 30 s, 1-60 min
3.11 AIS Capacity: 2000 targets,
Past position: 5/10 pts on all activated targets
Vector time: Off, 30 s, 1-60 min
3.12 Radar map 10 maps, 4,000 pts per map

SP - 2 E3616S02D-M
240131
FURUNO FAR-32x0/33x0 SERIES

3.13 Acquisition zone 2 zones

4 MONITOR UNIT
4.1 Screen type
MU-190 19-inch color LCD, 1280 x 1024 (SXGA)
MU-231 23.1-inch color LCD, 1600 x 1200 (UXGA)
MU-270W 27-inch color LCD, 1920 x 1200 (WUXGA)
HD19T22-FUD-MA4-FAGA (option, standard supply for FAR-3230S/3220-NXT HK config.)
19-inch color LCD, 1280 x 1024 (SXGA)
4.2 Brightness
MU-190 450 cd/m2 typical
MU-231/270W 400 cd/m2 typical
HD19T22 350 cd/m2 typical
4.3 Visible distance
MU-190/231/270W 1.02 m nominal
HD19T22 1.01 m nominal
4.4 Video interface DVI-D: DVI-standard, VESA-DDC2B
4.5 Brilliance control RS-485, serial data control (DDC sentence)

5 INTERFACE
5.1 Processor unit (EC-3000)
Number of port
Serial 7 ports (IEC61162-1/2: 4 ports, IEC61162-1: 3 ports)
Alarm output 6 ports: contact signal, load current 250mA
Normal close: 2, Normal open: 2,
System fail: 1 (n/c), Power fail: 1 (n/c)
DVI output 3 ports: DVI-D (2), DVI-I or RGB picture data (1 port for VDR)
USB 4 ports (3 ports for control units)
LAN 2 ports: Ethernet 1000Base-T for local communication
Digital input 1 port: contact signal, 100 ohm max. or 24VDC input
Data sentences (IEC61162-1/2)
Input ABK, ACK, ACN (ACM), ALR, CUR, DBT, DPT, DTM, GGA, GLL,
GNS, HBT, HDT, MTW, MWV, NRX, NSR, RMC, RRT, THS, VBW,
VDM, VDO, VDR, VHW, VSD, VTG, ZDA
Output ABM, ACK, ALC, ALF, ALR, ARC, BBM, EVE, HBT, OSD, RRT,
RSD, TLB, TTD, TTM, VSD
5.2 Sensor adapter (option)
MC-3000S (serial) 8 ports: I/O, IEC61162-1/2: 4 ports, IEC61162-1: 4 ports
MC-3010A (analog) 3 ports: Input, -10 to +10 V, 0 to 10 V or 4 to 20 mA
MC-3020D (digital-in) 8 ports: relay contact, logics set from program
MC-3030D (digital-out) 8 ports: relay contact, normal open and normal close available
5.3 Ethernet interface for IEC61162-450 (EC-3000)
Port (LAN2) 1000Base-T, IPv4, 8P8C connector
Data sentences Same as 5.1 sentences
IEC61162-450 transmission group
Input MISC, TGTD, SATD, NAVD, VDRD, RCOM, TIME, PROP,

SP - 3 E3616S02D-M
240131
FURUNO FAR-32x0/33x0 SERIES

USR1 to USR8
Output Arbitrary (default: TGTD)
Multicast address 239.192.0.1 to 239.192.0.16
Destination port 60001 to 60016
Re-transmittable binary image transfer
Multicast address 239.192.0.26 to 239.192.0.30
Destination port 60026 to 60030
Other network function excepted IEC61162-450
HTTP: *.*.*.*: 80, XML-RPC: *.*.*.*: 6403
Syslog: 239.192.0.254: 514
5.4 Ethernet interface for IEC61162-450 (MC-3000S)
Port 100Base-TX, IPv4, 8P8C connector
Maximum data rate 800 sps
Data sentences Output: XDR
IEC61162-450 transmission group
Input MISC, TGTD, SATD, NAVD, VDRD, RCOM, TIME, PROP,
USR1 to USR8
Output Arbitrary (default: MISC)
Multicast address 239.192.0.1 to 239.192.0.16
Destination port 60001 to 60016
Other network function excepted IEC61162-450
HTTP: *.*.*.*: 80, XML-RPC: *.*.*.*: 6403
Syslog: 239.192.0.254: 514

6 POWER SUPPLY
6.1 Power supply unit (w/ antenna and transceiver unit)
FAR-3210/3310 (X-band, 12 kW)
PSU-014 (24rpm) 100-230 VAC: 1.8-0.9 A, 1 phase, 50-60 Hz
PSU-014 (42rpm) 100-230 VAC: 2.5-1.2 A, 1 phase, 50-60 Hz
FAR-3220/3320/3320W (X-band, 25 kW)
PSU-014 (24rpm) 100-230 VAC: 2.0-1.0 A, 1 phase, 50-60 Hz
PSU-014 (42rpm) 100-230 VAC: 2.8-1.3 A, 1 phase, 50-60 Hz
FAR-3220-NXT/3320-NXT (X-band, SSD)
PSU-014 (24rpm) 100-230 VAC: 1.8-0.9 A, 1 phase, 50-60 Hz
PSU-014 (42rpm) 100-230 VAC: 2.5-1.2 A, 1 phase, 50-60 Hz
FAR-3230S/3330S/3330SW (S-band, magnetron)
PSU-014 (24rpm) 100-230 VAC: 2.8-1.3 A, 1 phase, 50-60 Hz
PSU-015 (42rpm) 100-230 VAC: 5.1-2.3 A, 1 phase, 50-60 Hz
FAR-3230S-SSD/3330S-SSD (S-band, SSD)
PSU-016 (24rpm) 100-230 VAC: 2.3-1.1 A, 1 phase, 50-60 Hz
PSU-018 (42rpm) 100-230 VAC: 4.7-2.1 A, 1 phase, 50-60 Hz
6.2 Processor unit (EC-3000) 100-115/220-230 VAC: 3.0/1.5 A, 1 phase, 50-60 Hz
6.3 Monitor unit
MU-190 100-230 VAC: 0.5-0.4 A, 1 phase, 50-60 Hz
MU-231 100-230 VAC: 0.7-0.4 A, 1 phase, 50-60 Hz
MU-270W 100-230 VAC: 0.6-0.4 A, 1 phase, 50-60 Hz

SP - 4 E3616S02D-M
240131
FURUNO FAR-32x0/33x0 SERIES

HD19T22-FUD-MA4-FAGA (option, standard supply for FAR-3230S/3220-NXT HK config.)

100-240 VAC: 0.8-0.3 A, 1 phase, 50/60 Hz or 24 VDC: 3.1 A
6.4 Sensor adapter (option) 24 VDC: 1.4 A (for 11 units), input to MC-3000S, the sources of
other sensor adapters are fed from MC-3000S
6.5 Switching HUB (option)
HUB-3000 100-230 VAC: 0.1 A max. 1 phase, 50/60 Hz
HUB-100 100-230 VAC: 0.1 A max. 1 phase, 50/60 Hz
6.6 Transformer (option) 440 VAC: 1 phase, 50/60 Hz
6.7 De-icer (option) 100-115/220-230 VAC: 2.6/1.3 A, 1 phase, 50-60 Hz

7 ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITIONS
7.1 Ambient temperature
Antenna unit -25°C to +55°C (storage: -25°C to +70°C)
Indoor units -15°C to +55°C
7.2 Relative humidity 95% or less at +40°C
7.3 Degree of protection
Antenna unit IP56
Processor unit IP20 (IP22: option)
Transceiver unit IP20
Control/ power supply unit IP22
Monitor unit IP22 (MU-190/231/270W), RAL9011 (HD19T22)
Sensor adapter IP20 (IP22: option)
HUB HUB-100: IP20, HUB-3000: IP22
7.4 Vibration IEC 60945 Ed.4

8 UNIT COLOR
8.1 Antenna unit N9.5
8.2 Power supply unit N2.5
8.3 Processor unit N2.5
8.4 Transceiver unit N2.5
8.5 Control unit N2.5
8.6 Monitor unit N2.5 (MU-190/231/270W), RAL9011 (HD19T22)
8.7 HUB HUB-100: N3.0, HUB-3000: N2.5
8.8 Radar console 2.5GY5/1.5 (standard), 7.5BG7/2, 2.5G7/2, N7.5

9 PERFORMANCE MONITOR
9.1 PM-32 (X-band, MAG)
Frequency range 9380 to 9440 MHz
Input power +18 dBm to +30 dBm
Output power -21 dBm (1st pulse max. output), -41 dBm (1st pulse min. output)
Step level 8 to 12 dB (1st pulse to last pulse)
9.2 PM-32B (X-band, SSD)
Frequency range 9423.75 ±1.6 MHz
Input power +6 dBm to +25 dBm
Output power -35 dBm (1st pulse max. output), -66 dBm (1st pulse min. output)
Step level 8 to 12 dB (1st pulse to last pulse)

SP - 5 E3616S02D-M
240131
FURUNO FAR-32x0/33x0 SERIES

9.3 PM-52A (S-band, MAG)

Frequency range 3040 to 3080 MHz
Input power +25 dBm to +40 dBm
Output power -38 dBm (1st pulse max. output), -58 dBm (1st pulse min. output)
Step level 8 to 12 dB (1st pulse to last pulse)
9.4 PM-52B (S-band, SSD)
Frequency range 3063.75 ±2 MHz
Input power +5 dBm to +25 dBm
Output power -52 dBm (1st pulse max. output), -72 dBm (1st pulse min. output)
Step level 8 to 12 dB (1st pulse to last pulse)

SP - 6 E3616S02D-M
240131
INDEX
A Alert box ............................... 2-63, 6-12, 20-2
A/C RAIN control....................................... 2-5 Alert list ................................................... 20-7
A/C SEA control ........................................ 2-3 Alert log ................................................. 20-10
ACQ/ACT key............................................ 4-6 Alert parameters page............................. 12-8
Acquisition zone Alert state icon ........................................ 20-4
acknowledging alarm for ......................... 3-5 Alerts
deactivating ............................................. 3-5 acknowledging ...................................... 20-6
sleeping ................................................... 3-5 alert list .................................................. 20-7
stabilization ............................................. 3-5 alert log ............................................... 20-10
AIO alert state icons ..................................... 20-4
chart cells .............................................. 9-10 buzzer silencing..................................... 20-5
chart object information ......................... 9-10 buzzer stop button................................. 20-5
displaying ................................................ 9-9 definition ................................................ 20-1
information to display ............................ 9-11 message format..................................... 20-3
information to display (S57) .................. 10-4 Anchor watch ............................... 2-60, 15-10
AIS Antenna marker....................................... 2-39
association ............................................ 4-15 ARCS charts
association, conditions for ............ 4-14, 18-9 license restoring .................................... 7-12
automatic activation of targets ................ 4-6 Area report ............................................ 13-16
automatic target activation (chart mode) .. 18-6 Association..................................... 4-14, 18-9
CPA/TCPA alarm .................................. 4-11 Automatic Clutter Elimination (ACE)
deleting received and sent safety function...................................................... 2-9
messages .............................................. 17-3
B
filtering targets......................................... 4-6
Barge marker .......................................... 2-38
filtering targets (chart mode) ................. 18-5
Basic setting page ..................................... 8-3
function off............................................... 4-2
Bearing measurement
hiding....................................................... 4-3 chart ...................................................... 6-21
lost target .............................................. 4-12 radar, chart radar................................... 2-24
lost target alert ...................................... 4-12 BRILL control ............................................ 1-8
Lost target alert filter (chart mode) ........ 18-7 Brilliance
lost target filter....................................... 4-13 AIS symbol ............................................ 4-11
messages, displaying ............................ 4-18 AIS symbol brilliance ............................. 4-11
messages, receiving ............................. 4-18 backlight .................................................. 1-8
messages, transmitting ................ 4-16, 4-17 monitor .................................................... 1-8
own ship data (chart mode)................... 18-9 screen data ........................................... 2-41
past position display .............................. 4-13 TT symbol................................................ 3-8
pop-up info .............................................. 4-8 Buzzer stop button .................................. 20-5
received and sent safety messages 17-2, 17-3
ROT tag limit ......................................... 4-19 C
scaled symbol ....................................... 4-20 CCRP ...................................................... 2-57
sending safety messages...................... 17-1 CCRP page ........................................... 22-17
showing ................................................... 4-3 CCRS ...................................................... 16-1
sleeping activated targets (chart mode) ... 18-6 Chart alerts
sleeping targets ....................................... 4-7 introduction............................................ 11-1
symbol brilliance.................................... 4-11 objects used in ...................................... 11-3
symbol color .......................................... 4-12 own ship check...................................... 11-4
symbols ................................................... 4-3 route planning ....................................... 11-5
Chart cells
symbols (chart mode)............................ 18-4
catalog of............................................... 7-15
target data (basic) ................................... 4-8
deleting.................................................. 7-18
target data (chart mode)............... 18-7, 18-8
editing.................................................... 7-18
target data (expanded) .......................... 4-10
grouping ................................................ 7-17
vectors................................................... 4-14
status..................................................... 7-19
voyage data.................................. 4-15, 18-4
Chart database (chart radar) ................... 2-70
voyage data (chart mode) ..................... 18-4

IN-1
INDEX

Chart database button .............................8-12 Customize page .....................................22-10

CHART DISP button ................................2-67 Customized echo
Chart display indications ..........................1-14 editing.....................................................2-15
Chart legend restoring to factory default settings ........2-17
C-MAP....................................................10-2 restoring to saved settings .....................2-17
S57...........................................................9-2 selection .................................................2-14
Chart objects (chart radar)
D
custom sets of ........................................2-69
Danger targets log
CHART ON/OFF button ...........................2-66
viewing .................................................19-10
Chart radar display indications.................1-13
Data sharing.............................................22-9
Chart scale ...............................................6-16
Deep contour .............................................8-1
Chart scale indication (chart radar) ..........2-71
Depth sensor..........................................16-15
Chart synchronization
Details log ................................................19-6
select units to synchronize .....................7-28
Display date ...............................................9-4
synchronization status............................7-28
Display test page ...................................22-11
Chart usage log........................................19-9
Divider
Charts
activating ..............................................15-14
cell deleting ............................................7-18
characteristics ......................................15-15
cell editing ..............................................7-18
limitations .............................................15-15
Check area page............................ 11-4, 15-7
Doppler feature ........................................2-62
Check results page ................................12-11
Drop mark
Circle report ...........................................13-16
bearing reference ...................................2-59
Clearing line report.................................13-15
erasing ...................................................2-60
C-MAP charts
hiding......................................................2-59
cartographic services .............................10-1
inscribing ................................................2-59
catalog of chart cells ..............................7-15
showing ..................................................2-59
chart cell grouping..................................7-17
Dual radar ................................................2-51
chart cell status ......................................7-19
Dynamic trial maneuver ...........................3-20
chart legend ...........................................10-2
database deletion...................................7-11 E
database installation ................................7-7 EBL
deleting...................................................7-22 bearing measurement on chart ..............6-21
eToken registration ..................................7-7 bearing measurement on radar,
export list of............................................7-11 chart radar..............................................2-24
install/update history ..............................7-14 bearing reference on chart .....................6-21
license installation ....................................7-9 bearing reference on radar, chart radar ....2-25
opening ..................................................7-19 context-sensitive menu on chart ............6-22
permit status...........................................7-13 hiding on chart........................................6-21
update file, applying ...............................7-10 offsetting on radar, chart radar...............2-25
update file, generating............................7-10 showing on chart ....................................6-21
COG/SOG page .......................................16-4 EBL OFFSET key........................... 2-25, 2-27
Color differentiation test (S57 charts) ....25-10 EBL, VRM boxes......................................6-12
Context-sensitive menu Echo area.................................................2-64
EBL, VRM on chart ................................6-22 Echo averaging ..........................................2-8
radar.......................................................1-26 Echo color ................................................2-64
radar, chart radar ...................................1-24 Echo stretch ...............................................2-8
Context-sensitive menus Echo-referenced speed..............................3-2
chart .......................................................6-13 ENC charts
Controls......................................................1-1 AIO display...............................................9-9
Cost parameters ......................................21-3 catalog of chart cells ..............................7-15
Course-up mode ......................................2-19 chart cell grouping..................................7-17
CPA/TCPA alarm chart cell status ......................................7-19
AIS .........................................................4-11 chart installation .......................................7-3
TT...........................................................3-17 clearing...................................................7-32
Cursor attributes ......................................2-39 deleting...................................................7-22
Cursor position box ENC coverage indication........................7-23
chart .......................................................6-18 ENC list export .......................................7-11
radar, chart radar ...................................1-27 ENC permit display ................................7-12
Curved EBL..............................................2-40 export list of............................................7-11

IN-2
 INDEX

install/update history ............................. 7-14 K

license backup ...................................... 7-12 Keyboard test page ............................... 22-12
license deletion ....................................... 7-5 L
license installation, automatic ................. 7-2
Label report ........................................... 13-16
license installation, manual ..................... 7-3
Line report ............................................. 13-15
license restore ....................................... 7-12
Lost target alert ....................................... 3-19
manual updates..................................... 7-23
AIS ........................................................ 4-13
opening ................................................. 7-19
permit status.......................................... 7-13 M
publishers notes .................................... 7-22 Magnetron reset ...................................... 2-56
reconverting .......................................... 7-30 Mains switch.............................................. 1-6
Manual updates
F
deleting update symbols........................ 7-25
Fallback arrangements.......................... 25-11 inserting new update symbols ............... 7-24
File export page ...................................... 22-2 modifying existing update symbols........ 7-26
Filter status............................................ 16-10 Mariner page ........................................... 8-10
Full user chart report ............................. 13-14 Mini conning display.............................. 24-11
Full WPT report ..................................... 12-30 MOB position........................................... 1-31
G N
GAIN control.............................................. 2-3 Navigation data ....................................... 16-8
Gate-1 Navtex
chart selection (for installation) ............. 7-30 deleting messages ................................ 17-5
charts,licenses installation .................... 7-31 receiving messages............................... 17-4
license installation ................................. 7-31 Noise rejector .......................................... 2-11
General page ............................................ 8-6 North marker ........................................... 2-37
H North-up mode ........................................ 2-20
Heading input ................................. 1-30, 6-29 Notes on radar, chart radar ..................... 2-73
Heading line ............................................ 2-37 O
Head-up mode ........................................ 2-19 odometer resetting .................................. 6-37
Head-up TB mode................................... 2-19 Off center display (radar) ........................ 2-28
HL OFF key............................................. 2-37 OFF CENTER key................................... 2-28
I Offset EBL
INDEX LINE key...................................... 2-32 origin point............................................. 2-26
Indications usage .................................................... 2-25
chart display .......................................... 1-14 Operating mode ...................................... 6-16
chart radar display................................. 1-13 Operator’s manual................................... 1-37
radar display.......................................... 1-11 Optimize page .............................. 12-8, 12-19
Information box Other sensors page................................. 16-5
nav data ................................................ 2-43 Overlay/NAV Tools box
nav data selection ................................. 2-45 anchor watch ....................................... 15-10
route information ................................... 2-44 check area page.................................... 15-7
Instant access bar PI (parallel index) page ......................... 15-1
chart display ............................................ 6-6 predictor ................................................ 15-9
radar, chart radar .................................. 1-17 ring ........................................................ 15-8
Instant Track UKC..................................................... 15-11
parameters ............................................ 21-4 Overlay/Nav Tools box ............................ 6-12
Instant track Own ship functions box ........................... 6-10
back to track .......................................... 14-9 Own ship marker ..................................... 2-37
button label.......................................... 14-13
details.................................................. 14-11 P
messages ............................................ 14-10 Palette button ............................................ 1-7
monitoring ........................................... 14-11 Parallel index lines
safe off track.......................................... 14-8 activating, deactivating .......................... 15-5
stopping monitoring ............................. 14-12 bearing reference ......................... 2-33, 15-5
Interference rejector .................................. 2-7 displaying .............................................. 2-32
Interswitch ............................................... 2-48 erasing .................................................. 2-32
interval................................................... 15-6
length adjustment ......................... 2-35, 15-7

IN-3
INDEX

line interval .............................................2-33 map points used.......................................5-3

line orientation........................................2-32 mark entry ................................................5-2
mode ............................................ 2-34, 15-5 radar map no............................................5-4
number of lines to display ......................15-5 route display...........................................5-14
number to show......................................2-33 showing ....................................................5-1
orientation ..............................................15-6 Radar overlay
resetting ....................................... 2-34, 15-6 errors in ........................................ 15-3, 15-4
Passage plan report ...............................12-31 Rain clutter adjustment
Past position display automatic..................................................2-5
AIS .........................................................4-13 manual .....................................................2-6
TT...........................................................3-15 Range and bearing between two targets.....2-27
Performance monitor ...............................2-54 Range measurement
Permanent warning box ...........................6-12 chart .......................................................6-21
Permanent warnings radar.......................................................2-22
C-MAP charts.........................................10-3 radar, chart radar ...................................2-22
S57 charts ................................................9-3 Range selection .......................................2-21
Permit status ............................................7-13 Range/Presentation mode box.................2-18
PI (parallel index) page ............................15-1 Recording
Position chart usage log.......................................19-9
alignment..............................................16-13 danger targets log ................................19-10
primary and secondary...........................16-7 details log ...............................................19-6
source ....................................................16-6 position events .......................................19-3
Position events.........................................19-3 user events.............................................19-1
Position offset (radar)...............................1-32 voyage log..............................................19-7
POSN page ..............................................16-4 Reports
Power switch ..............................................1-6 area ......................................................13-16
Predictor......................................... 2-40, 15-9 circle.....................................................13-16
Presentation library ....................................9-7 clearing line ..........................................13-15
Presentation mode full user chart........................................13-14
chart .......................................................6-17 Full WPT ..............................................12-30
radar, chart radar ...................................2-18 label......................................................13-16
Printing line........................................................13-15
cell status list..........................................7-21 passage plan........................................12-31
chart list..................................................7-20 tidal.......................................................13-14
S57 chart object information ....................9-8 WPT table ............................................12-29
Processor Unit EC-3000 ............................1-5 Ring page.................................................15-8
Program nos. ...........................................1-37 Route bank.............................................12-17
Public key (ENC charts) .............................7-1 Route information box ..............................6-11
Publishers notes ......................................7-22 Route page ................................................8-9
Pulse length Route transfer log ..................................19-12
changing...................................................2-3 Routes
selection ...................................................2-2 adding waypoints at end of route .........12-12
R changing waypoint position ..................12-11
creating new...........................................12-4
Radar Control Unit RCU-025 .....................1-1
deleting.................................................12-24
Radar display indications .........................1-11
Radar map deleting waypoints................................12-12
copying individual marks and lines...........5-7 exporting FAR-3xx0 data .....................12-23
copying marks and lines in an area..........5-7 exporting FEA-2x07, csv, ASCII data...12-23
copying marks and lines to another map file...5-8 full WPT report .....................................12-30
erasing all marks and lines in a map file ..5-6 importing csv, ASCII data.....................12-22
erasing individual marks and lines ...........5-5 importing FEA-2x07 data .....................12-21
erasing marks and lines in an area ..........5-5 importing FMD-3xx0, FCR-2xx9 data...12-21
exporting ..................................................5-9 inserting waypoint ................................12-12
features on/off ........................................5-13 optimizing .............................................12-19
hiding........................................................5-1 overview in planning...............................12-1
importing ................................................5-10 passage plan report .............................12-31
line entry...................................................5-2 route bank ............................................12-17
map comment ..........................................5-4 SAR......................................................12-14
selecting for monitoring ..........................14-1

IN-4
 INDEX

selecting route components to display .. 14-4 Standard page........................................... 8-4

stopping monitoring ............................... 14-4 Static trial maneuver ............................... 3-20
switching monitored to planning ............ 14-7 Status bar
transfer ................................................ 12-25 chart display ............................................ 6-4
user chart page (route planning) ........... 12-7 radar, chart radar................................... 1-15
Waypoints page (monitoring) ................ 14-5 STBY TX button ........................................ 2-1
waypoints page (route planning) ........... 12-6 Stern marker ........................................... 2-37
WPT table ........................................... 12-29 T
S TARGET DATA key .................................. 4-8
S57 charts Target list (TT, AIS) ................................. 3-12
chart legend ............................................ 9-2 TARGET LIST key .................................. 3-12
chart object information ........................... 9-8 Targets page ........................................... 8-11
chart update approval ............................. 9-6 Tidal report ............................................ 13-14
display date ............................................. 9-4 Time ........................................................ 1-32
permanent warnings................................ 9-3 Tips ................................................ 1-38, 6-24
presentation library.................................. 9-7 Track
symbols used in ...................................... 9-7 erasing .................................................. 5-14
update review date .................................. 9-4 setup ..................................................... 5-13
Safety contour .................................. 8-1, 11-2 Trackball Control Unit RCU-026................ 1-4
Safety depth .............................................. 8-1 Trackball maintenance ............................ 25-4
SAR route.............................................. 12-14 Tracking page ........................................... 8-7
SART TRAIL key ............................................... 2-30
introduction............................................ 2-61 Trails
receiving ................................................ 2-61 color ...................................................... 2-31
Screen scroll in true motion mode........... 2-21 indications ............................................. 2-29
Screenshots level of afterglow ................................... 2-31
capturing screen.................................... 1-33 own ship’s ............................................. 2-31
deleting................................................ 22-15 resetting ................................................ 2-30
exporting ............................................. 22-15 suppressing trails around own ship ....... 2-31
Screenshots page ................................. 22-14 trail stabilization in true motion .............. 2-30
Sea clutter adjustment trail time................................................. 2-30
automatic................................................. 2-4 true or relative ....................................... 2-29
manual .................................................... 2-4 Trial maneuver
Second-trace echoes .............................. 2-17 dynamic trial .......................................... 3-20
Self test page .......................................... 22-5 procedure .............................................. 3-21
Sensor information box .................... 1-20, 6-9 static trial ............................................... 3-20
Sensor information, datum box ............... 1-20 terminating ............................................ 3-24
Sensor set (system, local) ....................... 1-27 trip meter resetting .................................. 6-37
Sensors menu ......................................... 16-2 True motion mode ................................... 2-20
Set and drift............................................. 3-16 True motion reset .................................... 6-19
Settings menu ......................................... 1-33 TT
accessing .............................................. 22-1 acquisition zone ............................... 3-4, 3-5
CCRP .................................................. 22-17 alert list .................................................. 3-26
customize page ................................... 22-10 association ................................. 4-15, 18-10
display test page ................................. 22-11 automatic acquisition............................... 3-3
file export page...................................... 22-2 automatic acquisition zone ...................... 3-4
file import page...................................... 22-3 CPA/TCPA alarm .................................. 3-17
file maintenance page ........................... 22-4 data display ........................................... 3-10
keyboard test page.............................. 22-12 hiding....................................................... 3-1
screenshots page ................................ 22-14 lost target alert ...................................... 3-19
self test page ......................................... 22-5 lost target alert filter (chart mode) ......... 18-3
user default page ................................ 22-16 manual acquisition................................... 3-5
Shallow contour......................................... 8-1 past position display .............................. 3-15
Ship and route parameters...................... 21-1 past positions, attributes (chart mode) .. 18-3
Shuttle ferry mode................................... 2-65 pop-up info ............................................ 3-11
SPD page................................................ 16-3 showing ................................................... 3-1
Speed input .................................... 1-28, 6-27 simulation mode .................................... 3-25
Split screen ............................................. 6-24 static trial maneuver .............................. 3-20

IN-5
INDEX

symbol brilliance.......................................3-8 range measurement on chart .................6-21

symbol color .............................................3-9 range measurement on radar, chart radar.2-22
symbol color (chart mode)......................18-1 showing on chart ....................................6-21
symbol size (chart mode) .......................18-1 W
symbols ....................................................3-7
Watch alert ...............................................2-42
symbols (chart mode).............................18-1
Wave data ................................................2-44
target data (chart mode).........................18-2
Wave mode ..............................................2-47
target list.................................................3-12
Wave stabilization ....................................2-46
terminating a trial maneuver...................3-24 Waypoints page
terminating tracking on target...................3-7 route monitoring .....................................14-5
trial maneuver ........................................3-20 route planning ........................................12-6
trial maneuver procedure .......................3-21 Wind sensor ...........................................16-13
vector .....................................................3-15 Wiper........................................................2-11
TUNE button ..............................................2-1 WPT table report .............12-29, 12-30, 12-31
Tuning
automatic..................................................2-1 Z
initializing..................................................2-1 Zoom ........................................................2-36
manual .....................................................2-2
U
UKC page
setting...................................................15-11
UKC window.........................................15-12
UKC window ..........................................15-12
Undo .............................................. 12-5, 13-7
User chart page
route planning ........................................12-7
User charts
area report............................................13-16
circle report ..........................................13-16
clearing line report................................13-15
creating ..................................................13-4
deleting.................................................13-13
deleting objects from ..............................13-9
editing objects on ...................................13-8
full report ..............................................13-14
importing ..............................................13-11
information in route monitoring...............14-6
label report ...........................................13-16
line report .............................................13-15
notes ......................................................13-6
route monitoring ...................................13-17
selecting objects to display ..................13-10
tidal report ............................................13-14
User default page...................................22-16
User events ..............................................19-1
User profiles ................................... 1-33, 1-34
V
VECTOR MODE key................................3-15
VECTOR TIME key ..................................3-15
Vectors
own ship .................................................2-38
target ......................................................2-38
Voyage log
conditions for logging .............................19-9
viewing ...................................................19-8
VRM
context-sensitive menu on chart ............6-22
hiding on chart........................................6-21

IN-6